H* Fin 3-7B 3, JM, ~7Vw<^Rq

- h* Fin 3-7b 3, JM, ~7Vw<^rQ/ HEADQUARTERS {) J CM 71.0 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY f l"0 CßfH

m wê, ■■ m i% s

£ 5

V X sm

ÿÇ^Si

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

1 Uc.í-> *■ / Arj'iîi '.Viîir. ■ 'i k:'/‘ '' i-'erÀaS'-^ 1tfÿasniïigîor’c, uwnf- ¿0310"ö0öß. t

I P Pm s-fa ‘SjjjJL i tüïïV^ôS / *FM 71-3

Field Manual Headquarters No. 71-3 Department of the Army Washington, DC, 8 January 1996

THE ARMORED AND MECHANIZED INFANTRY BRIGADE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Preface ii

Chapter 1 The Brigade 1-1 Chapter 2 Fundamentals of Brigade Operations 2-1 Chapter 3 Battle Command 3-1 Chapter 4 Offensive Operations 4-1 Chapter 5 Defensive Operations 5-1 Chapter 6 Other Tactical Operations 6-1 Chapter 7 Support of Combat Operations 7-1 Chapter 8 Combat Service Support 8-1 Appendix A Operations Other Than War A-l Appendix B Joint and Multinational Operations B-l Appendix C Armored Operations with Light Infantry and Special Operations Forces C-l Appendix D Movement and Assembly Areas D-l Appendix E Digitization of the Combined Arms Brigade E-l Appendix F Fratricide Prevention F-l Appendix G Brigade PREPO AFLOAT Operations G-l Appendix H Tactical Standing Operating Procedures H-l Appendix I Decision Making 1-1 Glossary Glossary-1 References.. References-1 Index Index-1

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

*This publication supersedes FM 71-3,11 May 1988.

i FM 71-3

PREFACE

FM 71-3 describes the employment of the armored and mechanized infantry brigade through full dimension operations as outlined in FM 100-5. This manual is intended to assist brigade commanders, their staffs, and subordinate commanders in planning and conducting brigade operations. Familiarity with FM 100-5 and FM 71-100 is essential to use this manual.

Incorporated in this manual are tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) for the tactical employment of the armored and mechanized brigade and tactical standing operating procedures (TSOP). FM 71-3 is the foundation for the continuing development of TTPs. The TSOP is generic and is intended for use by any armored and mechanized infantry brigade.

The proponent of this publication is TRADOC. Send comments and recommendations on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) directly to Commandant, USAARMS, ATSB-SBD-D, Fort Knox, Kentucky 40121-5200.

The term “armored” applies to armor and mechanized infantry forces where employed.

Unless otherwise stated, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men. FM 71-3

CHAPTER 1 THE BRIGADE

Armored and mechanized brigades are organized to fight successful engagements in conventional and various operations other than war (OOTW) activities. They are subordinate commands of a division and corps and perform major tactical operations as part of a division or corps operation. Regardless of the threat environment, the key to victory is to impose our will on the enemy by forcing him to conform to the brigade's desired end state. This requires the brigade commander and staff to identify the decisive point(s) and synchronize the efforts of subordinate maneuver battalions, combat support (CS), combat service support (CSS), and available higher headquarters' combat power in support of the brigade effort.

CONTENTS Page Section I. Mission, Capabilities, and Limitations. .. 1-1 Section II. Organization and Functions .. 1-2 Section III. Army Operations .. 1-5

Section IV. Brigade Battlefield Focus ..1-10 Section V. The Threat Environment ..1-11

SECTION I. MISSION, CAPABILITIES, AND LIMITATIONS

MISSION multinational headquarters in peacetime and conflict environments. The primary mission of the brigade is to deploy on short notice and destroy, CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS capture, or repel enemy forces, using maneuver and shock effect. Brigades also The brigade has special capabilities conduct various OOTW activities, and limitations. Table 1-1 shows the independently or as part of a joint or capabilities and limitations of the brigade.

1-1 FM 71-3

Table 1-1. Brigade capabilities and limitations.

Brigade Capabilities Brigade Limitations

Conducts sustained combat operations with proper Mobility and firepower are restricted by— augmentation. o Urban areas, o Dense jungles and forces, o Very steep and rugged terrain, o Significant water obstacles.

Accomplishes rapid movement and deep penetrations. Strategic mobility is limited by heavy equipment.

Exploits success and pursues a defeated enemy as part Consumption of Classes III, V, and IX supplies is of a larger formation. extremely high.

Conducts security operations for a larger force.

Conducts defensive, retrograde, and other operations.

Conducts offensive operations.

Conducts operations with light and special operations forces.

Conducts OOTW.

Deploys rapidly onto pre-positioned equipment.

SECTION II. ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONS

BRIGADES The functions of brigades are to— Brigades are organized as follows: • Perform tactical tasks under the • As a combination of armored and command of a division, corps, or mechanized infantry battalions. a joint task force headquarters. • Oftentimes composed with an • Participate in division or corps aviation battalion or task force. operations according to the principles and concepts in • Occasionally composed of a light FM 71-100 and FM 100-15. infantry battalion, and other supporting units grouped under the • Task organize as directed. command of a brigade headquarters. The only permanent unit assigned to • CS and CSS units are task a brigade is its headquarters and organized to the brigade as headquarters company (HHC) (see necessary. Figure 1-1). For an example of a • Brigades normally operate as part divisional brigade task organized, see of a division or corps. Figure 1-2.

1-2 FM 71-3

m X CD

o wo EM ASG 20 0 64 84

BDE HQ SI SEC S2SEC S3 SEC S4 SEC SEC

O WO Ri 0 WO Bfl O WO Bi O WO EM O WO Bi 2 0 3 1 0 3 3 0 9 7 0 11 3 O 4

CO HQ SEC MAINT SEC MESS SEC COMMO SEC UNIT MINISTRY TEAM

O WO Bi O WO EM O WO Bi 0 WO EM 0 WO EM 2 0 6 0 0 10 0 0 6 1 0 11 1 0 1 Figure 1-1. A divisional brigade headquarters and headquarters company organization.

—

DS r r ■ . - -M • . i i SIG MP SPT i ^ ■ h « « v « a ■ LL. ’ DS DS "bs"

HHC MED

S&T MAINT

Figure 1-2. Sample divisional brigade task organized.

1-3 1

FM 71-3

SEPARATE BRIGADES • Armored and mechanized infantry battalions. Separate brigades normally conduct • An armored cavalry troop. operations under corps command, and are organized to provide their own support. • An engineer battalion. The enhanced brigades of the Army • A military intelligence (MI) company. National Guard are separate brigades. • A support battalion of several Their only enhancement is in an support units with the added ability authorized over structure in personnel. to link directly with corps support These brigades have a formal training command for augmentation. association with corps and divisions to further enhance their training readiness. • A FA battalion to provide fire Units organic to the separate brigade support (FS). include— Additional combat, CS, and CSS units • A brigade HHC to provide may be attached to a separate brigade as command and control. required by the brigade's mission and operating circumstances. The separate • Limited CS assets to include brigade may be attached to a division (less military police (MP), chemical, and support), but is usually controlled by a air defense elements. corps (see Figures 1-3 and 1-4).

CUD CsD HHC Ml • •

S G MP GzD SPT DS G3I HHC MED

S&T MA NT

Figure 1-3. Separate brigade organization.

1-4 7

FM 71-3

HHC

TAC CMD CMD GP S2SEC S3 SEC COMMO

CO HQ/LSA FOOD MAINT SEC SI SEC SEC S4SEC

UMT

Figure 1-4. Headquarters and headquarters company armor separate brigade.

SECTION III. ARMY OPERATIONS

Army operations doctrine describes organization of the battlefield (deep, our approach to generating and applying close, and rear). Deep and rear operations combat power at the operational and are essential to winning close operations. tactical levels. It is based on securing or The brigade commander develops his retaining the initiative and exercising it intent and accepts risks to achieve aggressively to accomplish the mission. decisive results. He secures the initiative Brigade commanders and staffs must and conducts operations to impose his will understand the brigade's mission in on the enemy. The commander maneuvers relationship to the operational plan the brigade to position strength against (OPLAN) as they fight engagements and weakness, throw the enemy off balance, participate in battles as part of the tactical and synchronize combat power to battlefield. It consists of the brigade's area complete the enemy's defeat or of operations (AO), battle space, and destruction.

1-5

> FM 71-3

The brigade commander must agility, and staying power in all weather understand the intent of the division conditions and climates capable of seizing commander and the corps commander to and exploiting the initiative. Initiative properly employ his forces. Additionally, implies an offensive spirit when the brigade commander’s intent must be conducting an operation. To do this, the understood by his subordinates two levels brigade commander trains subordinates to down. Brigade tactics emphasize the use take risks and to be bold, innovative, and of fire and maneuver to destroy, delay, or aggressive. By understanding the intent of disrupt enemy forces. Commanders and the next two higher commanders, the staffs must integrate and synchronize a brigade commander may confidently variety of functions to generate operate with mission-type orders and overwhelming combat power at the exploit success. The brigade commander decisive point(s). While this is critical sets the terms of battle by— during war, it is equally important in all environments. • Conducting an estimate of the

I situation to quickly gather the The brigade commander sets the essentials of the tactical situation. conditions for success. He then uses all of his precision organic and supporting • Implementing a decision-making systems at maximum capability to meet process that rapidly provides clear, these conditions. Maneuver, then, is concise orders to subordinate employed to decisively defeat the enemy battalion commanders and staffs. with minimum risk to his soldiers. • Incorporating intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB) to support ARMY OPERATION TENETS the decision-making process and the construction of the decision The tenets of Army operations apply support template (DST). IPB helps throughout the full range of military refine the priority information operations. Success on the battlefield, or requirements (PIR). during OOTW, depends on the brigade's ability to fight in accordance with (IAW) • Designing tactical plans that the five basic tenets of Army operations: provide a reserve force poised to strike the enemy in depth, conduct • Initiative. counterattacks, and occupy flank or positions in depth. • Depth. • Agility. • Conducting quick decision making • Synchronization. from existing combat orders and • Versatility. issuing fragmentary orders (FRAGO) based on common Initiative operational procedures and control measures to adjust to changing Initiative is the ability to set or change situations and to exploit opportunities. the terms of battle by action. The armored force is the only force with the mobility, In the future, automated command and lethality, shock effect, survivability, control systems will provide commanders

1-6 FM 71-3 with the ability to see their forces in accurate information on the enemy that relation to the enemy. This information, can be used to plan maneuver and fires. and a clear understanding of the higher CS systems like the M109A6 Paladin and commander's intent, will allow enhanced mortars provide the commander commanders to rapidly identify and with the ability to synchronize and exploit tactical opportunities. maintain sustained accurate fires for deep and close targets simultaneously. Depth Agility Depth is the extension of operations in time, space, and resources. Brigade Agility is the ability of friendly forces commanders and staffs must forecast and to react faster than the enemy and is a anticipate events so the enemy is attacked prerequisite for seizing and holding the simultaneously throughout the entire initiative. Agility requires flexible depth of the battlefield. The brigade organizations and quick-minded, flexible commander uses depth by— leaders who can act faster than the enemy to retain the initiative. At brigade level • Synchronizing combat and CS this means— assets to isolate enemy formations and to deny the enemy commander an opportunity to generate combat • Defining responsibilities among the power. tactical command post (TAC CP), • Developing comprehensive plans the main CP, and the rear CP to for the security of the brigade rear streamline command and control area against Level I, II, and III procedures that reduce decision- threats. making time. • Employing formations that enhance • Positioning the TAC CP and the depth, security, and agility. command group forward to see and • Aggressively employing internal control the battle. reconnaissance and security assets. • Using IPB to predict probable • Attacking the enemy beyond the enemy intentions and to operate forward edge of the battle area within the enemy decision cycle. (FEBA) with indirect fires, . close • Using well-defined standing air support (CAS), electronic operating procedures (SOP) to warfare (EW), and attack provide accurate reporting and helicopters. rapid reaction on the battlefield. • Developing a logistics plan to This includes adjusting CS and CSS support brigade operations. assets when the maneuver plan or task organization changes. Automated command and control • Training the brigade staff and systems and CS assets enhance the assigned battalions to respond maneuver brigade's ability to attack enemy quickly to changing situations with forces with precision and in depth. The minimum guidance, while remaining all-source analysis system (ASAS) consistent with the commander's provides maneuver commanders with intent.

1-7 FM 71-3

Automated command and control • Allowing decentralized execution systems and FS and surveillance systems of operations. provide commanders the ability to quickly • Using synchronization tools. access information on friendly combat and logistical capability and the capabilities of • Conducting rehearsals. the enemy in near real time. This capability allows commanders to control Versatility the tempo of military operations in a manner that allows his forces to exploit Versatility is the ability of a brigade to the situation. shift focus, to tailor forces, and to move rapidly and efficiently from one mission to Synchronization another. Versatility implies a capacity to be multifunctional, to operate through the Synchronization is arranging activities full range of military operations. At the in time and space to mass the effects of brigade level, versatility requires— combat power at the decisive time and place. The product of effective • Understanding the commander's synchronization is maximum use of every intent two levels up. resource to make the greatest contribution • Anticipating major changes based to success. Brigades synchronize their on the tactical and political operations by— situation. • Providing clearly defined objectives • Ensuring that IEW operations are and guidance to subordinates. linked to the commander’s requirements and respond in time • Conducting detailed planning in to influence decisions and depth. operations. • Improvising as needed. • Designating and resourcing the • Applying the military decision- brigade main effort. making process and principles. • Coordinating and integrating CS and CSS assets. GENERATING COMBAT POWER • Using the logistics estimate to ensure adequate resources are Maneuver, firepower, protection, and available and allocated. leadership comprise the dynamics of combat power. Combat power is the effect • Rapidly massing combat power created by combining the four dynamics in effects at the decisive point to combat action against an enemy. achieve local surprise, mass, and Commanders generate combat power by shock effect without lengthy anticipating future operations and, once explanations or orders. committed, applying the dynamics of • Planning in advance to exploit the combat power. Information about enemy opportunities created by tactical and friendly forces capabilities is key to success. generating and sustaining combat power.

1-8 FM 71-3

Maneuver measures such as camouflaging, fortifying fighting positions, con- Maneuver is the employment of forces ducting security and recon- on the battlefield through movement, naissance activities, and enforcing supported by fire or fire potential, to strict operations security (OPSEC) achieve a position of advantage in respect standards. to the enemy in order to accomplish the mission. It is the means of concentrating • The second component includes forces at decisive points to achieve conducting.and maintaining all CSS surprise, psychological shock, physical activities to keep soldiers healthy momentum, and dominance. Maneuver and to maintain their fighting and firepower are complementary morale. dynamics of combat power. Although one might dominate a phase of the battle, the synchronized effects of both characterize • The third component is safety. all operations. Commanders enforce safety procedures in training, planning, and conducting operations to Firepower preserve combat power.

Firepower provides the destructive • The fourth component is the force essential to destroying the enemy's prevention of fratricide. Com- ability and will to fight. Firepower manders seek to lower the proba- includes the focusing and resourcing of bility of fratricide while not overly direct and indirect fires (lethal and constricting boldness and audacity nonlethal), and other combat multipliers in combat by planning, rehearsing, with maneuver to destroy the enemy. and controlling direct and indirect fires. Protection Leadership Protection conserves the fighting potential of a force so commanders can The most essential dynamic of combat apply it at the decisive time and place. It power is competent and confident has four components: leadership. Leaders determine the degree to which maneuver, firepower, and protection are maximized, effectively • The first component counters the balanced, and brought against the enemy. enemy's firepower and maneuver by Commanders at all levels develop tactical making soldiers, systems, and units and technical leaders by stressing regular study difficult to locate, strike, and of military doctrine, theory, and history and by destroy. This is accomplished by providing a training environment that allows implementing passive and active for practical experience.

1-9 FM 71-3

SECTION IV. BRIGADE BATTLEFIELD FOCUS

Inherent in Army operations is the enemy forces or functions to delay, simultaneous attack of enemy forces. The disrupt, and destroy them before they can brigade's primary focus is to defeat the affect operations of subordinates. The enemy while protecting its CS, CSS, and subordinate commander may request the command and control facilities. The superior commander to take specific brigade must be poised to exploit every measures against deeper enemy forces, opportunity to disrupt the enemy's normally in the subordinate's battle space timetable by combining the effects of fires, that may impede accomplishment of his barriers, and maneuver throughout the mission. The subordinate commander depth of the battlefield. Simultaneous should specify what effect he wants done operations open opportunities for decisive to the enemy: delay for a specific time, action by reducing the enemy's ability to canalize along a specific avenue of generate combat power and creating approach, or defeat in a specific area. periods of friendly superiority to gain or retain the initiative. Simultaneous Brigades normally fight as part of a operations are based on the characteristics division. Separate brigades are organized of effective intelligence. Intelligence must for and normally conduct sustained be timely, relevant, accurate, and operations under corps control. In either predictive. Intelligence will support the case, brigades most often fight as part of a brigade through the intelligence battlefield larger force. Divisional brigades are operating system (BOS). tactical headquarters that control mission- tailored battalion task forces. When operating with a division in war, brigades A brigade may conduct deep normally direct engagements against operations with fixed-wing air, artillery enemy battalions and regiments beyond interdiction, and Army combat aviation. the forward line of own troops (FLOT) by The commander and staff identify high- controlling task forces and attack payoff targets (HPT) and synchronize helicopter units, by establishing priorities organic and supporting higher of supporting artillery fires, and by headquarters' attack assets to destroy coordinating CAS operations (joint and them. Offensive EW systems must be combined). Brigades direct and coordinate designated with FS assets to affect deep the actions of subordinate task organized targets. Deception can also be used to units. Brigade commanders select the delay and disrupt enemy forces. The use ground for the battle and the form of of information generated from the division maneuver to accomplish the mission. The ASAS enhances the brigade's ability to brigade influences an engagement mainly plan and synchronize operations. through synchronizing reconnaissance and security efforts, task organizing maneuver Each echelon of command creates the battalions, assigning subordinate missions time and space necessary for its major and tasks, applying combat multipliers, subordinate echelons to defeat enemy assigning and shifting priorities of CS and forces in contact before engaging those CSS assets, and constituting and not in contact. This is done by attacking committing a reserve. The brigade fights

1-10 FM 71-3 the battle through integration of the effective synchronization appears to the combined arms team. The end result of enemy as one continuous fight.

SECTION V. THE THREAT ENVIRONMENT

The brigade no longer faces a single, and the possibility of using weapons of monolithic, well-defined threat. During mass destruction. However, the brigade the Cold War, planning was centered on may also be called upon to conduct confronting numerically superior heavy operations in the midst of a nontraditional opposing forces (OPFOR) in Europe, the threat. Far East, or Southwest Asia. Now the brigade must focus on conducting The brigade may face a nontraditional contingency operations (CONOP) as part threat while conducting OOTW. Though a of a force projection operation. These brigade may not be initially deployed to brigades must be able to conduct these conduct some of these operations, it could operations across the range of military conduct them as part of the postconflict operations (peace, conflict, and war) phase of some other CONOP. against threats ranging in size from major regional powers, lesser powers, and With the diversity of the threat, the terrorist groups to insurgents. IPB process becomes even more important at the brigade level. No longer will the Emerging regional threats are more threat always fit into a neat time-distance diverse and less predictable than former (TDIS) scenario. Potential adversaries Cold War adversaries, but are just as may use a wide variety of doctrine, deadly. These threats reflect the more tactics, and equipment. The staff supports traditional threat concept such as armor, the commander by conducting IPB infantry, and artillery formations throughout the entire operation. maneuvering on a battlefield with CAS

1-11

FM 71-3

CHAPTER 2 FUNDAMENTALS OF BRIGADE OPERATIONS

Army operations reflect the changing nature of war. Brigades must be versatile organizations capable of deploying anywhere in the world on short notice. Brigades operate within joint, multinational and/or multiagency operations and must synchronize all available systems.

Fighting and winning battles and engagements remain the brigade’s primary purpose. Commanders mass the effects of combat power, when and where necessary, to accomplish missions. New technology gives commanders the capability to attack the enemy simultaneously throughout the depth of the battlefield.

This chapter discusses the fundamentals of brigade operations under three main topics:

• It addresses brigade doctrine for force projection operations. • It depicts a framework for tactical battlefields. • It discusses the BOS as fundamental to brigade operations.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Force Projection 2-1 Section II. Tactical Battlefield Framework 2-3 Section III. Battlefield Operating Systems 2-5

SECTION I. FORCE PROJECTION

GENERAL STAGES OF FORCE PROJECTION

Force projection is the demonstrated Force projection usually begins as a ability to rapidly alert, mobilize, deploy rapid response to a crisis although it may and operate anywhere in the world involve a deliberate, slower buildup and throughout the spectrum of Army deployment. During peacetime, the operations. Force projection operations brigade includes deployment as part of its extend from mobilization to deployment training. and subsequently to redeployment.

2-1 FM 71-3

Brigades generally execute force deploying units meet all requirements to projection operations in six stages. The deploy into another theater of operations. ensuing discussion provides a general overview of each stage and addresses key Deployment implications for the brigade. An example The proper arrival sequence of forces N-Hour sequence is at Appendix G. into an AO contributes to the stabilization of the situation and maintains a viable Predeployment Activities force protection capability. The time- phased force deployment data programs Predeployment activities include the arrival of equipment. Units arrive in a planning, task organizing and echeloning theater, by air or sea, and then move the brigade, as well as preparing personnel rapidly through marshaling areas, staging and equipment for deployment. When areas, and tactical assembly areas before alerted, the brigade may have to modify executing operations. existing OPLANs. These modifications may include readjusting task organizations Entry Operations for initial entry and follow-on forces into the AO, sequencing of forces, and refining The brigade arrives in theater either as sustainment requirements. an entry force or a follow-on force. Entry forces are tailored to carry out initial The key to the brigade’s deployment is combat operations to secure the lodgment. task organizing, echeloning, and tailoring Follow-on forces expand lodgments and forces. Task organizing is the process of build up combat power to conduct combat forming combined arms’ task forces with operations. The brigade may conduct limited self sustainment capability for either an opposed or unopposed entry. rapid deployment. Echeloning is organizing and prioritizing units for During an opposed entry, the brigade movement. Echelons are often divided conducts a forcible entry into an area that into elements such as advanced parties, may contain hostile forces. In this initial combat forces, follow-on forces and situation initial entry forces are primarily closure forces. Each echelon has a combat forces. designated commander. Task organizing and echeloning occur during initial During an unopposed entry, the planning. Force tailoring is the adding or brigade may serve as a deterrent, act as an subtracting from • planned task advance party for a larger force, or organizations and occurs after a thorough participate in noncombat operations. The mission, enemy, terrain, troops and time brigade may also conduct an unopposed available (METT-T) analysis by the entry under hostile conditions. The commander and his staff. brigade deploys into an area where combat operations are ongoing or Following receipt of a mission, the imminent but the points of debarkation brigade prepares its personnel and (POD) are secure. In either opposed or equipment for deployment through unopposed entry operations, consider preparation for overseas movement security of the force when tailoring the activities. These activities ensure that initial entry units.

2-2 o FM 71-3

Operations the transfer of responsibilities to units assuming control of the brigade’s AO. Operations are the missions executed Postconflict activities include a variety by the brigade that contribute to overall of tasks from enemy prisoner of war mission accomplishment. The brigade may (EPW) control to civil affairs (CA) of the conduct both combat and noncombat host nation. The brigade also begins operations. During combat operations the retraining its units on critical tasks and brigade conducts offensive, defensive, and preparing for follow-on missions. other operations discussed in later Transferring responsibilities (for the chapters. Another section in this chapter brigade) is normally conducted as a relief discusses noncombat operations as part of in place. OOTW. Redeployment and Reconstitution War Termination and Postconflict Redeployment is situation dependent Operations and requires task organizing and echeloning similar to deployment. Some War termination and postconflict units and personnel will depart early, such operations are activities taken to restore as advance parties, nonessential personnel, conditions in the AO that are favorable to and equipment. During this phase units US national policy. During this period, the continue to train on individual and mission brigade focuses on force security and essential task list (METL) tasks. preparing for redeployment. The objective of reconstitution is to Planning and versatility are two vital prepare for follow-on missions rapidly. components of successful postconflict These activities include rebuilding unit operations. Commanders and their staffs integrity and accounting for soldiers and begin planning postconflict operations equipment. These activities continue after before cessation of combat operations. arrival in continental United States This planning includes: adjusting the rules (CONUS) or home theater. The focus is of engagement (ROE), force protection on reconstitution of units to measures, host-nation considerations and predeployment levels of readiness.

SECTION II. TACTICAL BATTLEFIELD FRAMEWORK

The battlefield framework helps the concepts: AO, battle space, and an commander visualize how to best employ organization of the tactical battlefield. his forces. It relates friendly forces to one another and the enemy in terms of The next higher headquarters time, space, resources, and purpose. At normally assigns the brigade commander the tactical level, the battlefield an AO. He then visualizes the battle framework consists of three interrelated space where he will employ his combat

2-3 o FM 71-3 power to dominate the enemy. In TACTICAL BATTLEFIELD visualizing his battle space, the ORGANIZATION commander considers key and decisive terrain, direct and indirect fires, and Commanders must consider all probable enemy courses of action aspects of the three-dimensional (COA). The commander thinks in depth battlefield and use standard control and visualizes how to engage the enemy measures to organize their AO. simultaneously throughout the depth of Battlefields may be linear, asymmetrical, the battlefield. or noncontiguous and generally include deep, close, and rear components. Deep, AREA OF OPERATIONS close, and rear are not separate fights; each is part of the entire tactical battle. An AO is designated by higher headquarters and is depicted by graphic control measures. At a minimum, the AO Deep Operations should be large enough for the commander to employ all of his organic, The best way to defeat the enemy is assigned, and supporting assets. The by fighting him simultaneously brigade commander establishes control throughout the depth of the battlefield. measures within his AO to assign Deep operations are normally those responsibility, coordinate fires and operations conducted against enemy maneuver, and to control other forces not in the close fight. Deep activities. Both war and OOTW use the operations prevent the enemy from using concept of AO. his forces when and where he wants on the battlefield. These operations are not BATTLE SPACE necessarily a function of depth, but a function of what forces are being A commander’s capability to acquire attacked and the intent of the operation. and, more importantly, dominate the Deep operations are conducted in both enemy determines a physical volume the offense and defense. called battle space. It includes the brigade commander’s vision of how he Simultaneous deep and close engage- will employ his assets and actions to ments prevent the enemy from con- dominate the enemy. Battle space can centrating his strength. The perceived or change as the commander’s vision of the actual threat of a force against an battlefield changes. It also changes enemy’s weakness may be sufficient to according to how the commander divert the enemy and force him to positions his assets. All friendly combat protect that vulnerability. Simultaneous power that the commander can bring to attacks force the enemy to fight in one bear on the enemy is included in his direction and protect himself in another. vision of battle space. Agility, lethality, This results in the enemy committing his and speed of both friendly and enemy forces where he did not intend and combat systems influence battle space. disrupts his overall plan.

2-4 FM 71-3

The commander and staff must have a Main Effort clear understanding of the purpose and objectives of deep operations. They must The main effort is assigned to only recognize the benefits of deep operations one unit at a time. Designating a main versus operations against committed effort provides the focus that each forces on the FLOT. subordinate needs to link his actions to the actions of those around him. The commander and staff must be flexible Close Operations enough to shift the main effort as needed. Close operations consider and include reconnaissance and security, a Reserves main effort and a reserve. Battalions in immediate contact are fighting the close Reserves give a commander options battle. and flexibility. Reserves exploit success and expedite victory. They are used to The brigade commander decides weight the main effort to maintain when and where the close battle will momentum, provide security, and defeat occur. Concentrating the effects of his enemy counterattacks. Missions for the combat power in support of ground reserve are planned and are not solely in forces becomes the brigade commander’s response to unforeseen enemy actions. focus in close operations. Rear Operations Reconnaissance and Security The objective of rear operations is to Reconnaissance and security are ensure freedom of maneuver and critical to the brigade’s success. In continuous operations. Rear operations general, reconnaissance and security are are generally concerned with maintaining two missions. At brigade both are lines of communication (LOG) and closely related. Reconnaissance actions support during an engagement. This yield information on the disposition and includes securing main supply routes intentions of enemy forces and direct (MSR) against level I and II threats. friendly units into the fight. Security Additionally, rear operations maintain protects and conserves the combat the rate of supply necessary to sustain power of the brigade. the current operation.

SECTION III. BATTLEFIELD OPERATING SYSTEMS

INTELLIGENCE crisis or operation, but well before and is continuous throughout the operation. BOS intelligence to the commander The commander focuses the intelligence drives the brigade’s intelligence effort. effort and ensures it is responsive to his His role does not begin with the current information requirements (IR) and those

2-5 FM 71-3 of his subordinates. He focuses the effort and analysis of reported sightings of ; by stating his priority intelligence enemy activities. requirements (PIR) and targeting priorities. In his PIR and IR, he includes MANEUVER his requirements for intelligence support to force protection and battle damage The brigade commander employs all assessment (BDA). Through his S2, the of his organic and supporting systems to commander ensures the intelligence create the conditions for success. The BOS, both his own and that of higher brigade commander then maneuvers his echelons is responsive to his needs and forces to defeat the enemy with minimum focused on his requirements. risk to his soldiers.

It is especially critical that an up-to- By maneuver the brigade gains the date enemy data base be prepared during potential to destroy the enemy or hinder the IPB process by the brigade S2 to his movement through the direct or support offensive operations and to indirect application of lethal combat answer the commander's PIR. The threat power. As the brigade commander estimate and data base are used to develops his concept of the operation identify specific enemy vulnerabilities and considers the maneuver of all his and weaknesses. This information assists forces, he must retain a balance in the the brigade commander in properly application of maneuver, firepower, and concentrating his available combat protection. The nature of this balance power. establishes the priorities and relationships of maneuver to other The development of PIR and IPB is a operating systems as the commander continual process throughout the translates the art of his vision of planning and execution of the operation. operations to the science of detailed The brigade intelligence section answers planning and execution of combat PIR using a detailed reconnaissance and functions. surveillance (R&S) plan developed and coordinated by the brigade and battalion FIRE SUPPORT task force S2s and S3s. The brigade S2 requests additional information and FS can deliver a variety of Army and collection assets from its higher joint munitions throughout the depth of headquarters when the brigade the battlefield. The brigade is normally commander's PIR cannot be gathered by supported by a DS FA battalion. organic brigade assets. Additional FS assets may include—

During the operation, the brigade S2 • CAS. provides the commander continuous • Naval gunfire (NGF). updates of enemy activities and anticipated enemy COAs. His sources • Army aviation. include reports from the ASAS, • Reinforcing and GS reinforcing monitoring of battalion radio nets. FA battalions.

2-6 {y FM 71-3

The brigade fire support élément command and control, and early warning (FSE) is the focal point for the must be made. integration of all FS for the brigade. The brigade FSCOORD is the DS FA The entire combined arms team has a battalion commander. He is assisted by role in counterair operations. All units the brigade FSO. When the FSCOORD is practice air defense early warning and not available, the FSO advises the passive air defense measures. Also, maneuver commander on FS. To tanks, crew-served weapons, indirect effectively integrate FS into the fires, intelligence, and EW systems, add operation, the FSCOORD must to the all-around protection of the force. understand the mission, the commander's During offensive operations beyond the intent, the concept of the operation, and range of forward area air defense the commander’s guidance for FS. The (FAAD) sensors and voice FSCOORD is critical to the planning communications, special provisions for process from the outset. The FSCOORD early warning throughout the brigade ensures FS assets are properly employed must be planned, coordinated, and and synchronized. implemented.

AIR DEFENSE MOBILITY AND SURVIVABILITY The division commander's ADA priorities determine what ADA resources This BOS includes both engineer and the brigade will receive. Normally, the nuclear, biological, chemical (NBC) brigade receives a battery of ADA. functions. Specifically, it addresses mobility, countermobility, survivability, The air defense officer (ADO) must and NBC defense operations. understand the commander's mission, intent, and concept of the operation. Engineer Continued involvement of the ADO in the planning process is critical to the Engineer operations provide mobility successful integration of ADA support to the brigade, degrade the enemy’s with the brigade concept. The ADO ability to move on the battlefield, and recommends air defense priorities to the provide protective emplacements for brigade commander, and coordinates personnel and equipment. Mobility, with the brigade S3 for terrain countermobility, and survivability requirements for ADA weapons and operations are planned to be consistent sensors. with the commander’s intent and to complement the concept of the Mobile systems such as the Bradley operation. Stinger fighting vehicle (BSFV), man- portable air defense (MANPAD), and in The brigade engineer must receive certain situations, Avenger, will support clear guidance and priorities for the the maneuver force in the forward area. engineer effort. He is an integral part of If MANPADs are used in the forward the development of the concept of the area, provisions for armor protection, operation; he coordinates with the S3,

2-7 FM 71-3

FSO, ADO, S2, and S4 to integrate and detecting, marking, identifying, and synchronize engineer operations. reporting of contaminated areas are established in SOPs according to Nuclear, Biological, and relevant Standardization Agreements Chemical Defense Operations (ST AN AG).

Division assets available to support Smoke brigade offensive operations include NBC decontamination, NBC The brigade conducts smoke reconnaissance, and smoke. These assets operations to screen friendly forces and are normally platoon-size organizations. obscure or deceive enemy forces. Based on the factors of METT-T, these Normally, smoke is employed with at organizations may be OPCON, attached, least one deceptive screen for every DS, or GS to the brigade. primary smoke screen. Assets that are available to provide smoke include the Decontamination vehicle engine exhaust smoke system (if using DF2), smoke pots, artillery and Brigade decontamination operations mortar smoke, and generated smoke. To during the offense focus on immediate conduct a successful smoke mission, the and operational decontamination opera- brigade must provide the following tions. Thorough decontamination opera- information to the supporting smoke tions are designed for reconstitution unit: operations. Operational decontamination operations are conducted at the battalion • Commander's intent. level using organic lightweight decon- • Location of target. tamination equipment. • Length of mission. The brigade commander identifies • Start time. mission-critical assets and establishes • Visibility requirements. priorities for decontamination within the brigade. The S4 coordinates logistics COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT support for decontamination and provides it through normal supply The brigade S4 identifies and channels. coordinates the specific logistics needs of the maneuver brigade. Based on the Reconnaissance brigade S4's planning estimate, the forward support battalion (FSB) All brigade units have an implied commander and his staff tailor a mobile mission to conduct NBC reconnaissance CSS package to be pushed forward to using organic detection and support the brigade. Specific identification equipment. The brigade S3 coordination for locations of ammunition establishes the NBC reconnaissance transfer points (ATP), unit maintenance requirements and tasks based on the collection points (UMCP), and MSR brigade chemical officer's outside of the brigade support area recommendations. The procedures for (BSA) are coordinated between the FSB

2-8 FM 71-3

S3 and brigade S4 at the rear CP and command, control, communications, and approved by the brigade S3. This intelligence function. Therefore, the coordination ensures the integration of TAC CP may be augmented with the CSS plan with the tactical plan. personnel from the current operations, intelligence, operations support, and FS FSB logistics support must be sections out of the main CP. The signal continuous. The FSB displaces priority section leapfrogs FM retransmission resupply classes by bounds to support systems and mobile subscriber equipment the momentum of the offense. The (MSE) forward to maintain communi- movement of the FSB is coordinated cations. among the FSB, rear CP, and main CP to ensure continuous support and to avoid The main CP continues to perform its impeding maneuver elements. essential current battle coordination; however, the main CP focuses its effort toward future battle planning. This is COMMAND AND CONTROL possible because the disruption of frequent displacement has caused much The command group, augmented by of the command, control, com- other special staff as desired by the munications, and intelligence structuring commander, is positioned to see, sense, for working the current battle to be and control the battle. By being well pushed forward to the TAC CP and forward, the commander can feel the command group. tempo of the battle, improve communications, and influence the main effort The rear CP and FSB commander are with his presence. The command group heavily committed to pushing CSS moves much of the time and relies on the forward through the cluttered battlefield brigade main CP to maintain communi- to sustain operations. The rear CP and cations with higher and flanking units. FSB commander are initially concerned with sustaining forward units; providing For security, the TAC CP and the rear area security; clearing MSR; main CP should move frequently. evacuating casualties, equipment, and Usually, one section is stationary while EPWs; and preparing to reestablish CSS the other repositions. While the main CP base areas forward. The rear CP and displaces, the TAC CP may require FSB commander are responsible for augmentation to adequately perform the terrain management in the BSA.

2-9

FM 71-3

CHAPTER 3 BATTLE COMMAND

Battle command is the art and science of battlefield decision making and leading soldiers and units to successfully accomplish the mission. The battle command basic elements are decision making, leading, and controlling. The battle command system at brigade level enables commanders to lead, prioritize, and allocate assets required to employ and sustain combat power. The brigade commander must see further, process information faster, and strike more precisely and more quickly. If information is the medium of the battle command process, the battle command system must provide the commander with timely and accurate information on which to base the commander’s decision.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. General 3-1 Section II. Organization and Facilities 3-3 Section III. Communication 3-17 Section IV. Command Post Operations 3-19 Section V. Brigade Rehearsals 3-22

SECTION I. GENERAL

DEFINITION correcting deviations from guidance, and Command and control is not one word directing subordinate actions to as commonly perceived and used. The accomplish the commander's intent. The words "command" and "control" are size of the CP depends on the amount of separate and distinct, with differing control the commander and higher applications to how the brigade fights. headquarters demand. Command is the art of assigning missions, prioritizing resources, guiding and The command and control process is directing subordinates, and focusing the comprised of— entire brigade's energy to accomplish clear objectives. Control is the science of • Coordinating. defining limits, computing requirements, allocating resources, prescribing • Planning. requirements for reports, monitoring • Directing. performance, identifying and • Controlling.

3-1 FM 71-3

The command and control process is identifies variance from set standards and executed through— guidance, and corrects the deviations. It acquires and applies the means to • Leadership. accomplish the commander's intent and • Command and control facilities. develops specific instructions from • The planning process. general guidance. • Communication. Control serves its purpose if it allows Command and Control the commander freedom to operate, delegate authority, lead from any critical In battle, leaders at all levels are point on the battlefield, and synchronize challenged by the magnitude of available brigade operations across its AOs. The information that will continue to increase command and control system must in the future. They must use this support the ability of the commander and information to apply direction to their his staff to adjust plans for future efforts to achieve victory. The commander operations while focusing on the current leads, conceptualizes, visualizes, synchro- fight. The tools for implementing nizes, and makes timely key decisions. command decisions in- The brigade staff acquires, synchronizes, clude orders, SOPs, communications, and and disseminates decisions and computers. information. The commander must be where he can best influence the battle, where his moral and physical presence can Command and Control Guidelines be felt, and where his will to achieve victory can best be expressed, understood, Some basic, time-tested imperatives to and acted upon. Command remains a improve successful command and control personal function. The commander must are listed below. These imperatives drive appreciate time and distance factors, the successful development and efficient looking beyond the immediate operation. operations of the brigade's CPs and He must continually evaluate the situation determine their effectiveness in combat. and wargame COAs. He must understand The guidelines are— the factors of METT-T and know his force sustainment and force protection • A headquarters must be small to be requirements. efficient. Command includes the responsibility • Just as there can be only one of accomplishing assigned missions as brigade commander, there can be well as a responsibility to the nation for only one brigade CP exercising the lives of the soldiers entrusted to them. control of any specific organizational area on the battlefield at any To control is to define limits. Control one time. within the brigade is the science of computing requirements, allocating • If a commander is to be effective in means, and integrating efforts. It monitors a crisis, he must limit the number the status of organizational effectiveness, of voices he hears.

3-2 FM 71-3

• If the commander wants his staff to mission, he should deliver or keep him informed, he should avoid explain it orally and preferably lengthy prepared briefings and rely face-to-face, if time and circum- on unstructured, unscheduled stances permit. discussions. This does not mean • A CP is organized to acquire and that some structured and scheduled disseminate information in a briefings will not occur within the prioritized fashion. brigade. • When a commander gives a subordinate a new or revised

SECTION II. ORGANIZATION AND FACILITIES

BRIGADE COMMANDER information is from firsthand observation, by visiting subordinate CPs, and by The brigade commander analyzes and listening to subordinate command nets, to restates the mission, designs the concept of include battalion and company nets when operations, organizes the forces, necessary. The commander should not fail determines the main effort, establishes the to make independent decisions about brigade reserves, transmits his own and the today's battle for fear that they may be higher commander's intent, and provides inconsistent with what he wants to do support to subordinate units. The brigade tomorrow. commander controls the ongoing battle and provides planning guidance for future The commander’s intent describes the operations. He positions himself to follow desired end state. It is a concise expression and influence operations and maintains of the purpose of the operation and must communications with higher, lower, and be understood two echelons below the adjacent units. The commander must be issuing commander. It must clearly state totally mobile and not depend on a fixed the purpose of the mission and is the single site, CP, or specific vehicle to exercise his unifying focus for all subordinate command and control responsibilities. He elements. It is not a summary of the reacts immediately to directions from his concept of the operation. Its purpose is to higher commander to release and receive focus subordinates on the desired end forces. When his organization or mission state. Its utility is to focus subordinates on changes, he reorganizes only as needed. what has to be accomplished to achieve Teamwork, functional SOPs, and a clear success, even when the plan and concept of understanding of the mission permit his operations no longer apply, and to subordinates to quickly translate a broad discipline their efforts toward that end. mission order into action. The intent statement is usually written The commander should not stay in the but can bè verbal when time is short. It main CP. The best way for him to get should be concise and clear; long,

3-3 FM 71-3 narrative descriptions of how the Normally, the commander delegates commander sees the fight tend to inhibit authority to the staff to take final action the initiative of subordinates. A brigade on matters within command policy. The commander’s order should contain the assignment of staff responsibility does not intent statement of the division or next connote command authority over other higher commander. staff officers or over any other command element. Chain of Command Relationship with Subordinate The commander issues orders and Commands receives information through the chain of command. He issues all orders to the Staff officers support subordinate units commander of the next lower unit. and establish good working relationships Bypassing commanders should occur only with subordinate commanders and staffs. in urgent situations. In such instances, the The staff should make recommendations bypassed commander should be notified and offer advice to subordinate by the commanders involved as soon as commanders; they may not, however, deny possible. or refuse a subordinate commander's request, except in those areas where the The Staff commander has delegated authority for them to do so. Staff officers contact a Functions subordinate command, in the commander's name, only to transmit orders or Staff officers assist their commander in instructions, but they may offer assistance accomplishing the mission. They help the or exchange information in their own or in commander make decisions by acquiring, the commander's name. If a staff officer analyzing, and coordinating information. determines a subordinate command is not Staff officers present critical information complying with the commander's and a recommendation to the commander directives, the staff officer advises the so he can make good decisions (see FM subordinate commander or his staff of the 101-5 for more detailed information). noncompliance. The staff officer then Common staff functions include— reports his observation and recommendation to his commander. Staff • Providing information. officers normally honor informal requests • Making estimates. for information from the higher level staff; • Making recommendations. they should be open for suggestions from subordinate units. • Preparing plans and orders. • Supervising the execution of decisions. Command and Staff Communications Responsibility and Authority The command channel is the direct, Staff officers are assigned functional official link between echelon headquarters areas of interest and responsibility. and commanders. Orders and instructions

3-4 FM 71-3 to subordinate units pass on this channel. Deputy Commander Within their authority, staff officers may use command channels when acting in the In the separate armored brigade, a commander's name. The staff channel is deputy commander is authorized to assist the staff-to-staff link between the commander in the performance of his headquarters for coordination and duties. The deputy commander is kept transmission of information. informed by the staff of operations, plans, intentions, goals, and problems so he can Coordination assume command at any time. The deputy commander normally operates within Coordination is critical to the specific areas defined by the commander. commander's synchronization of the These areas may include responsibility for battle. It must occur internally with the operation of the BSA, logistics combat, CS, and CSS units and externally support of the operation, coordination and with higher and adjacent units. It prevents execution of rear operations, and main CP the enemy from exploiting unit boundaries and BSA interface. and enables the commander to produce maximum relative combat power at the Executive Officer decisive time and place. The XO performs a variety of functions for the commander. The XO is COMMAND AND CONTROL the chief of staff responsible for ORGANIZATION assignment of tasks and for the efficient, coordinated, prompt response of the staff The successful commander delegates in support of the commander. He is authority and fosters an organizational responsible for the operation of the main climate of mutual trust, cooperation, and CP. The XO directs and coordinates CS teamwork. The brigade staff working with the commander's plan and ensures within the TAC CP, main CPs, and rear continuous CSS. During certain periods, CPs is composed of personal, the XO may personally go to the trains to coordinating, and special staffs. determine the status of CSS operations. Coordinating staff officers are the The XO remains current on the tactical commander's main staff assistants. They situation and is prepared to assume assist the commander by coordinating the command. The XO is responsible for the plans and operations of the brigade. conduct of rear operations because of his duties of coordinating the staffs of the Personal Staff main and rear CPs.

The personal staff consists of the Command Sergeant Major deputy commander or executive officer (XO) and the command sergeant major The brigade CSM's primary role is to (CSM) who work under the immediate advise the brigade commander on matters control of the commander and directly concerning the enlisted soldiers of the assist him in the exercise of command. FM brigade. The CSM is not an administrator, 101-5 contains more detailed information but he understands the administrative, on specific staff positions. logistics, and operational requirements of

3-5 FM 71-3

the brigade. The CSM is the most supported with timely intelligence, experienced enlisted soldier in the brigade targets, and BDA. Additionally, he and keeps his finger on the pulse of the coordinates with the S3 and FSO to command. The CSM receives taskings ensure EW is fully integrated with FS. from the brigade commander and acts as a troubleshooter. The CSM focuses Operations and Training attention on functions critical to the Officer (S3) success of the operation. The S3 is the commander's primary Coordinating Staff assistant in planning and coordinating operations of the brigade and CS Adjutant (SI) elements. The S3 is located in the brigade TAC CP and assists the commander in The SI normally operates in the fighting the current battle. The brigade S3 brigade operations support section located is the OIC of the TAC CP when it is in the BSA with the S4 section. The SI is deployed forward. The S3, through the responsible to the brigade commander for brigade TOC, coordinates closely with the the maintenance of unit strength, S4 to keep abreast of the current CSS personnel, morale, discipline, and law and status. The S3 ensures his personnel are order. The SI supervises and coordinates trained and equipment maintained to various special staff sections including support the brigade XO in the main CP. those of the public affairs officer (PAO), chaplain, and surgeon. He is a point of Logistics Officer (S4) contact for other activities including the The S4 is responsible for operation of inspector general (IG), civil affairs (CA), the rear CP. He provides logistics and judge advocate general (JAG). In the information to the commander and separate brigade, the SI also serves as the functions as the brigade's logistics adjutant general. The SI sections cross- planner. train to enable them to conduct continuous operations. The S4 coordinates with the battalion's XOs and S4s about the status of Intelligence Officer (S2) equipment and supplies. The S4 has representatives in both the main and rear The S2 and the DS MI company CPs. The S4 participates in the planning commander are a team whose mission is to process when it occurs. The S4 provide IEW support to the commander. coordinates with the FSB commander and As a team, they are responsible to the support operations officer to ensure the commander for planning and directing the brigade commander's logistics priorities intelligence activities of the brigade. The are understood and supported. S2 is the senior intelligence officer and primary staff officer for intelligence. He Civil Affairs Officer (S5) directs and supervises the commander’s EW operations including counter- An S5 is organic to a separate brigade intelligence. He ensures the commander is and is assigned to a divisional brigade

3-6 FM 71-3

staff by division or corps when needed. on support that includes the employment The S5 is responsible for all matters of TACAIR as CAS, joint suppression of pertaining to political, economic, and enemy air defenses (JSEAD), recon- social aspects of military operations. The naissance, and airlift. The ALO S5 is the brigade's liaison between civil coordinates CAS missions with the FSE. authorities and the civilian populace in the The ALO provides the commander and brigade's AO. The S5 is located’ at the staff enemy TACAIR and air defense main CP. capabilities. The ALO supervises the TACP and forward air controllers (FAC). Special Staff The ALO is located with the command group. The special staff aids the commander in professional, technical, or other functional areas. The specific number and Air Naval Gunfire Liaison Officer duties of special staff officers vary at each level of command based on table of If operating near coastal waters, the organization and equipment (TOE) brigade may be provided naval air and gun authorizations, desires of the commander, FS. Air naval gunfire liaison officer and the size and level of command. The (ANGLICO) personnel are provided to special staff functions are described in FM advise the commander, request, 101-5. coordinate, and control naval air and NGF. Air Defense Officer

The brigade ADO is the commander of Army Aviation Liaison Officer the DS battery that normally supports the brigade. The ADA battery commander The combat aviation brigade provides integrates ADA weapons and sensors an Army aviation LO to work in the main throughout the brigade sector or zone to CP when aviation assets are employed by protect the force and provide early the maneuver brigade. Primary duties of warning. In the absence of an ADA the aviation LO include— battery in support of the brigade, an ADA LO may serve as the ADO for the brigade. • Advising the commander on The ADO or ADA LO advise the brigade employment of aviation assets. commander on all air defense matters. To • Assisting the S3 in preparation of assist the employment and planning for air aviation portions of estimates,- defense assets the ADA battery CP plans, orders, and reports. collocates with the brigade TOC. • Functioning as part of the airspace Air Liaison Officer management element. • Coordinating with the brigade The air liaison officer (ALO) is an Air S3/XO for positioning of aviation Force officer who is a member of the assets including the forward arming tactical air control party (TACP). The refuel point (FARP) within the ALO is the brigade commander's advisor brigade AO.

3-7 FM 71-3

• Coordinating with the S4 in matters Chemical Officer concerning Army aircraft for CSS operations. The chemical officer advises the commander on all NBC matters. He The Army aviation LO is located at the participates in the planning process and main CP, but may move with the brigade prepares the NBC estimate. He also plans commander or lead battalion. and coordinates decontamination operations. The chemical officer works Brigade Engineer under the direct supervision of the S3, and is located in the main CP. The brigade engineer is normally the commander of the engineer battalion Direct Support Military supporting the brigade. The engineer battalion commander advises and assists Intelligence Company Commander the brigade commander in all aspects of engineer planning, coordination, and The DS MI company commander plans execution. The brigade engineer and directs the employment of his determines the requirements for engineer subordinate IEW assets. He must support to include recommending the understand the supported commander’s support relationship. The assistant brigade intent and PIR operational and tactical engineer is the commander’s principal objectives, overall scheme of maneuver staff planner in the brigade main CP. He and fires, and intelligence collection plan is assisted by other members of the to effectively employ his IEW efforts. The engineer battalion staff. The brigade MI commander may be frequently absent engineer prepares engineer estimates and from his CP to coordinate with the S2 and engineer portions of the plans and orders to personally oversee the IEW operations to include the engineer annex. The brigade of subordinates. He is the prinicpal engineer provides the commander and advisor to the brigade commander on IEW staff information on the enemy’s asset capability. The DS MI company capabilities. commander must be able to deconflict terrain issues with the brigade S3 for GS Chaplain or other reinforcing MI assets operating in the brigade AO. The DS company CP is The brigade chaplain pastors to the normally collocated with the brigade main HHC and provides ministry for casualties, CP. EPWs, civilian internees, refugees, and collocated elements that do not have an Fire Support Coordinator assigned unit ministry team (UMT). He assists the commander by monitoring the The commander of the DS artillery leadership practices of the command to battalion serves as the brigade ensure the highest moral, ethical, and FSCOORD. The FSCOORD advises and humanitarian standards. The chaplain is assists the brigade commander in all located at the rear CP. aspects of FS planning and coordination.

3-8 FM 71-3

The FSCOORD is normally in the main CP Three members of the brigade staff are during planning and is a part of the orders unique in that they are also major group. The FSCOORD provides a full- subordinate commanders (battalion size) time FSE to the main CP. The brigade in the brigade. These officers must FSO is the OIC of the brigade FSE when command and control their own units as the FSCOORD is not present. The brigade well as coordinate major functional areas FSO may be part of the brigade command including but not limited to their direct group during the battle. subordinates.

Forward Support Battalion Military Police Platoon Leader Commander The MP platoon leader is the staff The FSB commander is the advisor to adviser on MP combat, CS, and CSS the supported brigade commander con- operations. The MP platoon leader directs cerning supply, maintenance, field and the actions of the brigade MP platoon in health services, and the implementation of DS to a maneuver brigade. The MP the CSS functions throughout the platoon leader is located at the rear CP. In supported brigade. He coordinates logistic a separate brigade, the PM section is support missions with the brigade XO, S4, located in the main CP. In all other cases, and division support command (DISCOM) the MP platoon leader is located in the elements operating in the BSA. The FSB main CP. commander exercises OPCON over CSS units operating in the BSA (see Chapter 8 for a discussion on the FSB commander's Signal Officer duties). In the separate brigade, the support battalion commander usually The brigade signal officer (SO) is the works through the deputy brigade signal expert to the maneuver commander commander and performs those duties and is located at the main CP. He advises normally associated with the DISCOM the commander and staff on all signal commander in the division. support matters. He works for the unit and closely interacts with the S3 and other Headquarters and Headquarters unit staff officers. The brigade SO plans Company Commander or communications assets and resources to Headquarters Commandant support current and future operations. The primary focus is brigade to task force The HHC commander or headquarters command and control communications. commandant works closely with and The brigade SO is responsible for answers to the brigade XO. The HHC information transfer, networking commander is responsible for the training automated systems, and standardization of of assigned personnel, maintenance of communications policy, procedure, and organic equipment, and the support, training. He coordinates with the next security, and movement of the brigade higher echelon SO for additional main CP and TAC CP I AW unit SOP. communications support, if required. As a

3-9 FM 71-3 special staff officer, the brigade SO does selected staff, normally the S3, the following: FSCOORD, and TACP. The brigade commander is in charge of the command • Acts as the brigade commander’s group and operates it forward at critical advisor on communication matters. locations during a battle. The commander • Recommends the location of the must be close enough to communicate headquarters and signal facilities, with his battalion commanders and make and the use of signal activities for face-to-face contact if necessary. The deception. actual placement of individual personnel is • Controls assigned or attached made by the commander. The commander signal units. makes his decision based on his • Controls communications assets experience, analysis, needs, judgment, and assigned or attached to brigade. on the mission; however, the functions for each CP remain constant. Surgeon

The brigade surgeon advises and Tactical Command Post assists the commander on matters concerning force protection of the The TAC CP controls current opera- command to include—preventive, tions, providing the commander with curative, restorative care, and related combat critical information, and dis- services. The brigade surgeon is located at seminates the commander's decisions. It is the brigade clearing station in the BSA. located as far forward as the battalion main CPs to facilitate communications COMMAND AND CONTROL with subordinate commanders, and the FACILITIES main CP. It is composed of the brigade S3, TAC CP, M577, and the brigade Brigades are controlled from commander's Ml 13. Only key echeloned command and control facilities representatives of the command group and with varying levels of staff participation at current operations section are present at each echelon. The facilities include a the TAC CP. Due to its small size it is command group, TAC CP, main CP, and highly mobile, and relies on frequent rear CP (see Figure 3-1). displacement, and com-paratively low electronic signature to provide security. Command Group Battle command occurs primarily through combat net radio; this CP may also have The command group is normally MSE access through a mobile subscriber comprised of the brigade commander and radio terminal (MSRT).

3-10 FM 71-3

TAC MAIN CP C- CP u L Cm) U

FSB CMD GP BSA

Figure 3-1. Echeloned brigade command posts organization.

The TAC CP may consist of to FM usage. The minimal radio net representatives from operations, IEW, air capabilities required are— support, FS, Army airspace command and • Division command or higher per control (A2C2) section, engineers, attachment. chemical, and other areas as needed. They • Division HF voice net (on call). provide the commander with combat • Division operations and intelligence critical information and disseminate his (OI). decisions concerning CS and CSS to the • Brigade command. main CP for implementation. The brigade • Brigade HF voice net (on call). S3 is responsible for coordinating • Brigade OI. activities at the TAC CP. See Figure 3-2 • Air Force coordination nets (FM, for a diagram of this facility. HF, UHF, VHF).* • FS nets.* • Net radio interface is provided by Due to the mobility of the TAC CP, the division signal battalion. the primary means of communications is * Asset will be present if command secure FM. MSRTs provide an alternative group collocates with TAC CP.

3-11 FM 71-3

FS MAP TABLE COMMANDER'S M113 ✓-—•N ' FS >

5ÍTMAP (OPSnKT/fS) CHARTS EXTENSION

RTO R A 0 D RTO I INDICATES FUNCTION/FACILITY MAY OR MAY N O BE PRESENT BASED ON SITUATION 0 S SÍTMAPS (IF TRAVELING) MS RT

FAX

M577

Figure 3-2. Example of brigade tactical command post.

Main Command Post • Executes planned deep attacks. \ . The brigade main CP is the control, coordination, and communications center • Monitors the close fight. for combat operations. See Figures 3-3 through 3-5 for diagrams of this facility. • Fights rear operations. All configurations suggested are techniques. The main CP— • Keeps higher headquarters informed. • Assists the brigade and task force commanders. • Coordinates with adjacent units.

• Plans future operations. • Maintains continuous operations for extended periods. • Coordinates operations throughout the depth of the AO. • Assumes command and control of close operations if the TAC CP is • Synchronizes CS and CSS assets as destroyed. directed by the brigade commander. FM 71-3

ALO HMMVW Ml X X HMMWV

ARMY AIR

CAMO S2 S3 FSE NET BDECDR M577 M577 M577 TBJT

RB^RO GBl TRUCK TRLR X BRI? S3 TBIT PLANS TOC EXTBJSON X ENGINEER ADA M577 M577

Figure 3-3. Example of brigade main command post macro view.

S2 S3 FSE W1577 M577 M577

RAMP

[FAX NCO C S2 |I O FSO IflAP □ BATTLE ★ [ BOARD CRT \ S3 PLANS STATUS ENTRANCE □ □ BOARD □ XO ARMY CA □ AIR

ALOMAR EN ADA MISSION, INTENT, COIR BOARD M577 Ml 577 X COMMO EN ADA MAP n □ MAP MAIN ENTRANCE *See Figure 3-5 for blowup of this area. Figure 3-4. Example of brigade main command post internal layout.

3-13 FM 71-3

FM SPEAKERS STANDARD DROP S2 SUSPENDED FROM POSTED UNIT POSITIONS ROOF

STATUS S3 BOARD

BATTLE MAP / S3 FIELD DESK oí I [DIV ] [BDE] o CRT

CCDRY XO

LOGBOOK XO DNVT ORDERS BOOK LEGEND:

a ■CHAIR o -DNVT

Figure 3-5. Example of brigade main command post battle board.

The brigade staff is functionally section, engineers, chemical, and organized to help plan and conduct deep, other areas. Representatives from close, and rear operations. The this section may be required to components of each functional section operate the TAC CP when within each CP is not fixed. Staff displaced forward. The brigade S3 specialists are represented on more than is responsible for coordinating one functional section and participate in activities of the current operations the activities of those sections. Sections and plans sections. located at the brigade main CP are normally— • Plans Section. This section maintains a current and projected • Current Operations Section. This view of the whole battle and section consists of those elements continually updates proposals to necessary to provide the the commander for the execution of commander with direct control the future battles. The personnel in over the battle. Representation is this section provide expertise in provided as required in operations, operations, intelligence, IEW, FS, IEW air support, FS, A2C2 air defense, logistics support,

3-14 FM 71-3

engineer, chemical, psychological • Engineer Section. This section operations Army aviation liaison, consists of either the engineer Air Force liaison, and special staff battalion’s operations cell or the as desired by the commander. assistant brigade engineer cell. This section conducts engineer • Intelligence Section. This section coordination as it applies to current includes the S2, IEWSE, and in the and future operations. separate brigade, the staff weather officer. They receive, analyze, and • A2C2 Section. This section disseminate intelligence informa- conducts routine coordination, and tion to the commander and all regulates the brigade's airspace. brigade elements. The S2 The A2C2 section includes the coordinates activities in this aviation LO, ADO or air defense section. LO, and representatives from the FSE and Air Force liaison element. • FS Section. This section coor- The brigade S3-Air coordinates the dinates FS for the brigade. It activities of this section. consists of the FSO, FSE, and ALO. Other representatives that Rear Command Post work closely with the FS section are the S3-Air, ADA officer, The brigade rear CP has the following assistant brigade engineer, and MI functions: company commander. The brigade FSCOORD controls this section. It conducts— • Tracks current battle. • Sustains current deep and close operations. - Application of the products of • Forecasts future CSS requirements. the targeting team’s target value analysis (TVA). • Conducts detailed CSS planning. - Integrated fire planning. • Serves as the entry point for units entering the brigade rear area. - Coordination of all FS for the brigade. • Coordinates with the FSB CP (collocate). - Coordination of EW.

- Command and control warfare. See Figure 3-6 for a diagram of the brigade rear CP.

3-15 ‘1

FM 71-3

r 7

l i SUPPORT OPS M934A3 j h s " (FSB CP) « * b i b * i _

v y/ '

TABLE RADIOS

PERSONNEL REP O TRACK LO£.SITMAP/CHART LOGISTICS REP O

TABLE TACCS FAX

LEGEND: B REMOTE D CHAIR

Figure 3-6. Example of brigade rear command post.

The operations support section is SI and S4 to coordinate the functions in located at the rear CP. The SI, S4, S5, this section. surgeon, chaplain, PAO, and MP elements are members of this section. The rear CP The rear CP collocated with the FSB is collocated with the FSB CP in the BSA CP is also a large communications and and is under the OPCON of the FSB automation hub. Multiple CSS automation commander for defense of the BSA. The systems are employed here as are FSB commander works with the brigade numerous gateways into different types of

3-16 FM 71-3 communications systems. The FSB relies must plan for FM range extension due to heavily on MSE/TPN and to a lesser its distance from the MBA. extent on combat net radio. The rear CP

SECTION III. COMMUNICATION

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

Communication is the means through Responsibilities for communications which battle command is exercised. The are— commander and staff must understand the capabilities, limitations, and vulnerabilities of the brigade communications • Senior to subordinate. system. Because enemy and friendly radar, • Supporting to supported. radios, and lasers operate in the same electromagnetic spectrum, commanders • Reinforcing to reinforced. plan for interference. Terrain, atmospheric conditions, or electromagnetic pulse • Passing to passed (for forward emitted by nuclear blast hinder trans- passage of lines). missions. The commander— • Passed to passing (for rearward passage of lines). • Provides for redundancy in means • Left to right. of communications. Prioritize for backup means at key locations. • Rearward to forward. • Ensures subordinates know what to do during interruptions in communications. All units should take prompt action to restore lost communications. These • Avoids overloading the communi- responsibilities also apply to the cations systems and uses them only establishment of liaison between when absolutely necessary. headquarters. • Minimizes the use of radios to preserve them. COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY • Ensures proper signal security (SIGSEC) practices are followed. Brigade commanders protect their • Pays particular attention to command, control, communications and maintaining effective lateral com- intelligence systems by using command munications. and control warfare. The commander and staff execute these countermeasures • Considers the employment of re- through the integrated, complementary transmission equipment for each employment of OPSEC, jamming, operation. deception, and physical destruction.

3-17 FM 71-3

Command and control warfare consists • Physical security that consists of of two separate, but closely related physical measures that protect functions: personnel; prevent unauthorized • Communications protection mea- access to equipment, facilities, sures protect friendly communica- materiel, and documents; and guard tions from enemy attack and against espionage, sabotage, deception. damage, or theft. • Communications countermeasures degrade the enemy's command and Jamming contributes to communi- control ability. cations protection by defending and screening friendly communications and OPSEC, jamming, deception, and phy- intelligence. Jamming is used to disrupt sical destruction are applicable to both and deceive threat command, control, functions, but the commander and staff communications, and intelligence. The determine how to best implement them brigade has no organic jamming assets. In based on the factors of METT-T. most instances, EW assets are deployed as GS to the division, with detailed planning The brigade's OPSEC program is for EW operations conducted at division. managed by and is the responsibility of the When EW assets are in GS to the division, S3. He analyzes the commander's concept the brigade S3 requests EW support for of the operation to determine the essential designated targets. EW assets respond to elements of friendly information (EEFI) these requests according to the priorities that must be protected from exploitation established by the division commander, by enemy intelligence. The S3 and S2 G2, and G3. When EW assets directly develop appropriate OPSEC measures; support brigade, the S3 is responsible for based on their assessment of enemy planning and coordinating the operations intelligence collection capabilities and on of the EW units. This includes integrating the friendly indicators that may EW with fire and maneuver to ensure compromise the EEFI. These OPSEC supporting EW resources are used measures are primarily procedural in effectively to support brigade and nature and include— battalion operations.

• SIGSEC to protect operational The brigade's primary role in deception information by practicing is to execute division and corps battlefield (COMSEC) and electronic security deception plans. Brigade units may or may techniques. not know that they are participating in a deception effort. The brigade's • Information security to prevent participation may be limited to practicing disclosure of operational informa- sound OPSEC measures or employing tion through written, verbal, or active deceptive measures such as graphic communications. demonstrations, feints, ruses, or displays.

3-18 FM 71-3

SECTION IV. COMMAND POST OPERATIONS

BRIGADE TACTICAL OPERATIONS Rear Command Post CENTER OPERATIONS The rear CP, with the SI in charge, is Command Group collocated with the FSB CP and has administrative/logistics (A/L) personnel. The command group, operating under The rear CP is responsible for the brigade commander, operates well coordinating the A/L activities of the forward at the critical location of the brigade. battle. The primary function of the command group is to influence the battle COMMAND POST OPERATION through personal presence. Other TECHNIQUES functions include providing planning guidance, conducting ongoing close operations, and disseminating the Communications commander's decisions. Commanders and staffs must Tactical Command Post understand their communications capabilities and skillfully use them. They must The TAC CP, with the S3 in charge, is also understand the impact of automation the forward-most CP in the brigade. It systems on a digitized battlefield. operates as far forward as the battalion main CPs. The TAC CP consists of CP radio operators must understand intelligence, operations, and FS personnel. who is on what net and how to reach net The brigade command group goes forward members via alternate nets or means. from this CP to see the critical location of Contingency plans made by the SO for the battle. alternate and back-up systems must be understood by all those working in a CP. Main Command Post CPs should routinely prioritize nets and specify back-up equipment to support The main CP, under the supervision of those priorities during the planning the XO, locates in the brigade area process of any mission. generally forward of the division main CP, but behind the battalion main CPs. The Battle staffs must maintain awareness main CP consists of staff personnel on available communications and rapidly representing all facets of brigade disseminate changes in status throughout operations. The main CP has a support the CP. CP users with MSE/TPN access area with assets that provide CSS to the need to understand how the MSE systems brigade's command and control elements. work and how to use its capabilities such Assets in the support area also help as conference and precedence calls and provide security for the main CP. The commercial interface, effectively. Staffs alternate CP is normally the TAC CP or a should also know how to use the combat battalion CP. net radio interface (CNRI) function that

3-19 FM 71-3 allows FM users to call into the system possible enemy observation. and vice versa. MSRT phones as well as Subordinate commanders and LOs FM radios should be remoted into the must be able to find the CP. CPs. COMMAND POST SECURITY Maps Consider the following OPSEC CPs maintain information in the form measures when positioning CPs: of easily understood map graphics and charts. Status charts can be combined with • The brigade CP’s best security situation maps (SITMAP) to give comes from frequent repositioning. commanders friendly and enemy situation snapshots that are needed for the planning • Do not erect any signs advertising process. The information can be updated CP locations. Disperse CP vehicles quickly. For simplicity, all map boards and ensure all vehicles and should be the same size and scale, and equipment are camouflaged. overlay mounting holes should be standard Maintain noise and light discipline. on all map boards. This allows for easy • Post a security force to protect transfer of overlays from one board to CPs. Establish security force another. positions as in any defensive position and maintain a 360-degree COMMAND POST POSITIONING perimeter. Position the security force far enough out from CPs to There are several considerations in prevent enemy direct fires on the positioning CPs. CPs should be located on CPs and equip it with antitank ground that is trafficable, even in poor (AT) weapons to protect CPs from weather. The area around the CP should enemy armor. Also establish a be large enough to contain all vehicles. reserve reaction force. Establish Other considerations for positioning CPs communications between the are— security force and the CPs. Always rehearse the execution of the • Ensure line of sight (LOS) perimeter defense. communications with higher, lower, and adjacent units. • At brigade level, the security force • Encourage redundancy of consists of support area personnel communi-cations. and off-duty personnel. Battalions normally rely on off-duty • Mask signals from the enemy. personnel. The command group • Use terrain for passive security may assist in securing a CP if they (cover and concealment). happen to be collocated. Units are rarely able to employ combat • Collocate with tactical units for elements to help secure a CP. mutual support and local security. Often, however, CP survivability • Locate the CP near an existing depends on concealment and road network out of sight from mobility.

3-20 FM 71-3

The following are some OPSEC equipment to temporarily take over CP techniques to consider: operations while the remainder is moving.

• The enemy threat is reduced when The XO or S3 selects a general command, control, and communi- location for the new CP site. The jump CP cations assets are positioned off can be accompanied by a quartering party. major enemy mounted avenues of The quartering party may consist of a approach. CPs should be positioned security element and personnel and so the enemy bypasses them. equipment for quartering the remainder of • If antennas are remoled outside the the CP. The SO, who is usually part of the perimeter, employ listening posts quartering party, ensures communications (LP) or OPs to secure them. on all nets can take place from the new • Disseminate near and far site. When the jump CP becomes recognition signals to all subor- operational, it also becomes the net dinate units and elements of the control station (NCS) for the unit's nets. CP. These signals, challenges, and The remainder of the CP then moves to passwords are used to control rejoin the jump CP. The S3 SGM access into the CP perimeter. supervises the breakdown of the main CP • In case of artillery or air attack, at the current location and the setup at the designate a rally point and an new location. alternate CP location at a minimum of 500 to 1,000 meters away. At brigade level, the role of the jump COMMAND POST DISPLACEMENT CP can be performed by the TAC CP if necessary. In this case, the TAC CP may CPs displace as a whole or by echelon. or may not be positioned at the new Displacement as a whole is normally done location. Jumping in this manner can be for short movements, with communi- done in both offensive and defensive cations maintained by alternate means and operations. If it has radios, the plan at minimal risk of degrading CP opera- section's M577 can serve as an alternative tions. CPs normally displace by echelon. A jump CP. portion of the CP, called a jump CP, moves to the new location, sets up During offensive operations, the main operations, and takes over OPCON of the CP normally moves with the main body. battle from the main CP. The remaining The main CP deploys temporarily to portion of the CP then moves to rejoin the enhance planning for future operations. jump CP. The jump CP consists of the necessary vehicles, personnel, and

3-21 FM 71-3

SECTION V. BRIGADE REHEARSALS

GENERAL REHEARSAL TYPES

A rehearsal is the act or process of Full-Dress practicing an action in preparation for the actual performance of that action. Full-dress rehearsals are the most Rehearsing key combat actions allows effective form of rehearsals. However, participants to become familiar with the they consume the most time and operation and to translate the relatively resources. This technique may involve up dry recitation of the tactical plan into to every soldier and system taking part in visual impression. This visual impression the operation. If possible, the unit assists them in orienting themselves to conducts the full-dress rehearsal under the both their environment and to other units conditions (weather, time of day, terrain) during the execution of the operation. expected to be encountered during the Moreover, the repetition of combat tasks actual operation. In defensive operations, during the rehearsal leaves a lasting the unit can conduct a full-dress rehearsal mental picture of the sequence of key over the actual terrain. In an offensive actions within the operation. Rehearsals operation, the unit conducts the rehearsal also provide a forum for subordinate units on any available terrain that closely and leaders to analyze the tactical plan to matches the terrain of the zone of attack. ascertain its feasibility, common sense, These rehearsals are the most productive and the adequacy of its command and type of rehearsal, however, they are also control measures before it is too late. To the most resource- and time-intensive. be effectively and efficiently employed in combat, rehearsals need to become Key Leader habitual in training. All units at every level should routinely train and practice a variety of rehearsal techniques. Local This type of rehearsal takes less time SOPs should identify appropriate and resources than the full-dress rehearsal rehearsal techniques and standards for because it involves only the key leaders of their execution. the unit. The unit conducts the rehearsal under conditions expected during combat Time is probably the most precious operations. This type of rehearsal resource available to commanders and requires the commander to decide the units. Rehearsals take time. The time level of leader involvement. Selected required for rehearsal varies with the leaders rehearse the plan in their assigned complexity of the task to be rehearsed, the tactical vehicles over the terrain. The type of rehearsal, and the level of terrain requirements remain the same as participation. For this reason, the those for the full-dress rehearsal; only the emphasis on rehearsals should be at the number of participants change. Because of lowest level possible, using the most the reduced number of participants, the thorough technique possible given the key leader rehearsal takes less time than a time available. full-dress rehearsal. This type of rehearsal

3-22 FM 71-3 is often accomplished during defensive own markers. Another option is to move operations. to a location that allows a view of the AOs, with each participant following the Terrain Model or Sand Table rehearsal using his own map and operations overlay. This technique has This technique is accomplished the added advantage of terrain relatively quickly and normally involves familiarization for the participants, but it key leaders. Since this type of rehearsal is has the disadvantage of allowing potential most often used when time and resources misinterpretations and terrain management prohibit the full-dress or key leader conflicts. rehearsal, it is probably used most often. The terrain model is discussed in greater Radio detail later in this section. A radio rehearsal is less time- and Sketch Map resource-intensive than the map rehearsal, but is not as desirable because participants A sketch rehearsal takes even less time do not share information face-to-face. and resources than a terrain model The brigade can conduct a radio rehearsal rehearsal. Units can conduct this at any time. This technique is used rehearsal almost anywhere day or night. extensively by FS units. To conduct a The procedures are the same as for a radio rehearsal, the commander and his terrain model rehearsal, except the staff transmit an interactive verbal commander uses a sketch in place of a execution of critical portions of the model. However, sketches must be large operation over the FM radio net. For this enough for all participants to see as the technique to be effective, every commander and his staff talk each participant must have operable subordinate leader through a sequential, communications, a copy of the brigade interactive, verbal execution of the OPORD, and all appropriate overlays. The operation. unit rehearses only the essential/critical phases of the operation. Prolonged FM Map radio communications, even when conducted with secure radios, may offer This technique has two variations. The the enemy vital intelligence and targeting most common is to use a large scale information on the operation. A (1:25,000) map and operations overlay, commander should use this method only laid horizontally with subordinate as a last resort. In some cases radio commanders seated around it. This rehearsals are essential to verify the technique is especially suited for communications system will work. If you inclement weather or at night, since the intend to execute the FS plan digitally, use rehearsal can take place in a tent or a radio rehearsal to test the system. building. Markers (such as cardboard cutouts or micro armor) are used to track Backbrief each unit as it moves and each key event as it happens. Each participant is A backbrief is a briefing to the higher responsible for placing and moving his commander in which the commander

3-23 FM 71-3 describes how he intends to accomplish supplement, or reinforce other maneuver his mission. This type should be used rehearsals. Special rehearsals can be when time is severely constrained. conducted at any time during the TLPs, just like any other rehearsal. Special

Although the majority of rehearsals EXAMPLE TERRAIN MODEL planned and conducted by maneuver units REHEARSAL are rehearsals of combat actions by subordinate maneuver units, rehearsals of Site Selection special tasks or special functional groups are sometimes desirable. Brigade staffs should select rehearsal sites that facilitate the type of rehearsal Some examples of special rehearsals being conducted. Consider the factors of include command group, TOC shift, METT-T to ensure the site is secure, large decontamination, R&S plan, and engineer enough to allow the type of rehearsal reserve demolition target turnover. The selected and, when possible, allows a view decision concerning which special of the AO. rehearsals to conduct, if any, is the commander’s. Special rehearsals may be Participants should come with maps, as formal or informal as necessity dictates overlays, and binoculars, prepared to view and time allows. the AO during the rehearsal. Brigade staffs plan for, and provide security from, Special rehearsals do not fit neatly into ground and air attacks. A rally point is the type and level classifications presented identified in case the rehearsal site is above. How extensive the rehearsal should attacked. Parking is provided, but the be and who should participate are dismount point and the parking area must dependent on time available, task not attract the enemy's attention. Terrain complexity, and unit training. (For models and maps should be oriented to the example, the TOC shift rehearsal is north. If the AO can be viewed, key probably nothing more than a talk-through terrain is identified on the ground and on of key information and actions likely to be the model or map. executed by the TOC, set against the framework of the S2’s event template.) Preparing a Terrain Model Rehearsing decontamination may be a Rehearsal Level III, full-scale, type A rehearsal on actual terrain when a certain unit must The terrain model rehearsal takes less cross a known contaminated area. The time and fewer resources than the full- battalion S2 may conduct a Level II, type dress rehearsal and the key leader D rehearsal of the patrolling portion of rehearsal and can be conducted day or the battalion R&S plan with the scout night. Constructed accurately, this terrain platoon. model rehearsal technique can be an excellent three-dimensional aid to assist Special rehearsals do not replace other subordinate leaders and staffs in rehearsals. Rather, they augment, visualizing the battle.

3-24 FM 71-3

Preparation of terrain models requires home station. The size of the terrain the unit to maintain a number of materiel. model or the time available may Once assembled, inventory the materiel necessitate using additional personnel. and maintain them like basic issue items The size of the terrain model can vary, (BII) for the designated vehicle carrying from a tabletop arrangement (sandbox) to the materiel. The materiel must enable the a model where the participants actually builder to accurately depict all required walk through a scaled-down version of the information. Recommended materiel for a terrain. A terrain model large enough to terrain model kit include— allow the key leaders to walk over a scaled-down version of the terrain helps • Tape measure (100 yards/meters participants to visualize the battlefield. long). The first step in creating an accurate • Engineer tape (minimum of 500 terrain model is to prescribe the scale. meters). This is easily accomplished by walking off • String to mark grid lines. several steps per kilometer, or using some other form of measurement. For example, • Yarn (red, blue, green, and if the brigade zone of attack is 10 yellow). kilometers by 6 kilometers, the builder of • Nails and tent stakes. the terrain model could assign one step per kilometer and walk off the scale of the • Index cards (3x5 and 5x7 terrain model. laminated). • Alcohol pens. The second step in developing an accurate terrain model is to lay down • Grease pencils. selected grid lines based on the tactical • Premade military and unit symbols. map. With the grid lines established, the • Magnetic compass. builder has a handy reference to measure the size and locations of the terrain • Hammer. features. This simple step increases the • Chalk. accuracy of the terrain model and ensures that the terrain features are the proper • Entrenching tool. scale. • Sandbags. The terrain model should depict all • Cotton balls. required information shown on the • Spray paint (red, blue, green, and operations overlay and brigade SITMAP yellow). to include key terrain features, enemy positions (known and suspected), and fire Identifying and training personnel to control measures. Place an arrow on the construct terrain models are responsi- terrain map to depict North for bilities shared by the brigade S3 plans orientation. Label all PLs, numbered hills, officer and the operations SGM. The and objectives with their appropriate brigade S3 section trains two primary and names. The terrain should mirror the four alternative terrain model builders at brigade operations and enemy overlays.

3-25 FM 71-3

Once the terrain model is complete, hour before line of departure (LD). Set position a map and operations overlay the time interval to be used to start and behind or at the side of the model as a track the rehearsal. For example, specify a point of reference. Attendance at the ten-minute interval to equate to one hour brigade rehearsal should include, at a of real time during the operation. minimum, the brigade commander, FSCOORD, brigade XO, coordinating staff, special staff, and all battalion task Step 4. Designate a recorder. This force commanders with their S3s and should be the S3, or a designated FSOs. LOs from higher or adjacent units representative from the operations cell. may attend. Highlight the ground rules and incorporate ground rules into the brigade Conducting the Rehearsal SOP. They include who controls the rehearsal (brigade XO), who actually The commander leads the rehearsal; walks the terrain board, how the rehearsal his staff runs it. The director of the will be controlled, and when special staff rehearsal is the brigade XO. As such, he officers brief. Special staff officers should rehearses his role during the operation. He brief by exception when a friendly or ensures tasks are accomplished by the enemy event occurs within their BOS. right unit at the right time and cues the commander to upcoming decisions. The Step 5. The brigade S3 reads the XO's script is the synchronization matrix mission statement, the commander reads and the DST. These are the foundations his commander's intent, and the S3 lays for the OPORD recorded in chronological out the friendly situation as it currently order. A terrain model rehearsal takes a exists, using the terrain model. proficient brigade from one to two hours to execute to standard. The following Step 6. The brigade S2 briefs the example outlines a step-by-step process current enemy situation. He then briefs the for conducting a brigade rehearsal. most likely enemy COA. (The enemy Step 1. Start at the appointed time and situation should already be set up on the conduct a formal roll call. Ensure terrain model.) The S2 also briefs the everyone brings binoculars, maps, and status of the brigade R&S plan, for necessary equipment. example citing any patrols still out and OP positions. Step 2. Ensure that the XO or the S3 orients the terrain model to the actual Step 7. The brigade S3 briefs friendly ground, the operations overlay, and the maneuver unit dispositions at the rehearsal map. Describe and point out the overall start time, including security forces. Other AOs and explain the markers used on the brigade staff officers brief their terrain model. subordinate unit positions at the start Step 3. Brief the timeline. The brigade time, as well as any particular points of XO should do this, or the S3 in lieu of the emphasis. For example, the chemical XO. Designate the rehearsal start time. officer briefs mission-oriented protection For example, have the rehearsal begin by posture (MOPP) level, and FSO shows depicting the anticipated situation one range of friendly and enemy artillery.

3-26 FM 71-3

Step 8. The commander gives Step 11. When .it becomes obvious appropriate commands. Brigade that additional coordination is required to FSOs/FSCOORDs tell when they initiate ensure success of the operation, try to fires, who is firing, from where, the accomplish it immediately. This coor- ammunition, and the desired target effect. dination is one of the key points of the Task force commanders tell when they rehearsal. Ensure it is understood by all initiate fire I AW their FS plans. If FISTs participants and captured by the recorder, are present, they initiate calls for fire. The and all changes to the published OPORD brigade XO talks for any staff section not are in effect. However, this is not the time present, and ensures all actions listed on to make major changes. Changes are kept the synchronization matrix or DST are to only those that are vital. As soon as addressed at the proper time or event. possible, the brigade S3 should collect the Avoid re-wargaming except as absolutely verbal FRAGOs into a written change to necessary, to ensure subordinate unit the OPORD. commanders understand the plan. If the staff has developed an order that Step 12. After the initial walk-through addresses contingencies, do not wargame of the base order, backstep to the the operation at the rehearsal site. situation at the initial DP. State the criteria for a decision to change the plan. Step 9. The enemy is portrayed by the Assume these criteria have been met and S2 section. The S2 section walks the then refight the fight from that point enemy through the most likely COA forward, until the desired end state is (situation template), stressing recon- attained. Complete any coordination to naissance routes, objectives, security ensure understanding and requirements is force composition and locations, initial met. Record any changes. contact, initial fires (artillery, air, attack helicopters)^ probable main force Step 13. Go to the next DP and ensure objectives or kill sacks, likely chemical that the criteria have been met. Repeat attack times and locations, and the step 12. commitment of reserves. The S2 must be specific by tying enemy actions to specific Step 14. Repeat step 13 until all DPs terrain or friendly unit actions. The walk- have been rehearsed. through should be an accurate portrayal of the event template. Step 15. Key CS and CSS actions need Step 10. Terminate the first phase of to be briefed. These items should be the rehearsal after the desired end state integrated into the rehearsal at the (from the commander's intent) is achieved. appropriate times. Summarizing these In the attack, this is usually on the actions at the end of the rehearsal adds to objective after consolidation. In the the value of the rehearsal as a defense, this is usually after the decisive coordination tool. action, such as the commitment of the brigade reserve and the final destruction Step 16. After the rehearsal is or withdrawal of the enemy. complete, the recorder should restate any

3-27 FM 71-3 changes, coordination or clarifications He should consider reiterating his intent directed by the commander, and estimate (purpose, method, end state), to remind the time that a written FRAGO to codify all participants that the goal is to the changes that follow. accomplish the brigade's mission.

Step 17. The commander should stress See FM 101-5 for more details on any points needing additional emphasis. rehearsals.

3-28 FM 71-3

CHAPTER 4 OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

During offensive operations the brigade commander sets the conditions for successful operations. He accomplishes this by employing all of his organic and supporting systems with precision. These systems are employed at their maximum capability to meet the conditions set by the brigade commander. The commander then maneuvers his force to decisively defeat the enemy.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Fundamentals of Offensive Operations 4-1 Section II. Forms of Tactical Offense 4-15 Section III. Brigade as a Covering Force 4-35 Section IV. Combined Arms Breaching Operations 4-38 Section V. Night Offensive Doctrine 4-43

SECTION I. FUNDAMENTALS OF OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

CHARACTERISTICS OF OFFENSIVE • Tempo. OPERATIONS • Audacity.

The offense is the primary means of gaining and maintaining the initiative. Surprise Through constant offensive pressure on Commanders achieve surprise by the enemy, the brigade commander is able attacking the enemy at a time or place to force the enemy to conform to his and in a manner for which he is not intent and retain his own freedom of physically or mentally ready. The maneuver. Even in the defense the commander must anticipate the enemy commander seeks to regain the initiative commander’s intent and deny the enemy through offensive action at the earliest the ability to collect intelligence on opportunity. friendly forces. Surprise is achieved by the direction, timing, boldness, and force The success of the attack depends on of the attack. Sudden and violent attacks the proper application of the four have a devastating effect on the enemy as offensive characteristics of initiative: do attacks from unexpected directions. • Surprise. Surprise can also be achieved from • Concentration. unexpected changes in tempo.

4-1 FM 71-3

Concentration ORGANIZATION OF OFFENSIVE BATTLES Concentration is achieved by massing To organize the battlefield, the the effects of combat power. To achieve commander and staff must view tactical concentration on the modern battlefield, offensive battles as operations in depth, and provide security for the force, the which consist of three interrelated parts: commander uses a combination of dispersion, concentration, deception, and • Deep operations. In vital parts of attack. The commander designates a main the attack zone, deep operations effort and allocates enough CS and CSS contribute to the success of the to accomplish his desired end state. The brigade’s close fight. Deep plan must be flexible enough to allow the operations limit the enemy’s commander the ability to shift the main options and disrupt its effort to the supporting effort if the coordination and synchronization. situation provides a greater opportunity Brigade deep operations are for success. closely linked with division operations. Identification of Tempo division deep operations assists the brigade in targeting units and Tempo is the rate of speed of military setting priorities for brigade deep action and may be either fast or slow. operations. Controlling and altering the tempo are • Close operations. These opera- essential to maintaining the initiative. tions include reconnaissance and While a rapid tempo is often preferred, security actions, the main effort, the tempo is adjusted to ensure and reserve actions. synchronization. Controlling and altering enemy and friendly tempo promotes • Rear operations. Rear operations surprise, keeps the enemy off balance, are necessary to maintain offensive denies the enemy freedom of action, and momentum. This may include contributes to the security of the fighting enemy airborne and attacking force. airmobile units within the BSA until augmented by combat units Audacity from brigade or division and conducting the necessary activities Audacity is key to successful to sustain the brigade’s offensive offensive action. This is the ability of momentum. leaders to understand and decisively and boldly operate within the commander’s PLANNING FOR OFFENSIVE intent. This type of action often negates OPERATIONS the disadvantage of numerical inferiority. The commander takes advantage of Successful offensive action requires opportunities and plans for success the concentration and synchronization of throughout his battle space. all assets. Available ground and air

4-2 FM 71-3 maneuver forces, engineers, FA, ADA, • Deceiving the enemy as to the attack helicopter, CAS, and EW assets location of the main attack. must be concentrated at the decisive point • Preventing or delaying enemy and time to ensure tactical success. This concentration against the main requires that the brigade mission be attack. analyzed and translated into specific objectives that, when secured, permit control of the area or facilitate Reserves are constituted to be destruction of the enemy force. The committed at the decisive time and place brigade plan designates— to exploit success or to ensure mission accomplishment. They should not be used • The deep attack. to reinforce failure in the hope of • The main attack and main effort. reversing a defeat. • The supporting attack. • The reserve. A reserve provides the commander with the flexibility to deal with • Follow-and-support forces, if any. unforeseen contingencies. It also adds to • Reconnaissance and security forces. security, although this is not its primary function. Reserves may consist of The deep attack is focused on utilizing maneuver and CS units. The reserve is the brigade’s available deep fires (lethal specifically used to— and nonlethal) to disrupt enemy functions or to delay or destroy enemy forces. The • Exploit success by moving to deep fight will set and maintain the attack an enemy weakness or conditions for success in the close fight. vulnerability. Inherent in deep operations planning is • Reinforce or maintain momentum the detail necessary to ensure that the by passing through or around units forward observers on the battlefield are held up by enemy forces. linked (redundantly if possible) to the delivery systems. This effort contributes • Defeat enemy counterattacks. to the success of the deep fight. The size of the reserve is determined The main attack is directed to secure by METT-T. The more vague the the objectives that contribute the most to situation, the larger the reserve. mission accomplishment. Whenever possible, one-third or more of the available combat power is retained in The supporting attack contributes to reserve. the success of the main attack in one or more of the following ways: The reserve is positioned to— • Fixing enemy forces to facilitate the main attack. • Permit rapid movement to points • Controlling terrain that facilitates of probable employment. maneuver of the main attack. • Weight the main attack by • Destroying enemy forces that destroying or blocking enemy hinder the main attack. counters to the main attack.

4-3 FM 71-3

• Provide security to unoccupied terrain. While conducting reconnaissance, terrain within the brigade sector. the brigade relies on limited assets. This • Provide maximum protection from reinforces the importance of a focused hostile observation and fire consistent R&S plan designed to confirm the with mission requirements. adopted enemy course of action.

Reserve missions should be In the offense, as in all operations, the sufficiently detailed to provide the brigade commander secures his force. reserve force commander a clear Surveillance, fires, OPSEC, and the understanding of the brigade effective use of obstacles and security commander’s intent and commitment forces protect the brigade. criteria. Plans are made to reconstitute a reserve at the earliest opportunity after SYNCHRONIZATION OF OFFENSIVE the original reserve is committed. OPERATIONS Designating on-order reserve missions to committed units is a recommended Successful offensive operations technique. require coordination, integration, and synchronization of all combat, CS, and Follow and support is an assigned CSS elements within the brigade AO. mission from a higher headquarters. The Synchronization of the BOS occurs follow-and-support force is not a reserve; vertically from corps and division it is a committed force that accomplishes through brigade to battalion and separate the following tasks: company. It also occurs horizontally among the staff sections. Major • Destroys bypassed units. considerations for integration of the BOS • Relieves units that have halted to in offensive operations follow. contain enemy force. • Blocks enemy reinforcements. Intelligence • Secures LOCs, EPWs, or key The brigade commander’s guidance to areas. the S2 should contain the commander’s • Controls refugees. PIR. After coordinating with the S3, additional intelligence requirements may Follow and assume, like follow and be recommended to the commander support, is not a form of the offense. A during the S2’s and staff’s IPB. follow-and-assume force is also a committed force. It plans and prepares to It is especially critical that the brigade take over and complete the mission of the S2 prepare an up-to-date enemy data base force it is following. This mission is during the IPB process to support common in offensive operations. A offensive operations and to answer the follow-and-assume force will often commander’s PIR. The threat estimate follow the main attack. and data base are used in identifying specific enemy vulnerabilities and Reconnaissance is the precursor to all weaknesses. This information assists the operations. It focuses on locating the brigade commander in properly enemy and provides information on concentrating his available combat power.

4-4 FM 71-3

The development of PIR and IPB is a used in sequence as the main body continual process throughout the planning advances. and execution of the offensive operation. Aviation units placed OPCON to the The brigade intelligence section answers brigade remain the responsibility of the PIR using a detailed R&S and collection aviation brigade for logistics support. plans developed and coordinated by the Efficient distribution of certain critical brigade S2 and the battalion task force classes of supply may require S2s and S3s. The brigade S2 requests coordination with the brigade’s FSB. additional information and collection assets from its higher headquarters when For a detailed discussion on ground the brigade commander’s PIR cannot be maneuver see Section II of this chapter. gathered by organic brigade assets. Fire Support During the operation, the brigade S2 provides the commander continuous FS can deliver a variety of munitions updates of enemy activities and to support brigade operations. FS assets anticipated enemy COAs. His sources available to the brigade are normally one include reports from the ASAS, DS FA battalion and organic battalion monitoring of battalion radio nets, and mortars. Additional FS assets may analysis of reported sightings. include—

Maneuver (Army Aviation) • CAS. • NGF. Elements from the divisional aviation • Army aviation. brigade may be placed OPCON to the brigade commander to accomplish a • Reinforcing and general support mission or for the duration of an reinforcing battalions. operation. Cavalry elements conduct • Electronic warfare assets. reconnaissance and security operations. Assault elements conduct air assault The brigade FSE is the focal point for operations and provide limited CSS integration of all FS for the brigade. To functions. Attack helicopter battalions effectively integrate FS into the augment and extend the brigade’s operation, the FSCOORD must maneuver capability and are most understand the mission, the commander’s effective against massed enemy armor intent, the concept of the operation, and and stationary or moving artillery. They the commander’s guidance for FS. The are also well-suited to conduct FSCOORD must be involved in the reconnaissance and security missions. planning process from the outset. Using the products of the IPB and TVA Aviation units operating with the processes, the FSCOORD and the FSO brigade or in the brigade AO coordinate jointly wargame COAs with the brigade locations for assembly areas, forward command and hisv staff. Following the assembly areas, and FARPs through the commander’s decision, the FSCOORD depth of the zone with the brigade S3. In produces the FS plans or execution offensive operations, these areas will be matrix, an attack guidance matrix, and the

4-5 FM 71-3

HPT list. These tools fully integrate FS Air Defense for the operation by focusing attack and acquisition systems on enemy systems The division commander’s ADA that must be eliminated. The FSCOORD priorities determine what ADA resources ensures FS assets are properly employed the brigade will receive. Normally, the and synchronized. brigade receives a battery of ADA attached, OPCON, or DS. Specific considerations for the employment of FS in offensive operations The ADO must understand the include— commander’s mission, intent, and concept of operations. Continued involvement by • Weighting the main attack by the ADO in the planning process is assigning priorities of FS to lead critical to the successful integration of elements. ADA support with the brigade concept. The brigade S3 needs to consider terrain • Isolating the point of attack. requirements to optimize ADA weapon systems and ground-based sensor/light • Softening enemy defenses by and special division interim sensor delivering effective preparatory coverage. fires. • Suppressing enemy weapon Considerations for employing ADA in systems to reduce the enemy stand- the offense are— off capability. • To concentrate ADA to achieve massive fires at decisive points. • Suppressing and obscuring overwatching enemy forces during • To integrate ADA weapon systems breach operations. throughout the brigade. • To weight the main effort with • Screening maneuver forces ADA protection. adjacent to enemy units. • To assist the S2 during the IPB • Suppressing bypassed enemy process and in analyzing air elements to limit their ability to avenues of approach. disrupt friendly operations. • To identify potential choke points and plan their protection. • Interdicting enemy counterattack forces, isolating the defending • To ensure the supporting ADA unit force, and preventing its is as mobile as the supported force. reinforcement and resupply. The ADA battery should be task • Providing counterfire to reduce the organized to support the operation from enemy’s ability to disrupt friendly the LD to the objective. In the offense, operations and to limit the enemy’s the following are normal air defense ability to rapidly shift combat priorities: power on the battlefield. • Maneuver forces. • Supporting rear operations. • Choke points.

4-6 FM 71-3

• Command, control, communi- emplaced to support the defense against cations, and intelligence assets. enemy counterattacks. • CSS assets. Survivability missions are of lower priority during offensive maneuvers; they Mobility and Survivability become important upon consolidation on the objectives and must be anticipated. The brigade engineer plans and coordinates mobility, countermobility, The brigade engineer must receive and survivability tasks to support the clear guidance and priorities for engineer offensive mission. He links engineer efforts. He is an integral part of the planning at division level and execution development of the scheme of maneuver; at battalion task force level. he coordinates with the S3, FSO, ADA officer, S2, and S4 to integrate and The engineer develops a scheme of synchronize engineer operations. engineer operations, through terrain visualization, that focuses on providing mobility support throughout the depth of Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical the attack. The combined arms breaching tenets provide the framework for Division assets available to support planning breaching operations: brigade offensive operations include NBC decontamination, NBC reconnaissance, • Intelligence. and smoke. These assets will normally be • Organization. platoon-size organizations. Based on the • Fundamentals. factors of METT-T, these organizations • Mass. may be OPCON, attached, DS, or GS to the brigade. • Synchronization.

The engineer battalion is task Decontamination organized forward to support in-stride, deliberate, or assault breaching Brigade decontamination operations operations. The staff engineer officer (S2, during the offense focus on immediate S3, and ABE) work closely with the decontamination operations. Thorough brigade S2 in developing obstacle decontamination operations are designed intelligence. The data is collected and for reconstitution operations. Operational used to develop the obstacle and situation decontamination operations are conducted templates. at the battalion level using organic lightweight decontamination equipment. Countermobility planning in the To facilitate decontamination operations, offense includes the coordination and the brigade decontaminates— wargaming of FASCAM delivery assets by the brigade engineer to close potential flank avenues of approach, fix enemy • As soon as possible. forces, and close retreat routes for • Only when necessary. engaged enemy units. Upon consolidation • As far forward as possible. of the objective, tactical obstacles are • By priority.

4-7 FM 71-3

The brigade commander identifies the attack. The FSB commander prepares mission-critical assets and establishes and executes a logistics plan developed to priorities for decontamination within the support the maneuver brigade’s tactical brigade. Logistics support for plan. decontamination is coordinated by the S4 and provided through normal supply The specific logistics needs of the channels. maneuver brigade are identified and coordinated by the brigade S4. Based on Reconnaissance the brigade S4’s planning estimate, the FSB commander and his staff tailor a All brigade units have an implied mobile CSS package to be pushed mission to conduct NBC reconnaissance, forward to support the brigade. Specific using organic detection and identification coordination for locations of ATPs, equipment. The brigade S3 establishes the UMCPs, and MSRs outside the BSA are NBC reconnaissance requirements and coordinated between the FSB S3 and tasks based on the brigade chemical brigade S4 at the rear CP and approved officer’s recommendations. The detection, by the brigade S3. This coordination marking, identification, and reporting of ensures the integration of the CSS plan contaminated areas are established in and the tactical plan. SOPs according to relevant STANAGs. FSB logistics support must be continuous. The FSB displaces priority Smoke resupply classes by bounds to support the momentum of the offense. The movement The brigade conducts smoke of the FSB is coordinated among the operations in the offense to screen FSB, rear CP, and main CP to ensure friendly forces and to obscure or deceive continuous support and to avoid impeding enemy forces. Assets that are available to maneuver elements. provide smoke include the vehicle engine exhaust smoke system, smoke pots, Command and Control artillery and mortar smoke, and smoke generators. To conduct a successful The command group, augmented by smoke mission, the brigade must provide other special staff as desired by the the following information to the commander, is positioned to see and supporting smoke unit: sense the battle. By being well forward, the commander can feel the tempo of the • Commander’s intent. battle, improve communications, and • Location of target. influence the main effort with his • Length of mission. presence. The command group moves • Start time. much of the time and relies on the • Visibility requirements. brigade TOC to maintain communications with higher and flanking units. Combat Service Support The TAC CP and the main CP are CSS operations in the offense are required to move frequently during designed to maintain the momentum of offensive operations. The TAC CP has

4-8 FM 71-3 command and control for the main CP infiltration as part of the brigade’s larger during these relocations. Therefore, the mission. TAC CP may be augmented with more people from the current operations, intelligence, operations support, and FS Envelopment sections out of the main CP. The signal section will leapfrog multichannel and Envelopment is the basic form of FM retransmission systems forward to maneuver that seeks to apply strength maintain communications. against weakness. Envelopment avoids the enemy’s front where forces are most The main CP will continue to perform protected, attention is focused, and fires its essential current battle coordination; are most easily concentrated. The attacker however, the main CP will weight its fixes the defender with supporting effort toward future battle planning. This attacks. The attacker maneuvers the main is possible because the disruption of attack around or over the enemy’s frequent displacement causes much of the defenses to strike at its flanks and rear. command, control, communications, and Detailed IPB and reconnaissance of the intelligence structuring for working the enemy defensive position are required for current battle to be pushed forward to the successful envelopments. If there is no TAC CP and command group. open flank or gaps leading to a flank, gaps can be created by fires, maneuver, or The rear CP and the FSB commander by deception operations. are heavily committed to coordinating and facilitating the pushing of CSS Successful envelopment often depends forward through the cluttered battlefield on speed to prevent the enemy from to sustain the attack. The rear CP and the reacting quickly and with enough force to FSB commander are initially concerned slow the attack. Brigade envelopments with sustaining forward units; providing usually require fixing the enemy with a rear area security; clearing MSRs; battalion supporting attack. Remaining evacuating casualties, equipment, and battalions then maneuver past the enemy EPWs; and preparing to reestablish CSS flank to rear positions. The enemy is then base areas forward. forced to fight in several directions or to abandon positions. FORMS OF MANEUVER Envelopment is the preferred form of The five basic forms of maneuver maneuver. Striking from several are envelopment, turning movement, directions at once or from unexpected infiltration, penetration, and frontal directions forces the enemy to fight along attack. The brigade can conduct a frontal unprepared, lightly defended, or attack, penetration, and envelopment. The undefended avenues of approach (see brigade can participate as one element of Figure 4-1). The double and the single a turning movement conducted by corps. envelopment are variations of the Subordinate infantry units can conduct an envelopment.

4-9 FM 71-3

O O o w o QI íaeo [EE u □ ED CD «V

ÜJ u (-)

Figure 4-1. Envelopment.

Turning Movement through the enemy’s defense. The brigade attacks after infiltration or uses A turning movement is a large scale infiltration to obtain intelligence and to envelopment in which the attacking force harass the enemy. Though it is not passes over and around the enemy defense restricted to small units or dismounted to secure objectives deep in the enemy’s infantry, the brigade normally employs rear. As a result, the enemy’s position is infiltration techniques with a part of its made untenable. The enemy is forced to units and performs offensive operations “turn” and attack to his rear, or attempt a with the remaining units. retrograde operation. Brigades participate in turning movements as part of a larger Dismounted infiltration is particularly force. effective when both threat forces are mechanized and • unaccustomed to Infiltration defending against dismounted troops. In these instances, infantry with supporting Infiltration is the covert movement engineers infiltrate, followed quickly by (mounted or dismounted) of all or part of mounted attacks. FS assists infiltration by the attacking force through enemy lines supporting the deception plan. The to a favorable position in the enemy’s commander centralizes control of FS to rear. An armored brigade cannot expect preclude the loss of surprise and to infiltrate all its combat elements fratricide as the infiltration is conducted.

4-10 FM 71-3

Normally infiltration is conducted attack is to overrun and destroy or with light infantry forces assigned to a capture a weakened enemy in position or brigade for the purpose of attacking to fix an enemy force in place to support elements along the FEBA or in the another friendly attack elsewhere. security zone to facilitate friendly Although the frontal attack strikes along maneuver. Targets normally include the entire front within the zone of the company defenses located on terrain attacking force, it does not require that all within a major choke point that hinders combat forces be employed in line or that the brigade’s ability to maintain its all combat forces conduct a frontal attack. momentum. During a frontal attack, the commander seeks to create or take advantage of Penetration conditions that permit a penetration or envelopment of the enemy position. Fires The penetration attempts to rupture are delivered across the zone of the enemy defenses on a narrow front and attacking force, then shifted to the points create both assailable flanks and access to of penetration or envelopment to the enemy’s rear. Penetration is used facilitate rapid movement through enemy when enemy flanks are not assailable, positions. when enemy defense is overextended, or when time does not permit some other BRIGADE FORMATIONS FOR form of maneuver. Penetrations typically OFFENSIVE ACTIONS comprise three stages: initial rupture of enemy positions, roll-up of the flanks on The brigade may use any of several either side of the gap, and exploitation to basic formations in offensive operations. secure deep objectives. The scheme of maneuver identifies the initial attack formation that offers the A successful penetration depends on best chance for success. These formations the ability of the attacker to suppress are not restrictive drills but general enemy weapons, mass forces and fires to techniques for employment of subordinate overwhelm the defender at the point of battalion task forces. attack, and quickly pass sufficient forces through the gap to rupture the defense. Brigade in Column Once this is accomplished, the commander has two options. He can A column of battalion task forces may continue forward to rupture successive be adopted for the initial attack when defense lines and ultimately enter enemy terrain or enemy defenses force the rear areas, or he can turn forces to roll-up brigade to attack on a narrow front (see enemy positions from the flanks. Figure 4-2). In certain situations, the strength, composition, and location of Frontal Attack enemy reserves may require the brigade to adopt this formation to provide the The frontal attack is the least depth necessary for a sustained attack. desirable form of maneuver. A frontal This formation facilitates retention of the attack is used to strike the enemy across a initiative and permits flexibility because wide front and over the most direct the following battalion task forces are in approaches. The purpose of the frontal position to move through or around the

4-11 FM 71-3 leading elements to maintain the effectively from columns. Passage of the momentum of the attack. It also provides brigade through a given area using this a degree of security because the following formation usually requires more time than battalions are in position to counter a when other formations are used. threat from either flank and support the uninterrupted advance of the leading Brigade Vee companies. However, brigades in column can concentrate only a small portion of their combat power to the front initially The brigade vee may be employed when great depth in the attack is not and are subject to piecemeal commitment required, such as in a limited-objective and slower deployment to the front. attack (see Figure 4-3). It may also be used in the initial attack against a weak enemy, vulnerable to defeat by an attack SECURITY FORCE on a relatively wide front. In the envelopment, this formation can be used when the brigade can envelop an assailable flank on a broad front. Lead task forces receive priority for FS.

SECURITY FORCE Cm} FLANK FLANK SECURITY SECURITY DS CJD rm CD §3

FLANK FSB FLANK SECURITY SECURITY

-JUL IMI CD REAR SECURITY

FSB I REAR SECURITY Note: Size, composition, and distance of operation from main body for advance, flank, and rear security I will vary according to the Note: Size, composition, and distance of commander's estimate of the situation. operation from main body for advance, flank, and rear security will vary according to the commander'e estimate of the situation. Figure 4-2. Brigade in column.

Brigades require multiple routes in their zones if they are to attack Figure 4-3. Brigade vee.

4-12 FM 71-3

t SECURITY FORCE un. jm ÉÉ CED

FLANK SECURITY FLANK SECURITY

FSB

REAR SECURITY

Note: Size, composition, and distance ol operation from main body for advance, flank, and rear security will vary according to the commander's estimate of the situation.

Figure 4-4. Brigade on line without a reserve.

Brigade on Line Without a Reserve After commitment to battle, the brigade can rapidly alter its formation Normally, the brigade commander and organization for combat to conform retains some degree of flexibility in to the changing situation. The brigade’s his initial attack by withholding part of scheme of maneuver should ensure his force in reserve; however, where superior combat power at the point of METT-T warrants, a formation with two decision. Regardless of the initial or more task forces abreast without a formation for an attack, rigid adherence reserve may be used successfully (see to formations and FS plans contradicts Figure 4-4). Inherently dangerous, it is the basic concepts of the attack. considered when the enemy has been Subordinates freely exercise initiative to routed and is incapable of a large-scale exploit enemy weaknesses within the counterattack. This might occur during a context of the operation to achieve the corps or division exploitation or pursuit. commander’s intent. FS is usually positioned well forward to provide maximum continuous fires as the brigade attacks. The fundamental Brigade Box consideration for using this formation is whether the mission dictates a rapid The brigade box provides combat advance on a broad front. power forward over a relatively broad

4-13 FM 71-3

SECURITY FORCE

LL nu A (-) CZ> (->

DS Cm) ŒD FLANK FLANK SECURITY SECURITY IL X FSB I rm » t mi (-) CZ) w

REAR SECURITY

Figure 4-5. Brigade box. front. The box allows the commander to Brigade Wedge employ the rear elements in mutually supporting attacks. He can converge the The brigade wedge/diamond allows combat power of leading units into one the commander to gain contact with coordinated assault. The box formation minimal combat power. This formation also allows the commander to gain also provides the commander flexibility information across a broad front (see in massing combat power once contact is Figure 4-5). Gaps, weak points or flanks made (see Figure 4-6). The wedge/ of the enemy’s disposition are more diamond provides good 360-degree rapidly discovered. security for the brigade.

4-14 FM 71-3

SECURITY FORCE

HR CZ) (-)

_LL 11 DS Œ) Cm) FLANK FLANK SECURITY SECURITY rm^ —u jm FSB (-) CD CZ) (-)

i i i re L —i- 1 — j

^ REAR SECURITY

Figure 4-6. Rear security.

SECTION II. FORMS OF TACTICAL OFFENSE

The forms of brigade offensive • Attack. operations are— - Hasty attack. • Movement to contact. * Planning. - Planning. + Advance of reconnaissance * Security force. and security forces. * Advance guard. + Deployment of reconnaissance and security forces. * Flank and rear security. + Assault by the main body. * Main body. - Preparation. * Preparation. - Execution. * Execution.

4-15 FM 71-3

- Deliberate attack. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT * Planning. When the enemy situation in the + Support force. objective area is vague, a movement to contact is conducted to gain or reestablish # Mission. contact with the enemy. It is used to # Composition. develop the situation early to provide an advantage before decisive engagement # Employment. (see Figure 4-7). The movement to contact is characterized by decentralized + Maneuver force. control and rapid commitment of forces # Mission. from the march. If the brigade gains contact with the enemy, the operation # Composition. ends in an attack, a defense, a # Employment. withdrawal, or a bypass. + Actions on the objective. During the movement to contact, the brigade provides security by posting flank + Scheme of maneuver. and rear security screens as appropriate. * Preparation. This is not necessary when the flank(s) or rear is protected by adjacent or following * Execution. friendly units. Forward security is * Continuation of the attack. established by the use of a forward security force. - Feint. In the separate brigade, this is an ideal - Raid. mission for the brigade’s cavalry troop. - Demonstration. In divisional brigades, the forward security force is provided by the lead • Exploitation. battalion task force. The size and • Pursuit. composition of the force are based on METT-T, particularly the width of the brigade sector and the enemy situation. The brigade is trained and task The forward security force— organized to pass from one operation to another without delay. The types of • Conducts reconnaissance. operations may be conducted in sequence • Develops the situation. in a successful battle, beginning with a • Destroys enemy reconnaissance movement to contact to locate the enemy elements. and ending with the destruction of the enemy through pursuit. • Secures key terrain. • Reports and breaches obstacles (if Each of these offensive operations possible). will be disclosed in terms of planning, • Prevents unnecessary or premature preparation, and execution. deployment of the main body.

4-16 FM 71-3

ttt ,**» «t«. CD tu IMl Cm) CD

CO SECURITY FORCE

un. ÜH Œ) CD (-) MAIN tf. BODY <-) £§3|<*> CD Cm) ttt (♦) TOC TAC FLANK dD(-> CP FLANK SECURITY JJ nn SECURITY CD FLD (-) SPT I FWD (-) m

TTT (♦)

REARm SECURITY

Figure 4-7. Movement to contact.

The main emphasis is placed on the remainder of the battalion behind the best use of roads and terrain. The brigade following task force. conducts aggressive reconnaissance to identify enemy locations, obstacles, and Brigade air defense protection is areas of possible NBC contamination and provided by attached ADA assets and prepares to overcome obstacles and organic weapon systems. ADA occupies rapidly pass through defiles. Normally, selected sites along the route of march movement is conducted in multiple and integrates into the moving column. columns. Subordinate battalions adopt the These elements provide low-altitude air formations that enable them to defense. See FM 44-16 for discussions of accomplish their missions. air defense procedures applicable to this offensive operation.

The brigade integrates FS into march The decision to attack, bypass, defend, columns and attack formations. Normally, or withdraw must be made rapidly at each this includes one FA battery immediately echelon. This decision is governed by the behind the lead task force and the understanding of the division commander’s

4-17 FM 71-3 intent. Commanders should not hesitate to situation is vague. The commander must take appropriate action in the absence of move his forces toward an objective until orders. While efforts to retain the it is reached or there is enemy contact. To initiative remain decentralized, the maintain flexibility of maneuver after decision to commit the entire force or to contact, he must put forward the halt the attack remains with the senior minimum force possible. The mission commander. best suited to execute security of a movement to contact is a guard. The main Planning factors that determine which mission is used are the enemy situation, the terrain, The primary consideration in planning and the amount of risk assumed by the a movement to contact is the commander. His risk is keyed to the determination of actions that are amount of time the security force gives anticipated during the movement. This the commander to maneuver his other drives the organization of the brigade for elements. the mission. Potential threat defensive locations, OPs, EAs, and obstacles are Advance Guard among those items that must be identified early and incorporated into the R&S plan. The advance guard is normally Security forces for a brigade furnished and controlled by the leading movement to contact may consist of the element of the main body. It is organized advance, flank, and rear guards. When a to fight through small concentrations of enemy forces identified by the covering brigade is moving as part of a division movement to contact, it can provide force or to make sure the main body can deploy uninterrupted into attack elements to reinforce or augment the formations. Necessary CS, such as division covering force, and provide and engineers and artillery, is integrated into control either right or left flank guard and/or rear guard. the advance guard. Reconnaissance assets and surveillance systems are used to assist the advance guard in detecting the Security Force enemy before actual contact.

The security force locates the enemy, Flank and Rear Security develops the situation, and prevents the unnecessary or premature deployment of Flank and rear security protect the the main body. Its missions may include main body from observation, direct fire, destroying enemy reconnaissance, and surprise attack. These forces may be securing key terrain, or containing enemy strong enough to defeat an enemy attack forces. The security force operates well or to delay it long enough to allow the forward of the main body. main body to deploy. The commander must perform a risk analysis to tailor the When planning for the security force, size of the security force. the commander considers whether there has been any contact with the enemy, the Flank and rear security operate under enemy has broken contact, or the enemy the control of the brigade main body.

4-18 FM 71-3

Flank security travels on routes parallel objective is to integrate and synchronize to the route of the main body. It moves the tasks with other BOS. In a movement by continuous marching or by successive to contact, he considers the enemy or alternate bounds to occupy key situation and allocates his forces positions on the flanks of the main body. accordingly. He recommends a task During the movement to contact, the organization for the advance guard and flank security also maintains contact with forward task forces to support in-stride the advance guard. Rear security follows breaching. The objective is to maintain the main body. the speed of the main body and not become impaired by obstacles. The A rear or flank guard is similar to an brigade engineer anticipates and assigns a .advance guard in strength and “be prepared” deliberate breach mission. composition. If the flanks or rear of the His thought process includes the tenets of brigade are secured by adjacent or breaching (intelligence, mass, synchro- following units, the size of the brigade nization, organization, and fundamentals) security force can be reduced. as he conducts the wargaming process. See FM 90-13-1 for additional information. The Main Body

The main body contains the bulk of Air defense protects both the forward the brigade’s combat power. It is ground forces and the main body. Some organized and deployed to conduct a air defense assets accompany the hasty attack or defense on short notice. maneuver forces, moving with them as March dispositions of the main body must part of the tactical formation, and others permit maximum flexibility during the will bound with the force, providing movement and after contact with the main protection from a stationary position. enemy force. Because movement to contact is Elements of the main body may be characterized by increased consumption committed to reduce pockets of resistance of petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL), contained or bypassed by the covering increased vehicular maintenance force, or may be left for elimination by requirements, and reduced ammunition follow-and-support units. Elements of a expenditure, planning should be geared covering force that are assigned toward pushing supplies forward. The containing missions are relieved as speed of the operation and the high POL rapidly as possible to rejoin the covering consumption necessitate careful planning force and avoid dissipating their strength. of CSS operations; moreover, the brigade’s support organization must be The main FS task in a movement to capable of sustaining uninterrupted contact is to provide immediate delivery of supplies. As a result, the responsive suppressive fires to the support units will often require maneuver units in contact. reinforcements during movement to contact. Additional MP units may also be The staff engineer plans and necessary to ensure adequate traffic wargames critical engineer tasks. His control.

4-19 FM 71-3

CD CD m HgK- \ ED rrn CD (-> Ha (-> m ce CD cm - TAC CP TOC 1 X 2 CFD ED (-) SPT -

\ m m

Figure 4-8. Brigade movement to contact as a part of a division movement.

The brigade main CP would normally the division command and control displace as far forward as possible before facilities. The TAC CP and command beginning movement to contact to support group would operate forward with the the operation with a stable command and main body to facilitate decision making control environment. The location and transition to other offensive tactical depends on the depth of the movement to missions (see Figures 4-8 and 4-9). contact, time available, and location of

4-20 FM 71-3

SECURITY FORCE

ÜADVANCE GUARD

I-)

ŒD <-> IMIirSa FLANK TOC TAC CP FLANK SECURITY SECURITY

J()

| SPT |l->

J(-)

REAR SECURITY

Figure 4-9. Separate brigade movement to contact (independent movement).

Preparation When conducting the rehearsal, he must ensure the brigade players When preparing for movement to understand their individual and team contact, the primary concern of the responsibilities. Options and contingency commander is that his subordinate planning are essential during rehearsal so commanders understand their individual virtually every eventuality is addressed. missions within the context of his intent. He must point out where formations may This is partially accomplished after the have to change, or where speed of the order is issued by an immediate operation is adjusted as a result of the backbrief. Once the battalion task force terrain or suspected enemy. Integration commanders have an opportunity to and coordination between combat, CS, conduct their own TLPs, they may be and CSS elements will go a long way recalled to the brigade commander for a toward lessening the support problems rehearsal and update. after crossing the LD. The commander must think through the entire operation before rehearsal. He Each commander rehearses what to do must identify possible choke points and when making contact with the enemy, not examine the enemy’s probable COAs. only for his benefit but so the

4-21 FM 71-3 other commanders understand their technique for moving CSS assets without responsibilities to the element in contact. creating overwhelming space control The S2 should role-play the enemy problems. commander. Execution The most critical decision the brigade commander must make is the commitment The brigade moves as directed by the of his reserve force. It is paramount that brigade commander. The mission is to he be provided timely and accurate regain contact with the enemy. The intelligence on the situation so the enemy may leave nuisance minefields; or reserve is effectively committed. Even he may leave obstacles guarded by small after the reserve is committed to the stay-behind parties to slow the brigade’s fight, the commander should look for movement. It must be assumed the enemy forces to create a new reserve. will overwatch choke points and defiles. The commander must be aware of As with maneuver, it is important to these delaying actions, and give bypass rehearse the FS plan. The brigade criteria so the speed of the main body is commander reviews the conduct of not impaired. Unless an enemy stay- battery movement and the brigade FS behind force provides a significant threat plan with his FSCOORD, and ensures to one of the formations, it is fixed, subordinate maneuver commanders bypassed, and handed over to a follow-on understand their role in executing the support force. plan. Forward and flank security forces The engineer commander and staff execute their mission in terms of both the ensure task organization linkup is commander’s intent and the R&S plan. complete, monitor precombat checks and The movement of the brigade can be inspections, and supervise rehearsals. The controlled using PLs and checkpoints on engineer battalion commander is the key easily identifiable terrain. Unit player at the brigade rehearsal. He talks orientation is first directed in zone with through critical engineer missions, tasks, respect to the formation itself, and second actions, and decisions as the battle is toward those areas suspected of posing a played out. threat to the brigade.

CSS rehearsal is very important in a Movement to contact ends with the movement to contact due to the extended occupation of an objective or limit of lines and speed of the operation. Planned advance without enemy contact, or when LRPs should be checked during rehearsal contact is made and the enemy cannot be as should any scheduled refueling defeated or bypassed. This occurs in a operations. Route security and convoy series of engagements and/or hasty security are especially important as there attacks. In an encounter with a moving are no established enemy lines. Moreover, force, action should take place without the possibility of bypassing undetected hesitation. Battalions use fire and enemy forces is all too real and could movement to fix the enemy. The decision become a severe threat to CSS operations. to attack, bypass, or defend must be made The echeloning of trains is an effective rapidly at each echelon. The decision

4-22 FM 71-3

must be governed by an understanding of CSS elements follow the main body the division commander’s intent. and are protected by the rear guard. As forces require refueling and resupply, the In the execution of the movement to support elements move forward in logistic contact, the FS plan should continuously packages (LOOP AC). UMCPs are be updated to reflect the availability of established as required. more detailed information provided by the maneuver units and the S2’s The most critical control measures are refinement of the situation template. This objectives, PLs, checkpoints, axes of includes changes to the maneuver plan advance, and boundaries. Intermediate made by the commander in response to objectives may be used to coordinate the enemy actions. essential movements of attacking forces, but their excessive use can reduce the momentum of the attack. On-order During movement, engineer assets objectives are used to orient following must be protected by the combat forces and reserves quickly and to maneuver elements. Only after an increase the flexibility of tactical obstacle has been identified and no maneuver throughout the force. bypass route found, will the engineers move forward to breach. However, during Attacking units may bypass local the reconnaissance for bypass routes, an obstacles and stubborn pockets of engineer element may move forward to resistance that do not threaten overall conduct initial reconnaissance and success according to the higher assessment of the obstacle to confirm or commander’s intent. Bypassed enemy deny whether planned engineer support forces then become the responsibility of will accomplish the mission. On order of the higher commander. Also, the the maneuver commander, engineer assets directing maneuver headquarters needs to found in the follow-on forces have the retain some ability to reinforce fires and additional responsibility to reduce redirect maneuver with minimum oral obstacles bypassed by the advance guard, instructions. The most effective means of or to breach obstacles encountered by the accomplishing this goal is with an flank guards. operation overlay that reflects the higher commander’s intent and scheme of As the air defense elements maneuver maneuver (see Figure 4-10). The overlay with the brigade, the air defense plan gives each command echelon flexibility must be continuously refined to reflect to mass fires and modify maneuver plans any changes in the enemy situation. as the situation develops. FM 71-3

LOA PL BLACK LOA — PL BLACK

OBJ FOX PL BLUE

BLUE

NÂ004.

J RABBI

2X1 1X3

RIVER PL RED PLRED

LD/LC LD/LC

Figure 4-10. Sample operations graphies for a brigade movement to contact.

ATTACK on input from the S2 as well as his own experience. Much of the planning for a Hasty Attack movement to contact is based on the desired outcome on contact. If the A hasty attack is conducted to gain or situation is vague and the enemy is a maintain the initiative. Before mounting a considerable distance away, he may hasty attack, the commander must choose to lead with a large number of develop the situation, determine enemy reconnaissance elements spread over a strength, and rapidly mass firepower wide area to develop the situation and against the enemy. A hasty attack is retain the main body in a tighter, more usually conducted following a movement responsive formation. to contact. To maintain momentum, it is conducted with the resources immediately Regardless of the formation selected available. for reconnaissance and security elements, the hasty attack normally occurs in the Planning following sequence. Therefore, the drills and SOP tasks that are associated with The commander has a vague picture of each step should be reevaluated within where and how the enemy defends, based the context of the current situation.

4-24 FM 71-3

Advance of Reconnaissance and become the support force for an assault Security Forces by the main body.

In planning the advance of Assault by the Main Body reconnaissance and security elements, the commander should identify the direction As the security force suppresses the of movement, possible danger areas, enemy with direct and indirect fires, the objectives to be occupied, and bypass main body changes from a movement to criteria. This planning is the same process contact formation to an assault formation. used in the movement to contact The size of the actual assault force is planning. determined by the intelligence generated by the advance guard. The planning for this assault is generally limited to Deployment of Reconnaissance templated or suspected enemy defensive and Security Forces locations. In this regard, the identification of areas such as Once contact has been made with the checkpoints corresponding to these and enemy, the security force attempts to other easily identifiable locations allows develop the situation. In planning, the the maneuver units to execute quickly major consideration for deployment is from FRAGOs. However, not all task organization. Reconnaissance maneuver units will be committed to the elements generally are not heavy enough assault. The commander maintains to deploy against an enemy and must be security throughout the operation; augmented by armored forces. The therefore, he identifies which units commander ensures that the organization maintain security if the main body is of the security force is a mix of armored deployed. and reconnaissance elements. Preparation Based on the commander’s guidance, the reconnaissance force will move to the The commander prepares for the flanks or continue its reconnaissance. In brigade hasty attack while rehearsing the either case this force maintains contact movement to contact. Specifically, he with the enemy until the security force must run the brigade staff and arrives. commanders through a series of enemy COAs. This exercises command and staff Again, the organization must be based drills and SOPs. There are several enemy on METT-T considerations. One of the actions to consider during rehearsals: key points the commander should • The advance guard makes contact remember is that the enemy may want to with a small force. Options may slow the main body by making it deploy. include fix and bypass so as not to The advance guard must have enough sacrifice speed, or conduct a hasty firepower to destroy smaller size attack. elements. If it does not, the enemy will have accomplished its mission. If the • The advance guard makes contact enemy encountered is too strong for the with a large force. Options include advance guard, it must be prepared to possible hasty attack, suppressing

4-25 FM 71-3

for the main body attack, or hasty must trust the judgment of his battalion attack while the main body commanders. Once the brigade bypasses. commander decides to conduct a hasty • A flank security force makes attack, he puts his full weight into assuring that each subordinate contact with a small force. The flank security force can fix and commander gets the necessary support. Any CAS sorties that may be allocated to bypass or conduct a hasty attack. What does the rest of the main the brigade should be synchronized to augment the fires of the assault force. body do in the meantime? Each element must move quickly as in a • A flank security force makes drill. Commanders talk laterally and contact with a large force. The vertically, making suggestions and flank security force suppresses the maneuvering as a team. The brigade enemy, while elements of the main operates as a close-knit unit, where each body conduct the attack. What knows his role and that of his teammate. does the remainder of the The commander must know, through formation do during the attack? continuous information flow from subordinate commanders, what to expect The commander reinforces his intent of each element and what he can give in throughout the rehearsal, and identifies return. any possible difficulties in execution. The S2 ensures the enemy COA is accurately The element that makes initial contact portrayed. has the responsibility to develop and make a quick assessment of the situation. During the rehearsal, the commander In particular, the commander of the unit verifies that his control measures are in contact must quickly decide whether to adequate for the hasty attack. More often fix and bypass, attack, or become the than not, the hasty attack will be a support force for an attack by the main FRAGO. Therefore, the commander body. Also, his report to higher ensures “on order” graphics are adequate headquarters drives the decisions of the to control the hasty attack. The higher commander. Assuming the commander ensures control measures situation is such that the advance guard sufficiently control movement and direct must lay down a base of fire for a hasty and indirect fires. attack by the main body, thus becoming the support force, the advance guard commander must move to a position of Execution advantage over the enemy force. Specifically, the support force attempts to The commander has a particularly fix the enemy to deny their freedom of difficult role during the hasty attack. He movement. While this occurs, the allows his subordinates to develop the commander of the support force situation and make decisions quickly, constantly updates the higher commander with very little planning. It is paramount, about the situation and attempts to therefore, that subordinate commanders identify the most effective direction of understand the brigade commander’s attack for the assault force. The brigade intent; likewise, the brigade commander commander quickly gives instructions for

4-26 FM 71-3 the CS elements to support the brigade exploited to the extent that leads to the designated main effort. For example, the enemy’s defeat, destruction, or neutra- artillery positions forward to range to the lization. Brigade commanders plan identified enemy, probable adjoining deliberate attacks when directed or as the enemy positions, and enemy counterattack opportunity warrants and execute them to avenues of approach. support the overall purpose of operations.

The force designated to conduct the Planning assault must rapidly change formation from whatever it was for the movement to The factors of METT-T influence each contact to the appropriate attack situation in which a deliberate attack formation. The assault force commander must be made and prevent development of communicates with the support force a standard organization for combat. While commander to coordinate direct and the commander’s estimate process must indirect fires as the assault force conducts be conducted for each deliberate attack, their movement to the enemy position and general rules can be stated. The brigade during the final assault of the enemy commander organizes forces to fix and to position. In particular, the assault force maneuver against the enemy. Engineers commander isolates the position quickly are task organized to the force penetrating from other possible enemy positions and the enemy’s defensive positions. An suppresses the enemy’s ability to observe intelligence collection effort is conducted or engage the assault force. This is to locate enemy reserves and second- accomplished by a combination of direct echelon forces. and indirect fire. In the meantime, reconnaissance elements must screen to FS planning is characterized by the any exposed flank(s) of the assault force, full integration of intelligence-gathering ensuring security. sources into the targeting process. The brigade DS FA battalion uses the Deliberate Attack DIVARTY, intelligence officer, and brigade controlled and supporting A deliberate attack is a fully intelligence sources to locate HPTs. Fires synchronized operation. Due to the are planned for HPTs. FS systems are detailed planning and synchronization positioned well forward and in depth to required, a brigade may conduct a provide continuous support throughout deliberate attack from a defensive the attack. Displacement of FS systems is posture. If in an offensive posture, a executed to maintain continuous FS. brigade may transition to deliberate attack immediately after entering an area of Brigades conduct deliberate attacks operations. In either case, the enemy through coordinated battalion task force situation is known and the brigade attacks consisting of fire and maneuver. commander has enough combat power to A battalion task force participates in a defeat the enemy. This is accomplished brigade deliberate attack as a main effort through a detailed reconnaissance effort or as a supporting effort. Key to the main that identifies the enemy’s weakness. attack achieving its purpose, a battalion Once identified, the brigade’s combat task force is designated as the main power is focused on this weakness and is effort. The brigade commander designates

4-27 FM 71-3 the supporting effort, ensuring the main fire assets may be increased to set the effort accomplishes its mission through conditions for the main effort. supporting attacks, a follow-and-support role, or follow-and-assume-the-main- Employment effort role. Depending on the missions given, Supporting Effort supporting efforts attack as any other force. The difference is that the The mission, composition, and supporting effort must plan with the main employment of the supporting effort are effort in mind. (How will direct and explained in the following paragraphs. indirect fires assist the main effort? How will maneuvering of forces aid the main effort and not mask its forces?) Mission Additionally, the supporting effort must also be prepared to engage targets of The supporting effort sets and opportunity within the commander’s maintains the conditions necessary for the intent. Similarly, the supporting effort success of the main effort. A battalion must be prepared to move to other task force, as the supporting effort, fixes positions from which it can continue to enemy forces by attacking objectives that aid the main effort. support the main effort’s objective. The supporting effort can also suppress large forces that it cannot destroy, allowing the Main Effort main effort to have maneuver options. These may be forces that the main effort The mission, composition, and is attacking directly or they may be forces employment of the main effort are that could influence the successful attack discussed in the following paragraphs. of the main effort. Tasks for supporting forces are offensive or defensive in Mission nature. They include fix, attrit, suppress, or delay, and also may include seize, The main effort closes with the enemy secure, or destroy. to defeat, destroy, or neutralize him. In most cases, tasks are purely offensive in Composition nature, e.g., seize, destroy, secure, or neutralize. Supporting efforts at brigade level normally consist of battalion task forces, Composition or in some situations, a portion of a task force that is working directly for the The maximum possible strength brigade. They are still allocated resources should be placed in the main effort. When for successful mission accomplishment, possible, it should be a combined arms but supporting efforts are only allocated unit of tanks, mechanized infantry, enough to accomplish their missions so engineer, and aviation. The main effort that the main focus will be the main should be supported to the fullest extent effort. In some cases, direct or indirect possible with artillery and CS/CSS assets.

4-28 FM 71-3

Employment Preparation

The main effort closes with the enemy In preparation for the deliberate as quickly and directly as possible to attack, the commander rehearses the exploit the effects of the supporting maneuver and synchronization of the efforts. It is usually committed so that it brigade’s assets. Specifically, the has mass, and when possible, it seeks to commander ensures that his commanders attack at an identified weak point in the understand both the maneuver plan and enemy’s defense. Once the main effort is his intent, so that if they must deviate committed, it should proceed with all the from the maneuver plan it is within the speed and violence at its command. The context of his intent. advance should be timed so the elements of the main effort arrive on the objective The brigade commander first ensures simultaneously. Tanks and mechanized that the supporting efforts understand infantry can then provide mutual support. their role within the maneuver plan. He As the objective is reached and overrun, must be prepared to maneuver supporting the supporting effort shifts its attention to efforts so they maintain continuous and the flanks and rear of the enemy’s effective pressure on the enemy force. He defense. must then determine where they will shift their focus once the main effort closes on its objective. (Where will they shift their Actions on the Objective direct and indirect fires? What criteria should be developed that allows them to As the assault force secures the join the main attack or assume the main objective, the brigade begins to focus on effort?) the enemy elements that could counterattack. The brigade commander Likewise, the main effort must will reposition battalion task forces on demonstrate the best use of terrain to the objective either to defend against an support his approach to the objective. He enemy attack or to prepare for future must be prepared to conduct hasty operations. The brigade continues to breaches of obstacles and change his synchronize the consolidation on the maneuver formation to suit the terrain objective. Based on the end state combat and enemy situation. Finally, and most power of each battalion task force, the importantly, he must rehearse the final commander may adjust task organization. assault on the objective. Can he effectively suppress the objective or will it require help from a supporting effort as Scheme of Maneuver he closes? How has the objective been divided into battalion/company This is the detailed plan for the objectives? What happens if the assault placement and movement of the main force is counterattacked just as they are attack into advantageous positions on the about to assault? How can this be objective with respect to the enemy. In prevented? Where is the limit of advance? developing the scheme of maneuver, How are the task forces using their scouts consideration is given to its possible during the assault? What actions are effects on future operations. being taken to deny effective enemy fires

4-29 FM 71-3 from adjacent and depth positions? These • All targets must be confirmed. are only a sampling of the questions that • The targets justify the loss of must be answered as the commander súrprise and expenditure of conducts the rehearsal. ammunition. • The targets justify the risk to the Execution DS artillery battalion. An indirect-fire preparation may be delivered immediately before the attack Desired effects on the target are (see Figure 4-11). The preparation is established. coordinated with the movement of attacking units, depending on the amount The attack plan is vigorously of surprise desired or necessary to soften executed, and all favorable developments the point of attack. The preparation must are exploited. If the attack lags have a specific purpose. Criteria must be in one portion of the zone, the main developed prior to execution. This effort is shifted to another portion criteria may include— offering a greater opportunity for success.

o m TAC CP I I o (rn>

RAO

oHU

TOC

Figure 4-11. Indirect-fire preparation.

4-30 FM 71-3

The progress of the attack is not delayed units disperse to defend themselves and to preserve the alignment of units or to the objective, prepare to continue the adhere to the original plan of attack. attack, and block enemy avenues of Follow-and-support units reduce isolated approach, if required. Ground mobile or enemy resistance as necessary. air assault units maintain contact with the enemy, keep the enemy off balance, and The attack may be a single, rapid obtain information. advance and assault until the brigade objective is secured, neutralized, Continuing the attack or exploitation destroyed, or overrun, or it may be a must be an integral part of the attack series of rapid advances and assaults to plan. The commander’s intent includes obtain the same results. As enemy the disposition of the force as part of his resistance is encountered, the attacking end state. Immediate reorganization of echelons converge, following close the force is necessary to maintain behind their supporting fires, until they momentum and prepare for the next are within assaulting distance of the phase. hostile position. After the assault, attacking units disperse as rapidly as Continuing the attack frequently possible (to preclude forming lucrative depends on the ability to resupply targets), continue the attack, or prepare attacking forces. Large quantities of for other operations. ammunition, POL, and equipment expended during the attack must be The reserve is kept ready for replenished. Provisions for this logistic immediate employment. The reserve support are an integral part of the attack moves within the overall formation of the plan. During continuous day and night brigade and is positioned to permit rapid operations, leading elements of the movement to the point of probable brigade are rotated to provide time for employment and to provide security by its rearm and refit operations. presence. When conditions dictate its use, The commander must anticipate halts the reserve is committed without and prepare orders to include the time or hesitation. With the compression of TDIS circumstances of the halt, missions and factors inherent in the mobility of the locations of subordinate units, and brigade, teams of the reserve can be command and control measures. To assigned a specific short-term mission prevent congestion, some units may be and the reserve quickly reconstituted. diverted into defensive positions before the halt of the entire brigade. Continuation of the Attack

When the brigade objective is secured, Feint reorganization is accomplished rapidly, and all means are used to continue the A feint is a limited objective attack; it attack (if so ordered). Maximum use of is a show of force intended to deceive the supporting fires is made during this enemy and draw attention and (if critical period. Minimum forces normally possible) combat power away from ' a retain control of objectives and remaining main attack. Feints must be of sufficient

4-31 FM 71-3 strength and composition to cause the The raid operation is appropriate to desired enemy reaction. Feints must the brigade because of its capabilities for appear real; therefore, some contact with shock, speed, mobility, and firepower. the enemy is required. The feint is most Normally, raids are so short in time and effective when it reinforces the enemy’s distance that only a limited amount of expectations, when it appears as a definite supplies can be carried on the combat threat to the enemy, when the enemy has vehicles. Maintenance support is confined a large reserve that has been consistently to the crew’s ability to make minor committed early, or when there are repairs. several feasible COAs open to the attacker. Some of the desired reactions FS systems are positioned during a are to force the enemy into improper raid to support the attacking force employment of its reserves, attract enemy throughout the operation. HPTs are supporting fires away from the main attacked to provide the maximum shock attack, force the enemy to reveal effect on the enemy’s force. Interdiction defensive fires, or accustom the enemy to fires, counterfires, and FASCAM are shallow attacks in order to gain surprise delivered to reduce the enemy’s ability to with a deep main attack. Normally, the react to the raid. brigade executes a feint as part of a corps or division attack plan. Planning for a feint follows the same sequence as any After reaching the objective and other offensive operation. accomplishing the mission, the raiding force can anticipate vigorous enemy reaction in the area through which they Raid have passed. For this reason, the withdrawal of the raiding force is usually A raid is usually a small-scale over alternate routes. Brigade forces offensive tactical operation. It is based on should avoid main LOCs and should detailed intelligence, involves swift consider using routes for attack and movement into hostile territory, and ends withdrawal that are not usually with a planned withdrawal. Typical considered feasible for mechanized raiding missions are— movement.

• Capture prisoners, installations, or Once the brigade raid objective has enemy materiel. been achieved, no time is wasted in returning to friendly territory. The longer • Destroy enemy materiel or the withdrawal is delayed, the greater the installations. chance the enemy has of defeating the • Obtain specific information of a raiding force. In this phase of the raid, hostile unit such as its location, the operation corresponds to techniques disposition, strength, or operating used during linkup. scheme. When Army aviation assault and • Deceive or harass enemy forces. attack helicopter assets are available, an • Liberate friendly, captured aerial raid may be conducted with personnel. dismounted infantry to quickly move

4-32 FM 71-3 behind enemy lines, perform the required effect make it an ideal exploiting force. mission, and return. Exploiting forces can have the mission of securing objectives deep into the enemy’s Demonstration rear, cutting LOCs, surrounding and destroying enemy forces, denying escape A demonstration is an attack or show routes to an encircled force, and of force in an area where a decision is not destroying enemy reserves. being sought. It is made with the intention of deceiving the enemy; Preparation for the exploitation entails however, no contact with enemy forces is planning, issuing WOs, grouping of made. Demonstration forces use fires, exploiting forces, planning for CSS, and movement of maneuver forces, smoke, establishing communications. The EW assets, and communication equipment commander must be ready at all times to to support the deception plan to include use every opportunity afforded by the firing false artillery preparations and enemy for exploitation. Exploitation delivering fires comparable to a thrust opportunities are indicated by an increase forward in a deliberate attack. in prisoners captured; an increase in abandoned materiel; and the overrunning EXPLOITATION of artillery, command facilities, signal installations, and supply dumps. The Exploitation is an offensive operation transition from the deliberate attack to the that follows a successful attack to take exploitation may be so gradual that it is advantage of weakened or collapsed hardly distinguishable, or it may be enemy defenses. Its purpose is to prevent abrupt. The abrupt transition occurs most reconstitution of enemy defenses, prevent frequently when nuclear or chemical enemy withdrawal, secure deep munitions are used. After transition to the objectives, and destroy command and exploitation, every effort is made to control facilities and enemy forces. continue the advance without halting, During the exploitation, the brigade bypass enemy resistance when possible, advances on a wide front (if the terrain and use available FS to the maximum and road net permit), retaining only when appropriate targets are presented. those reserves necessary to ensure FS target acquisition systems and flexibility, momentum, and security. The observers are positioned well forward exploitation is initiated when an enemy with lead elements. force is having recognizable difficulty in maintaining its position. Although local Once the exploitation begins, it is exploitations may appear insignificant, carried out to the final objective. The their cumulative effects can be decisive. enemy should be given no relief from offensive pressure. Enemy troops Depending on the situation and its encountered are not engaged unless they task organization, the brigade can exploit are a threat to the brigade or cannot be its own success; it can be used as an bypassed. The decision to bypass or exploiting force for a higher echelon; or engage these enemy forces rests with the it can follow and support another next higher commander. Normally, exploiting force. The heavy brigade’s freedom of action is delegated to inherent mobility, firepower, and shock commanders in the exploitation. The

4-33 FM 71-3 leading elements of the brigade habitually and attack helicopters attack moving attack from march column to reduce enemy reserves, withdrawing enemy roadblocks and small pockets of resis- columns, and enemy constrictions at tance and to perform the reconnaissance choke points. CAS, FA, and attack necessary to develop the situation. helicopters may also be used against enemy forces that threaten the flanks of Follow-and-support units clear the the exploiting force. bypassed areas and expand the zone of exploitation. Follow-and-support units Petroleum consumption rates are high; are assigned missions to assist exploiting therefore, provision for rapid resupply is forces by relieving them of tasks that essential. Since forward elements may be would slow their advance (such as operating to the rear of bypassed enemy preventing the enemy from closing the forces, security of ground supply columns gap in a penetration and securing key must be considered. Aerial resupply may terrain gained during a penetration or be necessary. Exploiting forces take envelopment). Follow-and-support forces advantage of captured supplies whenever are allocated FS as the situation dictates. possible. As the exploiting brigade advances farther into the enemy’s rear areas, the In the exploitation, the attacker seeks follow-and-support units secure lines of to follow up the gains of a successful communication and supply, support the penetration. The attacker drives deep into exploiting elements of the brigade, the enemy’s rear to destroy his means to destroy pockets of bypassed enemy, and reconstitute an organized defense or to expand the area of exploitation from the initiate an orderly withdrawal. brigade axis.

Follow-and-support units relieve brigade elements blocking or containing enemy pockets, or protecting areas or PURSUIT installations, thereby enabling these elements to rejoin the exploiting force. Liaison must be maintained between lead The pursuit normally follows a units and follow-and-support units to successful exploitation. The primary facilitate coordination. function of pursuit is to complete the destruction of the enemy force. As a Decentralized execution is charac- successful exploitation develops and the teristic of the exploitation; however, the enemy begins to lose the ability to commander maintains enough control to influence the situation, the brigade may prevent overextension of the command. be ordered to execute the pursuit. Unlike Minimum control measures are used. CSS exploitation, in which the attacking force operations are normally centralized. avoids enemy units in order to destroy their support system, in the pursuit the Reconnaissance systems maintain brigade may point its advance toward a contact with enemy movements and keep physical objective; however, the mission the commander advised of enemy is the destruction of the enemy’s main activities. CAS aircraft, deep FA fires. force.

4-34 FM 71-3

Friendly forces in the exploitation are • A lessening of hostile artillery fire. alert for indicators of an enemy collapse • A lack of enemy countermeasures. that would permit a pursuit operation. There are several indicators of a The pursuit is ordered when the weakening enemy: enemy can no longer maintain its position and tries to escape. The commander • Continued advance without strong exerts unrelenting pressure to keep the enemy reaction. enemy from reorganizing and preparing its defenses. The brigade may conduct a • An increased number of captured pursuit operation as part of a corps or prisoners, abandoned weapons, and division pursuit, functioning as either the unburied dead. direct-pressure or encircling force.

SECTION III. BRIGADE AS A COVERING FORCE

A covering force is a tactically self- auxiliary communication, liaison, and contained security force that operates a other controls between commands. considerable distance to the front or rear of a moving or stationary force. Its As a covering force, the brigade will mission is to develop the situation early; normally operate forward and without the defeat hostile forces (if possible); and support of the division’s main body. The deceive, delay, and disorganize enemy brigade may have up to three or more task forces until the main force can cope with forces abreast operating in task force the situation. zones keyed on high-speed routes. Tank- heavy battalion task forces usually lead the advance. Engineers are kept well The brigade may participate in a forward with the task forces. When the covering force mission as part of a brigade conducts a covering force division that is in turn the covering force operation, supporting CS and CSS assets for a corps, or as a complete covering are attached to preserve unity of force for a division or corps. Because the command. Small tank-heavy reserves may brigade as a covering force is operating be maintained at both battalion and on a broad front, a well-prepared, brigade level to influence local actions. coordinated plan is required. The plan must reflect centralized, coordinated Covering force actions are planning and decentralized execution. characterized by speed and aggressiveness Control measures governing the rate and (especially in reconnaissance) by direction of movement are specified. The developing situations rapidly with rate of movement is controlled by strength, by unhesitating commitment of successive march objectives, checkpoints, reserves, and by keeping the enemy off and PLs. The axis of advance or balance. The brigade concentrates its withdrawal is controlled by establishing attention against enemy forces that are of boundaries between battalion task forces. sufficient size to threaten the main force. Army aircraft may be used to provide Minor resistance is bypassed. Every

4-35 FM 71-3 action is directed toward ensuring the should also fix the position with indirect uninterrupted advance of the main body. fire and, if available, Army aviation or CAS assets. Tailored, mobile, high-demand CSS is moved forward with the brigade. Limited PREPARATION Classes III and V supplies and medical triage and evacuation assets move with The brigade commander conducts a and are provided march security by the rehearsal following the issuance of the reserve battalion of the brigade. OPORD to confirm that each subordinate commander understands his mission PLANNING within the context of the intent. In particular, the commander reviews The commander plans for the actions on contact and the bypass criteria. operation by task organizing his forces to Commanders must overcome the suit the mission. In this example, he temptation to focus on each enemy commands an element consisting of the element that attempts to engage the force, divisional cavalry squadron, an armored but at the same time, they must clear the and mechanized infantry battalion, and a axis of enemy elements that may DS artillery battalion. Knowing that the significantly impair the movement of the cavalry squadron operates in zones, main body. It is the responsibility of the essentially with a ground and an air troop brigade commander to exercise this working together in each one, the decision making during the rehearsal commander designates a task force to and to ensure that the subordinate follow and support in each zone. He task commanders operate as a team. organizes the battalions so that each task force is able to respond to a variety of The commander observes the rehearsal threats, generally 2 x armor and 2 x and provides comments when appropriate. mechanized, with the mechanized task Generally, however, he allows his force retaining the ITV company (in an subordinate commanders to demonstrate Ml 13-equipped mechanized battalion). their knowledge of the plan and their The artillery trails, yet remains within the decision making within the context of the body of the formation. commander’s guidance. For his part, the commander practices his use of the DST Based on the commander’s bypass in an effort to anticipate likely enemy criteria, the mission of the covering force actions. Once he has made a decision, he is to identify and destroy those enemy then rehearses synchronizing his elements that can influence the division’s resources to achieve the greatest effect. maneuver. In effect, the cavalry troops The commander must resist making and the battalion task forces become changes. Normally, there will not be “hunter/killer” teams. However, some enough time to coordinate a change in the enemy forward detachment positions may operation throughout the entire force. be too strong for the covering force Subordinate commanders will already battalions. When this occurs, the covering have prepared (and probably issued) their force commander must attempt to find a OPORDs. At this point in the process, bypass route that cannot be observed or changes will only increase the confusion influenced by a forward detachment. He that always exists in combat. The

4-36 FM 71-3 commander must continually weigh the main body for destruction. Conversely, amount of combat power he is willing to those enemy positions that the commit to an area against his overall covering force clearly cannot destroy mission to guard the division main body. are maintained under observation by Moreover, he must identify the conditions reconnaissance elements; a bypass route under which he would no longer be able is selected around the area, out of direct to effectively operate as the covering fire and observation. All information force, such as increasing strength of the concerning the enemy position is relayed enemy defense, his own attrition, or a to the division commander, who must combination of the two. The impact then decide to continue to bypass or of having a covering force become destroy the position. ineffective prior to reaching the enemy’s main defensive belt is that the attacking force would have to commit prematurely, As the covering force nears the enemy arriving at the objective area at less than force, the cavalry squadron probes to the desired combat strength. Ultimately, confirm possible weaknesses in the this could be the difference between enemy’s array. The task forces adopt a success and failure. hasty defense that maintains the shoulders of the division penetration and also EXECUTION supports the attack of the main body elements. The cavalry screens farther As the brigade advances along the forward of the hasty defending battalions division axis of advance, enemy units are to provide flank security, or it may identified by the divisional cavalry continue to infiltrate depending on the squadron. This information is passed to division commander’s concept of the the battalion task forces, which in turn operation. At this point, the covering maneuver against the enemy position. In force operation ceases, and the brigade execution, the cavalry troop hands over commander awaits further instructions or the enemy to the scout platoon of the possible task organization changes. following task force. Elements of the air troop may continue to observe the enemy until the arrival of the task force. The One of the commander’s greatest cavalry and scout platoons should have challenges is the control of the two task gathered enough information about the forces when one is in contact conducting enemy position so that, upon arrival, the a hasty attack and the other is continuing task force can be directed into the assault. to move. The commander must stay This hasty attack should be supported abreast of the location and situation of with an appropriate level of CS to ensure the task force in the other zone. He must success; otherwise, the operation could also guard against focusing too much develop into a deliberate attack and attention on the action in his own zone. consequently slow the covering force The maintenance of a consistent rate of operation significantly. march through the use of PLs, and the continual adjustment to the speed of each Weak enemy elements are handed over task force in its zone, are essential to a to the advance guard battalions or brigade unified action across a broad front.

4-37 FM 71-3

SECTION IV. COMBINED ARMS BREACHING OPERATIONS

BREACHING TENETS deliberate, assault, and covert) with some variations based on the situation. Commanders and staffs plan breaching operations as a part of all offensive Suppress missions. Successful combined arms breaching is a function of applying the Suppression is the mission-critical four tenets of breaching. The tenets are— task for breaching operations. Direct and indirect fires serve to isolate the breach • Intelligence. site/point of penetration and protect • Breaching fundamentals and forces reducing and maneuvering through organization. the obstacle. • Mass. Obscure • Synchronization. Effective emplacement of smoke See FM 90-13-1 for additional degrades enemy observation and target information on breaching operations. acquisition and conceals friendly activities and movement. Intelligence Secure In any operation where enemy obstacles can interfere with friendly The force secures the breaching maneuver, obstacle intelligence becomes operation site to prevent the enemy from a PIR. Finding enemy obstacles or seeing interfering with obstacle reduction and enemy obstacle activity validates and passage of the assault forces. Security refines the S2’s picture of the battlefield. by fire or force depends on the enemy Obstacle intelligence does several situation. The security force secures the things— breach site by suppressing outposts • Supports the situation template. and fighting positions near the obstacle, and against overwatching and counter- • Helps determine enemy intentions attacking forces. as well as the strength of his defenses. Reduce • Focuses intelligence-gathering assets. Reduction means creating lanes • Drives breach/maneuver planning. through the obstacle to allow the attacking force to pass. The actual Breaching Fundamentals breaching of obstacles is a major part of actions on the objective. The number and Suppress, obscure, secure, and reduce width of lanes varies with the situation (SOSR) are breaching fundamentals. and type of breaching operation. These fundamentals apply to all types Reduction cannot be accomplished until of breaching operations (in-stride. the other SOSR fundamentals are applied.

4-38 FM 71-3

Breaching Organization can be the engineer commander or any subordinate commander working for the The commander organizes the forces brigade commander in a command to accomplish SOSR. This requires him to relationship. organize support, breach, and assault forces with the necessary assets to The commander allocates engineer accomplish their roles. platoons and equipment based on the number of lanes required. The breach Support Force force must be capable of creating a minimum of one lane for each assaulting The support force’s primary company or two lanes for an assaulting responsibility is to eliminate the enemy’s task force. The commander should expect ability to interfere with the breaching a 50 percent loss of mobility assets in operation. It must— close combat. Therefore, breaching a lane in close combat requires at least an • Isolate the battlefield with fires engineer platoon in the breach force. and suppress enemy fires covering the obstacle. Assault Force • Mass direct and indirect fires to fix the enemy in position and to The assault force’s primary mission is destroy any weapons that are able to destroy or dislodge the enemy on the to bring fires on the breaching far side of the obstacle. It secures the far force. side by physical occupation in most deliberate or light-force breaching • Control obscuring smoke to hinder operations. The assault force may be enemy-observed direct and indirect tasked to assist the support force with fires. suppression while the breach force reduces the obstacle. Suppression is critical for a successful breach. The first priority of force If the obstacle is defended by a small allocation is the support force. The force, the assault force mission may be commander allocates direct and indirect- combined with the breach force mission. fire systems to achieve the support force This simplifies command and control and ratio of 3 to 1 for a deliberate breach. provides more immediate combat power for security and suppression. Combat Breach Force power is allocated to the assault force to achieve a 3 to 1 ratio on the assault The breach force is a combined arms objective. force. Its primary mission is to create the lanes that enable the attacking force to Mass pass through the obstacle and continue the attack. It includes engineers, Combined arms breaching is breaching assets, and a maneuver element conducted by rapidly applying combat capable of providing internal SOSR power to reduce the obstacle and rupture operations. The breach force commander the defense.

o 4-39 FM 71-3

Table 4-1. Types of breaching operations versus enemy size. Maneuver Unit instride Deliberate Assault Covert: Enemy Size; Overwatching Obstacles Brigade X Battalion X ✓ Company X Platoon Task Force Battalion X X Company ✓ X Platoon Company Battalion Company Platoon X - Type of breach normally conducted. s - Possible variation depending on scheme of maneuver.

Massed combat power is directed isolating a small segment of the defense against an enemy weakness. The location (platoon or company) that a task force selected for breaching depends largely on can then attack as the breaching echelon. a weakness in the enemy defense where If the obstacle and defense are in-depth its covering fires are minimized. If the (large scale), brigades would normally attacker cannot find a natural weakness, receive additional support (such as he creates one by fixing the majority of artillery, engineer, aviation) from the defending force and isolating a small division for large-scale breaching part of it for attack. operations. A large-scale breach is defined as a deliberate operation The need to generate enough mass conducted by brigades and divisions to strongly influences which echelon can create a penetration through well- conduct a breaching operation (see Table prepared defenses so that follow-on 4-1). A company team generally cannot brigades and divisions can pass through simultaneously mass sufficient fires, them. breach the obstacle, and also assault the defending position unless it is a simple The commander also masses his obstacle defended by no more than a engineers and breaching equipment to squad. A task force has sufficient combat reduce the obstacle. The breach force is power to attack an obstacle defended by a organized and equipped to use several company and is normally the echelon different reduction techniques in case the used to execute the breach. primary technique fails (a key breaching asset is destroyed or casualties render The brigade has sufficient combat dismounted engineers ineffective). power to attack a complex and well- Additional breaching assets are available defended obstacle but has difficulty to handle the unexpected. Normally, 50 deploying all its combat power within percent more than required are positioned range. Normally, the brigade breaches by with the breach force.

4-40 FM 71-3

Synchronization • Effective command and control.

Breaching operations require precise • A well-rehearsed force. synchronization of SOSR by support, breach, and assault forces (see Table 4-2). Synchronizing the combined arms The commander ensures synchronization breach begins by using the reverse through proper planning and force planning process to ensure actions at preparation. Fundamentals to achieve obstacles support actions on the synchronization are— objective. Planning a breach without regard to actions on the objective leads to • Detailed reverse planning. disaster. The commander first decides • Clear subunit instructions. how he must attack an objective to

Table 4-2. Breach complexity. ACTION ELEMENT TIME CONTROLLED BY (MINUTES) Develop situation (verifying Force in contact M to 2 S3 boundary of enemy obstacles system) Maneuver support force into Support M+2 to 15 Support Cdr overwatch position Maneuver assault force into Assault M+2 to 15 Assault Cdr covered assault position Call for artillery DS artillery M+2 to 15 FSO

Build smoke Mortars M+5 to 10 FSO

Suppress enemy with Support M+15 to 29 Support Cdr direct fires Suppress enemy with DS artillery M+10 to 29 FSO artillery fires Maintain smoke DS artillery/ M+10 to 30 FSO mortars Maneuver breach force to breach Breach M+20 to 23 Breach Cdr location Reduce obstacle Breach M+23 to 30 Engineer Leader Prepare two lanes Place smoke pots Breach M+23 to EOM Breach Cdr

Shift direct fires off of OBJ Support M+29 to 30 Assault Cdr

Shift indirect fires beyond OBJ DS artillery M+29 to 30 Assault Cdr

Assault to destroy enemy on far Assault M+30 to 45 Assault Cdr side of obstacle Reorganize to continue mission TF M+45 to EOM S3

M = contact with obstacle

4-41 FM 71-3 accomplish his mission. This decision obstacle system. Units conduct a drives where, how, and with what force deliberate breaching operation when— he must support, breach, and assault • The unit fails an attempted in- through the enemy’s obstacles and take stride breach of enemy tactical the objective. obstacles. The most effective synchronization • Force ratios indicate that a tool available to the commander is the confirmed enemy situation is rehearsal. The inherent complexity of a beyond the capabilities of a breaching operation makes rehearsals at subordinate unit. every level essential to success. The commander must afford his subordinates A brigade conducts a deliberate the time to plan how they will execute breach using one or more task forces their assigned missions and to rehearse in support, breach, and assault roles. that plan with their unit. Breaching Breach task organization considerations operations are a part of every rehearsal. and application of SOSR breaching fundamentals are the same as for TYPES OF BREACHING the task force deliberate breach. The OPERATIONS brigade scheme of maneuver must address how task forces maneuver to accomplish In-Stride their support, breach, and assault missions. Since the brigade deliberate In-stride breaching is a very rapid breach involves the maneuver of technique using standard actions on task forces, the brigade commander and contact and normal movement techniques. staff are responsible for detailed It consists of preplanned, well-trained, planning, centralized rehearsals, and well-rehearsed breaching actions and synchronization. reduction procedures by predesignated combined arms elements. The force uses Assault the in-stride breach against either weak defenders or very simple obstacles and The maneuver force uses an assault executes it from the march. Subordinate breach to break a dismounted force forces always move configured to execute through enemy protective obstacles onto an in-stride breach with organic and task the enemy position. Depending on the organized engineer assets. A brigade in- size and difficulty of the defensive stride breach is a deliberate breach for a obstacle system, this breaching procedure task force. can be a variation of either deliberate or in-stride breaching techniques. Deliberate Breach The maneuver force attacks a stronger Covert defense or more complex obstacle system with a deliberate breach. It is similar to a Light and dismounted forces use deliberate attack, requiring detailed covert breaching operations to pass knowledge of both the defense and the secretly through obstacles. The covert

4-42 FM 71-3 breach also uses elements of the visibility. Units designated to conduct deliberate or in-stride breach. Surprise is reconnaissance for the breach force unit the primary consideration that drives the can transmit accurate bypass information commander to a covert breach. Covert to the brigade with waypoints. This keeps breaching centers around using stealth to units from blundering into the obstacle reduce the obstacle with support and and allows for rapid passage through the assault forces executing their mission obstacle system. Accurate and timely only if reduction is detected. information on enemy and friendly forces allows the brigade to disperse, provide A brigade with automated capabilities accurate direct and indirect fires on the can conduct deliberate and in-stride enemy, and aggressively move to breaching operations with greater speed continue attacking the enemy. The and precision than a conventional unit. brigade uses unmanned aerial vehicles Rehearsals are still key, because breach (UAV), scouts, and other observation operations are complex, yet the entire systems to accurately locate deep enemy breaching operation can be conducted targets (artillery, logistics) and attacks with greater confidence of success; this them prior to the assault force’s includes during periods of limited arrival.

SECTION V. NIGHT OFFENSIVE DOCTRINE

Night offensive operations are • Despite increased efforts at conducted to exploit the possibilities for protection, the defender is more security and surprise or to continue susceptible to NBC attack because combat operations. By conducting night of reduced efficiency and sleep operations the commander expects to rotations. conceal his action from the enemy, achieve surprise, exploit earlier success, • Movement of large forces is or maintain the momentum. In each case, concealed by darkness. the focus is gaining or retaining the • Physical and psychological factors initiative. favor the attacker. Shock, Note. All limited visibility operations disorientation, and isolation are require more detailed planning, more easily achieved. rehearsals, and graphic control • Air assets can operate more safely measures. due to difficult observation. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES • Surprise is enhanced. Defenders are more susceptible to deception Advantages techniques (dummy lights, noise, smoke, and fifes). Advantages of night offensive operations include— • The speed at which a defender can employ his reserves is reduced at • Defenses are more susceptible to night. DPs must be farther out in infiltration. time and space.

4-43 FM 71-3

Disadvantages TACTICAL PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS Disadvantages of night offensive operations include— The following is a list of tactical planning considerations, by BOS, that are • Command and control and different for a night offensive operation coordination of units become more when compared to a daylight offensive. difficult, and it is easier for the defender to react to a changing situation and alter operations than Intelligence it is for the attacker. • It is difficult for the attacker to Reconnaissance of the enemy should determine the limits of obstacles. not be confused with reconnaissance of the routes to the objective. Units should • Attackers can be deceived with reconnoiter their routes and rehearse if light, smoke, noise, and fires. possible. Reconnaissance assets may be • The attacker can lose momentum tasked to provide guides to a point on the during the final assault because of battlefield, but are best used to pinpoint the reduced speed of the attack. enemy fortifications. Reconnaissance of • Navigation is difficult for night night objectives should include— attacks. Units may be separated, command and control lost within • Presence and number of units, and support elements moved searchlights and NVDs. out of position. • Location of illumination points. • The battlefield can be changed during darkness. Obstacles that • “Duty” positions, that is, those that escape reconnaissance can be are continuously manned. These emplaced under darkness. may also be false positions for • Adjustment of indirect fire is daylight occupation only. difficult, even with the use of • Locations of AT weapons and FA night-vision devices (NVD) or guns. illumination. • Units require significantly larger • Forward locations of the reserve, quantities of signal ammunition command and OP positions, and (smoke, tracers, flares, and counterattack routes. illumination rounds). • Locating and evacuating casualties Maneuver is very difficult. • Use of FA illumination can render The forms of maneuver for the night the artillery vulnerable to offense are the same as for the daylight counterfire. offense; however, conditions of METT-T • Muzzle flash from the artillery may change the commander’s perception guns can be detected easily. of which form of maneuver best ensures

4-44 FM 71-3 mission accomplishment. Some additional these effects, plans should include the use planning considerations for night of radar, illumination, and terminally maneuver are— guided munitions to ensure accuracy of adjustments. Each fire support team • If attacking an enemy that has vehicle (FISTV) has a ground/vehicle technological parity in night laser locator/designator (G/VLLD) that observation equipment and training can be dismounted to provide increased or has the means to fully observation capability. The following illuminate the battlefield, the considerations apply when conducting envelopment or the turning night attacks: movement can take advantage of darkness to flank or avoid enemy fields of fire, since not all • Plan for illumination. , A areas of the defense will have nonilluminated attack plan ceases equal coverage of night-vision to be one with the first enemy equipment. illumination round. Contingency • Conversely, if the attacker has the plans should be made to illuminate advantage in night observation at any point of the attack or to technology or is better trained than switch to continuous illumination. the defender, darkness may be used • Plan counter observation to to conduct a penetration, degrade night observation devices infiltration, or frontal attack that (NOD). Illumination rounds can may not have been feasible in white out enemy image daylight. intensification sights, and smoke can obscure the ambient light Unit reconnaissance of routes and axes needed to use intensification is invaluable in conducting a night devices. maneuver. Plans for night movement • Initiate and cancel fires for should include— prearranged handheld illumination.

• Leader reconnaissance, in daylight, • Place fire support coordination measures (FSCM) on identifiable as far forward as possible. terrain. Permissive measures • Measuring distances to check- should be as close as possible in points, PLs, and other control front of friendly forces. measures along the route of • Exercise caution when using advance. FASCAM at night because it is • Designation of guides for the difficult to see. combat formations. • Mark targets for ground burst illumination for ground forces as Fire Support well as for CAS. The adjustment of indirect fire by human observation becomes degraded at night. Darkness and the use of NVDs both If possible, register as many targets as degrade depth perception. To counter possible during daylight.

4-45 FM 71-3

Mobility and Survivability Combat Service Support

The process of planning and preparing Units in a night offensive must be combined arms breaching during hours of resupplied, rearmed, and refueled before darkness is the same as during daylight. execution. Logistics activity is much The only difference is the inherent tougher at night. command and control difficulties experienced when conducting night Casualty location, identification, and operations. The tenets of combined arms evacuation require additional control breaching are planned and the operation measures and ground resources. The wargamed and synchronized. Special battalion aid station should be farther considerations for breaching at night forward, and plans for aeromedical include— evacuation must include marking signals for the pickup zones. • Covert breaching. Consideration must be given to decreasing the Pre-positioning supplies and services signature of firing demolitions. forward helps support night attacks. • Additional time required to OPSEC must be maintained so that an position forces and conduct the imminent offense is not detected. breaching operations. CSS should be brought forward • Control measures for moving and rapidly at first light to allow the positioning forces. momentum of the offense to continue. • Night marking devices (far recognition, final approach, and lanes). Command and Control • Fire control measures. This is the area of tactical planning • Rehearsals (night). that changes most during night offensive operations. That is because centralized Air Defense control can simplify synchronization of the plan in this instance. At night, identification, friend, or foe (IFF) relies mostly on electronic Graphic control measures are usually interrogation. Visual detection capability more restrictive for a night attack. There depends on the ambient light available. are graphic control measures that apply specifically to limited visibility, point of Forward area air defense (FAAD) has departure, and probable line of immense signatures; it should not be deployment (see FM 101-5-1). All leaders positioned where it brings return fire onto must be familiar with these terms and adjacent units. symbols. All control measures should Combined arms for air defense should translate into easily identifiable locations not normally be employed at night, on the ground, under all levels of except for immediate self-defense. visibility.

4-46 FM 71-3

Navigation at night must be planned to back up retransmission failure. Link in greater detail and take advantage of vulnerable communication teams with visual and nonvisual technological scouts and MPs for force protection. capabilities. It may also include the use of guides and traffic control points. Scout and other reconnaissance elements such as COLTs, ADA scouts, Communications must also be planned MPs, or engineer scouts require highly in greater detail. Plan redundant means of detailed signal support and extensive communication. Place particular emphasis back-up. Reconnaissance elements on COLT, scout, and FS links. Specify operating well forward at night should communications events in the not plan operations beyond their synchronization matrix and plan event communications ranges. This is even triggers. Pre-position single vehicles more true during air insertions and forward to act as manual radio relays dismounted/light scout operations.

4-47

FM 71-3

CHAPTER 5 DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

As in offensive operations, the brigade commander sets the conditions for success in defensive operations. He uses all organic and supporting systems with precision and at their maximum capability. Ground combat power is then applied to defeat the enemy.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Fundamentals of Defensive Operations 5-1 Section II. Conducting Defensive Operations 5-7 Section III. Combined Arms Obstacle Integration 5-15 Section IV. Brigade Covering Force Operations 5-20 Section V. US Night Defensive Doctrine 5-24

SECTION I. FUNDAMENTALS OF DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

THE PURPOSE OF THE DEFENSE of division or corps operation, in a force projection Army, the brigade commander The main purpose of a defensive may find situations where a mobile operation is to cause an enemy attack to defense is the best option available at his fail. Brigades normally conduct defensive level. operations as part of a division- and corps-level defense. They may attack, At times, the brigade may be required defend, or delay as part of the security to retain key terrain or facilities, or area, MBA, or reserve force. Brigades conduct an attack as the striking force of may also conduct offensive operations a division or as a reserve force for the across the FLOT while the majority of the corps. The brigade's mission to retain key division or corps defends, or they may terrain may be ordered if it assists or serve as a ground tactical combat force in creates an opportunity for the higher support of rear operations. Armored headquarters to shift to the offensive. brigades possess the type of combat Inevitably, the brigade defense focuses on power and mobility ideally suited for regaining the tactical initiative or creating mobile defenses. While normally the opportunity for its higher conducting the mobile defense as a part headquarters to shift to the offensive.

5-1 FM 71-3

OPERATIONS IN DEPTH The brigade commander retains a reserve force based on the threat force The commander conducts simul- assessment. The task and purpose for the taneous operations in depth and organizes brigade reserve unit are identified during the battlefield into three complementary the wargaming process. The reserve is elements of deep, close, and rear committed at the decisive point to ensure operations. the defeat of the enemy force.

Deep Rear

Deep operations are directed against The brigade's rear operations include enemy forces and functions beyond the self-protection of its units and protection close battle. Generally, the brigade needs and maintenance of its LOCs. The additional assets from division to conduct brigade normally designates a tactical deep operations. These assets may include force to react to rear threats. Rapid electronic jamming equipment and attack response ability to a rear area threat, helicopters. The brigade commander must particularly Levels II and III threats, is synchronize these additional assets to integral to the commander's ability to simultaneously attack the enemy sustain a viable defense. The brigade may throughout the depth of the battlefield. also be tasked to provide tactical forces to Brigades may also maneuver as part of support the higher commander's AO. the division’s deep attack.

Close DEFENSIVE PATTERNS The MBA comprises the area we typically designate as close operations. Brigades generally array the bulk of their Mobile combat power within the MBA. Normally brigades defend within the MBA, act as A brigade generally does not conduct the higher commander's reserve, or act as a mobile defense, but conducts area part of the division or corps striking defensive or offensive operations as part force. of the division’s defense (see Table 5-1). A mobile defense orients on the The brigade could act as the security destruction of the attacking force by force for the higher commander or it permitting the enemy to maneuver to a could provide its own security force, position of disadvantage that exposes him although this is not desirable. In either to the striking force. A brigade may case, the brigade conducts passive and conduct a movement to contact or active reconnaissance and security deliberate attack as part of a division or measures throughout the depth of AOs. corps striking force.

5-2 FM 71-3

Table 5-1. Characteristics of forms of defense. MOBILE DEFENSE AREA DEFENSE Orients on the enemy (destruction or Deny enemy access to designated defeat) terrain for a specific time Mobility greater than or equal to the Mutual supporting positions and in enemy depth Defend with minimum force Defend with maximum force Fire and maneuver Interlocking fires Striking force Smaller mobile reserve for local counterattacks Striking force used at the decisive point

Area are less restrictive, defensive sectors are deep, and key terrain lies deep in the A brigade conducts an area defense as sector. A defense in depth relies on part a division or corps defense. Area elements in the security force area and defense orients on retention of terrain or forward elements in the MBA to identify, facilities for a specified time. When define, and control the depth of the planning the area defense, the brigade enemy attack. The flanks of the enemy commander decides the decisive point, main effort are counterattacked to isolate when to concentrate his main effort, and and destroy enemy forces in the MBA. where to economize forces based on his own estimate of the situation and the SYNCHRONIZATION OF DEFENSIVE higher commander's concept. He then assigns missions; allocates forces, fires, OPERATIONS and other support; and sets priorities for resources to fight a combined arms battle. The brigade commander integrates and synchronizes all assets to maximize The brigade commander elects to combat power. To effectively focus defend forward or in depth based on combat power, the brigade commander METT-T and higher commander’s intent. designates the brigade main effort; this A defense in the forward part of the links each subordinate commander's sector requires early commitment of the actions to those around him, providing main defensive effort. This may be cohesion and synchronization. As the achieved either by an initial forward brigade commander develops his battle deployment of forces or by planning plan for the employment of maneuver counterattacks well forward in the MBA forces, he must visualize how he will or even forward of the MBA. A defense synchronize his FA, air defense, EW, in depth may be selected when missions NBC, engineer, CAS and any joint or

5-3 FM 71-3 multinational supporting assets at the should be augmented with ground forces decisive time and place on the battlefield. when assigned guard and/or covering force missions. Intelligence Logistics support of aviation units The brigade S2 focuses on IPB in remains the responsibility of the aviation planning for the defense and analyzing brigade; however, forward support the close operation to predict and confirm aviation logisticians are coordinated with enemy intentions. Before the battle, the the FSB operations section in the BSA. brigade commander requires specific information about— For a detailed discussion on ground maneuver, see Section II of this chapter. • The composition, equipment, Fire Support strengths, and weaknesses of the advancing enemy force. The brigade commander weights the main effort by establishing FS priorities. • The location, direction, and speed FS is synchronized with maneuver forces of enemy reconnaissance elements. to disrupt and weaken the enemy's attack • The location and activities of to provide opportunities for friendly enemy follow-on forces. counterattack. The FSCOORD uses the IPB process, intelligence gathering • Enemy initial and follow-on resources, and the TVA process to focus regimental or brigade command, all supporting fires. control, and communication facilities. Control of FS assets is centralized for defensive operations. Ammunition is pre- The brigade staff prepares a detailed positioned and firing positions are R&S plan to focus reconnaissance assets surveyed in advance. The FSCOORD at enemy decision points, thus confirming focuses his planning effort on the the enemy’s adopted course of action. following tasks:

Maneuver (Aviation) • Engaging the enemy early to disrupt the cohesion of its attack The inherent speed, agility, flexibility, and reduce its intelligence and lethality of aviation elements make gathering capability. As the enemy them an offensive asset that the brigade enters the security area and MBA, can employ to assist in seizing and FS will continue to reduce enemy retaining the initiative. Army aviation can intelligence gathering ability to also be used to attack and destroy the mass combat power. enemy when and where he is most vulnerable. Aviation units OPCON to the • Supporting rear operations. brigade can conduct attack operations, air • Providing deep fires to delay and assaults, reconnaissance, and security disrupt reinforcing units. missions with ground operations. Attack helicopter battalions/aviation task forces • Screening friendly movements.

5-4 FM 71-3

• Providing counterfire to limit the Mobility and Survivability enemy's ability to shift combat power rapidly. The priority of engineer effort in the • Integrating fires with the brigade security area is normally given to obstacle plan. mobility of the passing units of the covering force, then to countermobility to delay the advance of threat units. Priority The brigade synchronizes the MBA to for engineer support in the MBA is mass the effects of all FS assets. determined by the brigade commander Air Defense based on METT-T. A trade-off between countermobility and survivability exists The brigade uses a combination of because of limited resources. Obstacles passive and active air defense measures. are emplaced in depth to support the Priorities shift toward protection of the maneuver commander's scheme and are covering force, FS elements, BSA, and ' integrated into the FS plan to maximize command and control facilities. Maneuver the effect of friendly fires. Counterattacks units are integrated into the counterair may require improvement of mobility plan by engaging appropriate targets corridors to ensure success. Priority of within the capabilities of the weapon engineer effort in the rear is given to systems. Collection and early mobility, then to survivability for dissemination of air threat information command, control, and communications, are required to make this system work. reserve, and CSS assets. ADA units require engineer support to Defensive operations require intensive dig firing positions for Bradley Stinger fighting vehicle (BSFV) systems. management of engineer resources allocated to support the brigade plan. The In defensive operations, air defense resources usually consist of a combination of divisional and corps assets are positioned to achieve mass. engineer units. The assistant brigade Normally, the priority of protection will engineer and the brigade S4 coordinate begin with the command and control early to forecast and request the large facilities. That is because these are generally fixed sites with high electronic quantities of required Classes IV and V signatures, which makes them susceptible materials and munitions. to identification and targeting by threat Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical aircraft. Therefore, the brigade air Defense defense representative will examine the air avenues of approach toward the Throughout the planning process, the command and control facilities and brigade commander plans for possible position both guns and missiles in a enemy use of NBC weapons and for manner that disallows the threat aircraft employment of NBC defense units. to reach the target. The commander also determines FM 71-3 decontamination priorities. All plans and repair parts, barrier materials, operations of forces and installations are medical supplies, and NBC analyzed by the S3 and chemical section supplies) are dispatched from rear to determine their vulnerability to these areas (division support areas to weapons. The commander specifies the brigade support areas to unit degree of risk he is willing to accept. The trains) on a scheduled basis so that brigade chemical section can suggest interruptions in communications changes to the concept of the operation if do not disrupt the flow of supplies. the concept involves unacceptable risks • Class IV and Class V point for from enemy weapons. countermobility push-packages are established. Chemical Reconnaissance • Resupply during periods of limited visibility reduces chances of threat Brigade NBC reconnaissance interference. Resupply vehicles operations in the defense normally focus infiltrate forward to reduce on identifying clean areas, BPs, chances of detection. movement routes, decontamination sites, • CSS units are echeloned in depth and contaminated areas that directly throughout the defensive area. affect operations. The information When a forward CSS unit is gathered from the reconnaissance effort is required to displace to the rear, immediately passed to higher, lower, and another unit picks up the workload adjacent units and periodically updated. until the displacing unit is again operational. Combat Service Support • Maintenance contact teams are employed and dispatched as far The S4 and the FSB commander must forward as possible to cut down on understand the brigade commander's the requirement to evacuate intent so that service support priorities equipment. The thrust of the can be established and logistical maintenance effort is to fix as far operations planned to ensure the forward as possible. supportability of the operation. Real • Different types of maintenance estate management of the BSA and plans contact teams (vehicle, armament, to conduct operations against Levels I and missile) are consolidated to use the II rear area threat must be incorporated available vehicles. into the plan. The following considerations and operational techniques Command and Control improve the CSS provided to a defending unit: After completing the estimate of the situation, the brigade commander announ- • Limited amounts of ATP-stocked ces his decision and concept of the ammunition (25 percent of basic operation to key members of the staff. load) are pre-positioned in the The concept is in enough detail for his MBA on centrally located staff to understand how he intends to positions. conduct the battle. Staff preparation of • Push-packages of certain critical plans and orders is based on the items (ammunition, POL, selected commander's concept. Subordinates are

5-6 FM 71-3 given maximum possible time to prepare positioning of supplies, and improvement since the effectiveness of the defense of routes. WOs and subsequent oral depends on time-consuming tasks, such as instructions are used to get the word out. reconnaissance, fire planning, preparation Commanders do not wait for the complete of positions, installation of obstacles, plan to begin preparations.

SECTION II. CONDUCTING DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

AREA DEFENSE • Location of surface-to-air missile units. Planning • Location of radioelectronic combat units. Brigade commanders need information to fight the close-in battle of the brigade • Effects of weather and terrain on against the OPFOR. They also need current and projected operations. accurate intelligence about OPFOR • Most likely withdrawal routes for elements that can close on their area of threat forces. operation before the current engagement • Anticipated timetable or event can be decisively concluded. schedule associated with the threat's most likely COA. The brigade commander needs specific information about the— Specific information about OPFOR command, control, and communications • Composition, equipment, facilities is of paramount concern to the strengths, and weaknesses of ad- brigade commander. He seeks to know vancing forces. the specific locations of threat— • Location, direction, and speed of OPFOR battalions and their • Division forward and main CPs. subordinate companies. • Regimental and battalion CPs. • Location and activities of OPFOR • Fire direction control (FDC) follow-on echelons capable of centers. reinforcing the first echelon. • CPs and OPs. • Location of OPFOR indirect-fire • Radio and radar reconnaissance weapon systems and units. sites. • Location of gaps, assailable flanks, • Radioelectronic combat sites. and other tactical weaknesses in • Target acquisition sites. the threat's order of battle and OPSEC posture. The suppression, neutralization, • Locations of antiaircraft and and/or destruction of threat command, missile artillery units. control, and communication systems and

5-7 FM 71-3 facilities are critical to the success of the the terrain is restrictive and does not close-in battle. Brigade S2s, in concert allow depth behind him, he compensates with supporting division and corps IEW, by early commitment of main defensive maneuver, and FS units, use all available forces. If necessary, counterattacks may means to identify, locate, disrupt, and expand the forward area if the destroy these targets. Their objective is to opportunity exists. Further depth is neutralize the threat commander's created by security forces and deception capability to command and control operations that lead the enemy to believe troops. Normally, the brigade S2 receives that the main defensive battle area is his information from the following further back. When the terrain or mission sources: is less restrictive, the brigade commander builds depth with security and covering • Maneuver unit observation—spot forces by selecting key terrain deeper in reports (SPOTREP)/patrols. the area of operations and conducting deception operations that lead the enemy • FA units. Weapons-locating radar, cannon, rocket, mortar. to believe that the defense is forward. • Air defense units. Forward area air defense command and control Brigade commanders organize the communications and intelligence battlefield for defense by assigning either (FAADC3I). sectors or BPs to subordinate battalions or task forces. • MI assets. - GSRs. Sectors give the battalion task forces - Remote sensors. freedom to maneuver and decentralize - Counterintelligence support. fire planning. They allow the task force - Prisoner of war interrogation commander to distribute his teams to suit (IPW) teams. the terrain and plan a battle that - Aerial surveillance—side looking integrates direct and indirect fires. The airborne radar (SLAR). brigade commander conducts a backbrief - Ground EW assets—collection with the battalion commanders to approve and jamming. and deconflict their plans. A defense in - UAVs. sector requires continuous contact with • Aviation. flank units for security. - Reconnaissance flights. - In-flight reports. BPs are used when the brigade - Divisional special purpose commander wishes to control countermeasure system maneuvering and positioning of his task - Quick fix 1 IB. forces. They are also used when it is • All source analysis system necessary to concentrate task forces (ASAS). rapidly. When the brigade commander establishes BPs, he controls maneuver The brigade commander determines outside those BPs. He prescribes primary where to position his forces based on the directions of fire by the orientation of the enemy’s maneuver options. He desires to position, and is responsible for fire and build depth based on terrain and how it maneuver planning between positions of affects the enemy’s maneuver options. If different battalions. If he assigns a BP

5-8 FM 71-3 and a sector, he is giving the task force battle. Once committed, the reserve commander specific guidance on initial becomes the brigade main effort. Early in positioning of forces. his planning, the brigade commander makes fundamental decisions concerning A strongpoint is a heavily fortified BP the size, composition, and mission of the tied to the natural and reinforcing reserve. A major purpose of the reserve is obstacle to create an anchor for the to regain initiative through offensive defense. A strongpoint is located on a action. The reserve does this by terrain feature critical to the defense or conducting counterattacks, spoiling used to block a bottleneck formed by attacks, and raids against the enemy, terrain obstacles. Strongpoints in small preferably to its flanks and rear. Other urban areas, astride routes, or along purposes of the reserve are to— assembly areas may halt a superior threat force for a considerable time. To be most • Block penetrations. effective, the strongpoint should be a surprise to the threat. It causes congestion • Contain enemy forces that have and limits the threat force's maneuver. It penetrated. is best used to set up a counterattack. • React to rear area and flank Strongpoints must be well camouflaged threats. and protected. • Relieve depleted units and provide for continuous operations. Control measures, such as PLs, boundaries, contact points and passage If the brigade commander does not points (PP), checkpoints, direction of have sufficient reserves of his own, he attack arrows, and objectives combined may require his subordinate task force with fire control measures to provide a commanders to obtain his permission means of controlling the battle. before the employment of their reserves. He may also specify the location of their The commander's tactical scheme reserves. METT-T will dictate the size must include plans for deep, close, and and composition of the reserve. The rear operations. The objective of the reserve must remain concealed until defense is to halt the enemy, seize the committed. This protects it from enemy initiative, and go to the offensive. The attack and enhances the shock effect commander's tactical scheme must when it is committed. include plans to counterattack against the threat rear or flank whenever possible. The brigade commander immediately The brigade reserve is the key to the reconstitutes a new reserve as soon as the execution of offensive operations. original reserve is committed. This restores his ability to influence the battle The Reserve with maneuver forces. Even a small reserve can be decisive in tipping the The brigade commander’s most balance of victory. critical decision during the defense is the commitment of the reserve. Commitment The brigade commander uses DPs of the reserve is the most effective way developed during the construction of the the brigade commander can influence the DST to trigger execution of contingency

5-9 FM 71-3 plans for his reserve (see Figure 5-1). The enemy. The commander must also reserve makes maximum use of the consider the TDIS factors required to defensive preparation time to rehearse focus his combat power at the decisive each contingency plan, in priority. point to defeat the desired enemy force.

Rehearsals are conducted, both day Although he plans for the and night, to the lowest level possible. counterattack, the brigade commander Target areas of interest (TAI) are must realize that it is unlikely the action developed to support the reserve when it will correspond exactly to expectations. is committed. As the situation develops, the commander answers these basic questions: In planning contingencies for offensive actions of the reserve, the • Will an attack facilitate the higher brigade commander considers the enemy commander’s intent? situation and estimates the TDIS factors related to follow-on enemy echelons • Is an attack feasible or should the based on the IPB process. Then he reserve be employed to contain determines which of his units will attack, enemy success? where they will attack and be positioned after the attack, and what interdiction or • When and where should the attack deep attack is necessary to isolate the be executed?

H+5 H+4 H+3 H+2 Hfl ^ H HOUR 0 /AA1 £DPI zMC 4A PROBABLE ENEMY H HOUR OBJECTIVE MC

* DP DP IS TAI $5 MC

H+ H+4 H+3 H+2 H+1 DP 10 LEGEND: H+-Time Une:Time lines are developed on dootilnal -jf . Decision Points rates of movements as affected by terrain and DP weather. Time lines are modified based on actual rates of movement I ■ Decision Lines - Area TAI MC 1: Avenues of approaoh mobility corridor by priority. DP

Figure 5-1. Decision points.

5-10 FM 71-3

• In the event of multiple Chapter 4, Offensive Operations. The penetrations, which should be spoiling attack has many of the attacked and which should be characteristics of hasty attack and raid blocked or contained? operations.

Reinforcing with the Reserve • Is the window of opportunity large enough to complete the counter- In some situations, the brigade attack before the closure of the commander determines that he cannot next enemy echelon? counterattack with a reasonable chance of success. He positions the reserve to The Reserve and the Spoiling contain or delay the enemy to gain time Attack for the employment of the reserve of the higher echelon. At times, reserves are used in a spoiling attack role to throw the enemy The transition from a defensive preparations for the attack off stride. posture to the offensive is not exclusively Basic considerations for the spoiling the responsibility of the reserve. A attack follow: variety of tactical situations may offer the opportunity for, or even require, • The spoiling attack delays, defending units to launch hasty or disrupts, and destroys the enemy’s immediate attacks. Such situations capability to launch its attack or include— commit a following echelon. • The objective of the attack is to • Breakout from encirclement. destroy enemy personnel and equipment, not to secure terrain • Relief of encircled forces. and other physical objectives. • Raids and spoiling attacks. • Spoiling attacks are not conducted if the loss or destruction of the • Collapse of enemy resistance or force jeopardizes the ability of the unanticipated enemy withdrawal. command to accomplish its defensive mission. As they plan their battle, the brigade commander and staff consider how • Mobility of the force available for reinforcing battalions and companies will the spoiling attack should be equal be integrated into the defensive scheme. to or exceed that of the enemy This planning includes placement of BPs, force. the routes, and the command and control • FS assets attack available enemy arrangements. Supporting engineer and reinforcements to ensure the MP assets must maintain route success of the spoiling attack. trafficability to enable timely movement of the reserve throughout the brigade Commanders coordinate plans for sector. For the MP, this includes ensuring counterattacks and spoiling attacks using designated routes remain clear of the attack techniques discussed in dislocated civilians. Positioning and

5-11 FM 71-3 movement of reinforcements are COA appropriate for the situation. The enhanced by designating the routes and maneuver commanders must demonstrate providing traffic control personnel and their flexibility in adapting to a rapidly guides at contact points to lead changing situation. reinforcements and brief them on the situation. The commander rehearses the synchronization of his combat multipliers One way the brigade commander with the maneuver. The intent of the weights the main effort is by establishing brigade commander is to practice the FS priorities. Close and deep fires are controlling of these assets as a single synchronized with maneuver forces to activity. disrupt and weaken the enemy’s offensive action and to provide windows of The brigade engineer and staff opportunity for friendly offensive action. monitor the preparation, revise the The FSCOORD uses the IPB process, full timeline, and keep the brigade integration of intelligence gathering commander informed. Task force plans resources, and the TVA process to focus and overlays are checked to ensure EAs FS on the systems vital to the enemy’s are properly developed and the success. commander's intent achieved. Execution matrices should reflect a clear Synchronization of direct and indirect synchronization between the obstacle fires with obstacles multiplies effects on intent and fires. the enemy. An obstacle is an excellent location for preplanned artillery/mortar There is no substitute for a thorough fires and for eliminating small breaching ground reconnaissance to confirm the teams. The indirect fire effects will plan. Obstacle siting procedures confirm contribute to the enemy’s difficulties in the linkage between fire control and attacking through the obstacle, making it obstacle intent. more effective and providing direct-fire systems a higher probability of kill. Only Execution critical obstacles should be targeted. The FA battalion cannot cover all obstacles. The brigade commander, with key To be effective, the FA should be massed staff, normally fights the battle from the only on those obstacles that are key to the TAC CP; however, his personal presence success of the battle, and can best may be required at critical points, such as maximize all brigade weapon systems. battle handover from security forces or commitment of the reserve. Preparation Because command and control The object of a successful defense is facilities are more static than in the to know what the enemy will do before he offense, emphasis must be placed on does it. During the rehearsal, subordinate locating them in hardened areas or commanders explain their R&S plan; who protective terrain and reducing electronic they call upon sighting the enemy; and signature. The main CP should be located the specific PIR for which they should be as far to the rear as possible while looking. The commander decides the maintaining reliable communications with

5-12 FM 71-3 the TAC CP, deep assets, and subordinate The covering force has the task of battalions. The main CP focuses on covering for the main body, identifying monitoring the progress of the battle, the enemy main effort, and assisting in forwarding information (higher and shaping the battlefield for commitment of lower) and support requests (higher), and the striking forces. The covering force coordinating supporting units. should be a self-contained force. The commander for the covering force is The rear CP anticipates future support augmented with available FS assets as requirements; it coordinates with the FSB needed to assist the brigade commander commander to ensure continuous logistics in shaping the battlefield and destroying support to enable friendly units to regain selected deep targets. Units in the the offensive. It also focuses on covering force must clearly understand continuity of support for current the brigade commander's intent and what operations and control of brigade CSS actions or events that appear to the enemy units moving forward from the BSA. The as successful. It is important for all units rear CP must continuously monitor the in the covering force to allow the enemy battle and be prepared to immediately to move in a specific direction without a assume the role of the main CP, if great deal of influence if the enemy is necessary. moving towards the striking forces' EAs.

MOBILE DEFENSE The forward defense force has the task to delay and fix the enemy force for a A brigade commander conducts a specific time to allow the striking force mobile defense if directed by his higher time and space to maneuver. The forward headquarters or it is determined as a defense force may consist of any result of his estimate of the situation and appropriate force necessary to conduct approved by his higher commander. A delaying and fixing tasks as determined mobile defense is generally conducted from the commander's estimate of the when the enemy possesses inferior situation. Continuous coordination with mobility, or when defending vast the covering force must be maintained to featureless terrain against a sizable enemy ensure no enemy reconnaissance or force. Likely situations when a brigade maneuver forces bypass them and would conduct a mobile defense are when interrupt the maneuver of the striking it is the assault echelon for a division or force. when conducting an economy-of-force role on a flank of a division or corps The striking force is comprised of the defense. In both situations the enemy maximum combat power available to the force will most likely outnumber the commander at the time of attack. The friendly force as assessed over a given striking force must have equal or greater time period. combat power and mobility than the enemy. Combat power should factor in The brigade commander normally sure things as surprise and include all employs a covering force, fixing force or available forces—ground and air forward defensive force, striking force, maneuver, and FS assets (joint and and reserve force (if forces are available). combined). The striking force is a

5-13 FM 71-3 committed force and is the main effort of The brigade commander retains the brigade upon its commitment. While control of the striking force and the destruction of the enemy is normally the reserve force, if designated. The brigade primary objective, other objectives may is the echelon conducting a mobile include breaking up the enemy's defense, and all other subordinate units momentum, disrupting his timetable, or not in the striking force conduct an area causing him to shift his forces, all of which defense, strongpoint, or delay in sector buy time for friendly forces. for a specific time. The brigade commander provides the striking force A reserve force, if available, may be commander with the decisive point, employed to assist in shaping the objective, and EAs where the enemy battlefield or to destroy enemy forces that force is to be destroyed. The brigade bypass the forward defense force. Attack commander clearly understands and helicopters are ideally suited to conduct a articulates to the striking force maneuver counterattack to stop an enemy commander the size and composition of penetration. penetrating enemy forces to be destroyed within the EAs. The striking force The brigade commander specifies the commander is provided updated defensive pattern in his mission statement information on the enemy as it moves and ensures all tasks assigned to toward designated EAs. subordinate units support his scheme of maneuver. A mobile defense assumes risk Engineer assets must resource the because the defending brigade retains the forward defense force and the striking majority of its combat power in the force. Priority of effort to the forward striking force or is positioned to support defense force is survivability and the striking force. The risks are twofold. countermobility. Priority of effort to the First, the forward defense force is not striking force is mobility and then adequate in strength to accomplish the countermobility. The brigade commander mission alone. The success of the mobile designs a plan that uses obstacles to turn defense depends on successful commitment and fix the enemy but ensures attack and accomplishment of the assigned routes for the strike force are clear. purpose of the striking force. Second, the Aerial delivered mines should be planned enemy may not maneuver or be forced to help shape the battlefield. A maneuver into an area where the brigade force element within a striking force commander intended and commitment of organization may have to conduct a hasty the striking force is not accomplished. breach and attack through a short duration minefield after the minefield has Detailed rehearsals at brigade and been disarmed. The brigade plans and battalion levels are essential to ensure all rehearses all breaching operations to forces understand their assigned tasks and ensure no time is wasted, which may purposes, and they can execute them impact on commitment of the striking without detailed guidance from the force. commander. Communications is key to success and assets must be planned and

5-14 FM 71-3 positioned to support each transition and must be carefully planned phase without disruption. and. rehearsed to support the covering force. The defending force The supplies required when requires significant quantities of Class V conducting a mobile defense vary based and Class IV. The striking force on the task assigned to units within the requires greater amounts of Class III overall scheme of maneuver. The during the attack and Class V, covering force requires Class III and V maintenance, and medical support after (maneuver and engineer) increases to the attack. The commander designates his support its operations. Medical priority of CSS by phase and develops a evacuation (MEDEVAC) and recovery flexible plan to shift priority as the evacuation assets may need augmentation situation changes.

SECTION III. COMBINED ARMS OBSTACLE INTEGRATION

Obstacle control is a tool that control measures imply authorization to commanders use to assign responsibility and employ all types of obstacles not listed to provide control for obstacle emplacement as restricted within the confines of the (see FM 90-7 for more information). To obstacle control measure. achieve obstacle control, commanders use obstacle control measures and obstacle Obstacle Belts effects graphics that allow a commander to graphically define the area in which Brigade obstacle planning subordinates can plan tactical obstacles. concentrates on the development of obstacle belts to further focus the OBSTACLE CONTROL MEASURES location and effect of tactical obstacles within the brigade sector. Obstacle belts Obstacle Zones (Division) and are the primary means the brigade commander uses to further control Belts (Brigade) brigade tactical obstacle employment within his AO. The brigade commander The division commander uses designates obstacle belts within his obstacle zones and the brigade assigned obstacle zone(s) that further commander uses obstacle belts to limit define areas where battalions are the area where subordinates are authorized to employ tactical obstacles. authorized to employ tactical obstacles Belts enable the brigade commander to so that there will be no conflict with the directly link tactical obstacle effects to higher commander's plans for maneuver. the brigade FS plan and the direct fire Commanders draw obstacle zones and responsibilities for assigned task forces. belts to give subordinate commanders maximum flexibility to use obstacles but still ensure that effect of the obstacle Obstacle belts are simply a supports the overall plan. Obstacle refinement or subset of the obstacle

5-15 FM 71-3 zone in which they are planned. The singular, specific effect on an enemy area defined by the belt must not violate battalion-size formation. Detailed task the boundaries of the parent zone. measures and fixed company Obstacle restrictions imposed by the responsibilities allow the task force parent zone apply to all belts within the commander to fix both group effect and zone. The brigade commander may add location to support his fire plan. restrictions to a particular belt, but they are in addition to any imposed by the Obstacle Restrictions division obstacle zone. Commanders use obstacle The brigade commander assigns each restrictions to limit certain types of obstacle belt a specific obstacle effect. obstacles inside an obstacle control This gives purpose and direction to task measure. These restrictions ensure that force obstacle planning. Both the FS subordinate commanders do not employ plan and direct fire responsibilities are obstacles with characteristics that impair brigade driven. The brigade commander future operations. It also allows the must also assign specific obstacle commander to focus the use of limited effects to each belt to ensure obstacles assets and resources for the main effort within the belt complement the brigade by restricting their use elsewhere. fire plan. The commander’s intent Obstacle restrictions preclude conveys the overall effect that must be employment of the designated type of achieved by fire and obstacles against a obstacle within the obstacle control specific target within the defined belt of measure. Battalion commanders have the his task force commanders. right to be more restrictive than the brigade commander; however, the The brigade commander uses battalion commander cannot lower the obstacle belts to attack the maneuver of brigade commander's restrictions. enemy brigades/regiments. Belts are planned and allocated against brigade avenues of approach based on battalion TYPES OF TACTICAL OBSTACLES mobility corridors. This is consistent with the brigade planning, which Tactical obstacles are used to allocates companies against battalion directly attack the enemy's ability to mobility corridors and task organizes maneuver, mass, and reinforce. All battalions to defeat enemy brigades. tactical obstacles produce a specific obstacle effect. They are integrated into Obstacle Groups the force's scheme of maneuver, and direct and indirect fire plans. Types of tactical obstacles are directed, reserve, Task force obstacle planning focuses and situational obstacles. exclusively on establishing an inseparable union between obstacle effects and the fire plan by planning Directed obstacle groups. An obstacle group is a collection of individual obstacles All tactical obstacles produce one of designed and arrayed to produce a four primary obstacle effects: to block.

5-16 FM 71-3 to turn, to fix, or to disrupt (see Figure commanders should use it only at 5-2). Obstacle effects manipulate the critical points in the battle. enemy in a way that supports the commander's intent and scheme of Turning maneuver. Obstacle effect drives integration, focuses subordinates' fires, Turning obstacles are used to divert focuses obstacle effort, and multiplies an enemy into an EA and expose his the effects of firepower. Remember that flanks. Commanders use turning obstacle effects occur because of fires obstacles within EAs to divert an enemy and obstacles, not just obstacles alone. formation off one avenue of approach to The brigade commander and staff must another avenue in support of the scheme understand the exact effects that tactical of fire. Fire control must be planned to obstacles produce. Precise use of the maintain pressure on the enemy obstacle effects are necessary to throughout the turn and exploit his translate concepts to fire and obstacle exposed flank. Fire control to planning. complement the turning obstacle must initially promote overwhelming volumes Obstacle effect is always expressed of lethal fires at the start of the turn and using the standard tactical obstacle then maintain fires on the enemy. effects. The desired obstacle effect must be clear to subordinates since it Fixing provides a common expectation of the effect fires and obstacles have on enemy Fixing obstacles are used to focus maneuver. The brigade commander uses fire planning and obstacle effort to slow standard obstacle effects graphics to an attacker within a specified area, convey obstacle intent to his staff and normally an EA. Obstacles and fires are subordinates. Tactical obstacle effects planned in depth and build with are unique for each type. intensity to complete the enemy's destruction within the specified area. Blocking The fixing obstacle allows fires to defeat the enemy in detail or gain the Blocking obstacles are used to necessary time for forces to reposition integrate fire planning and obstacles to while inflicting maximum casualties. To stop an attacker along a specific avenue complement the obstacle, the direct and of approach. Fire plans covering indirect fire plan must— blocking obstacles are primarily oriented on stopping enemy maneuver. • Cause the enemy to deploy into This effect focuses on retaining terrain attack formation. and protecting the integrity of the • Allow the enemy to advance obstacle rather than completely within the EA. destroying the attacking force. The • Make the enemy fight in multiple success of the blocking obstacle is directions once in the EA. measured by the impact on the enemy • Depth, increasing intensity, and advance rather than enemy losses. The interlocking fires are all vital blocking obstacle is the most resource characteristics of fire plans intensive type of tactical obstacle; covering the fixing obstacle.

5-17 FM 71-3

BLOCKING OBSTACLE

• VERY HIGH LINEAR DENSITY WITH DEPTH • GREATER THAN 100% LETHALITY ! • FORCES UNIT TO HALT 1 • DEFEATS ALL OF ATTACKING COMPANY • DEFEATS ALL BREACHING ASSETS : TURNING OBSTACLE

• HIGH LINEAR DENSITY WITH INTERCONNECTED DEPTH; • 60-100% LETHALITY ; • FORCES UNIT TO HALT OR BYPASS • DEFEATS ALL OF ATTACKING COMPANY • DEFEATS ALL BREACHING ASSETS ! : FIXING OBSTACLE

• MEDIUM LINEAR DENSITY WITH DEPTH • 30-60% LETHALITY • DEFEATS A MINIMUM OF ONE PLATOON TO A MAXIMUM OF TWO PLATOONS PER ATTACKING COMPANY • FORCES COMMITMENT OF 1/3 TO 1/2 OF ALL BREACH ASSETS • FORCES UNIT TO MOVE IN COLUMN OR BYPASS

DISRUPTING OBSTACLE

• LOW LINEAR DENSITY • 10-30% LETHALITY • DEFEATS A MINIMUM OF ONE VEHICLE: OR A MAXIMUM OF ONE PLATOON PER ATTACKING COMPANY : • FORCES COMMITMENT OF ONE BREACH ASSET • FORCES UNIT TO MOVE IN COLUMN OR BYPASS

Figure 5-2. Obstacles function versus lethality.

Disrupting or separate combat forces from their logistical support. In close operations, Disrupting obstacles are used to break obstacles are normally used just forward up an enemy’s formation, interrupt his of EAs or in support of forward positions timetable, cause the premature within a defensive sector. Control commitment of breach assets, and measures covering the disrupting effect piecemeal his attack. This obstacle effect combine obstacles and indirect fires may be used to separate combat echelons against a portion of the enemy to break

5-18 FM 71-3 up the formation while direct fires mass detailed information see FM 20-32. The against the force allowed to bypass the FASCAM systems are— obstacles.

Reserve • Area denial artillery munition (ADAM) (M731) is an artillery- Reserve obstacles are those for which delivered, AP mine activated by the commander restricts execution deployed tripwires. A single authority (road crater and bridge). These M483, 155-mm howitzer shell are "on order" obstacles. The commander dispenses 36 ADAM mines. usually specifics the unit responsible for obstacle emplacement, guarding, and execution. The brigade commander must • Remote antiarmor mine (RAAM) clearly identify the conditions under (M741) is an artillery-delivered which the obstacle is to be executed. antiarmor magnetically activated by passing vehicles. A single Obstacle location is a vital component M483, 155-howitzer round of obstacle intent since it ties the obstacle dispenses 9 RAAMs. effects and target to the scheme of maneuver. Wherever possible, commanders • Gator (CBU-89/B) is a tactical- give obstacle locations relative to fixed-wing-delivered, AP and AT maneuver or fire control measures to mine system activated by both integrate the effects of obstacles. tripwire and magnetic influence. A single CBU-89/B load will cover Situational an area of 200 by 650 meters.

Situational obstacles are obstacles that • Volcano (M87) is a modular mine units plan, and possibly prepare, before delivery system for rapid beginning an operation; however, they do dispensing of AP and AT mines not execute the obstacles unless specific from a five-ton dump truck, the criteria are met. Therefore, units may or UH-60 helicopter, and the may not execute situational obstacles, M548A1 tracked cargo carrier. A depending on the situation that develops single Volcano load of 960 mines during the battle. They are “be prepared” can produce a minefield 1,110 obstacles and provide the commander meters by 120 meters wide. flexibility for emplacing tactical obstacles based on battlefield • The modular pack mine system development. For further information see (MOPMS) is a man-portable, 162- FM 90-7. pound, suitcase-shaped mine dispenser that can be emplaced The primary tool used for anytime before dispensing mines. countermobility by the force are mines When dispensed, 21 (17 AT and 4 and wire. The mines that are employed by AP) mines are propelled in a 35 divisional combat engineers are meter semicircle to the front of the conventional and scatterable mines. For container. FM 71-3

control measures are required to Obstacle integration creates an maximize obstacle effect. Obstacle inseparable link between fires and planning does not drive fire planning. obstacles. Neither fires nor obstacles Both obstacles and fire control measures employed by themselves can match the must be planned, adjusted, and executed effectiveness achieved by both when they to meet the commander's intent. are integrated. Fire control and obstacle planning combine to achieve the commander's intent. Commanders must Each tactical obstacle effect produces establish their obstacle intent concurrent a unique result on enemy maneuver and with organizing and developing the fire demands unique fire control. The plan. Each component of obstacle intent relationship between obstacle effects and directly impacts on the fire plan. Fire fire control must be understood by all echelons.

SECTION IV. BRIGADE COVERING FORCE OPERATIONS

PLANNING the forces in the MBA can complete the final destruction of the enemy. A brigade may be given a defensive covering force mission when the division The IPB for the covering force has sufficient resources and the intent of operation is extremely important, as the the commander is to influence and shape division commander wants to identify the the battlefield forward of the MBA. enemy's main effort and location of Covering force operations may run the follow-on forces for the brigades in the spectrum from a division cavalry MBA. The actual IPB planning is squadron conducting a screen, to a accomplished as it would for defensive reinforced squadron conducting a guard, operations; however, the S2 has to to a brigade-controlled element operating concern himself with more avenues of independently as a covering force. approach and a larger number of enemy forces. The S2 plans his IPB with the A brigade given a covering force assistance of the division cavalry mission may consist of the division squadron and attack helicopter battalion cavalry squadron, three to five armored S2s, who may have their own specific or mechanized battalions, and an attack intelligence needs. They are used to work helicopter battalion (see Figure 5-3). This in operations with a divisional scope. organization is responsible for inflicting They may provide valuable input in terms casualties forward, but not to the point of of the special considerations inherent to discouraging the enemy from attacking covering force operations of which the according to its plan. It is important that brigade S2 (as an MBA player) may not the covering force shape the battle so that be aware.

5-20 FM 71-3

0 0 0 0 EA BIL O IMI CD X X

I I

5-3. Example brigade defensive covering force plan.

The brigade FS plan is essential to the to turn and shape the enemy's maneuver commander and his projection of simply may not be possible unless the firepower to the enemy in depth. In brigade receives large amounts of particular, he wants the FS plan to engineer support. separate enemy echelons so that they can be defeated one at a time. Further, along The brigade S4 and the FSB the axis of the enemy's secondary effort, commander must be prepared to support FASCAM and interdicting fires are the covering force forward of the MBA. planned to complete the enemy's loss of However, due to the fluidity of the momentum. The actual planning and operation and the knowledge that the coordination of the fire plan occurs as for covering force conducts a rearward any brigade defensive operation with one passage of lines at the completion of the exception: the artillery will not only mission, CSS assets remain mobile so as accompany the covering force but also not to impede the movement of the fire exclusively in its support. Therefore, covering force. To accomplish this, the the FS plan is prepared with more BSA consists of only those essential certainty in terms of the amount, activities determined by the FSB timeliness, and sustainment of fires. commander within the guidance of the brigade commander. This lighter and The obstacle plan is developed more mobile FSB should be oriented on concurrently with the FS and maneuver evacuation of casualties and damaged plans. Given the frontage in which the equipment, resupply of Classes III and V, brigade must operate, the ability of the and to a limited extent, vehicle and engineers to construct barriers is limited weapon maintenance. Coordination is to carefully selected targets designed to made with the support systems of MBA enhance the effect of both direct and brigades to augment the evacuation of indirect fires. Larger obstacles designed casualties and vehicles through AXPs and

5-21 FM 71-3

UMCPs, which are positioned where the The covering force reserve, whether depth units can assist in the evacuation. ground or air, rehearses how it plans to maneuver to each sector. This determines Much of the command and control of if there are any conflicts between the the covering force battle is decentralized obstacle plan and the counterattack plan. due to the distances covered and the Similarly, the air routes used by the decisions each battalion task force or attack helicopters should be checked squadron commander (SCO) is required against the FS and air defense plans. to make during the operation. The brigade Airspace coordination measures should be commander wants to position himself and coordinated through the division A2C2 the TAC CP in the sector adjacent to the element in the division TOC. enemy's main effort, as this is the most critical area of the battlefield. The S3 The brigade S4 and FSB commander observes the enemy's secondary effort and conduct a CSS rehearsal coincidentally ensures that he maintains communication with the maneuver rehearsal. The ability with the brigade commander. Due to the of the support elements to sustain the lack of an additional headquarters force during combat is essential to the element to accompany the S3, he success of the operation. In particular, the collocates with the battalion task force or support players verify that the MSRs and squadron main CP. In this manner, he lateral supply routes remain ensures communications with the brigade unencumbered by the obstacle plan and main CP and the TAC CP without that support elements reach each degrading his mobility. maneuver element. Prestocks and LRPs should be checked against BP locations. PREPARATION Linkage with CSS elements from the MBA should be checked to ensure The commander ensures that his intent coordination is complete. If possible, is understood and that his subordinates representatives from the MBA attend the can execute as a team without further rehearsal. guidance. He ensures that he controls the operation and maintains flank EXECUTION coordination through every phase. He rehearses the synchronization of the As the enemy's reconnaissance counterattacks and engagements in main elements reach the CFA, they are engaged kill zones. He checks the TDIS analysis and destroyed by the battalion task forces against the DST to ensure that his forces and cavalry squadron. Whether their can arrive at the decisive point of the mission is to defend or delay, it is battle at the correct time. In particular, he essential to blind the enemy divisional exercises the execution of brigade commanders by stripping away their priority targets and reserve demolitions to ability to collect information. The ensure that they contribute to the commander closely monitors the front effectiveness of the plan as desired. line trace of the covering force to ensure Finally, the commander reviews the that his subordinate commands maintain coordination necessary to effect the flank coordination throughout the rearward passage of lines at the operation. In particular, he ensures that completion of the operation. the battle is being shaped according to the

5-22 FM 71-3 plan. Therefore, in the center and right to further slow enemy momentum if sectors where the battalions have been required. For example, he coordinates given a defend mission, he must be with the brigade FSO for the prepared to divert assets to augment their emplacement of ADAMs/RAAMs and lethality. In this regard, the ground with the S3 to ensure the obstacle is reserve must be prepared to block enemy covered by fire. As the force moves penetrations or reinforce the defensive closer to the MBA, obstacles take on positions while attack helicopters may be increasing importance in helping the called forward to inflict casualties in the covering force maintain separation from depth of the EA. the enemy. If the BHL is placed along a natural obstacle, such as a river, prepared As the covering force moves closer to bridge demolitions or armored vehicle the MBA, the brigade commander launched bridge (AVLB) or heavy assault coordinates with his counterpart brigade bridge (HAB) crossings sites should be commanders. The main CP and TAC CP monitored to ensure their execution collocate with the MBA brigade CPs in following the crossing of the last preparation for the rearward passage of maneuver element. Subordinate lines. Maneuver elements from the MBA commanders report execution to the are alerted to cover the rearward passage covering force main CP so that the of the covering force, and a battle brigade commander can verify the safe handover line (BHL) is confirmed. The crossing of his maneuver elements and covering force fights and withdraws to the inability of the enemy to maintain positions within the protection of the pressure. MBA forces. At this point, massive combined arms fires should be brought to bear against the lead enemy elements. The brigade S4 continually coor- This temporary enemy paralysis should dinates with the FSB commander to allow the complete passage of the ensure that CSS operations are executed covering force, free of significant enemy according to plan. He coordinates with pressure and the intermingling of forces. the engineers to monitor the road conditions and the status of any bridges The artillery plan is executed in the and coordinates for the implementation of same manner as in a defense or delay. A on-order MSRs or other alternate routes significant difference is that as the depending on the situation. He also keeps covering force moves closer to the MBA, abreast of the expenditure of Class III and the covering force fire support officer Class V and of emergency resupply coordinates with the MBA brigade FSO vehicles moving to units heavily involved for positioning of the covering force's DS in combat. As the covering force nears battalions. the MBA, the S4 also coordinates with the MBA brigade S4s. The control depends on the The covering force engineer monitors ability of recovery and evacuation assets to the operation, paying special attention to tow disabled vehicles to the rear and to keep the execution of target turnover and the egress routes open. Assets from the MBA brigade reserve demolitions. In particular, may assist in this effort, freeing the brigade's he advises the commander during the equipment for use in the forward area of the course of the battle concerning techniques covering force battle.

5-23 FM 71-3

SECTION V. US NIGHT DEFENSIVE DOCTRINE

PLANNING AND PREPARATION defense. Night amplifies the defender’s vulnerability. As in all night operations, the night defense takes more time, detailed Rehearse moving in darkness. planning, preparation, rehearsals, and Set an observation plan for each EA, coordination than daylight operations. delineating what number and mix of observation devices are used. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES Fire Support The advantages and disadvantages of a defensive operation at night are parallel Plan and support counterbattery fires to those identified for night offensive to take away the use of illumination. operations in Chapter 4. Survey and register final protective TACTICAL PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS fires (FPF) in daylight. ' The following is a list of tactical Centralize authority for the use of planning considerations, by BOS, that are illumination by weapon type and different for a night offensive operation duration. when compared to a daylight offensive. Smoke magnifies the effect of Intelligence darkness on the attacker's formations and on his image intensification devices. Assign scouts to assigned smaller, critical areas to observe, such as NAIs Adjustment of fires is inaccurate if and TAIs. only visual means are employed.

Coordinate all reconnaissance activity Mobility and Survivability in detail. This precludes friendly fire and fratricide between subunits. The FSO FASCAM is more effective at night; it must also monitor calls for fire to prevent can be emplaced rapidly and is difficult one unit from engaging another. to spot.

Increased use of remote sensors and Increase engineer work time as light decreases. GSRs covers areas no longer visible at night. Provide engineers with security forces at night. Maneuver Sound travels farther at night. Use Security operations by all units is the sound to deceive or cover by artillery key to maintaining the integrity of the fire.

5-24 FM 71-3

Air Defense Plan increases in supply rates for flares, illumination rounds, batteries, light sticks, smoke pots, wire, and general Give assets point (critical) targets to ammunition in advance. defend, rather than area targets. Command and Control The pairing of systems with IFF capability with those that do not have it Control measures are usually more allows both systems to engage targets. restrictive at night. These include routes to and from BPs, light lines, and no-fire zones. Combat Service Support Wire is the preferred communications The threat to rear areas increases at method, followed by messenger, radio, night; therefore plan CSS accordingly. visual signals, and event-oriented plans. Communications plans for recon Rehearse MEDEVAC routes in the dark. teams must be rehearsed prior to sending personnel and equipment out. Class I served between 0200 and 0400 hours counters the physiological "low" of Use GSRs to vector moving units, the body. such as patrols, LPs/OPs, and scouts.

5-25

FM 71-3

CHAPTER 6 OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS

Other tactical operations encompass a wide range of special purpose operations undertaken routinely during offensive and defensive operations. While not the main focus, these other tactical operations must be synchronized.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Linkup Operations 6-1 Section II. Relief in Place 6-6 Section III. Passage of Lines 6-13 Section IV. Retrograde Operations 6-19 Section V. Breakout from Encirclement 6-27 Section VI. Rear Operations 6-33 Section VII. River Crossing 6-36 Section VIII. Approach March 6-48

SECTION I. LINKUP OPERATIONS

GENERAL Linkup of a Moving Force with a Stationary Force Linkup operations to join two or more friendly forces are conducted to— To ensure the forces join without engaging one another, linkup points are • Complete the encirclement of an selected at locations where the axis of enemy force. advance of the linkup force intersects the • Assist breakout of an encircled security elements of the stationary force friendly force. (see Figure 6-1). These points must be • Join an attacking force with a force readily recognizable to both forces. operating in the enemy's rear area. Alternate points are chosen in the event enemy activities cause linkup at places FORMS OF LINKUP other than those planned. The number of linkup points selected depends on the Regardless of the purpose of the terrain and number of routes used by the linkup, in execution, the operation takes linkup force. Personnel in the linkup force on one of two forms: must be thoroughly familiar with mutual identification procedures and plans for • Linkup of a moving force and a rapid passage of lines. Stationary forces stationary force. assist in the linkup; they open lanes in • Linkup of two moving forces. minefields, breach or remove selected

6-1 FM 71-3 obstacles, furnish guides, and design complete the encirclement of an enemy assembly areas. Use of a common radio force. Primary and alternate linkup points frequency enhances coordination and for two moving forces are established on responsiveness between executing forces. boundaries where the two forces are expected to converge. As linking units move closer, positive control must be Linkup of Two Moving Units coordinated to ensure they avoid firing on one another and to ensure the enemy does Linkup between two moving units is not escape between the two forces. one of the most difficult operations (see Leading elements of each force should Figure 6-2). It is normally conducted to monitor a common radio net.

FSCM LINKUP OPERATIONS EARLY STAGES

Q LINKUP FORCE *Q INKUP POINT

FSCM

LINKUP OPERATIONS LAST STAGE RFL % LINKUP FORCE

RFL

Figure 6-1. Linkup of a moving force and a stationary force.

6-2 FM 71-3

un na

• RFL ACE TF 2-H OO 1 BCE

-- OBJ TF 2-14 ACE

3) LÜI E3 J O J

Figure 6-2. Linkup of two moving forces.

Actions Following Linkup When a brigade directs a linkup operation, it normally establishes a When the linkup is made, the linkup restrictive fire line (RFL) for both forces. force may join the stationary force or may RFLs are adjusted as one force moves pass through or around to continue the toward the other until one RFL is attack. If the linkup force is to continue established between the forces when operations with the stationary force, a necessary, usually at the point where the single commander for the overall force two forces plan to establish contact. should be designated. Plans for these operations must be made in advance. If PLANNING the linkup is made under conditions of nuclear warfare, objectives for the linkup The linkup is a complex operation must provide for dispersion in relation to requiring detailed planning and the stationary force. The linkup force may coordination. The following paragraphs immediately pass through the perimeter of describe the importance of planning the the stationary forces, be assigned linkup. objectives within the perimeter, or be assigned objectives outside the perimeter, Plans for a linkup are coordinated as depending on its mission. far in advance as possible. The two forces

6-3 FM 71-3 carefully define and coordinate their The communication plan includes the schemes of maneuver with particular channels for radio communication between attention given to graphic control the two forces. It must prescribe day and measures and the subsequent mission to night identification procedures, including be performed by each force after linkup is primary and alternate means. Aircraft can complete. Alternate linkup points are be used to extend communications range. planned to provide needed flexibility. Visual signals such as flares or panels may be used during daylight, and flashlights or • Liaison is normally established infrared devices may be employed during during planning and continues darkness. throughout the operation. As the distance closes between the forces, To prevent friendly troops from the requirement to maintain close exchanging fires, recognition signals must liaison increases. Use of aircraft be established. They may be pyrotechnics, can improve and expedite this arm bands, vehicle markings, panels, coordination. colored smoke, distinctive light patterns, • Linkup operations frequently and passwords. require a passage of lines. Once through the friendly lines, the brigade moves out as in an Logistical support requirements may exploitation to effect the linkup. be greater during linkup operations than The action is characterized by during other offensive actions. Additional speed, aggressiveness, and considerations for planning logistical boldness. Enemy forces that support in linkup operations include— threaten the successful accomplishment of the mission are • Distance to the objective area. destroyed. Others are bypassed and • Time the objective area is to be reported. If possible, the linkup held. force avoids interference with its • Planned operations or movement mission and concentrates its efforts out of the objective area. on completing the linkup. (For a • Resupply of the stationary unit. complete discussion of passages of • Movement of support assets of lines, see Section III of this airborne or air assault units chapter.) involved in the linkup. • Whether brigade LOG will be The headquarters directing the linkup secured by follow-on units. operation must establish command relationships and responsibilities of the Supply requirements for a linkup forces involved. Both the linkup force and operation may exceed the transportation the force with which linkup is to be made capability of the brigade. The brigade may can remain under control of the directing have to request additional vehicles or headquarters. resupply by air.

6-4 FM 71-3

In linkup operations with airborne and both forces. Further, if these control air assault units, priority for supply by air measures are moved during the operation, is given to the units assaulting the the conditions and signals under which the objective area. Supplies for the linkup change takes place must also be forces normally move by land coordinated. transportation. However, when the objective area is to be defended jointly by The trains organize as for any the linkup and airborne or air assault offensive operation; however, as force, supplies for the linkup force may be mentioned earlier, they carry additional flown into the objective area and supplies and materiel if the force with stockpiled. which they are conducting the linkup has been encircled. Generally, this includes Evacuation of equipment and EPWs Classes I, III, V, and VIII items. The may create major problems for the linkup brigade S4 also ensures that each battalion ^ force. If supply routes are open, the task force understands the MSR and normal evacuation procedures apply. alternate MSR plan, to include traffic When ground routes are not secure, control. In particular, he pushes as much helicopters may be used for evacuation of materiel forward as possible during the wounded while damaged equipment may operation. This is because the brigade will be moved forward with the linkup forces expend resources during the attack and until a suitable opportunity for evacuation any other mission that may occur after the is available. actual linkup.

PREPARATION EXECUTION

Due to the time-sensitive nature of the The initial conduct of the linkup is operation, the commander issues his order identical to a movement to contact or and attempts to at least walk the battalion deliberate attack, depending on the enemy task force commanders through the situation. As the brigade begins its operation. He particularly stresses the maneuver, it attempts to establish and linkup and the coordination required to maintain contact with its corresponding effect the linkup without confusion. friendly force. Each force monitors the Moreover, he ensures that each battalion progress of the other, making adjustments commander is prepared to respond to an to the plan as necessary. For example, if enemy meeting engagement or attack the linkup force is unable to travel at a coincidental to the linkup. The brigade speed commensurate with the plan, yet the commander's major concern is that his breakout force is making a very rapid subordinate commanders do not lose sight advance, the location of the linkup point of their objective—the linkup. may be moved closer to the linkup force. Similarly, the FSCM is also moved. The brigade FSCOORD ensures that the counterpart force in the linkup As the two forces draw closer, the operation, whether moving or stationary, battalion task forces are advised by the has the FS plan. Specifically, he ensures brigade. If possible, the battalion task all FSCMs are completely understood by forces in turn also attempt to establish

6-5 FM 71-3 contact on a predesignated frequency to flank is of concern during the operation or control the actual linkup. At this point, a supporting attack is required to the momentum of the operation slows to penetrate the enemy's lines, then the help prevent fratricide. The tradeoff may brigade S3 places himself where he can be that some enemy forces may slip observe the brigade's secondary action. between the two closing forces. The commander and S3 must remain in Coordination signals are then used to communication throughout the battle, identify each force as they approach the using the main CP, if necessary, to relay linkup point. messages. In particular, the commander must maintain the tempo of the operation, FSCMs are changed or emplaced based because once the force becomes stalled, it on the progress of the forces and the is very difficult to get it moving again. enemy situation. Specifically, the CFLs Therefore, he must have the ability to are cancelled. An RFL is also placed into move forward from time to time to spur effect to prevent fratricide between the on his lead element. converging forces. Once the linkup has occurred, the FS for the brigade and its The commander also monitors the linkup force is organized as per the higher action to ensure control measures that he headquarters plan for future operations. established in planning the operation are still valid. He issues a FRAGO for The commander positions himself to changes as necessary. He attempts to observe the progress of the operation. remain in communication with his Generally, this means that he follows the counterpart commander throughout the lead battalion task force. If a particular operation.

SECTION II. RELIEF IN PLACE

GENERAL the combat effectiveness of committed A relief in place is an operation in elements and should be conducted during which a unit is replaced in combat by a lull in combat if possible. A relief in another unit. The responsibilities for the place may be conducted to— combat mission and the assigned sector or zone of action of the replaced unit are • Introduce a new unit into combat. assumed by the incoming unit. A relief in • Reconstitute a unit. place may be conducted during offensive • Allow a unit to rest. or defensive operations and during various • Decontaminate a unit. combat and OOTWs and during all • Change the mission of a unit. weather and light conditions. The primary • Replace a peace enforcement unit purpose for a relief in place is to maintain with a peacekeeping unit. FM 71-3

PLANNING Sequence of Relief

Considerations for a relief in The relief in place is executed by place are— stages, either rear to front or front to rear. In determining the sequence of the • Units are normally relieved at night relief, both commanders should consider or during periods of limited the— visibility. • Subsequent mission of the brigade • Detailed prior reconnaissance by conducting the relief. the incoming unit is essential. • Strength and combat efficiency of • The incoming unit must fit into and the brigade presently in place. accept the general defense plan of the outgoing unit until passage of • Capability of the enemy to detect command. and react against the relief.

• Normal patterns of activity should • Characteristics of the AO. be maintained. Passage of Command • CS and CSS units normally should not be relieved at the same time as The time or circumstances under which the units they support. the incoming commander assumes responsibility for the area must be clearly When a unit relieves another unit in established by both commanders. During place, the WO to the incoming unit must the relief, the outgoing commander retains specify, as a minimum, the time for responsibility for the area and mission and commencing and completing the relief and exercises OPCON over all subordinate the priorities for use of routes involved. elements of the incoming brigade that The two units conducting the relief must have completed their portion of the relief. agree on procedures for accomplishing the Responsibility passes to the incoming items listed in the following paragraphs. commander when all the battalions in the forward defense area have been relieved Exchange of Plans and Liaison and adequate communications have been Personnel established.

The incoming brigade commander and Reconnaissance staff must be briefed and become thoroughly familiar with existing defensive Commanders and staff officers of all plans. The outgoing brigade leaves liaison echelons of the incoming brigade conduct personnel with the incoming brigade. a thorough daylight reconnaissance. These personnel usually remain until the incoming units become familiar with the A relieving unit reconnaissance situation. element should include the brigade

6-7 FM 71-3 commander, the S3, S2, an LO, the FSO, • Responsibility for traffic control. battalion commanders, the S1/S4 party, • Location of assembly areas. and at least a tank or mechanized platoon • Common use of transportation, if for a security force. The relieved force necessary. commander should initially select at least two routes and contact points for the If terrain and road network allow, incoming unit. The incoming unit's relieving and relieved units should be reconnaissance and liaison element with assigned separate routes and assembly the TOC and trains must move to the areas to reduce congestion and to relieved unit's location immediately upon minimize massing of combat power. See receiving the order from higher Figure 6-3 for relief in place overlay headquarters. techniques.

Security The method of relieving FS units must be clearly established by the two All echelons of the incoming and FSCOORDs. Normally, the FS units of the outgoing units must prevent the enemy outgoing unit remain in position until the from learning that a relief is taking place. units in the forward defense have been In addition to conducting the relief during relieved. By using this procedure, FS units periods of reduced visibility, the following that are familiar with the FS plans and the security measures should be taken: area are in position to fire during the critical period of the relief of forward • Restrictions on the size of advance units. Once FS plans are passed and coordinated, OPCON is not transferred parties and reconnaissance parties must be enforced. until the maneuver unit is in place and has control. • Communications during the relief are conducted on the command Similar to a linkup operation, units frequency of the outgoing unit until coordinate information on obstacle the relief is complete. intelligence and other engineer related intelligence. The brigade engineer • OPSEC is maintained throughout becomes familiar with the existing the operation. defensive plans and considers making adjustments based on the subsequent mission. He makes plans to conduct a Movement Control reconnaissance of the area and confirm the location, status, and integration of tactical Arrangements must be made between obstacles. the incoming and outgoing units for control of units moving into and out of In addition to conducting the relief of the area. Coordination must include— air defense assets in sector, the primary mission of ADA units is to provide • Routes to be used and priorities for increased coverage over all primary relief their use. routes in sector. These tasks are

6-8 FM 71-3 accomplished jointly, and actual relief of Rear CPs and FSB CPs of each unit ADA units is not scheduled until the relief collocate as do the CPs for each of all maneuver units has been battalion's field trains. Some supplies are accomplished. transferred to the relieving FSB (such as ATP stocks [main gun ammunition], CSS relief is just as complicated as the engineer materiel, and possibly Class I tactical relief and requires the same [T-rations]). The factors of METT-T are degree of detailed planning; however, CSS examined to determine if the relieving relief probably occurs before the combat FSB can occupy an adjacent position or units execute to allow the relieved unit's must use the existing support locations. FSB an opportunity to establish Separate routes are coordinated by the operations in preparation for the relieved relieving and relieved units to avoid two- unit's recovery. Therefore, the same way traffic. considerations and operations apply to the brigade's CSS.

SP SP TACCP 9 3

TAC CP

II ~ II

flip, * rÉ) } ! + y Ii É]TOC AT ^ X 0?

RELIEVED FORCE

RELIEVING FORCE

Figure 6-3. Brigade relief in place overlay.

6-9 FM 71-3

PREPARATION • Relief of the center task force followed by the simultaneous A relief is executed in stages to relief of the flank task forces ensure the most effective defense during when three task forces are the relief. As an example, reserves may employed forward. be relieved first, followed by relief of forward elements. Normally, when • Relief of all forward task forces minimum forces are employed on the simultaneously. FLOT, the relief is conducted from rear to front; when maximum forces are In analyzing these methods, the employed on the FLOT, the relief is commander should consider— conducted from front to rear. In determining the sequence of the relief, commanders should also consider— • The enemy situation and capability of the enemy to detect • Strength and condition of and react against the relief. elements in the relief. • The characteristics of the AO. • Subsequent missions of relieved and relieving units. • The time available for accomplishing the relief. • The enemy situation and the capability of the enemy to detect • The acceptable degree of and react against the relief. concentration of forces. • Characteristics of the AO. • The need to vary the pattern of Generally, simultaneous relief of all relief. elements is the fastest option; however, it is also the least secure and the most difficult to control. Sequential reliefs When sequence of relief has been involve only one element at a time; they determined, the commander then selects are the slowest and most secure method the method of relief for forward units. and also the easiest to control. When His choices include— relieving an element in a hide position, the incoming unit should occupy an • Relief of the first of two forward adjacent position, if possible. task forces, to be completed before relief of the third task Because of the difficulty in accurately force, begins when two task laying weapons at night, commanders of forces are employed forward. the incoming and outgoing units arrange for the mutual exchange of crew-served • Relief of two flank task forces weapons that cannot be easily moved or simultaneously followed by the that can, when necessary, ensure the center task force when three task effective delivery of fires. The exchange forces are employed forward. is on a weapon-for-weapon basis. The

6-10 FM 71-3 authority for this exchange is included in separated as much as possible to minimize the relief order of the next higher vulnerability to enemy fires. Delays within commander. assembly areas are avoided by precise planning, timing, and execution. Intelligence and obstacle overlays are posted and disseminated. Further In the conduct of the relief, exchange of target folders, status of mechanized infantry dismounts far enough obstacles, emplacement of conventional to the rear to avoid compromising the and scatterable minefields, and reports of relief and move forward to effect the relief enemy minefield emplacement must be on foot. The carriers move forward after accomplished. completion of the relief by dismounted troops. Outgoing mechanized units Figure 6-4 depicts radio nets employed exfiltrate carriers prior to relief, providing during the relief. such action does not compromise the relief; otherwise, the carriers of the outgoing units do not move until the relief EXECUTION is completed.

During the relief, commanders at each At the brigade level, the relief is echelon are together at the CP or OP of managed through the reports of the the outgoing unit. The incoming unit battalion task forces. Specifically, the commander assumes responsibility for the main CP monitors the progress of each defense when the majority of his unit is in battalion task force, recording when each position (or as agreed upon by the two battalion has transferred command and brigade commanders) and command and when the relief is complete. control systems are established, at a time previously designated by the next higher commander. All units in position, During the conduct of the relief, regardless of their parent organization, enemy contact is possible. If a relieved or come under the OPCON of the present relieving unit gains contact with an enemy commander if the sector comes under force, it immediately notifies the other attack. unit and the higher headquarters directing the relief. If command has not passed, the To limit confusion inherent in a relief relieving unit comes under OPCON of the and to avoid excessive massing, adjacent relieved unit, is absorbed into the teams of task forces are not normally relieving unit's positions, and continues relieved at the same time. Elements of the normal radio traffic. outgoing battalions leave the area as soon as they are relieved and control is The brigade FSO monitors both the established. enemy situation, to which he may be required to respond with indirect fire, and Generally, the brigade does not permit the relief of the artillery units. Generally, battalions to designate assembly areas for FS assets are one of the first elements to units larger than company size. These collocate and the last to leave. Both company assembly areas are, in turn. relieving units and those being relieved

6-11 FM 71-3 fire in support of the operation. The facilitate the passage of reconnaissance relieving FA reinforces the fire of the forces. artillery unit being relieved. Having already conducted the relief of the BSA, the CSS should be the same as The incoming and outgoing engineer for any defensive operation. With the pos- commander link up and monitor the sibility of enemy contact, the BSA must handover of reserve targets and other be prepared to initially support a force overlays, verifying the status of tactical that may also include a significant portion obstacles. Particularly in the case of lanes of the relieved brigade. It is important for through minefields or other obstacles, it is the relieved BSA to leave behind ATP important that the lanes are confirmed to stocks, engineer supplies, and Class I.

MINIMIZE RELIEVED UNIT

HQ DIRECTING RELIEVING UNIT ENTERS RELIEVED UNIT THE MONITOR !1 X COMMAND NET RELIEF

MINMIZE RELIEVING UNIT

Figure 6-4. Radio net for a relief in place.

6-12 FM 71-3

SECTION III. PASSAGE OF LINES

GENERAL necessary when the factors of METT-T do not permit one unit the freedom of The coordinated movement of one or bypassing another friendly unit and more units through another unit is a therefore must pass through it. A passage passage of lines. A brigade passage of of lines may be conducted to— lines is a complex operation requiring detailed coordination, extensive plan- • Continue an attack or ning, and close supervision between counterattack. brigades. A passage of lines may be designated as a forward or rear- • Envelop an enemy force. ward passage of lines (see Figures 6-5 and 6-6). The primary purpose of a passage • Pursue a fleeing enemy. of lines is to maintain the movement or • Withdraw covering forces or MBA maneuver of units. This operation is forces.

PL PL RED PP PP PP RED

tsnrs V» [Ü/ \U/ \\SJI\JT r\r\ LC o JOC, s s o = Q ¡i ATK 4* i

SP SP

Figure 6-5. Forward passage of lines (deliberate attack).

6-13 FM 71-3

PL PV. DOG DOG IBHLI PP (BH1J S PP ? 0 PEBA O O FEBA UJ G O f It O X SP oi

SP 0> II N I

BSA RP

HAWK

Figure 6-6. Rearward passage of lines.

PLANNING assembly areas. It does not halt within the passed brigade’s forward positions. The division or corps commander is • Plan deception and smoke at responsible for planning and coordinating dummy and actual unit locations a brigade passage of lines. Certain basic and PPs. considerations must be integrated into the • Integrate CS and CSS assets of the planning process: stationary brigade into the plan to support the movement of the • Plans for the conduct of the passing force. passage must facilitate transition to • Establish stringent graphic control the subsequent missions of both the measures to ensure a smooth passing and stationary brigades. passage. • Control of the zone or sector passes from one brigade to the other at a time and place directed One of the most critical aspects of a by the higher common commander passage of lines is terrain management. or mutually agreed upon by the The passing brigade's S3 coordinates with stationary and passing brigade the stationary brigade's S3 to receive commanders. information concerning the disposition of • The passing brigade moves on friendly forces within the stationary multiple routes through the passed brigade's AO. Unoccupied areas may brigade and avoids the use of represent possible locations to station

6-14 FM 71-3 future units of the passing brigade. With attack. If a reinforcing FA unit is the IPB complete and a thorough involved, it is critical to ensure that they understanding of the restrictions presented are integrated into the plan. by location of the stationary brigade, the S3 prepares his tentative plan within the parameters established by the brigade Mobility and terrain management is a commander. The S3 also examines the major concern. The passing brigade location of the contact points to determine engineer coordinates with the stationary whether they are compatible with the engineer concerning the following— scheme of maneuver. • Threat engineer intelligence. Once the contact points have been • Location and status of tactical finalized, the S3 coordinates with the obstacles. stationary force's S3 to establish the location of the passage lanes. Remember • Location of lanes and bypasses. that the physical characteristics and number of the passage lanes determine the speed and disposition of the passing force The selection of passage lanes should as it crosses the LD. Therefore, when be influenced by the location of friendly conducting a forward passage in obstacles. Some obstacles may have to be preparation for a deliberate attack, it may reduced to facilitate the movement along be important to create passage lanes with designated routes. In this regard, sufficient width to allow the passing force coordination for the opening and closure to move in a tactical formation of lanes must be made at the contact appropriate to the operation, such as points. company columns or a platoon wedge.

In planning a passage of lines, air The brigade FSCOORD and FSO begin defense is absolutely essential. Whether by examining the FS plan of the stationary passing forward or to the rear, the moving brigade. Direct coordination between the unit is forced to move slower and often in two FSEs is critical. A clear FS battle some type of column formation during the handover or transfer of control must be passage. Congestion in assembly areas identified and approved by the maneuver either before or after the passage and the commander. linear nature of the movement present a lucrative target to hostile aircraft. As a As noted earlier, terrain management result, air defense must be coordinated becomes especially important because of with the stationary unit. In many cases, possible requirements to plan space for the stationary brigade will be able to additional artillery batteries and their protect the passing force, allowing the support assets. Coordination with the passing force's supporting air defense stationary brigade's S3 is especially assets to move with them. However, if the important to ensure that the artillery passing force requires static air defense, positions itself properly to support the the terrain has to be coordinated with the

6-15 FM 71-3 stationary brigade's S3. Coordination situation and terrain determine, for the should also be made to incorporate the most part, which type of collocation is moving force's ADA assets into the best. stationary force's air defense early warning net. PREPARATION

The CSS plan is an essential part of The brigade commander and staff the passage of lines. CSS assets should be should wargame to ensure he has positioned to support the passage. considered contingencies in the event of UMCPs and emergency refueling points enemy contact during the passage of lines. should be positioned where they can best The brigade prepares for the passage of keep the lane open and vehicles moving. lines by conducting a rehearsal. Generally, Figure 6-7 shows the CSS plan for a forward passages of lines may be rearward passage of lines. incorporated into the offensive maneuver rehearsal. In a rearward passage of lines, The collocation of headquarters in however, (particularly following combat) preparation for the passage of lines may there may not be time to conduct a com- be accomplished in several ways. The plete level three rehearsal. In this case.

5 L DOG w (BHL) PL DOG. 9 (BHL) FEBA FEBA poßli o o o. SP Y 7

¿a* U vc

—X

Figure 6-7. Combat service support plan for rearward passage of lines.

6-16 FM 71-3 the passage must be "rehearsed" as part of headquarters element) collocates with the the orders confirmation brief. stationary brigade's main CP and conducts communications checks. Quartering The FS plan is rehearsed along with parties from subordinate elements also the passage rehearsal. In particular, the move in preparation of the rearward FSO must know when he may rely on the passage. supporting fires of those batteries that are supporting the stationary force. The EXECUTION location of each battery in support of the passing brigade should be checked again The commander monitors the with the stationary brigade's S3 to avoid operation from the initial actions at the any conflict during execution. contact point to the last element's final passage. The actual coordination at the The brigade engineer ensures contact points is handled by the battalion commanders understand the location and task force. Whether conducting a forward description of friendly obstacles along the or rearward passage of lines, the key passage lane. At the rehearsal, he covers aspect of the passage is when to transfer lane marking and actions taken at the control of the sector/zone. obstacle crossing. He also discusses the engineer scheme for the follow-on Until transfer of responsibility of the mission. zone or sector occurs, all indirect fire missions are coordinated and approved by The air defense plan should be the FSO who initially controls that area exercised during the passage rehearsal. (most likely the stationary force). Specifically, communications between the passing and stationary units should be The brigade engineer links up with the checked to ensure that both are operating stationary engineer at the contact point on the air defense early warning net. and monitors the passage. He confirms the locations of obstacles and marked lanes or The CSS plan should be rehearsed to bypasses along passage lanes. ensure that the required support assets are properly positioned to assist in the The primary mission of the CSS assets passage. Moreover, the rehearsal should is to ensure unimpeded movement of the exercise the support system to identify any passing force. Maintenance assets are on possible weaknesses in the responsiveness call to remove and repair any vehicle of the support plan. Movement of the disabled during the movement. BSA and other support assets occur as Additionally, emergency resupply of POL necessary before actual execution of the is on standby to support as required. The passage. stationary unit should provide the bulk of the support at the PP; however, the During the rehearsal, the commander passing unit must be prepared to augment ensures that each organization knows these assets as required. when and where to move as well as how to execute the required coordination. The The collocation of the TOCs ensures TAC CP or TOC (or other designated that the necessary information exchange

6-17 FM 71-3 occurs during the passage of lines. In necessary coordination to preclude a loss particular, the passing brigade commander of momentum in the attack. Use simple positions himself where he can best and standardized control measures. observe the conduct of the passage while retaining the ability to quickly join the There are three key players involved: force for future operations. the stationary commander, the passing commander, and their higher commander. As each element reaches the contact Each commander has certain point, the information is relayed to the responsibilities. The higher commander collocated headquarters. The location of defines the location and time for the each element must be closely watched to handover and any specified tasks, receives ensure that delays by passing units do not confirmation briefs from both com- have a negative impact on other forces. manders, and monitors the execution Should the passage occur slower than during the handover. The passing and planned, FRAGOs are issued to the units stationary commanders coordinate waiting to pass, simply pushing back their according to the TSOP and execute the time of execution. Units should remain in handover. Until the handover is complete their assembly areas until it is time to and acknowledged by the two move, rather than move to the contact commanders, the commander in contact is point and wait in line. responsible for the fight. The higher commander specifies where the handover BATTLE HANDOVER occurs and defines the resulting responsibility for the zone or sector. A battle handover is a coordinated operation between two units that Handover occurs along a line forward transfers responsibility for fighting an of the stationary force. The line is enemy force from one unit to the other. It established by the higher commander in is executed to sustain continuity of the consultation with both commanders. The combined arms fight and protect the stationary commander has the major combat potential of both forces involved. determination in the BHL location. This Battle handover is usually associated with line is forward of the FEBA in the defense conducting a passage of lines. Battle or the FLOT in the offense. It is drawn handover and passage of lines are inherent where elements of the passing unit can be aspects of transferring responsibility for effectively overwatched by direct fires of the battle between commanders while the forward combat elements of the maintaining continuity of the fight. stationary unit until the battle handover is complete. Battle handover may occur during both offensive and defensive operations. While a line defines the battle During defensive operations, it is normally handover, seldom do events allow this to coordinated in advance so it requires happen cleanly. Physical handover should minimum coordination when ordered to be viewed as a transition that occurs in occur. In the offense, it is often initiated the zone of BHL. Events may dictate that by a FRAGO based on the situation. Clear a force break contact forward of or behind TSOP allow units to quickly establish the BHL, as in the gap between echelons

6-18 FM 71-3 of the attacking enemy force. Close should be done simultaneously. This coordination, physical and by radio, coordination is best established as a TSOP between the two units involved in the to facilitate rapid accomplishment. handover allows them to coordinate and Coordination includes— execute this process at the small unit level. The stationary unit is just as active • Establishing communication. as the passing unit. • Providing updates on both friendly Battle handover begins on order of the and enemy situations. higher commander of both units involved. • Coordinating passage. Defensive handover is complete when the passing unit is clear and the stationary • Collocating command and control. unit is ready to engage the enemy. Offensive handover is complete when the • Coordinating all fires (direct and passing unit has deployed and crossed the indirect). BHL. The BHL is normally considered the • Dispatching representatives to LD for the attacking unit. contact points.

Coordination for the battle handover • Establishing recognition signals. normally flows from the commander out • Determining status of obstacles and of contact to the commander in contact. routes. The coordination for a battle handover overlaps with the coordination for a • Determining CS and CSS passage of lines; the coordination for both requirements. SECTION IV. RETROGRADE OPERATIONS

GENERAL the delaying force becoming decisively engaged in combat. A brigade may A retrograde operation is an conduct a delay as part of— organized movement to the rear or away from the enemy. The operation may be • A covering force for defending or forced by enemy action, or it may be withdrawing main bodies. executed voluntarily. In either case, it • An advance guard or covering must be approved by the higher force when encountering superior commander. forces. • An economy-of-force operation DELAY conducted to fix or contain an enemy attack on a less critical Planning avenue of approach. A delaying action is an operation in • A deception measure to set up a which maximum delay and damage are counterattack. inflicted on an advancing enemy without • A defense.

6-19 FM 71-3

As a delaying force, the brigade contact and closely coordinate must— flank security. - Maximum use of terrain. Delay • Provide the required period of positions should be located on delay. terrain features that control • Preserve the integrity of the the likely enemy avenues of battlefield by always maintaining approach. contact with the enemy. - .Forcing the enemy to deploy • Cause the enemy to plan and and maneuver. Engagement at conduct successive attacks. maximum ranges of all weapons causes the enemy to • Preserve the force, ensuring the take time-consuming measures delay mission is accomplished. A to deploy, develop the portion of the brigade may be situation, and maneuver to required to accept decisive drive the delaying force from engagement to accomplish the its position. An aggressive delay mission. enemy commander will not • A delay differs from the defense deploy if he correctly in that it is not necessarily determines that friendly forces intended to achieve complete are delaying; he simply uses destruction of the enemy. The his mass and momentum to delaying unit avoids decisive develop sufficient pressure to engagement. A delaying action is cause friendly forces to fall characterized by operations on a back. Therefore, the delay wide front with maximum forces must be sufficiently tenacious in contact and minimum in to leave him in doubt about reserve. A delay is more difficult the friendly mission. When the than a defend mission. For these enemy commander believes he reasons, there are key has encountered the main considerations that must be friendly defenses, he then applied when executing a delay: deploys. - Maximum use of obstacles. - Centralized control and Reinforcing and existing decentralized action. A delay obstacles are used to canalize results in a series of and slow enemy forward independent unit actions progress and provide security across the front in which each to the flanks of the delaying commander must be permitted force. freedom of action in engaging - Maintaining contact with the the enemy within the context enemy. Continuous recon- of the commander’s intent. In naissance is conducted to the conduct of the delay, the establish and maintain contact unit must maintain enemy with the enemy to prevent any

6-20 FM 71-3

attempt to bypass or envelop require assistance in disengaging from the flanks or penetrate the enemy. Assistance could be provided between brigade units by aviation, FA, or the commitment of conducting the delay. the brigade reserve. The reserve can both significantly augment the lethality - Avoiding decisive engage- of the delaying battalion and assist in ment. The delaying force their disengagement. normally displaces to the next delaying position before becoming decisively engaged. The movement from primary to If units conducting the delay secondary positions (as well as other become decisively engaged, subsequent moves) is the area of greatest they may jeopardize the entire risk to the force. Friendly forces are operation. It is not possible to exposed and vulnerable to direct fire delay successfully against an should the enemy be able to press the aggressive opponent unless the attack. Moreover, the delaying force friendly force possesses a must have a mobility advantage over the mobility advantage. aggressor to allow time to occupy their next position. As a result, the Preparation commander verifies through the rehearsal and TDIS analysis that the The brigade commander begins by forces are able to maintain their mobility. having the battalion task force Again, in locations where there seems to commanders backbrief their individual be little margin for error, the commander operations, explaining how their considers the use of Army aviation assets missions fit into the overall brigade plan. or perhaps the reserve to overwatch the The commander must ensure that his move. control measures are understood by each commander and that flank coordination can be executed without hesitation. The logistics plan must be checked to ensure that only necessary vehicles and Next, the commander checks that the equipment have remained behind to battalions are able to maintain contact support the brigade. The recovery and with the enemy without becoming evacuation plan should be checked to decisively engaged. He examines the ensure that damaged vehicles can be direct-fire instructions issued to the removed to the rear rapidly. This is not battalions by their commanders, paying easy due to the limited number of special attention to the disengagement recovery vehicles. It is important for criteria. In particular, he should be tanks with fire control damage to drag satisfied that the battalions are able to other vehicles to the rear as necessary. inflict maximum destruction, yet retain UMCPs should be used only long their mobility. Disengagement execution enough to transfer damaged vehicles to should be linked to obstacles and other recovery vehicles. Avoid collection indirect fire; however, the commander of damaged equipment that exceeds the may identify areas within the plan when UMCPs' ability to transport it at a and where a battalion task force may moments notice.

6-21 FM 71-3

Prestocks of ammunition should be Specifically, he must verify that the force placed adjacent to subsequent positions. can assume its required position prior to The stocks should not be so large as to the arrival of the enemy. This also prevent the unit from continuing the confirms his DST. In each case, he must mission should the stocks be destroyed. know how long it takes the reserve to The stocks should be kept on transport move from its hide position to the vehicles to make availability more counterattack/overwatch position and flexible and to permit their evacuation prepare to fight. This should be based rather than force destruction in the face upon information provided by the of the enemy. The same technique holds reserve commander, who actually drove true for fuel, although fuel requirements the route at tactical speed in preparation are easier to forecast than ammunition for the battle. consumption. In this case, the fuel trucks must be available for emergency Execution requisition. (Topping off before execution of the operation should be As the enemy moves toward the required to avoid emergency refueling delaying force, the battalion scout during combat.) Again, the commander platoons begin to report enemy must ensure that his CSS plan allows the maneuver. The task forces relay these brigade to maintain mobility while reports to the brigade staff. The reports providing the means to inflict maximum are reconciled against the commander's destruction. DST and event template to confirm the enemy's probable COA. In particular, the The reserve may be called upon to commander makes an initial assessment execute several tasks, such as blocking of the enemy's strength. This information an enemy penetration, reinforcing a influences his estimate of the brigade's weakened sector, assisting in ability to conduct the operation as disengagement, and counterattacking. planned. Generally, the brigade reserve avoids missions that extend far forward of the FLOT. Rather, it is used to maintain the Reports of enemy activity cohesive nature of the delaying force. As approaching TAIs should initiate a result, the brigade commander must responses from the brigade, such as calls clearly define how, where, and under for indirect fire. Throughout the what conditions he uses the reserve. The operation, the brigade commander must same TDIS analysis required in defensive rely on the battalions in contact for planning is essential in proper reserve information concerning the enemy's force planning; its integration into the strength, disposition, and probable future maneuver plan using the DST must be a operations. matter of course. The brigade commander controls the During the rehearsal, the commander delay using the control measures exercises the reserve in each of the assigned with the delay plan. missions which he has determined to be Specifically, he requires the timely appropriate to the overall delay mission. reporting of PL crossing, passing of

6-22 FM 71-3 checkpoints, coordination point contact, mesmerized by the close-in fight. His and the occupation of BPs. As the enemy anticipation of future enemy actions, or presses the attack, attempting to battalion needs, stimulates CS and CSS maneuver against the delaying battalions, operations in a specific sector. the commander monitors the action closely, in an effort to anticipate possible He must maintain the cohesiveness of decisive engagement. The commander the overall operation, ensuring that flank may weight a subordinate maneuver coordination is maintained at all times. element’s fight with CS to maintain Most important, he must carefully assess separation with the enemy. the situation to determine the most effective use of the brigade reserve. The use of Army aviation should be Once he reaches his DP, the commitment fully integrated into the plan and well of the reserve must then receive all the thought-out as it is a limited resource. A support necessary to successfully most appropriate use of combat aviation accomplish its mission. It is imperative is to shape the battlefield well in front of that the counterattack force strike the ground units allowing them more quickly and violently. It must be freedom of maneuver. Early commitment withdrawn just as quickly so that it can of aviation assets may be a mistake if be used again at another opportune they are not in a position to significantly moment. augment the killing power of the battalion in contact. A more appropriate WITHDRAWAL use would be to assist the battalion in contact in maintaining its freedom of A withdrawal is disengagement from maneuver. the enemy, either unassisted or assisted by another force. It is conducted so that the battle may be handed over to another Due to the decentralized execution of unit positioned to the rear of the the delay, the brigade commander must withdrawing force, allowing the rely on his battalion commanders to withdrawing force to prepare for future execute the mission and ask for help operations. Withdrawals may or may not when they need it. This places a heavy occur under enemy pressure. burden on the battalion commanders, particularly when considering the Assisted Withdrawal strength of the enemy force they will be facing. Therefore, the brigade The assisting force occupies BPs to commander ensures his subordinate the rear of the withdrawing brigade and commanders get what they need to do prepares its defense: It can also assist the job. the withdrawing brigade with withdrawl route reconnaissance, maintenance and During actual execution of the delay, supply support, and security. Detailed the commander must carefully monitor coordination is conducted with the progress of each battalion. Because he is withdrawing brigade, which then delays separate from the action, he can look at to the BHL, conducts a passage of lines, the actions without becoming and moves to its final destination.

6-23 FM 71-3

Unassisted Withdrawal • Position of security forces. • Preparation of deception opera- The brigade can establish a security tions. force for the whole brigade. Usually this is at least a battalion task force. Front- • Deployment of rearward FA units line battalions withdraw behind the not needed to support the security force and continue their withdrawing forces. movement to the rear assembly area. The • Disengagement and movement of alternative is to require the battalions to the withdrawing main body to provide their own security in their new positions. sectors. • Disengagement and withdrawal of Planning security forces or security elements when directed to do so During withdrawal, all or a portion of by the brigade commander. the brigade disengages from the enemy and moves away in an organized manner. Withdrawals are either assisted or Preparation unassisted. An assisted withdrawal uses a security force provided by the next Critical to the success of a higher headquarters to assist the brigade withdrawal is the coordination between in breaking contact with the enemy and the brigade and the covering force. The to provide overwatching fires. In an collocation of headquarters helps in unassisted withdrawal, the brigades solving some of the problems during provide their own security covering preparation and execution. force. The withdrawing brigade must Withdrawal operations are conducted coordinate a rearward passage of lines as in several phases: discussed previously. The BHL and recognition signals must be agreed upon. • Initiation of security force FSCM must be established to safeguard operations. the rearward movement of the brigade. If • Selection, reconnaissance, and time allows, members of the covering necessary preparation of multiple force should meet on the ground with routes, traffic control points the leaders of the withdrawing force to (TCP), and on-order assembly agree on contact points, PPs, passage areas. lanes, obstacles, and FS plans.

• Preparation of obstacles to hinder The commander must rehearse the the pursuit by the enemy. conduct of the withdrawal, paying particular attention to the possibility of • Evacuation of wounded, re- reverting to the delay. Movement plans, coverable equipment and supplies, followed by rearward passage of lines, and movement of nonessential should be stressed. Control must be CSS units to the rear. maintained throughout the operation.

6-24 FM 71-3

Each player must understand his role in enemy engaged as in a deliberate the operation. defense. If this is conducted properly, the enemy, in its haste to reestablish The commander checks the contact with the withdrawing force, coordination between the brigade and plunges into the deliberate defense, the covering force. The covering force sustaining heavy casualties. should be kept informed of the activities of the brigade throughout the As the battalions report they are clear withdrawal. Collocating headquarters of each brigade PL, the brigade informs and providing LOs between headquarters the covering force that the PL represents help in reducing confusion. The the brigade CFL. This allows increased commander and staff rehearse the FS in the brigade sector and prevents the conduct of the withdrawal, to include enemy from reestablishing contact. reverting to the delay in the event of an enemy attack. The DST and other tools From their final positions, the must be at their disposal. battalions begin passage of lines IAW the plan coordinated with the covering Execution force. If there is no covering force, the detachment left in contact (DLIC) covers As the time of execution arrives, the the movement of the brigade to the rear. brigade begins the deception plan. After the battalions have passed to the Artillery fires could trick the enemy into rear of the covering force, they quickly thinking the brigade is going on to the form up in assembly areas to prepare for offensive and prevent him from detecting the road movement to their final the withdrawal. The suppression should destination. The covering force assumes cover the withdrawing force's movement responsibility for the sector once the from the FEB A. brigade clears the BHL. Security elements carefully monitor their assigned sectors, reporting any Throughout the operation, the signs of enemy activity. As the force commander's main concern is avoiding begins to move to the rear, the security decisive engagement with the enemy. To force displaces to the next designated do this, he must make his assessment PL. based on reports of units in contact with the enemy. The commander should Accurate reporting and relaying of remember that an appropriate COA for information through the battalion task one battalion may not suit another. A force headquarters are essential to the battalion may respond to enemy success proper assessment of the situation. by reverting to the delay while adjacent battalions continue to withdraw. Security elements call for indirect fire to keep the enemy off balance and RETIREMENT prevent him from closing with the main body. Once the screen reaches its last A retirement is a retrograde position, adjacent to the covering force, operation in which a force not in contact battle handover is effected and the moves away from the enemy.

6-25 FM 71-3

Planning guard. Control measures should be clearly understood. The brigade A retirement is made following a commander positions himself where he withdrawal or when there is no actual can best control and monitor the contact with the enemy. When a operation. Actions upon contact should withdrawal precedes the retirement, the be rehearsed with each of the battalion retirement begins after the main forces commanders to ensure that they have broken contact with the enemy and understand the proper procedures. march columns have been formed. A retirement is conducted to— Preparation

• Occupy more favorable terrain. The commander reviews the maneuver plan with the battalion • Conform to the disposition of commanders. He ensures each another force. commander understands his mission and • Permit the employment of the responsibilities. If the brigade is force in another sector. conducting a tactical movement, • Increase the distance between the coordination between the rear guard and defender and the enemy. the main body will be addressed. The main body must not outrun the rear A tank-heavy rear guard supported guard. Actions in rearward passage of by FA, ADA, and TACAIR support is lines with a stationary force must be normally required for a retirement. The rehearsed so each element understands rear guard uses delaying action which position to occupy before techniques to slow the advance of the executing its rearward passage. The enemy and prevent interference with the BHL must be understood by the rear movement of the main body. guard as well as on-order CFLs. Order The procedures for the conduct of a of march from each unit's final defensive nontactical retirement are identical to positions to passage lanes and ultimately those of a tactical road march. routes to the assembly area must be Nontactical movements are conducted clearly understood. only when contact with the enemy is Each battalion task force and brigade unlikely. Enemy capability to employ element must know when and where it is airborne or air assault forces must be taken into consideration and route to travel on the rearward route to the reconnaissance performed as required. assembly area. Emergency stop areas, maintenance halts, and rest halts should be identified as well as UMCPs and The brigade S4 plans rearming, emergency fuel support. refueling, and repair of the brigade’s equipment upon closure in its new Occupation of and actions within the assembly area. assembly area should be reviewed so that each element understands the The commander must ensure that the geographical boundaries of his area and rear guard commander has everything needed to command and control the rear his responsibilities upon occupation. A

6-26 FM 71-3 discussion of assembly area operations is Once the passage is complete, the in Appendix D. brigade forms into march elements and begins the road movement to its Execution designated assembly area. It may be advisable to occupy temporary assembly area positions to reorganize before The rear guard delays the enemy as beginning the road movement. required to protect the main body, Reconnaissance elements and MPs may fighting from subsequent lines of assist in traffic control during this phase defense. The rear guard must not of the operation. become decisively engaged. The brigade provides command and The main body moves in column. As control for the rear guard as well as the the brigade approaches its final positions retiring units. The commander travels in before executing a rearward passage of the area of the brigade where he can best lines, the units may have to temporarily influence the action. He temporarily adopt a hasty defensive position until collocates his CP with the stationary each element is able to conduct its force CP to supervise the rearward rearward passage of lines. This passage of the brigade. Then he moves temporary halt may be expedited by to a forward march unit to monitor increasing the number of passage lines. movement all the way back to the assembly area.

SECTION V. BREAKOUT FROM ENCIRCLEMENT

GENERAL plan so the unit can continue to contribute to the mission. A brigade is encircled when all ground routes of evacuation and PLANNING reinforcement have been cut by enemy action. A force may become encircled Command Actions when it is ordered to remain in a strong position on key terrain to deny the The senior maneuver commander enemy passage through a vital choke within the encirclement assumes control point following an enemy breakthrough of all forces. He informs his superior of or left to hold the shoulder of a the situation; simultaneously, he begins penetration. A unit might also be left in to accomplish the following tasks reposition behind the enemy by design or gardless of his subsequent mission: be given a mission with a high risk of being encircled. When this happens, the • Reorganize all CS and CSS assets encircled commander must have a clear and bring under centralized understanding of the higher commander's control.

6-27 FM 71-3

• Reestablish a chain of command. • Maintain morale. Commanders Fragmented units are reorganized, and leaders at all levels maintain and a clear chain of command is the confidence of soldiers by established. Personnel not resolute action and a positive essential to CS and CSS are attitude. They keep soldiers organized for combat operations informed to suppress rumors. or provided to battalion as replacements. Actions Upon Encirclement • Establish a viable defense. The command quickly establishes all- around defense; assigns sectors, The options available to the encircled BPs or strongpoints; and brigade are— institutes an aggressive patrolling plan. • Conduct a breakout attack in the • Establish a reserve. A reserve direction of a friendly force. must be constituted and • Defend encircled. positioned to take advantage of interior lines. Consider • Attack deeper toward enemy establishing more than one forces and installations. reserve. • Exfiltrate from the encircled • Organize FS. All indirect-fire position toward friendly forces. assets in the encirclement are reorganized and brought under The decision on which option the centralized control of the brigade should take is based on the FSCOORD. Artillery and mortars intent or orders of the division are distributed throughout the commander. Regardless of the mission, pocket to limit their vulnerability contingency planning for a breakout to counterfire. The available FS should begin immediately. from outside the encirclement is coordinated by the FSCOORD. Once the brigade commander realizes that the force has become encircled, he • Reorganize logistics. An early turns to the S2 for a quick assessment of assessment is made of the the enemy situation. This information is logistics posture of the encircled furnished by the S2s of all units within command. Temporarily, all CSS the encircled area and contained in comes under the centralized reports from the encircled forces in control of the senior logistician or contact. In particular, the S2 should designated individual. He rations attempt to identify the strengths, key supplies, authorizes cannibal- weaknesses, and vulnerability points of ization, identifies equipment to be the encircling the brigade. These two destroyed, and develops a pieces of information drive much of the casualty evacuation and stay- commander’s decision making. behind plan.

6-28 FM 71-3

Communications with higher the commander attempts to headquarters and lateral communications deceive the enemy by concealing with adjacent units are rapidly his preparations and redisposi- reestablished. It is important to receive tions. He must also make it instruction and to remain informed about appear that the force makes a the battle outside the encirclement. resolute stand and awaits relief. Encircled units can be important sources Use of dummy radio traffic for the of information on the enemy's rear area enemy to monitor or landlines that and can perform important roles in might be tapped are good means defensive counterstrokes. Communi- of conveying false information to cations are essential when relief and the enemy. The direction for the linkup are imminent. breakout should not be the obvious route toward friendly PREPARATION lines unless there is no other alternative. Although there are several options available to the commander once • Exploit gaps or weaknesses in the encircled, this section only addresses the encircling force. Early in the breakout in the direction of the friendly encirclement there are gaps or force. If the breakout is chosen, it is weaknesses in the encircling important that it take place as soon after force. Patrolling or probing action the encirclement as possible. The enemy reveals these weaknesses. The force may not realize that it has attack should capitalize on them. encircled the brigade. The longer the Although the resulting attack may commander waits to conduct the attack, be along a less direct route or the more organized the enemy forces are may be over less favorable terrain, likely to become. The difficulty lies in such an attack is the best COA the fact that it takes time for the because it avoids enemy strength commander to organize his force and increases the chance for properly to conduct the breakout; surprise. therefore, the commander must weigh the level of preparation against the time • Exploit darkness and limited available. visibility. The cover of darkness, fog, or severe weather conditions The attack to break out of an favors the breakout because the encirclement differs from other attacks in weapons of the encircling force that defensive operations are occurring are less effective in these simultaneously in other areas of the conditions. It is difficult for the perimeter. The following tasks should be enemy to follow the movements accomplished in both the planning and of the breakout force during preparation for the breakout: conditions of limited visibility. However, waiting for darkness or • Deceive the enemy as to time and limited visibility may result in the place of the breakout. If it is not consolidation of the enemy possible to break out immediately, containment.

6-29 FM 71-3

• Organize the forces for the EXECUTION breakout. The forces are reorganized so that available Forces armored forces lead the attack if The forces for a breakout operation the terrain permits. The remainder are divided into five distinct tactical of the forces fight a delaying action or defend the perimeter groups. during the initial stage of the Rupture Force breakout. After the penetration, the main body moves out of the The rupture force attacks, creates a encircled area preceded by the gap in the enemy's weak point (if it has attacking force and covered by a been identified), and holds the shoulders rear guard. CSS elements are for the remaining forces to pass through. integrated into the formation for The rupture force consists of a task the breakout. If the commander force or reinforced task force. The has sufficient forces, he may rupture force must feasibly be able to organize a diversionary attack just penetrate the enemy line. A favorable prior to the real breakout in an combat power ratio must be achieved at attempt to draw off enemy forces. the point of attack by means of surprise, troop strength, mobility, and firepower. • Coordinate with supporting Initially, this force is the brigade main attacks. The breakout attack is effort. The task force commander assisted when a supporting attack probably has additional assets attached by a nearby friendly force or by to his unit if he is the rupture force the reserve diverts enemy commander. These assets might include attention and assets from the air defense assets or additional engineer breakout effort. The breakout personnel from the engineer company. attempt should be timed to occur The task force commander should just after the enemy reacts to the integrate these assets properly for supporting attack. maximum combat power to achieve the rupture. AT systems could initially overwatch the rupture force and, after The brigade commander directs the the gap has been opened, could secure operation using FRAGOs to save as the flanks from the shoulders. much time as possible. The brigade S3 assists the commander by coordinating Reserve Force with those units the commander does not have time to check. This should The reserve force follows the rupture correspond to their positions during the attack to maintain attack momentum and execution of the operation as well. to secure objectives past the rupture.

6-30 FM 71-3

After the rupture force secures the gap, diversionary attack should be as mobile the reserve force normally becomes the as available vehicles and trafficability brigade's lead element. When a task allow. Mobile weapon systems and tanks force is given the mission of the reserve are ideally suited to the diversionary force, the commander must coordinate force. The diversionary attack should be closely with the rupture force directed at a point where the enemy commander on the— might expect a breakout. Success of the diversionary force is imperative for a • Location of the gap. successful breakout operation. If the • Enemy situation at the rupture force fails to deceive the enemy as to the point. brigade's intention, the full combat • Enemy situation (if known) along power of the enemy can be directed at the direction of attack past the the rupture point. This could lead to a rupture point. failure of the entire breakout operation. To achieve deception, the task force Initially, the reserve force passes should— through the gap created by the rupture force. It is essential that the reserve • Use smoke-producing assets to force continues a rapid movement from deceive the enemy as to the size the encircled area toward the final of the diversionary force. objective (probably a linkup point). If • Increase radio traffic for size the reserve force is making secondary deception and as an indicator of attacks, it is important that it does not an important operation. become bogged down. Artillery • Use any available FS to indicate a preparation of these objectives may false rupture point. assist the reserve force in maintaining • Use mobility and firepower of the momentum out of the encircled area. diversionary force to maximum effect to deceive the enemy as to the size and strength of the Main Body diversionary force.

The main body, which contains the The diversionary force may achieve CP elements, casualties, and CS and CSS a rupture of enemy lines. If a rupture elements, moves as a single group. It occurs, the diversionary force usually follows the reserve force through commander must know the intent of the the gap created by the rupture force. The -brigade commander. He may exploit this commander should be given command success, or he may disengage to follow and control of this element to ensure the reserve force through the planned orderly movement. rupture point along the direction of attack. Diversionary Force Rear Guard Enemy attention must be diverted from the location of the rupture by a The rear guard consists of the show of force elsewhere. The personnel and equipment left on the

6-31 FM 71-3 perimeter to provide protection for the left for the rear guard; however, they rupture and diversionary attacks (if a must be accompanied by some kind of diversionary attack force exists). In detonation device. Control of CSS addition to providing security, they assets is difficult due to the lack of deceive the enemy as to the encircled radios on the supply vehicles. Therefore, force's intentions. The rear guard must each driver must understand the mission be of sufficient strength to maintain the and direction of attack. Visual signals integrity of the defense. Once the should be agreed upon in advance, breakout commences, the rear guard and especially if special signals are required diversionary force disengage or delay toward the rupture. If a task force is beyond the SOP. Air guards and flank assigned the mission of rear guard, the protection are especially important to commander must ensure he provides a the soft-skinned vehicles. As a result, viable defense on the entire perimeter. some combat forces should accom- As other units (rupture force, reserve pany the main body to provide that force, diversionary force) pull off the protection. perimeter, the rear guard commander must spread his forces over an extended Command and Control area. This requires flexibility and mobility by the rear guard. The perimeter must withstand enemy pressure. If it does not, the enemy force simply follows The commander should position the breakout forces through the gap and himself where he can watch the rupture destroys them along the direction of force conduct its attack. He determines attack. the tempo of the operation, while the S3 observes the actions of the rear guard. Note. As the rear guard delays, it must The two must remain in communication maintain contact with the main so that each understands the overall body to prevent enemy forces condition of the battlefield and can from separating the two. synchronize their activities. Usually, the rear guard is given PLs from which to delay, corresponding to the forward Combat Service Support movement of the rupture and reserve forces; therefore, close coordination and CSS assets move with the main body. communication are essential. Figure 6-8 Those items that cannot be transported contains a graphic depiction of a are destroyed. Some prestocks may be breakout.

6-32 FM 71-3

POWT OF ATTACK

RUPTURE FORCE (+)

RESERVE FORCE (-)

MAM BODY

REAR GUARO COULD ALSO ACT AS . DIVERSIONARY FORCE

Figure 6-8. Brigade breakout from encirclement.

SECTION VI. REAR OPERATIONS

GENERAL ensure freedom of action in deep and close operations. It is a system designed Army operations are fought to ensure continuous support. Rear simultaneously deep, close, and in the operations are not just the protection of rear. The enemy attacks the entire depth logistics facilities. Rear operations include and width of the battlefield to obtain movement of friendly units throughout the victory. In the operational context, the rear area. Tactical combat forces may be primary purpose for conducting rear required to defeat the rear threat. Rear operations is to retain overall freedom of operations may divert forces from the action for fighting close and deep brigade close operation. operations. Rear operations represent a critical fight for the brigade commander. Army operations cannot be won solely by The brigade commander is responsible fighting in the rear but could well be lost for plans and operations throughout the there. depth of his AO. He assigns tasks to subordinate and supporting commanders Rear operations consist of those to execute those responsibilities. The actions, including area damage control, brigade S3 includes detailed planning for taken by all units singly or in a combined the entire rear area as part of operational effort, to secure the force, neutralize or planning for offensive and defensive defeat enemy operations in the rear, and missions.

6-33 FM 71-3

The FSB commander is responsible for force operations, hardening and dispersal the BSA. For security purposes, this actions, cover and concealment, includes the OPCON of all elements deception, and immediate reaction to operating within the BSA. Consistent with enemy threat or attack. Base defense the commander’s estimate and when operations are enhanced by the extensive allocated appropriate forces, the FSB use of obstacles, sensors, surveillance commander may be assigned additional devices, and OPs. Supporting units must rear area functions. be prepared to conduct small-unit security operations and defend themselves against Brigade planning considerations for all levels of threat. rear operations include— Units operating within the BSA are OPCON to the FSB commander for • Securing rear areas and facilities. security and positioning within the BSA. • Preventing or minimizing enemy All elements operating within the BSA interference with command, establish radio, wire, or messenger control, and communications. communications with the FSB TOC. The • Providing unimpeded movement of FSB CP and brigade rear CP collocate to facilitate coordination and rear area friendly units throughout the rear security. area. • Finding, fixing, and destroying Areas in the rear that are devoid of enemy incursions in the rear area. tactical units are isolated because troop • Providing area damage control disposition should be reconnoitered by after an attack. MP patrols. Coordination with other divisional and nondivisional assets deployed within the brigade AOs must BASE DEFENSE OPERATIONS occur to ensure overall linkage of rear When developing his overall plan, the OPLANs. The S3 coordinates patrolling and reporting with the MP unit brigade commander ensures that the commander as part of the MP area positioning and organization of the BSA security mission. supports the rear operation objectives. The FSB commander is responsible to the brigade commander for the security, DEFENSE OF THE BRIGADE positioning, and operation of the BSA. SUPPORT AREA (BASE CLUSTER)

Well-planned and tenacious base Defense of the bases within the BSA defense is the cornerstone of successful and defense of the base cluster known as rear operations. Base defense operations the BSA is a difficult ongoing task. The include all actions that units occupying a requirements to have the BSA located so base take to protect themselves from the two or three roads pass through the enemy. They consist of a combination of cluster and so it is near an MSR does not passive and active measures, including MP make for easy passive security. Too many patrolling, reconnaissance and response roads into a BSA decreases the

6-34 FM 71-3 commander's ability to secure the area. ground and fire on anyone left When locating the BSA, the commander standing. should take advantage of every factor that • Rehearse your plan for defense— increases his passive security. many times. • Ensure your plan allows for some Each unit located in the BSA is personnel, weapons, and equipment normally a few hundred meters from the to be out on mission. next unit. All the units are in the BSA for • Ensure you have coordinated with the purpose of supporting the brigade. For the bases near you. defensive purposes, each unit sets up as • Use caution with fighting positions individual bases. Each base must have a oriented near or toward other bases plan for the defense of its element, and when firing weapons. each must integrate its defense plan with • Ensure it is understood and the FSB commander (base cluster confirmed from which direction the commander). Each base should plan on BSA's reactionary force will come. assisting with access control duty on the • Plan and use mobile (foot patrol) main avenues entering and exiting the and static security. Static security BSA. Those bases/units located along the is hard to detect and, therefore, BSA perimeter should plan on securing a effective. Mobile patrolling is an sector of it. immediate deterrent for many small elements. Most units in the BSA have a heavy support mission and therefore have few personnel to give toward security. It is BRIGADE SUPPORT AREA/BASE imperative that each unit have a thorough CLUSTER DEFENSE defense plan that is well rehearsed and CONSIDERATIONS uses everyone as an ongoing check of personnel in the area. Considerations for Developing and executing a defense defense of a base include— plan for the BSA must include all those factors considered for a base, plus the • Locate and prepare a fighting following: position for each individual or section in the unit • In addition to the MP platoon, have • Know who is in your unit. a reactionary team identified and • Challenge anyone who is unfamiliar rehearsed to combat an enemy or out of place. attack. • Have a plan of action if the enemy • Check each base's defensive has infiltrated your assembly area plans—on the ground. or base. • Have a specific signal/alarm to • Use any available engineer assets to order people to fighting positions. dig in equipment and prepare • Have a different alarm/signal to fighting positions. warn that enemy forces are in the • Take advantage of the knowledge internal area. This type of alarm of the MP platoon leader/sergeant can cause everyone to drop to the in base/base cluster defense.

6-35 FM 71-3

• Take advantage of all assets in the - Lightly wounded soldiers BSA, including temporary assets awaiting return to units (at the such as— medical company). - Reserve combat forces. - Inoperable weapon systems on - Scout platoons that are not inoperable tracks. performing missions for their - Combat soldiers awaiting repair battalion. of vehicles.

SECTION VII. RIVER CROSSING

GENERAL commander starts planning for synchronization of all of his assets. He A hasty water crossing is a must ensure that he does not give up the decentralized operation to cross an inland initiative to the enemy by allowing a water body of water using organic, existing, or obstacle to have a disproportionate impact expedient crossing means. This operation on his scheme of maneuver. Whenever is conducted in stride as a continuation of possible, brigades cross all obstacles in an operation to maintain momentum. For stride, using local material and organic additional information see FM 90-13. assets. Hasty water crossings are characterized by— In division operations, brigades are the assault forces. If the assault is conducted • Speed, surprise, and minimum loss with two brigades forward, two brigade of momentum. zones are designated within the crossing • Decentralized operation with front. These zones coincide with crossing organic, existing, or expedient areas, with one designated for each resources. assault bridge. The brigade commander • Weak or no enemy defenses on normally provides his XO and a small staff both banks. to act as the crossing area commander to • Minimum concentration of forces. ensure all organic brigade assets are • Quick continuation of the prepared for the crossing. Synchronization operation. of organic assets and supporting combat multiplying assets are critical to the The planning considerations and success of the crossing. organization of a river crossing are applicable to many operations. SECURING THE BRIDGEHEAD

Brigades conduct river crossings as The planning headquarters first part of the division or corps scheme of reviews the objective area. Unless a maneuver. Once given the mission to bridgehead has been specified by higher conduct a river crossing, the brigade headquarters, the crossing force decides

6-36 FM 71-3 what objectives must be controlled to counterattacking to regain control of the ensure security and to facilitate future river bank. operations to defeat the enemy. The After selection by the crossing force, crossing force selects the bridgehead. the bridgehead is graphically depicted by a bridgehead line that defines the outer limit Securing the bridgehead requires of the area. Normally this line is located control of an area on the exit bank large along identifiable terrain features, enough to accommodate the assault and including crossing force objectives, and is essential support elements of the crossing connected to the river bank on the left and force. In addition to accommodating the right flank of the crossing front. This arc crossing force and facilitating future orients the crossing force to the flanks as operations, the size of the bridgehead may well as to the front. Usually, terrain or be determined by defensive characteristics communications center objectives of the terrain. Not only must the enemy be assigned by higher headquarters are within defeated at the bridgehead, but it must the bridgehead. If not, the attack proceeds also be prevented from effectively from the bridgehead to secure these counterattacking the crossing force and/or objectives. In either case, once the destroying crossing sites once the bridgehead is secured, the river-crossing bridgehead is secured. Thus, defensible operation is completed. Figure 6-9 shows terrain and space within the bridgehead a typical organization for securing a are required in a defense against an enemy bridgehead.

CROSSING AREA XX INTERMEDIATE V OBJ ( RELEASE POINTS ASSAULT FORCE RELEASE POINTS FOLLOW-UP INTERMEDIATE y FORCES OBJ 0 0 ASSAULT FORCE V. J RELEASE LINE

RELEASE LINE LEGEND Assault Crossing

Raft

Bridge

Figure 6-9. Bridgehead organization.

6-37 FM 71-3

Objectives • Facilitate changes in lead companies and battalions of the To secure the bridgehead, objectives assault. within this area are assigned to assault • Gain an initial foothold on the exit forces. Considerations for selection of bank when stubborn enemy objectives and the relative size of the resistance is expected. forces needed to secure them do not vary from usual offensive operations. Ideally, Selection of intermediate objectives is objectives are attainable by the assault dependent on terrain and enemy defensive forces in one continuous attack from the dispositions. In areas of. relatively open or river. The crossing force commander unrestrictive terrain or against a weak specifies only those objectives that must enemy, few intermediate objectives are be controlled to secure the bridgehead. needed. Where terrain is rugged or when When terrain or enemy conditions enemy defensive positions have been warrant, intermediate objectives are prepared in depth, more objectives are assigned; however, judgment is required appropriate. Possible objectives include to avoid unnecessary slowing of assault hills, enemy positions, or control measures forces. Plans must provide for a rate of such as PLs. crossing and buildup of combat, CS, and CSS forces on the exit bank that exceeds Forces the rate at which the enemy can concentrate against the crossing force. The division's crossing force commander and his staff plan the river- Whenever possible, assault forces crossing operation with the following advance directly from the exit bank to tactical concepts in mind: bridgehead objectives. When intermediate objectives have been assigned, they are • The assault forces lead, making the secured with minimum delay en route to initial assault of the river and final or bridgehead objectives. At brigade continuing the advance from the level, assignment of intermediate exit bank to the final objectives. objectives is appropriate. For example, it • Support forces develop crossing is difficult for the lead battalion or sites, emplace crossing means, company of an assault force to attack control units moving into and away continuously without securing from the crossing sites, and assist intermediate objectives, except when the assault force to the objectives. advancing against weak enemy forces. • Follow-and-support forces provide Intermediate objectives serve the overwatching DS and indirect following purposes: support, crossing site security, and follow-and-support assistance to • Orient the direction of attack the assault force. toward final objectives. • CSS elements sustain the assault • Provide centralized control of the and subsequent advance to the advance. bridgehead objectives.

6-38 FM 71-3

Assault Forces and support tasks, or assume the mission of lead assault units. Artillery provides Assault forces close on the water counterfires to protect the site, smoke to obstacle and cross rapidly by any means conceal the crossing, and fires in support available. Infantry elements establish local of the lead assault elements. ADA security on the exit bank to permit protects the sites and provides an development of the crossing sites. Initial umbrella for Army aviation elements in the crossings may be limited to pneumatic crossing area. Engineers develop assault boats and amphibious vehicles overwatching and firing positions, then while tanks provide support from advance with the follow-on forces to overwatching positions. Army aviation reduce obstacles, improve bypasses, and assets may lift the assault force over the install flank obstacles. Necessary obstacle with the assault across the water. maneuver, FS, and air defense elements TAC AIR and ADA protect the crossing secure crossing sites from guerrillas or units and sites. Artillery fires and air local enemy counterattacks. strikes are effective in softening enemy resistance and may precede the assault PLANNING with preparatory fires and/or a rolling barrage. Divisional engineers advance Intelligence of the enemy and terrain with lead elements to breach obstacles and determine tactical and materiel open or improve trails to keep units requirements for the crossing and the moving. Tanks, using bridges or rafts command echelon capable of installed by support forces, cross later in accomplishment. The division, in its the assault. mission statement to the brigade, may specify the requirement to conduct a river Support Forces crossing or, in assigning a mission, imply the task of crossing a river. Accordingly, Support forces accompany the assault the S2 attempts to collect as much force and provide the necessary support to information as possible about the enemy the crossing area commander. Engineers and the water obstacle. Together with the improve crossing sites and ingress and brigade engineer, the S2 examines— egress routes at crossing sites as rapidly as time and security permit. Rafts and • River width, depth, and velocity. bridges are installed to transport heavy • Locations of possible entry and exit loads. MPs and other designated crossing routes. unit personnel control the flow of traffic to and away from crossing locations. • Obstacles. • Cover and concealment. Follow-and-Support Forces • Soil and weather conditions. • Enemy composition and Follow-and-support forces move close disposition. behind assault forces to add their combat power where needed. Using rafts and The planning sequence is considered in bridges, they cross quickly behind assault reverse order of occurrence; the last task elements to overwatch, conduct follow of securing the bridgehead is examined

6-39 FM 71-3 first. However, the river is examined • Specific crossing sites. before plans for securing a bridgehead and advancing from the exit bank are • Times that bridges are scheduled completed. General planning requirements for use by forces other than the for river crossings vary little from routine assaulting brigade. offensive planning: • Available crossing support forces (engineer and MP). • Objectives are selected and assigned. Types of Attacks • Areas or zones for forces are determined. Offensive river crossings are not an objective in themselves, but a part of the • Control measures are designated, scheme of maneuver and overall offensive forces are allocated, and missions action to defeat the enemy. The are assigned. commander has two basic attack options to secure the near and far side of the Assault crossing plans may be water obstacles. Based on the assessment completed at crossing force headquarters of the enemy, terrain, and water obstacle, level or delegated to the assault force and he may conduct either a hasty or crossing area commanders once attack deliberate attack (see Chapter 4). zones and crossing areas have been specified. To maintain the speed of the Reverse Planning Process advance without loss of momentum, plans for hasty crossings are often accomplished The major concerns of the crossing at the brigade or assault force level. On and assault force commanders during any the other hand, plans for deliberate attack that includes a water obstacle are crossings require more time, and the vulnerabilities of forces on the exit bank buildup of combat power is normally a and a rapid advance to secure objectives. division or corps responsibility. Complete The latter is the overriding consideration; plans prepared at division and corps hence planning commences at the require detailed coordination with objectives and projects back toward the brigades to ensure the sequencing of units river. An accurate assessment of the at the crossing sites complements the enemy's expected counterattacks and brigade's assault concept. indirect fire barrages is integrated into planning. This is particularly significant When the crossing force headquarters during early stages of the advance because delegates planning for the assault crossing the assault force is temporarily divided by to the brigade, it provides guidance and the river, thus diminishing its combat support to the assault force and crossing power potential. To counter probable commanders. Guidance may include— enemy reaction, counterfires and aerial attacks augment other planned fires to • Time of attack and/or assault ensure the necessary rapid advance to crossing. overwhelm the enemy.

6-40 FM 71-3

Once the S2 has constructed an enemy One corps ribbon bridge company is situation template and the engineer has capable of supporting a task force identified possible crossing sites, the crossing. It also can support a brigade brigade FSCOORD begins to develop the unopposed crossing, if it has sufficient FS plan. This plan must accomplish bridging to bridge the river. A brigade or several missions simultaneously. In the divisional crossing requires additional initial stages of the operation, the artillery corps bridge companies. Normally, each should suppress enemy positions that have task force requires about one bridge observation and fields of fire over the company's assets to support crossing sites. crossing sites of the assault force. Smoke A crossing brigade requires a minimum of missions should also be fired to further two companies. This depends on river add to the obscuration. Radar critical width and the number of crossing sites friendly zones should be developed on the required to support the scheme of crossing sites to protect the crossing force maneuver. If the brigade is conducting an if attacked by enemy artillery. Using the opposed river crossing, the corps combat S2's enemy template, radar call for fire engineer battalion commander becomes zones should be recommended on the crossing area engineer. The engineers suspected enemy artillery positions. supporting the assault force are separate and distinct from the engineers conducting After the assault force gains a the crossing. They are task organized with foothold, the indirect fires should assist the bridgehead and breakout forces the force in maintaining its position while oriented on the far shore combat missions, the support force begins construction of not the tasks associated with the river rafts and bridges. It is essential that crossing. forward observers (FO) be included with the assault force, so that they can rapidly The brigade engineer is a critical adjust fire on enemy locations. The FS player in this operation. The brigade plan at this point should include FPFs, in commander relies on his expertise in case the enemy launches a counterattack planning the river crossing. The brigade is against the bridgehead. augmented with corps bridging assets to conduct the operation. Special planning As the force moves to the RP/line to considerations include— begin the attack, the FS plan supports the maneuver as it would for any offensive • Determine crossing sites. operation. The artillery must provide close and continuous support to the leading • Determine method and means of assault units. Fires should be planned on crossing. enemy strongpoints and likely • Types of vehicles involved in counterattack positions. Suppressive fires crossing. degrade enemy air defenses, and ADAM/RAAMS (if the situation permits) The crossing operation involves could provide some security along the virtually every type of engineer activity: flanks and slow enemy movement. combined arms breaching, bridge and raft FM 71-3 construction and control, mobility offensive operation, while others remain operations along the routes to the behind to protect the bridgehead and the crossing sites, countermobility operations crossing sites. to prevent the enemy from reaching the bridgehead, and survivability at the As mentioned earlier in this section, bridgehead. In planning for the operation, CSS assets are essential to sustaining the the brigade engineer may consult the attack. The brigade S4 must ensure that following information sources: adequate supplies are pushed forward to the crossing sites, particularly any • Maps. expedient materiel that may assist the operation. Suppression of enemy positions • Local inhabitants and prisoners. on the far side of the river expends large • Aerial photographs and visual amounts of ammunition. Likewise, the reconnaissance. assault force must hold the bridgehead until reinforcements can deploy; it must be • Hydrographic studies. given additional ammunition to sustain operations. With this in mind, the S4 must • Strategic studies. plan with the engineer, S2, and S3 to • Ground reconnaissance. ensure supply vehicles are integrated into the crossing order as early as possible. • Division's terrain detachment (G2). Assault force commanders, usually The brigade ADO has several concerns brigade commanders, command the assault in planning protection for the brigade. forces from the brigade TAC CP. When During initial stages of the operation, the the brigade enters the crossing area, brigade is concentrated near the river line. control, not command, is then passed to This includes maneuver elements as well the crossing area commander. Control as stockpiles of equipment needed for the then reverts to the assault force actual crossing. Such highly congested commander as the assault force leaves the areas are lucrative air targets and must be crossing area. protected if the river crossing is to succeed. The designated crossing area commanders may be division or brigade Once the brigade begins the actual staff officers. Since the assault force is assault and construction of the bridges normally a brigade, the brigade XO is and rafts, enemy aircraft can be expected usually designated as the crossing area to zero in on these positions. Again, ADA commander and operates from the brigade assets must be positioned to protect these TOC. This allows the brigade (assault resources. Some assets may be placed force) commander to focus his attention directly on the bridge. on the battle and serves to bind the assault crossing and tactical concept. Subordinate Finally, the force must be protected as battalion XOs or LOs may collocate with it moves to the RP/line and into the the crossing area commander to provide attack. In this regard, some assets are detailed movement instruction for their dedicated to protect the force as in any units per the crossing area commander

6-42 FM 71-3 while leaving the brigade command net operation into distinct and manageable free to fight the battle on the far shore. segments: Each crossing commander controls— • Advance to the river. • Crossing units of the assault force • Assault crossing of the river. while in the crossing area. • Tactical elements that secure the • Advance from the exit bank. crossing sites. • Securing the bridgehead. • Support force engineers who develop and maintain crossing sites Figure 6-10 depicts the organization of and traffic. river crossing command and control. • Control elements (primarily MPs) that direct and control crossing units in the crossing area. PREPARATION

The crossing • force commander At this point, the commander rehearses facilitates planning by dividing the each phase of the river-crossing operation.

DIVISION COMMANDER

CROSSING FORCE COMMANDER Plans and controls the oparation CROSSING AREA COMMANDERS operational control of all units within BRIDGEHEAD or peaainQ through the Creasing Areas. — • ttNE~

BRI OEHEA

FOflCtS AS UL s o* SSA

•leas« na

CROSSING AREA ASSAULT FORCEN COMMANDERS Raleas# Lina

Figure 6-10. River crossing command and control.

6-43 FM 71-3

Advance to the River Once the area is secured and the bridges and rafts are constructed, the force begins The brigade should be task organized to pass as per the movement plan and for the operation before the advance to crossing schedule. the river begins. Regardless of the events prior to the actual advance, the brigade's Advance From the Exit Bank lead battalions either move to secure objectives that overwatch the proposed The advance from the exit bank crossing sites, or secure the crossing by extends from the RP/line to the seizing enemy bridges or by conducting bridgehead objectives. At the RP/line, the their own amphibious assault. Once these crossing commander relinquishes control objectives have been secured, the control of units to the assault force commander switches from the assault force for continuation of the attack. The forces commander to the crossing force then attack generally along a narrow or a commander. broad front, depending on the number of crossing sites in the sector or zone. In the Assault Crossing of the River rehearsal, the commander must balance the number of forces collected on the far Once in position, the assault force side of the river in preparation for the neutralizes the enemy forces that can attack against the length of time it takes influence the crossing. The actual crossing to marshal them. This solution must may be executed using any number of enable the commander to commit methods: fording, assault/swimming, sufficient force to destroy the enemy and rafting, or bridging. Lead elements should maintain sufficient momentum to gain be prepared to cross under fire. A line or ground. wave formation crosses more forces than a column in equal time periods. However, it exposes more forces, increasing Securing the Bridgehead vulnerability and the chance of detection of the crossing effort. A column, using Securing the bridgehead requires one or two entry points, concentrates control of an area on the exit bank that is forces but requires more time to build up large enough to accommodate the assault combat power, providing the enemy more and essential support elements of the time to detect and concentrate fire on the crossing force. Assault forces receive crossing site. To reduce enemy obstacles objectives that must be controlled for the and develop exit points on the far bank, area to be secure. Once in position, the the engineers should cross early. forces move to ground and establish a hasty defensive perimeter around the Each lead battalion should have at bridgehead. A discussion of hasty least one fording or assault/swimming defensive planning is in Chapter 5. site. They should be oriented on close-in exit bank objectives, while subsequent The river crossing rehearsal includes sites should provide good ingress and the positioning of assets on the near side egress routes to enhance mobility and the of the river, the assault and clearing of buildup of combat power on the exit bank. obstacles from the far side, the

6-44 FM 71-3 preparation of each bank, and the As the follow-and-support forces cross construction of the bridges and rafts that the river and begin to assemble for the transport the force across the river. This continued assault, they also assist the only ensures the physical preparation of initial assault force in the protection of the crossing site. The brigade engineer the perimeter, if necessary. However, also reviews the crossing and movement once these forces are assembled, the schedule to confirm the timing and assault force commander should begin the positioning of forces. attack as quickly as possible. This serves two functions: it clears the area for the In addition to the actual river crossing, arrival of additional forces, and it the engineers must rehearse the flow of maintains the momentum of the overall traffic to each crossing point as well as operation. When executed correctly, the emplacing obstacles to protect the attack keeps the enemy off balance and bridgehead from enemy counterattacks. unable to effectively respond to the operation. EXECUTION Other crossings, deception plans, and The brigade moves to the river using proper reconnaissance of enemy reserve OPSEC measures to cloak their locations are essential to the success of movement. If possible, the force will move the operation. The enemy must be at night or under the mask of smoke and temporarily paralyzed during the suppressive artillery on known enemy establishment of the bridgehead, or its positions. Pre-positioned reconnaissance counterattacks could spell disaster for the elements adjust these indirect-fire assault force. In addition, the enemy measures to ensure optimum effectiveness. should also be confused as to the actual Once the assault force is in position, the intent of the crossing force, namely the support force commander calls for locations of the crossings and objectives suppression of the far side objectives and to be taken in support of the crossings. enemy positions. As the fire begins to land, the force crosses the river under the During the operation, the FS plan must supporting fire of stationary forces on the effectively suppress the enemy's ability to near side of the river. influence the assault force as it conducts its initial crossing of the river. Smoke missions mask the assault force initially; Once the crossings have been secured, however, grazing fire across the surface of the assault force commander reports the the river could cause many casualties and status to the crossing force commander, does not necessarily require target who in turn directs the immediate identification. As a result, reconnaissance construction of bridges and rafts. At this elements must locate these enemy point, the crossing area commanders positions and target them as part of the control all activities within the crossing preparation and suppressive fires during area. Their initial concern, however, is the the assault. reinforcement of the assault force on the far side of the river. This ensures a secure Engineer forces initially concentrate on bridgehead and protects the crossing the clearance of obstacles on the far river operation. bank and the preparation of the entrance

6-45 FM 71-3 and exit ramps for each crossing. operations to execute. It is dangerous Simultaneously, other engineer elements because it is easy for either the attacker or begin construction of rafts, bridges, and defender to locate the positions of the any other assets used to cross the river. enemy. Similarly, air assets are able to identify the target area easily as they Outside of the actual crossing navigate along the river line. Therefore, activities, engineers are required to the commander must be prepared to maintain the road network leading to and execute this operation under fire. His away from the crossing sites. Also, leadership is crucial in moving the forces survivability and countermobility across the river and assaulting the operations may be required to protect the bridgehead objectives. assault force from enemy counterattacks. Assault forces advance quickly, Initially, the air defense assets protect without extensive reorganization, from the force as it advances to the river line. crossing areas to objectives within the Priority of protection most likely goes to bridgehead. The enemy, given time, the engineer equipment that is pre- attempts to halt the advance with positioned for the assault crossing. Once strongpoint defenses, heavy artillery fires, the assault force reaches the far side of and counterattacks. Therefore, the river line and adopts a hasty defensive comprehensive SOPs, detailed planning, posture, the ADA protection then extends and rapid execution enhance the across the entire crossing line. probability of success.

As the brigade begins its advance to Advance From the Exit Bank the river, the CSS pushes preloaded support packages forward to the force. The advance from the exit bank Specifically, ammunition is the primary extends from the RP/line to the concern during the initial stages of the bridgehead objectives. At the RP/line, the operation, due to the amount required for crossing area commander relinquishes suppression in defense of the bridgehead control of units to the assault force area. UMCP and LP locations should be commander for continuation of the attack. placed along the routes leading to each The location of the RP/line is a function crossing site, and recovery assets should of terrain and expected battle and is be positioned to maintain trafficability at mutually determined by the commanders. the crossing sites. RPs/lines may be located 2 to 3 Recovery of wounded personnel in the kilometers from the exit bank. This assault force must be tied into the return distance allows the assault force rafting. Likewise, ambulances should be commanders to assemble their forces for located at the sites to quickly transport continuation of the attack. Further, the the casualties to the aid stations or FSB clearance of this distance by follow-on treatment section. and support forces, supported by tank and artillery fire under control of the crossing The hasty river crossing is one of the area commander, precludes direct fire on most complicated and dangerous assault forces while they are still in the

6-46 FM 71-3 the water. RPs/lines are therefore located maintenance points are established to facilitate the operation, control, and along advance routes to speed up security of forces moving through the servicing. The remainder of the BSA crossing area (see Figure 6-11). positions itself beyond the range of enemy artillery, if possible, and crosses after the Combat Service Support Sustains follow-on forces. Adequate Classes I, III, the Attack V, and IX supplies must initially accompany combat forces across the river Decentralized and prepackaged to ensure sustainability of lead elements, support accompanies the lead elements even if crossing operations are tem- when possible. Rearming, refueling, and porarily suspended due to enemy activity.

LEGEND

Assault Crossing BRDOEHEAD UNE INTERMEDIATE INTERMEDIATE Raft & Bridge OBJ I s/ r C C OBJ

INTERMEDIATE INTERMEDIATE

OBJ OBJ

INTERMEDIA cL <-<± OBJ INTERMEDIATE V iß

OBJ OBJ fT-

Figure 6-11. Crossing area boundaries.

6-47 FM 71-3

SECTION VIII. APPROACH MARCH

Brigades normally conduct an approach march is a deliberate attack or approach march as part of a larger unit deliberate defense. formation. The brigade may conduct an approach march when they are relatively The organization of forces for certain of the enemy's location and are an conducting an approach march is similar extended distance from the enemy. An to the organization of forces for approach march requires continuous conducting a movement to contact. The intelligence on the enemy and dominance brigade retains security to the front, over the effects of enemy indirect fire and flanks, and rear. The main body forces air assets. move as one organization. CS and CSS assets move internal to the brigade as The brigade commander designates the necessary to support the planned march objective as well as the point the operation after the point of deployment. brigade disperses and assumes a formation The commander still plans for possible that reduces the risk of initial contact and enemy attacks along his route of march. allows freedom of maneuver to subordinate units, thus avoiding a meeting Units with automated command and engagement. The approach march allows control systems, enhanced FS systems, the brigade to maneuver to attack or global positioning navigation systems, and defend, and ends when an objective or advanced target acquisition systems may area is seized, or the enemy force conduct an approach march in a defeated. The desired outcome of an decentralized manner on separate routes.

6-48 FM 71-3 /

CHAPTER 7 SUPPORT OF COMBAT OPERATIONS

CONTENTS Page Section I. General •. 7-1 Section II. Fire Support 7-2 Section III. Combat Air Support 7-8 Section IV. Joint Air Attack Team Operations 7-10 Section V. Naval and Marine Fire Support 7-11 Section VI. Mobility and Survivability 7-13 Section VII. Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Operations 7-16 Section VIII. Smoke Operations 7-19 Section IX. Air Defense Support 7-20 Section X. Intelligence and Electronic Warfare Support... 7-25 Section XI. Military Police Support 7-27 Section XII. Signal Support 7-33

SECTION I. GENERAL

The application of superior combat made to adhere to a scheme of power at the decisive time and place maneuver. Commanders frequently view determines the outcome of the battle. The CS as something added to the plan commander uses his CS assets to enhance to make it better. This add-on nature the capabilities of his maneuver unit and reduces these critical elements from to weight his main effort. Knowing CS combat multipliers to merely combat capabilities, assigning them appropriate additives. CS representatives must be missions, and synchronizing their involved at the outset in the staff operations are essential to the application planning sequence. The commander's o? superior combat power at the decisive intent must be clearly articulated as to time and place. what he wants to do to the enemy for the CS elements to prepare employ- To be most effective, CS elements ment recommendations. The commander cannot be simply added into the may then select a COA that synchronizes commander's plan. They must be an maneuver, fires, and CS into a cohesive integral part of it, not an afterthought battle plan.

7-1 FM 71-3

SECTION II. FIRE SUPPORT

FIRE SUPPORT SYSTEM • Screening with smoke or isolating areas with scatterable mines. General • Reducing the effect of enemy artillery by active counterfire. FS is the collective and coordinated • Interdicting following threat use of indirect-fire weapons, armed echelons. aircraft, and other lethal and nonlethal means in support of a battle plan. FS • Providing shock effect and includes FA, NGF, and air-delivered confusion. weapons. Nonlethal means are EW capabilities of MI organizations, illu- Components mination, PSYOP, and smoke. FS encompasses careful integration of all The FS system supporting the armored available attack systems. Synchronization forces is the collective body of target is the key to success. The brigade acquisition and battlefield surveillance; commander and his FSCOORD must know attack systems (lethal and nonlethal) and the capabilities and limitations of the munitions; command and control and systems available. The brigade commander coordination systems and facilities; employs these means to support his technical support (meteorological and scheme of maneuver, to mass effects of survey); and the personnel required to fires, and to delay, disrupt, or destroy provide and manage FS. ADA and enemy forces in depth. FS planning and engineer assets may also become coordination exist at all echelons of important components of the FS system. maneuver. Target Acquisition Assets

FS enhances the maneuver com- The maneuver brigade or battalion mander's combat power by— FSO has several FA target acquisition assets available to call upon for use in • Destroying, suppressing, and neu- detection of targets. The FA battalion tralizing targets. A discussion of supporting the brigade may have an these terms begins on page 7-3. attached AN/TPQ-36 (firefinder wea- • Obscuring the vision of enemy pons-locating radar). The AN/TPQ-37 is forces. found at division or corps. If this radar is • Isolating enemy formations and covering the brigade’s sector, useful positions. information may be available to S2s. OH-58A/C and OH-58D helicopters may • Slowing and canalizing enemy be operationally controlled by the movements. division or DIVARTY. Also, a UAV may • Killing or disabling the enemy at be available to the brigade for target ranges greater than that of direct- acquisition and attack. The brigade FSO fire weapons. and targeting officer request, plan, and

7-2 FM 71-3 coordinate these systems to achieve the • Provides a variety of ammunition commander's intent and scheme of fires. and fuze combinations. The commander ensures the planning, coordination, and synchronization of • Provides continuous fire under all these assets occur and that this weather conditions, day or night, information is exchanged among his staff. and from all types of terrain. HUMINT from FOs and COLTs should • Provides responsive shifting and also be considered a valuable source. massing of fires. Attack Systems • Provides cross-country mobility compatible with the task force. The attack could be lethal or nonlethal (such as smoke, illumination, PSYOP, and The disadvantages of FA are that it— offensive EW). Assets normally available at brigade level and below are FA, combat • Is an area fire weapon. However, air support, communications jammers (see point targets can be destroyed by Section X of this chapter for a discussion using terminally guided munitions. of communications jammers), NGF, and attack helicopters. • Has a limited ability to survive enemy ground, air, and artillery attacks. Weapons can be detected Field Artillery because of their large signature from communications and firing. Normally, one FA battalion is in DS Therefore, artillery must displace of a committed maneuver brigade. frequently. However, more artillery battalions can be assigned the mission to reinforce the DS • Has limited ability to bring timely battalion. and accurate massed fires on moving targets without detailed The division commander and his coordination and planning. FSCOORD (usually the DIVARTY • Must be observed fire to be commander) normally place at least one effective. FA battalion in DS of a committed maneuver brigade. Additional FA units may reinforce DS battalions and/or The maneuver commander must decide provide GS reinforcing fires to the brigade what effect FA must have on a particular based on availability and priorities of the target. The three types of fires are— division battle. • Destruction. Destruction puts a The advantages of FA are that it— target out of action permanently. Direct hits are required to destroy • Adds depth to the battlefield. The hard materiel targets. Usually, FA can strike and destroy the destruction requires large enemy deep before he can expenditures of ammunition and is influence the battle. not considered economical. Thirty • Provides first round fire for effect percent or more casualties normally capability. render a unit ineffective.

7-3 FM 71-3

• Neutralization. Neutralization Combat Air Support knocks a target out of action temporarily. It does not require an Air support is provided by the Air extensive expenditure of am- Force, Navy, and Marine Aircraft Wing if munition and is the most practical available. The mission is to support Army type of mission. Most missions are operations by providing air interdiction neutralization fire. Ten percent or and CAS operations. At the brigade, CAS more casualties may neutralize a is the primary support mission. CAS unit. involves air actions against hostile targets that are in close proximity to friendly • Suppression. Suppression of a forces and require detailed integration of target limits the ability of the each air mission with the fire and enemy personnel in the target area movement of friendly forces. The missions to perform their jobs. The effects are distributed to each corps by the land of these fires usually last only as component commander. The corps long as the fires are continued. commander then further distributes the Suppression requires a small CAS missions down the Army chain of amount of ammunition; however, command. Usually, CAS missions are since its effects are not lasting, it is distributed no lower than brigade. CAS unsuitable for most targets. targets are either preplanned or immediate. Preplanned and immediate air requests are discussed in greater detail in Indirect fires are divided into two Section III, Combat Air Support. categories: Naval Gunfire

• Observed fire. Observed fire is fire The mission of NGF is to assist the for which the points of impact can ground force by destroying, neutralizing, be controlled by an observer. The or suppressing targets that oppose that most economical use of indirect- force. NGF provides limited volumes of fire weapons is attained by ensuring FS close to coastal waters. Most cruisers, destroyers, and some frigates carry 5-inch fire is observed when accuracy guns with over 21 kilometers of range. cannot be guaranteed. The advantages of NGF are that it— • Unobserved fire. Unobserved fire is • Fires a variety of munitions and fire for which the points of impact fuzes, including HE, WP, and are not observed. It involves illumination. predicting where targets are, or • Has a Hat trajectory. This makes will be, and placing fire on them. naval guns particularly effective Use of unobserved fire requires against vertical-face targets such follow-up activity to assess as coastal fortifications. effectiveness. This is the least • Can deliver a large volume of fire efficient means of employing fires. in a relatively short period.

7-4 FM 71-3

The disadvantages of NGF are AH-64 attack helicopter units and the that it— OH-58D (Kiowa Warrior) observation helicopter unit may be tasked to provide • Has limited calibers available. FS in certain situations (for example, in deep operations or while supporting • May have a large range error. ground maneuver forces in OOTW). Always try to ensure that the ship does not fire toward or directly The advantages of attack helicopters over friendly troops. are that they— • Is less accurate in rough seas. • Have a variety of munitions • Can expend a limited quantity of including wire guided and laser ammunition. All ships must keep guided missiles. some ammunition to protect themselves from enemy air or • Are capable of attacking targets surface attacks. Self-preservation within 500 meters of friendly and preservation of the fleet are troops. their first priority. • Can fire aerial rockets indirectly at • Has limited interoperability be- extended ranges. tween the ship and ground force communications. The ship's radios • Possess rapid mobility throughout are high frequency (HF) amplitude the battlefield. modulated (AM) and are not compatible with the standard Army • Can destroy point targets and frequency modulated (FM) radios. moving targets. • Has a flat trajectory so it is less • Deliver, guide, and help guide effective than FA against targets smart laser munitions. on reverse slopes. The disadvantages of attack heli- Attack Helicopters copters are that they—

Attack helicopter units are not generally attached lower than division • Are vulnerable to enemy air level, but they may be placed OPCON to defense and counterair. a brigade. Attack helicopters rarely do • Have limited loiter times. fire support missions, but are capable of this mission and limited CAS because • Require SEAD and may interrupt they are both sensors and shooters. In FA fires due to the risk to the fact, as a shooter, they possess direct and aircraft. indirect fire weapons. However, aviation • Require large amounts of rocket units should be addressed under the ammunition for effective attacks if “maneuver” section of paragraph 3 in an the rockets are fired indirectly. OPORD and not under the “fires” section. On the basis of the commander’s risk- • Sacrifice antiarmor systems to versus-payoff assessment, AH-1 and permit aerial rocket fire.

7-5 FM 71-3

Fire Support Key Personnel systems into the plan using the synchronization matrix, DST, and Brigade Commander combined arms rehearsals. He is the driving force behind positioning coor- The brigade commander sets the dination for the FA, and conducts the guidance for FS and ensures the DS FA brigade targeting meeting. battalion commander (FSCOORD) understands what he wants and when he wants Direct Support Field Artillery it. He ensures his FS plan is synchronized with the maneuver plan and details the Battalion Commander mission he wants his FS systems to accomplish. The brigade commander is The DS FA battalion commander is charged with the following: FSCOORD for the brigade. He is specifically responsible for all FS planning and coordination for the • Ensures his staff comes together to maneuver brigade. The DS battalion integrate obstacles, R&S, fires, commander provides an assessment of and maneuver. current and near-term capabilities of his • Approves the fires paragraph, unit and of other FS assets supporting the high-payoff target list, and attack force. Duty location of the DS FA guidance matrix. battalion commander at any given time is • Trains commanders to know, where he can best execute the maneuver understand, and execute targets in commander's intent for FS. In addition to their zones. supporting the brigade, the DS FA battalion commander is responsible for— Maneuver Brigade S2 • Training the FS system and his The S2 is charged with identifying, battalion to perform successfully templating, and predicting enemy actions. all stated and implied missions and This allows the FSO to help determine tasks associated with providing FS possible artillery COAs as well as to a maneuver force. preliminary position requirements. The • Continuously articulating his as- brigade S2 is an integral part of the sessment of the current and future brigade targeting team. He nominates capabilities and status of all FS HVTs, evaluates known and suspected assets supporting the maneuver enemy target data, and coordinates attack force. This assessment may be of targets with EW assets. His R&S plan obtained from reports or by synchronizes targeting requirements with personal observation, at the available collection assets. FSCOORD’s discretion. • Providing a knowledgeable, ex- Maneuver Brigade S3 perienced officer as brigade FSO. The FSCOORD must establish a The S3 ensures the FSE is integrated special mentor relationship with into the planning process and requests this officer since the FSO, in the input from the FSCOORD about FS absence of the FSCOORD, assets. He must fully integrate the FS personally represents him to the

7-6 FM 71-3

brigade commander. More than • The S3-Air, to serve as maneuver any other officer, the FSO must assistant S3 and to coordinate understand the FSCOORD’s intent employment of combat air with in supporting the maneuver plan. Army aviation and the FSO, ALO, In addition, the FSCOORD must and air defense platoon leader. ensure that his brigade FSO is • Other representatives as required, equally conversant on the such as LOs of allied forces FSCOORD’s assessment of FS supporting the operation or Army assets supporting the maneuver aviation LO when Army aviation is force. used as an FS asset. • Approving the DS battalion FA • The FSO should have a working support plan. knowledge of the duties of the following staff members who may BRIGADE FIRE SUPPORT ELEMENT be in the brigade TAC CP. ORGANIZATION

The brigade FSE is organized with the The brigade ADA battery commander following personnel: manages the air defense assets in support of the brigade. He may have valuable information on the location of enemy air • FSO (major). defense targets, airspace coordination, • FS plans/targeting officer (W02). and the enemy air situation. • FS sergeant (sergeant first class). • Two FS specialists. The brigade engineer manages engineer assets in support of the brigade When added to the FSE to perform operation. He assists in the coordination their FS functions, other representatives of the integration of obstacles and fires, serve to enhance and speed FS co- the use of all FASCAM, and general ordination. These representatives may mobility and survivability requirements. include—

• The ALO, for coordination and employment of Air Force assets in The IEW representative from the support of the brigade. divisional combat EW and intelligence battalion controls and supervises the IEW • The NGLO, for coordination and assets in support of the brigade. He can employment of NGF and naval air provide some targets and information and in support of the brigade. is the tie-in for the offensive use of • The brigade chemical officer, for jamming. The FSO needs a working deployment of NBC defense and knowledge of the IEW assets available use of chemical, riot control, from this source to effectively coordinate obscurant, and aerosol agents. their use in the attack of targets.

7-7 FM 71-3

SECTION III. COMBAT AIR SUPPORT

TYPES OF AIR SUPPORT performance aircraft at high or low altitude, day or night, and in all weather The Air Force provides the Army with conditions. The inherent nature of air five types of air support: CAS, combat air reconnaissance means that it is best used reconnaissance, tactical airlift, electronic in support of operations 12 to 24 hours combat (EC), and battlefield air ahead and, for that reason, is usually interdiction. Brigades allocate CAS and tasked to division level and higher. The combat air reconnaissance. Airlift, air brigade S2 requests combat air interdiction, and EC are normally reconnaissance in support of his allocated at division and higher. intelligence collection process.

Close Air Support COMBAT AIR CONTROL SYSTEM

CAS is defined as air attacks on To ensure the proper integration and hostile surface forces that are in close planning of both ground- and air- proximity of friendly troops. CAS can be delivered FS, the battalion commander employed to blunt an enemy attack, collocates his Army and Air Force FS support the momentum of the ground personnel. The FSE from the DS FA attack, or provide cover for friendly battalion and the TACP from the Air movements. For best results while Force work closely together to ensure the avoiding mutual interference or fratricide, battalion receives the FS it requires. The aircraft are kept under "detailed duties of the FAC are carried out by the integration" (part of the Air Force's ALO or controller-qualified enlisted combat air system). The effectiveness of personnel assigned to the TACP. CAS is directly related to the degree of local air superiority attained. Until air The TACP at battalion level and superiority is achieved, competing above advises the Army unit commander demands for CAS and counterair on the capabilities, limitations, and operations for available aircraft may limit employment of combat air. It also calls in sorties apportioned for the CAS role. requests for CAS and controls it once it CAS is the primary support given to comes on station. At battalion level, the committed brigades and battalions. TACP consists of an ALO and two Nomination of CAS targets is the enlisted terminal attack controllers. These responsibility of the commander, ALO, personnel can operate on foot, from and S3 at each level. ground vehicles, or from fixed- or rotary- wing aircraft. Although not a part of the Combat Air Reconnaissance TACP, there is one other player in this system. The TAC-A normally operates Combat air reconnaissance is designed from a fixed-wing aircraft clear of enemy to furnish timely and accurate surface-to-air weapons. He coordinates information on the location, composition, the aircraft that are engaged in CAS but activity, and movement of enemy forces. normally does not provide terminal attack The mission is flown by high- control. In the absence of a TACP, Army

7-8 FM 71-3 unit FSEs can provide emergency marker panels, and direction and distance requests and control of CAS aircraft. from prominent land features or target marks. CLOSE AIR SUPPORT PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS General Ordnance Characteristics

CAS mission success is directly What types of targets are to be related to thorough mission planning engaged, and what are the desired weapon based on the following factors and effects? considerations. Final Attack Heading Weather Choice of the final attack heading Does the weather favor the use of depends upon considerations of troop aircraft? What is the forecast for the safety, aircraft survivability, and immediate future? Weather is one of the optimum weapon effects. Missiles or most important considerations when bombs are effective from any angle. visually employing weapons; it can Cannons, however, are more effective hinder target identification and degrade against the sides and rears of armored weapon accuracy. vehicles.

Target Acquisition Troop Safety

Targets that are well camouflaged, This is a key consideration in using small and stationary, or masked by hills CAS. The primary cause of friendly fire or other natural terrain are difficult to on friendly troops is misidentification of identify from fast-moving aircraft. The those troops as enemy forces. use of marking rounds can enhance target identification and help ensure first-pass Suppression of Enemy Air Defense success. SEAD is required based on the Target Identification capabilities of the aircraft and presence of enemy air defense systems in the target This is critical if CAS aircraft are to area. avoid attacking friendly forces by mistake. It can be accomplished by Close Air Support and Artillery providing a precise description of the Integration target in relation to terrain features easily visible from the air. Smoke, laser target Army artillery and combat air power marking, or other means can also be used. are complementary. Because artillery support is more continuous and faster to Identification of Friendly Forces respond than CAS, CAS missions must be integrated with artillery so that limited Safe means of friendly position firing restrictions are imposed. The identification include mirror flash, airspace coordination area (ACA) is the

7-9 FM 71-3

FSCM used to accomplish this assets to accomplish the marking and integration. There are four standard illumination requirement. Although flares ACAs: lateral, altitude, timed, and released from airborne FACs, other CAS altitude and lateral separation. aircraft, or "flare ships" can effectively illuminate target areas, ground artillery Other planning factors that must be and heavy mortar-fired illumination are considered are time available for normally preferred due to the continuous planning; command, control, and capabilities of sustained indirect fire. communications; and terrain.

Night Planning and Operation Marking friendly unit locations Considerations improves joint air attack team (JAAT) and CAS safety and can also provide In a high-intensity, high-threat en- target area references. Tracers and radar vironment, the capabilities of CAS beacons can serve both purposes. If safe aircraft employed at night are very separation is a factor, friendly unit limited. To improve the capabilities of marking is critical. Fired into the air, 40- night CAS, the Air Force is acquiring mm illumination grenades and flares are additional night-capable systems such as effective, but they may be useful to the the low-altitude navigation and targeting enemy as well. Flares used during infrared for night (LANTIRN) system. Despite the limitations, CAS aircraft still limited visibility operations can create have a few advantages while attacking at the “milk-bowl” effect, making it more night. The most important advantage is difficult for a CAS aircraft to find its the limitation darkness imposes on enemy target. When used under a low cloud optically sighted and infrared antiaircraft ceiling, flares can also highlight the systems. This is true if they do not have aircraft against the cloud cover. Strobe NVDs. Airborne or ground-based lights are very good night markers. They illumination can also degrade enemy are commonly used with blue or infrared night vision capabilities. filters and can be made directional by the use of any opaque tube. In overcast The two most important requirements conditions, strobe lights can be especially of a night CAS operation are useful. Aside from the obvious security identification of the enemy or target and positive marking of friendly unit considerations, almost any light that can locations. The ground maneuver be filtered or covered and uncovered can commander should rely on his own Army be used for signaling aircraft.

SECTION IV. JOINT AIR ATTACK TEAM OPERATIONS

A JAAT operation is an aviation The JAAT may operate either integrated operation capable of adding to the into close operations or it may operate lethality of combined arms operations. independently to the front of ground

7-10 FM 71-3 units. A JAAT is a highly mobile and Planning a JAAT operation is complex lethal tank-killing force that can engage and requires detailed coordination the enemy beyond the range of ground between the brigade commander/S3, FSO, AT weapons. ALO, and attack helicopter battalion commander. See FM 90-21 for further The JAAT can be employed during the details on JAAT operations. The scheme conduct of offensive or defensive of maneuver, CAS, and FS must be operations and is especially useful to integrated to the maximum extent counter enemy airmobile or Army possible. Planning considerations operations insertions in friendly rear include— areas. A JAAT can be employed to accomplish specific tasks during the • Nature of target. conduct of combined arms team operations. Offensively, the commander • Enemy avenues of approach. can best use the team against enemy counterattacks or in the exploitation or • FS coordination. pursuit role. • Airspace control.

The ground maneuver commander has • Provisions for SEAD. overall responsibility for planning and • Communications. employing the JAAT. When the brigade commander determines that his maneuver • Current ground tactical plan. forces need increased combat assets to attack a lucrative target array, he requests • Contact points/initial points. attack helicopters and CAS aircraft. • Weather. When attack helicopters are OPCON to a brigade, the commander, on the advice of Although JAAT assets may be his FSCOORD, ALO, and attack requested and planned for, the brigade helicopter battalion commander, requests commander must be prepared to execute CAS aircraft through preplanned or his maneuver plan without some or all of immediate air channels. the JAAT components.

SECTION V. NAVAL AND MARINE FIRE SUPPORT

GENERAL ORGANIZATION

NGF provides large volumes of NGF in a US Army unit is coordinated immediate FS close to coastal waters. through the air and NGF liaison company. Normally, naval fires are controlled by a The air and NGLO is a Marine NGLO attached to the FSE for a specific organization which consists of three operation. brigade air/NGF platoons organized and

7-11 FM 71-3

BRK3ADE E E? áíRANDñAVAí: GUNFIRE LIAISON TEAM f

SUPPORTlNQÄRMSffi 7 SUPPÔRTING^ARMSÎË SUPRORTíNG ARMS? ; LIAISON ¡TtAM =¿ t LI^MAISON^ÉÂMEIîU LIAISON TEAM !. i. —"i-i. i.-'j-fciLLi : !.-¡

FIREPOWER -FIREPOWER FIREPOWER CONTROL TEAM CONTROL: TEAM CONTROLTEAM

TOTAL 14-OFF 48-ENL 16-HMMWV

BDE FSCC SALTS X 3 (BN FSSC) FCT X 2 (CO LEVEL) 2-OFF 2-OFF 1- OFF 7-ENL 6-ENL 5-ENL 4-HMMWV 2-HMMWV 2- HMMWV

Figure 7-1. Air and naval gunfire liaison company organization. equipped to plan, request, coordinate, and COORDINATION AND PLANNING control NGF and naval air. Figure 7-1 shows the organization of the air and The NGF liaison team of the brigade NGLO. Each platoon has supporting arms operates on the division NGF support net liaison teams (SALT) that are normally (HF). This net provides communication provided to maneuver battalions. The between the division naval gunfire officer SALT consists of two officers and six (NGO), the brigade NGLO and the ship(s) personnel, who become part of the unit's in support of these units. This net is used FSE. The SALT has two firepower for the day-to-day planning between control teams (FCT) that may be provided units. No direct naval communications to maneuver companies to request, exist between the FCTs and SALTs. FS or observe, and adjust naval FS. The SALT maneuver nets must be used to officers coordinate all NGF and supervise communicate between these two teams. the activities of the FCTs. In addition, Requests for FS are transmitted to the air they advise the FSCOORD on all matters and NGF team (at brigade or division), pertaining to NGF employment. which forwards it to the ship. The NGO

7-12 FM 71-3

at division monitors and/or coordinates as EMPLOYMENT necessary. This coordination is much the same as for FA engagement. NGF ships are assigned the missions of DS or GS in the same way as artillery When NGF is available and air and is organized for combat. NGLO personnel are not available, units may request NGF through the FS net to Direct Support the division where the NGO is located with the division FSE. To increase A ship in DS usually supports a response time for adjustments. Army battalion. This ship can deliver both personnel may interface with the NGF planned and on-call fires. On-call fires unit if the following equipment is are normally requested and adjusted by available: the FCT of the supported unit or by an air spotter. • NGF ground spotter net (frequency 2-30 MHz HF). General Support • Compatible equipment: - Army: GRC-106, GRC-193. A ship is usually placed in GS of a brigade or division. The fires for the GS - USMC: PRC-104, GRC-193, ship are conducted as directed by the MRC-138. NGO of the supported unit. - Air Force: PRC-104, MRC- 107/108, GRC-206. The primary purpose of a DS ship is to allow the supported commander to add A complete understanding of the depth to the fires of his artillery without characteristics of NGF is essential to its the necessity for requests to higher successful use in ground support. echelons.

SECTION VI. MOBILITY AND SURVIVABILITY

GENERAL ENGINEER FUNCTIONS

Combat engineers are an integral part Combat engineers provide five of the combined arms team. Engineers primary engineer functions: adapt terrain to enhance the battle effectiveness of fire and maneuver. The • Mobility. They enable the orientation of engineers in support of a commander to maneuver tactical brigade is forward; their efforts are units into positions of advantage designed to support forward fights. over the enemy.

7-13 FM 71-3

• Countermobility. They reinforce the heavy divison in the AO, focusing on terrain with obstacles to hinder mobility, countermobility, and surviv- enemy operations and maximize ability. Each divisional engineer battalion the effectiveness of direct and has three combat engineer line indirect fire. companies, a headquarters company, and a support platoon (see Figure 7-2). • Survivability. They reduce the effectiveness of enemy weapon systems by developing protective positions in favorable locations. • General engineering. They provide CnD the force construction, LOCs maintenance and repair, airfield damage repair, battle damage restoration, and minefield clearing needed to sustain operations. HHC • Topographic engineering. They ŒD provide the commander with terrain analysis to aid in the planning and conduct of combat operations. Figure 7-2. Divisional combat engineer battalion. TASK ORGANIZATION OF COMBAT ENGINEERS Corps Combat Engineer Battalions

The heavy division has one organic These corps units may work within the divisional combat engineer brigade. Each brigade's AO. Units, if assigned to the committed maneuver brigade normally brigade, work under the control of the has an engineer battalion in DS and brigade engineer. habitually associated. The actual level of engineer support is adjusted based on METT-T analysis. Combat Engineer Companies Combat Engineer Battalions Divisional Combat Engineer Divisional Combat Engineer Company Battalion The divisional company has two line This unit is organic to the engineer platoons and an assault and obstacle brigade with one engineer battalion per platoon. The assault and obstacle platoon maneuver brigade. The engineer battalion has two assault sections and one obstacle performs engineer battlefield functions section used to augment the line platoons for their supported maneuver brigade in (see Figure 7-3).

7-14 FM 71-3

engineer positions himself where he can best accomplish the intent of the brigade CËD commander. In addition to supporting the brigade, he is responsible for—

WMM • Training his battalion to CO HQ ASSAULT & accomplish all assigned and cnj OBSTACLE implied tasks associated with supporting the brigade. Figure 7-3. Divisional combat • Updating and articulating his engineer company. assessment of the current and future capabilities and status of all mobility/survivability assets. Corps Combat Engineer Company • Approving the mobility/surviv- (Mechanized) ability support plan.

This corps unit has two line platoons ENGINEER OPERATIONS and an assault and obstacle platoon. The squad vehicle is an Ml 13 APC. The corps Command and Support Relationships combat engineer company (mechanized) only has six armored combat earthmovers (ACE), whereas the divisional company Engineer platoons work most has seven ACEs. efficiently under the control of an engineer company, and engineer companies work most efficiently under Separate Brigade/Armored Cavalry the control of an engineer battalion. This Regiment Engineer Battalion permits close control and the most productive use of all engineer assets. The The separate maneuver brigade has an engineer commander continuously organic engineer battalion. The separate monitors the progress of assigned tasks brigade’s engineer battalion organization and shifts elements where the need is is the same as the divisional combat greatest throughout his AO. On the other engineer battalion. hand, the maneuver commander at the lowest level gets greater responsiveness DIRECT SUPPORT ENGINEER when the engineer company is under his BATTALION COMMANDER control. He determines the task organization and gives missions directly The DS engineer battalion commander to the engineer elements under him. The is responsible for all engineer planning decision whether to provide engineers in and coordination for the maneuver a command or support relationship to a brigade. The engineer battalion subordinate maneuver headquarters is an commander provides an assessment of important one. The higher maneuver current and future capabilities of his unit commander must weigh his need for and other mobility/survivability assets flexibility and responsiveness and his supporting the brigade. The brigade option to task organize engineer forces

7-15 FM 71-3 against the most efficient use of scarce transportation assets to execute the engineer assets. maneuver plan.

• Plan to exploit local resources. Organizational Principles Commercial equipment and materiel may be used to support The following principles apply when military mobility, countermobility, employing combat engineers: and survivability operations.

• Task organize the engineer force to the requirements of the mission. Engineers Fighting as Infantry • Give priority to the main effort (mass the engineer effort). Avoid Any commander who controls piecemealing engineers to provide engineers in a command relationship, every unit a “slice.” Provide the unless otherwise prohibited, has the main effort with enough engineer authority to employ them as infantry. support to succeed. Because of the long-term impacts, the • Integrate engineers with maneuver commander employing an engineer unit and fires. as infantry has the responsibility to notify the next higher headquarters of his action. • Do not hold engineers in reserve In his decision to do so, he must carefully (that does not mean that the weigh the gain in infantry strength reserve maneuver force should not against the loss of engineer support. have engineers). Because of the long-term impact, the • Augment engineers logistically to commander employing an engineer unit support the plan. Engineers may as infantry has the responsibility to notify need additional time, materiel, and the next higher headquarters of his action.

SECTION VII. NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, AND CHEMICAL OPERATIONS

SECTION ORGANIZATION OPERATIONAL CAPABILITIES

The brigade chemical section consists Organization of deployed brigades of the brigade chemical officer (captain) may be somewhat different. However, and a chemical operations NCO (sergeant their functions and duties are similar to first class; MOS 54B40). Equipment in those of a divisional brigade. The brigade the NBC section includes appropriate chemical officer works as an assistant doctrinal manuals, map boards, overlays, operations officer in the operations a work station, hazard templates, and section of the brigade. Both the officer status charts. and NCO are assigned by modified table

7-16 FM 71-3 of organizations and equipment (MTOE) manipulated to meet changing situations. to the headquarters company or troop. In addition to these specific chemical Through staff visits, coordination, and duties, chemical officers and NCOs also inspection of subordinate units, the perform a myriad of operational duties brigade chemical section is the focal according to their abilities and unit needs. point for NBC operations. This is accomplished in garrison as well as in the field. Training

FACILITIES, ORGANIZATION, AND Monitor, evaluate, and determine DUTIES training needs and provide technical training; plan and coordinate training; During field operations, the brigade conduct NBC battle focus; evaluate status chemical personnel provide 24-hour NBC of training. Aid in professional operations capability. A work station is development of subordinate chemical designated in the TSOP for the main CP personnel. where chemical information is to be processed and disseminated. The Evaluation chemical officer is available to cover shift changes within the main CP and Provide NBC expertise as evaluator; provide chemical continuity for tactical analyze results and present facts; develop operations. However, the section is solutions to correct deficiencies. organized into two distinct yet flexible shifts. In addition, upon movement of the main CP, one person can move to the Readiness TAC CP to continue the battle or move with the TAC CP in anticipation of a Consolidate and provide data to main CP jump, allowing for one person at command group; assist S4 with NBC each site. It is not recommended to leave stocks and resupply; monitor contingency these shifts split due to the possibility of stocks. overburdening. Logistics Brigade chemical personnel are instrumental in the planning cycle of all tactical operations. They assist the S2 in Account for NBC expenditures; follow the IPB process and integrate and up requisitions and maintenance; balance synchronize NBC defense and smoke equipment on hand and requisitions. operations to support courses of action. Once the plan is developed, they ensure Administration execution. Write and update NBC annex to SOP; Duties and responsibilities of maintain current publications; remain chemical personnel in the brigade main proficient in current doctrine; maintain CP are listed in the following paragraphs. liaison with subordinate units and higher These are not all-inclusive and are headquarters.

7-17 FM 71-3

Field Operations Offensive forces also face a variety of obstacles in defeating the enemy. Actual Execute NBC warning and reporting obstacles constructed forward of, system; maintain current operations between, and within strongpoints are overlay; post NBC attack overlay; with designed to canalize friendly forces S4, develop contaminated MSR overlay; into areas favorable to the defend- maintain decontamination overlay and ing force or to cause forces to mass post NBC unit symbols; conduct NBC and create a profitable target for vulnerability analyses; maintain radiation conventional and/or nuclear fires. When status charts; recommend MOPP levels heavy OPFOR are in the defense, the use and employment of chemical assets. of chemical agents and smoke can be expected to complement their barrier plan. OPERATIONS Plans must be developed for delaying When planning offensive or defensive the concentration of forces and rapid operations, the commander must dispersal after mission accomplishment. recognize that NBC weapons can Reducing vulnerability and the period of significantly affect his scheme of risk are major considerations while forces operations. All threat forces train are concentrated. Planning for the use of extensively for operations on a battlefield routes to, on, and through objectives must where NBC weapons are used. They carry be complete, and movement must be a complete array of individual and controlled. vehicle NBC protective gear. Some threat forces have armored vehicles that provide pressurized protection for crews. Most threat forces integrate smoke into their Before and during either the offensive scheme of maneuver. or defensive phase of combat operations, the chemical officer continuously During movement to contact monitors the biological and chemical operations, the primary emphasis is on situation and event development. His the most trafficable terrain. Aggressive IPB analysis factors the weather, terrain, reconnaissance to identify enemy enemy biological/chemical employ- locations and areas of possible NBC ment doctrine, biological/chemical sensor contamination must be conducted. capabilities and limitations, and field Through the use of chemical personnel at behavior of biological/chemical agents. brigade level, provisions are made to He uses the information reported by the overcome these obstacles and facilitate corps biodetection company and/or movement. other battlefield sensors to initiate the analysis process. The chemical In nuclear warfare, a formation with officer analyzes and evaluates bio- two or more task forces abreast and a logical/chemical surveillance informa- reserve may be adopted in the attack tion and, based on this development of when a successful penetration has been the situation, works with the S2 and S3 to created by other forces. This allows the assist in the preparation of recommended brigade to attack on a broader front, COAs and the commander’s decision- presenting a less lucrative target. support graphics.

7-18 FM 71-3

SECTION VIII. SMOKE OPERATIONS

Properly planned and executed smoke to blind enemy units. Deliberate smoke is operations become a combat multiplier normally produced by mechanical when they increase survivability of generators and smoke pots. Either type of friendly forces and degrade enemy smoke can be used to deceive the enemy. command, control, communications, and intelligence capabilities. Specifically, Smoke has four general applications smoke can be used to— on the battlefield: • Obscuration smoke. Obscuration • Deny the enemy information. smoke is employed on or against the enemy to degrade its vision • Reduce effectiveness of enemy both within and beyond its target acquisition means. location. • Restrict nap-of-the-earth and • Screening smoke. Screening smoke contour approaches for aircraft. is employed in friendly AOs or in areas between friendly and enemy • Disrupt enemy movement, forces to degrade enemy ground operations, and command and and aerial observation and defeat control. or degrade enemy electro-optical systems. Screening smoke is • Create conditions to surprise the employed to conceal ground enemy. maneuver, breaching and recovery operations, key assembly areas, • Deceive the enemy. and supply routes. • Weaken the thermal effects of • Protecting smoke. Protecting nuclear weapons. smoke is used to defeat enemy guidance systems or to attenuate energy weapons on the battlefield. The brigade employs two categories of For example, smoke can be used to smoke—hasty and deliberate. Hasty degrade the effects of lasers, high- smoke is employed for short-term power microwaves, particle beams, requirements with a minimum of and non-nuclear, directed electro- planning. It may be delivered by all magnetic pulse. smoke assets, but is normally delivered by artillery, mortars, and smoke pots. • Identification or marking smoke. Deliberate smoke is characterized by Marking smoke is employed to integrated planning. It is used over identify targets, supply and extended periods to cover friendly evacuation points, and friendly activities throughout an entire operation. unit positions. It also provides for Although it is normally employed to prearranged battlefield communi- conceal friendly units, it may also be used cations.

7-19 FM 71-3

Smoke planning is a part of the smoke to support maneuver by overall tactical plan. Each echelon of concealing, disengaging, and moving command plans for employment of smoke forces; by isolating and attacking to support its operations. The brigade S3 echelons; and by concealing engineer has primary staff responsibility for operations. Use smoke to provide planning smoke operations with the additional firepower by disrupting enemy advice and support of the FSO, S2, S4, command and control and forcing the chemical officer, and staff weather enemy to mass, thereby creating the personnel. lucrative target. As in offensive operations, the main focus of smoke In the offense, smoke can be used to operations is to defeat enemy target deny the enemy information about the acquisition and reconnaissance and to size and composition of friendly forces conceal maneuver forces. and location of the main attack. A smoke screen can be placed either to the front or Use smoke to deceive the enemy to the flanks. When the enemy cannot be regarding intentions of friendly forces. screened effectively, obscuring smoke Deception operations can make valuable may be required. To support offensive use of smoke assets by making the enemy operations, smoke generators remain commit forces to the deception and not to mounted on vehicles. the main attack. The key to a successful smoke deception is to make the enemy Smoke use will support any type of believe the smoke support is for the main defensive operation. In the defense, use effort.

SECTION IX. AIR DEFENSE SUPPORT

ORGANIZATION may recommend retaining all assets under brigade control or allocating assets to The air defense CS for a brigade is subordinate units. provided using a combination of BSFVs, Avengers, and HMMWV-mounted Stinger crews. The brigade’s mission and the The air defense battalion organic to an division commander’s air defense armored division consists of a priorities are used by air defense battalion headquarters and HHB, three BSFV commanders to determine the air defense batteries, and one Avenger battery. Total allocation for a brigade. Early warning is equipment in the battalion consists of 24 provided by the air defense sensors and BSFVs, 6 BFVs, 40 HMMWV-mounted the division early warning net. MANPAD teams, 24 Avenger fire units, and 6 ground-based sensors. Allocation of ADA assets within the brigade depends on the brigade’s mission. A BSFV battery’s organic equipment Based on the brigade commander’s intent, is 2 platoon leader BFVs, 8 BSFVs, and scheme of maneuver, air IPB, and air 10 HMMWV-mounted Stinger crews (see defense priorities, the ADA commander Figure 7-4).

7-20 FM 71-3

s s 7

Figure 7-4. Bradley Stinger fighting vehicle battery.

An Avenger battery consists of 6 he develops air defense priorities. The platoons of 4 fire units for a total of 24 maneuver commander must then approve fire units. these priorities before task organizing air defense assets. The brigade must provide the ADO with the following information. DUTIES OF KEY AIR DEFENSE PERSONNEL The S2 provides information on the ground and air threat and the unit’s PIR. Senior Air Defense Officer The S3 provides the unit OPORD or OPLAN and TSOP. This includes The unit’s senior ADO is a special overlays; preplanned locations; staff officer during the planning process. commander’s intent and concept of Based on the maneuver commander’s operation and follow-on operations; intent, scheme of maneuver, and air IPB, commander’s priorities; what units expect

7-21 FM 71-3 heavy ground and air action; what assets air defense measures in the air defense are most critical, most vulnerable, and estimate. After approval and staff easiest to recover or replace; special or coordination, he develops the air defense modified brevity or operations codes, key annex to the maneuver plan. He words, or emergency procedures; points coordinates with ADA elements at higher the supported unit commander wants and lower echelons and with adjacent covered in daily briefs; SOI; resupply; units. He recommends to the ground the supported unit’s MOPP level; and commander use of other combat arms for how changes are disseminated. air defense based on careful target value analysis (TVA) and estimate of the air threat. He is also the early warning link The S4 provides the following to brigade. He can thus monitor the early resupply information: Class I pickup warning net and relay information to the points, times, and feeding cycles; Class II brigade main CP officer. This resupply of NBC suits, gear, and information can be passed to maneuver batteries; Class III refueling locations and forces over the command or operations times; Class V arrangements for supply of and intelligence net (see Figure 7-5). specialized ammunition; Class IX procedures for ordering and receiving parts and locations and times for pickup. He also determines how resupply is Air Defense Fire Coordination Team handled and if the air defense unit has been considered in the planning; who maintains air defense units’ nonsystem- Each brigade has an air defense fire peculiar equipment; and where they are coordination team consisting of a staff located. sergeant, sergeant, and driver in an M577 vehicle. Their job is to provide the staff with planning input for air defense Air Defense Artillery Battery employment and tactics, advice on Commander passive air defense measures, and guidance on use of combined arms for air defense. In addition, they provide ADA The ADA commander has two roles: unit dispositions and missions, changes in commander of ADA forces and brigade established rules of engagement, and near air defense coordinator. He recommends real-time information on air battle active, passive, and other combined arms intelligence.

7-22 FM 71-3

PATRIOT FM CMD HAWK AWACS HIMAD LO DEW

A2C2 DIV LO ADA SOTS ADA BN SENSORS ABMOC

D V CMD

ADA BDE BTRY CMD

ADA BN/TF PLT/SEC CMD

ADA SQD/TM

Figure 7-5. Air defense early warning network.

EMPLOYMENT OF AIR DEFENSE criticality, vulnerability, recuperability, and threats and weighs them against the When determining the allocation of air list of air defense priorities. He then defense assets, the air defense commander develops an initial allocation to protect considers the factors of METT-T, these priorities. The advice the air

7-23 FM 71-3 defense commander gives to the Passive Air Defense maneuver commander can make the difference between adequate and Passive air defense measures include inadequate air defense protection. all measures other than active taken to reduce the effectiveness of air attack. If early warning sensors are attached There are two types of passive air defense to the battery, the battery commander measures: cover and concealment and coordinates with the brigade S3 and damage limiting measures. Use cover and emplaces them along high-speed air concealment to avoid being detected by avenues of approach in the brigade. This the enemy. Damage limiting measures are is done I AW the air defense’s battalion those actions you take to avoid damage sensor plan. During offensive operations, from air attack such as dispersion and the battery commander will possibly protective construction. receive up to two sensors to be employed in the brigade zone. Early warning sensors in defensive operations are not To successfully counter the air normally assigned a DS mission in a assault, you need a well-synchronized brigade, but are assigned a GS role to combined arms plan that is based on support the division’s defense operation. understanding the threat's air assault doctrine. There are four steps in Active Air Defense counterair assault planning. First, understand the threat's air assault Active air defense is direct action doctrine. Determining the threat's taken to destroy enemy air platforms or capabilities, objectives, time, size, and reduce their effectiveness. A large depth provides a framework for volume of fire from small arms (Ml6, understanding air assault doctrine. M60, and caliber .50) can destroy Second, identify the likely air assault attacking aircraft or disrupt their attack. objectives. An objective may be outside Tank main guns and Bradley 25-mm guns your sector, but the air route and landing may also be used to engage attacking zone (LZ) could be within it, or vice aircraft effectively. The M830A1 versa. Third, identify air avenues of multipurpose AT round is the most approach and potential LZs. Work effective round to use when engaging backwards from the objective to enemy aircraft with a tank. This round determine the most likely air avenues of approach, and several potential LZs. has a switch to change it from a ground Fourth, have a combined arms plan that role to an air role. A proximity switch senses an air target and detonates near the addresses battle command, observation, target. General rules for engaging aircraft and fires. The plan should include actions are found in FM 44-64. Units must also to destroy the air assault during air movement, during the assembly train to take advantage of the terrain to movement at the LZ, and during actions reduce their likelihood of being attacked on the objective. by air.

7-24 FM 71-3

SECTION X. INTELLIGENCE AND ELECTRONIC WARFARE SUPPORT

EW is an essential component in brigade commander in identifying winning the information battle. EW helps intelligence requirements that support the the commander seize and maintain the brigade mission. He also provides initiative by providing real time information to the commander for making knowledge of the enemy’s intent, tactical decisions by fully employing disposition, and readiness. EW defends brigade IEW assets as part of the friendly information systems by intelligence BOS. Through the S3, he degrading or neutralizing the effects of directs the activity of the DS company. enemy EW activity. EW denies the enemy The DS company provides multidiscipline effective use of his information systems intelligence support to the brigade by degrading or destroying his commander. communication and targeting systems. The MI battalion commander attempts EW includes three major components: to establish and maintain a habitual EW support, electronic attack, and relationship between the brigade and electronic protection. EW is integrated designated DS company. DS MI company into unit operations regardless of the type capabilities include— of unit, level of war, or the scope of the mission. It complements other destructive • Automated multidiscipline intelli- systems in the context of overall strategy. gence and combat information When EW is synchronized into lethal processing. fires, the friendly commander gains agility by slowing the reaction time of his • Analytical control team (ACT). adversary. • UAV control. • Interrogation of prisoners of war The division MI battalion directly (IPW) and limited document supports the commander and G2 by exploitation. providing dedicated multidiscipline • Counterintelligence support. battlefield intelligence and EW support to the division and its subordinate maneuver • Command and control of organic brigades. At this echelon the focus is on and reinforcing IEW assets. the intelligence products and services • JSTARS coverage and product needed by commanders to plan, fight, and dissemination. win battles at the tactical level. In addition to the organic intelligence The separate brigade S2’s respon- support provided by the MI battalion, the sibilities are broader than those of the brigade will receive a DS company from divisional brigade S2 and can be more the MI battalion. reasonably compared to the responsibilities of the division G2. Although the The brigade S2 is the commander’s unit is smaller and the mission more focal point for intelligence. He assists the limited, the separate brigade S2 performs FM 71-3 all functions performed at the division The separate brigade may receive level. reinforcing IEW assets from within the corps or from echelons above corps. The separate MI company mission focuses on developing, assessing, and ANALYTICAL CONTROL TEAM disseminating the combat information and intelligence required by the combat The analytical control team (ACT) commander to accomplish his mission. expands the mission, functions, and GS MI company capabilities include— resources formerly found in the IEW support element (IEWSE) and MI company team. The ACT is organic to the • Integrated collection management, direct support MI company and normally technical control, ASAS and collocates with the company command reporting. post. Unlike the ACE at higher echelons, • Automated multidiscipline intelli- the ACT is not under OPCON of the gence and combat information brigade S2. Under the direction of the DS processing, display, and MI company commander, the team dissemination. provides the brigade S2 with automated intelligence processing, analysis, and • IPW and limited counter- dissemination capabilities. In addition, intelligence support. the MI commander uses the ACT to support intelligence collection and • Ground-based signals IEW. reporting of subordinate elements. The ACT uses its all source analysis system • UAV close-range launch, collec- (ASAS) work station to access databases, tion, recovery, maintenance and reports, graphics, and other products at control. higher echelon organizations, primarily the division’s ACE. • Intelligence special purpose communications. COUNTERINTELLIGENCE SUPPORT • JSTARS coverage and product dissemination. The counterintelligence team provides counterintelligence support to the division to protect its operations from The separate MI company’s structure the intelligence threat, and from includes the following: subversion, sabotage, and terrorism. The counterintelligence teams of the MI battalion are normally deployed in • Company headquarters. the brigade and division rear areas. • Three collecting and jamming With corps augmentation, the counter- (C&J) platoons. intelligence team or teams may be placed • Commo section. in DS or even attached to the brigade to perform specific counterintelligence • IEW platoon. missions for a specific period of time.

7-26 FM 71-3

Interrogation teams usually operate can also be used with thermal sights on from the division’s EPW collection point. various weapon systems to give gunners As with the counterintelligence teams, assistance in target acquisition. They can given corps augmentation, interrogation be employed near the FLOT, forward of teams can be in DS or attached to the the FLOT, or be used on the flanks in a brigade for specific missions. Although screening role. They can be used to not usually a timely source of surveil gaps between units or to observe information, interrogation reports can rear areas at possible drop zones (DZ) or provide the brigade commander with LZs. answers to PIR that may not otherwise be collected through electronic or visual Normally, the teams provided to the means. brigade are attached to subordinate battalions. The brigade may retain control GROUND SURVEILLANCE RADAR of some of the GSR assets to give the S2 more direct access to the collected GSR teams normally are attached to information in the rear areas. the maneuver brigade to provide a 24- hour battlefield surveillance capability. Detailed information on all MI assets They may be employed on patrols or at operating in the brigade area may be OPs and are equipped with NODs. They found in FM 34-80.

SECTION XI. MILITARY POLICE SUPPORT

MILITARY POLICE BATTLEFIELD condition of MSRs; identifying MISSIONS restricting terrain, effects of weather on routes, damage to MP operations play a significant role routes, NBC contamination, and in assisting the brigade commander to the presence of the enemy; and meet the challenges associated with identifying alternate MSRs, when combat. MPs provide support through required. MPs should report all their four primary battlefield missions. observations, maintain surveillance, and develop the enemy Battlefield Circulation Control situation. • MSR regulation enforcement and MPs support the maneuver and security. This would include mobility functions by expediting forward enforcing the command’s highway and lateral movement of combat regulation and traffic circulation resources. The use of MPs in the plans to keep MSRs free for battlefield circulation control (BCC) role resupply operations. To expedite might include— traffic on MSRs, use the following measures: traffic control points • Route R&S. This would include (TCP), roadblocks, checkpoints, continually monitoring the holding areas, defiles at critical

7-27 FM 71-3

points, and temporary route signs. They also give locations of supply MPs should also gather infor- points and medical facilities. MPs mation on friendly and enemy also provide information about activity by use of mobile teams. MSRs, critical points, contam- • Refugee and straggler control. inated areas, and holding areas, as Refugee control operations are the well as the general location of responsibility of G5/S5 and/or host major units. nation authorities. MPs should assist, direct, or deny the movement of civilians whose Security location, direction of movement, or actions may hinder operations. MPs assist the commander in In the area of straggler control, addressing security and force protection MPs performing their BCC mission in the rear area by conducting security would return stragglers to military operations that may include— control. Mobile patrols, TCP, and checkpoint teams do this as part of their day-to-day operation, and • Area security. This mission would traffic control. assist in gaining information to guard against unexpected enemy • Police intelligence collecting and attacks in the rear area. MPs reporting. In carrying out their monitor likely avenues of approach support of the brigade’s maneuver and LZs or DZs to give early and mobility, MPs collect police warning of rear area enemy intelligence (both tactical and activity. They provide coverage of criminal) on a continual basis. NAIs within the brigade’s rear While conducting area recon- area. MPs also have the capability naissance, MSR regulation en- to recon routes and bridges and forcement, and security operations, provide detailed overlays. MPs routinely interface with soldiers, local police, and the • Security of designated critical indigenous population as well as assets. This might include security gather information on the terrain, of key personnel and facilities. weather, and activities in the This could be done by operating a brigade AO. MPs represent a mobile screen. This standoff HUMINT source that should be protection detects and defends integrated into the brigade’s against the threat before it can overall intelligence collection move within direct fire range of effort. facilities. MPs may provide • Information dissemination. MPs protective services to key provide information to soldiers, personnel visiting the brigade area. units, and other road users in the This may be accomplished by course of all MP missions. MPs using access control measures in inform personnel moving through the CP, by providing close-in their AO of recent enemy activity personal security, or by using there. They provide directions. around the clock static and in-

7-28 FM 71-3

transit security measures. MPs may • EPW collection operations. MPs provide convoy security for units collect EPWs and civilian transporting critical supplies to internees from combat units and tactical forces. from other MP units in an AO. MPs make these collections as far • Base response force operations. forward as possible. MPs help apprise the commander • EPW evacuation operations. MPs of enemy activity in the rear. MPs ensure that EPWs are evacuated are trained to defeat threat levels I from collecting points and holding and II as well as to delay a level areas as soon as possible. III threat and hand over that battle to a tactical combat force (TCP). Law and Order Operations • Area damage control. MP units take measures to support area damage control before, during, and MPs conduct these operations when after hostile actions or natural and necessary to extend the combat man-made disasters. MPs provide commander’s discipline and control. This support that includes, but is not would include law enforcement and limited to, BCC, refugee control, criminal investigations. Close coordin- straggler control, NBC detecting ation with host-nation civilian police can and reporting, and some local enhance combating terrorism (anti- physical security when required. terrorism and counterterrorism measures), law and order, and control of civilian • NBC detecting and reporting. MPs populations. Any one of the above have the capability to detect, missions can easily require an entire MP monitor, and report the presence of platoon and more; therefore, it is impor- NBC hazards. They do this in the tant that the factors of METT-T be course of performing any of their considered when using the provided MP MP missions. support. It is best to keep MPs mobile, acting as the eyes and ears of the commander. During offensive Enemy Prisoners of War Operations operations, MPs best support the brigade’s maneuver and mobility by facilitating route movement and MPs support tactical commanders by refugee/straggler/EPW evacuation and undertaking EPW operations. They control, and by controlling road traffic. relieve the tactical commander of the In the defense, MPs are best employed need to use his combat forces to do this. in the area security role to enhance MPs in DS of brigade units and those the brigade’s maneuver and mobility. assigned to separate brigades establish an It is important that MP resources EPW collection point (normally in the be synchronized and weighted in sup- BSA). EPW operations include— port of the brigade’s main effort just as

7-29 FM 71-3

PLT 21 FERS

2 PLT HQ SQUADS

1 LT 9 PERS X 2 1 SFC 1 SPC

3 TEAMS

3 PERS X 3

Figure 7-6. Armored division military police platoon structure. any other asset. This will help maximize Figure 7-6 shows the structure of an MP resources allocated to the brigade. armored division MP platoon from which the divisional brigade receives support. The corps MP brigade normally provides an additional MP company to Commanders must realize that MP augment each division. Dependent upon support may not be available or adequate METT-T, this support may not be to perform all necessary MP battlefield provided down to brigade level. missions simultaneously. Commanders Likewise, dependent upon METT-T, the must therefore prioritize those missions brigade could receive support ranging and designate other soldiers within the from squad size up to platoon or company brigade to assist in their execution. These size (from the corps MP company). MP missions may include— Regardless of the size of MP support provided, their employment should • Route reconnaissance, selection of maximize their capabilities to operate as routes/alternate routes, convoy dispersed, but connected (by escort, and security of LOCs. communications), teams and/or massed • Control of roads, waterways, elements as dictated by METT-T or railroad terminals, or other critical OCOKA. choke points in MSRs.

7-30 FM 71-3

• Security of critical sites within the EMPLOYMENT OF THE MILITARY brigade AO. POLICE PLATOON IN A SEPARATE BRIGADE • Refugee control in close cooperation with host-nation civil The MP platoon supporting a separate authorities. brigade can perform any of the four MP battlefield missions. However, its • Collection and escort of EPW. resources are quite limited.

Support to the platoon and to the UTILIZATION OF THE MILITARY provost marshal section is provided by POLICE PLATOON WITHIN THE the brigade HHC. The platoon must BRIGADE compete with other brigade HHC assets for priority of repair for weapons, vehicles, and communications equipment. The MP platoon providing DS to the maneuver brigade has an AO coinciding Organization with the brigade’s boundaries. The platoon headquarters locates within the The provost marshal has a small BSA. To accomplish its missions, a DS section that operates out of the brigade platoon must have at least three squads. main CP. The section is not organized for One squad operates the EPW collecting split-cell operation. Corps augmentation point. The two remaining squads provide is not provided on a routine basis and BCC and area security within the brigade must be requested. rear. A separate provost marshal cell within Platoon assets performing EPW the brigade HHC serves as the command operations locate in the BSA. The and control element for the platoon. remainder of the platoon is dispersed throughout the brigade rear. The DS The MP platoon supporting a separate platoon conducts BCC and area security brigade has four squads instead of the within its resources. They also receive three found in the division platoon. One and hold EPWs for evacuation to the squad operates the EPW collecting point division rear. while another provides security at the brigade’s main CP. The remaining two The MP platoon might also be utilized squads conduct BCC and control and area to support river crossings or passages of security operations throughout the lines. Detailed information on MP brigade’s rear area. Figure 7-7 shows the supporting these missions can be found in structure of an MP platoon for a separate FM 19-4. brigade.

7-31 FM 71-3

HHC

PM SECTION MP PLT

MAJ PM 31A SFCOPNSNCO 95B 1 SSGPHYSINSP 95BH3 SPC CLERK TYP 71L PLT HQ MP SQD (X4)

LTPLTLDR 31A SSG SQD LDR 95B SFCPLTSGT 95B SGT TEAM LDR 95BV5 PFC MP 95B SGT TEAM LDR 95B SPC MP 95BQ9 SPC MP 95B(2) PFCMP 95 B (3)

Figure 7-7. Military police platoon structure within a separate brigade.

Command and Control Support Relationships

The command and control of MP units The support relationships of MP units supporting separate brigades extends supporting separate brigades differ with downward from the tactical commander. the type of brigade to which the platoon The separate brigade provost marshal has is assigned. In an armored separate OPCON of separate brigade MP assets the brigade, the MP platoon employs all of its way the division provost marshal has squads to provide GS to the entire brigade OPCON of division MP assets. The AO. Thus the support relationship of an brigade provost marshal also has OPCON MP platoon supporting an armored of any MP assets that are provided from separate brigade and that of an MP corps. The platoon leader directs the company supporting a light infantry execution of his platoon's missions. division are the same. The number of squads employed vary with the brigade's size and the needs of the brigade’s Staff Relationships missions. However, establishing the support relationship (DS or GS) of MP The provost marshal advises the assets assigned in support of the brigade commander of a separate brigade on remains within the purview of the brigade matters pertaining to MP operations. commander.

7-32 FM 71-3

SECTION XII. SIGNAL SUPPORT

Signal support to the divisional switch is also referred to as the tactical brigade is provided by a packet network (TPN) that overrides communications team from the division MSE. signal battalion. The small extension node (SEN) team provides MSE Brigade external communications service for telephone and packet may consist of the following: switch access. Telephones, terminals (DNVT/DSVT), facsimiles, and auto- • Area common user (ACU) mated terminals/systems are brought and network. ACU is composed of hooked up by the unit. The unit SO has MSE and possibly some supervisory responsibility over the team multichannel tactical satellite and incorporates them into the unit’s (TACSAT) assets. The network planning process. Normal signal re- carries both voice and packet lationships are in effect per FM 24-1. (TPN) data. The network may Restoration of lost or down span several continents or be very communications is everyone’s respon- small. sibility until communications are restored. • TACSAT. TACSAT communications network has both single The division signal battalion is channel and multichannel and tasked with providing a communications may be employed separate from grid to ensure area coverage for MSE the MSE network. communications. The brigade S3, BSO, and divisional signal unit must work • Divisional or task force FM and together during the planning phase of AM voice nets. the operation to ensure communications • Commercial telephones, leased are effective. As the digitized battlefield lines, host-nation communica- evolves and digital information transfer tions, portable phones, car becomes more prevalent, the planning of phones, pagers, beepers, and communications becomes even more commercial hand-held radios may critical. possibly be used depending on the threat during an operation. The packet switch capability that the signal battalion and the supporting SEN Brigade internal communications team provides is critical to hooking the consist of the following: brigade’s automated systems into the packet switching network. The network is a large mobile local area network • ACUs, MSEs, and TPNs. (LAN). When hooked to the network via - Circuit switched. coaxial cable, the unit is capable of - Packet switched— conducting large data transfer actions in * ATCCS devices on TPN. seconds that a few years ago took hours * User owned automation in the tactical environment. Packet devices.

7-33 FM 71-3

• Combat net radio (CNR). SIGNAL PLANNING - FM radio (single channel ground and airborne The BSO is responsible for many subsystem [SINCGARS]). aspects of communications planning to - Single channel TACSAT. support the brigade’s operations. The - AM radio, IHFR. two most important areas of • Automated systems in brigade communications planning for the hooked to MSE/TPN network. brigade are ACU and CNR.

BRIGADE SIGNAL SECTION The key to successful ACU support is keeping the supporting signal The organic signal section of the battalion in the planning loop on what brigade HHC provides the following the brigade communications communications services to the brigade requirements (include slice) are for each CPs (see FM 11-43): mission and include any special requirements during each phase of an operation. When and where service is • Network management for all required must be planned, coordinated, systems in the brigade and then synchronized with all of the exchanging digital information. other BOSs in the brigade AO. • Frequency and spectrum management for all systems in CNR is just as important as ACU in the brigade AO. planning. With a new generation of • Limited FM radio maintenance. radios (SINCGARS) and the capability to conduct frequency hopping • FM radio range extension operations, a number of variables must capability. be met for successful operations. • Evacuation of COMSEC material. Frequency hopping communications • Communications training and must be planned and practiced/rehearsed training facilitators. prior to execution to ensure success.

7-34 FM 71-3

CHAPTER 8 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT

The application of superior combat power at the decisive time and place determines the outcome of the battle. The brigade commander uses his CSS assets to enhance the abilities of his maneuver battalions and to weight the main effort within the brigade. The effects of CSS assets in support of the maneuver plan are increased by integrating CSS in the maneuver plan from the beginning of the planning process or COA development. This prevents CSS assets from becoming additives attached to a completed plan. This allows the CSS to act as true combat multipliers. Based on guidance and changing priorities, the brigade requests additional assets from division when necessary, and coordinates and integrates CSS assets. The CSS assets provide support to the brigade according to standard command and support relationships.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Command and Support Relationships 8-1 Section II. Combat Service Support Overview 8-2 Section III. Brigade Combat Service Support System 8-3 Section IV. Forward Support Battalion 8-8 Section V. Personnel Service Support 8-14 Section VI. Brigade Combat Service Support Planning 8-17 Section VII. Reconstitution 8-23 Section VIII. Weapon Systems Replacement Operations 8-24

SECTION I. COMMAND AND SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS

Specific applications of the command also serves as a special staff officer to the and support relationships are in the brigade commander. discussion of CSS elements throughout this chapter. Table 8-1 illustrates the During planning, preparation, and execution of the brigade mission, the CSS relationship between the brigade and CSS element leader provides assistance, elements. advice, and recommendations on employment of his unit to the brigade commander and staff. He employs his The leader of a CSS element that is unit as directed by the brigade attached, OPCON, or DS to the brigade commander.

8-1 FM 71-3

Table 8-1. Brigade command and support relationships.

UNIT ATTACHED OPCON DS GS

Under Command/ Brigade Cdr Brigade Cdr Parent Unit Parent Unit Control of...

Task Organized Brigade Unit Brigade Cdr**** Parent Unit Parent Unit by...

Receives Brigade Unit Brigade Unit Brigade Unit Parent Unit Mission, Tasks, and Priorities from.

Positioned by... Brigade Unit Brigade Unit* Parent Unit* Parent Unit

Maintains Brigade Unit Brigade and Parent Brigade and Parent Parent Unit Communications Unit Unit and Liaison with...

Receives Brigade Unit*** Parent Unit** Parent Unit** Parent Unit CSS from...

*With specific approval of the brigade commander if within the brigade AOs. (Any unit in the brigade area requires positioning approval.)

**The CSS requirements beyond the ability of the parent unit area provided by the brigade after a specific request for coordination between the parent unit and brigade headquarters has been made.

‘“Attached element brings an appropriate slice of CSS equipment and personnel to supplement the brigade's assets.

****ln NATO, OPCON does not include authority to assign separate employment of components of the units concerned.

SECTION II. COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OVERVIEW

TACTICAL LOGISTICAL FUNCTIONS sustained to allow the brigade commander to take advantage of The functional areas of CSS cover six opportunities to achieve tactical major areas: manning, arming, fueling, fixing, advantage. This requires the moving, and sustaining soldiers and their S4/S1 and the FSB commander to systems (PSS, HSS, field service support, and incorporate the logistical characteristics quality of life). in every action taken. The five logis- LOGISTICS CHARACTERISTICS tical characteristics of anticipation, integration, continuity, responsive- The brigade must be armed, fixed, ness, and improvisation enable tactical fueled, manned, moved and its soldiers success.

8-2 FM 71-3

Anticipation and to ensure that, the depth of the operations is not inhibited by breaks in CSS leaders and staffs must anticipate support. This represents a considerable CSS requirements. They do this by challenge for the FSB and other CSS understanding the commander’s intent elements in the brigade area. It requires and translating current developments into CSS assets to provide continuous support future requirements. The main purpose of while frequently relocating. anticipation is to help the brigade commander form a supportable plan. The Responsiveness FSB commander, brigade SI, and brigade S4 develop a close relationship between The CSS system must also be staffs. The FSB commander or his responsive. It must meet needs that designated representative attends brigade change with little notice in environments staff meetings. He monitors the brigade of war and OOTW (conflicts). The command net to anticipate required brigade staff and FSB support operations changes to the FSB organization, must assume changes in priorities, employment, and operations. support operations, and brigade task organizations. CSS assets must respond Integration quickly and provide continuous support in A close relationship between the joint and combined operations. brigade staff and FSB support operations is required to ensure sustainment operations Improvisation are integrated with operations of the maneuver force. The brigade commander Sustainers must be prepared to and staff plan tactical and CSS operations improvise. The fluid nature of Army concurrently. The FSB commander and operations may quickly render routine staff provide the required input to the brigade planning process to ensure the support methods obsolete. Leaders and scheme of maneuver and FS plan are staffs must not interpret a guideline or supported logistically. technique as an absolute requirement. If it is not effective in maintaining maximum combat power and momentum, the Continuity brigade staff and FSB support operations The brigade commander requires personnel must not be afraid to discard it. continuous support to retain the initiative Sustainers must be innovative. SECTION III. BRIGADE COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT SYSTEM

GENERAL companies. CSS is provided to the divisional brigade by the DISCOM and A divisional brigade does not have the corps support command (COSCOM). any organic CSS units. Subordinate Normally, the majority of the brigade's maneuver units have limited CSS logistical support is provided by the FSB. elements within their headquarters Separate brigades have an organic support

8-3 FM 71-3 battalion to provide most of their required S4. The FSB commander is in a DS CSS. A separate brigade support battalion relationship to the brigade commander. is similar in organization and function to The FSB commander marshals and a divisional FSB. synchronizes the CSS assets required to support the brigade's tactical plan. While BRIGADE COMBAT SERVICE the FSB supports the ground maneuver SUPPORT brigade, they remain under the command of the DISCOM commander. The FSB The brigade commander plans his normally positions the battalion units tactical and CSS operations concurrently. within the BSA in accordance with the He ensures that his scheme of maneuver brigade's tactical plan. The displacement and FS plan are logistically supportable. of the BSA must be carefully coordinated If CSS planners identify constraints, the with the tactical scheme of maneuver, commander evaluates the risks and, if location of the division support area necessary, establishes new priorities or (DSA) and MSRs, priorities of support, modifies his tactical plan to eliminate or and time available for displacement. reduce their effect. The personal involvement and on-the-scene appraisal Key duties and responsibilities of of the situation by CSS personnel is as brigade logisticians are as follows: important to mission accomplishment as is personal involvement by combat leaders. CSS planners must— • Brigade XO coordinates the CSS effort of the brigade. He ensures • Understand the commander's intent that the brigade SI and S4 have the and priorities. CSS plan fully developed. He also • Track/monitor the battle. coordinates with the FSB commander to ensure that the FSB • Anticipate requirements and use can support the brigade during the initiative to meet them. operation. The brigade XO— • Pre-position supplies and equipment. -Directs the staff from the brigade • Push support forward. main CP. • Seek windows of logistics -Ensures continuous CSS in the opportunity. brigade. • Use established routines during -Keeps the brigade commander lulls in battle to rearm, refuel, and informed on logistical issues. repair. -Is assisted by— • Detect, fix, and destroy rear area threats within capabilities. *S4.

The key CSS personnel organic to the *S1. brigade staff are the brigade XO, SI, and *HHC commander.

8-4 FM 71-3

♦Brigade surgeon. -Monitoring unit strength, esti- mating losses, and reporting ♦FSB support operations element. casualties. • The brigade S4 is responsible -Determining individual replace- for— ment requirements. -Evaluating and enhancing morale. -Operating the brigade rear CP (if tasked). -Coordinating— -Coordinating support with the FSB commander. ♦Health services plan. -Coordinating with the battalion ♦Religious services. task force S4s. ♦Legal services. -Coordinating support for attach- ♦Postal services. ments. ♦Finance services. -Keeping the brigade commander informed of logistics situation. ♦Public affairs services. -Maintaining supply status. ♦Law, order, and discipline. -Planning and coordinating— ♦Morale support activities.

-Planning and supervising use of ♦Maintenance. civilian labor. ♦Transportation. -Planning and supervising A/L ♦Administrative moves. support and guarding and evacuating EPWs. ♦Services. -Operating the brigade rear CP. ♦Supplies. • The FSB commander is responsible -Determining requirements for for— civilian labor. -Providing security and terrain -Recommending MSR. management in the BSA. -Preparing logistical plans, orders, -Providing support to corps units overlays and estimates. operating in the brigade area (requires prior coordination between the parent corps units, • The brigade SI is responsible the brigade HQ, and the for— DISCOM).

-Advising the brigade commander -Preparing personnel estimates. on FSB support capabilities as -Coordinating PSS. required.

8-5 FM 71-3

BRIGADE SUPPORT AREA • Firm ground for support of all vehicular traffic.

The BSA is the logistical, personnel, • Situated to avoid major obstacles and administrative hub of the maneuver or canalizing terrain. brigade. It normally consists of the brigade rear CP, the FSB, maneuver • Located near a water source. battalions and DS artillery and engineer battalion field trains, MP platoon assets, • Suitable helicopter landing site. DS ADA battery, signal battalion elements, and service support augmentées • Access to a good road network to from the DISCOM and COSCOM. Figure support extensive vehicle traffic. 8-1 depicts a possible layout of the BSA. • Situated in built-up areas to harden CPs, improve work areas, and The general location of the BSA is lessen visual and infrared determined by the brigade S3 in signature. consonance with the brigade S4 and the FSB commander. The BSA should be • Located to enhance defensive located so as not to interfere with the capabilities. tactical movement of the brigade units, or units that must pass through the brigade area, while still maintaining the support The lifelines that connect the BSA and of the battle. A good BSA location the supported units within the brigade are includes the following characteristics: the brigade supply routes. Supply routes are selected by the S4 in coordination with the S3 based upon the tactical plan. MPs regulate traffic using the supply • Convenient to units served. route, and engineer units, if available, • Situated away from the main ensure it is in a high state of repair to enemy avenue of approach. speed delivery of needed supplies and personnel to forward units. • Beyond the range of threat cannon artillery (20 to 25 km for offense, 25 to 30 km for defense). MAIN SUPPLY ROUTE • Sufficient space to allow dispersion of facilities. The brigade MSR is selected based primarily on the tactical situation and the • Concealment from hostile ground brigade commander’s scheme of and air observation. maneuver.

8-6 FM 71-3

FS8 CP/BDE BEAR CP 160 x 160 m BN FLO TRAINS MSB 400x400m □D FLD CD FLD CD FLD

ŒJ FLD RECON I FWO MED CO 220 x 220 m U1

FWO SPT

FWO MAINT CO LU FWD 8ALV 1000 x 1000 m CD ENG BN AREA >—c REAR 1600 X 1500m FWD8PT Crn) x M COLL

FWD 8UP CO MR lOOOx 1000 m FWD (includes ATP) EPW © ATP 250 x 300 m

( ) IUP) 2ATP

#•7 fcllomfw

NOTE: Sins are approximationa only to give general planning guidanca.

Actual lizee will depend on available terrain.

Figure 8-1. Brigade support area.

The MSR must be well marked. Is the route capable of handling the It must also be included on the CSS heaviest vehicle in the brigade? overlay and have a sufficient number of traffic control points. Some route What is the estimated number of considerations are— refugees using the route?

8-7 FM 71-3

• Is it capable of sustained bi- • Are there partisan activity or directional traffic? refugee movement conflicts?

• What are its vulnerabilities, such • Where does brigade responsibility as bridges that can be destroyed? end and battalion task force begin?

• Are there any choke/congestion • Who is responsible to defend the points, such as towns and brigade portion? confusing intersections? • Are there vulnerable places that must be continuously guarded? • How many cross-over routes are possible from the MSR to the • Will the enemy use persistent alternate supply route? chemical agents on the route? • What is the primary threat to the The alternate supply route must meet MSR? the same considerations as the MSR. It may be identified as the "dirty" route for • What is the enemy air threat? contaminated casualties.

SECTION IV. FORWARD SUPPORT BATTALION

GENERAL both in garrison and in tactical operations. The FSB's primary role The FSB commander is the brigade is to provide DS to the brigade commander's chief logistician in the and division units operating in the brigade area. Each FSB provides DS level brigade area. This role entails a logistical support for a specific maneuver dual requirement. First, the FSB must brigade, units that are DS to the brigade, plan to support future operations. It and selected corps units on an area must anticipate requirements and in- support basis. It is organized with a corporate planning guidance. In addi- headquarters and headquarters detach- tion, the FSB must support current ment (HHD), a supply company, a operations and monitor the imple- maintenance company with designated mentation of the support plan. The system support teams (which can be task FSB is also responsible for base organized into maintenance support teams cluster defense of the BSA and [MST]), and a medical company (see operates under the brigade command Figure 8-2). FM 63-20 has a detailed for this mission. See FM 63-20, layout of the FSB and its capabilities. Chapter 5, for a detailed discussion of BSA security and terrain The FSB provides dedicated support management operations. to the same brigade on a habitual basis

8-8 FM 71-3

FSB

HHD SUPPLY MAINT MEDICAL COMPANY COMPANY COMPANY

Figure 8-2. Forward support battalion organizational structure.

The two most important concepts in provide DS level logistics to all division supporting the armored brigade are and (with required augmentation) forward support and area support. supporting corps units operating in the brigade area. Forward Support MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS As the name of the FSB implies, the focus of the CSS structure is on providing The overriding goal in FSB support as far forward as practical. maintenance operations is to provide Supplies, weapon systems, and repair forward support to return combat systems assets for easily repairable equipment to the battle as soon as possible. should be provided by the corps, main Repairing systems forward reduces support battalion, and FSB to the field transportation requirements and time. It trains or beyond whenever practical. maximizes the availability of equipment Also, the FSB ensures damaged to the user. The FSB maintenance equipment not easily repairable is company has been given the capability to evacuated from as far forward as perform the mission operations well practical. Health service support (HSS) forward (see Figure 8-3 for maintenance should also be focused on forward company organization). Whenever support. possible, equipment is repaired on site. However, this is not always possible and Area Support practical. The tactical situation, extent of damage, or availability of people, parts, Because of the ever changing or tools may make recovery or evacuation combination of division units operating in more desirable. the brigade area, it would be almost impossible and certainly inefficient to Tailored tank or infantry MSTs dedicate CSS units to support strictly normally operate forward to support structured units. The DISCOM subordinate armored or mechanized commander has to cross-level assets when infantry battalion task forces. They substantial changes are made in the size provide on-site expertise on combat and types of units supported by an FSB. vehicles and are usually located at the However, sufficient flexibility has been battalion UMCP. The MST performs DS put in the FSB to accommodate minor maintenance for automotive, turret, fire variations in supported units and still control, small arms, power generation,

8-9 FM 71-3 and communication equipment. Rein- the supported brigade’s area on an area forcing support for these teams is support basis. As shown in Figure 8-4, provided by base shop maintenance the company consists of a company sections of the maintenance company. headquarters, treatment platoon, and an ambulance platoon. DS maintenance for CSS units The company performs the following supporting the brigade is provided by the functions: maintenance company from the BSA. Augmentation from the main support • Treatment of patients with minor battalion enables the FSB to service all diseases and illnesses, triage of brigade "divisional slice" assets to mass casualties, initial include missile and EW assets. resuscitation and stabilization, advanced trauma management, and MEDICAL OPERATIONS preparation for further evacuation of patients incapable of returning The forward support medical company to duty. plays a vital role in the manning task by • Ground evacuation of patients providing division- and unit-level health from battalion aid stations and service support to all units operating in designated collection points.

MAINT co

AUTMV/ INF(MECH) CO HQ ARMT OSE PIT TANK S6T PIT SST

MAINT CON - PLT HQ ■ PLT HQ sec

SVC/REC AUTMV QSE REP SEC REP SEC SEC

ELECT ARMT REP CL IX EQUIP SEC SPTSEC REP SEC

ARTY 8 ST MSL MAINT LEGEND: REP SEC * VARIABLE NUMBER

Figure 8-3. Forward support battalion maintenance company.

8-10 FM 71-3

MED CO

CO HQ TRMT PLT AMB PLT

P LT HQ TRMT SEC AREA PLT HQ AMB AMB SQD SPT SEC SQD (WH) (TRKD) T

AREA SPT SQD TRMT SQD

AREA TRMT SQD

PAT-HLDG SQD

Figure 8-4. Forward support medical company.

• Emergency dental care. The treatment element of the medical company operates from mobile medical • Emergency medical resupply to treatment facilities. These mobile medical units in the brigade area. treatment facilities feature built-in equipment. They require minimum time, • Medical laboratory and radiology therefore, to become operational. This services commensurate with divi- allows the treatment element to closely sion level treatment. follow the maneuver brigades and to provide more responsive support. • Outpatient consultation services for patients from unit level The occurrence of mass casualties medical treatment facilities. must be anticipated. Managing these situations will severely tax the entire • Patient holding for up to 40 patients HSS system. Internal brigade treat- able to return to duty within 72 hours. ment/evacuation plans are reviewed by the brigade surgeon who sub- • Coordination with the UMT for mits recommendations for action. In required religious support. such situations, the division, when

8-11 FM 71-3 possible, shifts its treatment and evacua- supply platoon and is organized as shown tion resources to meet the requirements. in Figure 8-5. When required, additional evacuation resources and treatment elements may be The company performs the following requested from the corps medical functions: brigade/group. The key to managing mass casualties is the use of on-site triage and • Receive and issue Classes I, II, emergency medical treatment teams. packaged III, IV (limited), and VII Other important areas include effective supplies as well as unclassified communications and skillful employment maps. It also provides limited of evacuation vehicles (air and ground). storage for these items. Authorized The rapid buildup of evacuation assets at stockage list stocks are stored by the mass casualty location eases the the main support battalion supply problem. Also, the prompt movement of and service company. The patients to all available medical treatment company does not receive, store, facilities helps. This movement dissipates or issue classified maps, aircraft, the medical workload by distributing airdrop equipment, communi- casualties equitably among the medical cations security, or construction treatment facilities. This is done based on materiel. the patient's condition and on the medical treatment facility's capabilities. • Receive, store, and issue bulk petroleum using organic fuel SUPPLY OPERATIONS transporters. • Transload Class V supplies from The supply company supports the corps transportation assets to unit arming system through its Class V vehicles. operations, the fueling system through Class III operations, and the manning task • Operate a salvage point for all through provision of. rations, clothing, supplies except COSCOM and individual equipment. Specifically, supplies, toxic agents, aircraft, the company provides receipt, storage, ammunition, explosives, and and issue of Classes I, II, III, IV, and VII medical items. items. It also conducts Class V transloading operations at its ATP and • Provide unit maintenance for operates a salvage point. The company organic vehicles and equipment as consists of a company headquarters and a well as those of the HHD.

8-12 FM 71-3

SUP CO

CO HQ SUP PLT

PLT HQ SUP SEC CL V SEC PETRL SEC

Figure 8-5. Supply company.

The FSB must be 100 percent mobile to heavily engaged units. Such units may with organic equipment. To enhance be unable to ask for supplies because of mobility, the quantity and variety of gaps in the chain of command or supplies the supply company can have on intensive jamming on a fluid battlefield. hand at any given time are limited. As a Supplies may also be pushed to support a result, the supply company has several deep operation. supply principles available to cut down on the response time between initial Throughput Distribution request and subsequent issue to the brigade. Throughput distribution bypasses one or more echelons in the supply system to Push System minimize handling and speed delivery forward. Supplies are often throughput to A push system is the initial go-to-war the FSB from the corps and, in the case of supply system in an undeveloped theater. Class IV barrier materials and some Class Preplanned packages of selected supplies VII major end items, may be throughput are sent forward to replenish expended directly to the user in the forward area. supplies in anticipation of requirements When most of the load is for a specific of supported units. Initial quantities are unit, the transporter may deliver directly based on strength data and historical to the requesting unit. demand. When the theater stabilizes, the supply system becomes a push system to Supply Point and Unit Distribution the BSA for critical supplies based on personnel strengths and forecasted In an effort to tailor supply requirements. Other supplies are provided distribution, the supply company uses a through a pull system based on actual combination of supply point distribution demand. Supplies may still be pushed at and unit distribution to support the the battalion and brigade level, especially brigade. When supply point distribution during high intensity combat operations is used, unit representatives come to the

8-13 FM 71-3 supply points in the BSA to pick up their sets up to provide a smooth traffic flow supplies. Maneuver battalion task forces through the supply areas. with field trains in the BSA have their own organic unit supply, fuel, and ammunition trucks assembled in the field Due to limited transportation assets in trains along with repaired equipment, the FSB, supply point distribution is personnel replacements, and other assets. normal for most classes of supply. Unit There they form a LOGPAC that goes distribution by corps assets is used to forward to provide support to forward deliver barrier materials to emplacement deployed elements. (LOGPAC operations sites. Other classes of supply may be are detailed in FM 71-2.) The supply company tries to cut down on the delivered using unit distribution when the distances the forward units must travel by tactical situation permits and positioning supplies as far forward as transportation assets are available. possible. To provide a quick turnaround Emergency resupply using unit for forward units, the supply company distribution may be accomplished via also staggers the unit pickup times and motor or air transport.

SECTION V. PERSONNEL SERVICE SUPPORT

GENERAL services and health services. Once the planning for the critical functions is PSS is an important component of complete, attention is then focused on the CSS. At the brigade level, it encompasses other functions of PSS. The sustainment many CSS functions that sustain the functions are not fixed and will vary combat potential of the force and the depending upon the situation. morale and welfare of the soldier. PERSONNEL SERVICES PSS activities are divided into two general categories—combat critical and sustainment. Other functions such as The brigade SI section serves as a chaplain activities are considered conduit between subordinate units and the essential and have a significant impact on Gl/AG. Because of distances and the welfare of the force. The former communications capabilities, all reports category focuses on the function that are submitted through the brigade SI for must be performed regardless of the forwarding to the appropriate agency. intensity of combat. The latter category Initial personnel data is submitted deals with the functions that are by subordinate and attached units temporarily controlled or suspended as of the brigade through the Tactical combat intensity increases. Army Combat Service Support Computer System (TACCS) device using Initial PSS planning should focus on battle rosters and by-name reports. the combat critical tasks of personal The brigade SI also provides

8-14 FM 71-3 information to subordinate units on status reporting. On the battlefield, high-volume of evacuated/hospitalized personnel individual and mass casualties should be and adjusts personnel requirements expected. Casualty information must be accordingly. collected, recorded, and reported with 100 percent accuracy as rapidly as the Strength Accounting situation permits. The casualty reporting system is a by-name personnel accounting Strength accounting is the process by system that begins at unit level with the which combat readiness (personnel status) person who knows that a casualty has is measured. It keeps track of the troops occurred. Support casualty feeder and on hand, identifies those that have been witness statements are forwarded as soon lost, and identifies those that are needed. as possible. Reports are forwarded through the brigade SI section to the Personnel Losses division AG personnel accounting section. Patient evacuation and mortality A personnel loss is any reduction in reports and treatment and disposition logs the assigned strength of a unit. Losses are are provided daily to the brigade SI from categorized as follows: the FSB medical company. Information is then provided to subordinate units to update personnel daily summary reports. • Battle Losses. Battle losses are losses incurred in action to include killed in action (KIA), wounded in Replacement Operations action (WIA) or injured in action and evacuated from the unit, missing in action (MIA), and The brigade SI is the brigade captured by the enemy. commander's principal staff officer for individual personnel replacement • Nonbattle Losses. Nonbattle losses operations. FM 101-10-1/2 provides are those not directly attributed to estimates for conventional battle and being in action, to include administrative losses. The rate of loss nonbattle dead, accident/injury, varies with a number of factors such as missing, sickness/disease, and the theater or operations, climate, terrain, stress. training and conditioning of troops, type of activity, and the enemy. The division Administrative Losses AG provides replacement projections to the brigade SI. The SI can then adjust Administrative losses are those due to projected assignments based upon transfers from the unit, absent without impending tactical operations, brigade leave (AWOL), desertion, confinement, commander's priorities, and return to duty rotation, and discharges. status of stragglers and treated casualties.

Casualty Reporting Health Services

The primary personnel accounting Brigade health services were discussed function on the battlefield is casualty earlier in this chapter.

8-15 FM 71-3

Sustainment Personnel Services developed to ensure the responsive flow of correspondence occurs. The following personnel services are centralized and performed by division AG or corps personnel service company Chaplain Activities personnel. Whenever possible, procedures are kept informal to ensure The brigade chaplain is the staff responsiveness and to reduce the number officer responsible for implementation of of people required to process a given the unit religious program. Included in action. All documents must flow quickly this program are worship opportunities, to and through given units. Normally, the administration of sacraments, rites and following services are initiated through ordinances, pastoral care and counseling, subordinate battalion/separate company development and management of the Personnel and Administrative Centers UMT, advice to the commander and staff (PAC) and appropriate forms forwarded on matters of morals, morale as affected through the brigade SI to Gl/AG actions: by religion, and ministry in support of combat shock casualty treatment. All elements enhance the total well being of • Personnel records maintenance. the soldier and increase the cohesion of • Personnel action. the brigade. • Awards. • Promotions/reductions. Postal Services • Classifications/reclassification actions. Mail is the soldier's link to family and friends. Inefficient distribution of mail ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES can quickly undermine morale. In the early stages of conflict at the brigade Technical assistance to the brigade level, postal services to individuals are staff elements and commander, and usually restricted to personal mail that support to assigned and attached units for conforms to the free mailing privilege the following subfunctions of adminis- (first class letter mail, postal/post cards, trative services are normally provided by and sound recordings). The brigade SI the corps personnel service company: establishes a daily mail schedule. Outgoing mail is consolidated at the • Classified document control. brigade SI section prior to being • Reports and forms control. forwarded to the divisional postal • Publications supply. element. Incoming mail is dropped at the • Printing and reproduction. brigade SI section for pickup by battalion • Files and records management. personnel.

Internal correspondence management Finance Services and distribution are administrative services that must be closely monitored The mission of finance support and managed by the brigade SI section. organizations during conflict is to provide SOPs for distribution procedures and high-priority support to the soldier on an specific responsibilities must be area basis. This means the same finance

8-16 FM 71-3

unit supports all soldiers within a brigade SI coordinates for support of the geographical locale, regardless of unit mobile pay team. affiliation. During deployments, mobile pay teams from corps-level finance Legal Services organizations provide support to the brigade. Individual soldiers are given the Legal service support is provided to choice of receiving a specified amount of the commander and soldier by personnel combat pay or cashing of personal check of the division staff judge advocate (SJA) or other negotiable instruments for the section. This support is on an as-required same specified amount or less. The basis coordinated by the brigade SI.

SECTION VI. BRIGADE COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT PLANNING

CSS planning is conducted to satisfy these projected requirements. accommodate the requirements of the Supporting CSS plans should be as supported force during all phases of an detailed as planning time permits. operation. The brigade plan or concept of the operation is not finalized until CSS The S4, SI, and FSB commander and planners have determined the suppor- his staff are the principal CSS planners in tability of the proposed COAs. Once the the brigade. The brigade XO, operating supported force concept of operation is from the main CP, monitors CSS status determined, detailed CSS planning can and ensures appropriate brigade staff CSS continue. Battlefield support must be interface. CSS commanders and planners planned to satisfy requirements during the must thoroughly know and understand the following operational phases: tactical mission and plans and the brigade commander's intent. They must know— • Prior to commitment (before). • What each of the supported elements is doing. • Commitment to battle (during). • When, how, and where they will • Future mission (after). do it.

• What the priority of support is. All areas of CSS (man, arm, fuel, fix, move, and sustain) must be considered • What density of personnel/equip- during each operational phase to ensure ment is being supported. an integrated responsive plan of support (see Figure 8-6). Support requirements After analyzing the concept of the must be projected and plans developed to operation, CSS commanders and planners

8-17 FM 71-3

BEFORE DURING AFTER MAN AND PRI: TF 4-5 Medical for CF, C-C-C Reorg, SUSTAIN THE TF 3-32, TF 2-32, 2d Bde PRI: TF 4-5, 106590, TF 2-32, SOLDIER PRI: 2-32 TF 3-32, Medical for RTD Soldiers o

ARM PRI: 25 mm, 120 mm, PRI: TF 4-5 ATOM, 155 mm, DPICM

FUEL PRI: TF 4-5, TF 3-32, Fuel for CF PRI: TF 4-5 TF 2-32

FIX PRI: Tanks, Bradleys, PRI: Tanks, Howitzers, Bradleys, Howitzers, Recovery Fuel and Cargo Vehicles Vehicles, 5,000 Gal. X Tankers BDAR TF 4-5 Reorg MOVE PRI: Maneuver Units, PRI: North Bound, PRI: Class III, V, Veh Evac CL IV, CL V CL III and CL V Vehs South Bound, Medical and Maintenance Vehs

Figure 8-6. Concept of support matrix. must accurately predict support require- assessed. The FSB commander must ments. They must determine— determine—

• What CSS resources are available • What type of support is required. (organic, lateral, and higher • What quantities of support are headquarters). required. • Where the CSS resources are. • What are the operational commander's priorities by type and unit. • When CSS resources are made available to the maneuver units. Using the support requirement of the tactical plan as a base, the support • How the FSB makes these capabilities of the CSS structure are resources available.

8-18 FM 71-3

Based on this information, the S4 and • Support from BSA /displace as an the FSB commander must then develop entity. support plans that apply resources against • BSA echelonment/displacement by requirement in a manner that results in bounds. the most responsive support possible. Communication links must be established MOVEMENT OF FORWARD and maintained. The formation of the SUPPORT BATTALION WITHIN brigade rear CP, consisting of the THE BRIGADE FORMATION collocated FSB CP and assets from the divisional brigade SI and S4 sections, This technique is used when answers the requirement for continuous likelihood of enemy contact is minimal. coordination and communications Logistical demands on the FSB are required for responsive, effective CSS. expected to be light; subordinate Orders that clearly describe tasks to be battalions will use basic loads and accomplished must be issued. Continuous organic recovery assets to satisfy initial follow-up must ensure tasks are being demand. Sufficient time is anticipated to accomplished as planned. allow set-up of FSB supplies and services and resupply of battalion assets prior to CSS functions should be performed as mission execution. FSB elements are far forward as the tactical situation and dispersed within brigade march columns available resources permit. They should and are provided security by other be performed at or close to the site where elements of the brigade. This technique the weapon system is located in order to provides timely movement and march lessen evacuation requirements. Support security of the FSB, but precludes any must be continuous, using immediately meaningful support until movement available assets. This may involve ceases. bringing ammunition, fuels, parts, end items, maintenance personnel, and occasionally replacement crews or ATTACHMENT OF CRITICAL individuals to the forward elements such COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT as battalion field trains, combat trains, ASSETS TO MANEUVER and down-equipment sites. Planning and execution emphasize the concept of If operational distances are signif- providing support to forces in the forward icant and secure ground lines of areas. communication cannot be assured, as in cross-FLOT operations, selected CSS The FSB commander, in consonance assets may be attached to combat with both the DISCOM and maneuver elements of the brigade. Normally only brigade commanders, may support the critical classes of supply (Class III and tactical plan using any of four operational Class V) and medical support techniques of the FSB. augmentation would accompany the maneuver elements. The reserve battalion • Movement of FSB within the of the brigade may receive attachment of brigade formation. these elements and provide for their • Attachment of critical CSS assets security during operations, or tailored to maneuver. packages may be attached directly to

8-19 FM 71-3 specific maneuver battalions as priorities minimizing the distance subordinate dictate. While this method increases the battalions of the brigade must travel to maneuver unit's CSS capabilities, it also obtain required support. It also enhances increases their vulnerability to enemy the survivability of logistical assets by activity and reduces the maneuver force's positioning them in different areas. mobility because of the absence of Because of echelonment, command and tracked CSS assets. control of FSB operations is degraded. This problem is exacerbated by the lack of radios within the FSB TOE. Greater SUPPORT FROM BRIGADE reliance on unit SOPs is required to SUPPORT AREA/DISPLACE AS AN ensure smooth displacement. ENTITY CSS planners must know priorities for When brigade operations are support. This is necessary to ensure that conducted in clearly defined phases with units with the highest tactical priority identifiable windows between operations receive required support first. The such as in river crossings, the FSB may brigade commander and his staff provide support the brigade from a fully deployed mission directives, determine BSA and then displace as an entity to the requirements, and establish priorities subsequent BSA location. This allows the within the brigade for CSS. FSB to maximize support from a mature logistical base that facilitates resupply SUPPORTING THE OFFENSE and maintenance activities. This concept also enhances command and control of The availability of adequate supplies the FSB and simplifies actions for the and transportation to sustain the operation supported force since a single point of becomes more critical as the operation contact is established for each progresses. Supply lines and service/facility of the BSA. It does, communications are strained, and require- however, create a support "blackout" of ments for repair and replacement of up to 12 hours during BSA displacement weapon systems mount. NBC contami- and establishment of the new location. nation on the battlefield compounds these problems and degrades the performance BRIGADE SUPPORT AREA of CSS units. CSS commanders and ECHELONMENT/DISPLACEMENT BY planners must anticipate these problems BOUNDS and ensure these considerations are included in their planning. During When operations require continuous offensive planning, CSS considerations logistical support operating within a include— secure rear area, this operational technique is recommended. Critical CSS • Forward, coordinated positioning assets are divided and displace by of essential CSS such as successive bounds. Normally, the FSB ammunition, POL, and commander moves with the forward maintenance, preferably at night. element to ensure rapid set-up of the displacing echelon. This technique • Increased consumption of POL provides more responsive support by (terrain is a major factor).

8-20 FM 71-3

• Using preplanned and precon- SUPPORTING THE DEFENSE figured push packages of essential items including water. Class III The aims of CSS activities in the and Class V supplies, and defense are to support defensive battles decontamination and MOPP gear. and to facilitate rapid transition to the offense. Defensive operations take many • Using throughput distribution forms. They range from absolutely static whenever feasible. to disrupt and destroy the attacking force. CSS commanders must be involved early • Attaching CSS elements to in defensive planning. This allows them supported maneuver units; to plan support for the defense and to however, CSS elements should be anticipate changing priorities. To support as mobile as the units they support. the defense, the FSB should— • Echeloning support forward and initiating operations at the new site before ceasing operations at the • Consider stockpiling limited old site. amounts of ammunition and POL in centrally located BPs that are • Using captured enemy supplies and likely to be occupied in the equipment, particularly vehicles forward MBA. and POL. • Have the FSB TOC monitor and • Planning communication support track the ongoing battle to to cover the extended distances anticipate CSS requirements. between combat and CSS units. • Institute a command and control plan • Preparing for increased casualties for CSS vehicles in the brigade area. and requirements. • Send forward push packages of • Uploading as much materiel as critically needed supplies on a possible. scheduled basis. These regular shipments of ammunition, POL, • Ensuring CSS preparations for the and repair parts to the combat attack do not give away tactical trains help eliminate the need to plans. call for supplies repeatedly, and they reduce the chance that a lapse • Coordinating real estate in communications will interrupt management to preclude attempted supply. Resupply continues until occupation by more than one unit. the receiving unit issues instructions to the contrary. • Planning for transition to the defense. • Resupply during periods of limited visibility to reduce the chances of • Planning for EPW operations. enemy interference.

8-21 FM 71-3

• Dispatch MSTs far forward to SUPPORT FOR RETROGRADE reduce the need to evacuate OPERATIONS equipment. CSS for retrograde operations is • Consolidate different types of particularly complex because many MSTs to maximize the use of activities may be taking place available personnel and vehicles. concurrently. Maneuver units at any given time may be defending, delaying, • Consider providing the security attacking, or withdrawing. All must be force with pre-positioned stocks supported under the overall retrograde of critical supplies in subsequent operation. Since the retrograde is a defensive positions throughout the movement away from the enemy, CSS security force area. Air delivery of personnel must— supplies should be routine to take advantage of the helicopter's lift • Echelon in depth and rearward. capabilities and flexibility. • Limit the flow of supplies forward • Push forward prepackaged to only the most essential Class IV and Class V in support of positions. All other supplies and countermobility effort. equipment are evacuated early. • Plan for increased demand of • Evacuate supplies and equipment decontaminants and MOPP gear. to planned fallback points along the withdrawal routes. • Plan for high expenditures of • Keep supply and evacuation routes ammunition. open and decontaminated. • Plan for decreased vehicle • Withdraw forward medical treat- maintenance. ment units as early as possible. • Plan for increased demand for • Evacuate patients early, develop obstacle and fortification alternate means of evacuation, and materials. These materials should augment field ambulance capabil- be pushed forward early based on ities whenever possible. preliminary estimates. • Recover, evacuate, or destroy equipment rather than risk being • Establish AXPs for efficient use of overrun while repairing at forward ambulances. sites. Recovery personnel can use • Plan for ADA coverage consistent tanks and other fighting vehicles in with air defense priorities, with which weapon systems are emphasis on passive air defense inoperable to tow other vehicles measures. with inoperable motor systems. • Coordinate with CA personnel • Move all nonessential CSS units concerning refugee control and and facilities to the rear as early as CSS requirements. possible.

8-22 FM 71-3

• Supply and evacuate at night and • Maintain full knowledge of the during other periods of limited current tactical situation, visibility. • Implement the division commander’s policy on controlled exchange.

SECTION VII. RECONSTITUTION

GENERAL • Condition and effectiveness of subordinate commanders and Reconstitution is extraordinary action leaders. that commanders plan and implement to restore units to a desired level of combat • Previous, current, and anticipated readiness. It transcends normal daily situations and missions. force sustainment actions. However, it uses existing systems and units to do so. No resources exist solely to perform He considers all these factors in his reconstitution. Reconstitution is a total continuing assessment. They form the process. Its major elements are basis of his reconstitution decisions and reorganization, assessment, and regeneration. recommendations. Chapter 4 of FM 100-9 discusses assessment factors in more detail. THE ROLE OF THE COMMANDER

Reconstitution decisions belong to the REORGANIZATION commander. The commander controlling assets to conduct a regeneration decides Reorganization is an action to shift whether to use scarce resources to internal resources within a degraded unit regenerate a unit or not. The commander to increase its combat effectiveness. of the attrited unit decides to reorganize Commanders reorganize before consid- when required. The unit commander ering regeneration. Reorganization may begins the reconstitution process. He be immediate or deliberate. alone is in the best position, with staff support, to assess unit effectiveness. His unique perspective validates an Immediate Reorganization assessment; he does not base his conclusions solely on facts, figures, and Immediate reorganization is the quick status reports from subordinate units and and usually temporary restoring of staff. His assessment relies also and degraded units to minimum levels of probably more importantly on other effectiveness. Normally the commander factors. These include— implements it in the combat position or as close to that position as possible to meet • Knowledge of his soldiers. near term needs.

8-23 FM 71-3

Deliberate Reorganization external elements assess the unit after it disengages. These elements do a more Deliberate reorganization is conducted thorough evaluation to determine when more time and resources are regeneration needs. They also consider available. It usually occurs farther to the the resources available. rear than immediate reorganization. Procedures are similar to those of REGENERATION immediate reorganization. However, some replacement resources may be Regeneration involves the rebuilding available. Also, equipment repair is more of a unit through the large-scale intensive, and more extensive cross- replacement of personnel, equipment, and leveling is possible. supplies; reestablishment of command and control; and mission essential ASSESSMENT training for the rebuilt unit. Because of Assessment measures the unit's the intensive nature of regeneration, it capability to perform a mission. It occurs occurs at a regeneration site after the in two phases. The unit commander unit disengages. It also requires help conducts the first phase, an assessment from higher echelons. of his unit before, during, and after operations. If he determines it is no A regeneration task force is a task longer mission capable even after organization formed by the commander reorganization, he notifies his directing a regeneration. The regeneration commander. Higher headquarters either task force conducts the external changes the mission of the unit to match assessment and executes the regeneration its degraded capability, or removes it order (see FM 100-9 for more from combat. The second phase is to have information).

SECTION VIII. WEAPON SYSTEMS REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

GENERAL than those presently used to get weapon systems to the combat commander. What The intensity of future battles will is different is the method used in produce heavy losses of both men and performing these tasks. WSRO require materiel. It is imperative that weapon that the weapon system manager know the systems, complete with crews, be commander's priorities for issue of replaced quickly and efficiently. Weapon weapon systems assets, unit weapon systems replacement operations (WSRO) system shortages, and the personnel and set forth a method of supplying the equipment assets available to fill unit commander with fully operational shortages. The key to WSRO is the joint replacement weapon systems. The tasks personnel and logistical managing, associated with WSRO are no different reporting, and monitoring of complete

8-24 FM 71-3 weapon systems at battalion, brigade, management at all levels is charged with division, and corps. Three terms often quick-fix responsibility, matching used in describing WSRO are— serviceable vehicles, and surviving crews. At the brigade level, the XO normally • Ready-for-Issue Weapon. This coordinates the activities of the SI and S4 weapon system has been removed to maximize the number of ready-to-fight from its previous condition of weapon systems. preservation for shipment or storage and made mechanically Brigade Management operable. All ancillary equipment (such as fire control, machine Battalion weapon systems status guns, radio mounts, and radios) are reports are submitted to the brigade rear installed. The vehicle has been CP. The SI and S4 personnel ensure that fully fueled and basic issue items information submitted on recurring SOP are on board in boxes. There is no personnel and logistical reports compare ammunition on board. with the information submitted on the • Ready-to-Fight Weapon. This is a “weapons effect signature simulator crewed, ready-for-issue weapon report.” The “weapons effect signature with basic issue items and simulator” report provides the weapon ammunition stored on board. The system suppliers the necessary weapon system has been information to assemble the appropriate boresighted and verified. weapon system. The report is then • Linkup. This is the process of submitted to the division materiel joining a ready-for-issue weapon management center (DMMC) with an with a trained crew. information copy provided the support operations section of the FSB. The WEAPON SYSTEM MANAGEMENT brigade XO is kept informed of WSRO managed systems and ensures reports are WSRO must be managed at each level processed and coordinated as required. of command to ensure maximum The brigade SI and S4 must closely utilization of the major weapon systems. coordinate the needs identified on Management procedures for all critical battalion reports with up-to-date weapon systems and their crews must be equipment repairs from the FSB, and developed on an individual basis personnel returned to duty from the applicable to the division concerned. To brigade treatment station. At the brigade manage weapon systems, a common level, weapon systems normally managed weapon system manager is required. A by WSRO are— weapon system manager is designated at each level of command and is charged • Tanks with a four-man crew. with weapon system management. The • Mortars with a four-man crew. weapon system manager’s mission is to maximize the number of operational • BFVs with a three-man crew. weapon systems required in the battalions in accordance with the commander's or • Ml 13-series infantry carrier with a GB's/SS's fill priorities. Weapon system two-man crew.

8-25 FM 71-3

• ITV with a three-man crew. includes the installation of fire control equipment, radios, machine guns and the • CFV with a five-man crew. filling of fuel tanks to capacity. Pre- positioned war reserve stock at corps Other replacements to man or support must be at a low level of preservation so these systems are managed by individual that it is made ready for issue within a replacement procedures. CSS WSRO are matter of a few hours. coordinated through the division major subordinate command or separate The primary division linkup point for battalion that is equipped with the weapon systems is at the main support individual system. battalion supply and service company in the DSA. As the tank arrives in a ready- Division Management for-issue state, the crew need only perform those tasks to make the tank ready to fight. Based on the number of The division provides replacement weapon systems allocated to the division, weapon systems to battalions based on the division commander determines the brigade priorities. Efficient allocation of allocation to each brigade. The weapon limited resources is accomplished by system management officer contacts each managing weapon systems rather than brigade to determine the internal brigade focusing on personnel and equipment allocation and assigns crews and weapon components separately. The DMMC and systems to specific battalions. Con- division AG coordinates the replacement currently, the brigade SI notifies of both vehicles and crews to maximize subordinate battalions of projected gains weapon systems on the battlefield. and estimated time of arrival at the BSA for linkup. Issuing Weapon Systems The COSCOM or DISCOM must have For purpose of this discussion, tanks facilities prepared to boresight and are used as the example WSRO in the calibrate weapons. Complete weapon following paragraphs. systems are transported from the DSA to the BSA by HET. If HETs are not Transportation of equipment from available, the brigade dispatches an escort theater Army or corps to division is vehicle to the DSA to guide crews to the normally by rail or heavy equipment BSA. Upon arrival in the BSA, battalion transport (HET). Personnel arrive in guides meet assigned crews and weapon theater and are transported forward to the systems where they are led to the division by rail, air, or truck. Incoming battalion field trains for fuel top-off and tanks from CONUS are processed by the PAC in-processing. Weapons effect heavy materiel supply company (or its signature simulator reports are updated equivalent) in the theater Army area and the process begins again. command or COSCOM. This processing

8-26 FM 71-3

APPENDIX A OPERATIONS OTHER THAN WAR

The Army's primary focus is to fight and win the nation's wars. However, Army forces and soldiers are versatile. They operate around the world in an environment that may not involve combat.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Overview A-1 Section II. Planning A-3 Section III. Peacekeeping \. A-4 Section IV. Peace Enforcement A-5 Section V. Training A-6 Section VI. Conduct of Operations A-9 Section VII. Armor/Light Considerations A-13

SECTION I. OVERVIEW

Army forces have participated in further the interests of the US at home OOTW in support of national interests and abroad in a variety of ways other than throughout its history. They have war. protected citizens at the edge of the frontiers of an expanding America; built In OOTW the brigade is called upon to roads, bridges, and canals, and assisted perform numerous activities. Essentially, nations abroad. On occasion the Army will the brigade accomplishes these activities be called upon to provide domestic through execution of tactical missions and support such as firefighting, support to tasks. Brigade missions and tasks are anti-drug operations, and disaster relief. shown in Figure A-1. This appendix focuses on peacekeeping and peace OOTW are not new. Their pace, enforcement. frequency, and variety, however, have quickened in the last three decades. For a detailed discussion on OOTW, Today, the Army is often required, in its see FMs 100-5, 100-19, 100-20, and role as a strategic force, to protect and 100-23.

A-1 FM 71-3

ACTIVITY MISSION/TASK

PEACEKEEPING Patrol; Establish Checkpoints, Roadblocks, Buffer Zone; Supervise Cease-fire, EPW Exchange

PEACE ENFORCEMENT Attack, Defend, Screen, Guard, Delay, Cordon and Search

SHOW OF FORCE Perform Tactical Movement, Attack, Defend, Demonstration

NONCOMBATANT EVACUATION Attack to Seize Terrain that Secures Evacuees or OPERATIONS Departure Area; Guard; Convoy Security; Delay/Defend

SECURITY ASSISTANCE Attack, Defend, Delay, Guard, Screen

HUMANITARIAN ASSISTANCE- (NO THREAT) Provide Command and Control, CSS and Disaster Relief and Manpower for Relief Effort (CONFLICT) Screen, Patrol, Quick Reaction Force, Convoy Escort

ARMS CONTROL Assist and Monitor Inspection of Arms, Conduct Surveillance

SUPPORT TO DOMESTIC CIVIL Provide Command and Control, CSS and Disaster AUTHORITIES Relief, Patrol, Cordon and Search

NATION ASSISTANCE Provide Security

SUPPORT TO COUNTERDRUG Interdict, Cordon and Search, Surveillance OPERATIONS

COMBATING TERRORISM Conduct Antiterrorism Activities through Force Protection

SUPPORT FOR INSURGENCIES Patrol, CSS, Show of Force, Medical Support AND COUNTER INSURGENCIES

ATTACK AND RAIDS Conduct R&S, Attack, Raid, Withdraw

Figure A-l. Examples of armored brigade operations other than war missions/tasks profile.

A-2 FM 71-3

SECTION II. PLANNING

The difficulties of joining a multi- decisions that may affect the national force in unfamiliar territory with reputation of the force, the success restrictions on one’s freedom of action, of the mission, and the safety of may be overcome if commanders study peacekeeping troops. These the history and lessons of previous decisions have to be made without peacekeeping operations. This allows delay. However, emergencies may commanders to anticipate the kinds of arise when no officer is available. problems they may have to face in a Units should make sure that NCOs peacekeeping operation. The UN issues are well trained, briefed, and “force mandates” that provide the prepared for contingencies they are principles which govern the conduct of likely to face during peacekeeping operations. operations. • The policy on ROE and the action The principles may be supplemented by to take with regard to infringe- the following guidelines that apply to the ments and violations of agreements conduct of a peacekeeping force in all must be enforced uniformly by all situations: units. In operations where units • All ranks must understand what the have used noticeably different peacekeeping force is trying to do. standards in executing the rules, there has been trouble with the • All ranks must be fully briefed on belligerents and constant friction the political and military situation, between the national contingents. the customs and religions of the people, and kept up-to-date as the • Peacekeepers cannot be too situation changes. concerned about the risk of • They must make every effort to get appearing to “lose face.” On many to know the people, to understand occasions, explosive situations their problems with the aim of have been defused because the peacekeeper was willing to be achieving a reputation for sympathy accommodating, allowing a party and impartiality. to preserve its dignity. This is • Peacekeeping soldiers must especially important when dealing maintain a high profile; with societies in which self-esteem consequently, their lives are and group honor are of great continually at risk. Commanders importance. It is sometimes must balance the need to maintain a difficult to explain the need for confident presence with provisions tact, without compromising for the safety of their troops. principles, to soldiers who are • No detachment likely to face a trained to be forceful and difficult situation should be without aggressive. A unit naturally wishes a knowledgeable individual in to take credit for a successful charge because of the crucial performance, but undue concern

A-3 FM 71-3

for unit pride may prejudice the strategic objectives or pass the main peacekeeper’s need to make effort to other instruments of national concessions. Each situation calls power to achieve the final strategic end for its own blend of calm, mature state. ” The commander’s intent defines judgment, tact, a willingness to military conditions that must be achieved compromise, firmness, and moral to support the end state. In the last courage. comment of the commander’s intent, the commander defines victory or success for Commanders must find the “center of the operation. gravity” for the operation. What is the single most important event or condition that will stabilize the situation and reverse Planning for OOTW requires a the destruction and strife? The problem thorough understanding of the end state with OOTW is that the commander may and the military conditions required to not be able to identify the “center of achieve it. gravity” and its connection to the end r state until the operation is well underway. The importance of end state in defining the requisite conditions for a mission’s Commanders and planning staffs must success cannot be overstated. A determine the center of gravity for all continuing challenge for commanders is to OOTW. The center of gravity for peace focus their vision on and beyond the enforcement operations may be: objective to clearly articulate the controlling and maintaining MSRs, conditions of success. This is difficult denying key terrain from the belligerents, enough in warfighting and is even tougher and keeping track of key belligerent for OOTW forces. If legitimacy is lost, the result may be war or failure of both the diplomatic and military mission. A large contribution to success during peace operations is for the force not to The conditions required to achieve end become a part of the problem. state during OOTW are difficult to define and require continued refinement during the operation. In OOTW, the end state is commonly expressed in political terms and is beyond FM 100-5 defines end state as “A the competence of military forces acting military end state includes the required alone. Military forces in OOTW facilitate conditions that, when achieved, attain the the political process.

SECTION III. PEACEKEEPING

Peacekeeping operations are military diplomatic resolution. The US may operations conducted with the consent of participate in peacekeeping operations the belligerent parties to maintain a under the auspices of an international negotiated truce and to facilitate a organization such as the UN, in

A-4 FM 71-3 cooperation with other countries, or consideration in peacekeeping is the unilaterally. Peacekeeping operations may political objective of the operation. take many forms of supervision and Military forces operate within clearly and monitoring: carefully prescribed limits established by agreement between the belligerents and • Withdrawals and disengagements. the UN or other parties. • Cease fires. • EPW exchanges. Peacekeeping forces assume that use • Arms control. of force will not be required to carry out • Demilitarization and demobiliza- their tasks, except in self-defense. They tion. are structured, trained, and equipped under this assumption. Extreme restraint Peacekeeping operations support in both appearance and application of diplomatic efforts to achieve, restore, or force is crucial to maintain a posture of maintain the peace in areas of potential or impartiality and neutrality toward the actual conflict. The greatest military former belligerents.

SECTION IV. PEACE ENFORCEMENT

Peace enforcement entails the use of Because the enforcement force may armed forces to separate combatants and resort to the use of arms against the to create a cease-fire that does not exist. belligerents, it must deploy with sufficient Force may also be used to create other military strength to achieve those peaceful ends such as safe havens for objectives established by political victims of the hostilities. The UN authorities. Unlike peacekeeping, enforce- Secretary General also uses the term to ment will require a full range of military refer to forceful actions to keep a cease- capabilities that has the potential to meet fire from being violated or to reinstate a or exceed that of the belligerents. failed cease-fire.

By the American definition, in a situation for which peace enforcement Although the preferred objective is operations are required, armed conflict commitment of superior military force to and not peace describe the situation. Also, dissuade belligerents from further conflict, one or more of the belligerents usually forces deployed for these operations prefer it that way. This means that, unlike should assume for planning purposes that peacekeepers, peace enforcers are not use of force will be necessary to restore welcomed by one of the belligerents. peace. But unlike war, enforcement Rather, the peace enforcers are active operations are more constrained by fighters who must force a cease-fire that political factors designed to bring warring is opposed by one or both combatants; in parties to the negotiating table. the process, they lose their neutrality. Settlement, not victory, is the goal.

A-5 FM 71-3

SECTION V. TRAINING

Units selected for peacekeeping duty - Demilitarize cities or geogra- normally require 4-6 weeks of specialized phical areas. training. The unit has to tailor its entire - Monitor boundaries. training methodology toward the tasks - Political mandate(s). required to be effective peacekeepers. - ROE Training for peacekeeping includes the following considerations: • Continue training on warfighting skills. The unit can be better • Peacekeeping requires specific prepared to transition from peace- training. keeping to peace enforcement • The entire chain of command must operations. develop a different mind set for warfighting. Peace enforcement forces will have to • A peacekeeping force may quickly be equipped and trained differently than lose its fighting edge and may not for peacekeeping operations. They will be suited for transition to peace have to be considerably larger in numbers enforcement operations. and more capable than conventional • The unit training program should peacekeepers. To be competent peace include— enforcers, units will require special skills for their soldiers (negotiating and foreign - Nature of peacekeeping. language competence), and the provision - Regional orientation/culture of for adequate firepower and defensive belligerents. capability to protect themselves from Negotiating skills. hostile actions by those they seek to help. - Mine/booby trap/unexploded ordnance training. A force entering into a peace - Checkpoint operations. enforcement operation must have Investigation and reporting. sufficient combat power to fight and win a Information collection. war, should that become necessary. It - Patrolling. must execute that combat power with - Media interrelationships. great restraint in support of diplomatic Staff training. efforts, in which the military may actively Perform relief in place participate. The demonstration of combat (FM 7-20). power should be sufficient to preclude the Establish lodgment. necessity for its employment, except in Establish a buffer zone. certain circumstances. Supervise a truce or cease-fire. Contribute to maintenance of It is the Army’s warfighting ability that law and order. makes it capable of peace enforcement. Assist in rebuilding of The best training is based on the unit infrastructure. METL, with the modifications and

A-6 FM 71-3 additions that are necessary for special Some ROE considerations are— circumstances. • Soldiers must know and understand The following are some considerations the ROE. for peace enforcement training: • The degree of force used must only be sufficient to achieve that task at • Expect peace enforcement missions hand and prevent, as far as to be similar to actual combat possible, loss of human life and/or missions but with tighter ROEs. serious injury. Consider the political aspects of • Leaders must ensure that soldiers the conflict. are not limited by the ROE in their • Concentrate unit training on ability to defend themselves. platoon- and company-level tasks. • Develop and issue to all soldiers a Peace enforcement operations single card that clearly outlines the usually involve more small unit ROE for reference, keeping in mind operations than battalion- or that the card in itself is not the brigade-level operations. answer. Soldiers must know the • Some recommended battalion-level ROE. missions to train for are— • The ROE must be realistic, simple, and easy to understand. - Fight a meeting engagement. - Conduct movement to • Do not chamber a round unless you contact/search and attack. are prepared to fire IAW the ROE - Perform air assault (ARTEP or ordered to do so. 7-20-MTP) (FM 90-4). • Do not tape over magazines to - Enforce UN sanctions. keep soldiers from chambering - Protect human rights of rounds. minorities. • Peacekeeping forces have no - Protect humanitarian relief mandate to prevent violations of efforts. peace agreements by the active use Separate warring factions. of force. (Observe and report - Disarm belligerents. only.) To maintain the peace, units - Restore territorial integrity. may need to be positioned between - Restore law and order. belligerents. Commanders must - Open secure routes. realize that soldiers are being - Cordon and search. placed at risk. Force protection must be emphasized. • Peace enforcement missions allow During peacekeeping operations, the the active use of force. These ROE two principal ROE tenets are the use of resemble the ROE for hostilities force for self-defense only, and total (wartime). impartiality when applying force. The ROE for peacekeeping operations will be • The formulation of ROE should more restrictive than the ROE for peace consider the cultural differences of enforcement operations. multinational forces.

A-7 FM 71-3

• Train soldiers in the ROE, using - ROE. tactical vignettes or simulated - Safety (integrated training). events. - Stress management. • Train soldiers to avoid unnecessary collateral damage to property. - Identification of mines and handling procedures. • Training of US Army soldiers participating in these missions - First aid and evacuation includes instruction to prepare and procedures. sustain the force in the - Terrorism prevention skills. performance of its mission. Pre- - Reaction to hostage situations. deployment training covers subjects that pertain to mission - Physical security (prevention accomplishment. It is given at of pilferage and theft). home station and includes training - Peacekeeping skills (negotiation in both individual and collective and mediation). tasks tailored to meet the needs of the units identified to support the - Land navigation/range estima- mission. During this period of tion. training, it is essential that all - Handling of detainees. personnel who will participate in the mission are available for the - RTO procedures. training. • Collective tasks. Suggested training requirements include the following individual, - OP/CP operations (observe and collective, and specialty tasks: report). - UN reporting formats. • Individual tasks. - Slingload operations. - Marksmanship. - Mounted and dismounted - UN organization, mission, and patrolling. background. - TOC operations. - Customs and basic language phrases. - Patrolling in urban terrain.

Survival skills (including • Specialty tasks. actions if kidnapped). Observation and reporting - Combat lifesaver. procedures. - Field sanitation specialist. - Vehicle, aircraft, watercraft, weapon, uniform, and insignia T Generator operator. identification. - Vehicle operator. - Field sanitation. - Mail handler.

A-8 FM 71-3

SECTION VI. CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS

Subordinate elements of the brigade and moves in as open a manner as usually conduct the following operations: possible. Major considerations for • Patrols. peacekeeping patrols are— • Checkpoints. • Convoy security. - All patrols must be easily recognizable by all belligerents. - Its members must wear the UN PEACEKEEPING PATROLS force’s distinctive blue headgear and its vehicles must Units will have to conduct patrols be painted white with the UN during peacekeeping operations. force’s insignia prominently Peacekeeping patrols perform a dual displayed. mission of showing the UN flag and - The peacekeeping flag must be monitoring the cease-fire agreements. carried by all dismounted The patrols may move on foot, be patrols and displayed on all mounted in vehicles or in light aircraft or vehicles used during mounted utility helicopters. Peacekeeping patrols patrols. are normally only overt and conducted - Patrols should not deviate from during the day. the planned route without contacting higher headquarters. The following are considerations of - Expect to be challenged by peacekeeping patrols: belligerent forces while on patrol. • Peacekeeping patrols are totally - Rehearse proper responses to different from normal combat challenges. patrols. Ensure that maps carried on • The mere presence of a patrol are unmarked. peacekeeping patrol, or the Memorize positions. Each likelihood that one may appear at patrol should always include a any moment, deters potential member who knows the area violations of peace agreements. well. • The presence of peacekeeping - Log all observations and events troops in a tense situation may while on patrol. Memorize have a reassuring and calming details for sketch maps. Do not effect in troubled areas. mark on maps if there is the • If it is necessary to operate at smalllest chance of being night, the patrol uses lights, carries stopped by one of the an illuminated peacekeeping flag belligerents.

A-9 FM 71-3

- Do not surrender weapons, forces can be manipulated and will maps, logs, or radios without not force their way through the permission of higher checkpoints. headquarters. • The convoy commander should - Upon return from patrol, travel with the main body. The immediately report any convoy commander must be able to significant observations to the move up with the advance guard if debriefing officer. Mark maps required to negotiate with and draw sketches while the belligerents. memory is fresh. These maps and logs provide the basis for • The commander must be firm but the investigation of incidents cautious when dealing with and the lodgment of protest. belligerents. Insist on the right of • The unit intelligence officer must passage. be intimately assimilated into the peacekeeping patrol process. • The commander must ensure he has adequate firepower available should it be necessary to force his PEACE ENFORCEMENT PATROLS way through a checkpoint. Remember, the lead vehicles at the Peace enforcement patrols can be checkpoint location will most likely either overt or covert. All the normal be inside a kill zone. principles of combat patrolling apply to peace enforcement patrols. They can also • Commanders must properly assess serve the same purpose as peacekeeping the situation and stop or withdraw patrols, but the soldiers are not hindered when the checkpoint strength by the administrative restrictions on exceeds his capability to overcome vehicle marking and weapons restrictions. it. Also, the commander must stop or withdraw his unit when Peace enforcement patrols should be persistence would lead to a fight aware of the following factors: that exceeds the capability of the force.

• Use the normal combat patrolling techniques and procedures during CHECKPOINT TACTICS peace enforcement operations.

• Apply aggressive patrolling tactics A high volume of pedestrian and to deter hostile acts by the vehicle traffic can be expected to pass belligerent forces. through a checkpoint. Leaders must take this into consideration when preparing • Do not give food or supplies to checkpoints. The ROE must be clear, but belligerents as payment of tolls. flexible, to accommodate rapid changes in This sets a precedent that the UN any situation that may develop.

A-10 FM 71-3

SEARGH PATTERN RATE TIME (yeh/hr/laiie) (min/vehicle) None 600-800

Check Vehicle Decal ID 400-600 10 seconds Check Driver ID 200-400 20 seconds

Visual Observation of Passenger and Cargo 150-300 25 seconds Area Basic Physical and Visual Search of Passenger and 50-150 1.2 minutes Cargo Area Comprehensive Vehicle 12-24 5 minutes Search

Figure A-2. Vehicle search processing rate.

Considerations for checkpoint tactics and the potential threat. Figure A-2 shows include— the vehicle search processing rate.

• Be imaginative while operating in CONVOY SECURITY OOTW; develop TTP that can be Convoys may be attacked by applied to anticipated situations. belligerents. Convoys are vulnerable to • Ensure checkpoints are designed so long-range fire from manpacked ATGMs that only the minimum number of and light, mobile, direct fire artillery. The soldiers are exposed at any given main threat for convoys is likely to be an time and that they are overwatched ambush. Clearing routes, even by ground by automatic weapons when they reconnaissance, is likely to be of limited are exposed. value, given the use of remotely • Make reinforcement and counter- controlled mines, demolitions, and attack plans and rehearse them. perhaps mines remotely delivered by multiple rocket launchers. In steep terrain • Expect the unexpected at check- with heavily wooded slopes, surprise points. ambushes are possible. The traditional • Develop and rehearse drills to answer of placing troops on the high prepare soldiers for all possible ground will not protect the convoys. situations at checkpoints. Convoys will have to be task-organized to provide their own resources for Soldiers may be required to conduct protection and immediate counterattack. vehicle searches during peacekeeping and Large numbers of dismounted AT peace enforcement operations. The degree weapons and automatic small arms can do of search will be determined by the ROE considerable damage in a short-range

A-11 FM 71-3 ambush. Suppressive fire and infantry • Convoys should be totally self- counterattack by the convoy escort and contained. Convoys must have supporting helicopters are likely to be additional fuel, food, maintenance, countered by the use of pre-positioned recovery, medical, and their own smoke pots and AP mines to enable the indirect fire support assets. ambushers to slip away. • Attack helicopters should be used to overwatch convoy routes and to Consider the following factors when assist the advance guard in forcing conducting convoys: their way through belligerent checkpoints. • All convoys should be escorted by an armored mechanized advance • The convoy commander should be guard force to detect ambushes, in the second or third vehicle in the breach obstacles, detect mines, and main body. to possibly deter attacks by belligerents. • Maintain convoy integrity and dispersion at all times. • Position the advance guard three to five kilometers ahead of the main • Conduct a thorough IPB and route body. reconnaissance to determine the location of belligerent checkpoints. • Consider using remotely piloted vehicles and helicopters to over-fly • Do not bring the main body of the the route in advance of the convoy. convoy into the gauntlet of obstacles at belligerent checkpoints until the belligerents have • The main body should also be led permitted the advance guard of the by armored vehicles and every third convoy to move through the or fourth vehicle should be a checkpoint. This gives the main fighting vehicle. body the flexibility to maneuver if attacked. • Minimize the use of trailers in the convoy. Trailers hinder the mobility • Have communications between all of the convoy and its ability to vehicles and have redundant com- react to ambushes. munications between the advance guard and the main body. • A strong reserve force or rear guard should trail the convoy to • Be aware that the belligerents may respond if the convoy is attacked. track the convoys along their routes and will want to verify the • The rear guard should also be number of vehicles in the convoy at armor heavy to discourage attacks. each checkpoint.

A-12 FM 71-3

SECTION VII. ARMOR/LIGHT CONSIDERATIONS

While infantry forces are best suited Some disadvantages of using armor for peace enforcement operations, armor during peace enforcement operations forces can make significant contributions are— to the operations. Tanks are potent weapon systems when performing • The enemy can focus on, isolate, traditional functions, but they also make and destroy armor forces in a excellent infantry support weapons. Some piecemeal fashion. of their capabilities are— • Tanks have limited bunker and building destruction capability. • AT and antiarmor. • Tanks and other armored vehicles destroy secondary roads and • Intimidation of belligerent forces. MSRs. • Heavy weapons support to infantry • The size of armored vehicles often fighting vehicles (IFV). blocks narrow country roads and can destroy private country roads • Target acquisition, especially at and private property during night using thermal sights. movement (may offset attempts to gain support of local civilians). • Survivable to mines and light AT weapons. Consider the following factors when • Provide security to convoys. using tanks in peace enforcement operations: • Provide support during search and attack operations. • There is no pure “armor/ mechanized” or “light” scenario in • Protect infantry against automatic peace enforcement operations. The weapons fire. best way to achieve success is to balance the array of tactical Some advantages of using tanks during capabilities IAW METT-T. peace enforcement operations are— • The combined arms concept requires teamwork, mutual • Armor/mechanized forces can be understanding, and the recognition rapidly emplaced at decisive points by everyone involved of the critical throughout sector to support roles performed by other arms. threatened UN forces. • There is no place for parochialism • Armor forces have extremely high or ignorance; the success of the visibility and can deter aggression mission and the lives of soldiers by belligerent forces (consider depend on the ability to understand firepower demonstrations as a and synchronize the complexities of show of force). a diverse force.

A-13

FM 71-3

APPENDIX B JOINT AND MULTINATIONAL OPERATIONS

In future operations the brigade may not always fight under conventional Army control. The brigade may operate as part of a Marine Expeditionary Force under joint command. It may also participate in multinational operations with a combined staff.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. The Joint Environment B-1 Section II. Marine/Army Integration B-4 Section III. Multinational Operations B-9

SECTION I. THE JOINT ENVIRONMENT

GENERAL combat forces are assigned to the Fleet Marine Forces of the Atlantic and Pacific Joint operations are the integrated Commands. These Fleet Marine Forces military activities of two or more service are provided to support unified components of the US military. These commands as directed by the national service components include the Army, command authorities. The Marine Corps Navy, Air Force, and Marines. The Army focus is on furnishing readily deployable, must continue to expand its operations tailored combined arms Marine air- within a joint environment due to the ground task forces. A Marine air-ground force projection nature of its doctrine. task force is composed of a command Future Army employment is difficult to element, a ground combat element, an air predict and could result in a multitude of combat element, and a CSS element. A combinations of joint forces being Marine air-ground task force may vary in employed. The armored brigade plays an size from a Marine Expeditionary Force increasingly important role in joint down to a Marine Expeditionary Unit (see operations. Figure B-1). When the armored brigade is employed by the Marine Corps, they will COMMAND RELATIONSHIPS normally operate as part of a joint force. The joint force commander will Armored brigades normally operate as determine the command relationship part of an Army or Marine functional between Army forces and Marine forces component command. Marine Corps based on METT-T.

B-1 FM 71-3

MEF SURVEILLANCE COMMAND RECONNAISSANCE ELEMENT AND INTELLIGENCE GRP

MARINE FORCE AIRCRAFT MARINE SERVICE WING DIVISION SPT GP

FIXED WING INFANTRY MARINE AIR REGIMENT BATTALION GROUP/MARINE AVIATION LOGISTICS SQUADRON MAINT BATTALION ARTILLERY j BOTAR«^. ¡REGIMENT ! : MARINE AIR I GROUP/MARINE SUPPLY AVIATION BATTALION j,I LOGISTICS TANK BATTALION! S SQUADRON . ;. r 11

; ENGINEER g" s ^SUPPORT ASSAULT* K BATTALION " GROUP AMPHIBIAN ' BATTALION! LANDING . §1#:/ AIR lifjlfiGRp: i CONTROL COMBAT ENGR < BATTALION ; > GROUPi - BATTALION II MOTOR * • TRANS '{. f lARMORED ; A BÄTALIOR Ji " RECON I p ■' , ' ■ ■’il BATTALION t MEDICAL BATTALION HEADQUARTERS

DENTAL BATTALION

Figure B-l. Notional Marine Expeditionary Force.

If the brigade is organized under the In some circumstances, it is possible control of a Marine Expeditionary Force, for all the Army forces involved in an it generally operates directly under the operation to organize under a brigade Marine Expeditionary Force commander headquarters. In this case, the brigade as an independent unit. See Section II for may function as the Army forces details on Marine/Army integration. headquarters.

B-2 FM 71-3

If the brigade is organized under Unified and Specified Commands Army forces headquarters, it either operates directly under the Army forces headquarters, or operates under an Army division or The President establishes unified corps headquarters. If the brigade is the commands through the Secretary of Army forces headquarters, it is normally Defense, with the advice and assistance of OPCON to the joint forces command. the Joint Chiefs of Staff, to perform a broad, continuing mission. Unified IAW FMs 100-7 and 100-10, the roles commands are also known as combatant of the Army service component commands. A unified command is commander (ASCC) are— composed of two or more services under a single commander. The unified commander normally exercises combatant • Provide Army force packages to command through service component the CINC and advise on their commanders. employment.

• Provide all Title X support to the Examples of unified commands Army forces in theater. include US European Command and US Pacific Command. Unified commands • If designated by the CINC, the provide the CINC with areas of ASCC may exercise OPCON of the responsibility that include all ássociated war fight. land, sea, and airspace. Other unified commands are given functional The brigade exercises tactical control responsibilities such as transportation or over its subordinate units. This command special operations. An example of a relationship is the detailed and usually functional unified command is the US local direction and control of movement Special Operations Command. and maneuver necessary to accomplish missions and tasks. It allows the A specified command is also commander to apply force and direct the established to perform a broad, tactical use of logistical assets. continuing mission. A specified command differs from a unified command in that the specified command is primarily a The ASCC operates as a component commander under one of the three single service command. The specified following types of joint commands: command may, however, have some elements of other services assigned.

• Unified and specified commands. Subordinate Unified Commands • Subordinate unified commands. The unified commander may establish • Joint task forces. a subordinate unified command to carry FM 71-3 out broad, continuing missions under his • Establishing the link between command. Army forces and the joint command. Joint Task Forces • Planning and executing operations in support of the joint campaign The Secretary of Defense and the plan. commanders of unified, specified, and subordinate unified commands along with • Planning and executing support existing joint task forces may establish a operations to sustain subordinate joint task force. Elements of two or more Army forces. services under a single joint task force • Assuming responsibility for commander comprise the task force. The overseeing internal administration joint task force performs missions of and discipline, training Army specific, limited objectives or missions of doctrine, and TTPs. short duration. It normally dissolves when its purpose is achieved. • Designating specific units to meet joint force requirements. RESPONSIBILITIES AND ROLES OF • Providing logistics functions THE ARMY SERVICE COMPONENT normal to the component. COMMANDER • Ensuring tactical employment of service components. As previously stated, the Army service component commander or his equivalent • Providing service component will be the next higher headquarters for intelligence operations. the armored brigade assigned the role of an Army forces headquarters. The A combatant commander can establish responsibilities and roles of the Army an Army command that reports directly to service component commander include— him instead of the Army service component commander. The Army • Assuming responsibility for properly service component commander would employing subordinate forces and then plan and execute operations to accomplishing operational tasks sustain this command and other Army assigned by the joint task force units. commander.

SECTION II. MARINE/ARMY INTEGRATION

TASK ORGANIZATION component divisional brigade or a separate armored brigade. The brigade The armored brigade provided to the normally operates with a proportional Marine Corps may be an active or reserve share of division assets. The brigade uses

B-4 FM 71-3

these assets to provide armor support to differences in intelligence reporting the Marine Corps mission. The divisional procedures and techniques. Training must brigade deploys with its assigned also address the different intelligence maneuver units plus habitual support requirements of armored forces as slice. This includes two tank battalions, compared to light forces. one mechanized infantry battalion, one Maneuver engineer battalion, one DS FA battalion, an ADA battery, a forward area signal There are no major doctrinal changes platoon, an MP platoon, combat IEW required to permit effective integration of elements, a TACP, and an FSB. The an armored brigade in support of Marine USMC will provide air and NGLO assets Corps operations. However, there are and one SALT per maneuver battalion areas in doctrine that contain when working in support of Marines. inconsistencies or differences in interpretation. The armored brigade executes the same missions and roles as BATTLEFIELD OPERATING prescribed throughout this manual. The SYSTEMS armored brigade's potential as a combat multiplier is the basis for cross attachment with the Marine Division. The Intelligence capabilities of the armored brigade provide a new dimension to the Marine Division by closing the armor The armored brigade has its habitually vulnerability window and providing an associated GSR teams. Successful combat increased level of overall security and operations depend on the ability of the flexibility. combined arms team to find, fix, fight, During maneuver operations, some of and finish enemy forces through a combination of offensive and defensive the following planning considerations should apply: operations. The Marine air-ground task force intelligence functions are coordinated by the surveillance, reconnaissance, and intelligence group • Marine air-ground task force (SRIG). The SRIG has signals vehicles are designed for intelligence (SIGINT), HUMIÑT, and amphibious operations. reconnaissance assets that provide • Marine Corps armor is primarily intelligence to the Marine air-ground task used to support infantry. force. A key to successful joint operations is the ability to gather, • A preferred Marine Corps analyze, evaluate, and disseminate maneuver is the "recon pull" in combat intelligence. Minor differences in which reconnaissance forces find intelligence doctrine exist between the gaps and pull the bulk of attacking Army and the Marine Corps. Leader and forces through those gaps to liaison training must focus on the exploit the situation.

B-5 FM 71-3

• The defense is not part of a Marine only the Army uses the Patriot system. air-ground task force's essential However, the Marines do not have a training and little training is done tracked ADA system, such as the BSFV. for complex defenses. The light armor vehicle air defense (LAVAD) is the Marine armored ADA Fire Support system. The BSFV battery can provide air defense protection to the brigade with The Marine Corps relies on NGF and some modifications. The BSFV battery the aviation combat element for CAS. must have its ADA sensor/scout section The brigade receives representatives and and maintenance contact team from the equipment to effectively integrate NGF main support battalion. The Army and the and air support operations. The armored Marines use the same employment brigade receives two SALTs to control guidelines and principles. Both services the Marine Corps CAS. The SALTs are use the same IFF system and have similar normally assigned to any two of the doctrine terminology, air defense control maneuver battalions in the armored measures, and the same air defense brigade. Army and Marine Corps FS mission: protect the force from the air doctrine, TTP, and employment threat; integrate into the supported unit's principles are very similar. There are, scheme of maneuver. however, some areas that could allow for some inconsistencies or differences in interpretations in the areas of FS control The brigade staff should consider measures, CAS, and establishing liaison. integrating AM communications within the battery to allow interface with the Marine Corps early warning net. Air Defense Currently, Army BSFV batteries use FM communications to interface on the Army The armored brigade has its habitual early warning net. The brigade should BSFV battery. Successful air defense position an LO team at the Marine during joint operations requires strong Division replicating the functions of the airspace control procedures and an Army division LO (assistant division air integrated system of mutual and defense officer [ADADO], division A2C2 complementary defenses. Strong liaison cell). teams, excellent communications, and standardized procedures as a minimum Mobility and Survivability are essential when conducting joint operations. The armored brigade should include its normal slice of a combat engineer The primary differences between battalion and chemical and Marine and Army air defense are weapon decontamination assets. Both Army and systems and communications. Both the Marine Corps maneuver units are Marines and the Army use the Stinger, supported by engineer forces to enhance Avenger, and Hawk weapon systems, but their mobility and survivability. Much of

B-6 FM 71-3 the terminology and procedures are function of Army executive agency similar. However, the major difference support to all ground forces. The CSG(-) between the two services is the employ- provides the Materiel Management Center ment philosophies for engineer forces. (MMC) POL, transportation, main- Army forces go to great lengths to tenance, ordnance, supply and medical enhance their defensive situations through support to the brigade above the support engineer operations. Marine Corps units provided by the brigade FSB. The Marine do not normally pay a great deal of Corps Expeditionary Force provides attention to defensive enhancements. As a limited Class I, Class III, common Class result, liaison between engineer head- V, Class VIII, and Class IX to the Army quarters should be established if armor unit. The brigade staff needs to integrated defensive operations are conduct detailed planning and execution required. Construction, countering, and of the logistics operation. reporting barriers, obstacles, and minefields can be facilitated by using joint reporting formats and procedures during CSS doctrine requires expansion to joint operations. There are no conflicts encompass joint operations. The Army between Army and Marine Corps and Marine Corps must resolve CSS engineer doctrine and TTP. The Marine terminology differences . to effectively Corps uses Army engineer field manuals. work together. The Army provides The Marine Corps also uses the same dedicated and habitual support to its NBC warning and reporting system as the combat units as well as area support. The Army. Marine Corps task organizes its CSS elements at each level depending on the mission. The Marines have a force service Combat Service Support support group that has eight battalions assigned. These battalions are task The Army sustains the armored organized, based on the mission, into CSS brigade. Normally, an armored brigade detachments that provide the required integrates with the Army support logistical support to the combat units. structure by receiving support from the The Marines normally conduct CSS DISCOM and corps assets. However, operations within 50 miles of the beach or these units may not be in theater and the ship support. Deeper inland operations Marine Expeditionary Force is incapable may mean potential CSS problems for the of supporting the brigade. In this case, a Marines. logistics structure is provided to augment the FSB as well as to provide operations normally conducted by division and corps assets at the port. Because the Marines cannot sustain the armored brigade, the US Army must Corps support group (CSG)(-) under be prepared to provide all necessary the control of the Army forces headquarters logistical support (see Figures B-2 and arrives in theater to provide support as a B-3).

B-7 FM 71-3

PORT CORPS SPT GP(>) FSB AUGMENTATION TRANS GROUP - 2226 HHD, ÄMMO ACTG - 17 : ¡ ORDSECTIOÑ - 25: HQ AMMO CO - 13 POL PLATOON - 40 : ORD PLATOON - 87 MLRS MAINT TM - 6 ;l ORD PLATOON - 68 COMMEL PLATOON -10

TAC PETROLEUM ELEMENT - 150 A VIM - 12 ; NONDIV MAINT CO - 250 : HET ELEMENT - 8; DIV PERS MGT CNTR -15 MED TRUCK ELEMENT - 20 PERSONNEL DET- 23 MCCELEMENT-3 POSTAL PLT - 10 FWÔ SURGICAL TM - 20 : JAG - 1 AIR AMB SECTION - 26

FINANCE DET - 19 MED OPS CELL - 10 ; MED TRUCK-80 MORTUARY AFFAIRS TM - 8 MMC ELEMENT - 3 AVIM - 7 FWD SPT PLT - 18 WATER PLATOON -15 195 TOTAL BATH TEAM - 15 LAUNDRY TEAM-19 '! SPLIT OPS - 25

828 TOTAL

Figure B-2. Recommended logistical support for divisional brigade with approximate personnel strengths.

PORT CORPS SPT GP (-) SPT BN AUGMENTATION TRANS GROUP *2228 HMD. AMMO ACTG - 17 ORD SECTION - 25 HQ AMMO CO - IS! POL PLATOON - 40 ORD PLATOON* 87 MLRS MAINT TM - 9 ORD PLATOON-68 COMMEL PLATOON-ID TAG PETROLEUM ELEMENT - 150 AVIM - 12 NONDIV MAtNT CO - 250 ; MCC ELEMENT -3 DIV PERS MGT CENTER » 15 MEDICAL OPS CELL - 6 PERSONNEL DET-23 AIR AMB SECTION - 26 POSTALPLT-10 AVUM SPT PACKAGE - 7 FINANCE DET-19 MORTUARY AFFAIRS TM - 8 MED TRUCK-80 MMC ELEMENT - 3 146 TOTAL ■ WATER PLATOON - 15 BATH TEAM -15 LAUNDRY TEAM * 19 SPLIT OPS - 25

809 TOTAL

Figure B-3. Recommended logistical support for separate brigade with approximate personnel strengths.

B-8 FM 71-3

Command and Control the Army armor force headquarters will be established to enhance the The brigade works best as a unified understanding of the roles, missions, and entity. Changing its task organization commander’s intent at both the sending could reduce its effectiveness. However, and receiving unit. All liaison teams must when the armored brigade is in reserve, exchange procedures, guidelines, and the ground combat element commander SOPs when providing critical information can request artillery or engineer assets such as missions, tactics, organizational through the Marine Expeditionary Force structure, doctrine, and weapons commander to support division capabilities. operations.

Tactical telephone connectivity into Joint Publication 1 reads, "Experience the Marine Corps system is provided by shows liaison is a particularly important the Marine Corps. The Marine Corps part of command, control, and establishes the multichannel link to the communications in a joint force." Liaison Army armor unit and provides encryption team members need appropriate rank and devices to link single channel radio (FM) experience and must have adequate from the Marine headquarters to the mobility and communications equipment. Army armor force headquarters. All liaison teams should bring supplies and life support equipment to assist in To facilitate planning and execution operations. Liaison teams should arrive at with the command and control process as the designated locations with three days well as the logistics process, the Army worth of supplies. The receiving unit is will send LOs (based on TOE) to higher then responsible for providing logistical Marine Corps headquarters and adjacent support to the liaison team. When liaison headquarters. IAW Joint Publication 3-0, support is complete, the liaison team liaison from the Marine headquarters to returns with three days worth of supplies.

SECTION III. MULTINATIONAL OPERATIONS

GENERAL each contributing nation to have forces Combined operations involve the that the allied commanders can assign to military forces of two or more nations specific geographic areas. This is acting together in common purpose. If similar to a commander in a coalition the relationship is long standing and operation. Three types of combined formalized by mutual political, command organizations are— diplomatic, and military agreements, it • By nationalities. is referred to as an alliance. If the relationship is short term, ad hoc, and • By function. less formal, it is referred to as a coalition. This type of structure calls for • By nationalities and function.

B-9 FM 71-3

Organization by Nationalities combined forces. The brigade needs to This type of structure calls for each provide intelligence LOs and dedicated contributing nation to have forces that communications networks with allied or the allied or coalition commander can coalition forces. Since the brigade is not assign to specific geographic areas. This currently organized with these structure requires a combined staff only additional assets, the Army service at supreme coalition or allied component commander or next higher headquarters may need to augment the headquarters. However, the armored brigade may need to perform various brigade staff. liaison functions with combined forces. Maneuver Organization by Function Tactical cooperation requires a great This type of structure organizes deal of precision, since it deals with forces by function regardless of immediate combat actions. Adjacent and nationality. It requires a combined staff supporting units must coordinate at the lowest level of command where differences in tactical methods and two nationalities participate. If the operating procedures; differences in armored brigade is acting as the Army using other service capabilities such as forces headquarters, it is possible that CAS, varying organizations, and their the armored brigade requires a capabilities; and differences in combined staff within this structure. A equipment. Vehicle recognition is combined staff at brigade level could critical. In addition, tactical plans at the also occur during some types of OOTW brigade level should address people and that large armored forces (above equipment, fire control measures, air brigade) are not employed. support arrangements, communications, signals, liaison operations, and Organization by Nationalities and movement control. The commander's Function intent and the concept of the operation This is a combination of the above should also receive special attention to two structures. Units are organized by avoid confusion that might occur nationalities as well as by function. See because of differences in doctrine and FM 101-5 and FM 100-8 for further terminology. explanations of combined staffs. Fire Support PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS The focus of FS at the tactical level is the effective synchronization of the Intelligence full range of fires provided by all During tactical operations, the friendly forces. This involves the brigade commander and staff must integration of FA, CAS, NGF, and arrange for rapid dissemination of electronic countermeasures. The brigade intelligence information. This presents a must fully integrate into a rigid challenge when operating with adherence to a common set of FS

B-10 FM 71-3 control measures established at higher stockage levels, logistics mobility, levels. The brigade commander must interoperability, and infrastructure. give early and continuous emphasis to Often, US forces supply allied and this process. coalition forces with materiel and receive CSS in exchange. The armored Mobility and Survivability brigade needs to effectively operate with various host-nation support (HETs are a The armored brigade must focus on good example) and coordinate differences in engineer equipment, movement plans, road usage, and port differences in types of mines and activities. employment techniques of obstacles, and the exchange of all friendly information concerning obstacle Command and Control employment with special emphasis on The focus of successful combined the reporting systems. operations centers on achieving unity of effort. All the considerations of combined Air Defense operations must be involved, to include—

As with maneuver, aircraft • Differences in military doctrine, recognition is of extreme importance. training, and equipment. The brigade needs to consider synchronization of aircraft control • Differences in culture and language. measures such as ACAs, differences in the warning and reporting systems, • Teamwork. and the integration of all friendly forces into an early warning • Trust. communications net.

Combat Service Support Effective coordination, liaison, and communications must be established with The armored brigade should consider combined units on the brigade's flanks, the differences in logistics doctrine, front, and rear.

FM 71-3

APPENDIX C ARMORED OPERATIONS WITH LIGHT INFANTRY AND SPECIAL OPERATIONS FORCES

CONTENTS Page Section I. Introduction C-1 Section II. Armored Brigade and Light Infantry Battalion Operations C-2 Section III. Light and Armored Operations C-11 Section IV. Special Operations Forces C-18

SECTION I. INTRODUCTION

Across the spectrum of operations, and offsets their respective weaknesses. there is an overlap in which both armored The integration of armored and light and light forces can operate. The use of a forces can take advantage of the enemy mixed force in this overlap takes force’s structure to attack its weaknesses advantage of the strengths of both forces and seize the initiative (see Figure C-1).

Effectiveness BEST BEST by type of combat power ^^^^Armored/light employment window used Armored Units

Light METT-T Infantry

LEAST LEAST

Type of terrain Desert Plains Open Close Woods Dense Mountains Forest and Jungle

Figure C-1. Strengths and weaknesses of armored and light forces.

C-1 FM 71-3

The Army recognizes three general PSYOP, CA, and Army special types of combat forces—armored, light, operations aviation. and SOF. • Armored forces are armor and Armored and light operations occur mechanized/motorized infantry units. when light forces are attached to an • Light infantry forces have no armored force. Light and armored organic carriers, including airborne operations occur when an armored force and air assault infantry. is OPCON to a light infantry force in • SOF support conventional military close terrain occupied or controlled by operations at all levels of war and the light infantry force. influence deep, close, and rear operations. SOF are used optimally This appendix outlines planning, in deep operations at the strategic preparing, and executing operations with and operational level. SOF include the mix of armored and light infantry Army Special Forces, Rangers, forces at the brigade level and above.

SECTION II. ARMORED BRIGADE AND LIGHT INFANTRY BATTALION OPERATIONS

The potential to use both forces commander has more flexibility in together to capitalize on each others’ synchronizing his operation. Light strengths, offset their weaknesses, and infantry can infiltrate to attack key attack the perceived weaknesses of any command and control nodes, for example, regional threat in war and conflict is while mechanized infantry creates a unlimited. The interjection of light forces penetration for an armored task force to in an armored theater allows a flexible exploit. The mechanized infantry can then response to increasing tensions and a follow and support the armored task rapid response in the face of a sudden all- force, while light infantry air assaults or out attack. parachutes to continue to seize key terrain or to cut off enemy forces. Armored and light infantry forces are not routinely mixed but can be effective given the proper situation. The decision The challenge of armored, light, and to cross-attach light infantry is based on SOF operations is to understand the corps-level war planning or on the capabilities and limitations of each type initiation of a subordinate commander’s of armored and light force structure. request for light infantry augmentation. (For a detailed explanation of the In all cases, the decision to use an different types and tables of organization armored and light force together is driven and equipment of infantry units, see by the factors of METT-T. SH 7-176.) This appendix uses the Infantry Division (Light) Battalion TOE One advantage of mixing armored and 07O15L00O as an example to highlight light infantry forces is that the maneuver discussion.

C-2 FM 71-3

The brigade echelon of command is Summary of Equipment the most likely armored echelon to have a light unit attached. The primary weapon of the light infantry battalion is the M16. There are CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LIGHT 65 M203 grenade launchers, 18 M60 INFANTRY BATTALION machine guns, and 18 Dragons in the battalion. There are four TOWs, four 81- The light infantry battalion is an mm mortars, and six 60-mm mortars. The battalion has 27 HMMWVs and 15 austere combat unit whose primary strengths are its abilities to operate under motorcycles. There are no 2-1/2 ton or larger trucks in the battalion. There are conditions of limited visibility and in close combat. When attached, the light 42 AN/PRC-77 radios, which are the infantry battalion may come with a 105- primary means of communication within mm howitzer battery from the infantry the battalion. There are no redundant radios. brigade’s direct support FA battalion. Employment considerations for the 105- Augmentation mm battery are discussed in the FS operating system portion of this section. It is important to understand exactly what resources a light battalion actually has, Organization regardless of TOE. In most cases, a light battalion requires augmentation to fight in an The light infantry battalion is environment of war. Table C-l shows an organized as depicted in Figure C-2. example augmentation of a light battalion.

JJL O WO EM 34 2 524 LT

I HHC RIFLE CO O WO EM O WO EM 19 2 149 5 0 125

SCT MTR AT PLT PLT PLT

Figure C-2. Light infantry battalion.

C-3 FM 71-3

Table C-l. Example of light battalion augmentation. Possible Augmentation Provided By

One GSR section Armored brigade GSR slice, or light division Ml battalion

One Stinger platoon (BSFV) Armored brigade CS slice

One initial fire support automation system (IFSAS) w/FSO

Three forward entry devices (FED)

One light engineer platoon Light division engineer battalion

One light truck company (-) Corps

One unit level maintenance team Light brigade

One maintenance team (DS) Light division

One mess team Light brigade

One smoke/decon platoon LO Corps, armored brigade/light battalion

One REMS team Light division Ml battalion

LOs should be exchanged at the time infantry battalion operations must of task organization. LOs must know take into account the armored their units’ capabilities and strengths and enemy’s superiority in mobility and should be exchanged for both maneuver firepower. The light infantry battalion and logistics cells. must offset its vulnerabilities with dispersion, cover and conceal- Missions ment, and use of close and hindering terrain to slow the enemy. Table The missions given to a light infantry C-2 shows possible light infantry battalion in armored brigade and light tasks.

C-4 FM 71-3

Table C-2. Example of possible light infantry tasks.

Armored Brigade Mission Light Battalion Task

Movement to Contact Clear and secure restricted areas; follow and support Hasty and Deliberate Attack Use air assault to fix enemy reconnaissance, infiltration air assault to seize objectives, breach obstacles; create a penetration Exploitation Secure LOC; use air assault to seize terrain or attack enemy forces Pursuit Clear bypassed forces; use air assault to block enemy escape Follow and Support Secure key terrain and LOC; provide rear security Cover Provide reconnaissance, deception, stay-behind operations

Defend in Sector Block dismounted avenues; counterreconnaissance; occupy strongpoint; ambush; provide rear area security; conduct military operations on urbanized terrain Breakout from Encirclement Create penetration Linkup Serve as follow-up echelon Demonstration Conduct display operations Retrograde Operations Rear security, route clearance, occupy positions in depth

Operational Planning Intelligence Considerations When employing armored or light If information determined by the IPB infantry forces together, both forces’ process is imprecise, light infantry BOS must be integrated. casualty rates are heavier due to the

C-5 FM 71-3 light battalion’s relative lack of mobility enemy armored attack. Light units left in and differences in weapons ranges contact with an enemy armored force in between the light force and opposing other than close terrain may be overrun or armored units. Enemy locations must be decimated by artillery if not reinforced pinpointed to eight-digit grid coordinates. with armored forces rapidly. Avenues of approach and mobility corridors must be evaluated for both The brigade S3 must ensure required armored and light forces. Armored enemy flank coordination between the light weaknesses must be well defined by the infantry battalion and adjacent armored armored brigade S2 and provided to the units is conducted when planning light infantry unit in a timely manner. defensive or offensive operations. Flank coordination must emphasize— The light infantry battalion is another source for conducting reconnaissance • Deconflicting the effects of projec- patrols, establishing LPs/OPs, and tiles from direct-fire weapons on forming stay-behind teams. The brigade light infantry operating in the area. S2 and brigade S3 must consider and • Identifying minimum safe trigger incorporate the light infantry battalion lines for use. into the brigade’s R&S plan. • Shifting of indirect fires.

Given appropriate terrain, light Recognition signals must be clearly infantry battalions can perform a screen understood by both forces when mission and effectively defeat enemy conducting or completing operations reconnaissance (counterreconnaissance). where both forces link up or merge.

ACAs and SEADs must be planned Maneuver early any time the light infantry battalion uses aviation for movement or attack Light infantry is used in close or support. These measures must be planned restrictive terrain to deny the enemy in and out of the objective/target area. avenues of approach. Enemy mobility is reduced, and the advantage of long-range weapons is nullified. Fire Support

To help protect the light infantry Since light forces are extremely force, plan to move light infantry during vulnerable to indirect fire, the armored conditions of limited visibility, such as in brigade works through its supporting darkness, severe weather, or fog. headquarters to ensure designated counterbattery support is available. The Linkup operations of light infantry brigade FSO should recommend critical with armored forces must be planned and friendly zones to the brigade S3 or light executed in a timely manner. If the light battalion commander. Critical friendly infantry battalion is to attack in advance zones may be established in locations that of the armored brigade, the armored the enemy may consider the employment brigade must relieve the pressure from an of indirect fires such as at friendly breach

C-6 FM 71-3 sites, attack positions, support by fire The FS products for the entire brigade positions, or choke points. must be the same. Having special target lists and overlays for the light task force The lack of digital message devices does not fully synchronize them into the (DMD) and variable format message brigade’s plan. There should be one entry devices forces the light battalion to brigade target list, one brigade FS send its calls for fire over a voice net. If execution matrix (with the light task the armored brigade cannot operate with force included in the left margin) and one both voice and digital traffic on the fire overall scheme of fires. The same holds control nets, it must supply the light true if the 105-mm battery is added to the infantry battalion with DMDs. brigade’s DS FA battalion. There should be no separate products provided to them. The light infantry battalion’s mortars They must be given brigade targets to must be integrated into the brigade’s execute and be part of the brigade fire indirect fire plan. The improved 81-mm plan. They should be included in the mortar has nearly the same range and brigade’s DS FA battalion FA support lethality as an armored battalion’s 4.2- plan. This ensures they are synchronized, inch mortar. and also resupplied.

If the light infantry battalion brings a 105-mm FA battery with it, the brigade FSCOORD should recommend to the Air Defense brigade commander what mission it should be given. A good procedure is to Light infantry’s primary means of air attach the battery to the brigade’s DS FA defense are passive—do not fire first, battalion for command and control and move at night, and camouflage troop logistics, and to ensure it is fully concentrations. synchronized into the brigade’s plan. Do not have just the 105-mm FA battalion The positioning of the light infantry support the light task force since it can battalion and its Stinger teams can secure provide the brigade additional firepower. a friendly air corridor and also deny that With this FA battery comes the additional same air avenue to enemy aviation. The requirements of rearming and refueling it. brigade staff must integrate the light The brigade must ensure the battery infantry’s ADA assets into the brigade receives ammunition and rations like any overall ADA plan. other unit under its command. During planning, particular attention must be Resupply of Stinger missiles may given to ensuring the 105-mm artillery hamper continuous air defense coverage battalion and 60/81-mm mortars are if not planned for method and place of rearmed. The brigade S3 must ensure that delivery. the brigade S4 provides the division with the forecast for 105-mm artillery or Stinger teams must either dig in or 60/81-mm mortar ammunition move immediately upon firing. Missile immediately on attachment. contrails point to firing positions.

C-7 FM 71-3

Mobility and Survivability resupply during the brigade’s planning process. Within the light battalion, engineer priority is usually survivability, Class III resupply is handled by countermobility, and then mobility. centralized top-off in the trains and the exchange of 5-gallon cans. The light The light engineer platoon has no battalion support platoon has two 500- vehicular haul capacity. When pushing gallon collapsible fuel blivets. Class IV to light infantry, plan to drop small loads at specific sites along the obstacle belt. Build obstacles in such a Class V differences lie mainly in way that flanking fires can be used to mortar and 105-mm artillery ammunition. stop the enemy and force him to dismount Light infantry uses both 60-mm and to clear the obstacle. Light infantry has 81-mm mortars. limited AT assets and relies on destroying enemy vehicles within small-arms range. Light infantry relies on four HMMWV ambulances for MEDEVAC. The When breaching, lanes must be battalion should be augmented by Ml 13s thoroughly reconnoitered. Use limited from the FSB’s medical company. visibility to conduct covert breaching Ground and aerial AXPs must be planned efforts. to reduce casualty evacuation turnaround time.

Combat Service Support Class IX for the light battalion focuses on replacement of assemblies at the Light infantry unit CSS system works brigade level. The light battalion has one on the basis of push, not pull. The light assigned mechanic; the light brigade brigade ordinarily uses throughput augments the battalion with a unit-level distribution to its battalions. It is based maintenance team and a DS maintenance on planning and status reporting, rather team. than requisitioning. This is the major reason for the need to exchange logistical Transportation of the light battalion LOs within the light infantry battalion when not in contact and its supplies must and brigade logistical CPs. be managed by the brigade S4 as requested by the light battalion or brigade Class I for the light infantry unit is S3. The light battalion support platoon normally handled at brigade level. The allocates six HMMWVs to haul light battalion should have a mess team ammunition, one for POL, one for other from its parent brigade. The team consists classes of supply, one for the support of eleven enlisted personnel, one 5-ton platoon leader, and three for command truck, and one M149A1 water trailer. The vehicles for the rifle companies. M149A1 trailer is the only dedicated Transportation assets provided to the water-haul asset in the light battalion. light infantry battalion from the armored Water resupply is an item of command brigade should be placed in the BSA interest and must be given priority for under control of the light battalion S4

C-8 FM 71-3

NCOIC. The brigade staff must recognize Planning must offset the limited number the lack of organic transportation assets and range of the light unit’s in the light battalion and that it may communication capability. The light require augmentation to accomplish infantry battalion’s main CP has high- missions assigned. powered FM radios, at least one MSRT, and often single-channel TACSAT radios. Command and Control The low power radios of moving light Armored and light force commanders forces must be considered by the brigade and staffs must understand the staff. FS nets are also a problem due to capabilities and limitations of each dismounted observers operating low others’ units. Since this presents power radios. Brigade CPs must carefully problems to both units, LOs should be position to improve communications, exchanged and main CPs collocated if encourage MSRT use, and maximize possible. Exchange of unit SOPs and SOI brigade retrans as well as any available must occur immediately on attachment. In airborne communications. many tactical operations, the light battalion crosses the LD 24 to 48 hours Digital systems, which mechanized prior to the armored force. This requires forces rely on, may not exist in light the armored brigade staff to develop a units; if present, they may not have the timeline that outlines the OPORD same distribution. FS and intelligence as issuance time, resource drop-off times, well as command and control automation rehearsal time, and other actions of the should be compared in advance; analyze brigade centered around the infantry LD the impact and create manual work- time. The brigade XO must ensure all arounds. staff sections understand and monitor the actions of the light infantry until the OFFENSIVE TECHNIQUES brigade mission is accomplished. Movement to Contact/Hasty Attack Orders at the brigade level must be simple, timely, and easy to execute. In In a movement to contact, it is usually the light infantry battalion, it is difficult best for the light infantry battalion to to make changes in either plans or follow behind the armored brigade. The execution and then verify those changes light unit can be employed along the line up and down the chain of command. The of march as a rear OPSEC element. brigade commander’s scheme of Depending on choke points or restrictive maneuver must ensure the mission terrain along the route of advance, the assigned to the infantry battalion can be light infantry battalion can be airlifted accomplished based on its capability and forward to secure these choke points to the inability of the enemy to counter the allow unimpeded mobility to the brigade. operation. The light unit can also fix and destroy bypassed enemy pockets of resistance or Communications become a major perform any combination of these factor in light and armor operations. missions.

C-9 FM 71-3

Deliberate Attack coincide or complement the armored force’s attack and subsequent linkup. A A light infantry battalion has its light infantry battalion has the potential greatest utility when the brigade is to be a tremendously disruptive and conducting a deliberate attack. The nature powerful combat multiplier. of the deliberate attack lends itself to the tempo of dismounted attacks and allows more planning time for infiltration and Exploitation and Pursuit airmobile operations. Among the options available to the brigade commander are Light infantry’s utility in exploitation the following: and pursuit comes solely from its capability to conduct airmobile operations. The capability of the light • Conduct an infiltration attack on infantry unit to be airlifted forward of the the enemy’s indirect fire assets and lead elements of the armored brigade to command and control centers. conduct blocking operations can mean the • Conduct an airmobile attack to difference between destruction of a create a blocking position. retreating (but organized) enemy force and a complete route of the enemy. • Conduct an airmobile attack to attack the enemy’s uncommitted forces from an unexpected DEFENSIVE TECHNIQUES direction. The armored brigade may give the Light infantry deliberate attacks are light infantry battalion a sector, best accomplished at night or during strongpoint, or BP to defend. METT-T periods of limited visibility. Attacks dependent, it is usually best to give the during periods of limited visibility are infantry a sector. It is usually next best to characterized by— assign it a strongpoint mission with augmentation by an armored unit to conduct counterattacks against enemy • Extensive use of thermal night armor. sights, GPS and GSR to vector light infantry units toward an enemy position. Defense in Sector • The use of indirect fire assets whenever possible to destroy or The objective of a defense in sector is disrupt the enemy. All available to maneuver to place maximum combat FS assets should support the light power on the enemy. Because armored unit’s attack until priority shifts to unit mobility is hampered when operating the armored force upon its in restricted terrain, a light infantry commitment. battalion can be used to protect them from enemy infiltration. A light infantry Commanders must take great care in battalion can also channel enemy forces synchronizing all these operations. The into EAs for indirect fires, aviation, or attack by the light infantry battalion must armored force engagement.

C-10 FM 71-3

In a sector defense, the light infantry strongpoint must be prepared to fight on a battalion should fight no more than one 360-degree front. enemy battalion at a time. The light battalion should have at least 48 hours to If time and resources permit, alternate prepare the sector. The light battalion or supplementary positions for all units TOE does not include entrenching should be dug to standard with equipment beyond the individual connecting trenches between them. With entrenching tool. Experience shows that trenches, even “crawling ones,” the light to achieve the 48-hour standard, the infantry commander has some capability battalion needs two picks and shovels per to reposition forces within the squad and at least two small emplacement strongpoint. All AT assets should excavators or backhoes. It also needs rehearse moving from one side of the chain saws to cut trees for overhead strongpoint to the other to shoot the cover, if trees are available. enemy if he attempts to bypass it.

Defending a Strongpoint Retrograde Operations

To create a strongpoint, the light During retrograde operations, the role infantry battalion requires either a lot of of light infantry is similar to that of a rear time or a lot of engineer assets. The ideal operations tactical combat force. It solution is both. A commander should ensures that enemy, partisan, or airmobile position his strongpoints to give the assaults cannot close choke points along enemy only two choices: bypass the the brigade’s avenue of retrograde. As the strongpoint in the direction the enemy advances, the light unit seeks to commander wishes him to go, or attack ensure that the delaying armored force’s the strongpoint. The unit defending the route of movement remains clear.

SECTION III. LIGHT AND ARMORED OPERATIONS

Employing an armored brigade with a considerations in planning and executing light division can be a combat power tactical operations of a light division with multiplier. Light division and armored an armored brigade under OPCON brigade operations effectively use the relationship. infantry division’s ability to operate in restrictive terrain, such as urban areas, TASK ORGANIZATION forests, and mountains. The light and CONSIDERATIONS armored force should be mutually supporting, based on the commander’s Cross attachment of an armored concept of employment, to ensure assets brigade to an infantry division must be of both forces are integrated and thoroughly considered. Corps planners synchronized. This section discusses the must consider the capabilities and

C-11 FM 71-3 limitations of the combined force with required to support the infantry division. respect to the— This is what the parent armored division should provide the armored brigade and still remain capable of conducting and • Size and mission of the force. supporting armored division operations. Normally, additional augmentation for • Location of the deploying unit in the armored brigade comes from corps if relation to its parent unit. the parent armored division is committed. • Support capabilities of the deploying force. • Source of support for the deploying force. EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS • Self-sustaining capability of the armored force. The purpose of employing light and armored forces together is to capitalize on Options for task organizing an the unique strengths of each type of force armored brigade to support an infantry while minimizing its limitations. To division are, in priority— accomplish this, both light division and armored brigade commanders must • Separate armored brigade OPCON understand the capabilities and to an infantry division. limitations of each force and synchronize • Armored divisional brigade all CS and CSS assets to accomplish the OPCON to an infantry division. desired effects on the enemy.

The recommended command Placing an armored brigade OPCON relationship for an armored brigade to an infantry division is a combat supporting a light division is OPCON. multiplier for the division only if three Under this relationship, the division is conditions are met. First, use of the not burdened with the armored and armored brigade must support the mechanized brigade’s logistics support. division mission. Division commanders The division staff must plan for the must ensure the TTPs used by their forces increased requirements for terrain, and the armored brigade are compatible. movements in the rear area, and for the Artillery, engineer, air defense, increased logistics support structure. intelligence, attack helicopters, signal, and divisional CSS assets must be When requesting the support of an properly coordinated with the armored armored brigade, the division should brigade to support light and armored routinely expect to receive a brigade task- operations. organized. The armored division provides additional assets to the armored brigade Second, the armored brigade must within its capability. Additional division bring its own logistics support. The assets are three heavy expanded mobile armored brigade should be under an tactical trucks (2,500-gallon tankers), two OPCON relationship to the light division. MSEs nodes, and one MP platoon. This is This relieves the light division of the minimum essential organization supporting the brigade. The infantry

C-12 FM 71-3 division’s FSBs are not able to support by concentrating rapidly. They can the armored brigade with fuel, also defend from strongpoints. ammunition, and repairs. • Rapidly exploit success in the offense or defense, including the Third, the light infantry commander effects of nuclear, chemical, and must remember the differences in tempo conventional fires. between light and armored forces and use these differences to his advantage. • Conduct delaying actions against Differences in mobility change the way larger enemy armored forces. the infantry division fights. The armored • Conduct security missions. brigade’s mobility allows it to move quickly. It depends on mobility and • Provide organic air defense against firepower to survive. Integration of speed low-altitude hostile aircraft. and mobility is vital when conducting operations as a combined light and Considerations to Offset Armored armored force. Force Limitations

CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS Armored forces depend mainly on radio communications. This makes them The employment of a mixed force vulnerable to radio electronic combat. must be based on sound METT-T Because of this, the armored brigade analysis. By maximizing capabilities and commander must ensure all subordinate minimizing limitations, commanders can commanders understand the higher effectively integrate armored and light commander’s intent, doctrine, drills, and forces. A discussion of capabilities for control measures for an operation. This armored forces and considerations for ensures execution of plans when radio minimizing limitations when OPCON to a communications are disrupted from light infantry division follows. jamming or inoperable systems.

Armored Force Capabilities Armored forces have a high consumption rate of supply items, Specifically, armored forces can especially Classes III, V, and IX. Anticipation of these supply needs, operate as attack or counterattack forces integration of supply assets into the BSA and accomplish rapid movement in at optimum times, and extensive use of exploitations and pursuits. The armored logistics packages can reduce this burden force provides the infantry division the on the light division. The brigade LO following capabilities: must ensure logistical support issues are addressed by the light division during • Seize terrain and penetrate or planning. envelop enemy defenses or strongpoints. Armored forces are vulnerable to • Conduct defensive operations by antiarmor weapons and mines. Proper dispersing over great distances and integration of dismounted infantry, use of

C-13 FM 71-3

FS assets, terrain driving, and extensive an enemy may have small numbers of reconnaissance to locate and target enemy motorized, mechanized, or armored units. antiarmor positions and minefields reduce this vulnerability. Armored brigade Under proper circumstances, the infantry mobility considerations must be division receives one armored brigade from integrated into the R&S plan of the light the corps. The brigade normally comes with infantry division. The brigade S2 and S3 additional task-organized maintenance, Class must review the division’s R&S plan to III, and Class IV. ensure integration of assets support armored force maneuver. The armored and light force can conduct a multitude of missions and tasks (see Because of the limited number of FM 71-100). Examples of offensive and dismounts available in armored units, defensive missions and tasks are as follows: these units have difficulty defending positions against enemy infantry. When armored forces are positioned to defend • Light and armored operations in on mechanized avenues of approach, the the offense include light missions brigade should request augmentation with of movement to contact, attack, light infantry to reduce this vulnerability. and raid that are supported by armored tasks such as reserve, The armored brigade brings extra overwatch, counterattack, attack capabilities to the infantry division— by fire, covering force, and armored protection, mobility, and deception. When the infantry firepower. The light division can use division is conducting an attack, these capabilities to exploit success or the armored force can support it as reinforce the defense. The integration and a mobile reserve to conduct synchronization of these capabilities can counterattacks. overwhelm a numerically superior force. When the light division is planning, the • Light and armored operations in brigade commander and staff must ensure the defense include light missions that the armored brigade and subordinate of defend, delay, and withdrawal. units are employed to exploit their Armored tasks to support these capabilities. missions include counterattack, reserve, covering force, overwatch, TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT reinforce, and DLIC.

Assigning complementary missions to PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS each force is the guiding principle for employing armored and light forces. The The effective employment of a force infantry division can expect to conduct with both armored and light elements tactical operations with armored units in requires detailed planning. Mutual all combat environments. The most planning, development of orders, common employment of armored forces rehearsals, and coordination between by infantry divisions occurs when terrain respective commanders and staffs must and vegetation favor use of infantry, but take place. Critical areas in the planning

C-14 FM 71-3 process include the command and support considerations are observed by the light relationship, composition of CS and CSS, division G3 cell during planning: and effective use of terrain. A common SOP or an understanding of each unit’s • Armored forces are best suited to SOP is essential to synchronizing all operate in open and mixed terrain. combat, CS, and CSS units. A discussion Mobility and organic firepower of specific planning considerations make it easier for mechanized and follows. armored forces to disperse and rapidly concentrate at the decisive point on the battlefield. Intelligence • The difference in operational tempo between light and armored Detailed intelligence is critical to the units must always be a success of light and armored force consideration, including the integration. Intelligence requirements for scheduling of rehearsals. It may each force must be understood and dictate an early rehearsal time to integrated into the IPB process. The allow both forces to take part. brigade S2 coordinates with the light • Both units’ direct and indirect fires division G2 to ensure the IPB products should mutually support each developed by the light division include an other. The armored brigade can use armored force orientation. Armored its long-range direct fires to forces orient on unit concentrations, tank provide suppression and overwatch and AT locations, counterattack routes, fires for the light division. The armor obstacles, EAs, and artillery and light division should plan to use air defense locations. Both forces’ PIR the armored force’s long-range and DSTs must be combined, compared, antiarmor fires. In light and and explained to both staffs in detail. The armored operations, differences in R&S plans of both units should be jointly equipment may dictate different developed and coordinated. The use of techniques in marking TRPs. the armored brigade’s long-range observation and direct-fire systems must Fire Support be integrated into the light division’s R&S plan. The armored force must recognize that dismounted infantry operations focus on stealth, which could preclude preparation Maneuver and other preliminary fires. Planners must integrate available FS for each force into When defending or attacking, the fire plan. elements of an armored or light force can fix the enemy while the armored force Division planners must be familiar attacks. In either case, the armored with the organization, capabilities, and brigade requires adequate terrain and limitations of all forces involved. It is space to maneuver. The brigade S3, XO, likely that the armored brigade’s DS FA or commander must ensure the following battalion will support the light division

C-15 FM 71-3 elements if they are sent out early. The the DS FA battalion commander. This decision by the light division to use the ensures the shooters and executors armored brigade’s DS FA battalion understand what the other expects and occurs from initial IPB, intelligence better integrates the light force’s fire gathered from higher collection assets, or plan. The brigade commander and staff a quick FS mission analysis. Normally must be knowledgeable of the light this results in a preliminary division division FS plan to ensure FS is available target list and scheme of fires, and a WO to the armored brigade when issued to the DS FA battalion until the maneuvering. formal field artillery support plan (FASP) can be developed. This allocation of FS Air Defense assets may require moving a single 155- mm battery forward enough to reach on Commanders should direct their and beyond the objective of an element of attention to ADA resupply requirements. the light division. Radar critical friendly Centralized planning is required to zones should be planned in depth along orchestrate ADA support for light and the light force element’s route, on all armored operations. The division can LZs, points of penetration, and attack consolidate ADA units to provide denser positions to protect the light force as it coverage around critical targets. Armored moves to its objective. A 155-mm forces provide the light division excellent indirect fire system may be assigned to coverage with their enhanced ADA fire any targets generated by the radar capability and can carry the resupply of zones. Stinger missiles for light Stinger units.

During planning and preparation Mobility and Survivability phases, a liaison team, normally the brigade FSO, facilitates the The division G3 and engineer must synchronization of FS. Restrictive fire develop a common obstacle plan, and control measures must be jointly consider using light infantry to clear developed and understood by everyone. choke points and obstacles for the Take special care when planning armored force. Division planners must potentially lethal dud-producing also consider weapon disparities in range, munitions. Dual-purpose improved their impact on prepared obstacles, and conventional munitions (DPICM) and use of terrain during battle handoff to an FASCAM restrict the light unit’s ability armored force. The priorities of mobility to maneuver. When these munitions are and survivability may be different for planned, the brigade FSO must coordinate each force. The light force must be with the light division to ensure no future prepared to take full advantage of actions by the light division are hindered. armored force engineer assets. When light forces breach obstacles for armored During the planning phase of an forces, planners must ensure the breach is operation, it is important to have the large enough for the widest vehicle in the DIVARTY commander make face-to-face operation. The armored brigade’s coordination and rehearse the plan with engineer battalion commander must plan

C-16 FM 71-3 to augment the light division to conduct operation. The armored force performs survivability and countermobility maintenance continuously. The light operations. commander must understand this requirement and provide an opportunity Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical for such maintenance. The armored brigade may be required to provide light The light division is more limited in division elements with limited water, its decontamination capabilities than the resupply, and casualty evacuation armored force. The mobility of the light assistance. division is affected by the need for soldiers to carry protective clothing in Command and Control addition to their standard load. The use of armored unit vehicles may be planned to The corps headquarters defines the assist in transporting NBC equipment. An authority and responsibility within the armored brigade has expedient devices light and armored force by designating and water-haul capabilities that can offset command relationships. The armored and the light division’s shortfalls. The brigade light force must exchange LOs. The staff must ensure this support task is planning process is jointly conducted and understood early in the planning process. the development of orders and overlays is The brigade chemical officer must analyze coordinated. Confirmation briefs are this requirement and ensure the brigade required at brigade level of combat, CS, remains capable of protecting its units. and CSS units to ensure timing, synchronization, and understanding of the Combat Service Support commander’s intent.

CSS requires an understanding of the current, ongoing, and forecasted needs of Standard operational terms and both forces. Commanders must be able to symbols must be used and codes, cross-level CSS to support overall recognition signals, and SOIs exchanged. support requirements and be prepared to The directing headquarters may need to receive CSS augmentation from the corps set up a retrans site to compensate for the support group. The division can shorter range of the light unit’s coordinate use of transportation assets of communications equipment. The brigade the armored force to facilitate this cross staff must ensure communications nodes leveling. The light division emphasizes are established to provide continuous replacing parts; the armored unit communications among all command and emphasizes repair. This requires staff elements within the brigade and continuous attention throughout the higher headquarters.

C-17 FM 71-3

SECTION IV. SPECIAL OPERATIONS FORCES

GENERAL Limitations

Brigades and battalions may operate SOF— near or with SOF. The command • Depend on the resources of the relationship is determined by the higher theater Army to support and headquarters. SOF personnel normally sustain operations. provide a liaison team (a special operations command and control element) • Cannot conduct conventional to coordinate with other units, usually at combined arms operations on a brigade level, and to control SOF within unilateral basis. Their capabilities the AO. Most often, SOF personnel are limited to advising or directing precede conventional forces into the AO. indigenous military forces conducting this type of operation. • Do not have organic combined Capabilities arms capability. They habitually SOF can— require support or attachment of other combat, CS, and CSS assets. • Infiltrate and exfiltrate specified operational areas by air, land, or • Cannot provide security for sea. operational bases without severely degrading operational and support • Operate in remote areas and capabilities. nonpermissive environments for extended periods with little external direction and support. • Organize, equip, train, advise, and EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS direct indigenous military and paramilitary units and personnel. The following are pertinent • Train, advise, and assist US and considerations, by BOS, for the allied forces. employment of SOF during the combat • Conduct R&S and target operations phase of CONORS. acquisition. • Conduct direct-action operations, Intelligence including raids, ambushes, sniping, emplacement of mines and other Special reconnaissance gives the munitions, and terminal guidance CINC, joint task force, or Army force for precision-guided missions. commander the ability to conduct • Conduct rescue and recovery HUMINT collection in denied areas at the operations. operational and strategic level. For

C-18 FM 71-3 example, the special forces MI team can Special operations command and provide information on critical enemy control element coordinates with fire command, control, and communications control elements to prevent fratricide of nodes. SOF elements in the conventional unit’s area of influence.

CA assets can provide timely SOF can conduct training to improve intelligence to the commander through host-nation FS assets. interviews with refugees. Air Defense

Maneuver SOF participate in JSEAD operations by reporting neutralized enemy ADA Special forces and Ranger units, under sites. the command and control of SOF headquarters, can conduct direct-action Combat Service Support missions against HVTs, such as critical enemy command, control, and SOF assist in the identification of and communication nodes. coordination for host-nation assets.

Audiovisual PSYOP teams can aid the CA elements assist in the tactical commander’s deception plan. implementation of population resource control measures. SOF can improve host-nation military forces through training and advisory SOF assist in refugee control programs. measures.

Fire Support Command and Control

Special reconnaissance or direct- SOF direct-action units remain under action teams can conduct terminal the control of an SOF headquarters and guidance operations for high-performance establish a liaison element with the aircraft against HVTs using laser target conventional headquarters to provide designators or beacons. time-sensitive information.

Special reconnaissance or direct- Direct-action units can be placed in action teams can provide nonattributable GS or DS of a conventional unit. In that target acquisition and adjustment of deep case, the SOF unit headquarters would be fires in deep operations. collocated with the conventional unit’s headquarters. This allows the flow of Special operation or direct-action timely information and facilitates teams can provide up-to-date target planning for and integration of the SOF intelligence and confirmation needed to unit into the conventional unit’s validate HVT matrices. It is important to operations. integrate them into the R&S plan.

C-19 #

V FM 71-3

APPENDIX D MOVEMENT AND ASSEMBLY AREAS

Most brigade operations will commence or terminate in an assembly area. Consequently, the brigade can plan on conducting frequent tactical movement into and out of assembly areas on a routine basis.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Tactical Road March D-1 Section II. Assembly Areas D-2

SECTION I. TACTICAL ROAD MARCH

GENERAL Open Column

The tactical road march is a unit move Vehicles are spaced 50 to 100 meters in a combat-ready posture normally apart. Normally used during daylight, conducted in the combat zone. Enemy open column can be used at night with contact is possible either during the march proper night-vision equipment. or soon after arrival at the unit's destination. Units normally move by tactical Infiltration road marches to assembly areas to prepare for combat operations. The S3 is respon- Vehicles are dispatched individually, in sible for planning tactical road marches. small groups, or at irregular intervals at a rate that keeps the traffic density down DEFINITIONS and prevents undue massing of vehicles.

The following paragraphs are March Column definitions used in movement and tactical road marches. A march column consists of all elements using the same route for a single Close Column movement under control of a single commander. The column is normally Vehicles are spaced approximately 25 brigade-size and is composed of three meters apart. elements. The head is the first vehicle of

D-1 FM 71-3 the column. The main body consists of the Reconnaissance Party major elements of the column: the serials and march units. The trail party follows The reconnaissance party conducts the main body and conducts vehicle repair route reconnaissance of movement routes and recovery, medical aid and evacuation, to determine travel times, bridge and and emergency refueling. underpass capacities, and trafficability. It Serial identifies critical points, obstacles, and (if there is enough time) alternate routes. A serial is a major subdivision of a march column and is normally battalion- size. Quartering Party (Advance Party) March Unit The quartering party reconnoiters the A march unit is a major subdivision of new assembly area and guides march a serial and is normally company-size. elements to and into the new area.

SECTION II. ASSEMBLY AREAS

GENERAL operations or during unit movements. Assembly area planning, occupation, and An assembly area is a position in which departure are difficult and time a force prepares or regroups for further consuming. Performed correctly, they can action. Units in assembly areas execute aid in structuring the unit for timely maintenance, resupply, and personnel execution of combat operations. Done actions to maintain the combat power of incorrectly, they confuse and disorganize the force. Task organization and a unit before it ever makes contact with reorganization of the force, the the enemy. development and issuance of tactical orders and plans, coordination with other PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS units or higher headquarters, reconnaissance, training, and rehearsals may also be Assembly areas are typically outside conducted. Units occupying assembly the range of enemy medium artillery fires, areas employ passive and/or active generally no closer than 15 kilometers OPSEC measures to deny enemy from the LC. Examples of assembly areas intelligence any indicators of friendly include locations occupied by units plans and intentions, force composition, designated as reserves, by units after or unit identity and locations consistent completing a rearward passage of lines, with the higher commander's deception temporarily by units during movement, plan. Designation and occupation of an and by units during reconstitution. assembly area may be directed by a higher Brigades typically occupy assembly areas headquarters or by the unit commander alone, although their parent divisions may such as during relief or withdrawal be in the same general geographic area, as

D-2 FM 71-3 when the division is in the corps rear area • Good drainage and soil conditions as the corps reserve. Assembly areas that support unit vehicle ideally provide— movement.

Units in tactical assembly areas are • Concealment from air and ground typically preparing to move forward to observation. execute a forward passage of lines followed by offensive operations or have been assigned a reserve mission by their • Cover from direct fire. higher commander.

• Terrain masking of electromagnetic signal signature. ORGANIZATION OF THE BRIGADE ASSEMBLY AREA • Sufficient area for the dispersion of subunits and their vehicles Methods consistent with the tactical situation, both enemy and friendly. Brigade assembly areas may be organized using one of two methods. • Buildings for unit trains, maintenance operations, and Method One command and control facilities (TOC/TAC CP/rear CP). The brigade may assign sectors to subordinate maneuver battalions and • Suitable entrances, exits, and require them to tie-in their fires with internal routes. Optimally, at least adjacent battalions. In this method the one all-weather paved surface road brigade command and control facilities, transits the assembly area and brigade HHC, and most CS assets are connects to the MSR in use by the located near the center of the assembly next higher headquarters. area. This technique essentially configures the brigade in a perimeter defense, with • Terrain that allows the observation maneuver battalions deployed along the of ground and air avenues of entire perimeter and oriented outwards approach into the assembly area. (see Figure D-l).

D-3 FM 71-3

rm N. CD N

il u ra? u

HHC

rm //

Figure D-l. Brigade assembly area organization (method one).

Method Two The brigade may assign separate HHC, and the bulk of CS assets individual assembly areas to subor- occupy positions central to the outlying dinate elements. In this method, maneuver battalions. FAAD units may subordinate units maintain their own 360- need to collocate with outlying maneuver units or establish separate firing degree security. Areas between subunits positions around the brigade to provide should be secured through visual and adequate air defense. This is the most electronic surveillance or patrols. Brigade typical organization for the brigade command and control facilities, the assembly areas (see Figure D-2).

D-4 FM 71-3

frñ)

hïl

I HHC I

Figure D-2. Brigade assembly area organization (method two).

When the brigade is in the corps rear prevents the extensive traffic in and out of or division rear and is not designated as a the FSB/BSA from interfering with reserve, field trains of the brigade's battalion assembly area activities. It also subordinate battalions are collocated with allows the battalions to move forward and their parent unit and the BSA is not deploy without having to maneuver established. In that case, the FSB moves through or around the BSA/FSB. The and establishes a separate assembly area location of the FSB/BSA in relation like other battalions of the brigade. to supported battalions depends on When the brigade moves forward of the rear area threat, mission of the division rear or is in the division the brigade, proximity to division/corps rear as a reserve, the BSA is formed MSR, and the ability of the BSA/FSB to by combining the battalion field trains support the battalions, given the distance with the FSB. In either case, the between them. Other information FSB/BSA is positioned to the rear of concerning the positioning of the the supported battalions. This positioning BSA/FSB is in Chapter 8.

D-5 FM 71-3

QUARTERING PARTY OCCUPATION OF THE ASSEMBLY AREA

A quartering party is a group of unit Units position themselves in assembly representatives dispatched to a probable areas IAW their parent unit's plan. Units new site of operations in advance of the are typically guided into position by their main body to secure, reconnoiter, and quartering parties. Occupation is organize an area prior to the main body's accomplished smoothly from the march without halting or bunching of units at the arrival and occupation. Unit SOPs RP establish the exact composition of the quartering party and its transportation, Units normally establish routes and security, communications equipment, and separate SPs/RPs for march elements that specific duties. Quartering parties proceed from the march column's route or typically reconnoiter and confirm the RP toward the march units' assembly area route and tentative locations for their positions. This technique clears the route parent elements selected from map quickly, maintains march unit command reconnaissance. Quartering parties also and control, and prevents bunching of usually act as a liaison between their units at the march column RP. March parent headquarters and the quartering units may follow a similar procedure. party of their higher headquarters to change unit locations within the assembly BRIGADE ACTIONS IN THE area based on the results of their ASSEMBLY AREA reconnaissance. All actions in the assembly area are In organizing for the movement to and focused on preparing the unit for future occupation of a tactical assembly area, the operations. Actions most commonly brigade headquarters does not employ a associated with assembly area activities quartering party that includes subunit include resupply, personnel replacement, representatives. The brigade HHC and maintenance, reorganization, rest, and TOC organize and dispatch a single planning future operations. quartering party to confirm the tentative locations for the HHC support elements The brigade commander prioritizes the and the new brigade TOC location. If the actions to be taken by subordinate units in brigade moves to the assembly area at a the assembly area and allocates resources later time, the brigade HHC/TOC to accomplish these tasks. Resources are quartering party returns to the brigade's prioritized by the commander. Priorities current location after completion of a are assigned based on his estimate of the reconnaissance of the area. In this case, situation, which is summed up in the the quartering party may not act in a factors of METT-T. Since occupation of liaison capacity, and subunit requests for the assembly area is done in preparation changes to the assembly area plan are for future combat, the commander's resolved after returning to the brigade's METT-T analysis considers not only the present position. current and projected status of the unit

D-6 FM 71-3 but also anticipated combat missions the framework of the higher commander's brigade may execute. intent. Communications and liaison with higher, lower, and adjacent units The brigade commander and staff are maintained. Additional planning execute staff planning and TLPs to and coordination for contingency prepare the brigade for its next mission plans may be conducted. Brigade and to produce and disseminate a feasible, CP elements are afforded time coherent tactical plan that accomplishes and resources to prepare for the next the brigade's mission within the mission.

FM 71-3

APPENDIX E DIGITIZATION OF THE COMBINED ARMS BRIGADE

This appendix provides the conceptual underpinnings of digital warfighting at the brigade level. It is forward reaching in a number of areas. This appendix describes the potential of enhanced tactics, systems, and organizations to increasing lethality, tempo, and survivability. This appendix also describes characteristics of a flexible battlefield framework, where forces are arrayed in a noncontiguous and asymmetrical manner. The enabling means of this new style of warfighting is the enhancement of the flow of relevant combat information through digital networking.

The term “digitized” is used throughout this appendix to refer to fully-modernized units possessing digital command and control systems. Digitized units addressed in this appendix contain the full suite of Force XXI legacy systems, including— • The M1A2 Abrams. • The M2A3 BFV. • The BSFV. • The Avenger. • The command and control vehicle (C2V). • The Army battle command system (ABCS). • ASAS. • The UAV. • Enhanced mortar systems. • The Paladin/Crusader artillery system. • MLRS and improved firefinder system. • Intelligent minefield system (wide area munition [WAM]).

The digitized brigade described is composed of forces equipped with the most sophisticated automated command and control systems available. Significant enhancements in information sharing and management, among and within combat units, create conditions to improve TTPs. The digital flow of information on the battlefield results in an exponential increase in situation awareness—or the ability to see the terrain, enemy, and friendly forces. Given this capability, tactical units may organize and employ themselves differently to optimize this advantage over potential adversaries. This same capability enables friendly commanders to possess an unprecedented level of control over battlefield activities—both friendly and enemy.

CONTENTS Page

Section I. Introduction to Digitization E-2 Section II. Digitized Doctrine and Training E-3 Section III. Digitization of the Mounted Combined Arms Brigade E-4 Section IV. Digitized Tactical Operations E-15

E-1 FM 71-3

SECTION I. INTRODUCTION TO DIGITIZATION

GENERAL the range of military operations. It allows the commander and staff to— Digitization of the Army provides the combined arms commander and his staff • Collect and organize large amounts the capability to effectively plan, of information. coordinate, and direct the battle. This • Combine information from capability is derived from several digital multiple sources to create more systems that allow the entire organization complete and useful information. to rapidly share information. These • Process information to analyze digital systems operate within the ABCS. trends, detect unusual activities, or predict a future situation. ARMY BATTLE COMMAND SYSTEM • Develop COA based on situational factors. The exact nature and scope of future • Exchange information efficiently operations cannot be predetermined. among and within CPs on the Therefore, the ABCS must be flexible to battlefield. meet the full range of potential mission • Present information as graphic requirements. One aspect of this displays and textual summaries. flexibility is that traditional allocations of functions to specific echelons are not The ABCS provides automation static. As an example, commanders at support to commanders and their staff at echelons as low as battalion may be in the each cell based on the mission and phase role of a joint task force commander in a of operations. ABCS provides seamless humanitarian aid or peacekeeping mission connectivity from the tactical level to in an underdeveloped country. In this the national command authority using role, they need functionality and Army, Joint, and Allied standard connectivity to systems as associated with communications. ABCS will be used the theater commander. Another aspect regularly within garrison, during driving this flexibility is the need to redeployment, and in the field to maintain functionally reconfigure individual ABCS the soldiers’ proficiency at the level workstations as operations transition from required to respond to the broad range of one phase to another or as the roles and potential missions. The ABCS is responsibilities of individuals and composed of the following components. organizations change. Army Global Command and Control The ABCS consists of the commander, System staff, doctrine, procedures and tools used to command and control forces on the The AGCCS is the Army component tactical battlefield. The system supports of the global command and control both the exercise of command and system (GCCS). It will be built from imposition of control of the combined applications developed by the Army arms team. The ABCS supports the worldwide military command and control command and control processes across system (WWMCCS), Army worldwide

E-2 FM 71-3 information system (AWIS), the standard combat, CS, and CSS units across all theater Army command and control BOSs while performing missions through system (ST ACCS), and the combat the operational continuum at the tactical service support control system for level. FBCB2 is a battlefield, battle echelons above corps (CSSCS-EAC). command information support system AGCCS will provide a suite of modular supported by existing and emerging applications to support logistics, medical, communications, sensors, and electrical personnel, theater Army special power sources. operations, mobilization and deployment. Army status of readiness and training, The FBCB2 is the implementation of transportation asset management, and information age technology providing others. increased battlefield operational capabilities. When combined with Army Tactical Command and changes in doctrine and organizational Control System design made possible by these technologies and placed in the hands of The Army tactical command and soldiers/leaders who are trained in their control system (ATCCS) is the use, FBCB2 provides increased battlefield integration of five battlefield functional operational capability. Battle command area command and control systems in a digitized brigade requires developing (BFACS), providing situational new initiatives across doctrine, training, information and decision support to leader development, organizations, and commanders and staffs in the execution materiel to manage information resources of the operational/tactical battle at corps achieving the maximum benefits for and below. Within this integration of tactical operations. FBCB2 will provide systems, the force level data base first horizontal and vertical integration of the takes form at the battalion to meet the data and information generation and tactical commanders’ requirements for processing capabilities of individual common picture and situational soldiers as well as weapons, sensors, and awareness. The BFACSs are heavily support platforms. As a component of oriented toward combat operations. ABCS, the FBCB2 will interoperate with battlefield automated systems (BAS) in Force XXI Battle Command— compliance with GCCS and all Brigade and Below appropriate BASs in common operating systems as specified by GCCS. FBCB2 The Force XXI battle command— must interoperate with and exchange brigade and below (FBCB2 ) is both a information with all ABCS battlefield system and a concept to be used by functional areas (BFA).

SECTION II. DIGITIZED DOCTRINE AND TRAINING

With the publication of FM 100-5 in “capability-based” and differs from the June 1993, a new typology, or framework threat-based .doctrine of AirLand Battle. for expressing tactical doctrine, was born. The significant characteristic of This new framework is termed capabilities-based doctrine is that tactical

E-3 FM 71-3 procedures are not optimized against one and TTP, comparisons are often used specific threat. Instead, tactical between conventionally-equipped and procedures are where they can be applied digitally-equipped units. Remember that to varying threats and differing battlefield digital units equate to the full suite of circumstances. Capability-based doctrine capabilities, not solely its command and provides TTP as a set of common control enhancements. Additionally, the decision factors to assist in thinking and coexistence of embedded and applique deciding upon battle actions. (bolt-on) digital systems within the Army today requires TTP to focus on general Another significant distinction of functionality and capabilities, since capability-based doctrine is its procedures between the two differ. complementary relationship with the commander’s intent. Capability-based The objective of the capability-based TTP serve as implementing actions taken doctrine development process is to to execute the intent of the unit publish refined TTP parallel to system commander. As such, digital operations and software developments. Like the are distinguished from conventional commander’s intent, unit TSOPs also operations in that they place a greater increase in importance among digitally- emphasis on the commander’s intent. This equipped units. Digitized units are distinction is matched by the digital required to use their TSOPs as communications capability of the brigade. instruments to integrate new systems into their organization. Furthermore, unit This appendix uses the capability- TSOPs serve as bridges between based typology. In an effort to improve employing individual systems and the clarity of expressing new concepts fighting the unit as a whole.

SECTION III. DIGITIZATION OF THE MOUNTED COMBINED ARMS BRIGADE

The digitized brigade possesses an development and fielding of new and increased capability to achieve success enhanced systems are ongoing and across the entire range of military dynamic, the specific characteristics of operations. From large-scale combat emerging systems will not be discussed in operations to national assistance and depth. disaster relief, the digitized brigade will have an increased capability to deliver combat power in any environment. CHARACTERISTICS

The digitized brigade provides unique The digitized brigade conducts capabilities that are distinctly different precision mounted engagements and from its conventional predecessor. battles during conflict and war, and Emerging capabilities provide a new various activities during OOTW. The warfighting facet to commanders at both digitized brigade achieves tactical, the tactical and operational levels. This operational, and in some cases, strategic section addresses new capabilities and objectives as part of a larger force. The limitations in generic terms. Since the brigade is uniquely capable of conducting

E-4 FM 71-3 continuous mobile operations at a high Technology is but one factor in tempo with great lethality and increasing the combat potential of the survivability that inflict decisive effects brigade as a tactical organization. upon an adversary. Technological change serves as an enabler of both enduring and new As the building block of modular capabilities which the leadership of the combat power, the digitized brigade US Army desires its land combat force to conducts operations that entail the possess for the twenty-first century. application of combat power from mobile weapon and support system platforms in CORE FUNCTIONS a way that destroys the enemy, simultaneously in depth and decisively The digitized brigade’s organization, (ground and aerial). Embedded in these equipment, and training enable it to systems is the capability to plan and perform the functions outlined in the rehearse on the move and to more rapidly following paragraphs for the tactical and mass effects anywhere on the battlefield. operational commander. They provide rapid, continuous operations (day or night ) at a high Project, Deploy, and Redeploy tempo. These systems also provide a Mounted Combat Power common, shared situational awareness that enables commanders and staffs to The digitized brigade is a strategically make more informed decisions faster. mobile force that can swiftly deploy in These operations rely on mechanization response to national command authority and technology during their employment (NCA) directives. The brigade deploys in to maximize mobility, firepower, a streamlined fashion as delineated in protection, and control. Digitized FM 100-17, the Army’s keystone manual mounted forces are characterized by the for doctrine on deployment, utilizing the ability to project, deliver, and sustain joint operation planning and execution combat power in a rapid, highly lethal, system (JOPES) and the time-phased and survivable manner. These forces force development process (time-phased conduct reconnaissance while mounted force and deployment data [TPFDD] and and dismounted, and close with and time-phased force and deployment defeat enemy forces. The digitized logistics [TPFDL]). Theater onward brigade possesses sufficient combat movement is a complex, transitional power and leadership to control large phase of the deployment process. Timely areas of terrain in order to dominate transition from theater arrival to adversaries within hostile, land-based establishing a tactical posture is critical environments during war and OOTW. in an environment where adversaries attempt to prevent massive troop buildup The digitized brigade is more than a in their region. The digitized brigade technologically advanced organization. rapidly merges its soldiers and Enhancements made to TTP, equipment, reconfigures and tailors units, organizational design, and innovative conducts marshaling and staging area training methods are equally important to activities, and moves to tactical assembly the collective effectiveness of the brigade areas during this critical phase. The as the technological systems it possesses. digitized brigade achieves this through

E-5 FM 71-3 links to CSS systems that allow it to Conduct Information Operations prepare faster by sharing and updating information and data bases while in The digitized brigade performs transit. The digitized brigade conducts tactical operations for the purpose of rapid recovery and redeployment upon gaining or denying information for the mission accomplishment. combatant commander. The digitized brigade is uniquely capable of performing Conduct Decisive Operations tactical missions that achieve tactical, operational, or strategic outcomes for the The digitized brigade performs purpose of determining enemy combat operations to achieve decisive information capabilities as well as outcomes for the tactical and operational degrading these capabilities to establish commander. Digitized brigades operate friendly information superiority. The as part of a larger force to fight digitized brigade performs information engagements and battles that defeat the operations to support the combatant adversary’s will and destroy his means of commander in setting the conditions for resistance. Decisive operations are decisive operations. These operations and conducted at an accelerated tempo, and activities include tactical deception, EW, orchestrated in a near-simultaneous R&S, target acquisition, OPSEC and manner to deny the adversary options to physical destruction of enemy counter friendly actions against him. information systems. These operations value the rapid defeat of enemy formations by the effects of Conduct Operations Other Than dominating maneuver and firepower to War achieve objectives quickly and with minimal casualties and collateral damage. The digitized brigade is capable of The digitized brigade attacks and defends conducting various OOTW activities. during decisive operations. The modular command and control and logistics systems of the brigade make it Conduct Security Operations an attractive force package to plug into ad hoc task organizations commonly Upon conflict termination, the employed in these operations. The digitized brigade conducts post-conflict specific roles and missions of the operations. This period is characterized mounted force in OOTW are still by residual combat activity still underway maturing. within the theater of operations. Various activities and missions are conducted during this period to restore order, CAPABILITIES reestablish host-nation infrastructure, organize and control buffer zones, and The digitized brigade possesses new prepare for hand-over to peacekeeping and enhanced capabilities separate from forces. The digitized brigade possesses its predecessor. In addition to those of the the versatility needed to accomplish conventional brigade, the digitized force critical tasks during this lethal transition possesses the capabilities outlined in the period. following paragraphs.

E-6 FM 71-3

Enhanced Command, Control, and to gain and maintain control of battlefield Communications activities, time, and physical space.

The digitized brigade exploits its The digitized brigade uses all its automated C3 system to maintain an enhanced capabilities to maximize the increased level of situational awareness effectiveness of its combat power at the and to make more informed decisions decisive points on the battlefield. regarding tactical employment. Auto- Technological, organizational, and pro- mated information functions allow better cedural enhancements facilitate efficient staff integration and synchronization of use of combat multipliers, in a syn- combat multipliers with maneuver forces chronous fashion, to create an over- during the conduct of combined arms whelming effect on the adversary. The operations. C3 enhancements make the brigade uses its enhanced C3 capability to digitized force more adaptive to interface better integrate joint assets into tactical with differing higher headquarters, such operations. as a parent division, other divisions, a corps headquarters, or a joint task force Technological Superiority headquarters. The employment of ASAS provides a revolutionary new capability The digital brigade brings increased for tactical commanders to access and use lethality to the modern battlefield. This national and theater intelligence products. recognition may serve as a viable deterrent in preventing .escalation of Space and aerial-based communication future regional crises once a tech- systems provide a significant nological force is committed in theater. communication enhancement to the The presence of a technologically digitized brigade. It greatly extends the superior tactical force in a crisis theater effective ranges of vehicular com- may prevent a crisis from escalating to munications systems, which facilitates the level of combat, or buy time for tactical dispersion without loss of control. political solutions to take effect. If The use of local and wide area networks escalation occurs, the digitized force is and combat net radio enhances the poised to rapidly conduct tactical tactical organization’s flow of in- operations to meet military objectives. formation and expands the level of control of the commander. Operational Maneuver

Fights Tactical Engagements The digitized brigade can conduct deep, independent maneuver to achieve The digitized brigade is capable of operational objectives for the combatant conducting decisive engagements at an commander. Enhanced mobility, situa- increased operational tempo. The brigade tional awareness, and protection capa- transitions between missions at an bilities enable the digitized brigade to accelerated rate, to create a momentum maneuver to positions of operational or that enemy forces cannot contend with. tactical advantage in depth. Once in The digitized brigade exploits its position, the digitized brigade possesses capability of continuous, rapid operations sufficient protection and firepower to

E-7 FM 71-3 dominate the physical space for periods and cohesion when using this capability. of time determined by its sustainment The digitized brigade is more effective methods. than conventional forces in integrating attached assets and systems into missions Influence Greater Volume Of and operations which it is controlling. Physical Space Precision Movement and Maneuver The digitized brigade is capable of influencing a larger volume of physical The digitized brigade possesses space than conventional units. Greater significant enhancements in the area of situational awareness of the tactical precision navigation. Automated terrain situation and environment allows the analysis systems and improved terrain digitized brigade to operate at greater imagery products increase the brigade’s distances without loss of command and knowledge of the geographic control. Greater dispersion facilitates environment. Global positioning systems control of a larger area of the battlefield, (GPS) and position navigation systems as well as denying an adversary the embedded in weapons platforms enable ability to determine friendly intentions by the force to move with unprecedented templating. The empowerment of precision. The results of this capability subordinates caused by digitization makes are— subordinate tactical units more capable of independent action. Two factors that • Increased effectiveness in relate to the expansion of physical or synchronizing the movement and battle space are the ability to see or know maneuver of forces. the environment and the lethal reach or strike range of the unit. The elements of • Hazard avoidance such as know and strike are not the sole contaminants, obstacles, and determinants of a commander’s physical refugees. battle space. • Accurate battle reporting Force Modularity (location).

The digitized brigade has the unique • Enhanced planning and engaging ability to tailor its organizational of targets. structure to meet mission demands without reduction in command and When this capability is integrated with control and sustainment functions. The information and combined arms tactics, adaptive use of automated networks the digitized brigade possesses a allows the digitized brigade to recon- precision maneuver capability unmatched figure itself in numerous variations by conventional mounted forces. without loss of situational awareness or force coherence. This pliability extends to Enhanced Force Protection the capability of operating under different headquarters. Commanders of the The digitized brigade is capable of digitized brigade must consider human employing multiple force protection factors and the implications to leadership measures to increase the survivability of

E-8 FM 71-3 the force. The digital battle command levels. These frameworks will range from system provides the brigade with early linear or symmetrical patterns to the warning of hostile activity and the means nonlinear or fluid. The fluid battlefield to respond. This enhanced command and framework poses significant challenges to control capability allows the brigade to conventional units in the areas of force maximize tactical dispersion for protection, fratricide, command and protection and to converge or mass when control and sustainment. The needed. This translates into a greater ability to achieve tactical deception and enhancements made in these areas by OPSEC. Additionally, the precision digitization enable the brigade to better movement capability mentioned earlier adapt and operate within the fluid reaps significant benefits in avoiding environment. hazardous areas common to the modern battlefield and enhances its potential to achieve surprise during combat WEAPON SYSTEMS operations.

Lethality Mounted Maneuver Platforms

Preliminary simulation exercises and The mounted direct-fire maneuver field trials demonstrate that digitized platform system provides significant forces have greater means to turn improvements in lethality, survivability potential combat power into actual and fightability required to defeat combat power on the competitive advanced threats. Improvements include a battlefield. This capability is enabled commander’s independent thermal primarily by situational awareness viewer, an independent commander’s enhancements of seeing the enemy, friendly units, and the terrain. The weapon station, position navigation FBCB2 system also gives the digitized equipment, a distributed data and power force improved means to execute actions architecture, and a radio interface unit based on the enhanced situational that allows the user to rapidly transfer awareness the unit shares. Because of situational data and overlays to these enhancements, digitized com- compatible systems on the digital manders can transfer a greater amount of battlefield. potential combat power, particularly the effects of firepower, to actual decisive The lightly armored direct-fire points (time and place) on the battlefield maneuver platform provides cross- than nondigitized units. country mobility, mounted firepower, and Versatile Employment protection from artillery and small-arms fire to mounted and cavalry operations, Future combat operations will be and support to dismounted operations. It conducted within various battlefield also possesses the capability to interface frameworks at the operational and tactical with the other maneuver platforms on the

E-9 FM 71-3

digital battlefield. It will possess the The indirect fire platform has following capabilities: improved responsiveness, survivability, lethality, and reliability. • Command and control and Advanced Field Artillery Systems navigation software. and Future Armored Resupply • Digital communications. Vehicle • Commander’s independent thermal viewer. The advanced field artillery systems (AFAS) and future armored resupply • Combat identification system. vehicle (FARV) are the Army’s next • Digital logistics reporting. generation indirect fire cannon and artillery systems for the mounted force. Line-of-Sight Antitank Together, these systems provide an overmatching firepower capability that The line-of-sight antitank (LOSAT) will support the force commander’s goal system provides antitank fire to fix and of dominating the maneuver battle. They destroy enemy armored formations. The incorporate advanced technologies to LOSAT consists of a kinetic-energy increase accuracy, rate of fire, missile (KEM) launcher mounted on an survivability, and ammunition handling armored vehicle chassis. The key speed. These systems also decrease crew attraction of LOSAT is the tremendous size. overmatch lethality of the KEM that defeats all future predicted armored Multiple Launch Rocket System combat vehicles. The multiple launch rocket system Indirect Fire Platform (MLRS) is a free flight, area free, artillery rocket system that supplements The indirect fire platform system cannon artillery fires by delivering large provides the primary indirect FS to the volumes of firepower in a short time digitized brigade. This system includes— against critical, time-sensitive targets. The MLRS accommodates the launching of a new family of munitions, including • An on-board ballistic computer the Army TACMS. and navigation system. • Secure radio communications. Air Defense Platforms • An improved cannon and gun mount. Avenger • Automatic gun positioning. • Automotive improvements. The Avenger is a lightweight surface- • Improved ballistics. to-air missile/gun weapon system mounted on a HMMWV. It is operated by • NBC protection. a two-man crew for air defense in • Driver’s night sight capability. daylight or at night, and in clear or • Built-in test equipment. adverse weather conditions. The system

E-10 FM 71-3 incorporates an operator’s position with The Dismounted Soldier displays, fire control electronics, and the Stinger vehicle-mounted launcher. The dismounted soldier is equipped with a comprehensive protective Bradley Stinger Fighting Vehicle ensemble that will provide the individual soldier, whether mounted or dismounted, The BSFV is a lethal weapons the best protection available from enemy platform that enhances the firepower and fires, battlefield hazards, and the survivability of air defense assets on the environment. It will enhance the battlefield. The capabilities of BSFV individual warrior and small-unit mounted and dismounted weapons operational effectiveness through a systems are designated to be used modular system that integrates miniature primarily in an air defense role. The electronic components for command, Stinger is the primary air defense weapon control, and communications; computers; in the BSFV. It is used during and intelligence. The system will also engagements against fixed-wing and include the following: rotary-wing targets. The 25-mm chain gun complements Stinger capabilities of • Head-mounted displays. the BSFV. When the Stinger team is dismounted, the 25-mm gun provides • Wide field of vision mobility coverage for the Stinger team’s dead sensors. space. The coaxial-mounted machine gun • Thermal sight with integrated eye- is used against air and ground targets. safe laser rangefinder and compass. Man-Portable Antitank System (Javelin) • Combat identification. • Personal status monitor. The man-portable antitank system provides high lethality against • Chemical agent sensors. conventional and reactive armor. It will • Medical monitoring. replace the Dragon. The Javelin consists of two major components: a reusable • Lightweight power sources for command and launch unit (CLU) and a microclimatic conditioning. missile sealed in a disposable launch tube assembly. The command launch • Small arms ballistic protection. capability incorporates an integrated • Integrated chemical-biological day/night sight and provides target respiratory protection. engagement capability in adverse weather and countermeasure environments. The CLU may be used in the stand-alone INFORMATION SYSTEMS mode for battlefield surveillance and target detection. The system weighs less The Digital Battle Command System than 49 pounds and has a maximum range of 2,000 meters. The Javelin’s key feature Information is the single most is its utilization of fire-and-forget important ingredient in support of the technology. commander’s intent and the integration of

E-11 FM 71-3 combat functions in terms of time, space, Intelligence System and purpose. This overarching automated software communications system supports The intelligence system will provide the digitized brigade with a seamless, combat leaders the all source intelligence streamlined, and simple to use needed to view the battlefield and more information system. This system enhances effectively conduct the land battle. It is battle command down to the individual designed to operate in a joint soldier and weapon systems. It is capable environment across the spectrum of of obtaining information from data bases conflict. This intelligence system both vertically and horizontally, without provides a tactically deployable formally requesting that information automation and data processing capability through command channels. The in order to— commander has the capability to pull information from other data bases to keep • Receive and correlate data from current with the rapid changes of a strategic and tactical intelligence dynamic battlefield. The proliferation of sources/sensors. battlefield automation systems coupled with the tempo of operations necessitates • Produce enemy situation displays. the holistic integration of the digital • Disseminate intelligence informa- battle command system as an integrated, tion. interoperable seamless system. This system enhances the commander’s ability • Nominate targets. to see a detailed picture of the battlefield, • Manage collection requirements. to maximize force survivability, and to facilitate integration of combat functions • Provide OPSEC support. within the brigade organization. It also permits the communication of the Indirect Fires Data System commander’s vision of the battlefield and facilitates the dissemination and The indirect fires data system is the understanding of the commander’s intent. multiservice automated FS command and Characteristics of this system include— control and communication system that satisfies the FS command and control operations requirements. This system • On-the-move operations. provides integrated, automated support • Digital map capability. for the planning, coordination, and control of all FS assets (FA, mortars, • High throughput capability. CAS, NGF, attack helicopters, and • Universal protocols. offensive EW), execution of counterfire, interdiction, and suppression of enemy • Modular capability. targets. • Still frame or video imagery capability. Forward Area Air Defense Command and Control System • Redundancy. • Universal platform integration The FAAD command and control capability. system provides automated assistance in

E-12 FM 71-3 the performance of FAAD operations, Army Airborne Command and such as planning, early warning, Control System (A2C2S) positioning, and engagement. In addition, this system enhances the management of The A2C2S provides the corps Army airspace. This comprehensive commander down through the battalion system consists of subsystems that are commander a highly mobile command equipped with computers, displays, and and control system. The current voice and data communications equip- configuration is mounted in the rear of a ment to aid accumulation, processing, and UH-60 Blackhawk helicopter. This distribution of a correlated air picture and system is a fully integrated digital command, control, communications, and platform that combines intelligence intelligence (C3I) data. Early warning is information from both national (including accomplished by receipt of air tracks JSTARS) and battlefield assets along with from external sources such as the long distance digital communications AW ACS and HIMAD. radios to provide the commander a better chance to make combat effective Command and Control Vehicle decisions. This system is capable of carrying a staff of five. Normal The C2V is a fully tracked, armored configuration includes a commander, an vehicle that ensures a mobile, responsive, intelligence officer, an FSO, an and survivable command and control operations officer, and an LO. platform for the digitized brigade. The C2V provides command and control Unmanned Aerial Vehicle capabilities from battalion through corps level and will accommodate the This system provides R&S and target overarching command and control acquisition capabilities to the digitized software system. brigade in excess of 150 kilometers beyond the FLOT, day or night, and in Battle Command Vehicle limited visibility and adverse weather conditions. This UAV is intended for The BCV solves the tactical problem employment in environments where real- of how to access battlefield information time information feedback is needed, data systems to obtain critical intelligence manned aircraft is unavailable, or and operational information for decision excessive risk or other conditions make it making. The BCV will be tailored to less prudent to use manned aircraft. satisfy commanders’ needs. Each BCV has four internal workstations and is Target Surveillance and Attack staffed with a commander, an operations Radar System officer, an intelligence officer, and an FSO. Each workstation has software that This system provides TACAIR and is commensurate with workstation ground commanders with near real-time functions and desired redundancy. wide area surveillance and deep targeting

E-13 FM 71-3 data on both moving and fixed targets Heavy Assault Bridge System during daylight and at night and in all (Wolverine) weather conditions. It can detect, locate, track, classify, and assist in attacking The heavy assault bridge system is targets beyond the FLOT. Operators operated by a two-man crew. It will aboard the aircraft downlink data in near support a military load crossing 70 at 16 real-time to multiple ground station kilometers per hour and will support the modules and transfer the data to ground mounted maneuver platforms. The bridge commanders. is launched from under armor in 5 minutes and retrieved in 10 minutes. The Remote Sensor System mission of the heavy assault bridge is to support crossing gaps. The heavy assault This remote sentry system provides bridge increases force mobility by low-cost lightweight, autonomous, allowing units to transit gaps such as tank remote, wide area, ground-based ditches, road craters and partially surveillance and target acquisition during damaged bridge sections. daylight and in limited visibility conditions. This is accomplished through Wide Area Munitions (Hornet) both imaging sensors (forward looking infrared) and nonimaging sensors The Hornet has a stand-off detection (acoustics, magnetic, and seismic). These and engagement capability. It attacks sensors provide compressed target image from the side or top at ranges up to 100 hand-off to reconnaissance elements. meters and provides a mobility kill to a designated target array. The Hornet can be used as a stand-alone tactical SUPPORT SYSTEMS minefield or to reinforce a conventional obstacle. The Hornet can be rapidly Obstacle Breaching System employed along exposed flanks during (Grizzly) movement as a situational obstacle to disrupt enemy counterattacks. This system is equipped with a full- width mine-clearing blade and a power- SERVICE SUPPORT SYSTEMS driven excavating arm. While buttoned- up, the two-man crew can operate the Tactical Vehicles blade and the arm and drive the vehicle from either crew station. The mission of The family of medium tactical the Grizzly is to provide an in-stride vehicles consists of a common truck breaching capability to overcome simple chassis. This tactical vehicle system will and complex obstacles. The system will perform line haul, local haul, unit breach a full-width lane and clear lanes to mobility, unit resupply and other allow a maneuver force mobility through missions in combat, CS, and CSS units. It minefields, rubble, tank ditches, wire, and is equipped with digital communications other obstacles. systems that enhance situational

E-14 FM 71-3 awareness and increase the capability to and productivity in the supply throughput supplies and equipment distribution role. It reduces dedicated directly to the user. personnel, materiel-handling equipment, line haul, and heavy cargo transport Force Provider System vehicle requirements in the current ammunition distribution system. The force provider system provides the forward soldier a brief respite from Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical the rigors of combat. Its primary function Reconnaissance System (Fox) is to improve the quality of life for combat soldiers on extended operations in NBC reconnaissance systems are remote areas. armored vehicles equipped with a fully integrated NBC detection, warning, and Palletized Load System communication capability. They detect, identify, and mark areas of NBC The palletized load system is a tactical contamination. They also collect soil, vehicle consisting of a prime mover with water, and vegetation samples for later an integral self-load/unload capability. It performs line and local haul, unit analysis. Hazards to the crew are resupply, and other missions in support of minimized through the inclusion of modernized, highly mobile organizations. vehicle NBC collective protection that The palletized load system also greatly provides overpressure with heating and improves ammunition transport efficiency cooling for crewmen.

SECTION IV. DIGITIZED TACTICAL OPERATIONS

MISSIONS must fully understand doctrinal offensive and defensive fundamentals and recognize The nature of digital operations is the that in execution of tactical engagements continuous transition between offensive they must be applied simultaneously. The and defensive activities aimed to overwhelm the enemy. The digitized digitized brigade performs the missions brigade can employ both defensive and outlined in Table E-l in support of offensive characteristics associated with information, decisive, and security them. Leaders of the digitized brigade operations.

Table E-l. Digitized brigade missions. INFORMATION OPERATIONS DECISIVE OPERATIONS SECURITY OPERATIONS Screen Attack Cover Movement and contact Defend Delay Demonstration Relief Feint OOTW activities Raid Post conflict operations

E-15 FM 71-3

OPERATIONS the engagement, including a decisive point, and assigns specific tasks and Information Operations purposes that its subordinate elements must achieve. The brigade commander The digitized brigade conducts and staff orchestrate and control the near- specific missions to gain or destroy simultaneous actions of the subordinate enemy information capabilities. These elements, and they also employ assets of missions are conducted as part of larger which they retain control to create the operations to set conditions for decisive conditions and synergy required to bring operations. The conceptualization, the enemy to a rapid defeat. planning, and execution techniques are similar. Information missions are The digitized brigade assigns the complicated, lethal, and difficult to critical points of the engagement as control. These operations are conducted missions to the subordinate elements. to obtain information and to test enemy These missions have specific tasks and dispositions, strengths, and reactions. purposes and are linked together by a Units conducting information operations unified concept of the operations and must rapidly transition to decisive commander’s intent. The brigade operations to exploit unexpected commander may retain control of selected opportunities. The digitized brigade assets for employment against specific conducts movement and contact, critical points when he determines that he screening force, feint, demonstration, and and his staff will be better suited than the raid missions in support of information subordinate staffs to control tempo, operations. achieve synchronization, or use these assets unique capabilities. An example of Decisive Operations assets retained for brigade control are attack aviation, BAI, MLRS/Army The digitized brigade conducts rapid, tactical missile system (ATACMS), SOF decisive operations to defeat the enemy direct action teams, PSYOP teams, and with minimal casualties. The brigade EW assets. attacks and defends to achieve this end. The real distinctions between attack and In addition to identifying and defense for the digitized force is the assigning critical points, the brigade intent of the commander and the commander determines what action will requirement to deny terrain to the enemy. destroy the enemy. This action is The principle of simultaneity is identified as the decisive point. The paramount to the success of decisive brigade aggressively seeks to maintain the operations. The brigade conceptualizes, initiative, control time, and deny the plans, and executes decisive operations to enemy the ability to employ any options. attack the enemy at multiple critical By clearly identifying the decisive point, points with the attacks occurring almost the commander has specified an end state simultaneously. It conducts information which, in the absence of orders, allows activities to identify the critical points of any unit on the battlefield to achieve.

E-16 FM 71-3

Security Operations freed for commitment to the main effort. The digitized brigade will be expected to Security missions are conducted to employ its enhanced information and enhance freedom of action by reducing intelligence capabilities to secure a larger vulnerability to hostile acts, influence, or volume of physical space than its surprise. The digitized brigade performs security missions as part of a larger force. conventional predecessor. The brigade A security mission may be assigned to the may conduct covering force, delay, and brigade from division to economize relief missions and OOTW activities to combat power by assigning smaller forces provide security during combat to provide security so larger forces can be operations.

FM 71-3

APPENDIX F FRATRICIDE PREVENTION

Fratricide is as old as warfare itself, a complex problem that defies simple solutions. Fratricide can be broadly defined as the employment of friendly weapons and munitions, with the intent to kill the enemy or destroy his equipment or facilities, that results in unforeseen and unintentional death or injury to friendly personnel. This appendix focuses on actions leaders can take with current resources to reduce the risk of fratricide.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Magnitude of the Problem F-1 Section II. Risk Identification and Preventive Measures F-2 Section III. Risk Assessment F-3 Section IV. Fratricide Reduction Measures F-5 Section V. Fratricide Risk Considerations (OPORD Format).... F-6

SECTION I. MAGNITUDE OF THE PROBLEM

The modern battlefield is more lethal unintentionally and destroyed in a matter than any in history. The tempo of of seconds. operations is rapid, and the nonlinear nature of the battlefield creates command Added to this is the problem of and control challenges for all unit battlefield obscuration, which becomes a leaders. critical consideration whenever thermal sights are the primary source of target identification. Rain, dust, fog, smoke, and The accuracy and lethality of modern snow degrade identification capability by weapons make it possible to engage and reducing the intensity and clarity of destroy targets at these extended ac- thermal images. quisition ranges. At the same time, however, the ability of US forces to On the battlefield, positive visual acquire targets using thermal imagery and identification cannot be the sole other sophisticated sighting systems engagement criteria at ranges beyond exceeds our ability to accurately identify 1,000 meters. Situational awareness is the these targets as friend or foe. As a result, key; it must be maintained throughout an friendly elements can be engaged operation.

F-1 FM 71-3

SECTION II. RISK IDENTIFICATION AND PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Reduction of fratricide risk begins understand the definitions and purpose of during the planning phase of an operation operational graphics and the techniques and continues throughout preparation and of their employment. See FM 101-5-1 for execution. Risk identification must be the definitions of each type of graphic conducted at all levels during each phase; control measure. the results then should be clearly communicated up and down the chain of PREPARATION PHASE command so that risk assessment can begin. This section covers considerations The following factors may cause that influence risk identification; it also fratricide risks to become evident during focuses on measures the platoon leader rehearsals: can implement to make the identification process more effective and to help • Number and type of rehearsals. prevent friendly fire incidents from • Training and proficiency levels of occurring. Section III covers the risk units and individuals. assessment process. Section IV lists additional fratricide reduction measures • The habitual relationships between and guidelines. units conducting the operation. • The physical readiness (endurance) PLANNING PHASE of the troops conducting the operation. A plan that is thoroughly developed and understood helps to minimize Confirmation briefs and rehearsals fratricide risk. The following are primary tools in identifying and considerations help indicate the potential reducing fratricide risk during the for fratricide in a given operation: preparation phase. The following are some considerations for their use: • Clarity of the enemy situation. • Clarity of the friendly situation. • Use confirmation briefs or • Clarity of the commander's intent. rehearsals to ensure subordinates • Complexity of the operation. know where fratricide risks exist • Planning time available at each and what to do to reduce or level. eliminate the risk. • Backbriefs ensure subordinates Graphics are a basic tool that understand the commander's intent. commanders at all levels use to clarify They often highlight areas of their intent, add precision to their confusion, complexity, or planning concept, and communicate their plan to errors. subordinates. As such, graphics can be a • The type of rehearsal conducted very useful tool in reducing the risk of determines what types of risks are fratricide. Commanders at all levels must identified.

F-2 FM 71-3

• Rehearsals should extend to all • Vehicle density on the battlefield. levels of command and involve all • The tempo of the battle. key players.

EXECUTION PHASE Maintaining situational awareness at all levels and at all times is another key During execution, in-stride risk to fratricide reduction as an operation assessment and reaction are necessary to progresses. Units must develop and overcome unforeseen fratricide risk employ effective techniques and SOPs to situations. The following are factors to consider when assessing fratricide risks: aid leaders and crewmen in this process. These techniques include— • Intervisibility between adjacent units. • Amount of battlefield obscuration. • Monitoring on the next higher net. • Ability or inability to positively • Radio cross-talk between units. identify targets. • Accurate position reporting and • Similarities and differences in navigation. equipment, vehicles, and uniforms among friendly and enemy forces. • Training and use/exchange of LOs.

SECTION III. RISK ASSESSMENT

Risk assessment must be conducted low, medium, or high, and assign a point whenever fratricide risks factors are value to each (one point for low risk, identified. It must take place at all levels two for medium risk, three for high during each phase of operations. As with risk). Add the point values for the risk identification, the results of the overall fratricide assessment score. Use assessment must be passed on to all levels the resulting score only as a guide, of the chain of command so that fratricide however. Your final assessment must reduction measures can be developed and be based both on observable risk implemented. Refer to Section IV for factors like those on the worksheet specific reduction measures. and on your "feel" for the in- tangible factors affecting the operation. Figure F-l is a worksheet for Note that descriptive terms are listed only evaluating fratricide risk in the context of in the low- and high-risk columns of the mission requirements. The worksheet lists worksheet. Your assessment of each six mission-accomplishment factors that factor will determine whether the risk affect the risk of fratricide, along with matches one of these extremes or lies related considerations for each factor. somewhere between them as a medium Assess the potential risk in each area as risk.

F-3 FM 71-3

FACTORS LOW (1) MEDIUM <2) HIGH <3)

UNDERSTAND PLAN -CDR'S INTENT CLEAR < > FOGGY -COMPLEXITY SIMPLE < > COMPLEX -ENEMY SITUATION KNOWN < > UNKNOWN -FRIENDLY SITUATION CLEAR < > UNCLEAR -ROE CLEAR < > UNCLEAR

2. ENVIRONMENT -INTERVISIBILITY FAVORABLE < > UNFAVORABLE -OBSCURATION CLEAR < > OBSCURED -BATTLE TEMPO SLOW < > FAST -POSITIVE TARGET ID 100% 0%

CONTROL MEASURES -CMD RELATIONSHIPS ORGANIC JOINT/ COMBINED -AUDIO LOUD/CLEAR JAMMED -VISUAL WELL SEEN OBSCURED -GRAPHIC STANDARD NOT UNDERSTOOD -SOPS STANDARD NOT USED -LOs PROFICIENT UNTRAINED -LOCATION/NAVIGATION SURE UNSURE

EQUIPMENT (COMPARED TO US) -FRIENDLY SIMILAR DIFFERENT -ENEMY DIFFERENT SIMILAR

TRAINING -INDIVIDUAL PROFICIENCY MOS QUAL < > UNTRAINED -UNIT PROFICIENCY TRAINED < > UNTRAINED -REHEARSAL MULTIPLE < > NONE -HABITUAL RELATIONSHIP YES < > NO -ENDURANCE ALERT < > FATIGUED

PLANNING TIME (1/3 - 2/3 RULE) -HIGHER HQ ADEQUATE < > INADEQUATE -OWN HQ ADEQUATE < > INADEQUATE -LOWER HQ s ADEQUATE < > INADEQUATE

7. OVERALL FRATRICIDE LOW MED HIGH ASSESSMENT 26 - 46* 42 - 62* 58 - 78*

COMMANDER MAY USE NUMBERS AS THE SITUATION DICTATES. NUMBERS ALONE MAY NOT GIVE ACCURATE FRATRICIDE RISK.

Figure F-l. Fratricide risk assessment worksheet.

F-4 FM 71-3

SECTION IV. FRATRICIDE REDUCTION MEASURES

The following measures are provided • Recognize the signs of battlefield as a guide to actions that can reduce stress. Maintain unit cohesion by fratricide risk. They are not directive in taking quick, effective action to nature, nor are they intended to restrict alleviate it. initiative. Apply them as appropriate based on the specific situation and • Conduct individual, leader, and METT-T factors. collective (unit) training covering fratricide awareness, target identification and recognition, and • Identify and assess potential fratricide risks in the estimate of fire discipline. the situation. Express these risks in • Develop a simple, decisive plan. the OPORD or FRAGO. • Give complete and concise mission • Maintain situational awareness, orders. focusing on such areas as current intelligence; unit locations and • Use SOPs that are consistent with dispositions; denial areas (mine- doctrine to simplify mission orders. fields and FASCAM); contaminated Periodically review and change areas, such as improved con- SOPs as needed. ventional munition (ICM) and NBC; situation reports (SITREP); • Strive for maximum planning time and METT-T factors. for you and your subordinates. • Use common language/vocabulary • Ensure positive target identi- and doctrinally correct standard fication. Review vehicle and terminology and control measures, weapons ID cards. Know at what such as FSCLs, zone of ranges and under what conditions engagement, and RFLs. positive identification of friendly vehicles and weapons is possible. • Ensure thorough coordination is conducted. • Establish a command climate that stresses fratricide prevention. • Plan for and establish effective Enforce fratricide prevention communications. measures, emphasize the use of doctrinally sound TTPs. Ensure • Plan for collocation of CPs constant supervision when whenever it is appropriate to the executing orders and performing all mission, such as during a passage tasks and missions to standard. of lines.

F-5 FM 71-3

• Designate and employ LOs as • Be in the right place at the appropriate. right time. Use position location and navigation devices (GPS • Ensure ROE are clear. and POSNAV); know your location and the locations of • Include fratricide risk as a key adjacent units (left, right, leading, factor in terrain analysis (observation and fields of fire, and follow-on); and synchronize cover, concealment, obstacles, key tactical movement. terrain, avenues of approach [OCOKA]). • Include discussion of fratricide • Conduct rehearsals whenever the incidents in after-action reviews situation allows time to do so. (AAR).

SECTION V. FRATRICIDE RISK CONSIDERATIONS (OPORD FORMAT)

This section, which parallels the five- reduction measures are included in the paragraph OPORD, contains key factors order. It is not a strict guide. The factors and considerations in fratricide reduction. and considerations are listed where they This is not a change to the OPORD would likely appear in the OPORD, but format; rather, it should be used during they may warrant evaluation during OPORD development to ensure fratricide preparation of other paragraphs.

1. Situation.

a. Enemy forces.

(1) Are there similarities among enemy and friendly equipment and uniforms that could lead to fratricide?

(2) What languages do enemy forces speak? Could these contribute to fratricide risk?

(3) What are the enemy's deception capabilities and his past record of deception activities?

(4) Do you know the locations of enemy forces?

F-6 FM 71-3

b. Friendly forces.

(1) Among the allied forces, are there differences (or similarities with enemy forces) in language, uniform, and equipment that could increase fratricide risk during combined operations?

(2) Could differences in equipment and uniforms among US armed forces increase fratricide risk during joint operations?

(3) What differences in equipment and uniforms can be stressed to help prevent fratricide?

(4) What is the friendly deception plan?

(5) What are the locations of your unit and adjacent units (left, right, leading, follow-on)?

(6) What are the locations of neutrals and noncombatants?

c. Own forces.

(1) What is the status of training activities? What are the levels of individual, crew, and unit proficiency?

(2) Will fatigue be a factor for friendly forces during the operation? Has an effective sleep plan been developed?

(3) Are friendly forces acclimatized to the AO?

(4) What is the age (new, old, or mix) and condition of equipment in friendly units? What is the status of new equipment training?

(5) What are the expected MOPP requirements for the operation?

d. Attachments and detachments.

(1) Do attached elements understand pertinent information regarding enemy and friendly forces?

(2) Are detached elements supplied this pertinent information by their gaining units?

F-7 FM 71-3

e. Weather.

(1) What are the expected visibility conditions (light data and precipitation) for the operation?

(2) What effect will heat and cold have on soldiers, weapons, and equipment?

f. Terrain.

(1) Do you know the topography and vegetation (such as urban, mountainous, hilly, rolling, flat, desert, swamp/marsh, prairie/steppe, jungle, dense forest, open woods) of the expected AO?

(2) Have you evaluated the terrain using the factors of OCOKA?

2. Mission. Is the mission, as well as all associated tasks and purposes, clearly understood?

3. Execution.

a. Task organization.

(1) Has the unit worked under this task organization before?

(2) Are SOPs compatible with the task organization (especially with attached units)?

(3) Are special markings or signals (for example, cats' eyes, chemlites, or panels) needed for positive identification of uniforms and equipment?

(4) What special weapons and/or equipment are to be used? Do they look or sound like enemy weapons and/or equipment?

b. Concept of the operation.

(1) Maneuver. Are main and supporting efforts identified to ensure awareness of fratricide risks and prevention measures?

(2) Fires (direct and indirect).

(a) Are priorities of fires identified?

(b) Have target lists been developed?

F-8 FM 71-3

(d) Have locations of denial areas (minefields, FASCAM) and contaminated areas (ICM, NBC) been identified?

(e) Are the locations of all supporting fire targets identified in the OPORD/OPLAN overlays?

(f) Are aviation and CAS targets clearly identified? Have signals been established to positively identify these targets for the aircraft? Have ACAs and SEAD plans been developed?

(g) Has the direct-fire plan been developed and synchronized with the FS plan?

(h) Have FPFs been designated?

(i) Have you identified and verified sector limits?

(j) Have executors for each target been assigned and do they understand when and where to shoot? Can they observe the target?

(k) Are the observers surveyed in or are they using a map spot? Target location errors can cause big problems.

(l) Do all leaders and executors understand where the FSCMs are and when they go into effect? Rehearsal is the key.

(m) Can the FSO hear what targets are being called on the maneuver nets?

(n) Have all targets been rehearsed with the executors and the FA battalion?

(o) Does the reinforcing or GS reinforcing FA have all the proper graphics and understand where they fit in? Did they attend the rehearsal?

(p) Have restrictions on specific munitions been established and does everyone know where they are planned and emplaced?

(q) What is the minimum safe distance for the shell/fuze/delivery system? Are the fine requirements for accurate predicted fire met or do we have to adjust fire?

F-9 FM 71-3

(3) Engineer tasks.

(a) Are friendly minefields, including FASCAM and ICM dud- contaminated areas, known?

(b) Are obstacles identified, along with the approximate time needed for reduction/breaching of each?

(4) Tasks to each subordinate unit. Are friendly forces identified, as appropriate, for each subordinate maneuver element?

(5) Tasks to CS/CSS units. Have locations of friendly forces been reported to CS/CSS units?

(6) Coordinating instructions.

(a) Will rehearsals be conducted? Are they necessary? Are direct and indirect fires included?

(b) Is a confirmation brief necessary?

(c) Are appropriate control measures clearly explained and illustrated in the OPORD and overlays? Have they been disseminated to everyone who has a need to know? What is the plan for using these control measures to synchronize the battle and prevent fratricide?

(d) Are the locations for division and corps slice elements within the brigade battle space posted and disseminated?

(e) Have target/vehicle identification drills been practiced?

(f) Do subordinate units know the immediate action, drill, or signal for "CEASE FIRE" or "I AM FRIENDLY" if they come under unknown or friendly fire? Is there a backup action?

(g) Is guidance in handling dud munitions, such as ICM and cluster bomb units (CBU), included?

4. Service Support.

a. Are train locations and identification markings known by everyone?

b. Do medical and maintenance personnel know the routes between train units?

F-10 FM 71-3

5. Command and Signal.

a. Command.

(1) What are the locations of the commander and key staff members?

(2) What is the chain of command and the succession of command?

b. Signal.

(1) Do instructions include backup code words and visual signals for all special and emergency events?

(2) Do instructions cover how to identify friendly forces to aircraft?

(3) Are SOI distributed to all units with a need to know, such as higher, lower, adjacent, leading, and follow-on elements?

F-11

FM 71-3

APPENDIX G BRIGADE PRERO AFLOAT OPERATIONS

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Fundamentals G-1 Section II. Deployment G-3 Section III. Theater Reception and Onward Movement G-8 Section IV. Redeployment G-13 Section V. Commander’s Guide to Deployment Operations.. G-14 Section VI. N-Hour Sequence G-19

SECTION I. FUNDAMENTALS

GENERAL CAPABILITIES

The PREPO AFLOAT armored Capabilities of the PREPO AFLOAT brigade is organized to fight successful armored brigade are— engagements on any battlefield. It combines the efforts of subordinate battalions to perform tactical tasks as part • Conduct sustained operations in all of a joint task force or combined force. environments. The key to successful operations is the brigade’s ability to synchronize maneuver • Accomplish rapid movement. battalions and integrate CS and CSS combat multipliers in support of the overall brigade effort. • Exploit success and pursue a defeated enemy as part of a larger The primary mission of the armored formation. brigade is to close with and destroy forces using its mobility, firepower, and • Conduct limited security shock effect. It defeats enemy assaults by operations (screens and guards). defensive fires, obstacles, mines, and counterattacks. The armored brigade is • Conduct defensive operations or also capable of conducting operations delays in sector over large areas. across the range of military operations (peacetime, conflict, and war). • Conduct offensive operations.

G-1 FM 71-3

LIMITATIONS environments armored forces have historically operated in include— Due to the density of organic tracked vehicles, the armored brigade has the • A jungle environment during the following limitations: Vietnam War. • Dense jungle and forests, steep and • The South Pacific in support of rugged terrain, and significant amphibious operations during water obstacles restrict mobility. World War II. • Urbanized terrain impedes • An urban environment during maneuver. World War II, Panama in 1989-90, and Somalia in 1993. • Substantial numbers of heavy equipment limit strategic mobility. • The desert during World War II and the Gulf War. • Consumes significant amounts of supplies, especially Classes III, V, and IX. Tactical missions of the armored brigade involved in a PREPO AFLOAT The PREPO AFLOAT armored operation, both in war and OOTW, brigade may be deployed independently; include the following: however, it is normálly deployed incrementally as part of a larger force. • Engage and destroy enemy forces The brigade is assisted by the installation, using mobility, firepower, and its higher headquarters, other armed shock effect in coordination with services, the host nation, and units other arms. already in the AO. The PREPO AFLOAT brigade must— • Conduct offensive and defensive missions. • Reassemble rapidly into a division- • Provide security, reconnaissance, size force. and antiarmor firepower to a light • Establish the basic battle command infantry, airmobile, airborne and liaison functions with the division, or the USMC, during a responsible headquarters estab- CONOP. lished in theater. • Expand and sustain a lodgment for follow-on forces in coordination ROLE with other arms and services. The PREPO AFLOAT armored • Reinforce a lodgment established brigade uses its unique capabilities to by the Army early entry forces or conduct combat operations across the by USMC amphibious assault range of military operations. It is required units. to operate in a wide range of political, military, and geographical environments. • Augment an amphibious deploy- Some examples of this wide range of ment or operation.

G-2 FM 71-3

• Provide an armored force capability • Reinforce an ally with a credible to a Marine Expeditionary Force force prior to hostilities, and sustain during a CONOP. relations with allies and coalition partners through routine exercises • Establish a sizable combat force to and operations. enable closure of additional forces and support a higher commander’s operation or campaign plan. • Conduct a show of force.

SECTION II. DEPLOYMENT

GENERAL Transportation Command (USCINC- TRANS) and other supporting agencies. During the predeployment (alert) The Air Mobility Command pre-positions planning phase, unit commanders ensure an air terminal movement control team unit personnel, supplies, and selected at the aerial port of debarkation (APOD) equipment are prepared for deployment. with the port support activity. This They update their automated unit provides unity of effort and accomp- equipment list to reflect actual personnel lishes the required interface with the port and equipment deployment posture. They operator to clear Army personnel and coordinate the disposition of their units’ cargo from the port. The Military Sealift remain-behind equipment, and coordinate Command (MSC) plans and executes sea with the installation commander for deployments. Reports of the movement support required for deployment that is are made through normal chains of not within the unit’s organic capability. command in accordance with joint operation planning and execution system During movement to the point of procedures. embarkation (POE) phase, units move to the POE IAW port call messages. During Conduct of Air Deployment the strategic lift phase, units move to the theater of operations in a flow sequenced Air deployment is used to transport to facilitate and support the efficient personnel and selected supplies and offload of the PREPO AFLOAT ships. equipment from an aerial port of embarkation (APOE) to an APOD in the AO. The time required to transport the ORGANIZATION FOR CONTROL OF force depends on the size of the force, DEPLOYMENT aircraft availability, distance, and throughput considerations. The airlift is US Transportation Command accomplished by the Air Mobility (USTRANSCOM), as the strategic Command aboard strategic aircraft and deployment manager, is responsible to civil contract carriers. The Air Mobility coordinate the air and sea deployment. Command determines airflow routing and Army forces coordinate with the unified airflow based on the approved time- command and US Commander-in-Chief phased force deployment data.

G-3 FM 71-3

Conduct of Sea Deployment installation also coordinates updating of the automated unit equipment list. PREPO AFLOAT ships move as directed by the MSC. Ship deployment should accommodate the earliest possible Aerial Port of Embarkation embarkation of the offload preparation Operations party (OPP). The Army service component commander coordinates with The Air Mobility Command exercises USTRANSCOM (MSC) for authorization overall control of airlift operations at for OPP to embark PREPO AFLOAT APOEs. The Air Mobility Command ships. PREPO AFLOAT ships rendezvous tanker airlift control element establishes with escorts, if assigned, and conduct an airlift operations center at the airfield, transit to the marshaling area. with all information related to onload operations coordinated through the airlift operations center. DEPLOYMENT SUPPORT ORGANIZATIONS The departure airfield control group (DACG) is the primary interface with the Organizations that assist PREPO Air Force at APOEs. A DACG is AFLOAT armored brigade commanders responsible for coordinating and during deployment are discussed in the controlling the outloading of units for following paragraphs. deployment or redeployment. A DACG should be pre-positioned as early as possible at the arrival/departure airfield. Movement Control Center The DACG is responsible for receiving deploying equipment from the units at the The movement control center (MCC) APOE; coordinating with the tanker coordinates transportation support to airlift control element to ensure that assist the deploying unit in moving to the cargo and personnel are properly prepared POE. for air shipment; and for delivering cargo to the ready line. Further responsibilities are outlined in FM 55-12. Installations Coordination between the moving Military installations play a key role unit, arrival/departure airfield control group (A/DACG), and tanker airlift in the alert and deployment pro- control element (TALCE) is critical to an cess. CONUS replacement centers are orderly deployment of airlift aircraft installations assigned a mobilization through the APOE/APOD. The arrival of mission. The installation commanders at unit equipment and personnel for onload or in the vicinity of POEs provide must be sequenced to avoid bottlenecks at materiel handling equipment, trans- the APOE. Army forces/armored brigade portation, security, and other support as commanders provide an officer at the requested by the deploying unit. The APOE to coordinate with A/DACG and

G-4 FM 71-3

TALCE the arrival of unit equipment and port and conducting operations to personnel. support the deployment of military forces. Command authority If required, an ammunition accoun- remains with the team until the tability element may be deployed to the TTU commander arrives and APOE to provide technical assistance, assumes responsibility. quality assurance, and safety support • TTUs are the MTMC’s traffic during the uploading of ammunition. management representative at the These elements also serve to provide seaport with the specific asset visibility and accountability to the responsibility of monitoring DOD national inventory control point and the commercial contract cargo CINC. movements to include unit equipment, resupply, and retrograde Seaport of Embarkation Operations shipments. The TTUs provide MTMC with the capability to The Military Traffic Management expand the number of ports Command (MTMC) exercises overall available for sustained seaport responsibility for CONUS and selected operations. The TTU conducts outside CONUS (OCONUS) sea ports. water terminal operations at MTMC operates the port and supervises established commercial ports in the operation of post support activity which existing equipment and (PSA) assigned to the various ports. manpower are available to perform actual terminal operations. MTMC provides the following at other than civil ports: Port Support Activity

• Deployment control units are non- The port support activity (PSA) is a deployable Forces Command temporary military augmentation organi- (FORSCOM) or MTMC organiza- zation comprised of personnel with tions that assist deploying units specific skills that aid the port with deployment requirements. commander in receiving, processing, and • MTMC Tiger Team is designed to clearing cargo at both the SPOE and the temporarily operate a seaport of seaport of debarkation (SPOD). Stateside embarkation (SPOE) until the installations are delegated specific ports transportation terminal unit (TTU) to which they must provide the PSA and is fully operational. When alerted, other logistic support for deploying the Tiger Team immediately personnel. Installation commanders deploys to the SPOE to coordinate responsible for deployments should not, contracts, set up operations, and where practical, task deploying units to begin receiving cargo. The support the PSA organization. The PSA is team’s composition is determined under OPCON of the port commander. by MTMC based on mission requirements. On activation, the The PSA ensures that the equipment team is responsible for opening the of deploying units is ready to be loaded

G-5 FM 71-3 onto vessels. PSA functions may include that use PREPO AFLOAT operations performing maintenance, correcting should consider the following activities as configured equipment loads, providing part of their planning and preparation: security for sensitive cargo, and driving requirements within the marshaling area. • Establish, develop, train, and refine alert notification The PSA establishes the necessary procedures. communications to ensure the proper flow • Conduct periodic operational of cargo and provides daily operational readiness inspections. reports of cargo received, maintenance performed, and operational problems to • Inspect and maintain overseas the port commander. movement packers per division and Army regulations. FORCE PROJECTION OPERATIONS • Maintain and refine packing lists and load plans. PREPO AFLOAT force projection • Prepare hand receipts and turnover operations follow a general sequence, of PREPO AFLOAT equipment. although the stages often overlap in space • Maintain effective family support and time. These operations seldom begin group structures. with a clear idea of the entire package or purpose. Often, deployment requirements • Coordinate required PAO/media develop over time and with adjustments. interface. Enemy actions further change the • Establish a rear-detachment struc- equation. PREPO AFLOAT force ture and identify procedures for projection operations do not end when the rear-detachment operations. brigade arrives in theater. They end when the mission is completed and the last The critical stage of predeployment soldier returns to home station. activities begins when the brigade is alerted for a PREPO AFLOAT CONOP. Predeployment Activities The objective for the brigade commander and staff is to task organize the brigade Predeployment activities include the and quickly develop and refine planning and preparation for an eventual operational concepts. The need to plan PREPO AFLOAT operation prior to and prepare for a strategic deployment is notification, and those actions undertaken a particularly demanding aspect of this upon notification that lead to the actual stage. deployment. Successful PREPO AFLOAT operations rely on trained, equipped, and The PREPO AFLOAT CONOP sustained units and soldiers. The brigade actually begins when the unit is notified METL should reflect tasks associated to deploy. The division or other higher with conducting any CONOP. Training headquarters of the brigade initiates should emphasize critical tasks associated execution. This execution sequence is with CONOP and PREPO AFLOAT called the N-hour sequence and is operations. Brigades assigned missions discussed in Section VI of this appendix.

G-6 FM 71-3

Echelonment of Forces technical representative. These priorities define the objectives for offload Echeloning is organizing the units for preparation by the OPP. movement. Generally, the brigade organizes into the four echelons described The OPP is responsible for preparing below. the ship’s offload systems, lighting, and embarked supplies and equipment for Offload Preparation Party offload. OPP responsibilities include initial depreservation and preparation of The offload preparation party (OPP) is supplies and equipment. The OPP must be a temporary task organization that thoroughly familiar with the consists of maintenance, embarkation configuration of the ship and the ship’s personnel, and equipment operators from load plans. the PREPO AFLOAT armored brigade and support elements. The OPP’s task is The OPP consists of representatives to prepare the equipment onboard the from all units of the deploying force. PREPO AFLOAT ships for debarkation at Personnel within an OPP are organized the SPOD. Once alerted, the OPP deploys into teams capable of operating to join the PREPO AFLOAT ships prior independently aboard each ship. Each to their sailing, during transit, or when team is functionally organized and has a the ships arrive at the SPOD. Ideally, the team captain who is responsible for OPP OPP should deploy to join the PREPO functions aboard that ship. AFLOAT ships at least 96 hours (four days) prior to SPOD closure. If this is not feasible, the OPP should be positioned in Advance Party the marshaling area and aboard the PREPO AFLOAT ships as soon as An advance party is formed from the possible. brigade, division, and echelon above division support elements. The advance On arrival aboard a PREPO AFLOAT party also includes the US Army ship, the OPP OIC reports to the PREPO Armament, Munitions, and Chemical AFLOAT ship master to obtain Command (USAMCCOM) ammunition specific directions concerning shipboard support team. The ammunition support activities. The OPP’s responsibilities and team provides accountability and priorities are established by the supported visibility of ammunition arriving in CINC/Army forces and must be in concert theater. The primary tasks of the advance with the requirements established by party are to arrange for the reception of the ship’s master. The relationship the main body and airlifted elements, between the OPP and the ship’s master rendezvous with the PREPO AFLOAT parallels that of an embarked unit ships to continue depreservation commander and the commanding officer procedures, and assist in port support and of amphibious ships. The OIC of the OPP discharge operations. The advance party conveys the offload priorities, estab- deploys before the main body, and should lished by the CINC/Army forces include (as a minimum) battery teams, commander, to the PREPO AFLOAT fuel handlers, drivers (wheeled and ship’s master and contracting officer tracked), and property book and supply

G-7 FM 71-3 personnel. Upon arrival, the commander’s consistent with the size of the force as it advance party assumes command of the builds in theater. Forces should arrive in OPP. theater no more than 24 hours prior to arrival of the first PREPO AFLOAT ship. Main Body Rear Echelon Force The main body is the balance of forces that remain after the advance party has deployed. The deployment of the main This is the remainder of the brigade body is sequenced to receive equipment that does not deploy. The rear echelon and supplies, move to the tactical force assists the advance party and main assembly area, and prepare for continued body with their deployment from home operations. The main body’s flow must be station, establishes the rear echelon uninterrupted to permit expeditious detachment, and ensures the account- closure, reception, and onward move- ability of nondeploying assets and ment. The logistical support must be equipment.

SECTION III. THEATER RECEPTION AND ONWARD MOVEMENT

GENERAL • Coordinating arrival and offload of airlifted elements. Theater reception and onward movement is a crucial phase of a PREPO • Providing personnel, equipment, AFLOAT operation. The Army forces and transportation to clear the commander is responsible for theater ports, move forces to final reception and onward movement destination, document actions, and operations that include— provide reports. • Providing communications and • Preparing the reception and security. onward movement plan. • Providing initial life support. • Synchronizing air movement and • Assisting the PREPO AFLOAT PREPO AFLOAT ship arrival. armored brigade in preparing for • Establishing operating locations its operational mission. and facilities in the marshaling area. The marshaling area is an area of • Coordinating arrival and discharge sufficient size and facilities (airfields, of equipment and supplies from the ports, beaches, staging and assembly PREPO AFLOAT ships (in port, areas) to perform the complex tasks of across a beach, or a combination of arrival, ofhoad, equipment and personnel both). linkup and staging, supply distribution.

G-8 FM 71-3 assembly, and preparation of forces for COMMENCEMENT AND employment. DISESTABLISHMENT LOGISTICS SUPPORT ELEMENT The theater reception and onward The US Army Materiel Command movement phase begins on arrival of the (USAMC) provides the logistics support first PREPO AFLOAT ship or the first elements (LSE) to deploy to the aircraft of the main body at the marshaling area. Early LSE deployment designated APOD/SPOD. This phase ends is necessary to provide maintenance when— technical assistance, equipment accountability and transfer, as well as • Adequate equipment and supplies other logistics support as needed. The are offloaded and issued to LSE provides a current tactical standard awaiting units. Army management information system • Command and control communica- (STAMIS) baseline and a printed hand tions are established. receipt by unique unit identification code. The LSE is normally task organized after • Units have moved to the tactical issuance of the WO and deployment of assembly area. the concept for deployment. LSE (minus) • The Army forces commander should be programmed early within the reports that all essential elements time-phased force deployment data and of the armored brigade have will accompany and receive initial life attained combat readiness. support from the Army Transportation Composite Group. The PREPO AFLOAT Simultaneous or subsequent tactical contingency force provides an LO to the operations by the brigade and movements LSE. As the theater matures, the LSE to those operations are not considered must continue to receive life support from part of the PREPO AFLOAT operation. the theater base. OFFLOAD PREPARATION PARTY The United States Army Medical TRANSITION FROM DISCHARGE Materiel Agency (USAMMA) is provided an LSE for coordination and control of MISSION Class VIII supplies. The USAMMA LSE depends on Army forces for life support The OPP remains with the ship until until the deployment of the Theater discharge operations are complete. Medical Materiel Management Center During offloading, team members remain and/or a medical logistics battalion. Upon aboard to form the nucleus of the completion of the mission, the USAMMA debarkation team, augmented as required LSE receives assignment instructions by contingency force personnel who from USAMMA with the senior medical arrive in the airlifted element. After the command and control organization in the ship is offloaded, OPP personnel return to theater. their parent unit.

G-9 FM 71-3

PREPO AFLOAT ACCOUNTABILITY include loading, unloading, and handling PROCEDURES in-transit supplies, equipment, and personnel between any of the various Each national inventory control point modes of transportation. Terminals are and the service item control center at the established for cargo being transferred at Army Petroleum Center accounts for and beginning, destination, and in-transit manages PREPO AFLOAT stocks. The points. standard depot system and the tactical ST AMIS maintain the custodial records Movement Control of cargo aboard each of the PREPO AFLOAT ships. A movement control element deploys with the Army Transportation Composite To facilitate rapid temporary transfer Group to coordinate the onward less Class V during deployment (such as movement of supplies, personnel, and within 48 hours), tactical STAMIS will equipment. be on board each ship. When a ship arrives at a port, stocks are discharged in Aerial Ports of Debarkation quantities as determined by the theater commander. Temporary accountability of Once the aircraft are offloaded, these stocks transfers from USAMC and personnel and cargo come under Army USAMMA to the deploying unit. forces control for reception and onward movement. The transportation composite During the redeployment phase, prior group and movement control element to returning to home station, equipment coordinate this phase. and supplies on the tactical STAMIS hardware are turned in to a designated The APOD is located within the site within the theater of operations. marshaling area and, ideally, in proximity Detailed hand-off and accountability to the SPOD. APOD operations must procedures are developed to ensure the meet requirements of the TALCE and the most effective and efficient property arrival airfield control group (AACG). transfer occurs to support the warfighter Designation of offload ramps and holding at deployment and the reconstitution of areas is accomplished jointly by the PREPO AFLOAT capability at TALCE and AACG. Holding areas are redeployment. established sufficiently clear of the offload ramps to avoid congestion and to TRANSPORTATION OPERATIONS facilitate loading passengers and equipment from the arriving units. During PREPO AFLOAT operations, Facilities are also established for AACG the Army Transportation Composite and TALCE (command and control, Group is responsible for planning and communications, and life support). executing transportation operations in the marshaling area. This includes operation Other Air Operations of the APOD/SPOD and all onward movements of personnel, supplies, and Air cargo transfer operations within equipment from the APOD and SPOD. the theater also take place at other Air Army terminal operations at the SPOD Force and Army air terminals. The Army

G-10 FM 71-3 forces may be responsible for loading and damage or loss to supplies and unloading Air Force and Army aircraft at equipment. Ports are far less susceptible forward or small austere landing fields to the effects of sea and weather that are not a regularly scheduled stop for conditions. On the other hand, port theater airlift. An Army cargo transfer operations require more interface with the company or AACG can provide this host nation and increase the likelihood of capability. encountering restrictions on handling and transporting ammunition, POL, and Arrival Airfield Control Group hazardous cargo. Civilian ship traffic, labor unions, and general port congestion The AACG is responsible for the must also be considered. reception and, in conjunction with the movement control team, for the Fixed-Port Facilities coordination of onward movement. The AACG provides an interim capability Fixed-port terminals are an improved until the arrival of the air traffic network of cargo-handling facilities movement control team. specifically designed for transfer of ocean going freight, vessel discharge Sea Ports of Debarkation operations, and port clearance. Deep-draft ocean-going vessels come alongside a PREPO AFLOAT deployment to a pier, ship, or quay and discharge cargo port with sufficient pier space and staging directly onto the apron. Most cargo is areas to accommodate the simultaneous moved into open or covered in-transit pierside offload of two or more PREPO storage to await terminal clearance. AFLOAT ships is the preferred method of Selected cargo may be discharged directly discharge. Where possible, the best to land transport. Fixed-port facilities unconstrained port in the AO should be may also have state-of-the-art facilities selected. Unconstrained ports have and equipment to support cargo discharge multiple deep draft shipping pier space, and port clearance operations. clear shipping channels, land-based cranes, and sufficient staging area. If sufficient unconstrained ports are not Unimproved Port Facilities available, then conduct discharge operations using a combination of unimproved ports (logistics-over-the-shore Unimproved port facilities are those [LOTS] and/or over a bare beach). that are less productive than a fixed-port facility. Any one or a combination of the Port Operations following conditions qualifies a port as an unimproved port facility and may require Ocean water terminals are classified augmentation from a terminal service as fixed-port facilities, unimproved port company and shallow-draft lighting to facilities, or bare-beach facilities. discharge vessels. The conditions Offloading PREPO AFLOAT ships include— pierside in port accelerates throughput, requires less personnel than a beach • Port not designed for the type operation, and reduces the potential for cargo carried (such as containers).

o G-11 FM 71-3

• Lack of permanent fixed Port Support Activity equipment or the wrong type of equipment in working areas. The PSA is provided by the PREPO • Berth length and/or water depth AFLOAT contingency force and is alongside the berth if insufficient OPCON to the Army Transportation for the type vessel used. Composite Group. The PSA includes the OPP and additional personnel, such as • Exposure to the elements and drivers and mechanics. The PSA assists in passing traffic that hinders vessel the throughput of the PREPO AFLOAT operations. equipment. • Damaged fixed port. inland Terminal Operations Bare-Beach Operations Inland terminals are established for In bare-beach operations. Army trans-shipment of supplies, equipment, lighting is used to transport equipment and personnel along theater air, inland and cargo from ship to shore for waterways, rail, and motor transport discharge across the beach. No facilities, routes. equipment, or infrastructure may exist at the site to discharge cargo or conduct port The senior movement control element clearance operations. Beach terminals recommends terminals serving rail and require specifically selected sites where inland waterways along existing routes cargo is delivered by lighting to or across whenever sufficient lift capability cannot the beach and into marshaling yards or be provided by motor and air. onto waiting clearance transportation. POL and Ammunition Logistics-Over-the-Shore POL and ammunition should not be LOTS loading and unloading held in the port or port overflow areas, operations are conducted— but should be transported directly to the storage sites. • Over unimproved shorelines; through fixed ports partially Port Authority destroyed. If the host-nation port authority is not • Through shallow-draft ports not functioning, the MTMC or Army accessible to deep-draft shipping. Transportation Composite Group assumes • Through fixed ports that are this responsibility. The Army forces inadequate without using LOTS designate a port LO to provide capabilities. coordination between the contingency force and the host nation. The port LO advises the port authority regarding cargo For more information on LOTS, see characteristics (including hazardous Joint Pub 4-06.1. cargo) and offload requirements that may FM 71-3 impact on port activities. Additionally, Motor Transport the port LO coordinates with the host-nation support representatives regarding— The Army Transportation Composite Group provides motor transport assets to move unit equipment, supplies, and personnel to the tactical assembly area • Environmental data (tides, winds, until the corps support group (if any) is obstructions), navigational aids, established. and harbor information required for safe operations. Motor transport terminals are located • Berths and/or anchorages. at both ends and at intermediate points along line-haul routes serving as the • Tug/pilot services. connecting link between local-haul and line-haul service or where terrain • Fire fighting services. necessitates a change in the carrier or mode. Cargo transfer companies and • Pierside services. TTPs can also provide limited local- • Materiel handling equipment hauling service only in and around motor services. terminals.

SECTION IV. REDEPLOYMENT

GENERAL limited to a discussion of those areas that affect the PREPO AFLOAT force. For For PREPO AFLOAT operations, additional information on redeployment redeployment is the movement of the refer to FM 100-17. PREPO AFLOAT forces from a theater of operations to follow-on designated REDEPLOYMENT PHASES CONUS or OCONUS locations. Prior to redeployment, the PREPO AFLOAT The redeployment process begins after forces turn in all issued PREPO combat operations and reconstitution AFLOAT equipment and supplies to begins when the force closes upon the USAMC/USAMMA or designated agen- redeployment assembly area. During redeployment, contracts for transportation cies. They retain to accompany troops of materiel and maintenance may be used (TAT) and not authorized pre-positioning extensively to regenerate the force. The (NAP) equipment and supplies. force requests the supporting movement control agency to provide movement authorization to move from the tactical This section does not discuss the total assembly area to the redeployment process of redeployment. The scope is assembly area. Redeployment for the

G-13 FM 71-3

PREPO AFLOAT forces is conducted in equipment ànd supplies to seven phases: USAMC/USAMMA. • Movement to POE. • Reconstitution for strategic movement. • Strategic lift. • Movement to redeployment assembly area. • POD reception. • Turn-in of PREPO AFLOAT • POD onward movement.

SECTION V. COMMANDER’S GUIDE TO DEPLOYMENT OPERATIONS

GENERAL The assigned deploying brigade briefs the OPP OIC and detachment OIC The OPP is a temporary task on their responsibilities and priority of organization of support personnel tasks prior to departure. Tasks are boarded on each ship prior to departure accomplished in coordination with the from its home port (siting) location to ship’s master. prepare the afloat equipment and supplies for off-load at the contingency Necessary tools, parts, and port. The task organization for the OPP differs for each vessel due to ship equipment deploy with the OPP to characteristics and equipment loads. accomplish the required tasks. Normally, the brigade commander provides one officer to serve over all as CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS the OIC of the OPP, and a subordinate OIC for each OPP detachment per ship Upon activation, the OIC of the OPP involved in the operation. makes arrangements for deployment of the OPP to meet the PREPO AFLOAT Each roll-on/roll-off ship has its ships at their home port or at a point own separate OPP element with during their transit to the SPOD. approximately 20-25 mechanics, 20-25 Ideally, the OPP should embark on the equipment operators, 5 biomedical ship at least 24 hours prior to departure. maintenance medical logistic personnel, Coordination must be made for the OPP and 25 representatives from the to be loaded onboard during transit or at transportation composite group a port along the route to the SPOD. If responsible for the discharge operation. the OPP cannot be onboard during The mechanics and vehicle operators vessel movement, it becomes part of the must be qualified to operate the brigade lead element and embarks as equipment loaded on their assigned soon as the ships arrive in the SPOD. If ships. the latter occurs, the time required to

G-14 FM 71-3 prepare the ships for off-load may be and differentials. Add fluids, if extended. required. Remove waterproofing and Upon arrival at the embarkation preservation material from point (ship siting location), the OIC of exhaust and intake openings. each ship OPP detachment reports to the Remove all packing material ship’s master and coordinates required that impedes proper equip- life support and priority of tasks ment/vehicle operation. assigned to the OPP detachment. Check the fuel filter; ensure the element is installed and service- The applicable Army service able. Add fuel additive to fuel component coordinates through tanks as required. Check belt USTRANSCOM with the MSC tension; adjust if necessary. concerning the deployment of the OPP Install or activate batteries. and required support at embarkation, Correct starting procedures must transit, and arrival at the SPOD. be used to avoid damage to the Helicopter support may be needed from electrical system. Established the home station embarkation port to fly safety procedures and precautions the OPP element to the ship location if must be followed when activating under sail. dry batteries. Electrolyte causes serious injury if it comes in Each OPP detachment at the earliest contact with the body. Use opportunity, under the control of the protective clothing and ship’s master, should become familiar equipment when handling acid or with the vessel’s load plan and location batteries. Flush overflows or of all equipment. The ship’s master spilled acid from vehicle provides guidance as to maintenance surfaces. These instructions also limitations due to safety. Unlashing of apply to batteries supplying cargo and equipment during movement power to auxiliary equipment on is not allowed. If civilian maintenance vehicles. The ship master’s contractors are on board, the OPP approval is required before detachment augments the civilian batteries are installed or contractor to accomplish their assigned activated. OPP tasks. After the “before operational checks” have been completed, OPP tasks include the following: and with the approval of the ship’s master, start the engine, • Inspect tires (visually) for and after a warm-up period, underinflation; add air if accelerate gradually to required. Visually inspect tracks approximately one-half full for excessive slack. If required, power (one-half maximum perform adjustments. allowable rpm). Observe/listen to • Check for leaks in and around the engine’s response relative to the vehicle/equipment. Check noise and/or vibration. If fluid levels in engines, gear satisfactory, the vehicle or boxes, transmission, transfers, equipment is ready to operate.

G-15 FM 71-3

• Perform limited technical The OPP detachment OIC affixes the inspection of equipment to distribution tag to the lower right corner include medical. Tag any of the passenger side front windshield/ equipment that requires corner of the vehicle. The tags are color maintenance. Equipment that coded: requires maintenance is identified with a tag attached to the left • WHITE. Combat brigade (with front and rear of the piece of support base) units. equipment. The following color • GREEN. CSG units. code system is used: Based on the color of the distribution - RED TAG. Needs major tag, separation of the onboard equip- repairs. ment can be made during discharge and - YELLOW TAG. Needs minor movement into the marshaling area. In repairs or adjustment. the marshaling area, further equipment - NO TAG. Generally sorting into unit configuration is satisfactory condition. accomplished.

Secondary loads in trailers or cargo The priority for equipment beds are not tagged or inspected due to preparation is— time constraints. • Materiel handling equipment • Conduct a walk-around inspec- (forklifts, cranes). tion (if possible) to ensure all • Transportation equipment that safety requirements have been supports the throughput of met prior to placing the item in equipment and supplies (line haul service. tractors/trailers, wreckers, re- • Ensure equipment logbooks/ fuelers). record jackets are present. • Class VIII (medical). • Remainder of onboard equipment. The onboard USAMC contractor personnel assists the OPP as set forth in OPP transition at the SPOD: their contract. • The OPP force is incorporated In addition to the pre-offload into the advance party upon its preparation, the OPP is responsible for arrival at the SPOD. They assist marking vehicles for distribution to the in the discharge of onboard proper element within the brigade and equipment and supplies. corps support group (CSG) units per • The port commander has OPCON guidance issued by the assigned brigade of the PSA. The PSA includes the commander. OPP and additional personnel, such as drivers and mechanics. It The OPP OIC provides a distribution assists in the throughput of plan and appropriate distribution tags to PREPO AFLOAT equipment and each ship’s OPP detachment OIC. supplies.

G-16 FM 71-3

ACCOUNTABILITY TRANSFER and begins in-theater Class V management PROCEDURES from this data base. Ammunition stocks are issued to the brigade, CSG, and All PREPO AFLOAT materiel is managed by the Corps Materiel issued to and managed by the brigade Management Center (CMMC) IAW and other support elements as deemed Army forces logistics plan. If the appropriate by the Army forces CMMC is not established, the commander. To facilitate a rapid ammunition support team provides transition, equipment and supplies are Class V management for the theater. For issued to the brigade and other support Class V assets airlifted into theater, an elements on the tactical STAMIS element of the ammunition support team hardware. The STAMIS hardware is has a team at the APOD to identify in- uploaded with the current base line. coming stocks and report accountability Equipment and supplies are accounted data to the primary ammunition support for and managed during conflict IAW team element located at the SPOD. AR 710-2.

Class I Class VII and Other Items Requiring Property Book Procedures to be determined by the Accountability Defense Logistics Agency, USAMC, and Information Software Systems Develop- These stocks are temporarily trans- ment Center at Fort Lee. ferred from USAMC to the deploying unit via the Standard Property Book System-Redesign (SPBS-R). Temporary Class V transfer occurs using STAMIS files in SPBS-R. The deploying unit commander Each ship carrying ammunition will and USAMC representative revise the have updated data files in Standard accountability transfer to reflect the Army Ammunition System (SAAS) property book items actually issued. format containing all necessary accountability data for those Class V stocks loaded on the ship. Additionally, the ammunition support team that Class VIII deploys to the theater prior to the arrival of the PREPO AFLOAT or follow-on PREPO AFLOAT ships carry the ammunition ships will have a SAAS following types of Class VIII materiel: computer loaded with the specific Class V data of each ship carrying • Medical equipment and materiel Class V. Upon arrival, the ship SAAS sets. disk is provided to the ammunition • Recommended stockage lists. support team to ensure exact data match. The ammunition support team then • Other individual items of medical establishes and reports asset visibility equipment.

G-17 FM 71-3

Each ship loaded with medical personnel from the supporting division materiel will have a data file in the or corps should deploy as members of battle book with complete inventory the OPP with the necessary tools and data for the materiel loaded on that ship. test equipment to place all medical The data files will be in a format that is equipment into operation. compatible with the Theater Army Medical Management Information System Medical Supply and Medical Assembly modules. The files also All Other Classes of Supplies provide the gaining unit visibility of component shortages and exclusionary These stocks are issued by USAMC items (items not packed due to special on the tactical STAMIS. Issue occurs storage requirements) within all medical using STAMIS files for Unit Level equipment sets, medical materiel sets, Logistics System, Standard Army and recommended stockage lists. Maintenance Systems, Standard Army Retail Supply System-1 Interim The USAMMA LSE deploys to the (SARSS-1[I]), Standard Army Retail theater prior to the arrival of the PREPO Supply System-Objective, and Direct AFLOAT ships. The USAMMA LSE Support Unit Standard Supply System- updates the data file for each ship as Desktop III. The deploying unit required prior to the transfer of commander and USAMC representative accountability to the gaining unit’s revise the accountability transfer to property accountability element. The reflect the equipment and supplies USAMMA LSE directs the flow of actually issued. inbound exclusionary item packages from the APOD to the gaining unit. Additionally, the USAMMA LSE Note. The unit commander, at his provides the gaining unit(s) with quality option, may elect to take control information, such as shelf-life less than the total quantity extensions. The Food and Drug of equipment and supplies Administration recalls and suspends loaded on or discharged medical supplies. Limited technical from the ships. USAMC guidance for medical supplies is retains accountability for all provided by the USAMMA LSE. equipment and supplies not Medical maintenance and logistics issued. FM 71-3

SECTION VI. N-HOUR SEQUENCE

CONOPS begin when the unit is notified to deploy. The division or other higher headquarters of the brigade initiates planning. This planning sequence is called the N-hour sequence.

Note. The following example is for a brigade that is directed to deploy as part of a division alert force. This sequence is developed around the deployment of an initial ready company (IRC) in 18 hours, a division ready force (DRF) in 48 hours, and a division ready brigade (DRB) in 72 hours.

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRF DRB DIV 001 N+0 Division receives notification X X and notifies the appropriate units per SOP. 002 Division begins to recall and assemble personnel. 003 Division transportation officer (DTO) establishes liaison with supporting transportation operations agencies. 004 Provost marshal office is notified to open any needed installation gates. 101 N+l DRB representative is briefed on available information at the EOC. 102 N+l.5 OPSEC and physical security measures are initiated. MI assets conduct an OPSEC and classified information sweep of the EOC and other sensitive areas.

103 MPs report to brigade EOC. 201 N+2 Separate battalions activate EOCs and enter the division command net.

G-19 FM 71-3

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRF DRB DIV 202 Separate battalions activate local security measures for headquarters buildings and motor pools per unit SOP. 203 DRB S2 identifies required map sheets (scale) and quantities and provides requirements to G2. 204 DRB and separate battalions X dispatch LO to division EOC. 205 DTO/ITO begins coordination X for air transportation. 206 DTO/ITO coordinates with G3 Ops to evaluate transportation requests and give priority to IRC, DRF, and DRB respectively. 207 DTO/ITO initiates preplanned X IRC, DRF, and DRB ground transportation requests. Dispatches as required. 208 ITO with DTO coordination, commences preplanned pallet distribution to IRC, DRF, and DRB. 209 Battalions conduct SAEDA, OPSEC, and safety briefings. Report completion of all subelements to next higher headquarters. 210 SO designates SOI edition, key materiel, and operations codes. 211 IRC personnel draw sensitive items from arms rooms. 212 IRC personnel install combat filters in protective masks. 213 IRC barracks personnel wall lockers are banded and signed over to designated personnel. 214 IRC personnel park their POVs in a POV storage area.

G-20 FM 71-3

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRF DRB DIV 215 N+2.5 Battalions submit personnel STATREPs to brigade EOC current as of N+2. 301 N+3 DISCOM provides two 88M X (MOS) and one forklift operator to the IRC commander. 302 Units report number of personnel X X assigned and number signed in. Provide a shortage list, by name. 401 N+4 N+4 briefing to command group, X unit commanders, and principal staff. 402 Make the following decisions X NLT the conclusion of the N+4 briefing with the command group: • Are the IRC, DRF and DRB to deploy? • Is the div(-) to deploy? • What is the CG approved task org? • What modes of travel will the DRF, DRB, and div(-) use? • Are climate clothing, equipment, or immunizations required? • Which division CP package will deploy? • Is linguistic support required? • Recall TDY, leave, and special duty (SD) personnel? • Control local telephone access? • What are the LO requirements to higher headquarters?

G-21 FM 71-3

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRF DRB DIV 403 Issue FRAGOs to IRC, DRF, and DRB based on N+4 decisions. 404 Battalions notify brigade EOC of X nonessential phone lines to be disconnected. EOC informs DOIM. 405 DOL opens ASPs for issue of Class V and coordinates required support. 406 G3 provides guidance on packing X list for contingency area. 407 N+4.5 Battalions provide SITREP. X X X 408 DRB reviews current unit family X assistance plan. 501 N+5 Transportation reports to DRB X for movement of IRC personnel to APOE. 502 Units pick up SOI packages from X X X respective SOs. 503 Battalions begin preparation for X X overseas movement ( POM) by exception. Screen 100% of personnel. DRB SI reports the number of exceptions that need Gl/AG, JAG, medical, and finance support. 504 G3/G4 identify vehicles not painted with paint scheme and establishes a priority for painting. 505 Battalions identify and forward X X X any supplemental support requirements. 506 DTO/ITO verifies USAF aircraft X flow schedule and coordinates any critical times. 507 Battalions scheduled to deploy provide brigade EOC with lists of mission essential equipment shortfalls. 508 Draw IRC ammunition package X and transport to APOE.

G-22 FM 71-3

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRF DRB DIV 509 Back-up secure communications for the EOC and the APOE are provided. 601 N+6 Review all actions. Complete all X X X N+6 actions and, until ordered, conduct an operational halt, (except the IRC). 602 Initiate packing of TOE X equipment IAW load plans. Report completion to EOC. 603 Forward a list of nondeployables by category. 604 DISCOM and DOL provide the EOC a material readiness report on all float assets. 605 DRB unit movement officer provides DTO a copy of unit movement plans for passengers (PAX) and equipment to deploy by air. 606 G3/DTO/ITO allocate transportation IAW N+4 decisions to DRF/DRB/DIV(-), to move personnel and equipment with respect to priority. 607 DTO/ITO in coordination with X DRB, designates transportation to move Class V to staging areas. 608 DRB initiates internal cross- leveling of equipment. 609 Inventory of TA-50 initiated. X Units draw shortage items from CIF IAW established SOPs and priorities. Report completion to the EOC. 610 Separate battalions validate X movement plans with G3/DTO/ITO. Update unit equipment listing (UEL).

OH DRB begins coordination for X logistic support requirements with DOL and DEH.

G-23 FM 71-3

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRF DRB DIV 612 D/AACG is operational at APOE. 613 Medics report to support X D/AACG. 614 PMO provides TCPs for movement of deploying units from the installation to the APOE. 615 N+6.5 Coordinate for turn-in of secret X and confidential documents with the DOIM Records Management Support Branch. Coordinate turn- in of top secret documents with the EOC. 616 Report the number of POVs to store. 617 Direct cross-leveling of equipment beyond the DRB's capability. 618 Rear detachment requirements X X and nondeployables identified and assigned to a provisional battalion. 619 Draw medical items from division medical support office (DMSO) IAW established SOPs and priorities. 701 N+7 S2 picks up maps from DMMC. 702 Begin movement to APOE. X Report arrival to EOC. 801 N+8 IRC enters isolation upon arrival at APOE. 802 Coordination meeting with DTO, MCO, and IRC commander at APOE. 803 Conduct current situation update X at APOE for the IRC. 901 N+9 D/AACG liaison commences; inspection begins in the alert holding area as the IRC arrives. 1001 N+10 Separate battalions provide name, rank, and phone number of rear detachment cdr to the EOC.

G-24 FM 71-3

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRF DRB DIV 1002 IRC/DRF report all previous tasks completed. 1003 MSB load teams and USAF conduct joint inspection and prepare to load IRC pallets and vehicles on aircraft. (Based on arrival times of aircraft.) 1004 DTO/ITO begin staging rail equipment for movement to SPOE. 1005 DRB identifies on-board ship party (OSP). 1006 DRB commence turn-in of POVs to storage area. Report completion to EOC. 1007 EOC FWD established at the APOE. 1201 N+12 Gl/AG manifest teams report to X EOC FWD at APOE. 1401 N+14 DRB draws chemical protective clothing and additional contingency items, such as special clothing and supplemental equipment. 1402 Separate battalions continue packing and initial weighing of center of balance for possible air deployment. Report completion to EOC. 1501 N+15 IRC organizes personnel in chalk order at the personnel holding area in the APOE. 1601 N+16 IRC final manifesting of personnel. 1602 Class VIII supplies and medical personnel for the OSP are identified. 1701 N+17 IRC personnel and TAT equipment loaded onto aircraft.

G-25 FM 71-3

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRF DRB DIV 1801 N+18 Wheels up for first IRC deployment aircraft followed by remaining aircraft every 20 minutes. IRC follows outload sequence until completion. 1802 MEDDAC assumes operational responsibility for troop medical clinics (TMC) upon notification. 1803 Unit status reports (USR) are updated as units deploy. 1804 DRB submits departure report and personnel daily summary per division SOP. 2401 N+24 Logistical coordination meeting with DRF/DRB, S4, G4, DISCOM, DTO, DOL, and DEH on deployment status. 2402 DRF commences preparation of X bulk cargo for movement. 2403 Separate battalions draw basic load of MREs from troop installation support activities (TISA). 2801 N+28 Class V begins arriving at DRF staging area. 2802 DRF/DRB unit personnel install combat filters in protective masks. 2803 Separate battalions submit critical vehicle and equipment shortages required for deployment. 2804 Manifests prepared. 3001 N+30 DRB requisitions and draws X NBC medical items from MEDDAC (for OSP personnel). 3002 DRB commences loading Class V ammunition and weighing and marking equipment. 3003 DRF moves to staging area and prepares vehicles for rail movement.

G-26 FM 71-3

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRE DRB DIV 3201 N+32 NBC items issued to OSP personnel. 3202 DRE loads Class V. 360'l N+36 Medics identified to support staging areas and rail sites. 3602 DRF/DRB wheeled vehicles X commence marshaling. 3603 DRB reports nondeployables to X GS/AG. Nondeployables are reassigned to the provisional battalion. 4001 N+40 OSP personal items X inventoried/receipted. OSP POV turn-in completed. 4401 N+44 Separate battalion movement officers establish liaison with PSA and DOL. 4701 N+47 DRF begins rail loading and roadmarching to the SPOE. 4801 N+48 Begin DRF rail movement to the X SPOE. 4802 PSA operational at SPOE. 4803 Inventories of personal property X consolidated and provided to installation representative. 5001 N+50 Units report residual major end X items remain under control of the garrison commander. 5301 N+53 DRF first rail load arrives at SPOE. (Depends on TDIS of SPOE.) 5401 N+54 DRF/DRB vehicles commence movement to SPOE staging area. TTU begins receipting for equipment. 5801 N+58 OSP personnel depart for SPOE X on order. 5802 DRF/DRB finalize ship and air manifests. ouui JN+ÖU DRF reports personnel ready to move to APOE.

G-27 FM 71-3

ITEM N-HOUR EVENT IRC DRF DRB DIV 6501 N+65 DRF stages combat vehicles for X loading of first ship. 7101 N+71 First DRB convoy movement to SPOE begins. 7201 N+72 First DRB rail movement to SPOE.

G-28 FM 71-3

APPENDIX H TACTICAL STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURES

CONTENTS

Page Section I. General H-1 Section II. Battle Command Procedures H-2 Section III. Standing Operating Procedures H-8 Section IV. Reports H-79

(Classification)

HEADQUARTERS

BDE DIVISION (_) (Location) (Date)

BRIGADE ( ) TACTICAL STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURES

SECTION I. GENERAL

H-1. Purpose. This TSOP prescribes guidance for conducting sustained tactical operations. Specifically, it standardizes recurring operational routines, procedures, and responsibilities executed by both organic and supporting organizational elements within the brigade.

H-2. Application/Scope. This TSOP covers only wartime operations after deployment. It does not repeat doctrine, tactics, or techniques provided in FMs, TMs, and MTPs. It applies to all organic, assigned, attached, and OPCON units. It also applies to all supporting units operating in or occupying areas within the brigade's area. All TSOP provisions apply except as modified by OPORDs and OPLANs.

H-1 FM 71-3

H-3. Directed Supporting Documents.

a. This TSOP and all subordinate TSOPs incorporate all current provisions of FMs, TMs, Army and division regulations, STANAGs, joint agreements, and status of forces agreements.

b. Each brigade staff section develops and implements standard TSOPs to govern procedures for their own functional areas. Staff section TSOPs must conform to the procedures this SOP contains.

c. Each subordinate unit publishes a TSOP that supports and conforms to the brigade TSOP. The brigade commander approves subordinate unit TSOPs.

H-4. Proponency. The brigade XO and battalion XOs are proponents for their respective TSOPs. Ensuring compliance of established TSOPs throughout the brigade is a command responsibility monitored by commanders and staffs at all levels.

H-5. Changes.

a. Submit changes through the appropriate coordinating staff officers to the brigade

XO.

b. The brigade XO coordinates all changes.

c. The brigade commander is the approval authority.

SECTION II. BATTLE COMMAND PROCEDURES

This section describes operating procedures for brigade command and control. This section in not all inclusive. It establishes the basic guidelines for procedures and operation of CPs. Subordinate units develop their own CP SOPs to conform to guidance in this TSOP.

H-6. Succession of Command.

a. Brigade succession of command is brigade commander, maneuver commanders by seniority, brigade XO, and brigade S3. If the brigade has a deputy commanding officer versus an XO, the deputy commanding officer assumes command before the maneuver commanders.

b. A new commander will notify the next higher headquarters and all subordinate headquarters of the change of the brigade commander.

H-2 FM 71-3

c. Succession will be automatic upon the commander's death, capture, or evacuation. The brigade XO should be notified as soon as possible to publish assumption of command orders.

H-7. Alternate Command Posts.

a. The brigade alternate main CP when in contact is the TAC CP until the brigade rear CP assumes duties.

b. The alternate main CP is activated when—

• The brigade's main CP's surviving elements inform the command net of attack, of destruction, or the inability to function. • A unit or element reports, and the report has been verified, that the main CP has been destroyed.

c. If the main CP is destroyed or otherwise inoperable, the following units and/or organizations assume the functions listed in Table H-l until the main CP is regenerated and operational.

d. The TAC CP's alternate CP is the command group. Activation criteria are the same as for the alternate main CP.

e. The rear CP alternate CP is the FSB CP.

Table H-l. Temporary units and organizations functions. MAIN COMMAND POST DESIGNATED ALTERNATE FUNCTION Command Center Rear Command Post Operations/Planning/A^C^ Tactical Command Post S2 Operations Fire Support Element Direct Support Artillery Battalion Engineer Engineer Battalion Air Defense Artillery Air Defense Artillery Battery Nuclear, Biological, Chemical Brigade Chemical Platoon Siona! Officer Signal Platoon

H-3 FM 71-3

H-8. Command Post Shift Cycles. All brigade and battalion CPs conduct staggered shift changes. Shifts of duty are 12 hours long. Change-of-shift briefs must not disrupt continuous performance of CP functions.

H-9. Displacement Operations.

a. CP displacement for all brigades and battalions is by echelon so command and control of subordinate forces is uninterrupted.

b. Before movement, "A" and "B" echelons must have redundant capability to perform CP functions.

H-10. Security.

a. Each CP is responsible for establishing its own security.

b. Off-shift personnel sleep in or near fighting positions surrounding the CPs.

c. Fighting positions are designated as being 360 degrees around the CP.

d. CP security elements establish a security zone from 500 meters to 1 kilometer, dependent on METT-T, around the CP. They conduct the following operations to interdict enemy ground forces:

• Road checkpoints. • Patrols. • LPs and OPs. • Employment of sensors. • Employment of GSR; if available.

e. The CP operations NCO coordinates the employment of the security force.

f. Access to a CP is controlled only when using classified material. Control is accomplished by limiting access to one entrance and by checking identification.

g. Additional security measures are implemented as the situation dictates.

H-11. Orders and Plans.

a. Unless otherwise stated, the time used in all brigade OPORDs is ZULU.

b. The brigade XO and S3 have the authority to issue WOs in the brigade commander's name.

H-4 FM 71-3

c. The brigade XO and S3 have the authority to approve and issue written FRAGOs in the brigade commander's name.

d. The main CP S3 operations element provides sequential numbers preceded by the current fiscal year for all brigade written orders (Example. OPORD 98-1, 98-2, 98-3). The S3 operations element of all subordinate and supporting units is responsible for issuing orders numbers for their command.

e. The following procedures apply when publishing orders.

(1) The S3 has overall responsibility for orders and plans.

(2) Staff sections review and sign annexes if they are submitted for separate distribution. If they are distributed with the order, annexes are not signed.

(3) The brigade sends verbal FRAGOs by the most expeditious means available (followed by hard copy and overlay by couriers).

(4) The brigade uses the following guide for annexes:

Annex A. Task Organization S3 Annex B. Intelligence S2/S3 Annex C. Operations Overlay/Concept of S3 Operations Annex D. Engineer ENGR Annex E. Army Aviation S3/ALO Annex F. Air Defense ADO Annex G. Fire Support FSO Annex H. A2C2 S3/ALO/ADO Annex I. Electronic Warfare S2/FSO/IEW Annex I. Signal Operations SO Annex K. Deception S3 Annex L. Psychological Operations S3 Annex M. Nuclear, Biological, and NBCO Chemical Defense/Smoke Operations Annex N. Military Police MP Annex O. Rear Operations S3/XO Annex P. Service Support S4 Annex Q. Movement S3/S4 Annex R. Civil Affairs S3

H-5 FM 71-3

f. Subordinate units acknowledge receipt of OPORDs to the issuing CP. Subordinate units submit one copy of all orders and overlays to the S3 operations element. S3 operations element is responsible for reproducing copies for internal use and distribution.

g. When the brigade is not committed to combat operations, the elements listed in Table H-2 receive copies of the OPLANs for the upcoming operations. This list is only used when there is sufficient time to reproduce and distribute a complete order.

Table H-2. Elements receiving copies of the operation plan. COPY NUMBER ADDRESSEE 1 Brigade Commander File Brigade Main Command Post Brigade Tactical Command Post Division Main Command Post Division Tactical Command Post Subordinate Battalion Subordinate Battalion Subordinate Battalion 10 Attached Battalion 11 Attached Battalion 12 Direct Support Artillery Battalion 13 Engineer Battalion 14 Aviation Battalion 15 Forward Support Battalion 16 S4/S1 17 Commander, HHC 18 Air Defense Artillery 19 Signal Platoon 20 Military Police Platoon 21-22 Adjacent Units 23-25 Spares

H-6 FM 71-3

h. The brigade uses FRAGOs and WOs when it is committed to combat operations. Written copies go only to commanders and staff officers who need to know.

i. Keep the proliferation and copying of orders to the absolute minimum at all times.

(1) The brigade S3 maintains a historical file (one copy) of all orders the brigade headquarters issues and of those received from higher and adjacent headquarters. All other copies are destroyed within five days after the complete execution of the base order.

(2) After issuing the brigade order, the brigade S3 assumes control of any division, corps, or joint task force orders in the headquarters.

j. PLs from higher headquarters will not be renamed.

k. In brigade OPORDs and on operations maps, brigade objectives (for the battalions) will be used. The related division objective (to the brigade) is in parenthesis before or above the brigade's specified objective. Battalions must incorporate this procedure into their TSOPs.

l. The brigade orders group assembles to receive or disseminate oral or written orders. Orders-group members assemble by organic transportation at a location and time the commander designates. The commander may call one of three orders-group compositions shown in Table H-3, depending on the situation.

m. Orders group designees normally do not bring subordinate commanders and staff to orders-group locations. Vehicle drivers provide temporary local security.

Table H-3. Orders-group compositions. ORDERS GROUP A ORDERS GROUP B ORDERS GROUP C Brigade Commanders with Brigade Commander Brigade Commander Command Group Battalion Commanders XO All Battalion Commanders/S3s/FSOs S3 S2 All Coordinating Staff Battalion Commanders/ All Special Staff S3s/FSOs Group Aviation Battalion Commander FSCOORD Reconnaissance Troop Commander (SAB)

H-7 FM 71-3

SECTION III. STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURES

H-12. Task Organization. Table H-4 shows the routine task organization of the organic brigade elements and represents the brigade's standard combined arms fighting organization for combat. This grouping applies until specifically changed by verbal or written OPORDs, FRAGOs, or WOs. This task organization is the basis for most brigade movement, and tactical employment planning.

Table H-4. Task organization. 1st BATTALION 2d BATTALION 3d BATTALION Mech Co Armor Co Armor Co Mech Co Armor Co Armor Co Armor Co Armor Co Armor Co Armor Co Mech Co Mech Co

BRIGADE TROOPS Recon Element FA Bn (DS) Engr Bn IEW Tm (DS) ADA Btry Sig Pit MP Pit Cml Pit

H-13. Control Methods and Procedures.

a. Liaison Officers and Noncommissioned Officers Procedures.

(1) Under the XO's supervision, the brigade employs organic LO teams to provide reciprocal liaison functions from the brigade to the following units as needed:

• Adjacent units. • Main effort brigade. • Follow and support effort brigade.

(2) The receiving headquarters provide administrative support for LO teams.

H-8 FM 71-3

(3) The receiving headquarters administrative support provides for LO teams or individuals, including accommodations and rations; and maintenance, fuel, and lubricants.

(4) Before leaving the parent headquarters, the LO teams—

• Obtain maps, call signs, overlays, and orders for upcoming operations. • Understand the commander's intent. • Obtain the current operations status from the operations center. • Check all staff sections for information to forward to higher or adjacent headquarters. • Note any task organization changes. • Obtain written copies of FRAGOs, WOs, contingency plans, and OPLANs (when available). • Obtain phone numbers, secure fills, and radio frequencies. • Notify the XO of their departure.

(5) After arriving at the receiving unit, the LO teams—

• Report to the receiving unit Chief of Staff or XO with their parent unit's current situation, status, location, and plans. • Contact the parent unit, informing it of their arrival (receiving an update, if required). • Review the receiving unit's situation and identify problems. • Exchange information with each receiving unit staff section as required. • Inform the XO or Chief of Staff of their anticipated departure. • Obtain required or available copies of FRAGOs, WOs, contingency plans, and OPLANs for subordinate units of the receiving headquarters.

(6) After returning to the parent unit, LOs must brief the XO or S3 on the following information pertaining to the supporting headquarters’ status, including as a minimum—

• Upcoming operations and mission requirements for the supported unit (contingency plans, OPLANs, and FRAGOs). • The commander’s intent for current and future operations. • Current and projected priorities for CS and CSS. • Changes in task organization and organization for combat. • Updated unit locations. • Any other specific information required by the parent unit's commander.

b. Standard Operational Brevity Code Words. During all radio and wire communications, all units under brigade control will use the operational code words listed below to shorten transmission time.

H-9 FM 71-3

BINGO Switch to second alternate frequency. BLITZ Move; move to; move out. BOG An area that will not support the unit's heaviest vehicle. For example, "Route HAWK, klick 6 to klick 7, bog." CANDLES Artificial illumination. For example, "Request candles, B71." CHATTER Communications jamming. For example, "There is chatter on my internal." CHECKPOINT An easily identified point such as a bridge or intersection on a route of march. COLD Area clean of enemy. DUMP TIRS TIRS has been compromised; cease use until further notice. DYNAMITE Air defense warning that alerts the force to inbound or attacking aircraft NOW. It requires immediate response. ESTABLISHED The unit has consolidated a position at the designated control measure location. For example, "We have established A21." FIRESTRIKE An immediate FA mass fire mission that delivers about one module of ammunition. FIX Send your location to me. For example, "Fix, out." Send me the location of For example, "Fix T3J22, out." FLASH, FLASH Clear the net immediately, critical traffic follows. GAS Chemical attack. GEIGER CHASE Radiological survey or monitor. For example, "Geiger chase N21 to W33." GEIGER SOUR Area monitored or surveyed is contaminated. GEIGER SWEET Area monitored or surveyed is not contaminated. For example, "From A21 to W33, Geiger Sour; D5 1, is Geiger Sweet." GET Put specific person designated by call sign on the radio. For example, "Get Fl 1, out." GUIDONS Net call. Subordinates answer to branch and unit sequence (infantry, armored, artillery, engineer) by unit numeric designation. Companies use letter sequence; platoons use numeric sequence. HOSTILE A unit, vehicle, or aircraft positively identified as enemy. HOT An area occupied by enemy. HOT STEEL Immediate FA mass mission that delivers about 10 modules of ammunition. HUSH Levels of signal security. (HUSH—one—free net; HUSH two—directed net; HUSH three—directed net with radio-listening silence imposed.) IRON HAMMER Preplanned FA mission that delivers about one module of ammunition against a specific EA.

H-10 FM 71-3

JAILBREAK Radio-listening silence is liñed. KLICK One klick equals one kilometer (one grid square on a 1:50,000 or 1:100,000-scale tactical map). LONG RUN Movement by alternate bounds. MIDDLEMAN Radio relay. MODULE A FA 155-mm standard ammunition package consisting of a battalion six DPICM. NOTHING The station called does not (or did not) answer. For example, "X79, this HEARD is H22, nothing heard, out." ORDERS Oral orders to follow, prepare to copy, put the call sign principal on the radio (see also get). PLOT General enemy and friendly summary and commander's assessment; a quick, informal exchange of information between commanders and operations officers; not a formatted report. PRESENT A call sign principal report to a specified location. For example, "F37 present at N26, 30 minutes." RUN-IN A code word used by a moving unit during a rearward passage of lines to warn friendly units that it is "running" toward them and that enemy forces are pursuing it. SET Used during a maneuver to indicate that the sender (bounding unit) has completed its bound and is prepared to overwatch from its present position (see also established). SILENCE Absolute radio silence imposed on all net users (said three times). STAND TO A time at which a unit has achieved a readiness condition in which it is fully prepared to fight (readiness condition [REDCON] 1). STAR BURST A rapid dispersal of a unit to avoid enemy aircraft. Elements turn violently left or right as appropriate, and drive away from each other while jinking. All weapons are oriented to engage enemy aircraft. SWITCH Change to an alternate frequency. Specify which frequency by the frequency designation or the call sign of the commander of the frequency to be used. For example, "Switch ALPHA JULIET (Antijamming); Switch N5F32" (the unit frequency whose commander is N5F32). THUNDER Immediate FA mass mission that delivers about three modules of ammunition. THUNDER RUN A high-speed (50-kph or faster) road movement in march column formation. The commander normally leads.

H-11 FM 71-3

c. Terrain Index Reference System.

(1) The brigade uses TIRS to provide a quick, accurate method of controlling the maneuver of units, passing out control measures, and “fragging” a change in mission. It is used with checkpoints, PLs, and other graphic control measures.

(2) The user pinpoints the location by shifting on a horizontal-vertical scale from the TIRS point to the locations.

(3) On secure radios, use TIRS in the clear. For example, "From Y17, Right 1.5, up .5." The listener finds point Y17, then measures 1.5 kilometers to the right (east) and .5 kilometers up (north) to find the desired location.

(4) On nonsecure methods, encode the numeric portion of the TIRS.

(5) TIRS is established from higher to lower. The brigade S3 designates TIRS for the brigades' battle space. Subordinate headquarters may establish supplemental TIRS. TIRS is always alphanumeric. The first character is the only letter and is allocated as shown in Table H-5.

Table H-5. Supplemental terrain index reference system. Brigade Tactical Command Post/Brigade Main Command Post A Brigade Rear Command Post B 1st Battalion C, D, E, F 2d Battalion G, H, I, J 3d Battalion K, L, M, N Aviation Battalion O, P Reconnaissance Element/Troop R Artillery Battalion (Direct Support) S Attached/Operational Control Units T, U, V, W Brigade Spares X, Y. Z

(a) Do not use TIRS when requesting fires or denoting enemy locations. Use only target numbers or grids.

(b) Subordinate brigade units use only those TIRS designated by the brigade.

(6) If a TIRS map or overlay is lost, captured, or compromised, the responsible headquarters will report the code words, "Dump TIRS—(echelon code)" to higher headquarters. Full notification and reestablishment of a new TIRS is a command action.

H-12 FM 71-3

The echelon code indicates the highest level of compromised TIRS: DISTANT = Division, BELOW = Brigade, BASE = Battalion, CELLAR = Company.

d. Division Recognition Techniques.

(1) Combat Vehicle Marking System. The division's combat, CS, and CSS vehicles are marked for rapid identification from the rear and sides (see Figure H-l). This enhances control during battle by providing quick and easy visual identification of units on the battlefield. It also helps when reconstituting forces and in the prevention of fratricide. This section prescribes standard symbols for marking division vehicles. The following restrictions apply when marking vehicles:

• Use only standard chemical-agent-resistant coating paint (black and sand). • Markings apply to all specified vehicles within the organization. • Markings consist of numbers and chevrons of the style and size this section describes; locations are standardized.

-►I r\-*~ ^ V T IS* 10I' OO't 00\ •I •• I- •I H-

Dimensions of Rear Markings Dimensions ol Side Markings

Figure H-l. Vehicle marking dimensions.

(2) Major Subordinate Command Vehicle Markings. Vehicles of the divisions MSCs are identified by a combination of a single half-chevron and a two-digit numeric identifier. They always begin with a zero and have a single half-chevron placed immediately adjacent and to the right of the numeric identifier. Assigned division MSC numeric identifiers are—

• 00\ Division headquarters and headquarters company. • 01\ 1st brigade. • 02\ 2d brigade. • 03\ 3d brigade. • 04\ Aviation brigade. • 05\ DIVARTY. • 06\ DISCOM. • 07\ DIVENG.

H-13 FM 71-3

(3) Unit Identifiers. Table H-6 shows the digits and symbols that are assigned to division units.

(4) Marking Size. The space between the numbers and the half-chevron on vehicle markings is 2 inches. Side and rear markings are placed on doors or other flat surfaces and must not be obstructed by equipment, camouflage nets, or other miscellaneous items. Marking location and size may be adjusted to accommodate the type of vehicle.

Table H-6. Unit identifiers. ID UNIT ID UNIT ID UNIT 00\ Div HHC 03\ 3d Bde 05\ DIV ARTY 01\ 1st Bde 7 —Mech 1 _FA

1 —Mech 8 Mech 2 —FA 2 —AR 9 —AR 3 _FA 3 —AR 0 —AR 4 _/_MLRS

02\ 2d Bde 04\ Avn Bde 5 _/_TAB

4 —Mech 3 —AHB /3 ADA Bn 5 —Mech 4 —AHB /1 Engr Bde 6 —AR 5 —CAC 06\ DISCOM 6 —AHC /6 MSB/FSBs ID UNIT 12 Cav Sqdn /4 Ml Bn /5 Sig Bn /7 MR Co /8 îml Co

(5) Separate Battalions, Squadrons, and Companies. Vehicles assigned to division units are identified by a half-chevron and a two-digit numeric identifier combination. The first digit of the two-digit identifier designates the battalion or squadron and the second digit identifies subordinate company, troop, or battery-size units. The accompanying half-chevron identifies the vehicle as a division separate

H-14 FM 71-3 battalion, squadron, or company. These half-chevron identifiers are placed immediately adjacent and to the left of the numeric identifiers. Division unit identification markings are—

• /I Engineer brigade. • /2 Cavalry squadron. • /3 ADA battalion. • /4 MI battalion. • /5 Signal battalion. • /6 Division main and FSBs. (Note. /60 = MSB; /61 = 1st FSB/62;= 2d FSB; /63 = 3d FSB). • H MP company. • /8 Chemical company.

(6) Company, Troop, and Battery Markings. Company, troop, and battery-level units are assigned the following numbers:

• 0 Headquarters and headquarters company/troop/battery. • 1 A company/troop/battery. • 2 B company/troop/battery. • 3 C company/troop/battery. • 4 D company/troop/battery. • 5 E company.

(7) Platoon Markings. Platoons (or sections) are identified by the application of a single or double directional chevron. They are applied along with battalion- and company-equivalent identifiers. Figure H-2 shows platoon identifiers. ( 1ST >2D 3D 0 SCOUT MORTAR ANTITANK 4TH 5TH 6TH

Figure H-2. Platoon markings.

(8) Vehicle Top Markings. When directed, combat vehicles near or used in CAS missions will display one US 17 panel on top of the vehicle. Panels must be removed after CAS missions if air superiority is not maintained. Chemical lights are placed on top of all FM 71-3 vehicles for night recognition by friendly aircraft. Three lights are placed horizontally on any flat, open surface, protected from observation by enemy forces (see Figure H-3).

w I) U /IK

Marker Panel

I) Ml#

001

Chemical Lights

Figure H-3. Vehicle top markings.

e. Signals.

(1) Standard NATO signals are used throughout the brigade to direct tactical formations and tactical actions.

(2) Flag Signals.

(a) Flags are issued to armored and mechanized units for control purposes and as alternate means of communications within these units. Flag signals, once understood, are repeated and executed at once.

H-16 FM 71-3

(b) When used alone, flag colors have the following meanings:

• Red—danger, or enemy in sight. • Green—all clear, ready, or understood. • Yellow—disregard, or vehicle out of action.

(c) During periods of limited visibility, flashlights with colored filters or colored chemical lights may be substituted for flags.

f. Alarms and Warning Procedures.

(1) Enemy Attack. Warning color codes indicate the probability or likelihood of enemy attack or contact. These color codes apply to all combat action operations:

• White—attack or contact is not likely. • Yellow—attack or contact is likely. • Red—attack or contact is in progress or is imminent.

(2) Chemical Attack. The warning for a chemical attack is given by a continuous series of three short vehicle horn sounds, metal-on-metal, or electronic chemical alarms, and the words "Gas, Gas, Gas."

(3) Air Attack. The warning for an air attack is given by the words "Dynamite, Dynamite, Dynamite" along with the general direction from which the attack is coming. Continuously sounding a vehicle horn augments voice warnings.

(4) Indirect Fires. The words "Incoming, Incoming, Incoming" warn of indirect fires.

g. Threat Condition (THREATCON). The S2 develops THREATCON based on enemy capabilities, actions, sightings, and assessments of terrorist factors. THREATCONs dictate appropriate adjustments to security plans and manning levels of CPs or base defenses. Subordinate commanders may designate higher THREATCONs based on the local situation.

(1) The THREATCON is a two-digit warning which is passed throughout the entire division's rear area to ensure receipt. The first digit is numeric (1-5) and is based on the overall threat. The second digit is alphabetic (A-D) and is based on terrorist assessments.

(2) The THREATCON is based on the enemy's capabilities as shown by the IPB, past and present actions of enemy forces in the rear area, and any sightings of enemy

H-17 FM 71-3 forces in the rear area. A level of 1 indicates the lowest assessment of threat; 5 indicates the highest threat assessment; for example—

1. Enemy capability. 2. Enemy sightings in area. 3. Enemy activity in area. 4. Attack probable. 5. Attack imminent.

(3) In determining the THREATCON, the assessment factors of existence, capability, history, trends, and targeting are considered.

(a) Alpha indicates a low assessment.

(b) Bravo indicates a medium assessment.

(d) Delta indicates an imminent assessment.

h. Readiness Condition. All brigade elements use the readiness criteria in terms of time to state current readiness status or to direct the attainment of a specific readiness status in anticipation of combat operations.

REDCON ONE: 1 am fully ready to execute the assigned mission and wilt initiate execution on receipt of orders. REDCON TWO: 1 can be ready to execute an assigned mission in 15 minutes. ; REDCON THREE: I can be ready to execute an assigned mission in 30 minutes. REDCON FOUR: I can be ready to execute an assigned mission in 1 hour. ' ^ REDCON FIVE: I can be ready to execute an assigned mission in hours. (Specify number if more than one hour.)

i. Fixed Call Signs. On enemy contact, the brigade uses the fixed call signs shown in Table H-7 when using secure communications.

H-18 FM 71-3

Table H-7. 'ixed call signs. ELEMENT CALL SIGN Brigade TANK Brigade Main Command Post TANK X-RAY Brigade Tactical Command Post TANK OSCAR Brigade Rear Command Post TANK ZULU 1st Battalion STEEL 2d Battalion BULLDOG 3d Battalion BAYONET Aviation Battalion HAWK Artillery Battalion (Direct Support) WARLORD Forward Support Battalion PACK MULE Engineer Battalion SAPPER Intelligence Electronic Warfare Team SKYHAWK Air Defense Artillery Battery THUNDERBOLT Signal Platoon WAVES Military Police Platoon DILLION Chemical Platoon BLACK FLAG Commander Executive Officer Deputy Suffix + Bravo (that is 3B) Command Sergeant Major S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 Scout 29 Battalion Maintenance Officer 10 Fire Support Element/Coordinator 30 Chemical/NBC 31 Air Liaison Officer 32 Army Airspace Command and Control 33 Engineer 34 Signal Officer Provost Marshal Officer 35 Inspector General 36 Public Affairs Officer 37

H-19 FM 71-3

Table H-7. Fixed call si^ns (continued). ELEMENT SUFFIX Staff Judge Advocate 38 Chaplain 39 Note. The brigade uses nickname, historical phone directory, or call-sign listings (names listed here are examples only). Surgeon 40 S3/Air 3 ALPHA Liaison Officer LIMA Main Command Post Operations MIKE Tactical Command Post Operations TANGO Rear Command Post Operations ROMEO Net Call Station NOVEMBER Driver DELTA Pilot PAPA Radiotelephone Operators YANKEE

PLATOON NET DESIGNATIONS 1st Platoon/Scouts Red 2d Platoon/Mortar White 3d Platoon/Support Blue 4th Platoon/Maintenance Green Communications Platoon Orange Medical Black Chemical/NBC Reconnaissance Yellow Platoon PLATOON MEMBER DESIGNATIONS Platoon Leader Platoon Leader Wingman/1st Squad Platoon Sergeant Platoon Sergeant Wingman/2d Squad 3d Squad 4th Squad

H-20 FM 71-3

Table H-7. Fixed call signs (continued). ELEMENT PREFIXES

COMPANY/TROOP/BATTERY PREFIXES A Company/Troop/Battery APACHE B Company/Troop/Battery BANSHEE C Company/Troop/Battery COMMANCHE D Company/Troop/Battery DRAGONS AT Company/SVC Battery EAGLE Headquarters and Headquarters FOXTROT Company/T roop/Battery COMPANY SUFFIXES Commanding Officer 6 Executive Officer First Sergeant 1st Platoon Leader 16 2d Platoon Leader 26 3d Platoon Leader 36 Weapons Platoon Leader 46

ATTACHED/CROSS-ATTACHED SUFFIXES Armor Mechanized M Engineer Ground Surveillance Radar Air Defense Artillery Attack Helicopter H Note. If you are a mechanized infantry company commander (C Company) cross-attached to a tank battalion, your call sign would be CM6. This avoids the confusion of having two C Companies in the net.

H-14. Tactical Road Movement.

a. Responsibility. The S3 operations, located at the brigade's main CP, is responsible for all tactical road movement planning. The TAC CP controls tactical movements.

b. Planning Factors. (Planned for standard task organization.)

H-21 FM 71-3

(1) Rate of March.

• On all-weather, hard-surfaced, four-lane, limited-access roads, the rate of march will be 29 mph or 48 kph. • On all other roads, 20 mph or 32 kph. • In congested urban areas, 12 mph or 20 kph. • During blackout, 10 mph or 16 kph. • During Blitz or Thunder Run, at the fastest speed possible.

(2) Intervals.

• Between vehicles: daylight, 50 meters. At night and within city or village limits, 25 meters. • Between march units: 2 minutes. • Between serials: 5 minutes.

(3) Convoy Composition.

• Ten to 24 vehicles per march unit (maintain tactical integrity). • Two to 5 march units per serial (maintain tactical integrity). • Maximum 5 serials per convoy (maintain tactical integrity).

(4) Halts. Periodic rest and maintenance halts planned and conducted for 20 minutes after the first 2 hours; 10 minutes every 2 hours thereafter.

(5) Illumination. Vehicles in a convoy will have their lights on low beam. Blackout driving will be in effect forward of the light line if required by light conditions.

(6) Convoys moving in the same direction will not pass one another without permission from the TAC CP.

(7) Reports. The MPs will call over secure nets, in all convoy reports (lead vehicles crossing point) at SPs, TCPs, RPs, and any other critical points when the unit is crossing.

(8) Convoy Control.

• Each battalion is provided a block of time for movement. • Subordinate battalions commanders will appoint serial and march unit commanders. • Disabled vehicles will be left to the side of the route of march for pickup by trailing maintenance and recovery elements.

H-22 FM 71-3

(9) Security. At least one alert air guard or observer will be posted per vehicle during movement; weapons are to be oriented for 360-degree engagements.

c. Standard Orders of March for Tactical Movements. The brigade will conduct tactical movements on one or two routes. (1) One route of march:

• Brigade Unit • Armor Battalion • Brigade TAC CP • Military Police Platoon • Artillery Battery • Mechanized Battalion • Artillery Battalion(-) • Main CP • Armor Battalion(-) • FSB Platoon • Brigade Troops • Mechanized Company

(2) Two routes of march:

ROUTE A ROUTE B Battalion Scouts Battalion Scouts Quartering Parties Quartering Parties Combat Unit Combat Unit Mechanized Battalion Armor Battalion Artillery Battalion(-) Artillery Battalion(-) Armor Battalion Brigade Troops FSB Platoon

(3) Standard orders of march are subject to redesign based on the nature of future operations and METT-T.

d. Units task-organized to support an organic brigade unit (DS, attached, OPCON, assigned) move with the supported unit. All others are inserted into the march order as the situation dictates. e. Route Priorities. (1) Movement of tactical units and unit displacement have priority over other moves. Other priorities are as follows:

1. MEDEVAC. 2. Combat unit.

H-23 FM 71-3

3. CS. 4. CSS. 5. CSS resupply moves in order of transportation priority. 6. Combat unit moves to rear to assembly areas. 7. CS units move rearward. 8. CSS moves to rear. 9. Infiltration moves (moves without clearance).

(2) The brigade S4 denotes routes in the brigade's sector (except MSRs), and reports their status through the FSB to the DISCOM MCO.

(3) The S3 IAW the division highway regulation plan develops the traffic circulation plan.

f. Refugee and Host-Nation Traffic Movements.

(1) Refugee and host-nation traffic is routed on secondary roads (other than MSRs) when possible.

(2) Movements of host-nation traffic (10 or more vehicles, or 100 or more people) must be coordinated with the S3 through the division transportation officer before movement.

(3) With host-nation law-enforcement personnel, brigade MPs will assist, direct, and/or deny movement of host-nation traffic and refugees.

H-15. Assembly Area Occupation. (This also applies to occupation of attack positions.)

a. Composition of Assembly Areas.

(1) The brigade establishes two separate and distinct assembly areas within the division assigned brigade assembly area, a tactical assembly area, and the BSA. They are normally from 17 to 25 kilometers apart.

(2) During the occupation of all assembly areas, 12 o'clock is always North.

(3) Units occupying the BSA report to the rear CP. Other elements report to the S3 operations at the main CP.

(4) The brigade tactical assembly area is occupied by the following elements:

• TAC CP and Main CP Center Sector (collocated) • Artillery Battalion, Engineer Center Sector Battalion, and Brigade Troops

H-24 FM 71-3

• 1st Battalion 12-4 • 2d Battalion 4-8 • 3d Battalion 8-12

(5) The BSA is occupied by the following elements:

• Rear CP Center Sector • 1st Battalion Field Trains 10-12 • 2d Battalion Field Trains 12-2 • 3d Battalion Field Trains 2-4 • Artillery Battalion Field Trains 4-6 • FSB 6-8 • Engineer Field Trains 8-10

b. Quartering Party Procedures. The brigade's quartering parties move to and occupy its assembly area in two phases. After receiving the brigade's movement WO, all phase I elements move to a location designated by the brigade S3, near the vicinity of the TAC CP, four hours before the phase II start time. Phase I elements have priority on all routes during this movement.

(1) Phase I (Battalion Scouts). Battalion scout platoons augmented with ADA and engineer sections conduct route reconnaissance and area reconnaissance of assembly areas. Designated mechanized infantry units follow the scouts and emplace TCPs as necessary.

(2) Phase II (Battalion Quartering Party). Battalion quartering parties consist of battalion CP elements and one vehicle per company-size element. Company quartering parties consist of one vehicle per platoon.

c. Unit Quartering Party Procedures. The unit quartering party prepares the assembly area for occupation by the main body by—

• Reconnoitering and marking the route from the RP to the designated assembly area and posting guides as required at points of possible confusion. • Surveying assembly area for NBC contamination and reporting and marking contamination as directed. • Securing the assembly area from refugees and local residents. • Locating and marking positions for each CP. • Placing guides at the RP. • Placing one guide per platoon at each company team RP. • Monitoring the progress of the main body and reporting any conditions that might significantly alter the planned march to and occupation of the assembly area.

H-25 FM 71-3

d. Unit Occupation Procedures.

(1) The main body moves—without stopping—through the RP to the designated location to picks up its guides.

(2) Each subordinate element flashes a standard unit-recognition signal at the RP, and pick up their guide without stopping.

(3) Vehicles do not stop or halt until reaching the platoon RP. The quartering party then guides the lead vehicles to their locations.

(4) Units verify final vehicle and weapons positioning. They also clarify fire planning and obstacle plans, if necessary.

(5) All units refuel (rearm if necessary) from organic assets on arrival.

(6) Units must report if they have lost 10 percent or more of their strength (vehicles or weapons systems) during the movement.

e. Communications.

(1) Wire communications are used within each assembly area.

(2) All quartering parties report SPs, checkpoints, RPs, and mission-completes to the parent headquarters' CP via FM or MSE communications.

(3) Mission-complete indicates that all quartering party tasks have been performed, unit areas have been designated and marked, and guides are in position to guide main body elements to their positions.

(4) The subordinate unit SOPs must establish recognition signals to aid in recognition and identification of parent units during times of limited visibility.

H-16. Other Tactical Operating Procedures.

a. Linkup Operations.

(1) Coordination Checklist (not in priority):

• Command relationship of units and the effective time. • Enemy situation and obstacle plans. • Mutual recognition signals. • Communications plan. • Schemes of maneuver and graphic control measures. • FS and FSCMs.

H-26 FM 71-3

• Primary and alternate linkup points. • Requirements for liaison exchange. • Assistance required. • Alternate plans if initial linkup fails.

(2) Stationary Unit. Assistance the stationary unit can normally provide—

• Guides. • Lanes through obstacles of airhead. • Traffic control. • Limited logistic, medical, and maintenance support. • Information on recent enemy activity.

(3) Moving Unit. Assistance the moving unit can normally provide—

• Limited logistic, medical, and maintenance support. • FS.

b. Relief-in-Place Operation.

(1) Coordination Checklist (not in priority):

• Time for the relief. • Routes, guides, and linkup points. • Assembly areas and positions to be occupied. • Liaison, reconnaissance, and advance parties. • FSCM. • Obstacle plans. • Passage of command. • Call signs. • Frequencies. • Recognition signals. • The disposition of relieved unit supplies (POL, ammunition, rations) that the relieved unit will not take with it. • R&S plan. • Direct fire plans. • Enemy situation. • Friendly situation.

(2) Sequence of Events (for relief in contact and not in contact).

(a) After receiving the division WO, procedures for tactical road movement go into effect. The brigade reconnaissance troop conducts route reconnaissance from the

H-27 FM 71-3 brigade's present location to the AO of the unit to be relieved and makes initial linkup with the unit being relieved.

(b) The brigade's TAC CP follows to collocate with the TAC CP of the unit being relieved. It establishes linkup points for battalion coordination parties.

(c) Passage of Command. The incoming unit brigade commander assumes command of the sector and OPCON of all units within the sector at the established SP time for the relieving unit to begin moving from an assembly area to conduct the relief.

c. Forward Passage of Lines. (Applies only when enemy forces are not within direct or indirect-fire range of the in-place unit.)

(1) Coordination Checklist (not listed in priority):

• Time for the passage. • Routes, guides, and linkup points. • Assembly areas. • Liaison, reconnaissance, and advance parties. • Passage corridor SP and RPs through the in-place unit. • FS (direct and indirect). • Obstacle locations and lanes. • Passage of command. • Call signs. • Frequencies. • Recognition signals. • ADA coverage and weapons control status. • Enemy and friendly situation.

(2) Sequence of Events. The TAC CP moves to collocate with the TAC CP of the unit being passed through as well as establishes linkup points for battalion coordination parties and begins coordination.

(3) Passage of Command. The passing brigade assumes control of the unit it passes at the established SP for movement out of an assembly area to begin the passage.

d. Rearward Passage of Lines.

(1) Sequence of Events. The TAC CP coordinates the following:

• The location of in-place units and obstacles throughout the in-place unit's area. • The passing unit's tactical disposition.

H-28 FM 71-3

• The location of the BHL. • The tactical assembly area and routes out of the tactical assembly area (if not provided by division). • The passage lanes and PPs to support the scheme of maneuver. • The contact point for each passage lane and the guide requirements. • The routes to each contact point. • The route from each passage lane to the tactical assembly area. • Detailed locations of units and obstacles. • The locations of rally points. • The CSS responsibilities. • Arrangements for additional reconnaissance.

(2) Passage of Command. Tactical control of the passing unit passes to the stationary unit at a designated time established by higher headquarters or at a time coordinated between the two units.

(3) Sequence of Passage:

• Rear CP with MP platoon. • FSB. • Chemical platoon. • Main CP. • Engineer battalion. • Aviation battalion. • Reserve (if not committed). • Supporting effort battalion with attachments. • TAC CP. • Command group. • Main effort battalion.

(4) Isolated or Cut-Off Units or Individuals. Units or individuals isolated, cut off, or forced to conduct passage of lines through an area or unit other than as previously coordinated will use the following procedures:

(a) Attempt radio contact.

(b) Establish contact with the stationary unit using challenge, password, and recognition signals in SOIs.

(5) Hasty Passage (Run-in). Run-in is used when enemy actions prevent the execution of a previously coordinated passage.

(a) The run-in unit disengages and moves into formation for passage.

H-29 FM 71-3

(b) On the radio, the run-in unit provides—

• The complete call sign. • Prowords. (For example, "Run-in, Run-in.") • Number of vehicles in the passing element (in the clear). • Transmission authentication. (For example, "This is W7N36, run-in, run-in, three. I authenticate DELTA, FOXTROT.")

(d) The moving unit stays on clearly defined routes; it conducts run-ins with vehicle headlights on, weapons oriented toward the enemy, and armored vehicle recognition signs facing friendly units.

e. River Crossing Operations.

(1) Crossing Force Headquarters.

(a) Location: brigade TAC CP. When available a division engineer group CP collocates with the brigade TAC CP.

(b) Crossing force commander: appointed by division commander.

(2) Crossing Area Headquarters.

(a) Crossing area commander: brigade XO.

(b) Crossing area engineer: senior engineer supporting the brigade.

H-17. Air Defense Artillery Procedures.

a. Air Defense Warnings (ADW). The regional air defense commander establishes the ADW for the entire region, which can encompass an area larger than that of the corps. Consequently, the entire division could be at ADW Red with no air attack imminent. Because the region can be large, the ADW seldom changes during daylight. Consequently, the ADW may not reflect a true evaluation of the local air threat to air defense and maneuver units.

(1) ADW Red—air attack is imminent or in progress.

(2) ADW Yellow—air attack is probable.

(3) ADW White—air attack not probable.

H-30 FM 71-3

b. Local Air Defense Warnings (LADW). LADWs are broadcast over communications nets. They reflect an evaluation of the air threat to the brigade and require a specific response by air defense and other units in the brigade.

(1) LADW Dynamite—Air attack is imminent or in progress.

(a) Actions taken by ADA units:

• Air defense weapons occupy firing positions. • Observers intensify their search for aircraft. • Platoon leader actively monitor the directed early warning net.

(b) Actions taken by other units:

• Cease movement and seek overhead cover if possible. • Except for those in direct contact with the enemy, have personnel and weapons directed toward the sky. • Intensify efforts to monitor the directed early warning net.

(2) LADW lookout—air attack is probable.

(a) Actions taken by ADA units:

• Air defense weapons are kept in a ready state. • Observers intensify their search for the air threat. • Platoon leaders actively monitor the directed early warning net.

(b) Actions taken by other units:

• Deploy observers to search for the air threat. • Continue mission, but minimize movement. • Improve passive air defense measures (camouflage from aerial observation). • Intensify monitoring of the directed early warning net.

(3) LADW Snowman—No hostile air threat in the division area.

(a) Actions taken: none.

(b) ADA and other units can conduct all normal field operations.

c. Weapons Control Status (WCS). The WCS is used to control fires in regard to aerial engagements. They are established by the regional air defense commander. Maneuver commanders may establish a more restrictive measure based on his mission,

H-31 FM 71-3 intent, and air traffic. He can not, however, ease the control status (from weapons tight to weapons free) without approval from the regional air defense commander.

(1) Weapons Free: Fire at any aircraft not positively identified as friendly.

(2) Weapons Tight: Only fire at aircraft positively identified as hostile. (ADA units losing communications with higher ADA headquarters will assume weapons hold status.)

(3) Weapons Hold: Do not engage except in self defense or in response to a formal order.

d. Hostile Criteria. An aircraft is considered hostile when—

• It is visually identified as an enemy. • It attacks friendly forces or facilities by—

- Discharging smoke or spray. - Airdropping soldiers without prior coordination. - Dropping bombs or ordnance.

• It maneuvers to attack friendly forces or facilities. • It meets any additional hostile criteria published in OPLANs or OPORDs.

e. Rules of Engagement.

(1) Brigade is Not Committed. Air defense weapons are restricted to self- defense engagements only.

(2) Brigade is Committed. ROEs will be established. Commanders may establish a more restrictive weapons control status for engaging in their sector. However, they may not impose a less-restrictive status. Combined arms for air defense will be controlled and operated under weapons tight criteria.

f. Early Warning System. The early warning system is quick, simple, and redundant in nature. The three types of early warning are digital, voice, and directed.

(1) Digital early warning track data is the primary means of early warning communication to ADA units. Voice early warning is the alternate method. The division ABMOC receives track data simultaneously from AWACS and other radar. This track data along with the WCS and ADW are transmitted using EPLRS or SINCGARS to tactically employed sensors. The sensors correlate that information with their own local track data and send it to ADA unit headquarters. The ADA units then broadcast this data over the directed early warning net to maneuver units.

H-32 FM 71-3

(2) Voice early warning is the method of disseminating directed early warning. It is the alternative to digital early warning.

(3) Directed early warning is designed to alert a specific unit or area of the battlefield of an immediate aerial threat. ADOs will pass this early warning over their supported unit command net. Directed early warning defines:

• LADW. • Hostile/friendly/unknown air threat. • Location. • Cardinal direction. • The element most likely affected within the force.

An example is—’’DYNAMITE, DYNAMITE, TWO HOSTILE JETS, AT PL BLUE, HEADING EAST TOWARDS ASSEMBLY AREA BUDWEISER.”

H-18. Army Airspace Command and Control Operating Procedures.

a. A2C2 is the responsibility of the brigade commander for operations within brigade boundaries. While there is no formal A2C2 special staff element at brigade level, primary staff responsibility resides with the brigade S3-Air in the main CP. Other members of the brigade A2C2 element include the S2, FSO, ADA, and aviation LO, and the ALO. The element may be augmented by an air traffic services LO.

(1) Responsibilities. The primary tasks of the A2C2 staff element include—

• Developing and coordinating airspace control SOPs, plans, and annexes. • Coordinating the integrating airspace user requirements within the AOs to include other services and adjacent units. • Identifying and resolving airspace user conflicts. • Approving, staffing, and forwarding requests for special use airspace to the next higher headquarters. • Maintaining A2C2 information displays and maps.

(2) Procedures. The brigade coordinates airspace and air control measures through the operations channels. Since it is not a formalized staff element, the brigade A2C2 staff is not equipped with assets (communications, ADP equipment) dedicated to the A2C2 mission. Coordination is accomplished via MSE, FAX , radio, or FAADC3I.

b. A2C2 Control Measures. Methods to accomplish A2C2 vary throughout the range of military operations from war to OOTW. These methods range from positive control of all air assets in the brigade area to procedural control of such assets with any effective combination of positive and procedural control between the two extremes.

H-33 FM 71-3

(1) Positive Control. Positively identifies, tracks, and directs air assets using radars, other sensors, IFF/SIF, digital data links, and other elements of the digital data system.

(2) Procedural Control. Relies on previously agreed to and promulgated airspace control measures such as comprehensive air defense ID procedures and ROE, graphic control measures, and coordinating altitude. Effective DTGs will be annotated with each plotted control measure. The following paragraphs are examples and definitions of graphic control measures (see FM 100-103).

(a) Standard Army Aviation Flight Route. Routes that are established below the coordinating altitude to facilitate the movement of Army aviation assets. Normally, these routes are located in the corps through the brigade rear area. Although standard Army aviation flight routes are established by corps and division, the brigade is responsible for specifying the termination points (vicinity BSA/FSB) for their respective brigade.

(b) Air Corridors. An air corridor is a restricted air route of travel specified for use by friendly Army aircraft and established to prevent friendly forces from firing on friendly aircraft. They are temporary in nature, established as required to route combat elements of the corps or division aviation brigade (or UAV) between assembly areas, holding areas, BPs, FARPs, and target EAs.

(c) Air Control Points. An easily identifiable point on the terrain or an electronic navigational aid used to provide necessary control during air movement.

(d) High Density Airspace Control Zone. A high density airspace control zone is a defined area of airspace that is requested by the maneuver force commander, normally division and above. A high density airspace control zone reserves airspace and controls which airspace users have access to the zone. The maneuver commander can also direct a more restrictive weapons status within the high density airspace control zone. The activation of the high density airspace control zone at the request of a maneuver brigade commander (and approved by the division commander and the airspace control authority) within a brigade sector requires that the brigade control all airspace use within the high density airspace control zone. The brigade A2C2 staff within the CP may serve as the controlling element, or the brigade commander may request that the division attach an air traffic service’s element to the brigade headquarters to assist the brigade S3 with airspace control responsibilities.

(e) Restricted Operations Zone. A volume of airspace of defined dimensions designated for a specific operational mission. Entry into the zone is authorized only the originating headquarters. This airspace control measure requires airspace control and authority approval.

H-34 FM 71-3

(f) Airspace Coordination Area. In FS operations a restrictive FSCM that establishes a three-dimensional block of airspace in the battle in which friendly aircraft are reasonably safe from friendly surface fires. Aircraft and indirect fire are separated by time, space, and/or altitude. The purpose of the ACA is to allow the simultaneous attack of targets near each other by multiple FS means, one of which normally is air.

(g) Low Level Transit Route/Minimum Risk Route. A minimum risk route (low level transit route in NATO) is a temporary flight route recommended for Air Force use. It presents the minimum known hazards to low-flying aircraft in the control zone. The minimum risk route must be approved by the airspace control authority and avoids FS systems, air defense weapons, LZs, PZs, FARPs, and Army airfields.

H-19. Signal Procedures.

a. Operations.

(1) Call signs and frequencies will change daily at 2400 hours (local time) unless in contact with enemy forces. Call signs and frequencies will not change when any battalion-size element is engaged with enemy forces.

(2) The CP’s priorities for signal support and installation are—

• Combat net radio. • MSRTs. • Mobile subscriber route phones, FAX, and CT. • MCS.

b. Brigade Responsibility.

(1) Coordinate with the signal battalion on procedures to pick up their signal support teams.

(2) Provide logistics to signal support team.

(3) Include the signal team chief on all new site reconnaissance and planning meetings. Provide the signal team advance notice before relocation to accomplish coordination with the signal battalion.

c. Signal Support Team Responsibility.

(1) Install, operate, and maintain multichannel and TACSAT.

(2) Coordinate signal support requirement with the units’ SO.

H-35 FM 71-3

d. Mobile Subscriber Equipment.

(1) The brigade COMSEC office of record will distribute U-and M-key MSRT and U-key. Maneuver control system to unit battalion SOs.

(2) Keys will be tagged as follows:

• U110X (on the KYK-13 or KYX-15). • U = key tape. • 110 = HUS location. • X = edition.

(3) Keys will change over at 1200 hours on the last day of each month.

(4) The frequency plan for MSRTs will be downloaded from a radio access unit at a location and time directed by the signal battalion.

(5) Each CP and staff section is responsible for the installation of their section's MSE. Sections are responsible for laying their own wire or cable and tagging the wire at both ends with subscriber information (section number, subscriber listing, J-Box number, pair number).

(6) Mobile Subscriber Equipment Support Allocation (see Table H-8).

Table H-8. Mobile subscriber equipment support allocation. UNIT/GOMMAND POST SEN

Main Command Post Rear Command Post Direct Support Artillery Aviation Battalion Engineer Battalion

e. Combat Net Radios. All radios will be operated in the secure mode. While in the secure mode, fixed call signs may be used. If it is necessary to operate in a nonsecure mode, only call signs or suffixes contained in SOI will be used.

f. FM Communications.

(1) Primary FM nets:

• Command. For commanders, XOs, S3s, and authorized CPs to relate commander information.

H-36 FM 71-3

• Intelligence Net. S2/intelligence gathering and dissemination. The S2 for operations at the main CP is the NCS. • A/L Net. For logistical operations. The CSS cell at the brigade rear CP is the NCS.

(2) VINSON Guidance.

(a) VINSON is used by the NCS to distribute variables over the FM radio.

(b) Units/staffs will coordinate with their signal support element to ensure their MX-10579 or other electronic counter-countermeasures fill devices are marked and loaded with the correct variables before operation. Information concerning net descriptions, call signs/suffix, frequencies, signs and countersigns, smoke and pyrotechnics, frequency hopping, variables and supersession information is contained in the basic generator unit or the electronic notebook.

(c) Subordinate units use unique VINSON—TEK fills. All FM nets internal to that respective unit use the TEK in VINSON-fill position 2.

(d) Organic brigade units cross-attached within the brigade receive new parent units TEK via manual remote keying. Subordinate elements receive these variables via manual remote keying or automatic remote keying operations.

(3) Generation of Cryptovariables. The brigade SOs must ensure cyptovariables generated are distributed to all subordinate battalions.

(4) Variable Changeover.

• Changeover to be determined based on the tactical situation; however, if possible, occurs every Friday at 1200 local time. When possible, all combat net variables are changed physically using a KYK-13 or KYX- 15. Manual keying operations are performed only when absolutely necessary. • The brigade TEK/RKV is to be changed manually. • Units are to use their specific variable on their internal nets.

(5) All non-SINCGARS radios operate "new squelch on."

(6) Retransmission or relay priority is to the—

• Unit command/operations net. • Unit intelligence net. • Unit A/L net. FM 71-3

g. AM-Voice Operation (Long-Range Command Net). The AM-voice operation should be activated only on order of the division's main CP TOC or the division's TAC CP.

h. Courier.

(1) The brigade S3 will coordinate with the division G3 operations for daily courier operations.

(2) The tactical situation determines the courier schedules.

i. Wire. Priority of wire installation to the main CP:

• S3 operations cell. • S2 section. • FSE. • Others.

j. Tactical CP Radio Nets (see Table H-9).

Table H-9 Tactical command post radio nets. ELEMENT PRIORITY NETS Brigade Commander Division Command/OI Net Brigade Command 01 Net S3 Brigade Command Division Command S2 Brigade 01 Division 01 Fire Support Element (If available) Fire Support Coordination Net Fire Direction 1 Engineer/Chemical/Air Brigade Command Defense Artillery Division Command

k. Command group radio nets are established based on the personnel organized within the command group.

l. Main CP Radio Nets (see Table H-10).

H-38 FM 71-3

Table H-10. Main command post radio nets. ELEMENT PRIORITY NETS

S3 Element Division Command Brigade Command (NCS) Division Command (AM)

S2 Element Division Intelligence Brigade Intelligence (NCS)

Fire Support Element Brigade FSC Fire Direction 1 Division FSC

A2C2 Aviation Battalion Command Air Defense Coordinator AM Air Force

Engineer Element Brigade Command Engineer Battalion Command

m. Rear Command Post Radio Nets (see Table H-ll).

Table H-ll. Rear command post radio nets. ELEMENT PRIORITY NETS

S1/S4 Brigade Administrative/Logistics (NCS) Brigade Administrative/Logistics AM

Military Police Brigade Administrative/Logistics

S5 Rear Operations

H-20. Intelligence and Security Procedures.

a. General Security Procedures.

(1) Units must sweep evacuated CPs, buildings, bivouac areas, and assembly areas to ensure no classified or sensitive material is left behind.

(2) All classified material will be secured.

b. Named Area of Interest/Target Area of Interest Designation Procedures. The S2 controls and maintains the brigade NAIs designations as shown in Table H-12.

H-39 FM 71-3

Table H-12. Named areas of interest/target areas of interest designation procedures. ORIGIN DESCRIPTION

Brigade (Tactical, Main, Numeric only (31-60) or Rear Command Posts)

1st Battalion Begin with J (J1, J2)

2d Battalion Begin with K (Kl, K2)

3d Battalion Begin with N (N1, N2)

Aviation Battalion Begin with O (01, 02)

Light Infantry Battalion Begin with X (X1, X2)

c. Document Security.

(1) Do not carry or distribute written classified tactical orders forward of a battalion CP. Top-secret material must always be under armed guard and in the possession of an individual with a top-secret clearance.

(2) Remove classified material immediately from personnel wounded or KIA to prevent its capture or compromise.

(3) Do not permit classified material, except SOIs, to be carried in aircraft flying over enemy lines.

(4) Emergency Destruction of Classified Material.

(a) Personnel carrying classified material must be prepared to destroy that material in the event of imminent capture. The senior leader present makes the decision to destroy it.

(b) Each CP vehicle will have thermite grenades in a readily available and marked location. Every member of the CP will be familiar with destruction plans and how to use thermite grenades.

(5) Actions on Loss or Compromise of a Classified Document.

(a) Inform higher headquarters by fastest secure means if information has been or may have been compromised which impacts tactical operations.

(b) Conduct an immediate, thorough search in the event a document is missing.

H-40 FM 71-3

d. Personnel Security. Commanders report AWOL personnel who have access to classified information to the S2 at the brigade main CP.

e. Counterespionage, Countersabotage, Countersubversion, Disaffection, or Compromise.

(1) Report all known or suspected activities of sabotage, subversion, espionage, disaffection, or compromise of friendly information to the unit intelligence officer.

(2) Segregate from other EPWs persons apprehended in the act of espionage, sabotage, subversion, disaffection, or compromise, or those found in circumstances that indicate they were employed covertly by the enemy.

f. Enemy Prisoners of War.

(1) Use the five "Ss" (search, silence, segregate, safeguard, and speed to the rear) when processing EPWs.

(2) Tag EPWs and documents and material of possible intelligence value with the minimum following information: DTG, location of capture, capturing unit, and the circumstances of capture.

(3) Escort EPWs to the unit EPW collection point. Do not take EPWs near CPs, TOCs, FDCs, or radios.

(a) Committed battalions establish an active EPW collection point and designate one future EPW collection point near the MSR or supply route. The brigade S4 recommends the location of the brigade EPW collection point (and future location) to the brigade S3 for approval.

(b) Battalions must guard and evacuate captured EPWs to brigade collection points. The brigade S4 will coordinate with the division PM for transporting EPWs to the division collection point.

(c) Battalions evacuate wounded EPWs to battalion-level aid stations. The battalions will evacuate treated and released EPWs to the EPW collection point at brigade.

(d) Conduct tactical interrogation at the unit level only for information of immediate tactical value. Personnel must not unnecessarily delay evacuation of EPWs.

(e) To aid follow-on interrogation of EPWs—

• Screen for NBC contamination and decontaminate as required. • Give medical aid as necessary.

H-41 FM 71-3

• Give food and water only to sustain life. Do not give EPWs comfort items such as candy or cigarettes. • Report EPW capture. • Guards and escorts should be firm but fair when dealing with EPWs. They must not allow other friendly personnel to conduct unnecessary conversations with the EPW. • Evacuate EPW in the following order:

- Field grade or higher ranking officers. - Intelligence officers. - Security and chemical personnel. - Others.

(4) After interrogation, EPWs are placed in the following categories for evacuation:

• Category A: EPWs of most interest, including general officers and persons with knowledge of intelligence, NBC, PSYOP, logistics, communications, and cryptographic operations. • Category B: EPWs of some limited intelligence value. • Category C: EPWs of no immediate tactical value. • Category D: EPWs of no intelligence value.

g. Captured Documents and Equipment.

(1) As with EPWs, captured documents and equipment fall into these established categories. They are—

• Category A: documents and equipment of immediate tactical or strategic value. • Category B: cryptographic items. • Category C: items of lesser value to intelligence. • Category D: items with no apparent value.

(2) Report enemy equipment that is new, unusual or NBC-related, or documents that appear to be of immediate tactical value.

(3) Tag captured documents and evacuate them by the fastest means. Do not mark or deface documents. Do not destroy documents unless recovery by the enemy is imminent. Never destroy captured medical supplies. Report any destruction of captured material.

(4) Contact the S4 for explosive ordnance disposal for assistance in the recovery and evacuation of captured munitions and explosives. Report with other captured materiel.

H-42 FM 71-3

Use of Challenge and Password.

(1) All assigned or attached units will use challenges and passwords found in current division SOIs.

(2) Change the challenge and password at 1200 hours each day.

i. Reconnaissance and Surveillance.

(1) All units will conduct reconnaissance patrols unless otherwise directed.

(2) Battalions in contact must report information or intelligence derived from patrols to the S2 at the TAC CP.

(3) Battalion-level plans are submitted to the S2 at the main CP not later that one hour after the MSC occupies a static position. Units in the BSA submit plans directly to the FSB CP.

H-21. Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Procedures.

a. Mission-Oriented Protective Posture.

(1) The division will designate the minimum MOPP level. The brigade commander and battalion commanders may increase or decrease the MOPP level as needed, but they may not decrease the MOPP level below the established minimum level without prior approval by the next higher commander.

(2) MOPP Uniform. At the various levels of MOPP, soldiers must comply with Table H-13.

H-43 FM 71-3

Table H-13. Standardized mission-oriented protection posture levels MOPP LEVELS MOPP MASK MOPP MOPP 1 MOPP 2 MOPP 3 MOPP4 READY ONLY ZERO EQUIPMENT Mask Carried Worn Carried Carried Carried Worn* Worn Overgarment Ready Available Available Worn* Worn* Worn* Worn Vinyl Ready Available Available Available Worn Worn Worn Overboot Gloves Available Available Available Carried Carried Carried Worn Helmet Protective Ready Available Available Worn Worn Worn Worn Cover Chemical Protective Ready Available Available Worn* Worn* Worn* Worn* Undergar- ment * In hot weather coat or hood can be left open for ventilation. ** The CPU is worn under the BDU (primarily applies to SOP, armor vehicle crewmen).

(3) Mask Only. Mask only is a "by exception" level. This condition applies to soldiers in vans, tanks, and similar shelters not penetrable by any means. Soldiers do not need to wear protective overgarments or rubber gloves if they are protected from direct skin exposure to liquid or solid contamination.

b. Required NBC Teams. Each battalion will establish the following NBC teams to support tactical operations:

• NBC control party. • Radiological monitoring and survey teams. • Chemical survey team. • Chemical monitoring team. • Decontamination team.

c. NBC Alarms and Warnings.

(1) Standard alarms within the brigade for NBC attack are—

• Vocal: "GAS, GAS, GAS" for suspected chemical or biological attack; "FALLOUT" for arrival of radioactive fallout. • Sound: metal on metal. • Visual: hand-and-arm signals.

H-44 FM 71-3

(2) Chemical Threat Warning. The chemical threat warning system reflects the latest intelligence estimate regarding the enemy's NBC activity. The brigade chemical officer, S2, and the S3 recommend the chemical THREATCON based on intelligence estimates and reports. The NBC Cell is responsible for disseminating the chemical threat serial.

(3) Chemical Threat Serial (see Table H-14).

Table H-14, Chemical threat serial. SERIAL PROBABILITY OF RECOMMENDED ATTACK MINIMUM MOPP LEVEL

0 None 0 1 Low 0 2 Medium 1 3 High 2

d. Nuclear, Biological, Chemical Reporting Procedures. Immediately notify the brigade main CP of the enemy's first use of NBC weapons. Use and transmit the prescribed NBC-1 message format to the NBC section. (Two positive M256 detector tests constitute positive identification of chemical agents.)

e. Marking Contaminated Areas.

(1) The unit detecting the contamination will mark NBC-contaminated areas, using the standard markings prescribed in FM 3-3. Request assistance in NBC reconnaissance through the NBC section.

(2) Commanders may only elect not to mark contaminated areas to obtain a tactical advantage; they must advise any unit assuming responsibility for the area of contamination of its location.

(3) Changes in the status of contaminated areas are to be reported to the NBC section.

H-22. Engineer Procedures.

a. The engineer battalion commander directs the missions of all engineers in the brigade AOs.

H-45 FM 71-3

b. Priority of transport of Class IV and V materiel to obstacle site is as follows:

• Organic engineer units. • Supported unit. • Other units as directed.

c. Countermobility Procedures.

(1) Temporary Obstacle Marking. As the engineer (or other) forces breach a lane, it must be marked in the following manner (use GPS to locate lane entrances).

• Mark the right and left limit of the entrance with VS 17 aircraft marking panels with the orange side facing friendly traffic. Use pickets, from 5 to 6 feet long, to form a tripod on which to attach the panel. • Use backup entrance markers (sections of empty T-rations containers) with the shiny side toward friendly traffic. • During reduced visibility, mark entrances with green and IR chemlights or both. Place chemlights in holders or otherwise modify them so they will be visible only to friendly traffic. • The day signal for traffic to proceed is purple smoke on the downwind edge of the open lane. Backup is a gray smoke grenade. There will be picket tripods every 25 meters or closer, as required, with engineer tape to define the limits of the lane. • The exit will be marked approximately 10 meters beyond the edge with picket tripods and panels with the red side facing traffic. Night signals will be red chemlights or IR and red chemlights in holders or otherwise modified to shine away from the enemy.

(2) ST AN AGs and minefield and/or obstacle marking methods must be observed as time and resources allow.

d. Scatterable Mine Procedures.

(1) Long-duration scatterable minefields are emplaced only on approval of the division commander, the Assistant Division Commander for Maneuver (ADC-M), Chief of Staff, or G3.

(2) Short duration (anything under 6 hours) scatterable minefields may be delegated to task force commanders.

e. Battalion Responsibilities.

• Units guard all targets within their sectors of responsibility. • Units cover with fire all obstacles within their sectors of responsibility.

H-46 FM 71-3

f. Route Maintenance and Repair (Mobility). The brigade rear CP coordinates all requirements for route maintenance with the division rear CP.

g. Standard Obstacle Packages (see Tables H-15 through H-21).

Table H-15. Triple standard concertina 100 meters. DESCRIPTION NUMBER WEIGHT CUBE

Pickets, Long 54 536 63.7 (U-Shaped)

Wire, Barbed (Reel) 1 92 0.9

Pickets, Short 4 16 .24 (U-Shaped)

Concertina (Roll) 20 617 21.0

1,261 85.84

Table H-16. Abatis (20 in dia trees or bridge demolition (2-lane, class 60). DESCRIPTION NUMBER WEIGHT CUBE

Explosive, C4 173 lbs 173 3.6

Detonating Cord 1,000 ft 77 0.6

Time Fuze 20 ft 5.1

Nonelectric Caps 19 neg neg

Electric Caps 1 neg neg

Fuze Lighter 1 neg neg

Mine, AT M15 8 398 9.5

Mine, AP M16 8 90 1.6

743 15.3

H-47 FM 71-3

Table H-17. Road crater M-180. DESCRIPTION NUMBER WEIGHT CUBE

Demo Kit M180 5 895 32.20

Mine, AT M15 6 294 7.00

Mine, AP M16 4 45 .79

1,234 39.99

Table H-18. Road crater standard (31 by 18 by 6 feet) DESCRIPTION NUMBER WEIGHT CUBE

40-lb Shape Charge 7 455 13.10

40-lb Crater Charge 7 364 9.66

1-lb TNT (Booster) 7 neg neg

Detonating Cord 350 ft 7 .90

Time Fuze 20 ft neg neg

Electric Delay Caps 1 neg neg

Electric Caps 1 neg neg

Nonelectric Caps 1 neg neg

Fuze Lighter 1 neg neg

Mine, AT M15 6 294 7.08

Mine, AP M16 4 45 0.79

1,185 31.53

H-48 FM 71-3

Table H-19. Row minefield M-15 (1 30 by 10 meters); three-strip surface laid DESCRIPTION NUMBER WEIGHT CUBE

Mine AT M-15 100 4,900 120.0

Table H-20. Survivability positions (15) DESCRIPTION NUMBER WEIGHT CUBE

Sheet 3/4-inch 15 960 30.0 Plywood

Pickets, Short (U) 120 480 7.2

Sandbags, Unit 6,000 1.500 60.0

2,940 97.2

Table H-21. Demolition pack. DESCRIPTION NUMBER WEIGHT CUBE

Explosive C4 173 lbs 173 3.6

Detonating Cord 1,000 ft 154 1.2

Time Fuze 20 ft 10 .2

Nonelectric Caps 19 neg neg

Electric Caps 1 neg neg

Fuze Lighter 1 neg neg

327 5.0

H-23. Fire Support.

a. Purpose. To direct procedures for the coordination and control of FS assets available to the brigade.

b. Target Numbering System (see Figures H-22 through H-26). All the division's indirect-fire targets will be designated by a two-letter, four-digit number. The letters "I"

H-49 FM 71-3 and "O" are not used because they can be confused with numbers. The first letter is assigned to the corps. The second letter is assigned within the division according to Table H-22.

Table H-22. Second letter assignments. Division A Division Artillery B 1st Brigade C 2d Brigade D 3d Brigade E Aviation Brigade F

Table H-23. Assignment of blocks of numbers for brigade echelons. NUMBER ASSIGNED TO

0001-1999 Fire Support Cell

2000-2999 Fire Support Officer, Lowest Number Maneuver Battalion or Squadron

3000-3999 Fire Support Officer, Second Lowest Numbered Maneuver Battalion or Squadron

4000-4999 Fire Support Officer, Third Lowest Numbered Maneuver Battalion or Squadron

5000-6999 Additional Fire Support Officers

7000-7999 Fire Direction Center, Direct Support Artillery

8000-8999 Counterfire Targets

H-50 FM 71-3

Table H-24. Subassignment of blocks of number for battalion echelons. NUMBERS ASSIGNED TO

000-199 Fire Support Cell 200-299 FIST, Company A 300-399 FIST, Company B 400-499 FIST, Company C 500-599 FIST, Company D 600-699 FIST, Company E 700-799 Additional FISTs and COLTs 800-899 Battalion Mortar Platoon, Scouts, or Howitzer Battery 900-999 As Required

Table H-25. Target number assignments for division troops. Cavalry Squadron A 0001-0499 Rear Command Post Fire Support Element A 0500-0999 Tactical Command Post Fire Support Element A 1000-1249 Engineer Brigade A 1250-1499 Air Defense Artillery Battalion A 1500-1749 Military Intelligence Battalion A 1750-1999 Main Command Post Fire Support Element A 2000-9999

Table H-26. Current laser pulse repetition frequency code distribution. 1st Brigade Fire Support Officer 351-358, 361-368, 371-378, 381-388 2d Brigade Fire Support Officer 171-178, 181-188, 211-218, 221-226, 341-348 3d Brigade Fire Support Officer 231-238, 241-248, 251-258, 331-338 Aviation Brigade Fire Support Officer 261-268, 271-278, 281-288, 311-318, 321-328, 411-418 Cavalry Squadron Fire Support Officer 441-448, 451-458 Division Left Flank 111-118 Division Right Flank 121-128, (allocated in plans and orders) Division Fire Support Element (Reserve) 421-428, 431-438

H-51 FM 71-3

c. Laser Puise Codes. In the division, laser puise codes will be managed by the division's FSE, including codes for attack helicopters.

H-24. Army Aviation Procedures.

a. Attack Helicopter Battalion.

(1) The mission of the attack helicopter battalion is to destroy massed, moving, enemy armored and mechanized forces and other forces with aerial firepower, mobility, and shock effect. The attack helicopter is a combat maneuver unit. It is normally employed as a battalion and uses aerial firepower and maneuver to mass combat power alone or to complement other maneuver forces as a member of the combined arms team. Attack helicopter units also perform reconnaissance and security missions.

(2) The commander tactically employs the attack helicopter battalion through coordination of attack helicopter companies, CS, and CSS elements. The missions that an attack helicopter battalion can expect to be employed on are varied, but the three methods of employment are—

• Continuous Attack. This method of attack exerts constant pressure on the enemy throughout the battle. It is characterized by one company in the battle, a second company in a holding area ready to provide relief and the third company in the FARP. This method of attack provides the most flexible and efficient use of FARPs. • Phased Attack. This method of attack increases the initial firepower of the battalion on the enemy. It is characterized by initially employing one company to start the attack with the second company quickly phased into the battle from a different BP. When either of the first two companies is low on fuel or ammo, the third company is phased into the attack to continue the battle. One FARP may support the attack, however, the use of two FARPs is more responsive. • Maximum Destruction. This method enables the commander to deliver as much combat power as possible into the battle and overwhelm the enemy with massed fires. It is characterized by employing all three companies simultaneously from different BPs. Depending on the location and efficiency of the FARP, the entire battalion may be out of the battle for 20 to 90 minutes after expending fuel or ammunition.

(3) The following are critical aspects of attack helicopter operations:

• The mission statement for attack missions should include the objective, objective location, and the expected results of the attack (destroy, attrit, disrupt, overwatch, or deny/delay avenues of approach).

H-52 FM 71-3

• When used as a main or supporting attack, attack helicopter units should have their own axis of advance (separate from the ground maneuver force axis of advance). • Firing positions for attack helicopters should be at least 1 kilometer apart from each other. • Attack helicopters— - Are capable of attacking targets within 500 meters of friendly troops. - Have the capability to destroy moving-point targets. - Can deliver, guide, or help guide smart laser munitions. - Are vulnerable to enemy air defense and counterair. - Have limited loiter times before having to return for fuel. - May sometimes sacrifice destruction of armored systems to carry rockets to destroy “soft” targets.

b. Assault Helicopter Battalion.

(1) Assault helicopters are used to accomplish a variety of missions. The versatility, agility, and speed of assault helicopters performing combat (air assault), CS, and CSS missions can be a significant combat multiplier to any ground commander employing those assets.

(2) The commander tactically employs the assault helicopter battalion in the following ways:

• Air Assault Operations. Air assaults are deliberately and precisely planned and executed combined arms operations. Assaults allow the air assault task force to strike over extended distances, terrain barriers, and man-made barriers to attack the enemy when and where he is most vulnerable, using speed and surprise as its main weapon. • CS Missions. Assault helicopters performing air movement missions transport combat forces whose main mission is to engage and destroy enemy forces. These operations differ from air assaults in command and control relationships and in classification of the mission. Air movements do not usually result in the task organization of aviation assets as a member of the combined arms team (air assaults generally do). Aviation assets are not considered to be maneuver assets when performing air movements. Other CS missions performed include command and control missions where the aircraft will act as the commander’s airborne command center or AIRTAC and combat search and rescue. While these missions will take the aircraft into a combat situation, they are not combat missions. • CSS Missions. CSS air movements are those involving the use of Army airlift assets for other than air assault or CS operations. As with CS air movements, they do not generally result in task organization of aviation assets into the combined arms team. These air movements, conducted

H-53 FM 71-3

only in the close and rear battle areas, are commonly used to transport troops, equipment, ammunition, fuel, and supplies around the battlefield.

(3) The following are critical aspects of assault helicopter operations:

• The maneuver unit must provide the ground tactical plan, commander’s intent, and graphics to the unit supporting the mission. • Take sun and lunar data into account when selecting PZs and especially LZs. Landing into a full moon close to the horizon on night-vision goggles is like flying unaided. • Take into account the advantages of single versus multiple LZs listed in FM 90-4 when developing the landing plan. When fighting an armored or mechanized force, the LZ must be placed in armor/mechanized restrictive terrain to prevent the antiarmor task force from being trapped on the LZ. • The ground commander must provide his “abort criteria.” That is, how many aircraft loads he can afford to lose before the mission will probably fail and should be called off. • The ground maneuver unit must provide the LO with a loading plan/airloading table, bump plan, and air movement table for the mission. • Coordinate for Pathfinder support, if available. Pathfinders can provide PZ/LZ clearing, marking, and even set up a tactical nondirectional beacon at a RP, if coordinated. • Select and secure the LZ or PZ. • Provide LZ and PZ control, six-digit grid location of LZ and PZ, and frequencies and call signs to the aviation unit. • Brief the aviation POC on the current enemy and friendly situations, FS measures, and control measures. • Provide slings, nets, and a qualified rigger for external loads. • Provide ground guides and hook-up personnel for external-load operations.

c. Air Cavalry Squadron.

(1) The divisional cavalry/air reconnaissance squadron performs the full range of reconnaissance (route, zone, area), limited security (screen), and other operations (passage of lines/battle handover, facilitate movement, restore command and control, area damage control, economy of force, and deception operations) for the division commander. In essence, it is the eyes and ears of the division. In the light division, it also gives the commander an additional resource that can deliver mobile, reactive firepower.

H-54 FM 71-3

(2) The commander tactically employs the air cavalry squadron through the full range of reconnaissance, security, and other operations with some limitations on specific missions.

(a) An air cavalry squadron will require augmentation to conduct a guard mission. METT-T and the degree of protection required determines the amount of augmentation.

(b) The only cavalry organization that can do a cover without considerable augmentation is the armored cavalry regiment.

d. Aviation Planning Factors (see Tables H-27 through H-31).

Table H-27. AH-64. ARMAMENT Hellfire Missile 8,000 m Rocket Hydra 70 9,000 m Gun 30 mm 4,000 m OPTICS TADS/DAY TV Lowlight, Daytime TADS/FLIR Day, Night, Weather NAVIGATION Heading attitude reference system (combination of inertial navigation and Doppler navigation). Also, GPS in most models. FLIGHT Max Speed (Level) 164 knots CHARACTERISTICS Normal Cruise 100 knots Deep, X-FLOT 120 knots Endurance 2:30

Table H-28. AH-1 ARMAMENT TOW Missile 3,750 m Rocket Hydra 70 9.000 m Gun 20 mm 1,500 m OPTICS Telescopic Sight Unit Day Only See-Night FUR Day, Night, FUR NAVIGATION Doppler FLIGHT Max Speed (Level) 140 knots CHARACTERISTICS Normal Cruise 100 knots X-FLOT 120 knots Endurance 1:45

H-55 FM 71-3

Table H-29. OH-58D. ARMAMENT Hellfire Missile 8,000 m ATA Stinger 5,000 m Rocket Range Hydra 70 7,000 m Gun .50 cal 1,600 m OPTICS Mast Mounted Stinger Day, Night, Weather Pilots use ANVIS-6 to fly aircraft at night. NAVIGATION Attitude heading reference system similar to AH-64, but considered better. FLIGHT Max Speed (Level) 125 knots CHARACTERISTICS Normal Cruise 100 knots Endurance 2:30

Table H-30. UH-60. ARMAMENT Two M60D MGs (self-protection only) OPTICS Pilots use ANVIS-6 to fly the aircraft at night. NAVIGATION Doppler Navigation or GPS FLIGHT Max Speed (Level) 156 knots CHARACTERISTICS Normal Cruise 120-145 knots Endurance 2:15 TRANSPORTATION CAPABILITIES EMPTY GW INCL MAX GW MAX HOOK CREW/FUEL UH-60 A 14,000 20,250 8,000 UH-60L 14,250 22,000 10,000

H-56 FM 71-3

Table H-31. CH-47D. ARMAMENT Two M60D 7.62 MG (self- protection only) OPTICS Pilots use ANVIS-6 to fly aircraft at night. NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT Doppler Navigation or GPS FLIGHT Max Speed (Level) 170 knots CHARACTERISTICS Normal Cruise 120-145 knots Endurance 2:30 TRANSPORTATION CAPABILITIES EMPTY GW INCL MAX GW MAX HOOK CREW/FUEL CH-47D 30,000 50,000 26,000

H-25. Attachment and Detachment Procedures.

a. The headquarters ordering the transfer specifies—

• The gaining and losing headquarters. • Task organization of the unit to be transferred, including logistic and support requirements. • When DTG transfer is effective. • The route the transferred unit will use.

b. The losing headquarters—

(1) Provides the transferred unit with CSS necessary to sustain itself for at least 12 hours (for a company or team) or 24 hours (for a battalion or task force), for example—

• POL tanker and packaged POL. • Ammunition carriers. • Mechanics, tools, and parts (with transportation). • Medics and ambulances. • Class I supplies. • Class V supplies.

(2) Provides to the transferred unit—

• SOI extracts of gaining headquarters’ command, logistics, and indirect- fire networks. • Route, movement time, and recognition signal at linkup points.

H-57 FM 71-3

(3) Ensures that—

• The transferred unit leaves with full fuel and ammunition loads. • The transferred unit continues to receive personnel and equipment replacements and repaired equipment that was earmarked for it before the transfer.

c. The gaining headquarters—

(1) Provides to the transferred unit at the linkup point a guide who knows or possesses the following information:

• The mission and concept (including graphics) for the transferred unit. • The gaining unit's logistic units' locations. • Access to the gaining unit's indirect-fire nets. • The situation in the gaining command's sector or zone.

(2) Provides fuel top-off of transferred unit bulk carriers and armored fighting vehicles.

(3) Provides ammunition as required and available.

(4) Provides communications information, including—

• Frequencies, call signs, and secure fills. • The gaining unit's SOI for the transferred unit commander. • Pyrotechnic and other visual signals, as required.

d. The transferred unit—

(1) Moves over assigned route to RP at times assigned.

(2) Contacts gaining headquarters on secure FM radio before reaching the linkup point, and provides the gaining command a unit status report and logistics requirements (fuel and ammunition).

(3) Dispatches a LO to the linkup point as soon as possible after receiving the transfer order.

(4) Prepares for commitment to combat directly from the linkup point.

e. Staff Responsibilities. When the attachment or detachment involves a light infantry unit, coordinate for the attachment or detachment of FSB assets and any other logistic support.

H-58 FM 71-3

(1) S2.

(a) Helps the S3 develop plans that control the execution of attachment and deny enemy knowledge of the activity.

(b) Provides the gaining headquarters, for example a light infantry battalion, an assessment of the enemy situation along both flanks of the proposed employment.

(2) Signal Officer.

(a) Develops a signal support plan and requests additional support if necessary.

(b) Determines SOI requirements for the attached unit and distributes sufficient copies as required.

(3) Losing Unit Commander.

(a) Tailors a complete support package from organic assets to sustain detached forces of company or team size or larger.

(b) Ensures that the gaining command receives personnel and equipment status reports from the detached unit immediately on its arrival.

(4) S3.

(a) Informs the staff and other subordinate or adjacent units of the following.

• Units being attached or detached. • Period of attachment or detachment. • Changes to existing task organization. • Current and proposed locations of the headquarters that will exercise control.

(b) Briefs the gaining headquarters on the current situation and planned actions.

(d) Briefs the gaining headquarters of any pertinent information concerning the capabilities and limitations, unique weapons system, and employment of the attached or detached unit.

H-59 FM 71-3

(5) S4.

(a) Arranges logistic support for the unit.

(b) Coordinates with the S3, the movement of units through the brigade AOs.

(c) Notifies the FSB of the unit involved and its effective DTG of attachment or detachment so resources may be reallocated as appropriate and the flow of supplies will continue uninterrupted to the detached unit. The standard armored or mechanized battalion consists of—

• HHC. • Four mechanized or armored companies. • One antiarmored company (if mechanized and Ml 13 equipped). • One scout platoon. • One mortar platoon.

H-26. Light Forces Integration Procedures and Responsibilities.

a. A light infantry battalion may be attached to the brigade for a limited time period to conduct conventional and OOTW missions.

b. The brigade XO ensures the light battalion provides an LO to the brigade main and rear CPs.

c. The standard light infantry battalion task organization consists of—

• HHC. • Three infantry companies. • One reconnaissance platoon. • One mortar platoon. • One antiarmored platoon.

H-27. Logistic Procedures.

a. The logistic SPOTREP (Yellow 1) is used by all units to report immediate combat losses of equipment and personnel. Unless otherwise indicated, all logistic reports (yellow and red) are report by exception.

b. Assigned or attached battalions units receive logistic support from the FSB platoon.

c. The S4 is the POC for interservice logistic requests and agreements. The S4 coordinates with the supporting division, corps, and joint task force to obtain funding support for local contracting and procurement efforts.

H-60 FM 71-3

d. Reconstitution Procedures.

(1) Reorganization. The brigade conducts reorganization of available assets to maintain effectiveness of designated units.

(a) Reorganization is the standard method of regenerating combat power within the brigade. The massing of vehicles, personnel, and Classes III and V supplies of several different units into one unit is required during this process. Maintaining small- unit integrity is a primary consideration.

(b) The authority to reorganize and consolidate units rests with the commander two levels above the unit to be reorganized.

(c) Any reorganization conducted at any level within the brigade must be immediately reported through both operations and logistic channels on completion.

(d) Minimum manning levels. Before initiating the process of reorganizing, units should attempt to fight weapon systems at minimum manning levels. Permission to go to minimum manning levels will be retained by battalion commanders. Table H-32 shows the minimum manning levels authorized within the brigade on specified equipment.

(2) Regeneration. The brigade may be part of a division regeneration operation when in a noncommitted status and when located in a corps or theater assembly area.

Table H-32. Brigade minimum manning levels. System Authorized Manning Minimum Manning Level Level Tank 4 3 Howitzer 9 5 ITV 3 2 Mortar crew 4 3 CFV (M3) 5 3 MLRS 3 2 BSFV 5 3 Stinger 2 1

(3) Weapons Systems Replacement Operations. WSROs are conducted to provide fully operational, ready-to-fight replacement weapons systems, both vehicle and crew. The brigade does not link up personnel and equipment when conducting WSROs when in a committed status. The normal size of WSROs replacement units coming to the

H-61 FM 71-3 brigade are at the platoon level. Larger-size units are received on an exception basis after coordination with division. The WSROs responsibilities are—

• The brigade S3 is responsible for determining priority for WSRO. The S4 initiates the request to the division. Final assignment decisions for replacement weapons systems are made by the S3. • The DMMC is responsible for coordinating the movement, reception, and processing of all incoming WSROs units from corps and for delivery to the brigade. • Replacement weapons systems or units are moved into an assembly area near the division rear CP. The S4 coordinates with the rear CP G3 operations element for the designated assembly area. • Once located in the assembly area, the S4 coordinates the following functions before releasing the unit:

- Shelter and sleeping area for new crews. - Personnel actions to process crew into the division. - Resupply of Classes III and V supplies to vehicles. - Maintenance check for vehicles. - Vehicle and personnel precombat inspections as per TSOP. - Individual weapons authorized to crew members. - Map or physical reconnaissance of the local area to vehicle commanders and key leaders. - Task the unit with local security missions to begin team training and equipment familiarity while in the assembly area. - Assess the unit's training status for input to receiving unit. If time permits, conduct crew drills and small-unit training in rear area.

• On order, WSROs units are sent to the BSA with LOOP AC operations. • Receiving unit links up with the WSROs unit at BSA and leads to the final location.

e. Supply.

(1) General.

(a) Controlled supply rate is the required supply rate.

(b) Throughput distribution from corps to the DSA and BSA is the normal method of operations.

(c) Unless otherwise requested, LOGPACs deliver standard supply packages to forward units. Preconfigured unit loads consolidated by corps are prepared to provide shipment to the user whenever possible, thus eliminating double handling within the division.

H-62 FM 71-3

(d) No supply vehicle ever sits empty except for maintenance.

(2) Supply Specifics.

(a) Class I:

• The units' basic load is a three-day supply of MRE. • The brigade's authorized stockage level is three-day supply. This does not include unit basic load. • Ration cycle is T-MRE-T. • Class I standard resupply packages are shown in Table H-33.

Table H-33, Class I standard resupply packages. UNIT MEALS CASES PALLETS Tank Battalion 1,728 144 3 Mechanized 2,304 192 4 Battalion Artillery Battery 1.152 96 2 Air Defense 1.152 96 2 Artillery Cavalry Troop 1.152 96 2 Engineer Battalion 1,221 102 2

(b) Water.

• The unit basic load is two-day supply. • FSB uses unit strength data for water requirements.

(d) Class III and IIIA Package:

• Unit basic load Class IIIA (package) is 30-day supply. • Class III standard resupply packages are shown in Table H-34.

H-63 FM 71-3

Table H -34, Class III standard resupp y packages. UNIT GALLONS 500 GALLON BLADDERS Tank Battalion 13.000 26 Mechanized Battalion 4.000 8 Artillery Battalion 2.000 4 Air Defense Artillery 2,000 4 Battery Cavalry Troop 5,000 10 Engineer Battalion 10.000 20

(e) Class V. Standard ATP unit package items are—

• A 105-millimeter tank (120 rounds HEAT, 480 rounds APFSDS). • A 120-millimeter tank (120 rounds HEAT, 480 rounds APFSDS). • A 155-millimeter artillery standard (48 rounds HE, 288 rounds DPICM). • A 155-millimeter artillery FASCAM (mix not available). • An 8-inch artillery standard (240 rounds HE). • An MLRS (eight pods—48 rockets). • TOW missiles (8 pallets).

(f) Combat Configured Loads for Class V Packages. The division and brigade uses combat configured loads to simplify planning and coordination for ammunition resupply. The combat configured loads Class V packages are delivered by LOGPACs to user units in the amounts and types of munitions prescribed here unless requested differently in a Yellow-3 Report. Table H-35 shows the combat configured loads packages that are designated as combat configured loads-A.

Table H-35. Combat configured loads-A. TYPE UNIT DESCRIPTION ROUNDS DEPOT PACK DEPOT PACK PROVIDED QUANTITY M1/M1A1 105/120 HEAT 1,260 42 Pallet ARMOR 5/120 1,890 63 Pallet BATTALION APFSDS-T ,50-cal 55,440 11 Pallet 7.62-mm 633,600 22 Pallet Smoke 1,152 2 Pallet Grenade

H-64 FM 71-3

Table H-35. Combat configured loads-A (continued).

TYPE UNIT DESCRIPTION ROUNDS DEPOT PACK DEPOT PACK PROVIDED QUANTITY

BRADLEY TÓ\A/ 372 31 Pallet MECHANIZED 25-mm (AP) 33,300 37 Pallet BATTALION 25-mm (HE) 16,800 28 Pallet 7.62-mm 230,400 8 Pallet 5.56-mm Ball 161,280 2 Pallet 40-mm HEDP 1,944 1 Pallet Dragon Missile 24 3 Pallet Smoke 1,152 2 Pallet Grenade

MORTAR 5.56- 1,640 mBox m PLATOON Tracer 5.56- 5,040 3m Box m Ball 7.62-mm 4+1 4,800 6 Box ,50-cal M2 2,400 12 Box 4.2- 360 i9 Pallet n HE 4.2- 40 i1 Pallet n Ilium 4.2- 120 i3 Pallet n WP HE Fuze 368 23 Box III Fuze 48 3 Box Smoke Fuze 128 8 Box

ANTITANK TOW 120 10 Pallet COMPANY 5.56- 1,640 1m Box m Tracer 5.56- 13,440 8m Box m Ball 7.62-mm 4+1 28,800 1 Pallet ,50-cal M2 3,600 18 Box 40-mm HEDP 432 6 Box TOW 60 5 Pallet LAW 18

M3 BRADLEY 25-mm (AP) 5,400 6 Pallet SCOUT 25-mm (HE) 3,000 5 Pallet PLATOON 7.62 mm 28,800 1 Pallet 5.56-mm (Ball) 10,080 6 Box Smoke 96 24 Box Grenades

H-65 FM 71-3

Table H-35. Combat configured loads-A (continued) TYPE UNIT DESCRIPTION ROUNDS DEPOT DEPOT PROVIDED PACK PACK QUANTITY

DIVISION TOW 540 45 Pallet CAVALRY LAW 120 2 Pallet SQUADRON 25-mm (AP) 39,600 44 Pallet 25-mm (HE) 19,800 33 Pallet 7.62-mm 86,400 3 Pallet 5.56-mm (bal) 80,640 1 Pallet Smoke Grenades 576 1 Pallet 2.75-mm Rocket 300 5 Pallet 20-mm 7,200 3 Pallet (incl Air Trp Class V)

155-SP FIELD HE 408 51 Pallet ARTILLERY RAP 288 36 Pallet BATTALION APICM 168 21 Pallet DPICM 1,752 207 Pallet Copperhead 108 18 Pallet WP 24 3 Pallet Illumination 24 3 Pallet ADAM 24 3 Pallet RAAMS 144 18 Pallet M577 Fuze 2,112 132 Box M582 Fuze 336 21 Box M739 Fuze 240 15 Box M728 144 9 Box M119A1/A2 360 12 Pallet Powder M3-Series Powder 864 12 Pallet M4-Series Powder 1,725 69 Pallet Primers 3,200

AVIATION HELLFIRE 158 21 Pallet BATTALION 30-mm 14,400 8 Pallet (FARR) 2.75-mm Rocket 452 7 Pallet

H-66 FM 71-3

(3) Maintenance Specifics.

(a) Priority of repair is to weapons systems, command and control, and transportation assets. During tactical operations emphasis is on battle damage repair.

(b) Responsibilities:

• FSB—ground, missile, COMSEC items. Class IX and DX. • Aviation—battalion aviation.

(4) Repair Time Guidelines:

• UMCPs—from 4 to 8 hours. • BSA—from 8 to 24 hours. • DSA—from 24 to 36 hours.

(5) Evacuation Responsibilities:

• Unit—from UMCP to BSA. • DISCOM—from BSA to DSA.

f. Services.

(1) Clothing Exchange and Bath:

• Laundry service is direct exchange only. • Support battalion schedules and positions. • Service is on an area basis.

(2) Bath. Priority of support—

• Committed troop units. • Medical treatment facility patients. • Troop units in rest area and/or unit assembly areas.

(3) Mortuary Affairs.

(a) Noncontaminated remains:

• Initial search, recovery, identification, and evacuation of remains to the battalion combat trains is a unit responsibility. Personal effects are kept with the remains. • Remains are transported from unit combat trains to the BSA mortuary affairs point and ultimately to the DSA on returning LOGPAC vehicles.

H-67 FM 71-3

• No combat power is used to carry personnel KIA to the rear. • Units maintain two-day supply, unit basic load mortuary affairs supplies. FSB maintains 30-day supply, authorized stockage list. • Formula for determination of unit basic load: Troop strength times, .0025 x 2 days.

(b) Contaminated remains:

• Treat all remains found in a contaminated area as contaminated. • Remains collected by unit are placed in body bags (if available). • Remains placed in mass graves are to be expedited. Unit personnel will not evacuate contaminated remains to the mortuary affairs collection point. • Grave marked as contaminated area. • Grave reported to SI for mortuary affairs and coordination for removal. Mortuary affairs personnel will process and evacuate contaminated remains.

g. Transportation.

(1) General.

(a) Requests for additional transportation support (except emergency aerial resupply) are submitted to the S4 through the FSB.

(b) Linkup points must be provided by all units that submit transportation requests.

(d) If transportation assets have not arrived 30 minutes after the scheduled time, the supported unit will—

• Contact the FSB. • Search for the equipment in the area surrounding the pickup point.

(e) Transportation operators remain on site for one hour after the scheduled load-or-unload time; they then—

• Contact the FSB for instructions. • Look for the unit's representative in the area.

H-68 FM 71-3

(f) Supported units report to the FSB not later than 30 minutes after—

• The arrival of trucks by quantity and type (including cargo if loaded). • The departure of trucks by quantity and type (including cargo if loaded).

(2) Aviation Transport Operations.

(a) Mission request processing—

• The requesting unit's G4 (S4) submits an aerial resupply or transportation request through the FSB or main support battalion to the MCO. • The MCO determines if air transport is the appropriate mode and coordinates with the division's aviation brigade operations. • Noncritical air movement requests are processed according to current tactical priorities. • Cargo security, except in flight, is the responsibility of both the shipper and the receiving unit commander.

(b) Units requesting air transportation—

• Prepare supplies or personnel for delivery (by helicopter or fixed-wing aircraft). • Supervise and load aircraft. The aircraft crew chief ensures that material is properly loaded within the prescribed weight and balance requirements.

• Establish and mark LZ. • Coordinate for sling-load equipment, rig loads, and recover the slings. They also recover and evacuate DISCOM slings after use.

h. Refuel-on-the-Move.

(1) The brigade conducts refuel-on-the-move (ROM) operations along routes of march short of the RP or LD to extend operating range and to conserve units' uploaded unit basic load of Class III supplies.

(2) Brigade tactical priorities and FSB tanker limitations necessitate detailed prior coordination among the S3 or S4, FSB, and the refueling unit.

(3) The brigade ROM guideline is that the FSB establishes 24 refuel points.

H-69 FM 71-3

(4) Unit requirements for ROM sites include—

• The site is out of direct fire. • Local air parity exists. • The site is in a non-NBC contaminated area. • The site is near or on a hard-surfaced road. • Easy ingress and egress routes exist.

(5) Responsibilities.

(a) The brigade S4—

• Designates the refuel site in coordination with division, DISCOM, and the FSB. • Establishes linkup time at the refuel site for each task force. • Determines the approximate fuel required and establishes the refuel time at the ROM site for each vehicle (for example, four minutes per vehicle). • Transmits fuel requirements to DISCOM through the support battalion. • Maintains continuous coordination with DISCOM and attached or OPCON battalions. • Coordinates for security at the refuel site.

(b) The refueling battalion—

• Performs detailed march planning and organizes march units for combat to speed movement and refuel operations. • Provides unit security (usually a scout platoon) that—

- Reconnoiters the route and secures the refuel site. - Assists the DISCOM with site and equipment preparation. - Mans the refuel coordination point.

• Determines fuel requirements and transmits these to the brigade during the ROM planning and coordination process. • Controls the unit and manages its flow through the ROM site.

• Executes the ROM and controls the ROM site in coordination with brigade or battalion S4s. • Reconnoiters refuel sites and establishes traffic control patterns. • Forwards fuel, tanker, and equipment requirements for ROM operations to DISCOM.

H-70 FM 71-3

H-28. Personnel Support Procedures.

a. Personnel.

(1) General. The SI element is located in the rear CP Si's control.

(2) Personnel Accounting and Strength Reporting System.

(a) The Log SPOTREP and Red 1 and Red 2 reports are the primary means of reporting personnel strengths.

(b) Units deploying with different elements as part of a task organization will provide the gaining headquarters a battle roster on a floppy disk.

(d) Brigade headquarters provides all strength-related reports for all elements task organized under them.

(3) Personnel Replacement Operations.

(a) Assignment of enlisted soldiers is made to battalion, separate company, or separate detachment levels.

(b) The brigade will manage officer and warrant officer assignments within the brigade.

(4) Casualty Reporting.

(a) Witnesses report casualties on a DA Form 1155 (Witness Statement on Individual) and/or a DA Form 1156 (Casualty Feeder Report) or use any other means available to report as much information as possible. This information is forwarded to unit PACs.

(b) Reports are not delayed because of missing or unknown data.

(d) The FSB medical company ensures that casualty data is submitted in an accurate and timely manner.

H-71 FM 71-3

(5) Recovered US and Allied Personnel.

(a) US and allied personnel recovered from enemy-controlled territory are transported to the supporting replacement detachment for processing and reassignment. Returnees requiring medical treatment process through the division's medical channels.

(b) Units recovering US and allied personnel report the following information to the S1 support element at the rear CP :

• Name. • Nationality. • Parent service (if US military). • Rank/grade. • Service number/social security number. • Disposition (for example, transported to a field hospital).

b. Postal. Wartime postal support.

(1) The SI notifies units of any mail restrictions.

(2) The SI section will receive, process, and tie-out mail by battalion and separate company.

(3) The SI establishes the postal process location.

(4) Mobile postal finance teams set up operations at the BSA where unit mail orderlies purchase stamps and money orders for unit personnel.

(5) Mail received by a unit after an individual is placed in a casualty status is returned to the brigade SI section for redirecting.

(6) The unit is to burn or shred all mail and postal effects threatened with capture by the enemy or NBC contamination. Unit SI postal representatives coordinates the destruction of mail and postal effects with the brigade SI, unless the tactical situation dictates immediate action. Destruction priorities for mail and postal effects are—

• Priority one—official registered mail. • Priority two—USPS funds and stamp stock. • Priority three—official nonregistered mail. • Priority four—personal mail. • Priority five—remaining postal equipment and supplies.

H-72 FM 71-3

c. Finance.

(1) Upon declaration of war, the payment of travel and per diem for travel performed entirely in the theater of operations is not authorized.

(2) Unit SI is responsible for coordinating the local servicing finance unit for local purchase funding and pay support.

(3) The PAC is the central point of contact between soldiers and the supporting finance unit. The PAC resolves less complicated pay inquiries and coordinates with the finance unit to solve all others.

d. Health Service Support. The medical support operations are—

(1) The Brigade Surgeon. The brigade surgeon establishes all medical procedures and policy.

(2) The Brigade Surgeon and Brigade Medical Operations Center. The brigade surgeon and brigade medical operations center is normally located in the SI support element.

(3) Health Services. FSB medical company provides HSS on an area basis.

(4) Dental Services. Emergency dental care is available at the forward medical ■ company.

(5) Psychiatric Services. Combat stress casualty management is provided forward by the medical company of the main support battalion.

(6) Optometry Services. Limited optometry care is available at the main support battalion medical company.

(7) Medical Supply (Class VIII):

• Each medical platoon deploys with complete Class VIII combat authorized stockage list (two-day supply). • Each medical company maintains a minimum five-day supply of Class VIII. • The division maintains a minimum 10-day supply of Class VIII.

e. Medical Evacuation.

(1) Patient Holding. The holding policy for the division is 72 hours for FSB and main support battalion medical companies. Table H-36 shows the MEDEVAC timelines for the division.

H-73 FM 71-3

Tab e H-36. Medical evacuation timelines. PRIORITY CATEGORY TIMELINE

1 Urgent 1 Hour or Less

1a Urgent Surgical 2 Hours or Less

2 Priority 4 Hours or Less

3 Routine 24 Hours or Less

4 Convenience Situational

(2) Air Medical Evacuation:

• Air evacuation is used when ground evacuation is not available or is inadequate to save life, limb, or eyesight. • Request procedures. (Use MEDEVAC request; see reports section.)

(3) Air Evacuation by Nonmedical Aviation Assets.

(a) Division aviation brigade assets can backhaul stabilized wounded with the division AO and may be used when—

• Ground evacuation routes are closed. • Ground ambulance would not be effective in transporting the patient in a timely manner. • The tactical situation requires rapid evacuation of casualties. • During mass-casualty situations. • MEDEVAC aircraft are unavailable.

(b) Format is the standard MEDEVAC request.

(4) Ground Evacuation.

(a) The primary means of MEDEVAC during combat operations is ground ambulance. An ambulance is any vehicle capable of transporting a patient on a litter undercover as care en route is being provided.

(b) Maneuver units evacuate casualties to battalion aid stations using organic assets or resupply vehicles. Units secure all radios, weapons, and sensitive items. The patient retains his protective mask. Members of a wounded soldier's unit will not escort him to an aid station without the verbal permission of his immediate supervisor or leader. FM 71-3

(d) The FSB medical company station tracked ambulances with supported maneuver battalion aid station, and evacuate patients from the battalion aid station to the supporting medical company. It establishes AXPs between the maneuver battalion aid station and the BSA medical company for patient transfer.

(e) Division assets evacuate patients from medical companies to corps medical facilities.

(5) Return to Duty:

• Parent units transport their return-to-duty patients, or the patients go forward, with LOGPACs. • The return-to-duty patients outside the division area are processed through AG channels.

f. Preventive Medicine.

(1) Field Sanitation Teams. Establishes and uses unit field sanitation teams to perform preventive medicine countermeasures.

(2) Food Service. Units operating mobile kitchen trailers or other field kitchens must maintain operations according to sanitation or hygiene standards outlined in TB Med 530, FM 10-23, FM 21-10, and FM 21-10-1.

(3) Potable Water and Ice.

• Supply. The preventive medicine section inspects all water sources and conducts random samplings. Water purification tablets are issued at Class I point. • Distribution containers. Brigade preventive medicine teams conduct routine inspections of potable water containers (such as 400-gallon water trailers; 5-gallon contáiners). • Chlorine residual concentration is maintained at five parts per million (ppm); do not drop below two parts per million at the point of consumption. • Actions during NBC operations:

- Stop all processing of potable water. - Immediately notify the division's preventive medicine section of suspected contamination. - Water supply specialists must initiate detection procedures.

H-75 FM 71-3

• Report water sources (approved or unapproved) suspected of being contaminated to the division's preventive medicine section through G1 channels. Do not use until tested.

(4) Waste Disposal.

• Contain and dispose of infectious and pathological wastes IAW AR 40-5. • Dispose of all garbage and trash according to the methods outlined in FM 21-10 and FM 21-10-1. • When committed, bury or incinerate waste.

(5) Injuries and Illness. Report the following injuries and illnesses to the division surgeon immediately:

• Suspected NBC injuries. • Any cold weather injury. • Any heat injury. • Foodborne or suspected foodborne illness. • Waterborne or suspected waterborne illness. • Animal bites. • Field site infestations (before pesticide application),

g. Staff Judge Advocate.

(1) SJA Operations.

(a) The SJA establishes operations at the SI support element at the rear CP.

(b) The SJA dedicates a judge advocate to each maneuver brigade.

(c) The SJA designates roving legal teams to move forward as the situation permits to provide legal services in the units and supplement brigade judge advocates.

(d) Designated JAG personnel support PMO/S5 operations.

(2) War Crimes.

(a) Soldiers must report suspected violations of the law of war to their immediate commanders. When the commander is implicated in the alleged violation, report him to the next higher commander. If this is not practical, report to the IG, PM, SJA, or chaplain.

(b) Commanders must forward reports through the chain of command to the commanding general. Reports must include all available information about the nature of

H-76 FM 71-3 each incident, where and when it occurred, who discovered it, and who witnessed it (with statements of witnesses and evidence).

(c) The SJA reviews and approves all claims and solatium payment requests to determine legal validity and to coordinate with the supporting finance unit for payment if warranted.

h. Public Affairs.

(1) The PAO establishes a news media center at the SI support element at the BSA.

(2) Only media accredited by the theater PAO are authorized to function within the brigade AO. Any media representative violating established media ground rules are not allowed to operate in the brigade AO.

(3) The PAO or PAO-designated personnel escorts all media personnel—no exception.

(4) Guidelines for talking with news media personnel include the following:

• If you command it, did it, or use it, then you can talk about it. • If you do not want it published; do not say it. • Always exercise OPSEC.

i. Public Information and Operations Security.

(1) When directed, PAO conducts OPSEC review of any material provided for release.

(2) The PAO will not conduct censorship activities of material provided for release, but will screen for OPSEC violations.

j. Chaplain Activities.

(1) The priority of chaplain coverage is—

• Combat units. » Medical facilities in AOs. • Mortuary affairs collection points and temporary burial sites.

(2) Commanders coordinate religious service schedules with chaplains.

(3) When no chaplain is assigned to a unit, the SI requests chaplain services through the brigade chaplain's office at the brigade rear CP.

H-77 FM 71-3

H-29. Military Police Procedures.

a. Military Police Platoon.

(1) The MP platoon headquarters is initially collocated with S4 operations ¡at the rear CP.

(2) MP platoons provide DS to brigade tactical operations. Priority of employment of MP platoons is to area security in the BSA, Level II reaction force to the brigade rear CP, law enforcement, and operating the brigade central EPW collection point.

b. Request for Military Police Support. Battalion will forward all requests for MP support (and CID support) through the S3 operations section, located in the brigade main CP.

c. Enemy Prisoners of War Operations.

(1) The brigade S4 establishes a centralized point for EPW collection in the BSA. Battalions establish EPW sites within their sector or zones.

(2) Capturing units tag all EPWs and their property using DA Form 5976 and evacuate to the designated collection point.

(3) MP escort EPWs from BSAs to division or corps collection points.

H-30. Civil-Military Operations.

a. Civil Military Operations Center. The civil-military operations center (CMOC)—

• Is operated by the G5 at the division rear CP. • Is the net control station for the CMOC (FM) net. • Employs and controls all attached or OPCON supporting CA teams and elements.

b. Military tactical requirements have priority over civil requirements.

c. The brigade commanders will designate a member of their staff to serve as the unit S5. If the brigade is operating in advance of the division, the brigade XO coordinates for augmented staff assistance through the division headquarters.

H-78 FM 71-3

SECTION IV. REPORTS

H-31. General.

a. This section contains reports and prescribed formats that all elements in the division routinely use (see Table H-37). Reports exist to support the commander with CCIR. Reports are not tied to a fixed schedule, but rather, are submitted by specific request or by exception. Reports by exception require the commander to submit a report only when the status of a significant event or element is changed that either increases or decreases that unit's combat capability.

Table H-37 Report matrix. REPORT FORMAT SUBMIT- SUBMIT SUBMIT SUBMIT METHOD PRECEDENCE TITLE ON TED BY: TO: AS OF: NLT: OF ; PAGE TRANS- MISSION

Spot Report H-84 MSC G3/G2 As Necessary NA FM Flash (SPOTREP) Or Upon First MSE (Blue 1) Contact or FAX Spotting Commander's H-85 MSC "G3: As Necessary NA MSE Immediate Situation Committed FM Report Units Submit FAX (SITREP) To TAC CP- (Blue 21 Intelligence H-87 Corps/ MSC -92” 0200 0400 LAP TOP Immediate Summary Div 1400 1600 FAX (INTSUM) MSE (Green 1) COURIER Periodic H-88 MSC G2 As Necessary NA MSE Immediate Intelligence FM Report FAX (PERINTREP) (Green 2) Weather H-88 G2 MSC 0500 0600 FAX Immediate Forecast 1700 1800 MSE Report (WXFCST) (Green 3) Logistics Spot H-90 MSC DISCOM As Required NA FAX Priority Report MSE (SPOTREP) FM (Yellow 1) Equipment H-91 MSC "S4" DISCOM/G4 DMMC 0800 FAX Immediate Status Report (thru FSB) 1600 1700 MSE (STATREP) LAP TOP (Yellow 2) FM

H-79 FM 71-3

Table H-37. Report matrix (continued) REPORT FORMAT SUBMIT- SUBMIT SUBMIT SUBMIT METHOD PRECEDENCE TITLE ON TED BY: " TO: AS OF: NLT: OF PAGE ; TRANS- MISSION Ammunition H-9S MSC -S4“ DISCOM 0800 0900 FAX Immediate Request (thru FSB) 1600 1700 MSE (Yellow 3) LAP TOP FM POL Request H-98 MSC "S4" DISCOM 0800 0900 FAX Immediate (Yellow 4) (thru FSB) 1600 1700 MSE LAP TOP FM Personnel Dally H-100 MSC G1 2000 2100 FAX Immediate Summary MSE (Red 1) LAP TOP FM Personnel H-101 MSC G1 As Required FAX Priority Battle Loss MSE Report FM (Red 2) Aerial Resupply H-101 MSC G3/Air As Required FAX Immediate Request MSE COURIER FM Bridge Report H-102 MSC ACE As Required FAX Immediate (BRIDGEREP) MSE COURIER

Closing Report H-103 MSC G3 As Required FAX Immediate MSE FM

Crossing H-103 MSC ACE As Required FAX Immediate Report MSE (CROSSREP) COURIER Medical H-104 Requesting Div Surg As Required FAX Flash Evacuation Unit MSE Request MUI Report H-105 Battalion & S2 As Required FM Immediate Separate MSE T rp/Co Minefield H-106 Battalion & ABE As Required MSE Immediate Report Separate FAX Trp/Co FM Patrol Report H-107 Battalion & G2 As Required FAX Immediate Separate MSE Trp/Co FM EPW or H-109 Battalion & G2 As Required MSE Immediate Captured Separate FAX Materiel Report Trp/Co FM Ration Request H-109 Battalion & S4 As Required MSE Immediate Separate FAX Trp/Co FM

H-80 FM 71-3

Table i-37. Report matrix (continued) REPORT FORMAT SUBMIT^ SUBMIT SUBMIT SUBMIT METHOD PRECEDENCE TITLE ON TED BY: TO: AS OF: NLT: OF PAGE TRANS- MISSION Route Recon- H-110 Unit G3 & G2 As Required FM Immediate naissance Tasked MSE Report Sensitive Item H-110 Battalion & S3 As Required FM Immediate Report Separate MSE (SENSREP) Trp/Co Severe Weather H-111 S2 Battalion S2s As Required FMX Priority Warning Report MSE (SVRWXWARN) Shell Report H-112 Battalion & FSE As Required FAX Immediate (SHELREP) Separate MSE Trp/Co FM Splash Report H-113 Battalion & S3 As Required FM Immediate Separate MSE Trp/Co FAX NBC 1 H-113 Battalion & Chemical As Required FM Flash (First Observer's Initial Separate Bde MSE Attack) Report Trp/Co NBC 2 Evaluated H-114 Chemical Battalion As Required MSE Immediate Data Report Bde & Separate FM Trp/Co FAX NBC 3 H-115 Chemical Battalion As Required MSE Immediate Immediate Bde & Separate FM Warning Of Trp/Co FAX Expected Contamination NBC 4 H-116 Battalion & Chemical As Required MSE Immediate Report Of Separate Bde FM Radiation Trp/Co Dose-Rate Measurement NBC 5 H-116 Bde Div As Required MSE Immediate Report Of Areas FM of Contamination

NBC 6 H-117 Bde Div/Corps/ As Required FAX Priority Detailed JTF LAP TOP Information Of MSE Chemical Or Bioiogicai Attacks

H-81 FM 71-3

Table H-37. Report matrix (continued). REPORT FORMAT SUBMIT. SUBMIT SUBMIT SUBMIT METHOD PRECEDENCE TITLE J. . .. ON TED BY: TO: AS OF: NLf: OF iPAGE ; TRANS. MISSION Effective H-118 Chemical Battalion & As Required MSE Immediate Downwind Bde Separate FAX Message Trp/Co LAP TOP FM NUCWARN H-119 Chemical Battalion & As Required MSE Immediate Message Bde Separate FM T rp/Co

b. Although each report has a prescribed format to ensure the completeness of the information reported, users are reminded that in fast-moving tactical situations timely reporting, especially of enemy activity is critical. Do not delay reports only to ensure correct format, report accurate information in a timely manner.

(1) The time zone used for all reports is local, unless specified otherwise.

(2) All color codes use the following criteria:

• Green: 80% or better on hand—full strength. • Amber: 60% to 79% on hand—mission capable with minor deficiencies. • Red: 40% to 59% on hand—marginally mission capable with major deficiencies. • Black: 39% or less on hand—not mission-capable.

(3) Standardized report formats for the division are as follows:

(a) Operations (blue reports).

• Blue 1—SPOTREP. • Blue 2—Commander’s SITREP.

(b) Intelligence (green reports).

• Green 1—Intelligence summary (INTSUM). • Green 2—Periodic intelligence report (PERINTREP). • Green 3—Weather forecast report (WXFCST).

• Yellow 1—Logistics SPOTREP. • Yellow 2—Equipment status report (STATREP). Reportable lines needed in Yellow 2 report.

H-82 FM 71-3

• Yellow 3—Ammunition request. • Yellow 4—POL request.

(d) Personnel (red reports).

• Red 1—Personnel daily summary. • Red 2—Personnel battle loss report.

(e) As required reports.

• Aerial resupply request. • Bridge report (BRIDGEREP). • Closing report. • Cross report (CROSSREP). • MEDEVAC request. • MIJI report (MIJIREP). • Minefield report. • Patrol report. • EPW or captured materiel report. • Ration request. • Route reconnaissance report. • Sensitive items report (SENSREP). • Severe weather warning report (SVRWXWARN). • Shell report (SHELREP). • Splash report.

(f) NBC reports.

• NBC 1—Observers initial report. • NBC 2—Evaluated data report. • NBC 3—Immediate warning of expected contamination. • NBC 4—Report of radiation dose-rate measurement. • NBC 5—Report of areas of contamination. • NBC 6—Detailed information of chemical or biological attacks. • Effective downwind message. • NUCWARN message.

H-32. Blue Reports (Operations).

a. Blue 1—Spot Report.

(1) Purpose. The SPOTREP is used by all units when observing any known or suspected enemy activity. The SPOTREP is used when observing any characteristic of

H-83 FM 71-3 the AO likely to affect accomplishment of the mission. It is submitted through both command and 01 channels. SPOTREP is submitted as a minimum, upon—

• First enemy contact. • A break in contact. • Contact with a new enemy unit or equipment. • Significant change in tactical situation. • Unusual or unexplained activity. • Enemy reconnaissance activity. • Any level I, II, or HI rear activity. • Indications of enemy NBC activity. • Significant enemy ADA, aviation, or engineer activity. • Indications that the enemy is changing its present COA. • Other enemy and friendly activity as deemed significant.

(2) Format.

SPOTREP

Line 1: Who is observer or source: (Omit if calling station; otherwise use call signs or description.)

Line 2: What is observed: size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment (S-A-L-U-T-E). Size: (The number of sighted personnel and/or vehicles.)

Activity: (What the enemy is doing.)

Location: (Grid or reference from a known point.)

Unit : (Patches, signs, or markings.)

Time: (The time the activity was observed.)

Equipment: (Describe or identify all equipment associated with the activity.)

Line 3: What are or were your actions or what do you recommend:

H-84 FM 71-3

(3) SPOTREPs take priority over all other routine radio traffic.

b. Blue 2—Commander's Situation Report.

(1) Purpose. The SITREP is submitted by subordinate units to the S3 to report changes to the tactical situation and status. SITREPs are submitted after or during significant events when combat capability changes or when requested. Committed units in contact with the enemy submit the SITREP to the TAC CP. All others submit them to the main CP. Detailed yellow and red reports submitted by the unit support logistic and personnel assessments.

(2) Format.

COMMANDER'S SITREP

Line 1: Unit submitting report:

Line 2: DTG of report:

Line 3: Brief summary of unit activity:

Line 4: Enemy activity/intentions:

Line 5: Communications status: (G) (A) (R) (B)

Line 6: Commander evaluation: a. Current: (G) (A) (R) (B) b. Projected: (G) (A) (R) (B)

Line 7: Unit status:

UNIT STATUS B M A C I A A CENTER OF MASS GRID B A a /////// b /////// c. /////// d /////// e /////// f /////// g- /////// h. ///////

H-85 FM 71-3

Line 8: CP/helipad location:

a. TAC CP / b. Main CP / c. Rear CP /

Line 9: FLOT: -

Line 10: Battle resources:

RESOURCE COLOR AUTH/OPNL a. / b. / c. / d. / e. / f / g / h. / i. / j- / k. / l. /

Line 11: Commander's remarks:

H-33. Green Reports (Intelligence).

a. Green 1—Intelligence Summary.

(1) Purpose. The INTSUM is used to provide the brigade S2 with INTSUMs that cover 12 hours of enemy activity. Items prescribed in the format are used when needed. Brigade S2 will submit to the G2.

H-86 FM 71-3

(2) Format.

Line 1: Issuing unit:

Line 2: Time of issue:

Line 3: (a) Summary of enemy situation:

• Close. • Deep. • Rear. • Flank (right). • Flank (left). • Flank (right). • Other, as significant (command and control, artillery, ADA, engineer, R&S target acquisition).

(b) Enemy frontline trace/assessed boundaries.

UNIT LOCATION STRENGTH EQUIPMENT LOSSES ACTIVITIES

(d) Probable course of action:

24 to 36-hour protection:

Enemy strengths and capabilities:

Enemy vulnerabilities and weaknesses.

H-87 FM 71-3

(e) Other:

b. Green 2—Periodic Intelligence Report.

(1) Purpose. The PERINTREP is used by battalion intelligence personnel to report combat enemy information to the brigade S2 in a timely manner without having to complete a Green 1. Brigade S2 submits to G2.

(2) Format.

PERINTREP

Line 1: Transmission time: (DTG of transmission. Use only if directed.) Line 2: Time. (Time activity occurred: DTG.)

Line 3: Identification: (Size, activity, and unit observed.)

Line 4: At: (Location: best grid or reference to known points.)

Line 5: Narrative: (Equipment, uniform, markings, insignia, and anything significant about the sighting.)

c. Green 3—Weather Forecast Report (WXFCST).

(1) Purpose. The weather forecast report is used to report weather and light data to subordinate units. (2) Format.

WXFCST

Line 1: Location: (Center of forecasted weather.)

Line 2: Valid: (DTG forecast is effective.)

Line 3: Until: (DTG forecast is no longer in effect.) FM 71-3

Line 4: Ceiling: (Lowest forecast ceiling in hundreds of feet above ground level.)

Line 5: Cover: (Total sky coverage in eights.)

Line 6: Visibility: (Prevailing visibility in meters.)

Line 7: Weather: (Weather phenomena being forecasted.)

Line 8: Maximum temperature: (Maximum temperature in degrees Celsius.)

Line 9: Minimum temperature: (Minimum temperature in degrees Celsius.)

Line 10: Freeze level: (Minimum freezing level in thousands of feet. Transmitted only when appropriate.)

Line 11: Wind: (Direction of variable wind direction in degrees.)

Line 12: Speed: (Wind speed in knots.)

Line 13: Gusts: (Peak gusts in knots.)

Line 14: Altimeter: (Altimeter setting in hundredths of inches of mercury. Transmitted only when appropriate.)

Line 15: Wind direction at 2,000, 4,000, and 6,000 feet: (Transmitted only when appropriate.)

Line 16: Light data and narrative:

Line 17: Transmission time: (DTG of transmission. Use only if directed.)

Line 18: Authorization: (Message authorized according to current guidelines. Use only if directed.)

H-89 FM 71-3

H-34. Yellow Reports (Logistics).

a. Yellow 1—Logistics Spot Report.

(1) Purpose. The Yellow 1 Logistics SPOTREP is sent through logistics channels as losses occur to provide CSS personnel with immediate personnel and equipment losses. The personnel and equipment reported on the Yellow 1 Report are assumed to be incapable of performing combat missions. Units will report attachments, but not detached units.

(2) Format.

LOGISTICS SPOTREP

Line 1: Reporting unit:

Line 2: DTG of report:

Line 3: Equipment losses:

TYPE EQUIPMENT LOSS O/H a. b. c. d.

Line 4: Personnel losses:

POSITION LOSS a. b. c. d.

Line 5: Significant supply losses:

CLASS LOSS a. b. c.

Lineó: Combat capability of unit:

(G) (A) (R) (B)

H-90 FM 71-3 b. Yellow 2—Equipment Status Report.

(1) Purpose. The STATREP is submitted through the supporting MSB or FSB to the DMMC center by MSC S4 personnel. The DMMC consolidates the data and provides the status of mission-essential equipment to the G4. Changes are forwarded immediately upon loss of equipment.

(2) Format.

EQUIPMENT STATUS REPORT

Unit provides data pertaining to critical equipment to the division G4.

Line 1. Unit:

Line 2: DTG of report:

Line 3:

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) ITEM LINE # # AUTHORIZED # ON # TOTAL COLOR HAND NMC OPERATIONAL STATUS a. b. c. d. e. f. g- h. I. j Line 4: Commander's overall assessment: (G) (A) (R) (B)

REPORTABLE LINES NEEDED IN YELLOW 2 REPORT:

1. When the entire combat system is a combat loss, report by the numerical line.

2. When a subsystem is a combat loss, report by the numeric-alpha line of the subsystem only.

3. Report combat loss of communications subsystems by the appropriate numeric-alpha line.

H-91 FM 71-3

COMBAT VEHICLES/WEAPONS SYSTEMS

LINE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE/MODEL

1 Tank, Ml and Ml Al 2 IFV, M2 a Gun, 25-mm b TOW c Vehicle 3 CFV, M3 a Gun, 25-mm b TOW c Vehicle 4 ITV, M901 a TOW b MG, M60 c Vehicle 5 Carrier, Ml 13 a MG, M2 b Vehicle 6 Carrier, Ml06 a Mortar, 4.2-in b Vehicle 7 Carrier CP, M577 8 CEV, M728 a Gun, 16 5-mm b Blade c Vehicle 9 Howitzer, 105-mm, M102 10 Howitzer, 155-mm, M198 11 Howitzer, 155-mm, Ml09 12 MLRS 13 Mortar, 81-mm 14 Mortar, 60-mm 15 MG, 7.62-mm, M60 16 MG, 5.56-mm, M279 17 Ammo Carrier, M548 18 Ml39 and M87 VOLCANO 19 M60 A VLB 20 M58A3 and MK22 MICLIC 21 M9 ACE

Tactical Vehicles/Trailers: 22 Rec Veh, M88 23 Rec Veh, M578

H-92 FM 71-3

LINE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE/MODEL

Tactical Vehtcles/Trailers (cont): 24 HEMTT, Fuel 25 HEMTT, Cgo 26 HEMTT, Wrecker 27 Trk, Cgo, 5-T, M928 28 Trk, Trac, 5-T, M931 29 Trk, Wrecker, 5-T, M936 30 Trk, Cgo, HMMWV, M998 31 Trk, Armd HMMWV, Ml025 32 Trk, Amb, HMMWV, M997 33 Trk, HMMWV, TOW, M966 34 Trk, Shelter, HMMWV, M1037 35 Semitrl, 22-T, M871 36 Trlr, Flatbed 15-T 37 Trlr, 1 1/2-T Ammo 38 Trlr, 1 1/2-T Cgo 39 Trlr, 400-gal, Water 40 Trlr, 3/4-T Cgo 41 Armd Cbt Exea M9 42 Small Equip Exea (SEE) 43 Forklift, 6,000-lb 44 Forklift, 4,000-lb

Communications/Electronics: 45 Radio a AN/GRC-106 or 213 b AN/GRC-160 or 88 c AN/VRC-46 or 90 d AN/VRC-47 or 89 e AN/VRC-64 or 87 f. AN/VRC-49 or 92 g AN/VRC-77 or 119 h AN/VRC-12 i AN/VRC-3 j Fax k MSRT 1 DNVT m TCP/AC n TACFIRE 46 GSR, AN/PPS-5 47 GSR, AN/PPS-15 48 AN/TRQ-32, Teammate 49 AN/TRQ-30, Rad rec

H-93 FM 71-3

LINE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE/MODEL

50 AN/TPQ-36, Firefinder 51 AN/TPQ-37, Radar

Aircraft: 52 Helicopter, Atk, AH-64 a Gun, 30-mm b Missile, HELLFIRE c Rocket, 2.75 53 Helicopter, Atk, AH-IS a Gun, 20-mm b Missile, TOW c Rocket, 2.75 54 Helicopter, OH-58D, Mast-Mounted Sight 55 Helicopter, OH-58C 56 Helicopter, UH-60 57 Helicopter, UH-1H 58 Helicopter, EH-60/EH-1

Other:

59. 60. 61. 62.

c. Yellow 3—Ammunition Request.

(1) Purpose. A Yellow 3 Report provides routine requests for specific types of ammunition through logistics channels. Units submit Yellow 3 Reports through the brigade S4. The brigade S4 consolidates and sends reports through the FSB to the division ammunition office. Line or number designators follow. FM 71-3

(2) Format.

AMMUNITION REQUEST

LINE NOMENCLATURE QUANTITY NUMBER REQUIRED Small Arms: 1. 5.56 Ball 2. 5.56 Tracer 3. 5.56 Linked 4-1 4. 7.62 Linked 4-1 5. 9-mm Ball 6. 40-mm HEDP 7. 40-mm Ilium 8. 40-mm Smoke Color 9. .50-cal Linked 4-1 10. 20-mm Linked 11. 25-mm APDS-T 12. 25-mm HEI-T Mortar: 13. 60-mm Ilium 14. 60-mm HE 15. 60-mm WP 16. 81-mm Ilium 17. 81-mm HE 18. 81-mm WP 19. 4.2- in HE With Fuze 20. 4.2- in WP With Fuze 21. 4.2- in Ulum/Fuze 105-mm Howitzer: 22. Fuze Prox, 4.2" 23. Fuze PD, 4.2" 24. HE Without Fuze 25. KEPT WF BD 26. Ilium WF MT 27. Smoke WF MT 28. HCBE WF MT 29. HE ICM WF MT 30. Smoke Without Fuze 31. APERS WF MT 32. Fuze MT 33. Fuze MTSQ 34. Fuze PD 35. Fuze PROX

H-95 FM 71-3

LINE NOMENCLATURE QUANTITY NUMBER REQUIRED 155-mm Howitzer: 36. HE APICM 37. HEDPICM 38. HE RAP 39. HE Without Fuze 40. ADAM 41. RAAM 42. HCBE 43. Ilium 44. Copperhead 45. WP 46. CHG WH Bag ER 47. CHG GR Bag 48. CHG WH Bag 49. Reducer Flash 50. Fuze MTSQ 51. Fuze PD 52. Fuze Prox 53. Primer Aircraft: 54. 7.62 Linked 4-1 55. 20-mm Linked 4-1 56. 30-mm Linked 57. 2.75 Rocket HE 58. 2.75 Rocket WP 59. 2.75 Rocket Ilium 60. 2.75 Rocket FLECHETTE 61. 2.75 Rocket Smoke 62. Missile TOW 63. Missile HELLFIRE 64. Helicopter Mine Disp Reload Grenades: 65. Frag 66. Incd 67. CS 68. Smoke HC 69. Smoke 70. Smoke Yellow 71. Smoke Violet 72. Smoke Red

H-96 FM 71-3

LINE NOMENCLATURE QUANTITY NUMBER REQUIRED Rocket/Missile: 73. 66-mm HEAT (LAW) 74. 66-mm Incd (M202) 75. AT4 (84-mm)x 76. Dragon II. TOW 78. Stinger (FIM 72) 79. Rocket POD, M26 MLRS Mine: 80. APERS, M16 81. APERS, M3 82. APERS, M14 83. APERS, Ml8 84. APERS, M26 85. AT, M15 86. AT, M19 87. AT, M21 88. AT, M24 89. M87 VOLCANO Demolitions: 90. CHG, C-4, 1 1/4-lb 91. CHG, FLEX-X, M118 92. DEMO Kit, Bangalore 93. CHG, TNT, 1/4-lb 94. CHG, TNT, 1/2 lb 95. CHG, TNT, 1-lb 96. CHG, Satchel, 20 lb 97. CHG, 40-lb Cratering 98. Electric Caps 99. Nonelectric Caps 100. Expl, Destructor 101. Demo Kit, Cratering Ml 10 102. Coupling Base, With Primer 103. CHG, Demo, Shape, 15-lb 104. CHG, Demo, Shape, 40-lb 105. CHG, Demo Kit, Proj CHG Ml73 106. Det Cord 107. Military Dynamite 108. Firing Device, Pressure Release 109. Firing Device, Pull Friction 110. Firing Device, Pull Release III. Time Fuze

H-97 FM 71-3

LINE NOMENCLATURE QUANTITY NUMBER REQUIRED Demolitions (cont): 112. Igniter, Time Fuze 113. Document Destroyer 114. Crater Kit, Ml 80 115. M58A3 MICLIC 116. MK22 ROCKET Signal Devices: 117. Pers Distress Flare 118. Sig, Ilium WSC 119. Sig, Ilium RSP 120. Sig, Ilium WSP 121. Sig, Ilium GSC Tank Weapons: 122. 120-mm SABOT 123. 120-mm HEAT 124. 105-mm SABOT 125. 105-mm HEAT 126. Ground, Smoke Vehicle Launched

d. Yellow 4—POL Request.

(1) Purpose. A Yellow 4 Report is used to conduct routine requests for specific types and quantity of Class III items through the brigade S4. The brigade S4 consolidates and submits requests through the FSB. Line or number designators follow:

(2) Format.

LINE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE U/L QUANTITY REQUIRED 1 Report as of DTG gal 2 MOGAS gal 3 Diesel gal 4 Oil, OE-10 gal 5 Oil, OE-30 gal 6 Oil, OE-50 gal 7 Oil, OE-90 gal 8 Antifreeze gal

H-98 FM 71-3

LINE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE U/L QUANTITY REQUIRED 9 Starter fluid gal 10 Deicing fluid gal 11 Brake fluid gal 12 Hydraulic fluid OH A qt 13 Hydraulic fluid OHT x qt 14 Hydraulic fluid FRH qt 15 Oil, penetrating qt 16 Oil, PL-Special qt 17 Oil, PL-Med qt 18 Bore cleaner gal 19 Oil, LSA qt 20 Antifreeze comp C-12, cn 2 1/2-lb 21 Grease, GAA lb 22 Grease, Wheel bearing lb 23 Solvent gal 24 Sealer, gasket cnl 25 Fog Oil barrel

H-35. Red Reports (Personnel).

a. Red 1—Personnel Daily Summary.

(1) Purpose. The Red 1 Personnel Daily Summary is a hasty personnel report transmitted daily (at 1900 hours) to the brigade SI to monitor personnel combat strength as availability occurs. Report only those lines that have changed during the report period. Units must report attached, but not detached, units. A complete personnel status report (DA Form 5367-R) is submitted when sufficient information is available to determine personnel requirements.

H-99 FM 71-3

(2) Format.

PERSONNEL DAILY SUMMARY

Line 1: Report as ofDTG: Line 2: Unit:

LINE # AUTH ASGD PDY KIA WIA MIA NON GAINS REMARKS COMBAT LOSSES

3. Commissioned:

4. Warrant:

5. Enlisted:

Line 6: Unit personnel status: (G) (A) (B) (R)

b. Red 2—Personnel Battle Loss Report.

(1) Purpose. The Red 2 Personnel Battle Loss Report is transmitted to the G1 as the casualty occurs. The unit will also complete and deliver DA Form 1156 with witness statement (DA Form 1155) to the G1 daily. The Red 2 Report is an interim report to update data sent on the last Red 1.

(2) Format.

PERSONNEL BATTLE LOSS REPORT

Line 1 : UMR position number or encoded grade, MOS, and quantity:

Line 2: DTG of incident:

Line 3: Location (encoded):

Line 4: Type casualty: a. KIA hostile action. _ b. KIA nonhostile: c. Body recovered: d. Body not recovered: e. Body identified: f. Body not identified: g. MIA:

H-100 FM 71-3

h. Captured: i. WIA hostile: j. WIA nonhostile: k. Accident:

Line 5: Evacuated to:

H-36. As Required Reports.

a. Aerial Resupply Request.

(1) Purpose. An Aerial Resupply Request is submitted to program aircraft for routine resupply missions using division and corps assets. Battalion requests aerial resupply through the brigade S4.

(2) Format.

AERIAL RESUPPLY REQUEST

Line 1: Unit supported:

Line 2: Types and quantities of supplies desired:

(Include description of supplies [200 rounds of 155-mm HE.])

Line 3: Priority of supplies:

Line 4: Requested time for drop:

Line 5: Exact location: (Encoded 6-digit map coordinate.) ONE—Primary DZ or LZ. TWO—Alternate DZ or LZ. THREE—Leading friendly element or FEBA (trace by at least 2 points).

Line 6: Brief description of: ONE—Primary DZ, including size and long axis. TWO—Alternate DZ, including size and long axis.

Line 7: Recent/significant enemy activity in delivery area:

H-101 FM 71-3

Line 8: Terrain characteristics that may: .

ONE—Interfere with the approach or exit flight pattern. TWO—Interfere with the identification of the DZ or LZ. THREE—Serve as checkpoints.

Line 9: Primary call sign and frequency:

Line 10: Alternate call sign and frequency:

Line 11 : Signal to be used when DZ or LZ are unsafe:

Line 12: Recommended method of delivery:

ONE—Parachute. T W O—Airdrop. THREE—Airland.

Line 13: Cancel request if not completed by:

(Date-time.)

b. Bridge, Overpass, Culvert, or Causeway Report. The report is as follows.

BRIDGEREP

Line 1: Type and location:

Line 2: Overall length:

Line 3: Width of roadway:

Line 4: Height restriction:_

Line 5: Type and location:

Line 6: Length of spans and number.

Line 7: Computed class:

Line 8: Bypass: (Easy or difficult.)

H-102 FM 71-3

c. Closing Report.

(1) Purpose. The terms "closing" or "closed" indicate that the main body has arrived at the destination. A final Closing Report will be rendered for trail parties and disabled vehicles. Battalions submit reports on brigade 01.

(2) Format.

CLOSING REPORT

Line 1: Unit designation of closing unit:

Line 2: Unit's new location:

Line 3: DTG main body closed:

Line 4: Explanation of accidents/incidents:

(Who, what, where, when, how, additional information if applicable.)

Line 5: Estimated date and time of arrival trail party and/or disabled vehicles:

d. Ford, Ferry, or Other CROSSREP. The format is as follows.

CROSSREP

Line 1: Type and location:

Line 2: Length of crossing:

Line 3: Usable width:

Line 4: Current: (In meters/seconds.)

LineS: Maximum depth: (In meters.)

Line 6: Bottom material and condition:

Line 7: If ferry has existing equipment: (Capacity in tons.) FM 71-3

Line 8: Slope of entry bank:

Line 9: Slope of far bank:

Line 10: Other comments:

e. Medical Evacuation Request.

(1) Purpose. A MEDEVAC Request is a request from medical personnel or the senior person present.

(2) Format.

MEDICAL EVACUATION REQUEST

Line 1: Location of pick-up site:

Line 2: Radio frequency, call sign, and suffix:

Line 3 : Number of patients by category: A—Urgent. B—Urgent surgical. C—Priority. D—Routine. E—Convenience.

Line 4: Special equipment required: A—None. B—Hoist. C—Extraction equipment. D—Ventilator.

Line 5: Number of patients by type: L—Litter. A—Ambulatory.

Line 6. Security of pick-up site: N—No enemy: troops in area. P—Possible enemy troops in area (approach with caution). E—Enemy troops in area (approach with caution). X—Enemy troops in area (armed escort required).

H-104 FM 71-3

Line 7: Method of marking pick-up site: A—Panels. B—Pyrotechnic signal. C—Smoke signal. D—None. E—Other.

Line 8: Patient's nationality and status: A—US military. B—US civilian. C—Non-US military. D—Non-US civilian. E—EPW.

Line 9: NBC contamination: N—Nuclear. B—Biological. C—Chemical.

f. MUI Report.

(1) Purpose. When the reception of radio signals is hindered, confused, or distorted, by any external source, or if instructions are received from a station that cannot be authenticated, the person experiencing the problem must immediately submit a Mill Report to the intelligence officer.

(2) Format. MIJIREP

Line 1: Unit: (Unit identification.)

Line 2: Type: (Type of interference.)

Line 3: Location: (Best grid or reference to known point.)

Line 4: On time: (Start DTG.)

H-105 FM 71-3

Line 5: Off time: (Official DIG.)

Line 6: Affects: (Operations/equipment affected.)

Line 7: Frequency: (Frequency/frequency range.)

Line 8: Narrative:

Line 9: Transmission time: (DTG of transmission. Use only if directed.)

Line 10: Authorization: (Message authorized according to current guidelines. Use only if directed.)

g. Minefield Report.

(1) Purpose. The Minefield Report is used when authorized; when requesting authorization to emplace hasty protective minefields; or when reporting intention, initiation, and completion of laying. The brigade 01 is the primary net to submit reports.

(2) Format.

MINEFIELD REPORT A (Intention to Lay)

Line 1 : Unit, type, and number: (Call sign. Hasty-protective sequentially assigned number.)

Line 2: Coordinates of extremities (ENCRYPT):

Line 3: Estimated DTG of start and completion:

(Send both times.)

MINEFIELD REPORT B (Initiation of Laying)

Line 1 : Type and number: (See Minefield Report A, Line 1.)

Line 2: Actual DTG of start:

H-106 FM 71-3

MINEFIELD REPORT C (Completion of Minefield)

Line 1: Type and number: (See Minefield Report A, Line 1.)

Line 2: Actual DTG of completion:

Line 3: Changes to any information reported in Report A:

Line 4: Total number of mines laid by type:

Line 5: Method of laying: (Normally, hand-surface or hand-buried.)

Line 6: Details of lanes: (Specify location of gaps, entrance, exit, azimuth, type of marking, ENCRYPT digits.)

Line 7: Details of minefield: (Normally, under marking observation or single-wire fence and signs.)

h. Patrol Report.

(1) Purpose. The Patrol Report is submitted on the brigade 01 and is used to report combat information to the next higher headquarters. The duration and activity of dismounted reconnaissance patrols requires debriefing. The report ensures uniform reporting and guarantees that all significant information obtained by the patrol is reported. Only those items identified by an asterisk (*) are required to be submitted in an initial report.

(2) Format.

PATROL REPORT

*Line 1: Designation of patrol:

Line 2: Size and composition of patrol:

Line 3: Task:

*Line 4: Time of departure:

H-107 FM 71-3

*Line 5: Time of return:

*Line 6: Routes: (Out and back.)

Line 7: Terrain: (Description of terrain—dry, swampy, jungle; conditions of bridges as to type, size, and strength; effect on armored and wheeled vehicles.)

*Line 8: Enemy: (Strength, disposition, equipment, weapons, attitude, morale, exact location, movement, and any shift in dispositions. Time activity was observed. Coordinates where activity occurred.)

Line 9: Map corrections:

Line 10: Miscellaneous information: (Including aspects of NBC warfare.)

Line 11 : Results of encounters with enemy.

(Number of EPWs captured, disposition of enemy casualties, captured documents, and captured equipment.)

Line 12: Condition of patrol: (Include status of dead and wounded.)

*Line 13: Conclusions and recommendations:

Line 14: Additional remarks by debriefer:

Line 15: Distribution (optional):

i. EPW or Captured Materiel Report.

(1) Purpose. The EPW or Captured Materiel Report is used to report a prisoner or materiel captured of immediate tactical importance to the brigade S2 within 30 minutes.

H-108 FM 71-3

(2) Format.

EPW OR CAPTURED MATERIEL REPORT

Line 1: Item captured or EPW:

Line 2: Time of capture: (DTG.)

Line 3: Place of capture: (Best grid or reference to known point.)

Line 4: Capturing unit: (Call sign.)

Line 5: Circumstances of capture:

(Be brief.)

Line 6: Transmission time: (DTG of transmission. Use only if directed.)

j. Ration Request.

(1) Purpose. The Ration Request is to be used by the unit when the tactical situation prohibits face-to-face coordination for rations.

(2) Format.

RATION REQUEST

Line 1: DTG of request:

Line 2: Requested delivery time:

Line 3: Number T-ration meals:

Line 4: Number MRE-ration meals:

Line 5: Water in gallons:

Line 6: Coordinates of delivery or linkup point:

H-109 FM 71-3

k. Route Reconnaissance Report. The report is as follows.

ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE REPORT

Line 1: From:

Line 2: To:

Line 3: What: 1— Highway. 2— Road. 3— Trail. 4— Cross-Country.

Line 4: Class route: 1— Only tracked vehicles. 2— Any wheel vehicles. 3— Dismounted only. 4— Only wheels.

Line 5: Type: 1— All weather. 2— Limited all-weather. 3— Fair weather.

Line 6: Movement possible: 1— Fast. 2— Slow.

Line 7: Any critical points:

1. Sensitive Item Report.

(1) Purpose. The SENSREP is used to report the status of sensitive items.

(2) Format.

SENSITIVE ITEM REPORT

Line 1: Unit: 1

Line 2: Status: (G) (B) If black:

Line 3: Item:

H-110 FM 71-3

Line 4: Serial number:

Line 5: DTG item discovered missing:

Line 6: Location item lost:

m. Severe Weather Warning Report.

(1) Purpose. The SVRWXWARN is used to report forecast severe weather.

(2) Format.

SVRWXWARN

Line 1: Type: (Type and name of severe weather.)

Line 2: Location: (Center of forecast weather.)

Line 3: Valid: (DTG forecast is effective.)

Line 4: Until: (DTG forecast is no longer in effect.)

Line 5: Weather: (Atmospheric conditions with respect to cloudiness, precipitation, other weather phenomena.)

Line 6: Visibility: (Minimum visibility in meters.)

Line 7: Ceiling: (Lowest forecast ceiling in feet above ground level.)

Line 8: Maximum speed: (Maximum wind speed in knots.)

Line 9: Gusts: (Peak gusts in knots.)

Line 10: Direction: (Wind direction in degrees.)

H-111 FM 71-3

Line 11: Narrative:

Line 12: Transmission time: (DTG of transmission. Use only if directed.)

Line 13: Authorization: (Message authorized according to current guidelines. Use only if directed.)

n. Shell Report.

(1) Purpose. The SHELREP is used when any of the format information is requested.

(2) Format.

SHELREP, MORTREP, BOMREP (Specify)

Line 1 : Unit of orgin:

Line 2: Observer's location:

Line 3: Azimuth to bursts, flashes: , (Specify which: sound, groove of shell, rocket flight path, or type of azimuth, degrees or mils.)

Line 4: DTG attack began:

Line 5: DTG attack ended: .

Line 6: Location of attack grid:

Line 7: Number and nature of guns, mortars (aircraft, or other methods of delivery):

Line 8: Nature of fire, barrage, and registration:

Line 9: Number and type and caliber of bombs, shells, and rockets:

Line 10: Flash to bang time in seconds: (Omit for aircraft.)

Line 11 : Damage. (If friendly personnel/equipment.)

H-112 FM 71-3

o. Splash Report.

(1) Purpose. The Splash Report is used to report downed friendly aircraft.

(2) Format.

SPLASH REPORT

Line 1: Call sign:

Line 2: Aircraft data: (Type and status.)

Line 3: Pilot status: 1— Recovered good condition. 2— Recovered WIA. 3— Recovered KIA. 4— Unknown.

H-37. NBC Reports.

a. NBC 1—Observer's Initial Report. The format is as follows.

OBSERVER'S INITIAL REPORT

Line 1: Strike serial number: (If known. Assigned by the NBCC.)

Line 2: Position of observer: (Coordinates or place.)

Line 3 : Direction measured clockwise from grid north, true north, or magnetic north (state which) of the attack from observer:

(Degrees or mils; state which.)

Line 4: DTG of detonation or date-time attack started:

Line 5: Illumination time or DTG attack started:

Line 6: Linear target grids or location of attack or location of area attacked:

(Coordinates of place. Actual or estimated; state which.)

H-113 FM 71-3

Line 7: Means of delivery or kind of attack:

(Guns, mortars, multiple rockets, missiles, bombs, spray; state which.)

Line 8: Type of burst (air, surface, unknown; state which) including height or type of agent; height of burst:

Line 9: Number of munitions or aircraft; state which:

Line 10: Flash to bang time (seconds):

Line 11 : Crater present or absent and diameter (meters) or description of terrain/vegetation:

Line 12: Nuclear burst angular cloud width measured at H+5 minutes: (Degrees or mils; state which.)

Line 13: Stabilized cloud-top angle and/or cloud-bottom angle (state which) or cloud-top height and/or cloud-bottom height (state which) measured at H+10 minutes:

(Degrees, mils, meters, or feet; state which.)

Line 14: Date-time of reading or date-time contamination detected:

Line 15: 20 CGY/HR contour line coordinates (black) or area of actual contamination (yellow):

b. NBC 2—Evaluated Data Report. The report is as follows.

EVALUATED DATA REPORT

Line 1: Strike serial number: (If known. Assigned by the NBCC.)

Line 2: Date-time of detonation or date-time attack started:

Line 3: Linear target grids or location of attack or location of area attacked:

(Coordinates of place. Actual or estimated; state which.)

H-114 FM 71-3

Line 4: Means of delivery or kind of attack:

(Guns, mortars, multiple rockets, missiles, bombs, spray; state which.)

Line 5: Type of burst (air, surface, or unknown; state which) including height or type of agent; height of burst:

Line 6: Estimated Yield (KT):

c. NBC 3—Immediate Warning of Expected Contamination. The format is as follows.

IMMEDIATE WARNING OF EXPECTED CONTAMINATION

Line 1: Strike serial number:_ (If known. Assigned by the NBCC.)

Line 2: Date-time of detonation or date-time attack started:

Line 3: Linear target grids or location of attack or location of area attacked:

(Coordinates of place. Actual or estimated, state which.)

Line 4: Type of burst (air, surface, or unknown; state which) including height or type of agent; height of burst:

Line 5: Coordinates of points to outline external contours of radioactive cloud or predicted hazard area:

Line 6: Downwind direction of radioactive cloud (in degrees or mils; state which) or duration of hazard (days):

Line 7: Directions measured clockwise from grid north to the left and then to the right radial lines:

(4 digits. Degrees or mils; state which.) Representative downwind direction: (4 digits. Degrees or mils; state which.) Representative wind-speed: (3 digits. Kmph or knots; state which.)

H-115 FM 71-3

d. NBC 4—Report of Radiation Dose-Rate Measurement. The format is as follows.

REPORT OF RADIATION DOSE-RATE MEASUREMENT

Line 1: Type of burst (air, surface, or unknown; state which) including height or type of agent, height of burst:

Line 2: Location of reading or location where samples were taken and details of type of sample:

Line 3 : Dose rate cGy/H the words initial, increasing, peak, or decreasing may be added. When decay rate is reported the words decay normal, decay fast, or decay slow, or theactual value of decay constant may be inserted:

Line 4: Date-time of reading or date-time contamination was detected:

e. NBC 5—Report of Areas of Contamination. The format is as follows.

REPORT OF AREAS OF CONTAMINATION

Line 1: Strike serial number: (If known. Assigned by the NBCC.)

Line 2: Reference date-time for estimated contours when not H+l hour:

Line 3: Date-time of reading or date-time contamination detected:

Line 4: H+l date-time or date-time of latest survey of contamination in the area:

Line 5: 9,000 cGy/H contour line coordinates (red):

Line 6: 300 cGy/H contour line coordinates (green):

Line 7: 100 cGy/H contour line coordinates (blue): FM 71-3

Line 8: 20 cGy/H contour line coordinates (black) or area of actual contamination (yellow):

f. NBC 6—Detailed Information of Chemical or Biological Attack(s). The format is as follows.

REPORT OF CHEMICAL OR BIOLOGICAL ATTACK

Line 1: Strike serial number: (Assigned by NBCE.)

Line 2: Date-time attack started: (Zulu [Z], local [L], or letter zone.)

Line 3: Date-time attack ended: (Zulu [Z], local [L] or letter zone.)

Line 4: Area attacked: (Location, UTM, or place.) (Actual [A], Estimated [E], state which.)

Line 5: Means of delivery, if known:

Line 6: Type of agent and height, if known: .

Line 7: Number of munitions or aircraft:

Line8: Description of terrain/vegetation:

Line 9: Enemy action before and after attack; effect on troops:

Line 10: Location (UTM) and type of sample(s):

Line 11: Date-time contamination initially detected:

(Zulu [Z], local [L], or letter zone.)

Line 12: Date-time of latest survey of contamination:

(Zulu [Z], local [L], or letter zone.)

H-117 FM 71-3

Line 13: Area of tactical significance of contamination (UTM): A: B: C: D: (Coded yellow on overlay.)

Line 14: Downwind direction: Wind speed: (Degrees [D], or mils [M]; state which km/hr.)

Line 15: Remarks:

g. Effective Downwind Message.

EFFECTIVE DOWNWIND MESSAGE

Line 1: Strike serial number: (If known. Assigned by the NBCC.)

Line 2: Date-time of detonation or date-time attack started:

Line 3: Illumination time or date-time attack started:

Line 4: Linear target grids, location of attack, or location of area attacked: (Coordinates of place. Actual or estimated, state which.)

Line 5: Means of delivery or kind of attack:

(Guns, mortars, multiple rockets, missiles, bombs, spray; state which.)

Line 6: Type of burst (air, surface, or unknown; state which) including height or type of agent, height of burst:

Line 7: Number of munitions or aircraft (state which):

Line 8: Crater present or absent and diameter (meters) or description of terrain/vegetation:

H-118 FM 71-3

Line 9: Stabilized cloud-top angle and/or cloud-bottom angle (state which)or cloud-top height and/or cloud-bottom height (state which) measured at H+10 minutes:

(Degrees, mils, meters, or feet; state which.)

Line 10: Location of reading or location where sample(s) were taken and details of type of sample: .

Line 11: Date-time of reading or date-time contamination was detected:

Line 12: H+l date-time or date-time of latest survey of contamination in the area:

Line 13: 20 cGy/H contour line coordinates (black) or area of actual contamination (yellow):

Line 14: Directions measured clockwise from grid north to the left and then to the right radial lines: (4 digits. Degrees or mils; state which.) Representative downwind direction: (4 digits. Degrees or mils; state which.) Representative wind-speed: (3 digits. Kmph or knots; state which.)

Line 15: Remarks:

h. NUCWARN Message. The format is as follows.

NUCWARN MESSAGE

Line 1: Strike serial number: (If known. Assigned by the NBCE.)

Line 2: Date-time of detonation or date-time attack started:

Line 3: Linear target grids, location of attack, or location of area attacked: (Coordinates of place. Actual or estimated; state which.)

Line 4: Type of burst (air, surface, or unknown; state which) including height or type of agent; height of burst:

H-119 FM 71-3

Line 5: Number of munitions or aircraft (state which):

Line 6: Coordinates of points to outline external contours of radioactive cloud or predicted hazard area:

Line 7: Directions measured clockwise from grid north to the left and then to the right radial lines: (4 digits. Degrees or mils; state which.) Representative downwind direction: (4 digits. Degrees or mils; state which.) Representative wind-speed: (3 digits. KM/H or knots; state which.)

H-120 FM 71-3

APPENDIX I DECISION MAKING

TRADOC Pam 525-5 states “future technology will require the Army to reassess time honored means of battle command—to recognize that in the future, military operations will involve the coexistence of both hierarchical and internetted, nonhierarchical processes.” The deliberate decision-making process (DDMP) is not easily used in a rapid, crisis situation where time is critical. Once operations have commenced, circumstances may make it difficult or impossible to always use the DDMP. The most detailed estimates cannot anticipate every possible branch or sequel, every action of the enemy, or changes in mission directed from higher headquarters. Even the most successful operations may “outrun” the initial plan under continuous operations.

The goal of the commander and staff is to maintain the initiative and anticipate the outcome of the current operation in order to determine the future requirements and set conditions for success. The brigade commander’s position on the battlefield and the continuous focused information (CCIR) from his staff allow the commander to assess the operations and adjust as necessary. In addition, the commander must ensure he maintains control of the decision-making process.

CONTENTS

Page Section I. Deliberate Decision-making Process. ...1-1 Section II. Abbreviated or Accelerated Decision-making Process .1-3

SECTION I. DELIBERATE DECISION-MAKING PROCESS

Military decision making revolves The brigade commander is key to around an established proven procedure conceptualizing, planning, preparing, and called the DDMP. The relationship among executing operations—this is his personal the TLPs, decision making, and the responsibility. The commander partici- estimate of the situation is depicted at pates in and propels the process. From the Figure 1-1. A more detailed discussion of start of the process to the final product, the DDMP is found in FM 101-5. the personal role of the commander is #

1-1 FM 71-3

central. The role of the staff is defined process. He provides adequate guidance, and focused by the direction provided by and continual analysis of his mission and the commander. his unit’s tasks, while receiving staff input at relevant intervals. The DDMP is a continuous and sequential process, allowing the In DDMP, the commander uses the commander and his staff to examine entire staff with its functional orientation possibilities of the battlefield and reach and actively participates, guiding and logical decisions. The key elements of the making decisions as the staff works DDMP are— through the procedure. The staff has time to explore the full range of probable and • Information gathering (estimates). likely enemy COAs as well as to develop, analyze, and compare its own COAs. The • Mission analysis. XO is the primary staff officer who ensures the staff is accomplishing their - Restated mission. requirements throughout the DDMP, to include providing pertinent information - Commander’s guidance. to the commander.

• COA development, analysis, The DDMP increases the comman- comparison, and recommendation. der’s time to perform critical troop- leading tasks while at the same time • COA approval. makes optimum use of the talents of his staff. The commander uses formal and • Preparation, approval, issuance of informal briefings to further maneuver plans, orders, and FRAGOs. the staff through this procedure more efficiently. Such interaction helps the • Execution. staff resolve questions they uncover and ensures the entire staff is involved in the The DDMP can require substantial total process. Regardless of the time time to develop the detail required to available, the agreed upon solution arrive at a good military decision. The (COA) is still directly linked to how well commander routinely uses this method both commander and staff accomplish when adequate planning time and each phase. sufficient staff support are available and there is opportunity to thoroughly The DDMP provides a firm basis for examine numerous friendly and continued decision-making during enemy COAs. The DDMP, because continuous operations. It is extremely of limited staff, is best utilized before important that the deliberate process be operations commence. The key used initially, returned to whenever component is the commander par- operations tempo allows, and practiced ticipating in and controlling the entire during all training events.

I-2 FM 71-3

TROOP LEADING OPS ESTIMATE ] IPB j

RECEIVE/ANALYZE MISSION BATTLEFIELD MISSION (RESTATED) AREA EVAL J

ISSUE WARNING* SITUATION TERRAIN ANALYSIS ORDER AND COURSES X OF ACTION MAKE TENTATIVE WEATHER ANALYSIS PLAN ANALYSES OF COURSES OF ACTION i START NECESSARY THREAT ANALYSIS MOVEMENT COMPARISON OF ) COURSES OF ACTION x CONDUCT A RECON THREAT RECOMMENDATION INTEGRATION (DECISION) )

MAKE FINAL DECISIONS/COMPLETE THE PLAN

ISSUE OPORD

SUPERVISESE I AND REFINEINE J

Figure 1-1. Planning and execution.

SECTION II. ABBREVIATED OR ACCELERATED DECISION-MAKING PROCESS

Any abbreviated or accelerated decide on feasible COAs, use existing planning process requires the commander information on METT-T and detailed to have a high level of expertise, estimates, and arrive at a COA that meets intuition, creativity, and battlefield the mission requirements. This COA may awareness. He and his staff must quickly not be optimal. Obviously, as time for the

I-3 FM 71-3 decision-making process decreases, the knowledgeable choices and decisions as commander’s personal involvement in operations continue. performing the process increases, either with the staff or by himself. The Deliberate process productions (such commander has several options he may as weather analysis, terrain analysis, choose to abbreviate the process. He may enemy order of battle, and general save time by shortening or foregoing an situation analysis) usually do not change in-depth estimate, other than what has significantly during the initial stage of been accomplished previously. The combat operations if estimates are kept commander may limit the number of current. Modifications are much simpler COAs for development and subsequent than returning to a zero base. These analysis; and he may choose to prescribe products, such as DSTs and event an abbreviated method in the unit SOP. templates, identify critical points in the Under extreme time constraints the plan that require decisions and commander will perform the mission commander’s consideration. Staff analysis himself and provide the staff members should maintain sufficient, with the restated mission and his intent. updated information on the changes from The commander must ensure the process their initial estimates to be able to give is under his control and steps within the the commander an indication of their process are not arbitrarily ignored. The ability to support new mission XO must have a thorough understanding requirements. of the on-going operation, the commander’s guidance and intent, and Regardless of how the commander continually exercise the staff in all chooses to abbreviate the decision- critical steps of the decision-making making process, two areas he should process, as time and conditions permit. always include are wargaming and risk The staff will continue to provide assessment. Wargaming provides the guidance as necessary, coordinate actions, opportunity to synchronize the BOS and implement the commander’s across the COA. It may be the only time decisions. the staff and subordinates test the suitability, feasibility, and acceptability To a varying extent, staff members are of the COA. Risk assessment must be always assessing the current operation done to ensure a solution to a task or set and updating their estimates. Detailed of tasks will not render the force planning prior to operations provides the incapable of anticipating operations or commander and staff with components lower the unit’s combat effectiveness of information they need to make below acceptable levels.

I-4 FM 71-3

GLOSSARY

A2C2 Army airspace command and ANGLICO air and naval gunfire liaison control officer AA assembly area AO area of operation AAR after-action review AP antipersonnel ABCS Army battle command system APC armored personnel carrier ABE assistant brigade engineer APDS-T armor-piercing discarding ABMOC air battle management operation sabot-tracer center APFSDS armor-piercing fin-stabilized ACA airspace coordination area discarding sabot ACE armored combat earthmover APFSDS-T armor-piercing fin-stabilized ACR armored cavalry regiment discarding sabot-tracer ACT analytical control team API armor-piercing incendiary actg accounting APICM antipersonnel improved ACU area common user conventional munition A/DACG arrival/departure airfield control APOD aerial port of debarkation group APOE aerial port of embarkation AD armor division ARFOR Army forces ADA air defense artillery armd armored ADALO air defense artillery liaison officer ARNG Army National Guard ADAM area denial antipersonnel mine ARTEP Army Training and Evaluation ADAO assistant division air defense Program officer arty artillery ADC area damage control ASAS all-source analysis system ADC-M assistant division commander for ASCC Army service component maneuver commander ADCOORD air defense coordinator aslt assault ADCT air defense coordination team ASOC air support operations center ADO air defense officer ASP ammunition supply point ADW air defense warning AST ammunition support team AF Air Force AT antitank AFAS advanced field artillery system ATA air to air AFV armored fighting vehicle ATACMS Army tactical missile system AG adjutant general ATB attack battalion AH attack helicopter ATCCS Army tactical command and AK automatic remote keying control system PJL administrative/logistics atchd attached ALO air liaison officer ATGM antitank guided missile AM amplitude modification atk attack amb ambulance ATP ammunition transfer point ammo ammunition attn attention

Glossary-1 FM 71-3

AUEL automated unit equipment list C4I command, control, autmv automotive communications, computers, AVIM aviation intermediate maintenance and intelligence AVLB armored vehicle launched bridge CA civil affairs avn aviation CAAD combined arms air defense AVUM aviation unit maintenance cal caliber AWACS airborne warning and control CAS close air support system CBR chemical, biological, radiological AWIS Army worldwide information cbt combat system CBU cluster bomb unit AWOL absent without leave CCIR commander’s critical information AXP ambulance exchange point requirements CDMP combat decision-making process cdr commander BAI battlefield air interdiction CEB clothing exchange and bath BAS battlefield automated systems CEV combat engineer vehicle BCC battlefield circulation control CFA covering force area BCV battle command vehicle CFL coordinated fire line BDA battle damage assessment CFV cavalry fighting vehicle BDAR battle damage assessment and CFZ critical friendly zone repair ego cargo bde brigade CH cargo helicopter BFACS battlefield functional area chem chemical command and control system CHEMWARN chemical warning BFV Bradley Fighting Vehicle Cl counterintelligence BHL battle handover line CIF central issue facility BH basic issue items CINC commander-in-chief BMNT beginning morning nautical C&J collection and jamming twilight CLAMMS cleared lane mechanical marking bn battalion system BOS battlefield operating system CLU command and launch unit BP battle position cm centimeter BRIDGEREP bridge report cmd command BSA brigade support area CMMC Corps Materiel Management BSFV Bradley Stinger fighting vehicle Center btry battery CMO civil-military operations CMOC civil-military operations center CMT company maintenance team C2 command and control CNR combat net radio C2V command and control vehicle CNRI combat net radio interface C3 command, control, and entr center communication CNV combat net variable C3I command, control, co company communications, and COA course of action intelligence COLT combat observation lasing team

Glossary-2 FM 71-3 comm communication DOL Directorate of Logistics COMMZ communications zone DP decision point COMSEC communications security DPICM dual-purpose improved CONOPS contingency operations conventional munition CONUS continental United States DRB division ready brigade COSCOM corps support command DRF division ready force CP command post DS direct support CPT captain DSA division support area CPX command post exercise DST decision support template CRC Continental United States DSVT digital subscriber voice terminal Replacement Center DIG date-time group CROSSREP cross report DTO division transportation officer CS combat support DTOC division tactical operations center CSC combat stress casualty DZ drop zone CSG corps support group CSM command sergeant major CSR controlled supply rate EA engagement area CSS combat service support EAC echelons above corps CSSCS-EAC combat service support and EEFI essential elements of friendly control system for echelon information above corps EEI essential elements of information engr engineer EOC emergency operations center D-day deployment day EPW enemy prisoner(s) of war DA Department of the Army equip equipment DACG departure airfield control group est establish DAG divisional artillery group EW electronic warfare (opposing forces) EXTAL extra time allowance DAO division ammunition officer DCO deputy commanding officer DDMP deliberate decision-making 1SG first sergeant process FA field artillery decon decontamination FAAD forward area air defense DEH Directorate of Engineering and FAADC3I forward area air defense Housing command and control det detachment communications and DISCOM division support command intelligence div division FAAR forward area alerting radar DIVARTY division artillery FAC forward air controller DLIC detachment left in contact FARP forward arming refuel point DMD digital message device FARV future armored resupply vehicle DMMC division materiel management FASCAM family of scatterable mines center FASP field artillery support plan NVT digital nonsecure voice terminal FAST forward area support team

Glossary-3 FM 71-3

FAX facsimile GEMSS ground-emplaced mine scatterin FBCB2 Force XX3 battle command- system GPS global positioning systems » brigade and below FCT firepower control teams gren grenade FDC fire direction center grp group FEB A forward edge of battle area GS general support FED forward entry devices GSR ground surveillance radar FIST fire support team G/VLLD ground/vehicle laser locator FISTV fire support team vehicle designator FLIR forward looking infrared radar FLOT forward line of own troops FM field manual HAB heavy assault bridge FO forward observer HC hydrochlorethane FofF fields of fire HE high-explosive FOOGAS (petroleum-based expedient HE-APERS high-explosive antipersonnel inflammable material) (ammunition) FORSCOM Forces Command HEAT high-explosive antitank FPF final protective fire HEAT-T high-explosive antitank-tracer FPL final protective lines HEDP high-explosive dual-purpose FRAGO fragmentary order HEI high-explosive incendiary FS fire support HEI-T high-explosive incendiary-tracer FSB forward support battalion hel helicopter FSCL fire support coordination line HEMTT heavy expanded mobile tactical FSCM fire support coordination truck measures HEP-T high-explosive plastic tracer FSCOORD fire support coordinator HET heavy equipment transport FSE fire support element HF high frequency FSM fire support measures HHB headquarters and headquarters FSO fire support officer battery fwd forward HHC headquarters and headquarters company HHD headquarters and headquarters G1 assistant chief of staff (personnel) detachment G2 assistant chief of staff HHT headquarters and headquarters (intelligence) troop G3 assistant chief of staff (operations HEMAD high-to-medium-altitude air and plans) defense G3-Air air operations and planning hldg holding officer HMMWV high mobility multipurpose G4 assistant chief of staff (logistics) wheeled vehicle gal gallon HPT high payoff targets GBS ground base sensor HPTL high payoff target list GCCS global command and control hq headquarters system hr hour

Glossary-4 FM 71-3

HS S health service support kmih kilometers in the hour HUMINT human intelligence kmph kilometers per hour (as a unit of HVT high-value target measure that indicates motion) kph kilometers per hour (as a unit of measure only) IAW in accordance with ICM improved conventional munition mw intelligence and electronic LADW local air defense warning warfare LAN local area network IFF identification, friend, or foe LANTIRN low-altitude navigation and IFSAS initial fire support automation targeting infrared for night system LAV-AD light armor vehicle air defense IFV infantry fighting vehicle LC line of contact IG inspector general LD line of departure inf infantry LD/LC line of departure is line of contact insp inspection Idr leader intel intelligence Inchr launcher INTREP intelligence reports LO liaison officer INTSUM intelligence summary LOC line of communication IP initial point log logistics IPB intelligence preparation of the LOOP AC logistics package battlefield LOS line of sight IPW prisoner of war interrogation LOSAT line-of-sight antitank IR infrared LOTS logistics-over-the-shore IRC initial ready company LP listening post ITB independent tank battalion LRF laser range finder ITO installation transportation office LRP logistic release point ITV improved TOW vehicle LSA logistic support area IVIS intervehicular information system LSE logistics support elements LST laser-spot tracker It lieutenant JAAT joint air attack team LZ landing zone JAG Judge Advocate General JOPES joint operation planning and execution system m meters J-SEAD joint suppression of enemy air MAG Marine Air Group defenses maint maintenance JSTARS joint surveillance target attack maj major radar system MALS Marine aviation logistics squadron MANPAD man-portable air defense KE kinetic energy MBA main battle area KEM kinetic energy missile MCC movement control center KIA killed in action MCO movement control officer km kilometers MCS maneuver control system

Glossary-5 FM 71-3

MCT movement control team NAAK nerve agent antidote kit mech mechanized NAI named areas of interest med medical NAPP nerve agent pretreatment pills MEDEVAC medical evacuation NATO North Atlantic Treaty MEF Marine Expeditionary Force Organization METL mission essential task list NBC nuclear, biological, chemical METT-T mission, enemy, terrain, troops NBCO nuclear, biological, chemical and time available officer MG machine gun NBCWRS NBC warning and reporting mgmt management system MHE materiel-handling equipment NCA national command authority MI military intelligence NCO noncommissioned officer MIA missing in action NCOIC noncommissioned officer in MICLIC mine clearing line charge charge mih miles in the hour NCS net control station MIJÏ meaconing, intrusion, jamming, NGF naval gunfire and interference NGLO naval gunfire liaison officer MIJREP meaconing, intrusion, jamming, NGO naval gunfire officer and interference report NLT not later than min minutes NOD night observation device MLRS multiple launched rocket system NUCWARN nuclear warning mm millimeters NVD night-vision device MMC Materiel Management Center MOPMS modular pack mine system MOPP mission-oriented protective obj objective posture OCOKA observation and fields of fire, mort mortar cover and concealment, MOS military occupational specialty obstacles, key terrain, avenues MOUT military operations on urbanized of approach terrain OCONUS outside continental United States MP military police OH observation helicopter mph miles per hour 01 operations and intelligence MSB main support battalion OIC officer in charge MSC Military Sealift Command OIR other intelligence requirements MSE mobile subscriber equipment OOTW operations other than war msg message OP observation post MSR main supply route OPCON operational control MSRT mobile subscriber radio terminals OPFOR opposing forces MST maintenance support team OPLAN operation plan MTC movement to contact OPORD operation order MTMC Military Traffic Management OPP offload preparation party Command ops operations MTOE modification table of organization OPSEC operations security and equipment ord ordnance MTP mission training plan org organization

Glossary-6 FM 71-3

ORP objective rally point QDMP quick decision-making process OSP on-board ship party qtr quarter

PA physicians assistant RAAMS remote antiarmor mine system PAC Personnel and Administrative RAOC rear area operations center Center RAP rocket assisted projectile PADS position azimuth determining RATT radio teletypewriter system RAU radio access unit PAO public affairs officer recon reconnaissance PAX passengers REDCON readiness condition PCI precombat inspection regt regiment PD point detonating RES radiation exposure status PDS personnel daily summary RFA restrictive fire area PERINTREP periodic intelligence report RFL restrictive fire line pers personnel ROE rules of engagement PEWS platoon early warning system ROM refuel-on-the-move PFC private first class RP release point phys physical RPG rocket-propelled grenade PIR priority intelligence requirements R&S reconnaissance and surveillance PL phase line RSL recommended stockage lists PLL prescribed load list RSR required supply rate it platoon RSTA reconnaissance surveillance target M provost marshal acquisition mPMCS preventive maintenance checks RTO radiotelephone operator and services POD point of debarkation POE point of embarkation POL petroleum, oils, and lubricants 51 adjutant POMCUS prepositioning of materiel 52 intelligence officer configured to unit sets 53 operations and training officer pos position S3-Air assistant battalion S3 (air POSNAV position navigation operations) PP passage point 54 supply officer PSA post support activity 55 civil affairs officer PSG platoon sergeant SAAFR standard-use Army aircraft flight PSNCO personnel services routes noncommissioned officer SAB separate armor brigade PSS personnel service support SAEDA Subversion and Espionage PST pass time Directed Against US Army and PSYOP psychological operations Deliberate Security Violations PW prisoner of war SAFAD small arms for air defense PZ pickup zone SALT supporting arms liaison team #

Glossary-7 FM 71-3

SALT Air supporting arms liaison team S3 spt support (air operations) sqdn squadron SALUTE size, activity, location, unit, time, SR supply route and equipment SRIG surveillance reconnaissance SAM surface-to-air missile and intelligence group SARSS-l(I) Standard Army Retail Supply SSG staff sergeant System-1 Interim S&T supply and transport SCO squadron commander ST special text set scout STACCS standard theater Army SEAD suppression of enemy air defense command and control sec section system SEE small emplacement excavators STAMIS Standard Army Management SEN small extension node Information System SENSREP sensitive items report STANAG Standardization Agreement SFC sergeant first class STRATREP status report SGM sergeant major SVC service sgt sergeant SVRWXWARN severe weather warning SHELREP shell report report SICPS standard integrated command post system SIE selective identification feature TAA tactical assembly area sig signal TAACOM Theater Army Air Defense SIGINT signals intelligence Command SIGSEC signals security TACAIR tactical air SINCGARS single channel ground and TAC CP tactical command post airborne subsystem TACCS Tactical Army Combat sit situation Service Support Computer SI TM AP situation map System SITREP situation report TACFERE tactical fire direction system SJA Staff Judge Advocate TACMS tactical missile system SLAR side looking airborne radar TACP tactical air control party SME subject matter expert TACS AT tactical satellite SO signal officer TACSSCS Tactical Army Combat SOF special operations forces Service Support Computer SOI signal operation instructions System SOP standing operating procedure TAI target areas of interest SO SR suppress, obscure, secure, and TALCE tanker airlift control element reduce TAMMS The Army Maintenance SP start point Management System SPBS-R standard property book TAT to accompany troops system-redesign TC tank commander SPOD seaport of debarkation TCF tactical combat force SPOE seaport of embarkation TCP traffic control post SPOTREP spot report TD tank division

Glossary-8 FM 71-3

TDIS time-distance UMCP unit maintenance collecting TEWT tactical exercise without point troops UMT unit ministry team TF task force USAARMS United States Army Armor tgt target School THREATCON threat condition USAF United States Air Force TIRS terrain index reference system USAMCCOM United States Army TLP troop-leading procedures Armament, Munitions, and tm teams Chemical Command TMC troop medical clinics USAMMA US Army medical materiel tns trains agency TOC tactical operations center USCINCTRANS United States Commander-in- TOE tables of organization and Chief Transportation equipment Command TOT time on target USTRANSCOM United States Transportation TOW tube-launched, optically Command tracked, wire-guided missile TPFDD time-phased force deployment VFMED variable format message entry data device TPFDL time-phased force deployment VHF very high frequency logistics V/STOL vertical/short takeoff and TPN tactical packet network landing TRADOC United States Army Training and Doctrine Command trans transportation WCS weapons control status trk truck WESS weapons effect signature trlr trailer simulator trmt treatment WIA wounded in action TRP target reference point WO warning order TSOP tactical standing operating WP white phosphorus procedures wpns weapons TTP tactics, techniques, and WP-T white phosphorous tracer procedures wrkr wrecker TTU transportation terminal unit WSM weapon system management TVA target value analysis WSRO weapon systems replacement typ typist operations WWMCCS worldwide military command and control system WXFCST weather forecast report UAV unmanned aerial vehicle UH utility helicopter UHF ultra high frequency XO executive officer

Glossary-9

FM 71-3

REFERENCES

SOURCES USED

These are sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication.

Army Publications

Army Regulation 40-5 Preventive Medicine. October 1990.

ARTEP 7-20-MTP Mission Training Plan for the Infantry Battalion. December 1988.

FM 3-3 Chemical and Biological Contamination Avoidance. November 1992.

FM 5-17-100 Division Engineer Combat Operations. April 1993.

FM 5-71-3 Brigade Engineer Combat Operations (Armored). October 1995.

FM 5-100-15 Corps Engineer Operations. June 1995. mM 7-20 The Infantry Battalion. April 1992. FM 10-23 Basic Doctrine for Army Field Feeding. December 1991.

FM 19-4 Military Police Battlefield Circulation Control, Area Security, and Enemy Prisoner of War Operations. May 1993.

FM 20-31 Electric Power Generation in the Field. October 1987.

FM 20-32 Mine/Countermine Operations. September 1992.

FM 21-10 Field Hygiene and Sanitation. November 1988.

FM 21-10-1 Unit Field Sanitation Team. October 1989.

FM 24-1 Signal Support in the Airland Battle. October 1990.

FM 34-80 Brigade and Battalion Intelligence and Electronic Warfare Operations. April 1986. #

References-1 FM 71-3

FM 44-16 Chaparral/Vulcan/Stinger Platoon Combat Operations. May 1987.

FM 44-43 Bradley Stinger Fighting Vehicle Platoon and Squad Operations. October 1995.

FM 44-44 Avenger Platoon, Section, and Squad Operations. October 1995.

FM 44-100 US Army Air Defense Operations. November 1988.

FM 55-12 Movement of Units in Air Force Aircraft. November 1989.

FM 63-20 Forward Support Battalion. February 1990.

FM 71-2 The Tank and Mechanized Infantry Battalion Task Force. September 1988.

FM 71-100 Division Operations. June 1990.

FM 90-4 Air Assault Operators. March 1987.

FM 90-7 Combined Arms Obstacle Integration. September 1994.

FM 90-13 River Crossing Operations. September 1992.

FM 90-13-1 Combined Arms Breaching Operations. February 1991.

FM 100-5 Operations. June 1993.

FM 100-7 The Army in Theater Operations. March 1993.

FM 100-9 Reconstitution. January 1992.

FM 100-17 Mobilization, Deployment, Redeployment, Demobilization. October 1992.

FM 100-19 Domestic Support Operations. July 1993.

FM 100-20 Military Operations in Low Intensity Conflict. December 1990.

FM 100-23 Peace Operations. December 1994.

FM 101-5 Staff Organization and Operations. May 1984.

References-2 FM 71-3

FM 101-5-1 Operational Terms and Symbols. October 1985.

FM 101-10-1/2 Staff Officers’ FM—Organizational, Technical, and Logistical Data. Volume I. October 1987.

Joint and Multiservice Publications

Joint Pub 1 Joint Warfare of the US Armed Forces. November 1991.

Joint Pub 3-0 Doctrine for Joint Operations. September 1993.

Joint Pub 4-01.6 Joint Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Joint Logistics-Over- the-Shore. August 1991.

SH 7-176 Infantry Division (Light) Battalion TOE O7O15L000.

TB MED 530 Occupational and Environmental Health: Food Service Sanitation. November 1991.

DOCUMENTS NEEDED

hese documents must be available to the intended users of this publication.

DA Form 1155 Witness Statement on Individual. June 1966.

DA Form 1156 Casualty Feeder Report. June 1966.

DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. February 1974.

DA Form 5976 Enemy Prisoner of War Capture Tag. January 1991.

References-3

FM 71-3

INDEX

liaison officer (LO), 3-7 A local air defense warning (LAD W), H-31 officer (ADO), 2-7 and 2-8, 3-7, 3-15, 6-42 sensors, 3-7 absent without leave (AWOL), 8-15 warning, 2-7, H-30 through H-33 Adjutant (SI), 1-3, 1-5, 3-6, 3-16 and 3-19, 6-8, 8-3 weapons, 3-7 through 8-5, 8-14 through 8-17, 8-25 and 8-26 Air Force, 3-15, B-l administrative/logistics (A/L), 3-5, 3-19, 8-5 AirLand Battle, E-4 advance from the exit bank, 6-44 air liaison officer (ALO), 3-7, 3-13, 3-15 advance guard, 4-18, 6-19, A-12 airlift, 3-7 advance party, 2-2 and 2-3, 6-8 Air Mobility Command, G-3 advanced field artillery systems (AFAS), E-10 airmobile, C-10 and C-ll aerial port of debarkation (APOD), G-3 air naval gunfire liaison officer (ANGLICO), 3-7, aerial port of embarkation (APOE), G-3 3- 9 after-action reviews (AAR), F-6 airspace, 3-7, 3-15, B-6, E-13 agility, 1-6 and 1-7, 2-7 airspace coordination area (ACA), B-ll, C-6 air assault units, 6-4 and 6-5 all-source analysis system (ASAS), 1-7, 1-10, 2-6, 4- 5, 5-8, E-l, E-7 air attack, 3-22 ambulance exchange point (AXP), 8-22, C-8 air cavalry squadron, H-54 through H-57 ambushes, A-12, C-18 airborne units, 6-4 and 6-5 ammunition transfer point (ATP), 2-8, 6-9, 6-12, airborne warning and control system (AWAGS), 8-12 E-13 amphibious operations, B-5 air defense, 3-7 through 3-9, 3-15, 4-6, 4-17, 4-46, 5-5, 6-15 and 6-16, 8-22, B-6, B-ll, C-7, C-12, AN/PRC-77 radios, C-3 C-16. See also battlefield operating system (BOS), antiarmor, A-12, C-14 and C-15 active, 7-24 assets, 3-7, 6-8 antipersonnel (AP), A-12 battery, 3-7 antitank (AT), 3-20, 6-31, A-ll through A-13, capabilities, 3-7 C-8, C-ll, C-15, E-10 element, 1-4, 1-16, 4-23 low-altitude, 4-17 antitank guided missile (ATOM), A-ll passive, 2-7, 7-24 antitank platoon, C-3 planning, 6-17, 8-22, B-ll, C-7 warning net, 6-16 antiterrorism, A-2 air defense artillery (ADA), 2-7, 3-9, 3-13, 4-3, 4-6, approach march, 6-48 4-17, 6-8 and 6-9, 6-16, 6-26, 6-39, 6-42, 6-46, area damage control, 6-34 8-6, 8-22, B-5 and B-6, C-7, C-16, C-19, H-30 through H-33 area of operations (AO), 1-5, 2-2 through 2-4, 3-2, 3-7 through 3-9, 3-12, 3-23 through 3-26, 5-2,

Index-1 FM 71-3

6-7, 6-10, 6-14, 6-27, 6-33 and 6-34, C-18, F-7 corps, C-4 and F-8 division, C-4 engineer, C-4 areas military intelligence battalion, C-4 marshaling, 2-2 truck company, C-4 staging, 2-2 linkup, C-5 tactical assembly, 2-2 maintenance team, C-4 arm bands, 6-4 maneuver, C-6, C-15, C-19 mess team, C-4 armor forces, A-13, C-2, C-10, C-12, C-15 missions, C-4 and C-5 armorAight considerations, A-13 mobility and survivability, C-8, C-16 and C-17 movement to contact, C-5, C-9 and C-10 armored and mechanized, C-12 nuclear, biological, chemical (NBC), C-17 armored cavalry troop, 1-4 offensive techniques, C-9 and C-10 operational planning considerations, C-5 armored operations, C-l through C-19 organization, C-3 air defense, C-7, C-16, C-19 planning considerations, C-14 through C-16 armored brigade and light infantry battalion pursuit, C-5, C-10 operations, C-2 through C-ll remotely employed sensor (REMS), C-4 armored force capabilities, C-l3 retrograde operations, C-5, C-ll augmentation, C-3 and C-4 smoke/decon platoon liaison officer (LO), C-4 Bradley Stinger fighting vehicle (BSFV), C-4 special operations forces, C-18 and C-19 breakout from encirclement, C-5 tactical employment, C-14 capabilities and limitations, C-13 and C-14, C-18 task organization considerations, C-ll and C-12 characteristics of the light infantry battalion, C-3 unit maintenance team, C-4 through C-9 combat service support (CSS), C-8 and C-9, C-l7, Army airborne command and control system C-19 (A2C2S), E-13 combat support (CS), C-4 command and control, C-9, C-17, C-19 Army airspace command and control (A2C2), 3-11, considerations to offset armored force limitations, 3-14 and 3-15, B-6 C-13 and C-14 Army aviation liaison officer (LO), 3-7 cover, C-5 defend in sector, C-5 Army aviation procedures, H-52 through H-57 defending a strongpoint, C-ll Army battle command system (ABCS), E-l and E-2 defense in sector, C-10 defensive techniques, C-10 and C-ll Army global command and control system demonstration, C-5 (AGCCS), E-2 and E-3 employment considerations, C-12 and C-13, C-18 Army National Guard, 1-4 and C-19 exploitation, C-5, C-10 Army operations, 1-5 through 1-10, 2-1,6-33 fire support (FS), C-6 and C-7, C-15 and C-16, agility, 1-6 and 1-7 C-19 depth, 1-6 and 1-7 follow and support, C-5 initiative, 1-6 and 1-7 forward entry devices (FED), C-4 synchronization, 1-6, 1-8 ground surveillance radar (GSR), C-4 versatility, 1-6,1-8 hasty and deliberate attack, C-5, C-9 and C-10 initial fire support automation system (IFSAS), Army service component commander (ASCC), B-3 C-4 Army tactical command and control system intelligence, C-5 and C-6, C-15, C-18 (ATCCS), E-3 introduction, C-l and C-2 light Army tactical missile system (ATACMS), E-16 battalion, C-5 Army worldwide information system (AWIS), E-3 brigade, C-4

Index-2 FM 71-3 artilleiy. See field artilleiy (FA), axes of advance, 6-1 assault, 6-4, A-6 assault crossing of the river, 6-44 B assembly area, 6-2, 6-8, 6-11, 6-14 through 6-18, 6-24 and 6-25, 6-27, 6-35, D-l through D-7 forward, D-5 backbriefs, 3-23, 4-21,6-21, F-2 locations of, 4-4 base defense operation, 6-34 occupation of, D-6, H-24 through H-26 battalion assessment, 8-24 armored and mechanized infantry, 1-2, 1-4 and Assistant Chief of Staff (Gl), Personnel, 8-14, 8-16 1-5, C-7 assault amphibious, B-2 Assistant Chief of Staff, (G2), Intelligence, 3-18, combat engineer, B-2 C-15 command post (CP), 3-19 Assistant Chief of Staff (G3), Operations and Plans, commander, 3-9 and 3-10, 6-5, 6-8, 6-23, 6-26, 3-18, 8-25, C-15 and C-16 C-6, C-17 field trains, 6-9 Assistant division air defense officer (ADADO), B-6 headquarters, B-2 Atlantic Commands, B-l light, C-3 and C-4 light armored reconnaissance, B-2 atmospheric conditions, 3-18 missions, A-6 attachment of critical combat service support assets motor transportation, B-2 to maneuver, 8-19 and 8-20 operations, A-6 tank and mechanized infantry, 4-28 attachment and detachment procedures, H-57 task force, 1-10, 4-5, 4-7, 4-16, 4-27 through through H-60 4-29, 6-5 and 6-6, 6-11, 6-17, 6-21, 6-24 attack through 6-26, 8-5, 8-8 and 8-9, B-6 continuation of, 4-31 task force commanders, 3-26 counterattack, 6-13 battle. See also main battle area (MBA), deep, 3-12 handover, 6-15, 6-18 and 6-19,6-25 deliberate, 4-27 through 4-31, 6-15, C-5, C-10 handover line (BHL), 6-14, 6-16, 6-18 and 6-19, demonstration, 4-33 6-24 through 6-26 feint, 4-31 and 4-32 frontal, 4-11 battle command, 3-1 through 3-29, E-3, E-12,1-1 ground, 3-24 adjutant (SI), 3-6 hasty, 4-19, 4-24 through 4-26, C-5 air defense officer (ADO), 3-7 main, 4-3, 4-26, 4-32 air liaison officer (ALO), 3-7 position, C-7 air naval gunfire liaison officer (ANGLICO), 3-7 pursuit, 4-34 Army aviation liaison officer (LO), 3-7 and 3-8 raid, 4-32, A-2 brigade rehearsals, 3-22 through 3-28 spoiling, 5-11 chain of command, 3-4 supporting, 4-3 chaplain, 3-8 attack guidance matrix, 4-5 chemical officer, 3-8 civil affairs officer (S5), 3-6 and 3-7 Avenger, 2-7, B-6, E-l, E-10 command and control, 3-2 avenues of approach, 1-10, 3-21, 6-20, 8-6, C-6, command and control facilities, 3-10 C-14, D-3 command and control guidelines, 3-2 command and control organization, 3-5 through aviation. See also helicopters, attack, 3-10 defensive, C-ll, 5-4 command and staff communications, 3-4 and 3-5 liaison officer (LO), 3-15 command group, 3-10 offensive, 4-5, 4-28, 4-31, 6-21 command post displacement, 3-21

Index-3 FM 71-3

command post operations, 3-19 through 3-21 tactical command post (TAC CP), 3-10 through command post operations techniques, 3-19 and 3-12, 3-19 3-20 tactical operations center (TOC) operations, 3-19 command post positioning, 3-20 terrain model or sand table, 3-23 command post security, 3-20 and 3-21 battle damage assessment (BDA), 2-6, 3-6 command sergeant major (CSM), 3-5 and 3-6 commander, 3-3 through 3-5 battlefield automated system (BAS), E-3 communication, 3-17 through 3-20 battlefield framework, 2-3 through 2-5 communications security, 3-17 and 3-18 conducting the rehearsal, 3-26 through 3-28 battlefield functional area (BFA), E-3 confirmation brief, 3-23 and 3-24 battlefield operating system (BOS), 1-10, 2-1, 2-5 coordinating staff, 3-6 through 2-9, 3-28, 4-4 through 4-8, 4-44 through coordination, 3-5 4-47, B-5 through B-ll, C-5 through C-9, C-18 definition, 3-1 through 3-3 and C-19, E-3,1-4 deputy commander, 3-5 air defense, 2-7,4-46, B-6, B-ll, C-7 and C-8 direct support military intelligence company combat service support (CSS), 2-8,4-8, 4-46, B-7, commander, 3-8 B-ll, C-8 and C-9 engineer, 3-8 command and control, 2-9, 4-4, 4-46, B-7, B-ll, example terrain model rehearsal, 3-24 through C-9 3-28 fire support (FS), 2-6, 4-5, 4-45, B-6, B-10 and executive officer, 3-5 B-l 1, C-6 and C-7 fire support coordinator (FSCOORD), 3-8 and 3-9 intelligence, 2-5 and 2-6, 4-4, 4-44, B-5, B-10, forward support battalion (FSB) commander, 3-9 C-5 and C-6 full-dress rehearsal, 3-22 maneuver, 2-6, 4-5, 4-44, B-5 and B-6, B-10, C-6 functions, 3-4 mobility and survivability, 2-7, 4-7, 4-46, B-6 and general, 3-1 through 3-3, 3-17, 3-22 B-7, B-ll, C-8 headquarters and headquarters company nuclear, biological, chemical (NBC), 4-7 commander or headquarters commandant, 3-9 intelligence officer (S2), 3-6 battle position (BP), 5-8 and 5-9, C-10 key leader rehearsal, 3-22 and 3-23 battle space, 1-5, 1-10, 2-3 and 2-4, 4-2, E-8, F-10 logistics officer (S4), 3-6 main command post, 3-12 through 3-15, 3-19 belligerents, A-3 through A-6, A-ll through A-13 map rehearsal, 3-23 booby traps, A-5 maps, 3-20 military police platoon leader, 3-9 Bradley Stinger Fighting Vehicle (BSFV), 2-7, 8-26, operations and training officer (S3), 3-6 B-6, C-4, C-7 and C-8, E-l organization and facilities, 3-3 through 3-17 breaching operations, 4-38 through 4-42, 6-1, C-7 personal staff, 3-5 and C-8, C-17 preparing a terrain model rehearsal, 3-24 through 3-26 breakout forces, 6-5, 6-30, 6-41 radio rehearsal, 3-23 breakout from encirclement, 6-27 through 6-33 rear command post, 3-15 through 3-17 actions upon encirclement, 6-28 and 6-29 rehearsal types, 3-22 combat service support, 6-32 relationship with subordinate commands, 3-4 command actions, 6-28 responsibilities, 3-17 command and control, 6-32 responsibility and authority, 3-4 diversionary force, 6-31 and 6-32 signal officer (SO), 3-9 and 3-10 execution, 6-30 through 6-33 site selection, 3-24 forces, 6-30 sketch map rehearsal, 3-23 general, 6-27 special rehearsal, 3-24 main body, 6-31 special staff, 3-7 planning, 6-28 and 6-29 staff, 3-4 preparation, 6-29 and 6-30 surgeon, 3-10 rear guard, 6-32

Index-4 FM 71-3

reserve force, 6-31 reconnaissance and surveillance (R&S), 3-28, C-6 rupture force, 6-30 and 6-31 rehearsals, 3-22 through 3-28 brigade, 1-1 through 1-11 separate, 1-4 and 1-5 agility, 1-7 and 1-8 signal officer (SO), 3-9 air defense officer (ADO), 3-7, 6-42 staff, 1-7, 3-2, 3-6, 3-14, 3-24 through 3-26, 6-7, 6-16, 6-22, 8-16, B-7, C-7 through C-9, C-13, area of operations (AO), 3-8 armored, 4-9, 5-1, B-l, B-4 through B-l 1, C-4 D-5 through D-7 through C-17 support area (BSA), 2-8 and 2-9, 3-5 and 3-6, 3-9 Army operation tenents, 1-6 and 3-10, 3-16 and 3-17, 4-8, 6-14, 6-27,6-34 Army operations, 1-5 through 1-9 through 6-36, 6-47, 8-5 and 8-6, 8-13, 8-19 and 8-20 assembly areas, 6-11, D-3 and D-4 surgeon, 3-10, 8-4 and 8-5, 8-11 battlefield focus, 1-10 and 1-11 versatility, 1-8 capabilities, 1-1 and 1-2 zone, 3-7 chaplain, 3-8, 8-16 combat service support system, 8-3 through 8-8 brigade support area (BSA), 2-8 and 2-9, 3-5 and command and control, D-3 and D-4 3-6, 3-10, 3-16, 6-14, 6-34, 6-36, 6-47, 8-5 and command group, 3-9 8-6, 8-13, 8-19, C-8, C-13 commander, 1-6 and 1-7, 1-10, 2-6, 3-1, 3-3 through 3-13, 3-17, 3-19, 3-26, 5-1 and 5-2, 6-7 brigade support area/base cluster defense and 6-8, 6-11, 6-15 through 6-17, 6-21 through considerations, 6-35 and 6-36 6-23, 6-29 through 6-36, 6-41 and 6-42, 6-48, 8-1 through 8-6, 8-15, 8-17, 8-19 and 8-20, bypass, 4-16 and 4-17,4-22 through 4-26 B-ll, C-7, C-9 and C-10, C-13, C-16, D-6 and D-7, E-16, H-2,1-1 and 1-2 decontamination, 2-8 depth, 1-7 digitized, E-l through E-17 c elements, 3-16, 6-26 engineers, 3-8, 3-10,4-78, 6-15, 6-17, 6-41 and 6-42, 6-45 casualties, 8-11 and 8-12, H-71 executive officer (XO), 3-6, 3-8 and 3-9, 3-26 and 3-27, 8-4, 8-17, C-9 cease fires, A-2 through A-6, A-8 fire support coordinator (FSCOORD), 3-15, 6-5, chaplain, 3-6, 3-8, 3-16, H-77 6-15 fire support element (FSE), 2-7, 4-5 checkpoint, 6-23, A-2, A-6 through A-12 fire support officer (FSO), 3-9, 3-27, 6-11, 6-15 chemical officer, 2-8,3-8, 3-28 formations. See formations, functions, 1-2 choke point, 8-8, C-7 through C-ll generating combat power, 1-8 and 1-9 civil affairs (CA), 2-3, 3-6 and 3-7, 3-16, 8-22, C-2, headquarters, 1-2, D-6 C-19 headquarters and headquarters company (HHC), D-3 through D-6 civil affairs officer (S5), 1-3, 3-7, 3-17 initiative, 1-6 and 1-7 civil-military operations center (CMOC), H-78 light, C-4 limitations, 1-1 and 1-2 classes of supply, 1-2, 6-5, 6-9, 6-12, 6-47, 8-12 maneuver, 1-9 through 8-14, 8-19, 8-21, B-7, C-8, C-13 and C-14 missions, 1-1, 1-4 and 1-5, 3-29, A-l close air support (CAS), 1-7, 1-10, 2-6, 3-7, 4-3, 4-5, operations, 1-4, 1-7, 2-1 through 2-9, 3-2, 3-5, 4-26, 7-9 and 7-10, B-6, B-10, E-12, F-9 3-8, 3-19, 3-25, 6-6, 6-16, 8-20 operation orders (OPORD), 3-23 close operations. See operations, close. organizations and functions, 1-2 through 1-5 cluster bomb units (CBU), F-10 passage of lines, 6-13 and 6-14 protection, 1-9 combat forces, 2-2, 5-1,6-33,6-36, B-4, C-2

Index-5 FM 71-3 combat functions, D-12 combat air support, 7-8 through 7-10 fire support, 7-2 through 7-7 combat net radio, 3-10, 3-17, E-7, H-36 intelligence and electronic warfare support, 7-25 combat net radio interface (CNRI), 3-19 through 7-27 joint air attack team operations, 7-10 and 7-11 combat operations, 1-2, 2-2 and 2-3, 3-11, 3-22, military police support, 7-27 through 7-32 6-28, 8-13, D-2, E-3 and E-4,1-4 mobility and survivability, 7-13 through 7-16 combat power, 1-1, 1-6 through 1-9, 2-1 through naval and marine fire support, 7-11 through 7-13 2-6, 3-1, 3-5, 4-30, 5-1 and 5-2, 6-8, 6-30, 6-44, nuclear, biological, chemical operations, 7-16 A-6, C-l, C-ll, D-2, E-5, E-7, E-9 through 7-18 dynamics of, 1-9 and 1-10 signal support, 7-33 and 7-34 generating, 4-1 smoke operations, 7-19 and 7-20 combat service support (CSS), 1-1, 1-8 through 1-10, combat vehicles/weapons systems, H-92 through 2-8 and 2-9, 3-5 and 3-6, 3-8 through 3-12, 3-15 H-94 and 3-16, 3-19, 3-27,4-8 through 4-16, 4-27, 6-9, combined arms, 6-18, E-l through E-16 6-12, 6-14, 6-16 and 6-17, 6-19, 6-22 through commander, E-2 6-24, 6-28, 6-30 through 6-32, 6-38, 6-42, 6-48, concept, A-13 8-1 through 8-26, A-2, B-7, B-ll, C-8 and C-9, forces, 4-27, B-10 C-12, C-15, E-3, E-14, F-10. See also battlefield obstacle integration, 5-15 through 5-20 operating system (BOS), combat service support operations, 1-10, 4-16 through 4-22, 8-3, F-6 (CSS). tactics, E-9 administrative services, 8-16 and 8-17 team, 1-11, 2-7, 4-30, B-5, E-2 brigade support area (BSA), 8-6 forward support battalion (FSB), 8-8 command, F-10 health services, 8-16 joint task force, B-3 and B-4 key personnel, 8-4 and 8-5 subordinate unified commands, B-3 and B-4 main supply route (MSR), 8-6 unified and specified commands, B-3 and B-4 maintenance operations, 8-9 command and control, 1-6 through 1-10, 2-7, 2-9, medical operations, 8-10 and 8-11 3- 1 through 3-5, 3-9, 3-12, 3-15, 3-19, 3-22, 4-8, overview, 8-2 and 8-3 4- 46, 5-6 and 5-7, 6-11, 6-19, 6-26, 6-27, 6-32, personnel service support, 8-14 and 8-15 6-43, 6-48, 8-20, 8-24, A-2, B-9, B-ll, C-7, C-9 planning, 8-17 and C-10, C-17 and C-18. See also battlefield reconstitution, 8-23 operating system (BOS), command and control, regeneration, 8-24 alternate, 3-19 relationships, 8-1 brigade facilities, 3-10 through 3-12 reorganization, 8-23 communication, 3-2 retrograde operations, 8-22 elements, 3-19 supply operations, 8-12 guidelines, 3-2 push system, 8-13 measures, 3-22, 4-30 supply point, 8-13 systems, 1-7, 6-11, E-13 unit distribution, 8-13 and 8-14 warfare, 3-16 through 3-19 support plan, 8-18 weapon systems replacement operations (WSRO), command and control vehicle (C2V), E-l, E-13 8-24 through 8-26, H-61 and H-62 command and launch unit (CLU), E-ll combat service support control system for echelons command and support relationships, 8-1 and 8-2 above corps (CSSCS-EAC), E-3 command, control, and communications, 2-9, 3-21, combat support (CS) 1-1, 1-4, 1-7 through 1-10, 3-5 6-34, B-9, C-19, E-7 and 3-6, 3-9, 3-11 and 3-12, 3-15, 3-24, 3-27, 4-3 and 4-4, 4-18, 4-21, 4-28, 6-19, 6-23, 6-28, 6-31, command, control, communications, and intelligence 6-38, 6-48, 7-20 through 7-24, B-4, C-4, C-12, (C3I), 3-17 and 3-18,4-7, 4-9, E-ll, E-13 C-15, E-4, E-3, E-14, F-10 command group, 1-5, 1-7, 2-9, 3-7 through 3-10, air defense support, 7-20 through 7-24 3-19 and 3-20, 3-24

Index-6 FM 71-3

command post (CP), 3-1 through 3-3, 3-8, 3-10, commander's 3-14, 3-16, 3-19 through 3-22, 6-11, C-8, F-5, H-3 decision, 3-1, 3-10,3-19,1-4 and H-4, H-38 and H-39 intent, 1-6 through 1-9, 2-7 and 2-8, 3-1 battalion, 3-19 through 3-3, 3-8,3-26 and 3-27, 8-3 and 8-4, brigade, 3-2, 3-6 through 3-8, 3-15, 3-19 through 8-17, A-4, B-9 and B-10, C-13, C-17, D-7, 3-21, C-8 and C-9, D-7 E-12, E-16, F-2 communications, 3-19 and 3-20 planning guidance, 3-5,1-4 displacement, 3-21 jump, 3-21 communications, 1-5, 2-9, 3-2, 3-14, 3-17 through 3-23, 6-17,6-19, 6-29, 6-37, 7-33 and locations, 3-20 7-34, 8-19, C-3, C-9, D-6, E-10, E-14 main, 1-7, 2-9, 3-3 through 3-14, 3-19 through command and staff, 3-4 and 3-5 3-21, 6-6, 6-11, 6-17, 8-4, 8-17, C-9 operations security. See operations, security, maps, 3-20 operations, 3-19 through 3-21, A-8 responsibilities, 3-17 positioning, 3-20 security, 3-17 and 3-18 rear, 1-7, 2-9, 3-5 through 3-10, 3-15 through voice, 2-7 3-20, 6-9, 8-5 and 8-6, 8-19, 8-25, D-3 communications security (COMSEC), 3-18 and security, 3-20 and 3-21 3-19,8-12 tactical (TAC CP), 1-5 through 1-7, 3-5 and 3-6, 3-9 through 3-12, 3-14, 3-19, 3-22, 6-9, 6-17, confirmation briefs, 6-17, F-2, F-10 6-42, D-3 contact point, 6-15 through 6-19, 6-24 techniques, 3-19 and 3-20 contaminated areas, 2-8 command relationship, 6-4, C-17 contingency operations (CONOPS), 1-11, C-18 Command Sergeant Major (CSM), 3-5 and 3-6 contingency plans, 3-19, 3-27, 6-16, A-3, D-7 commander continental United States (CONUS), 2-3, 8-26 battalion, 3-10, 6-5 through 6-8,6-17 through 6-19, 6-21, 6-23, 6-25 and 6-26, 8-23, control measures, 1-7, 2-4, 3-25, 6-5 and 6-6, 6-18, 6-23, 6-26, 6-40, B-6, C-13, F-4, F-10 C-6, E-13,1-4 brigade, 2-6, 3-1 through 3-13, 3-17 and 3-18, converging forces, 6-6 5- 1 and 5-2, 6-22 and 6-23, 6-29 through 6-36, 6- 41 andconvoys, 6-42, 6-48, A-2, 8-1 A-ll through and A-12 8-6, 8-15, 8-17, 8-19 and 8-20, B-l 1, C-7, C-9 and C-10, coordinating fire line (CFL), 6-6,6-25 and 6-26 C-13, C-16 and C-17, D-6 and D-7, E-16, H-2, 1-1 coordinating staff, 3-26 and 3-27 combined arms, E-2 adjutant (SI), 3-6 corps, 6-14 and 6-15, E-13 civil affairs officer (S5), 3-6 and 3-7 diversionary force, 6-32 intelligence officer (S2), 3-6 division, 2-7, 3-18, 6-14, 8-23 logistics officer (S4), 3-6 engineer, 6-12, 6-41 operations and training officer (S3), 3-6 guidance, 1-2 cordon and search, A-2 through A-7 joint task force, E-2 maneuver, 6-15 corps, 1-4, 5-1 and 5-2,6-14, D-3 through D-5, F-10 passing, 6-18 corps support group (CSG), B-7 rupture force, 6-30 stationary force, 6-17 and 6-18 corps support command (COSCOM), 8-3, 8-6, 8-12 task force, 3-12, 3-27, 6-21, B-4 counterair operations, 2-7 unit, 3-28, 6-11, 8-24 counterattack, 1-6, 2-5, 6-19, 6-22 and 6-23, 6-37, commander in chief (CINC), B-3, C-18 6-41, 6-45, A-10 and A-ll, C-13 through C-15 commander’s critical information requirements counterintelligence support, 3-6 (CCIR), E-13 countermeasures, 3-17 and 3-18, E-ll

Index-7 FM 71-3

countermobility, 4-7, 6-42, 6-46, C-8, C-17 fire support, 5-4 and 5-5 fundamentals of, 5-1 through 5-7 counterreconnaissance, C-5 and C-6 intelligence, 5-4 course of action (COA), 2-4, 2-6, 3-2, 3-26 and 3-27, limited visibility, 5-24 6-22, 6-25, 6-29, 8-1, 8-17, E-2,1-2 through 1-4 maneuver (aviation), 5-4 mobile, 5-2, 5-13 covering force, 5-13, 5-20 through 5-24 mobility and survivability, 5-5 covering force area (CFA), 4-17 and 4-18,4-34 night defensive doctrine, 5-24 through 4-35, C-14 nuclear, biological, and chemical (NBC), 5-5 patterns, 5-2 and 5-3 planning, 5-7 through 5-11, 6-22 preparation, 5-12 and 5-13 D purpose, 5-1 rear, 5-2 relief in place, 6-6 data base, 2-6, E-12 reserve, 5-9 deception, 3-17 and 3-18, 6-14, 6-24 and 6-25,6-34, synchronization, 5-3 through 5-7 6-45, C-5, C-14, C-19, D-2 techniques, C-10 and C-ll decision making, 1-1 through 1-4 delay, 5-1,6-19 through 6-23, 6-26, A-2, C-14, E-15 abbreviated or accelerated decision-making deliberate attack, 4-27, 4-31, 6-40, C-10 process, 1-3 and 1-4 deliberate decision-making process, 1-1 through deliberate decision-making process (DDMP), 1-1 and 1-3 1-2 decision-making process, 1-6 through 1-8, 3-1, E-13, demilitarization and demobilization, A-5 1-1 through 1-4 demonstration, 3-18, 4-33, C-5, E-15 decision point (DP), 3-27, 5-10, 6-23 departure airfield control group (DACG), G-4 decision support template (DST), 1-6, 3-26 and 3-27, deployment, 2-2 through 2-5, C-12, E-3, E-6. See 6-22, 6-25, C-15,1-4 also PREPO AFLOAT operations, deployment. decisive point, 1-1, 1-6 through 1-9, 5-2, A-13, C-15 depth, 1-6 and 1-7, 2-1 and E-16 deputy commander, 3-5 decontamination, 2-8, 3-7, 3-24, B-6, C-4, C-17 desertion, 8-15 deep operations. See operations, deep. detachment left in contact (DLIC), 6-25, C-14 defense of the brigade support area (base cluster), 6-34 and 6-35 digital nonsecure voice terminal (DNVT), 3-14, H-93 defensive operations, 1-2, 3-22, 5-1 through 5-25, 6-12, 6-18, 6-22, 6-33, B-5, 6-1. digital message device (DMD), C-7 air defense, 5-5 digitized battlefield, 3-20, E-l through E-17 area, 5-2, 5-7 through 5-13 advanced field artillery systems (AFAS) and brigade covering force operation, 5-20 through future armored resupply vehicle, E-10 5-25 air defense platforms, E-10 chemical reconnaissance, 5-6 Army airborne command and control system close, 5-2 (A2C2S), E-13 combat service support (CSS), 5-6 Army battle command system (ABCS), E-l combined arms obstacle integration, 5-15 through through E-3 and 5-20 Army global command and control system command and control, 5-6 (AGCCS), E-2 conducting, 5-7 through 5-15 Army tactical command and control system deep, 5-2 (ATCSS), E-3 execution, 5-12 and 5-13 Army worldwide information system (AWIS), E-3

Index-8 FM 71-3

Avenger, E-10 remote sensor system, E-14 battle command vehicle (BCV), E-13 security operations, E-6, E-17 battlefield automated system (BAS), E-3 service support systems, E-14 battlefield fimctional area (BFA), E-3 support systems, E-14 battlefield fimctional area command and control systems, E-2 systems (BFACS), E-3 tactical operations, E-15 through E-17 Bradley Stinger Fighting Vehicle (BSFV), E-l 1 tactical engagements, E-7 breaching operations, 4-43 tactical vehicle, E-14 capabilities, E-7 target surveillance and attack radar system, characteristics, E-5 E-13 combat service support control system for technological superiority, E-7 echelons above corps (CSSCS-EAC), E-3 unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV), E-13 command and control, E-4 versatile employment, E-9 command and control vehicle (C2V), E-13 wide area munitions (Hornet), E-14 command, control, and communications, E-7 worldwide military command and control communications, E-10 system (WMCCS), E-3 core functions, E-5 through E-7 direct fire. See fire, direct. decisive operations, E-6, E-16 digitally-equipped units, E-4 direct support (DS), 1-3 and 1-4, 2-6 through 2-8, digitally units, E-4 3-6, 3-7 through 3-11, 6-38, 8-1, 8-4, 8-6, 8-8, dismounted soldier, E-ll 8-10, B-5, C-3, C-7 and C-8, C-16 doctrine and training, E-3 and E-4 disaster relief, A-2 enhanced force protector, E-9 Force XXI, E-l through E-17 discipline, 3-6, 3-20 Force XXI battle command-brigade and below disengagements, A-5 (FBCB2), E-3 force modularity, E-8 division artillery (DIVARTY), C-16 force provider system, E-l5 division materiel management center (DMMC), 8-25 forward area air defense (FAAD), E-13 and 8-26 heavy assault bridge system (Wolverine), E-14 indirect fire data system, E-l2 division support area (DSA), 8-4, 8-26 indirect fire platform, E-10 division support command (DISCOM), 3-9, 8-3 influence greater volume of physical space, E-8 through 8-5, 8-9, 8-19, 8-26, B-7 information operations, E-6, E-16 information systems, E-l2 divisional cavalry squadron, 4-18 intelligence system, E-12 doctrine, 1-9 through 1-11, 2-1, B-5 through B-7, introduction, E-2 B-10 and B-l 1, C-13, E-2 through E-5, E-15, F-5 lethality, E-9 line-of-sight antitank (LOSAT), E-10 man-portable antitank system, E-ll missions, E-l5 E mounted combined arms brigade, E-4 through E-15 mounted maneuver platforms, E-9 echelons, 2-2, 2-6, 3-11, 3-21, 6-8, C-3, C-5, E-2 multiple launcher rocket system (MLRS), E-10 and E-3 nuclear, biological, chemical (NBC) electromagnetic signature, 3-11, 3-17, D-3 reconnaissance system (Fox), E-15 obstacle breaching system (Grizzly), E-14 electronic components, E-ll operational maneuver, E-8 electronic countermeasures (ECM), B-10 operations other than war (OOTW), E-6 palletized load system, E-15 electronic security, 3-18 precision movement and maneuver, E-8 electronic warfare (EW), 1-7,1-10, 2-7, 3-6, 3-15, projected deploy and redeploy mounted 3-18, 8-10, E-6, E-12, E-16 combat power, E-5

Index-9 FM 71-3 encircling. See force, encircling. final protective fires (FPF), 6-41, F-9 enemy prisoners of war (EPW), 2-3, 2-9, 3-8, 6-5, finance services, 8-16 and 8-17, H-73 8-5, 8-21, A-2, A-5, H-41 and H-42 fire engagement areas (EA), 4-17, A-6, C-ll, C-15 counterfire, E-13 direct, 1-9, 2-4, 3-20, 6-19, 6-21, 6-47, C-15, D-3, engineers, 2-7, 3-8, 3-13, 6-9, 6-15, B-7, C-8, C-12, E-9, F-8 through F-10 C-17, F-9 flanking, C-8 battalion, 3-8, 4-7, C-17 indirect, 1-9, 2-4, 2-7, 6-11, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21 and brigade, 3-8, 4-7 6-22, 6-25, 6-28, 6-38, 6-41, 6-45, A-12, C-6 commander, 6-12 and C-7, C-10 and C-l 1, C-15, E-10, E-12, officer, 3-8, 4-6 F-8 through F-10 support, 6-12 initial, 3-27 entry operations, 2-2 firepower, 1-8, 4-23, 6-30 and 6-31, C-7, C-14, envelopment, 4-9 through 4-11, C-13 E-5 and E-6, E-10 and E-ll equipment, 3-6, 3-19, 6-5, F-3, F-6 through F-8 fire support (FS), 1-4, 1-8, 1-10, 2-6 and 2-7, 3-6, 3-9 through 3-11, 3-14 through 3-16, 3-19, 3-23, essential elements of fiiendly information (EEFI), 3- 28, 4-5, 4-10 through 4-14, 4-16, 4-18, 4-21, 3-18 4- 45, 5-4 and 5-5, 6-6, 6-8, 6-11, 6-25, 6-28,7-2 estimate, 3-4, 3-7, 8-5,1-3 and 1-4 through 7-7, 8-3, B-6 and B-7, B-10, C-3, C-7, logistics, 1-8 C-10, C-14 and C-15, E-10, E-12, F-9, H-49 of the situation, 1-6, D-6, F-5,1-1 through H-52 . See also battlefield operating system (BOS), fire support (FS). evacuation, 6-5, 6-22, 8-10, 8-12, 8-15, A-2, A-8, battle handover, 6-15 C-17, H-73 through H-75 brigade FSO, 2-7, 3-28 execution, 1-8, 5-22 and 5-23, 6-5 and 6-6, 6-11 and coordination line (FSCL), F-5, F-9 6-12, 6-17 and 6-18, 6-22 and 6-23, 6-25, 6-27, coordination measures (FSCM), 6-24 6-30 through 6-33, 6-45 through 6-47, 8-1, F-2 coordinator (FSCOORD), 2-7, 3-8 through 3-10, and F-3,1-2 3-15, 3-26 and 3-27, 6-5, 6-8, 6-15, 6-28, 6-41, C-7 Executive Officer (XO), 3-5 through 3-9, 3-14, 3-19, element (FSE), 2-7, 3-7, 3-9, 3-13 through 3-15, 3-21, 3-23, 3-26 and 3-27, 6-36, 6-42, 8-17, 8-25, 6-15 C-9, C-15, H-2,1-2,1-4 naval, 3-7, 3-9 exploitation, 4-33 and 4-34, C-5, C-10, C-13 officer (FSO), 2-7 and 2-8, 3-6, 3-9 and 3-10, 3-15, 3-23 and 3-24, 3-26 and 3-27, 4-5, 4-6, 6-8, 6-11, 6-15, 6-17, C-4, C-6, E-13, F-9 personnel, 3-19 F planning, 3-27, 6-5, 6-17, 6-24, 6-41, 6-45, 8-4, B-10 system, 1-8,6-48, B-6, C-3 facilities, 3-19, 5-1 team (FIST), 3-23 and 3-24, 3-27, C-4 family of scatterable mines (FASCAM), 4-6, 4-31 fixed call signs, H-18 through H-21 ADAM, 5-19 fixing force, 5-13 Gator, 5-19 MOPMS, 5-19 flank position, 1-6,6-6, B-l 1 RAAM, 5-19 Fleet Marine Forces, B-l Volcano, 5-19 follow-and-support forces, 6-38 through 6-40, 6-45, feint, 3-18, 4-31 and 4-32, E-15 C-5 field artilleiy (FA), 1-4, 1-10, 2-6, 3-27,6-12, 6-15, follow-on elements, F-ll 6-21, 6-24, 6-26, A-ll, B-5, C-3, C-7, C-12, C-16, F-9 follow-on missions, 2-3

index-10 FM 71-3 follow-on units, 6-4, F-7 forward support battalion (FSB), 2-8 and 2-9, 3-6 through 3-10, 3-15 through 3-17, 3-19, 4-4, 4-7, force 6-9, 6-34, 6-46, 8-2 through 8-4, 8-8 through armored, 6-2, A-13, C-2, C-6, C-10, C-13 8-21, B-5 through B-8, C-8, C-18 assault, 6-39 delaying, 6-19 through 6-21 fragmentary orders (FRAGO), 1-6 and 1-7, 3-27 and diversionary force, 6-31 and 6-32 3-28, 6-6, 6-18, 6-30, F-5,1-2 enemy, 1-10, C-5 fiamework, 2-1 through 2-5, 3-24, D-7, E-l, E-3, encircling, C-5, 6-1 and 6-2, 6-28 and 6-29 E-9. See also defensive operations; offensive entry, 2-2 operations. follow and support, 6-39, C-5 main body, 6-31 fratricide prevention, 1-9,6-6, C-19, E-19, F-l projection, 1-11, 2-1 through 2-3, 5-1 through F-l 1 provider system, E-15 execution phase, F-3 rear guard, 6-32 magnitude of the problem, F-l reserve, 6-31 and 6-32 operation order (OPORD) format, F-6 through rupture, 6-30 through 6-32 F-ll security, 2-3, 3-20, 3-27, 5-2 planning phase, F-2 support, 6-39 preparation phase, F-2 and F-3 reduction measures, F-2, F-5 and F-6 Force XXI, E-l through E-17 risk assessment, F-3 and F-4 Force XXI battle command-brigade and below risk identification and preventive measures, F-2 (FBCB2), E-9 and F-3 formations, 1-7 friendly fire, F-2 box, 4-13 and 4-14 frontal attack, 4-11 column, 4-11,6-15 on line without a reserve, 4-13 fundamentals of brigade operations, 2-1 through 2-9 tactical, 4-18 air defense, 2-7 vee, 4-12 area of operations, 2-4 wedge, 4-14, 6-15 close operations, 2-5 decontamination, 2-8 forward air controller (FAC), 3-7 deep operations, 2-4 and 2-5 forward area air defense (FAAD), 2-7, D-4, E-l3 deployment, 2-2 entry operations, 2-2 forward area signal platoon, B-5 force projection, 2-1 through 2-3 forward arming and refueling point (FARP), 3-8 general, 2-1 intelligence, 2-5 and 2-6 forward defensive force, 5-13 main effort, 2-5 forward edge of the battle area (FEBA), 1-7, 6-14, operations, 2-3 6-16, 6-18, 6-25 predeployment activities, 2-2 rear operations, 2-5 forward entry devices (FED), C-4 reconnaissance, 2-8 forward line of own troops (FLOT), 1-10, 2-5, 5-1, reconnaissance and security, 2-5 6-10, 6-18, 6-22, 8-19, E-13 and E-14 redeployment and reconstitution, 2-3 reserves, 2-5 forward looking infrared radar (FLIR), E-14 stages offeree projection, 2-1 through 2-3 forward observer (FO), 6-41 tactical battlefield framework, 2-3 through 2-5 tactical battlefield organization, 2-4 and 2-5 forward passage of lines. See passage of lines, war termination and postconflict operations, 2-3 forward. future armored resupply vehicle (FARV), E-10 forward security force, 4-15

Index-11 FM 71-3

G helicopters, 1-7, 1-11, 3-27, 5-2,6-5, A-12, E-12 assault, H-53 through H-57 attack, 1-7, 1-11, 3-27, 5-2, A-12, C-12, E-12, H-52 through H-57, H-94 Gl. See Assistant Chief of Staff (Personnel). Blackhawk, E-13 G2. See Assistant Chief of Staff (Intelligence). utility, A-8, E-13 G3. See Assistant Chief of Staff (Operations and high payoff target (HPT), 1-10 Plans). high-value targets (HVT), C-19 general support (GS), 2-6, 2-8, 3-9, 3-19 Hornet, E-14 global command and control system (GCCS), E-2 and E-3 host nation, 2-3, B-ll, C-19 global positioning systems (GPS), 6-48, C-10, E-8, howitzer battery, C-3 F-6 human intelligence (HUMINT), C-18 graphies control measures, 2-4, 6-4, 6-14, F-2 grenade launchers, C-3 grid lines, 3-27 I Grizzly, E-14 ground maneuver, 5-7 and 5-8 identification, friend, or foe (EFF), B-6 ground surveillance radar (GSR), B-5, C-4, C-10 improved conventional munition (ICM), F-5, F-8 guard operations, A-2 through F-10 advance, A-10 through A-13 indirect fire. See fire, indirect. flank, 4-17 and 4-18, 4-22 rear, 4-17 and 4-18, 4-22, A-12 infantry. See battalion light; battalion tank and reserve, A-12 mechanized. screen, 4-17 infantry fighting vehicles (IFV), A-13, H-92 infiltration, 4-10, C-10 and C-ll H information, 2-5 information requests (IR), 2-5 requirements, 2-6 handover. See battle, handover, infrared devices, 6-4 hasty attack, 4-24, 6-40, C-9 infrastructure, A-6, B-ll hasty water crossing, 6-36 initial fire support automation system (IFSAS), C-4 headquarters and headquarters company (HHC), 1-2 initiative, 1-6, 4-1 through 1-5, 3-8 and 3-9 intelligence, 1-10, 2-5, 2-9, 3-6, 3-8, 3-18 and 3-19, headquarters and headquarters detachment (HHD), 3-23 and 3-24, 4-4, 4-31, 4-43 and 4-44, 5-4, 6-8, 8-8, 8-12, B-8 6-11, 6-15, 6-29, 6-41, B-4 and B-5, B-10, C-6, headquarters commandant, 3-9 C-9, C-12, C-15, C-19, D-2, E-l, E-12. See also battlefield operating system (BOS), intelligence. health service support (HSS), 8-2, 8-9, 8-11, H-73 intelligence and electronic warfare (IEW), 1-8, 3-6, heavy assault bridge system (Wolverine), E-14 3-8, 3-11, 3-14, 7-25 through 7-27, B-5 heavy equipment transport (HET), 8-26, B-l 1 Intelligence Officer (S2), 1-3, 1-5, 2-6 through 2-8, heavy/light considerations, A-12 and A-13 3-6, 3-8, 3-13 through 3-16, 3-18, 3-23, 3-25, 3-27, 6-8, 6-39,6-42, A-10, C-15

lndex-12 FM 71-3

K intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB), 1-6 and 1-7, 1-11, 2-6, 4-4 and 4-5, 4-9, 6-15, A-12, C-5, C-15,1-3 key terrain, 5-1, C-2 intent statement, 3-3 and 3-4 kill zone. A-10 kinetic-energy missile (KEM), E-10

J L jamming, 3-17 and 3-18, 5-2, C-13 legal services, 8-5,8-17 Javelin, E-ll liaison officer (LO), 3-7 through 3-9, 3-15, 3-20, joint air attack team (JAAT), 7-10 and 7-11 3- 26, 6-8, 6-25, 6-42, B-6, B-9 and B-10, C-3 and joint and multinational operations, B-l through B-ll C-4, C-8 and C-9, C-13 and C-14, C-17, F-3 air defense, B-6, B-l 1 through F-5 battlefield operating systems, B-5 through B-9 light combat service support, B-7 andB-8, B-ll armored, C-2, C-11 through C-17, A-13 command and control, B-9, B-ll battalion, C-3 through C-ll command relationships, B-l brigade, C-4 fife support, B-6, B-10 and B-l 1 conditions, 6-6 general, B-l, B-9 division, C-4, C-ll, C-14 and C-15, C-17 intelligence, B-5 forces, C-l, C-6, C-15, C-17, H-60 joint environment, B-l infantry, C-l through C-19 joint task forces, B-4 operations, 1-2, C-2, C-ll through C-17 maneuver, B-5 and B-6, B-10 patterns, 6-4 Marine/Army integration, B-4 task force, C-7 mobility and survivability, B-6 and B-7, B-ll unit, C-9 multinational operations, B-9 organization by function, B-10 light and special division interim sensor (LSDIS), organization by nationalities, B-10 4- 5 organization by nationalities and function, B-10 limitations, 1-1 and 1-2, 3-17, C-13, C-18 planning considerations, B-10 responsibilities and roles of the Army service line-of-sight-antitank (LOSAT), E-10 component commander, B-4 lines of communication (LOC), 2-5, 6-4, C-5 subordinate unified commands, B-3 and B-4 task organization, B-4 and B-5 linkup operations, 3-23, 6-1 through 6-8, C-5 and unified and specified commands, B-3 C-6, C-10, H-26 and H-27 actions following linkup, 6-3 joint force, B-l execution, 6-5 and 6-6 joint operation planning and execution system forces, 6-5 and 6-6 (JOPES), E-5 forms, 6-1 through 6-3 general, 6-1 joint operations, 1-10, 2-1, 8-3, B-6 and B-7 linkup of a moving force with a stationary force, joint suppression of enemy air defenses (JSEAD), 6-1 and 6-2 3-7, C-19 linkup of two moving units, 6-2 and 6-3 planning, 6-3 through 6-5 joint surveillance target attack radar system preparation, 6-5 (JSTARS), E-13 points, 6-1 and 6-2, 6-5 and 6-6 joint task force, 1-2, B-3 and B-4, C-18, E-2 lodgments, 2-2, A-6 Judge Advocate General (JAG), 3-6 and 3-7, 3-9

Index-13 FM 71-3

logistic procedures, H-60 planning, B-10 units, 3-24 logistics, 1-7, 3-5, B-3, B-7, E-3. See also estimate; linkup operations. man-portable air defense (MANPAD), 2-7 logistics characteristics, 8-2 and 8-3 man-portable antitank system, E-l 1 logistics package (LOGPAC), 8-14, C-13 and C-14 map boards, 3-21 logistics plan, 4-7, 6-21, 8-5 maps, 3-20,3-23 through 3-27 logistics release points (LRP), 4-21 Marine Air Group (MAG), B-2 logistics support area (LSA), 1-5, 2-9, 6-4, C-13 Marine Aviation Logistics Squadron (MALS), B-2 losses Marine Expeditionary Force, B-l through B-13 administrative, 8-15 Marines, B-l through B-13 battle, 8-15 nonbattle, 8-15 materiel, 3-18, 3-25, 6-5 personnel, 8-15 Materiel Management Center (MMC), B-7 low-altitude hostile aircraft, C-13 mechanized infantry, 6-11, C-2 medical evacuation (MEDEVAC), C-8, D-2, H-73 M through H-75 medical operations, 8-10 through 8-12 M1A2 Abrams, E-l, H-92 medical support, 8-11, A-2 M60 machine guns, C-3 meeting engagement, 6-5, 6-48 M109A6 Paladin, 1-7 military police (MP), 1-3 and 1-4, 3-9, 3-16,6-27, M2 A3 Bradley Fighting Vehicle, E-l 6-34 and 6-35, 6-39 and 6-40, 6-43, 8-6, B-5, M577, 3-10 through 3-13, 3-21, H-92 C-12 combat, 3-9 machine gun, C-3, E-l 1 platoon leader, 3-9 main battle area (MBA), 3-17, 5-1 and 5-2, 6-13, procedures, H-78 8-21 Military Sealift Command (MSC), G-3 main body, 3-21, 4-25, 6-19, 6-26 and 6-27, 6-31 mines, 5-19, A-5, A-8, A-ll, A-13, C-14, C-18 and 6-32, 6-48, A-10 through A-12, D-l, D-6 family of scatterable mines (FASCAM), 5-19 main effort, 1-8, 2-5, 2-9, 3-3 minefield, 6-1,6-11 and 6-12, E-l, E-14, F-5, H-47 through H-49 main supply route (MSR), 2-5, 2-9, 6-5, 6-34, 8-4 procedures, H-46 through 8-8, A-4, A-13, D-3, D-5 missing in action (MIA), 8-15 maintenance, 1-5, 3-6, 5-2, 8-9, B-8, C-4, D-2, D-6 mission analysis, 1-2 maintenance support team (MST), 8-8 and 8-9 mission, enemy, terrain, troops, and time available maneuver, 1-1, 1-8 through 1-10, 2-4 through 2-6, (METT-T), 2-2, 2-8, 3-2, 3-8, 3-24, 6-9, 6-13, 2-9, 3-23, 3-25, 5-2, 6-5, 6-8 and 6-9, 6-13, 6-15, A-13, B-l, C-2, C-10, C-13, D-6 andD-7, F-5,1-3 6-20, 6-23, B-5, B-10, C-6, C-14 and C-15, E-10, F-8 and F-9. See also battlefield operating system mission essential task list (METL), 2-3, A-6, G-6 (BOS), maneuver, mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP), 3-26, defensive, 5-4 8-21 and 8-22, F-7, H-94 and H-95 dismounted, 3-24 forms of, 4-9 through 4-11 mobile defense. See defensive operations, mobile. mounted, 3-23 mobile subscriber equipment (MSE), 2-9, 3-10, 3-17, 3-19, C-12

Index-14 FM 71-3 mobile subscriber radio terminals (MSRT), 3-10 and combat service support, 5-24 3-11, 3-20, C-9, H-35 through H-39, H-93 command and control, 5-24 defensive doctrine, 5-24 and 5-25 mobility and survivability, 1-6, 2-7, 3-22,4-7, 4-46, fire support, 5-24 5- 1, 5-5, 6-15, 6-21 and 6-22, 6-30 and 6-31, intelligence, 5-24 6- 42, B-6, 7-13 through 7-16, B-l 1, C-8, C-l 1, maneuver, 5-24 C-13. See also battlefield operating system mobility and survivability, 5-24 (BOS), mobility and survivability; survivability. offensive doctrine, 4-43 through 4-47 morale, 3-6, 8-5, 8-14 planning and preparation, 5-24 tactical planning considerations, 5-24 mortars, 1-7, C-3, C-7 and C-8, E-l, H-92 night-vision equipment, D-l movement, 6-4, 6-8 and 6-9, 6-13, D-l through D-7 noncombat operations, 2-3 movement and tactical road marches, D-l and D-2 noncombatant evacuation operations, A-2 close column, D-l nuclear, biological, chemical (NBC) support, 2-7, infiltration, D-l 3-8, B-7, C-13, C-l7, E-10, F-5, F-8 march column, D-l and D-2, D-6 contamination, 4-17 march unit, D-2, D-6 decontamination, 2-8, 3-8, 4-7 open column, D-l defense, 5-5 quartering party (advance party), D-2 facilities, organization, and duties, 7-17 and 7-18 reconnaissance party, D-2 operations, 2-8, 3-8,7-18 serial, D-2 planning operations, 3-8 movement control, 6-8 and 6-9 procedures, H-43 through H-45 reconnaissance, 2-8,4-8, 5-6, E-15 movement of forward support battalion within the section organization, 7-16 brigade formation, 8-19 smoke, 2-8, 4-8 movement to contact, 4-16 through 4-23, 6-5, 6-48, A-6, C-5, C-9, C-14 multinational, 2-1, A-3, A-7, B-l through B-l 1 o multiple rocket launchers system (MLRS), A-l 1, E-l, E-10, E-16 observation posts (OP), 3-21, 3-26, 6-11, 6-34, A-8, C-6 obstacles, 5-15 through 5-20, 6-2, 6-11, 6-17 N through 6-20, 6-34, B-7, B-l 1, H-47 through H-49 belts, 5-15, C-8 blocking, 5-17 breaches, 4-38 through 4-43, E-14 national command authority (NCA), E-5 control measures, 5-15 and 5-16 naval gunfire (NGF), 2-6, 3-7, 7-11 through 7-13, directed, 5-16 B-6, B-10, E-12 disrupting, 5-18 fixing, 5-17 naval gimfire liaison officer (NGLO), B-5 groups, 5-16 Navy, B-l integration, 5-15 through 5-20 reserve, 5-19 net control station (NCS), 3-21, H-37 restrictives, 5-16 net radio interface, 3-11 situational, 5-19 tactical, 5-16 through 5-18, 6-12, 6-15 night operations turning, 5-17, 6-8 advantages and disadvantages, 5-24 types, 5-6 air defense, 5-24 zones, 5-15

Index-15 FM 71-3 offensive operations, 1-2, 2-7, 3-21 and 3-22, 4-1 operations other than war (OOTW), 1-1,1-6,1-11, through 4-47, 5-1, 6-1, 6-4, 6-6, 6-18, 6-33, 6-42, 2- 3 and 2-4, 6-6, 8-3, A-l through A-13, E-5 8-21, B-5, D-3 through E-7, E-15,E-17 advance guard, 4-18 armor/light considerations, A-13 attack, 4-24 through 4-33 arms control, A-2 breaching operations, 4-7, 4-38 through 4-43 attacks, and raids, A-2 brigade, 2-8 checkpoint tactics, A-10 and A-l 1 characteristics of, 4-1 and 4-2 combatting terrorism, A-2 covering force, 4-35 through 4-37 conduct of operations, A-9 through A-12 execution, 4-14, 4-21 and 4-22 conflict, A-2 exploitation, 4-33 and 4-34 convoy security, A-ll and A-12 flank and rear security, 4-18 humanitarian assistance, A-2 formations. See movement, formation (offensive). nation assistance, A-2 hasty attack, 4-24 through 4-26 noncombatant evacuation operations, A-2 maneuver, forms of, 4-9 through 4-11 overview, A-l through A-2 movement to contact, 4-16 through 4-23 peace enforcement, A-2, A5 night, 4-43 through 4-44 peace enforcement patrols, A-10 pursuit, 4-34 and 4-35 peacekeeping, A-2, A-4 and A-5 raid, 4-32 peacekeeping patrols, A-9 and A-10 relief in place, 6-6 planning, A-3 and A-4 smoke screen use during, 4-8 security assistance, A-2 tactical planning considerations, 4-15 through show of force, A-2 4- 35, 4-44support for insurgencies and counter insurgencies, techniques, C-9 and C-10 A-2 visibility, 4-8 support to counterdrug operations, A-2 support to domestic civil authorities, A-2 officer in charge (OIC), 3-6 training, A-6 through A-8 one-third/two-thirds rule, F-4 operations security (OPSEC), 1-9, 3-17 and 3-18, operation order (OPORD), 3-9, 3-23, 3-26 and 3-27, 3- 20 and 3-21,6-8, C-9, D-2, E-6, E-9, E-12 C-9, F-5 through F-ll, H-l, H-4 through H-7,1-3 orders, 3-4, H-4 through H-7, 1-2 operation plan (OPLAN), 1-5, 2-2, F-8, H-l other tactical operations, 6-1 through 6-48 operational control (OPCON), 2-8, 3-9, 3-16, 3-21, actions following linkup, 6-3 6-7 and 6-8, 6-11, 6-33 and 6-34, 8-1 and 8-2, actions upon encirclement, 6-28 and 6-29 B-3, C-2, C-l 1 through C-13, H-l advance from the exit bank, 6-44,6-46 advance to the river, 6-44 operations, 2-3, 3-20 approach march, 6-48 close, 1-5, 1-7, 2-5, 3-10, 3-14 and 3-15, 3-19, assault crossing of the river, 6-44 5- 2, 6-33, C-2 assault forces, 6-39 deep, 1-5, 1-7, 1-10, 2-4 and 2-5, 3-14 and 3-15, assisted withdrawal, 6-23 and 6-24 5-2, 6-33, C-2 base defense operations, 6-34 rear, 1-5, 2-4 and 2-5, 3-5, 3-12, 3-14, 5-1 and battle handover, 6-18 and 6-19 5-2, 6-33 through 6-36. See also rear breakout from encirclement, 6-27 through 6-33 operations, brigade support area/base cluster defense security, 1-9 considerations, 6-35 and 6-36 support, 3-16 combat service support, 6-32, 6-47 tactical, 1-1, E-3, E-7 combat service support sustains the attack, 6-47 operations and intelligence (OI), 3-11, 3-14 command actions, 6-28 command and control, 6-32 and 6-33 Operations and Training Officer (S3), 1-3, 1-5, 2-6 defense of the brigade support area (base cluster), through 2-9, 3-6, 3-8, 3-10, 3-13 through 3-15, 6-34 and 6-35 3-18 and 3-19, 3-21 through 3-28, 6-6,6-8, 6-14 delay, 6-19 through 6-23 through 6-17, 6-30 through 6-33, 6-42, 8-6, 8-25, diversionary force, 6-31 and 6-32 C-6 through C-8, C-15, D-l

Index-16 FM 71-3

exchange of plans and liaison personnel, 6-7 lanes, 6-15, 6-17, 6-24 execution, 6-5 and 6-6, 6-17 and 6-18,6-22 and planning, 6-14 through 6-16 6-23, 6-25, 6-27, 6-30 through 6-33, 6^5 preparation, 6-16 and 6-17 through 6-47 rearward, 3-17,6-13 and 6-14, 6-16 and 6-17, follow-and-support forces, 6-39 6-25 forces, 6-30, 6-38 passage point (PP), 3-21, 6-4, 6-17, 6-24 forms of linkup, 6-1 general, 6-1, 6-6, 6-13, 6-19,6-27, 6-33, 6-36 passing unit, 6-19 linkup force, 6-2 patrol, A-2, A-6 through A-10, C-6, D-4 linkup of a moving force with a stationary force, 6-1 and 6-2 peace enforcement, 6-6, A-l and A-2, A-5 through linkup of two moving units, 6-2 A-9 linkup operations, 6-2 through 6-6 peacekeeping, 6-6, A-l through A-ll, E-2 main body, 6-31 movement control, 6-8 and 6-9 peace operations, A-4 objectives, 6-38 penetration, 4-11, C-5 passage of command, 6-7, H-29 passage of lines, 6-13 through 6-19, H-28 through personal staff, 3-5 and 3-6 H-30 command sergeant major, 3-5 and 3-6 rear guard, 6-32 deputy commander, 3-5 rear operations, 6-33 through 6-36 executive officer (XO), 3-5 reconnaissance, 6-7 and 6-8 relief in place, 6-6 through 6-12 personnel, 3-6, 3-18, H-71 reserve force, 6-31 Personnel and Administrative Center (PAC), 8-16, retirement, 6-26 8-26 retrograde operations, 6-19 through 6-26 river crossing, 6-36 through 6-47 personnel daily summary reports, 8-15, H-100 rupture force, 6-30 personnel service support (PSS), 8-2, 8-5, 8-12 seeming the bridgehead, 6-36 through 6-39, 6-44 through 8-17 and 6-45 administrative accounting, 8-15 security, 6-8 administrative services, 8-16 and 8-17 sequence of relief, 6-7 casualty reporting, 8-15 stationary force, 6-2 chaplain activities, 8-16 support forces, 6-39 finance services, 8-16 and 8-17 types of attacks, 6-40 health services, 8-15 unassisted withdrawal, 6-24 legal services, 8-17 withdrawal, 6-23 through 6-25 personnel losses, 8-15 postal services, 8-16 replacement operations, 8-15 P sustainment personnel services, 8-16 personnel support procedures, H-71 through H-77 petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL), 6-17, 8-21, Pacific Commands, B-l B-7, C-8 Paladin/Crusader artillery, E-l phase line (PL), 3-25, 6-13 through 6-16, 6-23, 6-25, palletized load system, E-l5 6-32 passage of lines, 3-18, 6-1,6-4, 6-13 through 6-19, planning, 3-1, 3-19 and 3-20, 6-11, A-2 through 6-24 through 6-26 A-4, 5-20 through 5-22, 6-3 through 6-10,6-14 battle handover, 6-18 and 6-19 through 6-16, 6-19 through 6-21, 6-24, 6-26, 6-36, execution, 6-17 and 6-18 6-39 through 6-43, 8-1, A-3 and A-4, C-5 through forward, 3-18, 6-13 through 6-15,6-17, D-3 C-9, C-14 through C-17 general, 6-13 air defense, B-ll, C-7, C-16

Index-17 FM 71-3

combat service support (CSS), 8-17, B-ll, C-8 and Q C-9, C-17 command and control, C-9, C-17 quartering party, 3-21,6-17, D-2, D-6 engineer, 3-8 quick reaction force, A-2 fire support (FS), B-10, C-6 and C-7, C-15 and C-16 intelligence, B-10, C-5, C-15 maneuver, B-10, C-6, C-15 mobility and survivability, B-l 1, C-8, C-16 and R C-17 nuclear, biological, chemical (NBC), C-17 process, 3-6, 3-20 radar, 3-17 position navigation (POSNAV), E-8 and E-9, F-6 radio, 3-18 and 3-19, 3-23, 6-2, 6-4, C-3, C-13 postconflict operations, 1-11, 2-3, E-6, E-15 radio electronic combat, C-13 postal services, 8-5, 8-16, H-72 radio interface unit, E-9 predeployment, 2-2 radio nets, 2-6, 6-2, 6-11 and 6-12 PREPO AFLOAT operations raid, 4-32, A-2, C-14, C-18, E-15 accountability procedures, G-10 capabilities, G-l readiness condition (REDCON), H-18 command organizations, G-3 through G-5 rear area security, 1-7, 2-9, 4-18, 6-1, C-5 deployment, G-3 through G-l3 by air, G-3 rear operations, 1-5,2-4 and 2-5, 3-5, 3-12, 3-14, by sea, G-4 5- 1 and 5-2, 6-33 through 6-36, C-2 concept of operations, G-l4 base defense operations, 6-34 force projection, G-6 through G-8 brigade support area/base cluster defense limitations, G-2 considerations, 6-35 and 6-36 logistics support, G-9 defense of the brigade support area (base clutter), N-hour sequence, G-l9 through G-28 6-34 and 6-35 onward movement, G-10 through G-13 general, 6-33 and 6-34 motor transport, G-13 reconnaissance, 1-9, 2-8, 3-8, 3-28, 4-14 through port operations, G-ll and G-l2 4-17, 5-2, 6-7 and 6-8, 6-12, 6-20, 6-24, 6-34, redeployment, G13 and G-14 6- 42, 6-45, A-l 1 and A-12, B-5, C-5 and C-6, role of armored brigade, G-2 and G-3 C-14, C-19, D-2, D-6, E-5 support organizations, G-4 and G-5 Theater reception, G-8 and G-9 reconnaissance and security, 1-7, 1-10,2-5, 4-25 reconnaissance and surveillance (R&S), 2-6, 3-24 priority intelligence requirement (PIR), 1-6, 2-6, 3-8, through 3-26, 4-18, A-2, C-6, C-15, C-18 and C-15 C-19, E-6, E-13 provost marshal (PM). 3-7 reconstitution, 2-3, 2-8, 8-23 and 8-24 psychological operations (PSYOP), 3-15, C-2, C-19, regeneration, 8-24 E-16, H-77 reorganization, 8-23 and 8-24 public affairs officer (PAO), 3-6 and 3-7, 3-9, 3-16, redeployment, 2-1, 2-3, E-2. See also PREPO 8-5 AFLOAT operations, redeployment. pursuit, 4-34 and 4-35, C-5, C-10, C-13 refugees, 3-8, 8-7 push system, 8-13 regeneration, 8-24

Index-18 FM 71-3 rehearsals, 1-8, 3-20, 3-22 through 3-28,6-16, 6-21 retrograde operations, 1-2, 4-9, 6-19 through 6-27, and 6-22, 6-44, and C-16, D-2, F-2 through F-5, 8-22, C-5, C-ll F-10 assisted withdrawal, 6-23 application, 3-25 delay, 6-19 through 6-23 brigade, 3-23 through 3-28 execution, 6-22 and 6-23, 6-25, 6-27 conduct of, 1-8, 3-26 through 3-28 general, 6-19 full dress, 3-22 planning, 6-19 through 6-21, 6-24, 6-26 lull scale, 3-24 preparation, 6-21 and 6-22, 6-24 through 6-27 general, 3-22 unassisted withdrawal, 6-24 key leader, 3-22 risk assessment, 1-4 map, 3-23 passage, 6-17 river crossings, 6-36 through 6-47 personnel preparation, 3-24 and 3-25 advance from the exit bank, 6-44, 6-46 and 6-47 radio, 3-23 advance to the river, 6-44 site selection, 3-24 assault crossing of the river, 6-44 sketch, 3-23 assault forces, 6-39 special, 3-24 combat service support sustains, 6-47 start time, 3-26 execution, 6-45, 6-47 terrain model, 3-23 through 3-28 follow-and-support forces, 6-39 types, 3-22 through 3-24 forces, 6-38 general, 6-36 release point (RP), 6-9, 6-13, 6-37, 6-41 and 6-42, objectives, 6-38 6-44, 6-47, D-6 planning, 6-39 through 6-43 relief in place, 2-3, 6-6 through 6-12, A-6, H-27 preparation, 6-43 through 6-45 securing the bridgehead, 6-36 and 6-37, 6-44 and relief operations, A-2, D-2 6-45 conduct of, 6-11 support forces, 6-39 exchange of plans and liaison personnel, 6-7 types of attacks, 6-40 execution, 6-11 and 6-12 general, 6-6 roadblocks, A-2 movement control, 6-8 and 6-9 route of advance, C-9 planning, 6-7 preparation, 6-10 and 6-11 rules of engagement (ROE), 2-3, A-3, A-6 and A-7, reconnaissance, 6-7 and 6-8 A-10 and A-l 1, F-4 and F-5, H-3 security, 6-8 sequence of relief, 6-7,6-10 remote antiarmor mine system (RAAMS), 6-41 remotely employed sensor (REMS), C-4 s reorganization, 8-23 deliberate, 8-24 immediate, 8-23 51. See Adjutant. reports. See tactical standing operating procedures 52. See Intelligence Officer. (TSOP), reports. 53. See Operations and Training Officer. reserve, 1-6, 2-5, 3-20, 3-27 and 3-28, 5-1 and 5-2, S3 Air, 3-15 5-9, 5-11, 6-12, 6-22 and 6-23, 6-28, C-14, D-3, D-5 54. See Supply Officer. reserve force, 5-14 55. See Civil Affairs Officer. restricted fire lines (RFL), 6-3, 6-6, F-5 scheme of maneuver, 3-8, 6-4, 6-15,6-40 and 6-41, 8-4, B-6, C-9 resupply. See supply, resupply, seaport of debarkation (SPOD), G-10 retransmission, 2-9, 4-8 .

Index-19 i FM 71-3

seaport of embarkation (SPOE), G-10 special forces, C-2 search patterns, A-ll, A-13 special operations force (SOF), 1-2, C-l through security, 1-9, 2-9, 6-8, 6-24, 6-35, 8-5, 8-12, A-13, C-19, E-3, E-16 C-13, C-18, D-4, D-6, H-4, H-39 through H-43. special staff, 3-7, 3-15, 3-26 See also force; operations, air defense officer (ADO), 3-7 area, 5-1 air liaison officer (ALO), 3-7 assistance, A-2 air naval gunfire liaison officer (ANGLICO), 3-7 brigade support, 3-26 Army aviation liaison officer, 3-7 and 3-8 convoy, A-8 brigade engineer, 3-8 during offensive operations, 4-35 through 4-37 chaplain, 3-8 element, 3-22, 6-1 chemical officer, 3-8 flank, 4-18 direct support military intelligence company forces, 3-20, 3-27, 4-18, 5-2, 6-24 commander, 3-8 measures, 6-8 fire support coordinator (FSCOORD), 3-8 and 3-9 missions, C-13 forward support battalion (FSB) commander, 3-9 operations, 1-2, 1-7, E-15, E-17 headquarters and headquarters company (HHC) passive, 3-20 commandant, 3-9 rear, 4-18, C-5 military police platoon leader, 3-9 separate armor brigade, 1-4, 3-5 through 3-10, 3-15, signal officer (SO), 3-9 and 3-10 8-3 surgeon, 3-10 sergeant major (SGM), 3-21, 3-25 spoiling attacks, 5-11 show of force, A-2 spot report (SPOTREP). See tactical standing operating procedures (TSOP), reports. signal officer (SO), 3-7, 3-9 and 3-10, 3-19, 3-21, H-35 through H-39 staff, 3-2, 3-4 and 3-5, 3-7, 3-10, 3-18, 3-23, 3-27, C-12, E-2, F-10,1-1 through 1-4 signal operation instructions (SOI), C-9, C-17, F-ll command and staff communications, 3-4 and 3-5 signals, 3-10, 3-21, 6-4, 6-6, F-10 and F-ll coordination, 3-5, 3-26 procedures, H-35 through H-39 functions, 3-4 recognition, 3-21, 6-19 officer, 3-4 and 3-5, 3-26 units, 3-10 primary, 3-24 relationship with subordinate commands, 3-4 signals intelligence (SIGINT), B-5 responsibility and authority, 3-4 signals security (SIGSEC), 3-17 and 3-18 special, 3-7, 3-26, 4-7 situation map (SITMAP), 3-16, 3-20, 3-25 Standardization Agreement (STANAG), 2-8, H-2 situation report (SITREP), F-5, H-79 standard theater Army command and control system (STACCS), E-3 situation template, 3-27 standing operating procedure (SOP), 1-7, 2-8, 3-2 sketch map, 3-23 and 3-3, 3-9, 3-22, 3-26, 6-32, 6-42, 8-16, 8-25, small emplacement excavators (SEE), C-ll, H-93 B-9, C-9, C-15, D-6, F-3 through F-5, F-8,1-3 smoke. See also defensive operations, limited, start point (SP), 6-9, 6-13 and 6-24,6-16, D-6 visibility, start time, 2-8, 3-28 colored, 6-4 deception, 6-14 stationary force, 6-1 through 6-3, 6-17 and 6-18 generated, 2-8 stationary unit, 6-4,6-19 mission, 2-8 mortar, 2-8 stay-behind forces, C-5 and C-6 operations, 2-8, 7-19 and 7-20 Stinger, B-6, C-4, C-7, C-16, E-l 1 pots, 2-8, A-12 units, 2-8 striking force, 5-13 and 5-14

Index-20 FM 71-3 strongpoint, 5-9,6-28, C-5, C-10 and C-ll tactical battlefield, 1-5, 2-1 through 2-5 supply, 3-6, 6-5, 6-9, 6-26, 8-6, 8-12 through 8-14, tactical command post (TAC CP). See command C-8, D-2, H-62 through H-67 post, tactical (TAC CP). classes, 1-2, 6-5, 6-9, 6-12, 6-47, 8-12 through 8-14, 8-19, 8-21, B-7, C-8, C-13 and C-14, H-63 tactical logistical functions, 8-2 through H-67 tactical missile system (TACMS), E-10 operations, 8-12 and 8-13 push system, 8-13 tactical obstacles, 6-12, 6-15 resupply, 6-4, D-2, D-6 tactical operations center (TOC), 3-6, 3-9, 3-13, supply point and unit distribution, 8-13 and 8-14 3-19, 3-24, 6-8 and 6-9, 6-17, 6-34, 6-42, 8-21, throughput distribution, 8-13 A-8, D-3, D-6 supply and transport (S&T), 1-3 and 1-4 tactical plan, 3-22, 4-7, 8-21, D-7 Supply Officer (S4), 1-5, 2-7 and 2-9, 3-6 through tactical road movement, H-21 through H-24 3-9, 3-16, 6-5, 6-8, 6-42, 8-3 through 8-6, 8-17, 8-19, 8-25, C-8 and C-9 tactical satellite (TACSAT), C-9, H-35 support from brigade support area/displace as an tactical standing operating procedure (TSOP), E-4 entity, 8-20 and E-5, 6-18 and 6-19, H-l through H-121 air defense artillery procedures, H-30 through support for retrograde operations, 8-22 H-33 supporting arms liaison team (SALT), B-5 and B-6 alternate command posts, H-3 application/scope, H-l supporting the defense, 8-21 and 8-22 Army airspace command and control operating supporting the offense, 8-20 and 8-21 procedures, H-33 and H-34 Army aviation procedures, H-52 through H-57 suppression of enemy air defenses (SEAD), C-6, F-9 assembly area occupation, H-24 surface-to-air missile, E-10 attachment and detachment procedures, H-57 through H-60 surgeon, 3-6, 3-10, 3-16 battle command procedures, H-2 through H-8 surveillance, 1-8, 6-34, A-2, B-5, D-4, E-ll, E-14 blue reports (operations), H-83 through H-86 civil-military operations, H-78 surveillance, reconnaissance, and intelligence group command post shift cycles, H-4 (SRIG), B-2 control methods and procedures, H-8 through survivability, 1-6, 3-20, 6-42, 6-46, C-8, C-17, E-l, H-21 E-5, E-9 through E-12. See also mobility and directed supporting documents, H-2 survivability. displacement operations, H-4 engineer procedures, H-45 through H-49 synchronization, 1-6 through 1-8, 1-10, 2-1, 3-2, fire support, H-49 through H-52 3-5, 3-26 and 3-27, 5-2, 6-36, 8-4, A-13, C-7, general, H-l and H-2 C-10 and C-ll, C-14, E-16, F-6 green reports (intelligence), H-86 through H-89 intelligence and security procedures, H-3 9 through H-43 T light forces integration procedures and responsibilities, H-60 logistic procedures, H-60 through H-71 military police procedures, H-78 table of organization and equipment (TOE), 3-7, nuclear, biological, chemical procedures, H-43 8-20, B-8, C-3, C-ll through H-45 tactical air (TACAIR), 3-7, 6-26, 6-39, E-13 orders and plans, H-4 other tactical operating procedures, H-26 through tactical air control party (TACP), 3-7, 3-10, B-5 H-30 Tactical Army Combat Service Support Computer personnel support procedures, H-71 through H-77 System (TACCS), 3-17, 8-14 propency, H-2

Index-21

i FM 71-3

purpose, H-l succession of command, H-2 red reports (personnel), H-100 and H-101 tactical road movement, H-21 through H-24 reports, H-79 through H-121 task organization, H-8 aerial resupply request, H-101 and 102 yellow reports (logistics), H-90 and H-91 ammunition request, H-94 through H-98 target, 2-8, E-8, F-3 as required reports, H-101 through 121 bridge report (BRIDGEREP), H-102 target area of interest (TAI), 6-22 closing report (CROSSREP), H-103 target reference point (TRP), C-15 commander’s situation report (SITREP), H-85 and H-86 target surveillance and attack radar system, E-13 effective downwind message, H-l 18 and H-l 19 target value analysis (TVA), 3-15, 4-5 EPW or captured materiel report, H-108 and H-109 task, 1-7, 1-10, 2-2, 5-2, C-12 equipment status report (STATREP), H-91 task force (TF), 2-2, 3-9, 3-28, 6-10 and 6-11,6-22, through H-94 6-30, B-5, C-7 ford, ferry, or other CROSSREP, 103 and 104 air-ground, B-l, B-5, B-6 intelligence summary (INTSUM), H-86 through commander's, 3-12, 3-27,6-30, B-4 H-88 logistics spot report (SPOTREP), H-90 templates, 3-24, 3-27,1-4 matrix, H-79 through H-82 event, 3-24, 3-27, 6-22,1-4 medical evacuation report, H-104 and H-l05 situational, 3-27, 4-21 MUI report, H-105 and H-106 terrain, 2-9, 3-17, 3-20, 3-22, 3-25, 5-1, 6-1, 6-8, minefield report, H-106 and H-107 6-14 through 6-16, 6-18 through 6-20, 6-22, 6-37 NBC 1 Observer’s initial report, H-l 13 and and 6-38, 8-5, 8-15, 8-21, A-8, A-ll, C-l, C-5 H-l 14 and C-6, C-9, C-ll, C-13, C-15, E-l, E-8, F-7,1-3 NBC 2 Evaluated data report, H-l 14 and H-l 15 and 1-4 NBC 3 Immediate warning of expected board, 3-27 contamination, H-l 15 and H-l 16 key, 4-15, 4-17 NBC 4 Report of radiation dose-rate model, 3-23 through 3-28 measurement, H-l 16 NBC 5 Report of areas of contamination, H-l 16 terrain index reference system (TIRS), H-l2 and and H-l 17 H-13 NBC 6 Detailed information of chemical or terrain model kit, 3-25 security, H-l 17 and H-l 18 NUCWARN message, H-l 19 and H-120 terrorists, 1-11, A-8 patrol report, H-107 and H-108 theater of operations, 2-2, B-7, E-3, E-7 periodic intelligence report (PERINTREP), H-88 personnel battle loss report, H-100 and H-101 thermal sights, A-13, C-10, E-ll, F-l personnel daily summary, H-99 and H-100 thermal viewer, E-10 POL request, H-98 and H-99 ration request, H-109 throughput distribution, 8-13 route reconnaissance report, H-l 10 time distance (TDIS), 1-11, 3-2, 6-21 and 6-22 sensitive item report (SENSREP), H-l 10 and H-l 11 timeline, 3-26, C-9 severe weather warning report, time-phased force and deployment data (TPFDD), (SVRWXWARN), H-l 11 and H-l 12 E-5 shell report (SHELREP), H-l 12 splash report, H-l 13 time-phased force development logistics (TPFDL), spot report (SPOTREP), H-83 through H-85 E-5 weather forecast report (WXFCST), H-88 and traffic control, 6-5, 6-8 H-89 security, H-4 traffic control point (TCP), 6-24 signal procedures, H-35 through H-39 transportation, 6-4 and 6-5,6-8, H-68 and H-69 standing operating procedures, H-8 through H-l 1

Index-22 V "

FM 71-3

troop-leading procedures (TLP), 3-24, D-7,1-1 Wolverine, E-14 tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided missile worldwide military command and control system (TOW), C-3, H-93 (WWMCCS), E-3 wounded in action (WIA), 8-15 u

unit maintenance collection point (UMCP), 2-8, 6-16, 6-21,6-27, 6-46, 8-9 X unit ministry team (UMT), 1-3, 1-5, 3-8, 8-11, 8-16 United Nations, A-2 through A-9, A-13 XO. See executive officer. United States Commander-in-Chief Transportation Command (USCINCTRANS), G-3, G-8 United States Transportation Command, (USTRANSCOM), G-3 and G-4 z unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV), E-l, E-13

zone of action, 6-6 zone of attack, 3-22 zones, 6-14, C-6 and C-7

versatility, 1-6 visibility, limited, 6-7 and 6-8, 6-30, 8-23, C-6, C-10, E-13 and E-14 w

war termination, 2-3 weapon systems replacement operations (WSRO) 8-24 through 8-26, H-61 and H-62 brigade management, 8-25 division management, 8-26 general, 8-24 issuing weapon systems, 8-26 weapon system management, 8-25 weather conditions, 1-6, 3-20, 3-22 and 3-23, 6-6, E-ll, E-13 and E-14, F-l, F-7,1-3 and 1-4 wide area munition, E-l withdrawal, 6-23 through 6-25, 8-22, A-2, A-5, C-14, D-2. See also retrograde operations, assisted, 6-23 and 6-24 unassisted, 6-24

Index-23 k K FM 71-3 8 JANUARY 1996

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

DENNIS J. REIMER General, United States Army Official: / Chief of Staff

(/WONNE M. HARRISON Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 01092

DISTRIBUTION:

Active Army, USAR, and ARNG: To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-11E requirements for FM 71-3, The Armored and Mechanized Infantry Brigade (Qty rqr block No. 0507)

☆ U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1986 728-027/40072 r

i J 3000021072 V 'Tí

Ps V

\ / / ♦

o = o = o¿ 0 ■ sn=> I o= =□ > PO - íZ : -mí Z 01 >1 = IV>i

X ■

f i r

PIN:664019-000

H* Fin 3-7B 3, JM, ~7Vw&lt;^Rq

H* Fin 3-7B 3, JM, ~7Vw<^Rq